15,049 statistics about digital marketing (SEO, PPC, Social Media)

I think that this is probably the largest collection of statistics about digital marketing – including SEO, social media, and PPC – that has ever been collected on the internet. I have wanted to do this for a long time!

Contact Us

How did I do it? I used the excellent content explorer feature from Ahrefs, and used a complicated search command that found articles that had both “statistics”/”stats” in the title, as well as one of several words that included things like “PPC”, “SEO”, “Twitter”, “TikTok” and so on. But that was the easy part. Our resident tech expert, Trishin, then pulled out sentence data from each of these posts that included a percentage character within each sentence. I am sure that there were many thousands of stats that we left behind, but what was pulled out was more than enough to work with.

Following exporting this data, I then spent many hours using various regex commands to remove bad entities that were either too short, too long, had HTML errors, among various other things that I had to cut out. I removed around a third of the original data before settling on this list below. As well as these data tweaks, I also had to remove duplicate links to the same url which sounds a lot easier than it was to do, strangely. I removed statistics blog posts from before 2020, as some of that data would probably not be so useful.

In the list below, you will see a link to each blog post from where statistics were extracted. Each statistic underneath a link is from the same post. So each time you see a link, this means that this data is from a different post than the line above it.

So, enjoy perhaps the largest amount of digital marketing statistics that you ever did see:

• No results found.
• The importance of social media marketing:7 stats that prove social’s role in business success: According to The 2023 Sprout Social Index™, 68% of consumers follow brands on social to stay informed about new products or services.
• 50+ Must-know social media marketing statistics for 2024: TikTok is the fastest-growing platform with a staggering 100% user growth rate between 2020 and 2022.
• And between Q3 2022 and Q3 2023, TikTok’s monthly active users grew 13%.
• 1% of total Instagram users worldwide are between the ages 18-34, and mostly identify as male.
• In 2023, 43% of marketers plan to increase their investment in Instagram.
• 60% of worldwide users are between ages 25 and 34 years old, far exceeding any other age group.
• 80% of weekly users have found a new brand or product on the platform.
• TikTok’s user base skews female, with 48% of users identifying as women (based on available gender data.
• 7% of TikTok users are 18-24 years old and account for the largest share of TikTok’s advertising audience.
• 53% of X users use the platform to get the latest news.
• More than half (63%) of X users are men (based on available gender data).
• 33% of users plan to spend less time on X in 2024.
• Nearly 90% of all visits to YouTube come from a mobile device.
• 44% of people prefer to learn about a new product or service via short video content.
• 87% of marketers say video marketing has directly increased sales.
• 1% of marketers believe TikTok offers the highest ROI to influencer marketers for short-form video content, followed by 29.
• 69% of marketers use TikTok for influencer marketing, making it the most popular influencer marketing channel.
• 60% of marketers plan to spend more on influencer marketing campaigns in 2024.
• 63% of marketers plan to use AI in launching their influencer campaigns.
• 9% of internet users purchase a product using their mobile devices at least once a week.
• 2024 Marketing Statistics, Trends & Data — The Ultimate List of Digital Marketing Stats: Nearly two out of three marketers report that their average landing page conversion rate is less than 10% (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• The average website has a bounce rate of 37% and an SEO click-through rate of 13% (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• 70% of marketers believe that A/B testing is essential to boost conversion rates (ZipDo Essential A/B Testing Statistics, 2023).
• The average conversion rate across all e-commerce sites is under 2% (Statista, 2023).
• Mobile Search Younger users prefer mobile search to desktop, with 80% of Gen Z and 62% of millennials reporting primarily using mobile search (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• Google accounts for over 95% of global mobile search market share (StatCounter, 2023).
• Organic Search 75% of marketers believe that AI-enabled search engines will positively impact their blogs, and 68% predict that their site will get more traffic.
• Only 9% believe this will harm blog traffic (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• 39% of marketers list optimizing on-page content based on keywords as their top SEO strategy (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• 80% of Gen Z, 62% of millennials, 66% of Gen X, 35% of Boomers, and 52% of the general population primarily use mobile search (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• 29% of marketers list SEO as a top trend they leverage (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• Voice Search 13% of marketers are leveraging voice search optimization (Alexa, Siri, etc.
• About 90% of people think voice search is easier and faster than traditional search (TechReport, 2023).
• E-commerce Smartphones account for over 70% of retail website visits worldwide (Statista, 2023).
• E-commerce accounts for over 20% of all global retail sales (Statista, 2023).
• Companies with blogs produce an average of 67% more leads per month than companies that don’t have active blogs (DemandMetric).
• 43% of content marketers report using AI to help them generate ideas (43%), but just 3% use it to write entire articles (Orbit Media, 2023).
• The average blog post length is 1,427 words — more than 70% longer than ten years ago (Orbit Media, 2023).
• Only 3% of brands regularly publish blog posts longer than 2,000 words (Orbit Media, 2023).
• (HubSpot Marketing Trends Report, 2024) 91% of businesses use video as a marketing tool in 2023.
• (Wyzowl, 2023) 42% of video marketers say they spend between $0 and $500 on an average video.
• 8% of marketing videos average less than 10,000 views, 16% average under 1,000 views, and 16% average over 100,000 views (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• 60% of video marketers list engagement rate as a top KPI, followed by conversion rate (56%) and click-through rate (52%) (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• 96% of marketers agree that the optimal length of a marketing video is under 10 minutes.
• 36% of video marketers believe that the optimal length for a marketing video is between one and three minutes, 27% say the optimal length is four to six minutes, and 15% say it’s seven to nine (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2024) Over 41% of marketers measure the success of their content marketing strategy through sales.
• (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2024) 50% of marketers plan on increasing their investment in content marketing in 2024.
• 48% of social media marketers share similar or repurposed content across platforms with minor moderations or adaptations.
• In comparison, 34% make unique content from scratch for each platform, and 17% share the same content across platforms (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• 13% of marketing leaders report that content strategy is their top challenge (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• Audio 25% of marketers leverage podcasts or other audio content as part of their content strategy.
• (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2024) 47% of marketers who leverage audio content and podcasts plan to invest more budget in 2024.
• (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2024) Only 3% of marketers say they’ve used audio chat rooms like Clubhouse in their marketing role.
• 86% of consumers recall podcast ads more than any other channel (Basis Technologies, 2023).
• 53% of people who own a smart speaker and have heard an ad on their device say they will likely respond to it (Basis Technologies, 2023).
• 61% of audio listeners pay attention to audio ads (compared to just 19% of TV watchers who actively watch TV ads) (Basis Technologies, 2023).
• 86% of consumers recall podcast ads more than any other channel (Basis Technologies, 2023).
• 53% of people who own a smart speaker and have heard an ad on their device say they will likely respond to it (Basis Technologies, 2023).
• 61% of audio listeners pay attention to audio ads (compared to just 19% of TV watchers who actively watch TV ads) (Basis Technologies, 2023).
• Instagram posts generate 23% more engagement than Facebook, even though Facebook has twice as many monthly users (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• In 2023, 22% of Instagram users watched branded content Stories from a company, business, or brand more than once a week, and 36% liked, commented, or shared branded Stories (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• 66% of marketers reported that they would keep their brand on X in 2023, but 71% said they spent less time working on the platform in 2023 than in previous years, and 67% planned to invest in X alternatives (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• 40% of B2B marketers list LinkedIn as the most effective channel for driving high-quality leads (Sprout Social, 2023).
• 89% of B2B marketers use LinkedIn for lead generation, and 62% say it produces leads for them effectively (Sprout Social, 2023).
• 85% of Pinterest’s weekly users have purchased the platform (Pinterest, 2023).
• Social Media Management 90% of social media marketers say building an active online community is crucial to a successful social media strategy (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• 80% of social media marketers believe consumers will buy products directly in social apps more often than on brands’ websites or third-party websites like Amazon (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• 66% of social media marketers report that funny content is the most effective for their brand, followed by relatable content (63%) and trendy content (59%) (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• Visual Content 26% of marketers are already using infographics while 15% plan to leverage it for the first time in 2024.
• 21% of marketers list using visual content to boost dwell time as a top SEO marketing strategy (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• Infographics are 30 times more likely to be read than a written article, and they can increase website traffic by up to 12% (DemandSage, 2023).
• 55% of marketers create social media infographics more than any other visual media (DemandSage, 2023).
• 43% of marketers say that creating consistently high-quality visual content is one of the biggest hurdles they face (DemandSage, 2023).
• (Business of Apps, 2023) About 60% of the world’s population uses social media (DataReportal, 2023).
• More than 90% of working professionals aged 16 to 24 use social media for work-related communication, while less than two-thirds of professionals aged 55 to 64 report using social media at work (DataReportal, 2023).
• More than one in three video marketers say that the optimal video is just one to three minutes long, and 96% agree that videos should be less than 10 minutes long (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• 73% of consumers prefer to watch a short-form video to learn about a product or service (The Leap, 2023).
• Product Video 96% of marketers agree that videos have helped increase users’ understanding of their product or service (HubSpot State of Video Marketing Report, 2023).
• 40% of marketers report that the biggest benefit of creating video content is to help their customers understand its products and services (HubSpot State of Video Marketing Report, 2023).
• 96% of people say they watch explainer videos to learn more about a product, and 89% report having been swayed to purchase (HubSpot State of Video Marketing Report, 2023).
• Around 51% of consumers rely on product videos to make an educated purchase decision (Plainly, 2023).
• Social Video 71% of videos created by companies are made for use on social media (HubSpot State of Video Marketing Report, 2023).
• 32% of marketers report that the most effective way to generate leads from marketing videos is to place links to landing pages on social media video ads (HubSpot State of Video Marketing Report, 2023).
• Marketers report that the top social media platform for sharing videos is YouTube (70%), followed by Instagram (60%) and TikTok (35%) (HubSpot State of Video Marketing Report, 2023).
• 67% of marketers say that sharing social videos on platforms like YouTube, Instagram, or TikTok has the biggest ROI of any marketing strategy (HubSpot State of Video Marketing Report, 2023).
• (Wistia, 2023) Data shows that video engagement rate stays high at 38% for videos up to 30 minutes.
• For videos between 30 and 60 minutes, it drops to 26% then to 16% for videos over an hour.
• (Wistia, 2023) 92% of video marketers reported that video gives them a positive ROI.
• (Wyzowl, 2023) 92% of video marketers feel the levels of noise and competition have increased in the last year.
• (Wyzowl) 99% of people who use video for marketing say they’ll continue using video.
• (Facebook, 2020) The most common types of videos made by companies are live action (66%), followed by screen recorded (57%), and animated (55%).
• (Wyzowl, 2023) 53% of video marketers say video has reduced the number of support calls they’ve received.
• 22% of marketers have incorporated YouTube Stories into their video marketing strategy (Social Media Examiner, 2023).
• Marketers report that segmented emails drive 30% more opens and 50% more clickthroughs than unsegmented ones (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• Email Copy 95% of marketers who use generative AI for email creation rate it as “effective,” and 54% rate it as “very effective” (HubSpot State of Generative AI Report, 2023).
• 43% of marketers who use generative AI say that it’s most helpful for creating email copy (HubSpot State of Generative AI Report, 2023).
• 47% of email recipients say they open an email based on the subject line alone, and 69% mark an email as spam based on the subject line alone (OptinMonster, 2023).
• Email Segmentation Segmented emails drive 30% more opens and 50% more clickthroughs than unsegmented ones (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• 78% of marketers report that subscriber segmentation is the most effective strategy they use for email marketing campaigns (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• 64% of marketers personalize their emails by segment (Constant Contact, 2023).
• Email Usage 59% of Americans say that most emails they receive are not useful to them (Edison Mail, 2023).
• 40% of email users have at least 50 unread messages in their inboxes (MailButler, 2023).
• 22% of marketers send two or three marketing emails per day, and 21% send daily emails (HubSpot Research, 2023).
• Mobile Email 41% of email views — and 75% of Gmail users’ email views — come from mobile devices (MailButler, 2023).
• 35% of email marketers use a mobile-first or mobile-responsive design process.
• (Demand Gen Report, 2021) More than half (53%) of marketers say webinars is the top-of-the-funnel format that generates the most high-quality leads.
• (Demand Gen Report, 2021) 53% of marketers say email has been the most effective channel for early-stage lead generation.
• (Demand Gen Report, 2021) In 2021, 78% of marketers say theirdemand-gen budget will grow or remain the same.
• (Activate, 2020) 28% of marketers say using additional account-level fields helps improve their lead scoring.
• (HubSpot, 2020) Over 60% of marketers said their CAC has increased in the past three years.
• (HubSpot, 2020) 49% of companies report that increasing customer acquisition is their primary objective.
• (Ascend2, 2020) Marketing Automation 64% of marketers use AI/automation and 38% of those who don’t will start using it in 2024.
• (HubSpot Blog Marketing Strategy Report, 2024) 63% of marketing leaders report that they use automation in their email marketing efforts, 50% use it for social media management, and 40% automate their paid ads efforts (Statista, 2023).
• 91% of marketers reported that demand for automation from their business teams increased between 2020 and 2022 (Salesforce, 2022).
• More than three-quarters of customer journeys are somewhat automated, and 10% are fully automated (Ascend2, 2023).
• (HubSpot Blog Marketing Strategy Report, 2024) A majority of marketers say that the data they have about their target audiences is high quality (44%).
• (HubSpot Blog Marketing Strategy Report, 2024) Just over half (53%) of marketing decisions are influenced by marketing analytics (Gartner, 2022).
• 87% of marketers report that data is their company’s most under-utilized asset (Invoca, 2023).
• 22% of social media marketers list measuring and justifying their work as a top challenge (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• 26% of marketers report that decision-makers do not review the information the marketing analytics team provides, and 24% report that decision-makers reject the marketing analytics team’s recommendations or rely on gut instincts to make decisions (Gartner, 2022).
• 7% of global internet users reported using ad blockers to block ads when viewing content online (Statista, 2023).
• Ad blocking is most common in China, Indonesia, and Vietnam, where more than 40% of internet users use these tools to block ads (Statista, 2023).
• Display Advertising 22% of marketers use display ads as part of their marketing strategy.
• (HubSpot Marketing Strategy Report, 2024) In 2022, display advertisements accounted for 30% of all digital ad spending in the United States (Statista, 2023).
• marketers report allocating 19% of their marketing budgets to mobile advertising (Statista, 2023).
• Pay-Per-Click (PPC) Advertising With effective optimization, pay-per-click (PPC) advertising can yield average returns of $2 for every $1 spent — a 200% ROI (Wordstream, 2023).
• A personalized landing page can make PPC ad campaigns 5% more effective (Ranktracker, 2022).
• 84% of brands and marketers said they see good results with their PPC advertising campaigns (Ranktracker, 2022).
• 92% of video marketers report that video advertising provides a good ROI (Wyzowl, 2023).
• 91% of businesses report using video as a marketing tool (Wyzowl, 2023).
• (HubSpot Blog Marketing Trends Report, 2024) 60% of consumers prefer messaging over email or phone calls (Spectrm, 2023).
• 70% of consumers have opted in to receive texts from businesses, and 61% say they want the ability to text a business back (SimpleTexting, 2023).
• 65% of consumers use social media messaging apps to contact a company’s customer service team (HubSpot Research, 2023).
• Augmented Reality 14% of marketers are using virtual reality (VR) and augmented reality (AR) as part of their marketing strategy, and 49% plan to increase their investments in 2024.
• (HubSpot Blog Marketing Trends Report, 2024) 47% of marketers will increase their investments in experiential marketing in 2023.
• (HubSpot Blog Marketing Trends Report, 2024) 14% of marketers are using virtual reality (VR) and augmented reality (AR) as part of their marketing strategy, and 49% plan to increase these investments in 2024 (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• In 2023, 47% of marketers reported increasing their investments in experiential marketing efforts (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• Mobile There are nearly 7 billion smartphones worldwide, and 95% of Americans have access to a cell phone (Exploding Topics, 2023).
• 74% of people report that they are more likely to return to a website if it’s optimized for mobile (WebFX, 2023).
• 67% of mobile users say they’re more likely to buy a company’s product or service if its website is mobile-friendly (WebFX, 2023).
• CRM 61% of sales leaders automated their CRM software in 2023 (Prezentor, 2023).
• 78% of sales leaders say their CRM effectively improves alignment between sales and marketing teams (HubSpot Research, 2023).
• Top-performing salespeople spend about 18% more time updating their CRM system than average salespeople (LinkedIn, 2022).
• 91% of companies with ten or more employees use a CRM system to manage customer data (Zippia, 2023).
• 45% of companies report that their use of CRM software has increased sales revenue (Zippia, 2023).
• 22% of marketing leaders report that growing revenue and sales is their primary goal (HubSpot State of Marketing Report, 2023).
• 96% of prospects report doing their own research before speaking with a human sales rep (HubSpot State of Sales Report, 2023).
• More than half of sales leaders report using sales enablement content, and 79% say these materials are essential for making a sale (HubSpot State of Sales Report, 2023).
• Service Level Agreement (SLA) 85% of marketers with a service level agreement (SLA) believe that their marketing strategy is effective (HubSpot Research, 2023).
• Companies with an active SLA are 31% more likely to hire additional salespeople to meet demand (HubSpot Research, 2023).
• Social Selling 78% of businesses that use social selling outperform those that don’t (LinkedIn, 2023).
• Businesses that prioritize social selling are 51% more likely to reach their sales quotas (LinkedIn, 2023).
• Sales professionals with a strong social selling index on LinkedIn have 45% more sales opportunities than those without a strong social selling index (LinkedIn, 2023).
• 99+ Mind-Blowing Digital Marketing Statistics (2022): Over half of marketers (51%) consider email marketing their most effective tool.
• Email marketing is deemed essential by 44% of CMOs, who allocate 8% of their marketing budgets to it.
• Automated email campaigns are responsible for 31% of all email-based orders.
• Segmentation of subscribers is deemed the top strategy for email campaigns by 78% of marketers.
• Customized emails result in a 14% increase in click-through rates and a 10% boost in conversions.
• Welcome emails and other single-message autoresponders see an impressive 94% open rate and a 31.
• A significant portion of Americans (59%) say the emails they receive are not useful.
• Regular newsletters from brands influence purchasing decisions for 27% of US consumers.
• Responsive design in emails can lead to a 5-15% increase in click rates.
• A majority of marketers (73%) acknowledge the critical role of email in their company’s success.
• Data privacy changes relating to email have influenced the marketing strategies of 86% of marketers in the past year.
• The top challenge for 41% of marketers is constructing effective emails.
• Email newsletters are the primary content marketing tool for 81% of B2B marketers.
• 61% of email senders report increasing challenges in email deliverability.
• Mobile devices are responsible for more than 58% of overall web traffic.
• Despite high open rates on mobile, these devices see only 18% of email clicks.
• Facebook is the preferred shopping platform for 31% of online consumers, while Instagram is more popular among 39% of Gen-Z shoppers.
• More than half of American consumers (53%) make purchases through social media weekly.
• Nearly half (43%) of customers discover new products through social networks.
• About 30% of younger generations, including Gen Z and Millennials, have recently made purchases directly through social media.
• Social media serves as the primary platform for 35% of Gen Z to follow brands and products.
• By 2023, 80% of social media marketers anticipate brands to prominently feature influencers or creators.
• In the 18-54 age group, 21% of social media users have been influenced by influencers to make purchases in recent months.
• A significant 61% of organizations practicing social selling report a beneficial effect on revenue growth.
• Companies focusing on social selling are 51% more likely to achieve their sales goals.
• Nearly half of sales professionals (47%) believe social media generates the highest quality leads, trailing only behind customer referrals.
• A significant majority of marketers, 85%, believe that customers now expect experiences tailored to their preferences.
• A notable 83% of consumers are happy to provide personal data in exchange for more customized experiences.
• There’s a rising expectation for personalized interactions among consumers, with 71% expecting such experiences, and 76% feeling frustrated when they don’t occur.
• About 78% of brands recognize their struggle with insufficient immediate customer data, impeding their ability to offer relevant personalized experiences.
• Personalized and targeted email campaigns are responsible for generating 58% of all revenue in email marketing.
• Firms that are proficient in nurturing leads are known to produce 50% more sales-ready leads while reducing costs by 33%.
• Approximately 26% of marketing professionals lack a formal strategy for nurturing leads and have no plans to implement one.
• Enhancing customer retention and engagement are considered top priorities in lead nurturing programs by 43% of marketers.
• For 56% of marketing experts, targeted content is the most critical component of a lead generation program, with timely follow-ups and personalization also seen as vital by 49%.
• A considerable 80% of marketing professionals believe that automation software plays a crucial role in enhancing lead nurturing performance.
• Allocating more resources and time to lead nurturing is viewed by 84% of marketers as a strategy that could significantly improve conversion rates.
• Closing deals with nurtured leads can result in a 47% increase in the order value.
• 15% of organizations are incorporating AI tools in their content marketing strategies for generating and nurturing leads.
• 14 billion individuals globally shop online – 27% of the global population.
• 1% by 2024, significantly outpacing the 2% growth projected for physical store sales.
• Currently, online retail constitutes 20% of total retail sales, with expectations to increase to 25% by 2025.
• Projections indicate that by 2040, a vast majority (95%) of purchases will be conducted online.
• Quick shipping and delivery are key to 78% of online shoppers, making it their primary purchase consideration, followed closely by product description accuracy (73%) and ease of purchase process (72%).
• Nearly half of Gen Z consumers (46%) would spend more for the opportunity to shop in their favorite online stores.
• A significant portion of shoppers, 46%, would switch retailers to ensure product availability.
• Amazon leads the global eCommerce market, drawing over 13% of desktop traffic, quadruple that of eBay.
• 3% of all eCommerce sales, showing an increase from the previous year’s 41.
• The cross-border eCommerce sector is set to expand by an impressive 108% from 2023 to 2028.
• November sees sales increase by 12% to 140% more than other months, with the lowest online sales occurring in the summer.
• In countries where Amazon is well-established, 60% of shoppers use it for product searches.
• In 2022, 5% of online purchases in the US were made with buy now, pay later payment options.
• Around 60% of Gen-Z and Millennials prefer to buy products from small businesses.
• 35% of consumers would shop for clothes online more if virtual try-on was available.
• Fast shipping and delivery are the most important factors for 78% of frequent online shoppers.
• 73% of shoppers using a mobile device will switch from a poorly designed mobile site to one that facilitates easier purchasing.
• 28% of US consumers use their phones during in-store shopping for discounts and product information.
• 29% of Americans make purchases on their smartphones at least once per week.
• 95% of young people aged 13-17 own a phone, and most get their first phone at age 11.
• 2% of online shoppers prefer shipment notifications via text rather than email.
• 68% of shoppers browse on mobile, and 56% of online sales are completed on mobile.
• Showing customer reviews on a brand’s website can lead to an increase in conversion rates, potentially by as much as 20%.
• Nearly half of the consumer population, 49%, places as much trust in online reviews as they do in personal recommendations from their network.
• Review submission increases from 12% to 26% when customers are incentivized, such as through discount codes.
• A vast majority, 85%, of consumers expect a product to have between 50 to 500 reviews.
• 52% of businesses observe a loyalty increase from online reviews, with 53% noting higher in-store sales, and 63% experiencing improved SEO.
• A significant 89% of marketers that invested in influencer marketing intend to sustain or increase their investment.
• About 28% of younger generations, specifically Gen-Z and millennials, have made direct purchases via social media platforms in recent months.
• 49% of Gen Z say they’re less likely to make a purchase and 27% say they’ll stop shopping with the brand or share the negative experience with friends or family after an impersonal experience with a brand.
• Over half of Gen-Z, at 55%, state that their purchasing decisions are most influenced by recommendations from influencers.
• Influencer recommendations have swayed 21% of social media users in the 18-54 age range to make purchases in the last three months.
• Over 30% of people say they unsubscribed from an email because the subject line was not aligned with the content of the emails.
• Readers are 26% more likely to open emails with personalized subject lines.
• 69% of email recipients report emails as spam based only on the subject line.
• Brands using emojis in their email subject lines see a 56% increase in open rates.
• 55% of emails are opened on mobile devices, meaning it’s a good idea to keep email subject lines under 50 characters if possible.
• 47% of marketers test email subject lines to optimize click-through rates.
• 33% of email recipients open emails because of a catchy subject line (Finances Online) 13.
• Adding a preheader to your email subject line increases open rates by an average of 7%.
• “Boring” subject lines sometimes perform best, with straightforward newsletter and descriptive subject lines performing the highest of 40 million emails examined in one study, with open rates of 60-87%.
• Emails with numbers or question marks in the subject line have 8% higher open rates on average.
• Incorporating a recipient’s name in the email subject line can elevate open rates by 10-14%.
• 29% of marketers use a search-optimized website and blog to attract and convert leads.
• SEO is considered the top source of high-scoring leads, with 35% of marketers attributing their most valuable leads to this channel.
• 55% of marketers agree that publishing more content drives higher organic rankings.
• Small businesses with blogs generate 67% more leads than those without.
• Over half of lead acquisition methods are attributed to content marketing, and over 70% of industry professionals believe blogging is most effective in generating leads.
• 51% of companies find updating old content the most efficient content marketing strategy.
• Websites with active blogs generate 97% more backlinks than those without.
• 88% of marketers using SEO plan to increase or maintain their investment this year.
• 37% of marketers use AI to automate time-consuming SEO tasks, indicating a trend towards more automated SEO processes.
• 84% of bloggers say AI has impacted their SEO strategy, showing the growing influence of technology in content creation and optimization.
• (Marketing Insider Group) 19 56% of consumers most often use a mobile device for search engines, compared to 29% using a desktop.
• 44% of online shoppers have discovered new products in the last 3 months by searching the internet.
• The highest conversion rates are seen in catering and restaurants, and media and entertainment at over 18% on average.
• Regularly running A/B tests on emails improves ROI by an average of 82%.
• Even small changes can have a massive impact on your conversion rates—sometimes by as much as 300%.
• Only 10% of marketing teams have a dedicated CRO budget and over 30% don’t allocate budget to optimization at all.
• Digital analytics is considered to be the most effective CRO tactic, with marketers rating it over 80% effective.
• Optimizers still focus mainly on desktop website optimization, with only around 9% of teams optimizing for mobile apps.
• Cross-selling modules are one of the most effective CRO features, used by 100% of the top-performing retailers examined in a study.
• Only 29% of marketers are optimizing to actual conversion value or customer lifetime.
• 68% of B2B marketers report Google Analytics or another web-based analytics tool is their primary source of data for optimization.
• 79% of CMOs said they will invest more in conversion rate optimization this year.
• 56% of people are afraid of missing out on events, news and important status updates if they are away from social networks.
• 31% of Americans feel they are missing out on fun activities that others are doing.
• 26% of adults under 35 say social media makes them more likely to feel like they’re missing out.
• TikTok usage was valued 33% higher among peers, while Instagram was valued 24% higher.
• Travel posts are the content that is most likely to cause FOMO, with 59% of Millennials admitting they feel a sense of FOMO after viewing them.
• Events and parties (56%) and food (29%) are also common FOMO-causing content.
• 52% of US adults check their social media accounts as soon as they wake up.
• Facebook is the social media platform that causes the most anxiety, with over 21% of social media users admitting the FOMO they experience from bedtime scrolling makes it more difficult for them to sleep.
• Almost 28% of users use social media for inspiration on things to do and buy.
• 18% of social media users aged 18 to 29 use social media posts for vacation inspiration.
• 61% of people aged 18 to 29 would quit their jobs to become social media influencers.
• Over 30% of Gen Z and millennials said the main reason they overspent with their wealthier friends was because they didn’t want to feel left out.
• Email subject lines that use FOMO marketing tactics have a 22% higher open rate.
• 55% of senior executives in leading global sales and marketing organizations believe AI will have a significant impact on marketing optimization such as A/B testing and SEO strategies (McKinsey & Company) 2.
• 97% of leaders agree artificial intelligence (AI) and machine learning (ML) will enable companies to analyze social media data and insights more efficiently.
• The most popular type of AI used by marketers is Chatbots (used by 53%), text generation tools (44%), visual tools (44%), and audio tools (33%) (Hubspot) 4.
• 84% of bloggers/SEOs say AI and automation have impacted their SEO strategy for 2023 (Hubspot) 5.
• 84% of Marketers say that AI and automation are very effective at aligning web content with search intent, 80% for improving the user experience on their site, and 74% for raising their SERP ranking (Hubspot) 6.
• 96% of the time AI content is not complete enough to publish on its own.
• 92% of businesses are using AI-driven personalization to drive growth in their business (Twilio Segment) 11.
• 61% of salespeople believe generative AI will help them better serve their customers (Salesforce) 12.
• 84% of salespeople using generative AI say it helps increase sales at their organization by enhancing and speeding up customer interactions.
• 51% of marketers believe that AI enhances the effectiveness of email marketing over traditional methods.
• 24 Essential Digital Marketing Statistics You Need to Know in 2024: Facebook is actually the most popular of the platforms, used by 89% of B2B and B2C marketers around the world.
• 86% of the Global MarketshareAnother important thing to consider is how people are accessing your content.
• 86% of the global market share comes from mobile, followed by desktop at 42.
• According to a survey, 59% of people think it’s important to be able to shop using their phones when deciding where to buy.
• Interestingly, 61% of folks prefer shopping on mobile websites that let them use search filters.
• is Evenly SplitIn the United States, web activity is almost evenly split between mobile and desktop, with mobile accounting for about 49%, and desktop at 48%.
• Additionally, a separate study highlights that a significant 63% of online traffic originates from smartphones or tablets, underscoring the growing prevalence of mobile devices in shaping our online experiences.
• 7% of Marketers Increased Social Media Activity as the Pandemic BeganThe COVID-19 pandemic brought about many changes in our world as we know it.
• 7% of Social Media Users Spent an Extra 1-2 Hours Per Day on Social MediaIt wasn’t just brands using social media more often during the pandemic though.
• Video Marketing Has Increased by 41% Since 2016There’s no denying that video is a powerful way to connect with your audience on a deeper level.
• In fact, an estimated 91% of businesses are using video marketing in 2023.
• These digital marketing statistics show just how important it can be for business owners:89% of Marketers See a Positive ROI When Delivering a Personalized ExperienceDo you resonate more with brands that create a personalized experience that’s been tailored to your needs and interests?
• A whopping 89% of marketers witness a boost in their returns when they incorporate personalization into their campaigns.
• Meanwhile, 60% of consumers are likely to become repeat customers when they enjoy a personalized shopping experience.
• Additionally, a remarkable 80% of consumers are open to sharing their personal data in exchange for special deals or offers.
• Companies That Excel at Nurturing Leads Through Inbound Marketing Make 50% More SalesMore sales always sounds good, right?
• It turns out that nurturing your leads through inbound marketing can help you generate 50% more sales.
• Let’s see how these two methods compare:82% of Customers Rely on Print Ads When Deciding What to BuyAccording to a MarketingSherpa survey, old-school advertising methods are the most trusted.
• People rely on print ads (82%), TV ads (80%), direct mail (76%), and radio ads (71%) when deciding what to buy.
• 58% of Consumers in the United States Said They’ve Made a Purchase After Viewing a Social Media AdAccording to a survey in 2023, around 58% of shoppers in the United States mentioned they bought something they saw on social media.
• Meanwhile, in the United Kingdom, 44% of people and in Germany, 40% said they did the same after finding something on social networksDigital Marketing ROI StatisticsAt the end of the day, the return on investment (ROI) for the actions you take in your business is what matters the most.
• These digital marketing statistics provide just how impactful its ROI can be:Marketers Can Boost Brand Awareness by 80% Using Digital AdsPutting digital ads out there can boost how many people know about your brand by a staggering 80%.
• If folks see those display ads, they’re 155% more likely to search for your brand-specific terms later on.
• And here’s an interesting bit:if customers come across a retargeting ad, they’re 70% more likely to go ahead and make a purchase.
• 66% of Marketers Increased Their Company’s Credibility and Trust Through Digital Marketing TacticsPeople buy from brands they trust, which is why you need to focus on building a trusting relationship before you can expect to generate sales.
• 66% of marketers said digital marketing tactics helped their business to succeed.
• 33% of Marketers That Blog Say it’s an Effective Tactic33% of marketers use blogs as one of their top six marketing strategies.
• Marketing Accounts for 5% of the Employee Base for B2B CompaniesIn companies focused on business-to-business (B2B) marketing, the marketing departments typically make up about 5% of the total employees.
• Surprisingly, over 40% of solo marketing teams rely on a content management system.
• 54% of Marketing Leaders are Hiring FreelancersA recent survey from Fiverr Pro spills the beans that a whopping 54% of marketing leaders are embracing freelancers like never before.
• 57% of Video Marketers in the UK Reported Using Live VideoClearly, marketers see the value in going live on social media, as it provides a way to connect with their audience in real time.
• 57% of video marketers based in the UK said they used live video in their digital marketing strategy.
• 180+ Powerful Digital Marketing Statistics for 2024 – WordStream: The compound annual growth rate of digital marketing from 2020-2026 is projected at 9%.
• 63% of businesses have already increased their digital marketing budgets in recent years.
• On top of this, 94% of small businesses plan to increase their marketing spending in 2024.
• Between 2023 and 2024, there was a 10% growth rate in digital marketing budget spending across businesses.
• 49% of businesses say that organic search brings them the best marketing ROI.
• Over 20% of businesses say that the number of leads generated is the primary factor they base the success of their marketing channels.
• 72% of overall marketing budgets get put towards digital marketing channels.
• It’s estimated that 60% of marketing will be digital by the end of 2024 with offline media spending declining in recent years.
• According to the Bureau of Labor Statistics, marketing job demand is set to increase by 10% by 2026—above the average for all careers.
• In fact, digital marketing jobs are set to increase by 6% (higher than the average job growth rate) by 2032.
• More digital marketing statistics The average local business puts 5-10% of its revenue towards its digital marketing budget, but for larger businesses, that number can climb to about 14%.
• People spend 50% more with businesses that regularly respond to reviews.
• 90% of internet users will see a Google Ad during their online experience.
• Consumers are 155% more likely to look up your brand-specific terms after they’ve been exposed to display ads.
• Customers are 70% more likely to make a purchase from a retargeting ad.
• When someone conducts a search after initially seeing a related display ad, the likelihood of them converting is 59%.
• 27% of consumers conduct a search for a business after seeing their display ad.
• 75% of people say online ads make it easier to find what they’re looking for.
• Website visitors sourced from PPC ads have a 50% higher likelihood of converting than organic visitors.
• 62% of advertising in the past year was online, and it’s projected to grow beyond 8.
• 15% of the average business’s website traffic comes from paid search, while paid social traffic only makes up 5% of overall website traffic.
• Less than 20% of marketers use landing page A/B tests to improve conversion rates.
• 61% of marketers say that generating traffic and leads is their number one challenge…so yes.
• For example, while two-thirds of businesses are using AI for content brainstorming sessions, drafts, and outlines, 25% of businesses are worried about the impact of AI on website traffic.
• 49% of businesses say that organic search brings them the best marketing ROI.
• In other words, 75% of people never scroll past the first page of the SERP.
• The top-ranking site in Google organic search results has an average CTR of 31%.
• If local SEO is a focus for your brand, you’re in luck as 28% of local searches result in a purchase within 24 hours.
• It’s no secret that content marketing is key for growing businesses—especially since brands that blog have 434% more indexed pages than those that don’t.
• 93% of businesses are active on Facebook, and 86% also take advantage of Facebook advertising.
• TikTok is the fastest growing social media platform, with 40% of businesses planning to incorporate TikTok into their 2024 social media strategy.
• Less than 5% of businesses use Facebook video ads, so this is a major opportunity for brands looking to stand out.
• Over 80% of B2B businesses use X for organic social media marketing and X (Twitter) ads.
• The average swipe-up rate for Snapchat ads is 50% and the average cost per swipe is just $.
• 80% of B2B businesses use LinkedIn Advertising, and 96% of B2B content marketers use LinkedIn for organic social media marketing.
• 30% of the avage business’s engagement on LinkedIn comes from its employees.
• 72% of TikTok users find TikTok ads “inspiring,” and 70% of users said that TikTok ads were even enjoyable.
• 25% of people on TikTok have researched or purchased a product after seeing a TikTok about it.
• 95% of Pinterest users have the app to help them plan or make a purchase.
• In fact, 52% of Pinterest users have seen something on the app and made the purchase online later.
• 64% of consumers watching branded videos on social media made a purchase after.
• The average open rate across all industries is 80% and the average click-through rate is 2.
• This makes it the second most popular marketing channel, behind social media at 89%.
• Email marketing copy is one of the top use cases for generative AI, as 41% of businesses are using AI to create email content.
• More email marketing statistics 64% of small businesses say they use email marketing to reach their ideal customers.
• 80% of marketers say they’d rather give up social media than email marketing.
• 64% of small businesses already leveraging email marketing, so you won’t want to miss out on taking advantage of this low-cost way to promote your business.
• 33% of people will open an email simply because they think the subject line is catchy.
• 47% of email recipients decide to open an email based on the subject line alone.
• 38% of people will stop engaging with a website if the content or layout is unattractive.
• Websites that have a superior user experience generate a 400% higher conversion rate.
• More website statistics Nearly 60% of people said they wouldn’t recommend a business if it had a poorly designed mobile website.
• About 40% of people will stop interacting with a website if images take too long to load.
• 70% of small business websites are missing a call to action on their homepage.
• Nearly 90% of consumers will shop with a competitor after a poor website experience.
• 73% of businesses invest in web design to help their brand stand out from competitors.
• 85% of people will abandon a page if they realize it’s an unsecured website—even if they already have a purchase in process.
• 43% of small businesses that do have a website plan on improving their website performance this year.
• I’ve got your back with these additional digital marketing trends:US ecommerce revenue increased by 7% between 2021 and 2022.
• 60% of marketers either don’t know or don’t understand their Core Web Vitals.
• 49% of businesses report that they grow revenue faster when they’re using video content.
• 86% of consumers say they’d like to see more video content from brands they love.
• 73% of customers are willing to spend more with a brand that has complete transparency online.
• 76% of brands report having used marketing automation just this past year.
• In 2024, 42% of businesses are increasing their investment in AR and VR strategies.
• Mobile advertising will account for 77% of all digital ad spend in 2024.
• Video marketing is on the rise, with 92% of businesses already considering it one of the most important parts of their digital marketing strategies.
• Social media advertising and marketing worldwide – statistics & facts | Statista: 98% Detailed statistics Social media ads CTR worldwide 2022-2023 Social media advertising cost-per-mille (CPM) worldwide 6.
• 30 Content Marketing Statistics You Should Know: According to the Content Marketing Institute, 73% of B2B marketers and 70% of B2C marketers use content marketing as part of their overall marketing strategy.
• 91% of marketing pros surveyed by Semrush achieved success with their content marketing in 2021.
• 83% of marketers believe it’s more effective to create higher quality content less often.
• In a 2022 Statista Research Study of marketers worldwide, 62% of respondents said they believed it was important to be “always on” for their customers, whereas 23% thought content-led communications were most effective for personalized targeting purposes.
• Short articles/posts (83%) and videos (61%) are the top two content types that B2C marketers used in the last 12 months.
• 8% of marketers said original graphics (infographics, illustrations) helped them reach their marketing goals in 2020 (Source:Venngage) 72% of B2C marketers expected their organization to invest in video marketing in 2022.
• (Source:CMI) Short content (300-900 words) attracts 21% less traffic and 75% fewer backlinks than articles of average length (900–1200 words.
• 6% more engagement than static content, with buyers spending an average of 8.
• 80% of B2B marketers who use paid distribution use paid social media advertising (Source:CMI) Content Consumption Once content reaches an audience, it’s important to understand how an audience consumes the content or takes action as a result.
• A 2021 DemandGen study revealed 62% of those making B2B purchase decisions said they relied more on practical content like case studies and visual content, such as webinars, to guide their buying decisions and citing a higher emphasis on the trustworthiness of the source.
• 65% of respondents to DemandGen’s survey said they give more credence to peer reviews, user-generated content, and third-party publications/analysts vs.
• Content marketing generates three times as many leads as traditional outbound marketing but costs 62% less (Source:CMI).
• 56% of marketers who leverage blogging say it’s an effective tactic, and 10% say it generates the greatest ROI (return on investment).
• (Source:Hubspot blog research) Over 60% of marketers measure the success of their content marketing strategy through sales.
• 61% of B2C marketers in CMI’s 2021 study said their 2022 content marketing budget would exceed their 2021 budget.
• 22% of B2B marketers said they spent 50% or more of their total marketing budget on content marketing.
• Furthermore, 43% saw their content marketing budgets grow from 2020 to 2021, and 66% expected them to grow again in 2022.
• Top challenges included “attracting quality leads with our content” (41%), “generating enough traffic and promoting our content” (39%), “creating content that resonates with our audience” (31%), and “proving the ROI of our content” (30%).
• (Source:Semrush’s State of Content Marketing 2022) Changes to SEO/search algorithms (64%), changes to social media algorithms (53%), and data management/analytics (48%) are among the top concerns for B2C marketers.
• Top Digital Marketing Stats You Should Know About [Must Know]: According to the latest CMO Survey, 56% of businesses are modifying their business models to capitalize on digital opportunities.
• Digital Marketing Stats ‘Quality’ Content Is Still the King 70% of internet users want to get information about products through content instead of traditional advertisements.
• 53% of marketers agree to have blogging on the top of their content marketing agenda.
• Blogging drives 97% more links to business websites (compared to ones that don’t) and over 68% of consumers feel that a blog makes a website more trustworthy.
• Learn All the Tricks of the Marketing TradePurdue PG Digital Marketing ProgramExplore Course Offline Gets a Beating According to a report by Accenture, global revenue from offline commerce channels will see a 20% dip by 2021, while B2B Commerce market, in the US alone, will hit $1.
• 4% growth in 2020, it’s expected to bounce back with a 17% growth in 2021.
• ROI Matters the Most In a DemandGen report, 89% marketers pointed out improving the ability to measure and analyze marketing impact as a top priority.
• ROI Is Also a Leading Challenge 40% of marketers believe ROI to be the top marketing challenge they face.
• (Source:MarketingProfs) Audience Targeting/Segmentation Is a Challenge Forrester reports that 58% of marketers are struggling to target or segment their audience.
• 88% of marketers say that collecting first-party data is their priority in 2021 to get a better understanding of their customers and meet their needs.
• As such, Forrester survey shows that 85% of marketers consider inbound calls and phone conversations as an important part of their organization’s digital-first strategy.
• Video Marketing Promises Good ROI Nearly 90% of video marketers experience a good return on investment.
• The best ROI of any marketing channel, according to 49% of marketers, is achieved via organic search.
• Content Marketing Statistics 81% of marketers consider content to be a key marketing strategy.
• An article, website, or blog post with text is what 18% of people like to read.
• Video Marketing Statistics Over the past three years, there has been a 23% growth in the use of video for marketing purposes.
• Email marketing is used by small firms to contact clients in 64% of cases.
• Lead Generation Stats Lead generation is cited by 61% of marketers as their greatest difficulty.
• 53% of marketers pay out at least half of their marketing budget on lead generation.
• One of the main challenges for 37% of marketers was finding high-quality leads.
• 90% of those conducting searches haven’t made up their minds about a brand yet.
• Marketing Technology Stats Over 75% of marketers say their marketing technology initiatives directly affect sales, and 91% are confident that their platform investments impact the company’s value.
• More successful startups invest more than 25% of their marketing budget in marketing technology.
• According to the latest CMO Survey, 56% of businesses are modifying their business models to capitalize on digital opportunities.
• 4% growth in 2020, it’s expected to bounce back with a 17% growth in 2021.
• 61 Compelling Social Media Marketing Statistics to Know in 2024: In addition, 67% of consumers expect brands and companies to have social media presence to provide customer service.
• 9% of survey respondents said that they have made a purchase after seeing a social media advertisement.
• 81% are aged 30 to 49, group age between 50-64 takes 73% and elder people aged 65+ use social media lesser out of all age group at 45%.
• This represents about 60% of the global population and 94% of internet connected people.
• By contrast, the African continent social media saturation ranges from 7% (Middle Africa) to 41% (Southern Africa).
• Studies show that 90% of teenagers have used or are using social channels.
• In fact, an astounding 44% of 8-11-year olds are on at least one social media network.
• Smartphones and other mobile devices are used by 91% of social media users.
• Social media users spend almost 80% of their social media time using the platform’s mobile versions.
• About 99% of social media users will use a mobile connection to view these sites at some point.
• In fact, 84% of content sharing happens outside of social media on other platforms, including instant messenger, email, and SMS.
• You can get a much higher engagement rate on posts by tagging them with another location (79%) or user (56%).
• Sharing branded video content is popular, with 74% of customers doing so.
• Internet users are saying “no” to ads on social media, with more than 40% turning on ad blockers.
• Video posted on social media has earned new customers for 93% of brands.
• Among people who buy things online, 97% have accessed social media in the previous month.
• Among American internet users between the ages of 18-34, almost 40% have bought a product from social media.
• Product research is one reason why 76% of internet users access social media.
• Customers who have enjoyed positive social media interactions with brands recommend the brand to social contacts at a rate of 71%.
• Social media-based influencer recommendations help 49% of consumers decide what to buy–and around 80% of consumers have purchased something after seeing it recommended by an influencer.
• For 13% of social media users, having a “buy” button would make them more likely to buy through the platform.
• Among internet users ages 18-34, 95% will follow at least one brand on social media.
• Brand discovery from online sources comes through social media 52% of the time.
• For 43% of all internet users, social media is a major source of information on what to buy.
• Brand familiarity–or the ability to see and become familiar with brands–influences 80% of customers to purchase something.
• Social media has been a method of communicating with brands and businesses for 90% of those with an account.
• Companies are expected to use social media to provide customer service by 70% of customers.
• Interacting with customers on social media leads them to spend 20-40% more money on products and services.
• Among consumers between 18 and 29, 49% admit to buying something in response to a social media ad.
• For 86% of Americans, transparency on social media is so important that they will take their business elsewhere if a brand refuses to show transparency.
• Over half, or 53%, of social media users say that transparency regarding changes to products and services is critical.
• Of all social media content types, video is considered the most transparent content type by 67% of consumers.
• Taking that one step further, 43% of consumers believe that live video is the most transparent form of content creation.
• Social consciousness is important for 70% of consumers, who expect brands to take a public stand on issues that matter.
• For 55% of consumers, values are important enough that they might boycott brands they disagree with.
• For 47% of consumers, social media is where they expect brands to express their views.
• About 40% of consumers believe that working with a relevant nonprofit is an ideal way for brands to express their views on social media.
• An Adobe study indicates that for 50% of Gen Z and 42% of Millennials, social media is the advertising channel they find most relevant.
• Unfortunately, for 53% of customers there’s a belief that marketing and publicity are the only reasons companies take a stand.
• According to 90% of marketers, social media is very important to their clients and business.
• The use of social media for marketing campaigns is growing, with more than 92% of American businesses adopting this practice.
• According to a survey, 73% of marketers believe that their social media marketing efforts have been “somewhat effective” or “very effective” for their business.
• Likewise, social media platforms are seen as effective marketing tools for 90% of small businesses.
• According to 93% of marketers, increased exposure for brands is the primary benefit of advertising on social media.
• 75% of marketers credit social media marketing with increased web traffic, and almost 90% say it has improved business exposure.
• Among 80% of social marketers, the main goal is to boost engagement across social media.
• For marketers who have used social media marketing for two years or more, 50% have seen increased sales.
• This is why 92% of marketers in B2B companies prefer LinkedIn over all other social platforms as part of their social media marketing strategy.
• In 2022, almost 92% of marketers who work for companies with more than 100 employees in the United States are expected to start using social media for marketing.
• Social media marketing is proven to be effective because between online consumers, 97% of them accessed social media at least once a month.
• In addition, 67% of consumers expect brands and companies to have social media presence to provide customer service.
• 9% of survey respondents said that they have made a purchase after seeing a social media advertisement.
• In the United States alone, the biggest percentage of social media users (84%) are aged between 18 to 29.
• 81% are aged 30 to 49, group age between 50-64 takes 73% and elder people aged 65+ use social media lesser out of all age group at 45%.
• 101 Digital Marketing Statistics You Need to Know for 2024: Showing 1 – 10 out of 832 for:Article Previous Next Home Digital Marketing Statistics 101 Digital Marketing Statistics That Show the Impact of Online Marketing in 2024 Did you know that 97% of people check a company’s online presence before deciding to visit their business?
• 500% is how much searches for “near me” have increased in the past few years.
• 76% of users who search for a local business on mobile visit a store within 24 hours 97% of users searched online for a local business 46% of all searches have local intent 97 billion local searches take place monthly 1.
• 75% of people say paid ads make it easier for them to find what they need.
• 84% is how much more likely YouTube mobile ads are to hold attention than TV ads.
• Check out these digital marketing statistics on email marketing:760% is how much revenue can increase from creating segmented email marketing campaigns.
• 300% is how much video can increase click-through rates in an email.
• 70% of brands fail to use personalized emails even though they generate six times higher transaction rates.
• 68% of people automatically delete emails that don’t have content relevant to their interests.
• 3% of people will delete an email if it’s not optimized for mobile 2.
• 5% of web designers believe that the top reason visitors leave a website is because it loads too slowly 73% of users leave a website due to non-responsive web design 50% of consumers believe brands should prioritize web design 43.
• Digital Marketing Statistics 2024 | MediaValet: Only 17% of organizations clearly define their digital marketing strategy.
• Not even 1% of searchers go as far as the second page of Google to find what they’re looking for.
• 6% of internet users will access the web solely via their smartphones by 2025.
• Source:CNBC, 2019 More than 70% of shoppers buy online via their mobile.
• More than 50% of marketers agree that visual content is essential to their marketing strategy.
• Source:Venngage, 2022 Content with relevant images gets 94% more views than content without relevant images.
• Over the past 10 years, videos longer than 30 minutes, such as webinars and live events, saw over 11,000% growth.
• Source:HubSpot, 2023Video traffic now equates to 65% of all internet traffic.
• Source:MediaValet, 202390% of marketers say video marketing has helped them generate leads while 87% say it has increased sales.
• Source:HubSpot, 2022Adding videos to landing pages can improve conversions by up to 86%.
• Source:EyeView, 2022Almost half, (48%) of marketers create a new landing page for each new campaign.
• On average, posts that include images get 650x more engagement than text-only postsSource:Medium, 201888% of marketers stated that they incorporated images in more than 50% of all the articles they published.
• Source:Venngage, 2019When information is paired with images, people retain 65% of the information, rather than 10% without.
• 79% of marketers report a blog as the second most popular distribution channel.
• Source:Content Marketing Institute, 2023 40% of marketers think that a blog is one of the most effective marketing channels.
• Source:DemandSage, 202342% of marketers use TikTok already, and more than half of them (56%) plan to increase their investment.
• Source:Omnicore, 2021Photos on Instagram showing faces get 30% more likes than photos without faces.
• Source:Zephoria, 202179% of internet users in the United States have Facebook (beating out Instagram, at only 32%).
• TwitterApproximately 52% of all Twitter users are on the platform daily.
• Source:Brandwatch, 2020On average, brands that use Twitter for business experience a 7% improvement in brand preference.
• Source:Omnicore, 2022YouTube is the preferred source of video for 83% of consumers globally.
• 6% of internet users will access the web solely via their smartphones by 2025.
• 6% of internet users will access the web solely via their smartphones by 2025.
• 70 Content Marketing Statistics to Bookmark for 2024: 82% of marketers are actively investing in content marketing, 10% report not using content marketing, and 8% are unsure if their company uses content marketing.
• (HubSpot)40% of B2B marketers have a documented content marketing strategy.
• That percentage is higher among the most successful B2B marketers — 64% have a documented content marketing strategy.
• (Content Marketing Institute)69% of marketers actively invest time in SEO.
• (HubSpot)76% of marketers report that content marketing generates demand/leads (a 9 percentage points increase since last year).
• In addition, 63% of marketers say that content marketing helps to nurture the audience/customers/leads, and 50% say that it helps build loyalty with existing clients/customers (a 13 percentage points decrease).
• (CMI)Video was the primary form of content being created in 2023 (50%), images (47%), and blogs (33%).
• (HubSpot)73% of people admit to skimming blog posts, while 27% consume them thoroughly.
• (HubSpot)51% of the businesses that invest in content marketing publish content every day.
• (The Manifest)44% say they typically consume three to five pieces of content before engaging with a vendor.
• (DemandGen)73% of respondents prefer to learn about a product or service from a short video.
• 🤔— Ahrefs (@ahrefs) November 8, 2023 We found that almost 80% of our respondents had already adopted AI tools in their content marketing strategies.
• Another 10% plan to, and only a minority of 10% don’t plan to use any AI for content.
• My guess is that the remaining 10% of non-adopters are not just being “neutral” about AI — they’ve decided not to use it (yet) and likely not just ignored the tech.
• The top 3 use cases are:brainstorming new topics (51%), researching headlines and keywords (45%), and writing drafts (45%).
• (CMI)50% of marketers believe inadequate AI adoption is holding them back from achieving their goals.
• (Mailchimp)58% of US marketers said they have increased their content creation performance thanks to generative AI.
• 83% of marketers say it’s better to focus on quality rather than quantity of content, even if it means posting less often.
• (eMarketer)Content marketing generates over 3x as many leads as outbound marketing and costs 62% less.
• (Demand Metric)72% of the most successful marketers in North America measure the ROI of their content marketing.
• Only 7% of B2B marketers don’t plan to develop a content marketing strategy.
• (CMI)87% of B2B marketers prioritize the audience’s informational needs over the organization’s sales/promotional messages.
• (CMI)84% of marketers voted for LinkedIn as the best-performing social media platform, followed by Facebook (29%) and YouTube (22%).
• (CMI)78% of B2B marketers employ keyword research for SEO while creating content.
• Only 5% of B2C marketers don’t plan to develop a content marketing strategy.
• (CMI)65% of B2C marketers prioritize the audience’s informational needs over the organization’s sales/promotional messages.
• (CMI)B2C marketers who use nonpaid social media platforms report that Facebook (63%), LinkedIn (53%), and Instagram (39%) produced the best overall content marketing results.
• (CMI)Only 22% of B2C marketers don’t use paid content distribution channels.
• (CMI)73% of B2C marketers employ keyword research for SEO when creating content.
• Even though Bing was the quickest to the market with the AI search feature, it didn’t help the search engine cross the 4% market share (Statcounter).
• 71% of B2B researchers start their research with a generic search instead of branded search.
• (Google)53% of shoppers say they always do research before a purchase to ensure they are making the best possible choice.
• 7% of pages will rank in the top 10 search results within a year of publication.
• (Nielsen)70% of people rather get information from blogs than traditional advertisements.
• (Demand Metric)How-to articles are the most popular content formats (76%), followed by lists (55%), and news and trends (47%).
• (Google)79% of people say they’ve been convinced to buy or download a piece of software or app by watching a video (a 1 percentage point increase since last year).
• (Google)91% of businesses use video as a marketing tool (a 5 percentage points increase since last year).
• (Wyzowl)96% of people have watched an explainer video to learn more about a product or service.
• (Wyzowl)91% of people wanted to see more videos from brands in 2023 (a 3 percentage points increase since last year).
• 64% of Americans listened to a podcast as of 2023 (a 2 percentage points increase from last year), and 42% listened to a podcast last month.
• (Edison Research)46% of monthly podcast listeners say that ads on podcasts are not intrusive.
• (Edison Research)80% of podcast listeners listen to all or most of each episode.
• (Nielsen)95% of marketers who use generative AI for email creation rate it “effective”, with 54% rating it “very effective.
• ” (Hubspot)71% of marketers said that they rely on email engagement to evaluate content performance.
• Digital Marketing Statistics For 2024 – On The Map Marketing: 51% of customers say they will unfollow a brand if it irritates them on social media.
• According to 81% of marketers, video content has a direct and favorable impact on sales.
• Social media will account for 33% of all digital advertising spending in 2022.
• 78% of Google searches went to the second page and clicked on something.
• SEO for mobile sites on mobile devices is considered an effective investment by 48% of SEO marketers.
• Using strategic keywords is the number one SEO marketing strategy, according to 71% of marketers.
• CTR increased by about 4% in titles with positive or negative sentiment.
• Social media stories are considered “very effective” by 57% of marketers, while 35% think they are “somewhat effective.
• 70% of consumers have purchased a product after seeing it advertised on YouTube.
• In 2021, 82% of B2B content marketing experts used Twitter for their organic marketing efforts.
• Carousel Ads on the web delivered a 15% increase in click-through rates, and app Carousel ads showed a 24% increase in installs-per-impression.
• Email marketing is recognized as having the highest ROI by 30% of marketers worldwide.
• With a 15% conversion rate in 2020, email collection forms successfully convert viewers.
• Exit-Intent campaigns convert 2-4% of visitors who are about to leave into email subscribers (OptinMonster) 4.
• 70% of marketers stated that their best-performing email campaigns came from a person rather than a company.
• 33% of marketers send weekly emails, and 26% send emails multiple times per month.
• Enjoy up to a 28% higher return when you put testing to work for your email program.
• Free delivery is the most effective inducement for 53% of online buyers in persuading them to buy something from an online retailer.
• 60% of retail, e-commerce, and consumer goods and services companies are personalizing emails based on past purchases, versus 38% in 2019.
• 187 Must Know Digital Marketing Statistics In 2024: 69% of the overall advertisement spending will be generated via smartphones by 2026.
• Roughly 87% of the Digital Advertising revenue will be generated via programmatic advertising in 2026.
• General Digital Marketing Statistics 49% of marketers say that organic search has the best ROI.
• 20% of businesses say they measure Digital Marketing’s success by measuring the number of leads generated.
• 72% of the marketing budget goes towards Digital Marketing, according to a survey from Gartner.
• Google is the world’s biggest search engine, catering to 92% of global searches.
• The marketing job demand is set to increase by 10% by 2026, as per a survey by the Bureau of Labor.
• Customers spend 50% more with businesses that respond to reviews at regular intervals.
• Over 90% of people read reviews online before making a purchasing decision.
• Digital Advertisements can increase a brand’s awareness by 80% 62% of marketers use software for Customer Relationship Management.
• Emails that include a call to action button have 37% higher click-through rates.
• Mondays have the highest opening rate (22%), while Sundays have the lowest with 20.
• 82% of digital marketers implement email marketing globally, out of which 65% use automated emails.
• Nearly 70% of email recipients can tell if an email is spam simply by reading its subject line.
• The conversion rate increases by 56% if an Email has an emoji in its subject line rather than plain text.
• 46% of customers prefer to be contacted by brands via emails Digital Advertising Statistics Studies reveal that an average person sees around 10,000 advertisements daily.
• With a 100% increase in less than a decade, the online space is filled with people trying to sell you stuff via targeted ads.
• 65% of total ad spending will be generated through mobile phones in 2024.
• Non-programmatic ad spending will hold a 20% share in 2024, while programmatic will hold 80%.
• 90% Source:Statista E-commerce Marketing Statistics The e-commerce scene has been booming for the last decade, and the COVID-19 pandemic gave a huge push to that craziness.
• 14 billion people, equivalent to 27% of the world’s population, are shopping online.
• 69% of total eCommerce traffic comes from an organic source (Google) 60% of Millennials will visit Amazon before making a purchase online.
• 71% People trust product reviews from their friends and family 80% of the time.
• 90% Shopify has the most out of 24 million e-commerce websites globally, with 5.
• 7% of online shoppers prefer to buy products that have content written in their mother tongue.
• 53% of smartphone users prefer to shop from their favorite business’s app.
• 65% of customers surf similar products on their mobile phones while in a store.
• M-commerce websites’ bounce rates increase by 32% when their loading times jump from 1 to 3 seconds.
• 32% of customers decide their position about buying something in a store after looking up a similar product online on their smartphones.
• Over 70% of online buyers prefer to buy from well-optimized websites that offer them a smoother shopping experience.
• 62% of customers are less likely to shop with you again if they have a bad experience with your website’s functioning.
• 61% of people tend to shop on mobile websites that allow them to apply search filters.
• Brands with a dedicated blog have a 55% more traffic rate than those that don’t.
• More than half (55%) of the world’s internet traffic comes via smartphones.
• 88% of people who search for a local business over the web are likely to visit them within 24 hours.
• 36% of local searches result in a purchase Local searches contribute 22.
• 82% of consumers read online reviews for local businesses 93% of consumers use Google Maps when searching for a business.
• Google My Business listings with contact information receive 94% of calls on working days.
• 71% of people surveyed say that positive Google My Business reviews made them more likely to use a business Source:Ahrefs, Hubspot, Think With Google, Gitnux, Publer.
• 80% of those who considered themselves very successful in content marketing have documented their content marketing strategies.
• Nearly 80% of very successful content marketers spend more than 10% of their total marketing budgets on content.
• 20% of marketers have a budget of 3 to 5K, while only 6% have a budget of over $20,000.
• 52% of marketers say social media and community building is a top priority, as is improving content quality, followed by audience research.
• 45% of marketers say that Videos are the top-performing content for their brands.
• PPC returns $2 for every $1 spent, which means the ROI of a PPC campaign is around 200%.
• Paid ads and social media account for less than 10% of B2B website traffic, leads, or sales.
• Videos on a website can increase the average time spent on a page by 88%.
• 40% of users won’t engage with a website if its layout is unattractive.
• 50% of internet users say that they consider website design as a factor in formulating their opinion on a business.
• Businesses allocate around 15% of their marketing budget toward social media marketing.
• Nearly 86% of businesses on Facebook make use of its advertising platform.
• Over 98% of Facebook’s audience log in to the platform via mobile phones.
• 83% of global internet users access TikTok Over 1 billion videos are viewed on the platform every day.
• At least 60% of social media users access the platform for content that’s funny.
• 38% of the 55% of Gen-Zers and Millennials who share memes follow meme accounts.
• Nearly 56% of marketers from the United States and the United Kingdom use Instagram to collaborate with influencers.
• Infographics in Digital Marketing In the fast-paced online world, where 81% of readers skim content, visuals are crucial for digital marketing.
• The usage of infographics enhances the drive to read by 80% 45% of internet users will click on a link if they see an infographic in it.
• 70% of social media users would rather learn about a topic through infographics than text Artificial Intelligence in Digital Marketing AI had been around for a long time, but the adoption rates drastically increased after the launch of ChatGPT.
• Take a look at these interesting stats about AI usage in marketing:In an insider intelligence survey, 76% of marketers said they use AI for basic content creation and to write copy.
• Gartner forecasts that 30% of outgoing marketing messages from big businesses will be generated by AI by 2025.
• According to Mailchimp, 50% of marketers believe inadequate adoption of AI is holding them back from achieving their goals.
• 2% of marketers spend more than 40% of their marketing budget on AI-driven campaigns.
• 91% of Fortune 1000 companies are increasing their investment in artificial intelligence.
• A Statista survey shows that the adoption of generative AI is highest in the marketing and advertising sector (37%).
• The other two sectors showing increased use of AI are technology (35%) and consulting (30%).
• 26% of businesses are applying AI techniques such as NLP to marketing and sales Bonus:Discover the latest trends and statistics shaping the future of personalization in our comprehensive post on Personalization Trends and Stats.
• Future of Digital Marketing It is predicted that 69% of the overall advertisement spending will be generated via smartphones.
• One Statistic also reveals that 90% of mobile users are unaware of what they want to purchase, So they look for it online.
• Over 50% of digital marketers will increase their content marketing budget in 2024, as per the marketing insider group.
• 61% of shoppers prefer to shop from businesses that have augmented reality offerings.
• 100+ Eye-Opening Content Marketing Statistics for 2023: 69% of businesses plan to increase their content marketing budgets in 2023—that’s pretty impressive.
• And 48% of non-senior content team members are responsible for the planning and strategic elements of social media and other assets.
• Interestingly, ptimizing content for search is in second place with 32% of respondents.
• It also seems that marketers are beginning to see the value in optimizing their content for aggregate sites like Reddit (16% use this as a promotion tactic).
• TakeawaysOverall, we saw that 63% of respondents use paid channels to accelerate their content distribution.
• 73% of respondents shared they use organic social media channels to promote their content.
• Regardless of company size, of those that reported extreme success in content marketing, 70% said they do indeed measure content marketing ROI.
• However, in the overall survey results, only 54% of all businesses engage in this practice.
• And 61% of respondents believe they are at least above average at measuring their ROI.
• However, 24% of respondents are wisely looking at what content marketing can do for their advertising budget.
• The most recent research from BrightEdge shows that 53% of businesses get their overall web traffic from organic search.
• Taking a look at organic traffic, social media engagement, and backlinks, we averaged the metrics and split them into three areas:high-performing (20%), average-performing (60%), and low-performing (20%) articles.
• Only 17% of high-performing blogs were found to be very difficult to read.
• B2B Content Marketing For B2B businesses specifically, our respondents cited creating and posting more content (52%) and improving content (51%) as the top tactics for gaining more organic traffic to their sites.
• Attracting quality leads with B2B content came in as the top challenge among respondents (54%).
• Even less (18%) said user experience was an important investment in 2023.
• 64% of respondents reported calculating revenue that their content marketing generates 51% reported measuring organic traffic 19% reported calculating revenue from non-paid channels Perhaps this is why B2C content marketing is seeing interesting investment trends in 2023.
• 38% of respondents said they had a dedicated team of one to three specialists doing their content marketing.
• These are even bigger numbers than dedicated marketing agencies—only 37% of agency respondents said they had one to three specialists, and only 21% said they had four to 10 specialists.
• In addition, many B2C businesses invest in dedicated teams to do their content marketing work (over 38% said they had one to three specialists).
• Agencies It’s probably not surprising to read that 71% of agency respondents said they have a documented content marketing plan in place.
• You might, however, be surprised to learn that only 28% of those surveyed believed their content marketing strategy was mature or complex.
• Just over half of agencies surveyed also planned to measure their ROI (54%).
• Just over 25% said no, while just under 25% said yes, it has made them decrease their content marketing budgets.
• And 48% of non-senior content team members are responsible for the planning and strategic elements of social media and other assets.
• Only 17% of high-performing blogs were found to be very difficult to read.
• Just over half of agencies surveyed also planned to measure their ROI (54%).
• Digital marketing in the United Kingdom (UK) – statistics & facts | Statista: Marketer use Share of marketers allocating the majority of marketing spend towards online marketing 72% Detailed statistics Budget distribution preference between online vs.
• 16bn USD Detailed statistics Revenue of the social media advertising industry in the UK 2019-2028 Share of mobile in UK digital ad spend 51% Detailed statistics Digital Market Outlook:digital advertising spending in the UK 2019-2028, by device Search advertising spending in the UK 13.
• 39+ Content Marketing Statistics for Your 2024 Strategy: (Over half of Gen Z [52%], millennials [57%], and Gen X [51%] feel this way.
• ) How content marketers use AI Nearly half of content marketers use AI to brainstorm new topics, and 46% use it to research headlines and keywords.
• More than one-third (36%) use AI tools for writing, though many feel conflicted about the idea.
• 62% of content marketers are concerned that AI will result in less respect for skilled writers/editors.
• Among their other worries about generative AI:writing/editing viewed as a commodity (55%), lower compensation for writers/editors (46%), fewer jobs for content marketers (45%), and larger workload for writers/editors (17%).
• Learning how to work with new technologies (such as AI) was the most popular skill of interest cited by content marketers (48%) – up two points from the previous year – followed by improving data analytics/data science skills (42%), and leadership skills (42%).
• How often content marketers are engaged at work 54% of content marketers say they’re often engaged at work.
• (Millennials are least likely to say they’re often engaged – just 49% – compared with 62% of Gen X and 62% of baby boomers.
• The most popular drivers of engagement are doing meaningful work (81%), positive co-worker relationships (78%), and recognition for my work (71%).
• Other attributes include manager relationships (58%), sense of belonging at work (56%), and professional development opportunities (55%).
• Content marketers are willing to explore new opportunities 31% say they are actively or highly interested in looking for a new role – three points higher than the previous year.
• Only 25% of content markets say they see a clear path for advancement at their company.
• Content marketing challenges 28% of B2B marketers say team members resigned in the last year, 20% say team members were laid off, and about half (49%) say they had new team members acclimating to their ways of working.
• 72% of B2B marketers use generative AI tools for content-related tasks.
• However, 61% say their organization lacks guidelines for doing so, and 8% are unsure.
• The most frequently cited content creation challenge is creating the right content for the audience (57%).
• The most frequently cited non-creation challenge, by far, is a lack of resources (58%).
• As for the most common challenge of scaling content production, almost half of content marketers (48%) say not enough content repurposing.
• Types of content and social media platforms 94% of B2B marketers use short articles/posts, followed by videos (84%) and case studies/customer stories (78%).
• The same percentage of marketers (53%) find case studies/customer stories and videos to be effective.
• Nine in 10 B2B marketers use social media platforms (organic) to distribute content, 79% use blogs, and 73% use email newsletters.
• In-person events and webinars are used by 56% and produce the best results, according to marketers.
• 84% of B2B marketers say LinkedIn provides the best value among the social media platforms they use.
• 32% of B2B marketers say they decreased their X use last year (10% increased, 31% stayed the same, and 27% don’t use.
• While 20% decreased their use of Facebook, 22% increased their presence, 38% stayed the same, and 20% didn’t use it.
• On Instagram, 10% decreased their use, 32% increased their use, 28% stayed the same, and 31% didn’t use it.
• With YouTube, 9% decreased their use, 32% upped their use, 39% stayed the same, and 20% didn’t use it.
• On LinkedIn, 72% increased their use, and 24% stayed the same, with 2% decreasing their use and 2% not using the platform.
• Most B2B marketers aren’t on TikTok (81%), while 10% increased their use, 7% decreased, and 10% increased their use.
• 19% of marketers say they use TikTok – more than double the previous year.
• Content management technology Only 31% of B2B marketers say their organization has the right content management technology.
• Thirty percent say they have the technology but aren’t using its potential, and 29% say they haven’t acquired the right technology.
• 45% of B2B marketers say it’s likely their organization will invest in additional content management technology in 2024.
• Thirty-two percent say they are unlikely to invest in more tech, while 23% say they are neither likely nor unlikely.
• Metrics and goals The five most common metrics to assess content performance are conversions (73%), email engagement (71%), website traffic (71%), website engagement (69%), and social media analytics (65%).
• The most common challenge B2B marketers have while measuring content performance is integrating/correlating data across multiple platforms (84%).
• 58% of B2B marketers say content marketing helped them generate sales/revenue in the last 12 months, up from 42% the previous year.
• Here’s how the characteristics break down among the most successful, least successful, and all:Strongly agree that the leader they report to understands the work they do:Most (74%), least (23%), all 54%.
• Organization has the right technology to manage content across the organization:Most (47%), least (11%), and all (31%).
• Faced with a lack of communication across organizational silos:Most (28%), least (51%), and all (40%).
• Agree that organization measures content performance effectively:Most (77%), least (17%), and all (46%).
• They also use content marketing successfully to:Generate demand/leads:Most successful (87%), least successful (55%), and all (76%).
• Nurture subscribers/audiences/leads:Most (78%), least (42%), and all (63%).
• Content marketing budgets and investment for 2024 45% of B2B content marketers expect their content marketing budget to increase in 2024.
• 69% of B2B marketers think their organization will increase investment in video in 2024, followed by thought leadership content (53%) and in-person events (47%).
• Among the other areas:Paid advertising (43%)Online community building (33%)Webinars (33%)Audio content (25%)Digital events (21%) Hybrid events (11%) How to apply these stats to your content strategy Has content marketing become more critical to your organization as it has for so many?
• Among the key findings:67% of marketers say videos have become more important to their business in the last year.
• The percentage of marketers who say it’s important to create a human connection with video increased to 43% – six percentage points higher than the previous year.
• ) 69% of those who use AI to assist with video creation use it to create video scripts (the most common use cited by far).
• Video effectiveness Just 7% of marketers say their organization uses videos to its full potential.
• 60% say the thing they would need to get better results with video is a video strategy.
• (Twenty-seven percent expect an increase of more than 9%, 37% say the rise will be between 1% and 9%.
• About one-fourth (26%) expect the budget to stay the same, 1% expect a decrease between 1 and 9%, and 2% expect a decrease of more than 9%.
• 75% of marketers think their organization needs to invest more in video.
• 85 Content Marketing Statistics To Make You A Marketing Genius: 50% of bloggers now utilize AI tools to enhance their content creation process.
• The integration of AI in content creation marks a significant shift, with 50% of bloggers embracing this technology, underscoring its role in enhancing creativity and efficiency.
• Nearly a third of marketers (29%) actively incorporate content marketing into their strategies.
• The statistic that 29% of marketers actively use content marketing reflects its solid and consistent role in the marketing mix, emphasizing the value of content in engaging and retaining audiences.
• In 2024, 50% of marketers plan to boost their investment in content marketing.
• Podcasts and other forms of audio content are part of the content strategy for 25% of marketers.
• With 25% of marketers incorporating podcasts or other audio content, this trend points to the diversification of content strategies and the growing appeal of audio formats in capturing audience attention in a screen-dominated world.
• 20% of articles are high-performing, 60% are average-performing, and 20% are low-performing based on organic search traffic, social media engagement, and backlinks.
• Articles with 7+ images get 555% more backlinks and 259% more unique page views than those without images.
• Articles with at least one video generate 70% more organic web traffic.
• Articles with data are higher performing, with 5% of high-performing articles containing data studies compared to 2% in the low-performing group.
• Typically 70% of the people who visit your website will leave and never return, meaning all those marketing efforts to reach them have gone to waste.
• You can unlock this powerful technology 100% free when you purchase our OptinMonster Pro plan.
• Social Media Marketing Statistics 2024: In fact, 76% of local businesses use social media as part of their marketing strategy, while 41% of them rely on social media to help drive revenue.
• To develop a solid strategy, social media marketers must adapt to evolving consumer behaviors, with 48% of social media users making purchases directly from the platforms.
• Content marketing – statistics & facts | Statista: Budgets Share of industry professionals spending between 5 and10k USD monthly on content marketing 17% Detailed statistics Content marketing spending worldwide 2022 Share of marketers planning to increase their content marketing budgets in 2022 49.
• 52 Visual Content Marketing Statistics You Should Know in 2023: (HubSpot) 50% of marketers leverage video in their marketing strategy, followed closely by images at 47%.
• (HubSpot) Long-form videos above 30 minutes, like webinars and live events, saw over 11,000% growth over the past decade, making it the fastest-growing video segment.
• (HubSpot) 71% of B2B marketers say content marketing has become more important to their organization in the last year.
• (Content Marketing Institute) In 2021, over 50% of marketers used visuals in over 91% of their content.
• (Venngage) According to a survey by Venngage, original graphics are the most used type of visual content by marketers at 36%, followed by stock photos at nearly 34%.
• (Venngage) 30% of marketers primarily create visual content for blogs, followed by social channels such as Facebook and LinkedIn.
• (World Health Organization) Over 50% of marketers agree that visual content is essential to their marketing strategy.
• (Venngage) Video Marketing Statistics 75% of adults in the US watch short-form video content on a mobile device.
• (eMarketer) 59% of Gen Z viewers use short-form video apps to discover things that they then watch longer versions of.
• (HubSpot) Social media videos are the most common type of video marketers create at 71%, followed closely by explainer videos at 70%.
• (HubSpot) 96% of consumers have watched an explainer video to learn more about a product.
• (HubSpot) When it comes to B2B, 79% of people say they’ve been convinced to purchase an app or piece of software because of a video.
• (HubSpot) YouTube is the most widely used video platform by marketers at 90% (Facebook is second, at 86%).
• (HubSpot) 33% of marketers leverage short-form video content in their marketing strategy.
• (HubSpot) Emerging Visual Marketing Trends 90% of marketers using short-form video will increase or maintain their investment next year, and 21% of marketers plan to leverage short-form video for the first time in 2023.
• (HubSpot) 56% of marketers plan to increase their investment in TikTok in 2023.
• (HubSpot) 24% of marketers are planning to invest more in video than any other format in 2023.
• Additionally, 29% plan to stop marketing in the Metaverse and in audio chat rooms.
• (Similarweb) 40% of marketers plan to prioritize mobile-friendly website design in 2023.
• (HubSpot) 56% of consumers who are interested in the metaverse want to watch TV and movies there.
• (Venngage) When it comes to content creation, 30% of marketers share infographics.
• (HubSpot) One study found that people following directions with text and illustrations do 323% better than people following directions without illustrations.
• (Springer) Source:NeoMam Social Media Stats for Visual Content Marketers Facebook is the most popular social media platform, used by 64% of marketers.
• (HubSpot) 70% of Instagram users don’t mind seeing ads when watching videos on Instagram.
• (Instagram Business) 26% of marketers plan to use TikTok for the first time in 2023, and 16% of marketers plan to invest more in TikTok than any other social media app.
• (HubSpot) In 2023, 31% of marketers use YouTube Shorts and Instagram Reels.
• (HubSpot) Of the Instagram Story formats people prefer most, 35% say they engage with short narrative-styled Stories with photos, videos, and text most often.
• (HubSpot) YouTube is the most popular social media platform among teenagers, with 95% of American teenagers ages 13 to 17 using it.
• Instagram users was between the ages of 18 and 29, making up 71% percent of Instagram’s user base in the U.
• (Pew Research) In a poll of over 350 consumers, 56% said they “sometimes” watch Instagram Stories with the sound on, while 29% said they “always” do this.
• (Statista) For videos up to 5 minutes long, viewers will watch about 50% of the content.
• 8 billion in 2022 (an increase of 9% from the previous year), highlighting the platform’s expanding influence.
• (Pinterest) Users who saw immersive, actionable ads on Pinterest were 59% more likely to recall that brand.
• 35 Game-Changing Digital Marketing Statistics You Need to Know in 2024: 40% of marketers say proving the ROI of their marketing activities is a top marketing challenge.
• 58% of marketers are challenged with targeting or segmenting their audience.
• 57% of marketers are challenged with optimizing next-best-action marketing decisions.
• 80% of marketers report their lead generation efforts are only slightly or somewhat effective.
• 42% of B2B marketing professionals state that a lack of quality data is their biggest barrier to lead generation.
• Nearly 100% of marketers surveyed believe AI will have some sort of positive impact on their organizations.
• Our recent survey found that nearly 90% of marketers plan to dedicate a budget specifically for AI tools in 2024, with almost all of them saying they’ll be investing even more than this year.
• Compared to their competitors, 87% surveyed say that their use of AI is very advanced or advanced.
• Marketers are brimming with AI confidence:93% of those surveyed boast expert or advanced knowledge, and nearly all believe their companies outpace peers in AI adoption.
• Omnichannel campaigns produce a 250% higher rate of purchase frequency than do single-channel campaigns.
• Customer retention rates are 90% higher for omnichannel campaigns than for single-channel campaigns.
• 80% of consumers say they are more likely to do business with a company if it offers personalized experiences.
• 81% of marketers are worried that their use of third-party data could raise privacy concerns.
• 28% of people who perform a local voice search go on to call the business.
• 84% of marketers report phone calls having higher conversion rates with larger order value (AOV) compared to other forms of engagement.
• 41% of organizations report having increased phone conversion rates by 25% or more in the past 12 months.
• 85% of marketers believe inbound calls and phone conversations are a key component of their organization’s digital-first strategy.
• 48% of marketers have provided or expect to provide enhanced customer experiences as a result of scaling conversation intelligence across the enterprise.
• 43% of marketers have improved or expect to improve customer acquisition and retention as a result of scaling conversation intelligence across the enterprise.
• 61 Social Media Marketing Statistics You Need To Know in 2024: 95 billion social media users worldwide in 2023, that’s just over 60% of the whole population.
• 3 billion internet users worldwide in 2023, that’s just over 65% of the whole population.
• 80% of social marketers say that their main goal is to boost engagement cross social media.
• 51% of people are more likely to share videos with friends and family over any other content type.
• Social Media Brand User Relationship Statistics 78% of consumers want brands to use social media to help people connect with each other.
• The likelihood of making a purchase is 7% if not referred by social media, users are 71% more likely if referred by social media.
• 40% of consumers expect brands to problem-solve in the channels of their choice – i.
• 70% of consumers feel more connected with a brand if their CEO is active on social media, primarily because they feel there are real people behind the brand.
• 72% of people feel more connected to a brand whose employees share information on social media, primarily as they like learning about the people who make up the brand.
• The top behaviour that users report makes them feel more connected to a brand on social media is liking or responding to comments or messages with 55% of consumers reporting that this makes them feel more in touch.
• Social Media Brand User Expectation Statistics 68% of consumers’ primary reason for following a brand on social is ‘To stay informed about new products or services’ – highlighting users’ expectations for this information to be shared on social media.
• 79% of consumers expect brands to respond to their social media messages within 24 hours.
• 72% of consumers want brands to be positive contributors to society, 64% to connect with their consumers, and 64% to use their power to help people.
• Social Media Marketing ROI Statistics Most marketers (25%) cite Instagram as the social media platform that provides them with the highest ROI.
• Less than 10% of marketers cite Twitter, Snapchat and BeReal as the best channel for ROI.
• 83% of marketers say that social media ROI is difficult to measure, with their main challenge being determining the appropriate metrics to use.
• Social Media B2B Marketing Statistics 95% of B2B marketers use social content as part of their content marketing strategy.
• LinkedIn is the most effective and top organic social media platform used by content marketers with 96% using the channel.
• 85% of B2B marketers use social media advertising/promoted posts, making it the top paid content distribution channel.
• 84% of B2B buyers or decision-makers are using social media at some point during their decision making process.
• Social Media B2C Marketing Statistics 77% of B2C brands invested in video in 2023 and social media is the most common way for marketers to share video.
• Changes to social media algorithms are a top concern B2C marketers, with 53% stating it is a worry.
• Social Commerce Marketing Statistics 47% of social media marketers say their brand sells directly within social media apps.
• Consumers aged 18-54 state that social media is the most common channel for discovering new products, with 48% on average saying they have discovered a new product on social media.
• Only 42% of social media users feel comfortable making purchases directly on social media platforms.
• Only 21% of consumers report the products they purchased on social media apps are high quality.
• Social Media Marketing Growth Statistics BeReal (313%), Twitch (29%), LinkedIn (20%) and TikTok (16%) are the social platforms that have seen the most growth in the US since May 2022.
• 90% of tiktok users report the platform makes the happy and never gets boring.
• 59% of consumers say that YouTube ads are more relevant than ads on linear TV or other streaming apps.
• read more BY:Rowan Byers 18/12/2023 TikTok Shop’s First Christmas:How Brands are Leveraging Social Commerce Solution for the Holidays Social Media Marketing 48% of Gen Z will do their holiday shopping on social media this holiday season.
• 16 Visual Content Marketing Statistics to Know for 2022 [Infographic] | Venngage: This year, more than 60% of marketers have revamped their visual content strategy.
• In fact, with IG Reels, you could score a whopping 22% more engagement, as a result, getting more Instagram followers compared to your regular video posts.
• 9% of marketers reported that over 75% of their content this year was all about visuals.
• 3% disclosed that visual content made up at least 20-50% of their overall content marketing strategy.
• With that, it’s crystal clear that visual content is a powerhouse in content marketing strategies across industries, proving to be 43% more persuasive than text alone.
• That is because more than 65% of us are visual learners who are naturally drawn to visuals, and incorporating charts into your content can increase engagement levels.
• 22% of the 105 respondents declared that charts and data visualizations take the lead as their most frequently utilized type of visual content in 2023.
• Stats have revealed that information with visuals like charts, graphs, photos and color design improves by a whopping 80%.
• Research also found that, at the start of their buying journey, about 72% of B2B consumers prefer infographics.
• 29% of marketers considered stock photos to be their top-performing visual content, 39.
• 29% revealed that they spend an average of 10-15 hours a week producing content.
• 95% of marketers invest more than 20 hours weekly in producing content.
• 54% of the 105 marketers we checked in with are using AI for their content game this year.
• As a matter of fact, it’s safe to say that AI isn’t just a new hype and is here to stay for 2024 and beyond with 35% of companies using AI in their business.
• 48% of marketers get help from in-house designers when creating visual content, most marketers (51.
• 43%) take it into their own hands to design visual content using advanced design software—such as Adobe’s suite of design tools.
• On top of that, a solid 40% of marketers opt for the simplicity of online tools or graphic makers, like Venngage, to create visuals effortlessly.
• Up to 50% of marketers struggle with finding the right design layout for their data, statistics or copy.
• Many marketers allocate 20-50% of their budget to visual content, with an additional 9.
• 71% of marketers disclosed that they allocate a substantial 20-50% towards the creation of visual content.
• 5% uptick in marketers intending to dedicate 50% or more of their budget to visual content production by 2024.
• In a survey carried out by SEMrush, 44% reported that enhancing the quality and value of their content contributed to their success, while 40% mentioned that producing additional visual and video content played a key role in improving their content marketing.
• 2%, prefer allocating the lion’s share of their budget to tools and software.
• 2% of marketers said that visual content plays a very important part in their marketing strategy.
• Since 91% of consumers prefer visuals more than plain text, it’s no wonder 56.
• They are mostly visual driven platforms that contain visuals as users are 30% more likely to send payment when visuals are involved with your marketing.
• In the context of B2B businesses, SEMrush’s respondents identified creating and posting more content (52%) as one of the primary tactics for increasing organic traffic to their websites.
• About 42% of marketers churn out up to 10 pieces of visual content each week.
• Well, close to 42% said they post somewhere around five to ten visuals a week across platforms.
• 6% were the super-active champs, posting a whopping 10 times or more each week.
• 2% of marketers put out visual content somewhere between two and five times a week.
• By the end of 2024, most marketers think that up to 50% of businesses will heavily depend on visual content as an integral component of their marketing strategy.
• Therefore, it’s no surprise that 40% of marketers foresee 20-50% of businesses heavily relying on visual content by the end of 2024, followed by more than 50%, as predicted by 31.
• 19% of marketers think that over 75% of businesses are all about visual content in their marketing game.
• Social Selling Statistics for 2022 (Includes Social Media Marketing!): Here are some social media statistics to put things in perspective:87% of buyers think that social media helps them make shopping decisions.
• 43% of customers learn about new products through social media networks.
• 71% of people are more likely to buy something based on social media referrals.
• A successful social selling program leads to increased pipeline, better win rates, and up to 48% larger deals.
• 73% of marketers say that their social media marketing efforts are ‘somewhat effective’ or ‘very effective’ for their business.
• Social media marketing has a 100% higher lead-to-close rate than outbound marketing.
• 66% of marketers who spend an average of 6 hours on social media every week get more leads.
• 60% of business-to-consumer (B2C) brands get their customers through social media.
• Instagram Shops is the most popular social media feature, used by 22% of social media marketers.
• Facebook Shops is a close second, used by 21% of social media marketers.
• A HubSpot research found that 61% of brands engaged in social selling see revenue growth.
• Social selling provides 45% more opportunities than traditional sales channels.
• More than 76% of buyers are willing to talk to salespeople over social media.
• Social selling influences over 50% of the revenue for major industries like computer and network security, software, and healthcare.
• 84% of decision-makers like CEOs and VPs use social media in their buying process.
• 90% of marketers say social media marketing has increased their business’ exposure.
• According to Snapchat, 92% of customers are willing to buy from brands on social media instead of an online marketplace.
• 75% of sales reps use Facebook to find leads, followed by Instagram, Linkedin, and YouTube.
• 33% of sales professionals say that social media offers the highest quality leads.
• 78% of salespeople who use social selling outperform peers who don’t use social media.
• Social sellers create 45% more sales opportunities than reps with a lower social selling index (SSI).
• They are 51% more likely to meet their sales quotas than non-social sellers.
• 18% of salespeople consider social selling one of their top 5 focus areas.
• Statistics:How Customers Respond to Social Selling 40% of people say they’ve purchased a product online after seeing it used by a social media influencer.
• 72% of customers trust a business more if a social media influencer recommends it.
• 71% of buyers who have had a positive social media experience with a brand recommend it to their friends and family.
• Customers report spending 20%–40% more money on brands that have interacted with them on social media.
• 49% of buyers rely on product recommendations from influencers to make purchases.
• 93% of consumers trust personal recommendations the most, a lot of which comes through social media.
• 40% of B2B buyers use social media for research before making purchasing decisions.
• 39% of B2B companies say that they have seen revenue generated from social media.
• 31% of the B2B professionals believe they have built stronger relationships with clients through social selling.
• 50% of B2B buyers use LinkedIn as a trusted source to make a purchase decision.
• 31% of B2B prospects say that social media content resonates most out of all other sales enablement content.
• 92% of B2B buyers engage with a salesperson who is a well-known industry thought leader.
• 60% of B2B marketers think social media is the second most effective lead generation strategy.
• 39% of B2B professionals claimed social selling reduced the length of time they spent researching potential leads.
• The UK-based B2B social selling and employee branding agency helped Commvault achieve 61% more pipeline and 52% more opportunities through a social selling program.
• 35 Latest Content Marketing Statistics, Trends, And Facts: Content marketing statistics sources:Conclusion Editor’s top picks – content marketing statistics These are our most interesting statistics about content marketing:82% of companies report using content marketing.
• (Source:HubSpot State of Marketing Report 2021) Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing.
• 82% of companies report using content marketing In 2020, only 70% of companies reported the same.
• This 12% increase shows that content marketing is anything but dead – it’s very much alive and kicking.
• However, the same report also found that 44% of those who don’t use content marketing yet aren’t sure if they’ll start this year.
• 79% of content marketers use content marketing to generate high-quality leads According to a recent report, generating high-quality leads is the number one priority goal of content marketing.
• Other popular goals amongst content marketers include driving traffic to their company website (75%) and improving their brand reputation (57%).
• 51% of content marketers rate the performance of their strategy as ‘good’ This suggests overall, marketers are seeing a lot of success from their content marketing efforts.
• However, although the majority rate their performance as good, only 11% rate it as excellent.
• 75% of marketers say SEO is their most efficient content marketing tactic No surprises here then.
• …And 61% said updating/repurposing existing content was the most efficient tactic As this statistic shows, content marketing isn’t just about pumping out as much new content as possible.
• Organic search is the most popular channel for content distribution 89% of companies distribute their content via organic search.
• Social media is another top distribution channel, following closely behind organic search at 87%.
• Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing… With content marketing, the biggest costs usually come from the production process.
• On average, companies allocate 26% of their marketing budget to content creation Not sure how much you should be spending on content marketing?
• 37% of companies spend less than $10,000 on content marketing SEMrush surveyed over a thousand marketers and asked them how much their companies spend on content marketing.
• … And only 4% spend $500,000+ While there were a fair number of companies that spent between $25,000 and $500,000, only 4% spent above that figure.
• 2% spent between 500k and 1M, 1% spent between 1M and 5M, and 1% spent more than 5M.
• 15% of marketers don’t know how much their company spends on content marketing Interestingly, 15% of survey respondents said they didn’t know how much they were spending on content marketing.
• However, over 60% of marketers look at their sales figures to determine the success of their content marketing efforts.
• 30% of companies outsource their content creation efforts Interestingly, a third of companies choose to outsource content creation rather than take care of it in-house.
• 92% of marketers produce blog posts If you don’t have a blog page on your company website, you’re in the minority.
• Companies with blogs produce 67% more leads per month It’s unsurprising so many companies publish blog posts given that those that do generate 67% more leads every month.
• If you’re still undecided about whether or not it’s worth investing in content marketing, ask yourself how much 67% more leads would be worth to your business?
• Posts containing frequent lists generate 70% more traffic If you’re writing long-form blog posts, don’t make the mistake of just writing a huge wall of continuous prose.
• In fact, blog posts that include at least one list per 500 words of text generate 70% more traffic than those that don’t, on average.
• Blog posts with images perform significantly better than those without According to the data, blog posts that include images generate 2-4x more traffic, 30% more shares, and 25% more backlinks.
• 39% of blog posts with no structure are low-performing By structure, we’re talking about heading tags (H2, H3, H4, etc.
• The report found that 39% of blog posts that lacked any heading tags whatsoever were low-performing.
• The average number of video minutes watched increased by 85% in 2020 In total, consumers watched 12.
• The number of long-form videos created grew by 140% last year Long-form videos are becoming more and more popular with web users.
• According to the HubSpot State of marketing report 2021, the number of videos that were 30-60 minutes in length grew by around 140% in 2020.
• In a HubSpot survey, 83% of respondents overall said that they mainly watched videos on YouTube.
• In the same HubSpot survey, 67% of respondents reported that they currently watch videos on Facebook.
• 41% of marketers said creating visual/video content was the most efficient content marketing strategy Video content is extremely popular amongst consumers, and some marketers even go as far as to say that increasing video content creation and output is the most efficient content marketing strategy.
• 42% of marketers use content automation Content automation can be an extremely useful tool for marketers.
• 88% of content marketing teams use web analytics tools Web analytics tools like Google Analytics and SEMrush and more are invaluable to content marketers.
• With that in mind, it’s no surprise that 88% of content marketing teams utilize these tools.
• 82% of content marketing teams also use SEO tools SEO tools are also extremely important for helping content marketers achieve their goals.
• Although SEO tools are slightly less popular than web analytics tools, over 80% of all content marketing reams still utilize them.
• 73% of the top marketers use content to nurture their audience When it comes to content marketing, many view it as a way to boost brand awareness.
• According to a study by Content Marketing Institute, 73% of top performers within the content marketing industry use content to nurture leads, audiences, and subscribers.
• Amongst less successful content marketers, only 38% use content in this way.
• 94% of marketers changed their content marketing strategy in response to the pandemic… The COVID-19 pandemic prompted many changes in all industries, and content marketing was also affected.
• According to Content Marketing Institute, over 90% of businesses made changes to their content strategy in response to the crisis.
• Reportedly, 70% of marketers adjusted their messaging strategy, and 64% made changes to their editorial calendars.
• …And 80% say those changes were effective Although adapting to the challenges presented by the pandemic was difficult for some marketers, 80% reported that the changes they made were effective and helped them stay on the top of their game during the unprecedented events of 2020.
• 68% of marketers expect their content marketing budget to increase this year As you can see from the statistics in this article, content marketing is an extremely effective strategy for achieving a range of goals including lead generation, building brand awareness, driving web traffic.
• As such, more than 50% of marketers expect their content marketing budget to continue rising in the year ahead.
• 1% higher win rates than those that didn’t (CSO Insights) What content marketing ‘success’ looks like will depend on your goals.
• For some companies, ‘success’ might mean increasing organic traffic by 50% in 6 months.
• 94% of marketers changed their content marketing strategy in response to the pandemic.
• 94% of marketers changed their content marketing strategy in response to the pandemic.
• 72 Essential Digital Marketing Statistics for 2024 | Safari Digital: Google is (by far) the most popular search engine Google search traffic accounts for more than 92% of total search engine traffic across desktop, mobile, and tablet devices.
• 50% of all search queries on Google contain four words or less Search terms that contain four or more words – commonly referred to as long tail keywords in the SEO community, account for more than 50% of all search queries in Google.
• Updating existing content can improve organic traffic by 437% percent A test carried out by Safari Digital found that updating old, existing website content with new information can increase the volume of web clicks by more than four times.
• The study carried out across 15 websites and more than 135 web pages found that updating the page title alone increased page clicks by 107% versus those that were not updated.
• If you’re not on page 1 of google – you have less than 1% chance of a click It’s a mind-blowing statistic, but websites that are on page 2 onwards receive less than 0.
• 65% of SEO’s admit that link building is the most difficult aspect of SEO With so many rules and a drastic price to pay for getting it wrong – most SEOs admit that link building is the most difficult aspect of search engine optimisation.
• 34% of businesses investing in SEO allocate more than $1,000 per month to Link Building The latest industry research suggests that more than one third of businesses will invest more $1,000 USD each month into link building.
• 46% of all searches include a localised intent Looking at investing in a local SEO strategy?
• 28% of searches with a local intent result in conversion Whether that is a store visit or an online purchase, a staggering 28% of all online searches that include a local search intent will result in a conversion.
• “Near Me” searches are up by 130% YOY Between 2019 and 2022, “Near Me” searches increased by a staggering 130%.
• Over the last five years, the number of users including a “Near Me” suffix in a Google search has increased by more than 500% and is projected to continue along these lines as Google’s search algorithm becomes more sophisticated.
• 61% of marketing professionals believe SEO is the key to success According to digital marketing professionals, search engine optimisation is rated as the key to ongoing business success.
• Longtail keywords encourage higher click through rate (CTR) The latest SEO statistics reveal that long tail keywords (4 or more keywords) enjoy a 3-5% higher CTR in the SERPs than keywords that are just one or two words in length.
• 70% of clicks in search engine results pages go to organic, 30% go to paid Seven out of ten users will click on an organic result over a paid result when conducting a search in the major search engines.
• 72% of users that conducted a local search found a store within 8km (5 miles) Local SEO is a highly effective way to drive local, motivated users to a bricks and mortar location.
• The latest statistics reveal that 72% of users will find a store within five miles of the location where they conducted the search.
• 56% of businesses have not claimed their free Google My Business listing More than half of all businesses have not yet claimed their google my business listing.
• 82% of businesses have not claimed their Free Bing Business Listing Perhaps not as surprising as the 56% of users that have not claimed their GMB listing, this stat reveals that more than 8/10 businesses have not bothered to claim their Bing business listing.
• With Bing commanding less than 7% of all search engine traffic, it may not be that surprising to learn.
• 81% of businesses that implemented SEO reported a positive outcome One the fence about hiring an SEO Agency for your business?
• Updating old content with new images and more content can increase traffic by more than 111%.
• Regular content marketing improves indexation rates by 434% Consistency is key when it comes to content marketing strategy.
• 72% of marketers believe relevancy is the key to successful content marketing Before you start writing about high-search topics, it’s time to check – is this relevant to my industry?
• 72% of marketers say that publishing relevant content is the key to a successful digital marketing strategy.
• Less than 40% of marketers publish content once per week Want to be at the head of your industry?
• The latest content marketing stats show that less than 40% of marketers will post content weekly.
• 73% of customers trust a business with positive online reviews Looking to convert more visitors to customers?
• Just 34% of businesses run A/B testing on their website Understanding your audience is the key to making the most of paid, social, and organic website traffic.
• 35% Getting traffic is one thing – converting that traffic to paying customers is another thing altogether.
• 21% According to Wordstream, the average conversion rate from a Facebook advertisement is 9.
• Businesses that combine PPC and SEO see 25% more clicks and 27% higher profits Who said you can only spend on one marketing channel?
• The most recent data suggests that companies that take a multi-channel approach that incorporates SEM and SEO see 27% higher profits than businesses that take a single channel approach.
• Adblock software is up from 15% to 30% since 2014 Users don’t want to be bombarded with advertisements on their favourite websites.
• The latest statistics show that 30% of online users have adblock extensions or software which prevents advertisements from being shown in the display network.
• Search Ads can increase awareness by up to 80% According to Google, search ads can increase brand awareness by as much as 80% for businesses.
• 49% of users will click on a text advertisement According to data from search engine land, almost half of all users will click on a text advertisement in the search engine results pages.
• Only 43% of users can tell the difference between organic and paid listings There is no getting around it, Google has consciously integrated paid advertisements into the organic listings over the last few years.
• 92% of users will access the internet from a mobile device More than 9/10 users will access the internet from their mobile device in 2022.
• Websites that take more than five seconds to load can expect to receive 70% less mobile sessions than those that load in under three seconds.
• According to Google, a delay of just one-second can mean a 20% drop in conversions.
• More than 30% of users will conduct a mobile search before visiting a store It doesn’t matter if you are a bricks and mortar retailer that generates all sales through your physical locations – your online presence matters.
• 43% of users conduct an online search while they are in a store The latest statistics show that almost half of us will conduct a mobile search while standing in a store.
• 69% of mobile device users say that they are more likely to buy from an online business that answers their questions Got an FAQ list that needs updating?
• A whopping 69% of users say that they will buy with a store that effectively answers their questions.
• 66% of e-Commerce sessions come from mobile, but less than 30% of conversions come from mobile devices While 2/3 of customers will browse a product online, most will turn to their desktop to make the final purchase.
• More than 50% of search engine use will include voice or image search Voice assistants such as Amazon Alexa, Apple Siri, and Google Home mean that voice search prevalence is increasing in organic search.
• 88% of customers check online reviews before making a purchase Almost 9/10 customers check online reviews before making a purchase online.
• 57% of users will avoid purchasing from a website with a poor mobile design Users have more choice than ever before, so it means that they can be more selective with who they shop with.
• 27% of Google users already use voice search Voice search statistics show that more and more users are using voice search each year.
• 52% of Voice Assistants are in the living room Convenience from your living room is paramount with more than half of all voice assistants in the living room.
• According to Price Water House Coopers, a staggering 52% of all voice search assistant devices are located in the living room of the home.
• The Bedroom (25%) and Kitchen (22%) account for the remaining majority share of voice search device locations.
• 53% of voice assistant owners feel comfortable talking to smart speakers While it may have seemed like a novelty 2-3 years ago, users are feeling increasingly comfortable using voice assistant devices to conduct searches.
• 73% of drivers use a voice device in their car The latest insights from Voice Bot suggest that as many of 73% of drivers will use an in-car voice assistant in their car.
• This number is an increase on the previous recorded figure of 49% and is indicative of the number of new cars that are now fitted with voice AI capability from the factory.
• 33% According to EDM service provider Mailchimp, the average open rate for email direct marketing across all industries in 2019 was 21.
• 77% According to the same study, Government emails have the highest email open rate at 28.
• 03% Users have spoken – vitamin supplement companies have the lowest open rates in the industry.
• 93% of email users will check their email at least once per day The latest statistics show that users are highly engaged with their emails with most users checking their email at least once each day.
• Less than 22% of companies personalise emails based on user insights It is interesting to note that despite having age, demographic, and a whole host of other user data, less than one quarter of businesses are using this data to personalise the EDM experience.
• Web pages that include a video are 53% more likely to be displayed on page 1 of Google Videos improve engagement and conversion rates, so what about your SEO efforts?
• According to the most recent data, web pages that embed a video in an article or web page are 53% more likely to be displayed on page one of Google.
• 88% of marketers recommend video marketing Whether you are complementing your SEO or PPC efforts with a video, or you are creating standalone videos – more than 88% of marketers believe that videos are an effective way to reach customers.
• An uptake of more than 30% makes it the most popular affiliate network in the world.
• 53% of all affiliate traffic comes from mobile devices Mobile devices now – for the first time ever, are the leading force behind online affiliate traffic.
• Amazon affiliates pay 1 to 10% commission The latest data shows that amazon affiliate programs pay between 1 to 10% of the purchase price (minus shipping, taxes, and fees) in commission.
• 180+ Social Media Marketing Statistics for 2024: This means that 93% of people who technically CAN have a social media account, have one.
• The percentage of the world’s people who use social media has grown from 50% in 2020 to 61% in 2024.
• Currently an astronomical 80% of all social media activity happens on mobile.
• 8% Twitter:80% Pinterest:85% LinkedIn:57% Social media’s year-on-year growth rate suggests that, while usage is still climbing, it is slowing down slightly.
• 2022 saw an increase of only 3%, comfortably the lowest recorded in the last decade.
• Facebook:31% YouTube:22% Twitter:13% Instagram:11% Reddit:7% Snapchat:4% Social Media Platforms – Comparative Usage Based on their total number of monthly active users (MAU), the 15 most popular social networks in the world are:Facebook (2.
• South Korea, despite their modest usage, comes in second with 92% and Hong Kong is third with 89.
• When it comes to men using social networks to consume news content, men are far more likely to use Reddit than women – the split is at 67% vs 31%.
• Other platforms where men consume news content more than women are Twitter and YouTube – both split at 56% vs 43%.
• Social Media Marketing Facts and Statistics General Social Media Marketing Statistics In a comprehensive research project, Hubspot found that 77% of professional marketers felt that their social media efforts were “somewhat effective” to “very effective”.
• 54% of marketing professionals choose short-form video as their top content format with live streaming coming in second.
• 9% Very ineffective Social Media and Online Commerce The venn diagram of “people who buy things online” and “people who spend time on social media” looks very much like a circle.
• Currently, 97% of online shoppers say that they have accessed social media in the preceding month.
• 40% of this demographic says that they have bought an item on a social media commerce channel.
• 77% of both B2B and B2C marketers use this tactic in their Facebook and Instagram campaigns – 8% more than on Google advertising.
• In a recent survey, Insider Intelligence found that there was an 8% drop in this metric between 2021 and 2022.
• 13% of people surveyed say that a visible “buy” button on the social platform will make them more likely to complete a purchase.
• Nearly half of consumers (49%) rely on influencer recommendations to make purchase decisions.
• In fact, 72% of online shoppers in the US have written a social media review for a local business at some point.
• 71% of people who had a positive experience on social media with a customer service agent recommended that brand to someone in their network.
• Between 2020 and 2021, the number of people seeking customer service via social channels grew by an astonishing 100%.
• More than a third of consumers (36%) share their customer service experiences on social media.
• 50% of people surveyed said that a “timely response” to their queries influenced their decision to make a purchase from the brand.
• 8% of American Facebook users over the age of 16 preferred watching short-form videos on Facebook than on TikTok.
• Between January and April of this year, the platform’s global advertising reach increased by 13%.
• Although brands in certain sectors (retail, fitness, apparel, legal, beauty) see a higher average CTR of 1%.
• 57% of brands feel that Stories were a “pivotal” part of their social media campaigns.
• Approximately 33% of Twitter’s users have a college degree and earn at least $75,000 per year.
• According to Twitter’s own analytics, their users spend 26% longer watching marketing posts than on any other platform.
• Twitter is the world’s third-most actively used social media app with 55% of the platform’s users logging on daily.
• “Job title” is (by far) the most common item in users’ profile bios with 23% of all users including this info.
• According to the Twitter Agency Playbook, the platform has seen an average 35% year-on-year increase in engagement with advertising content.
• 1% of all Singaporeans over the age of 13 are potential advertising targets on Twitter – the largest percentage of any country’s population.
• 2% of the platform’s user base say that they use it for staying up to date with what’s happening in the world.
• 82% of marketers surveyed said that they actively promote their content on the platform.
• Twitter is also a very popular place for offering customer service, with 32% of brands actively using it to interact with customers.
• 98% of marketers surveyed said that the photo sharing app is where they see the best ROI.
• 80% of surveyed Instagram users say that they use the platform to help them make a decision on whether or not to buy a specific product or service.
• Instagram marketing is tremendously popular in the fashion industry with 98% of all major fashion brands having a presence on the platform.
• This puts the platform in second place behind Facebook, which boasts a figure of 60%.
• 90% of Instagram’s massive user base follows at least one brand on the platform.
• Brands that are active on Instagram can expect to grow their followers by roughly 1% every month.
• Despite growing distrust in social media advertising, 50% of Instagram users report being more interested in a brand when they see an advert for it on the platform.
• 91% of marketers currently investing in it will increase their spend in 2024.
• 29% of marketers will make it a part of their social media strategy for the first time.
• 70% of viewers who watched a video about a specific product, ended up making a purchase from the brand.
• The platform’s ability to convert viewers into customers is also supported by a survey in which 80% of marketers responded that their YouTube campaigns increased their sales figures.
• More than half (55%) of digital marketers use YouTube in their social media marketing campaigns.
• 29% of survey respondents said that skippable ads were their first choice, while only 7% opted for non-skippable ads.
• 0% the total audience) It is crucial for marketers looking for success on YouTube to become experts in the platform’s SEO logics.
• Brand exposure through contact with an advertisement on LinkedIn sees a 33% boost in purchase intent amongst the platform’s users.
• The majority (31%) of LinkedIn’s desktop traffic comes from the US, however.
• 2022 saw a 22% increase in the amount of times its audience likes, shares, or comments on posts.
• LinkedIn boats some extremely impressive B2B lead-generation statistics:40% of B2B marketers surveyed replied that the platform is the most effective for generating high-quality leads.
• On average, a lead costs 28% less on LinkedIn than one generated on Google AdWords.
• Having a well-populated profile on LinkedIn results in a much higher visibility (30% more views per week) for a company page.
• Currently the platform boasts a 15% year-on-year uptake in advertisers.
• In a recent study, Statista found that only 18% or surveyed marketers are actively using TikTok.
• The tone of TikTok UGC and advertising on the platform is so similar that 15% of surveyed users said that they can’t tell the difference between the two.
• Currently 35% of all TikTok users have participated in at least one of these.
• As can be expected from a platform that specializes in short-form content, advertising content that leads with the primary message is 63% more effective than ads with a drawn-out sales pitch.
• The platform’s own research revealed that 50% of users who watched a brand’s live stream purchased an item from that brand.
• Its average cost per impression figure is 50% of Instagram’s and 33% of Twitter’s.
• The platform’s research claims that 92% of its users will either visit the brand’s website, participate in a challenge, or make a purchase.
• 42% of the app’s users say that having their spirits lifted is key to them making a purchase from the advertiser.
• 65% of surveyed users say that influencer content and user reviews play a role in their purchasing decisions.
• 8% of Snapchat’s total ad audience) Snapchat advertising and sponsorship averages and estimates :Snap Ads:The cost varies depending on the campaign, with a minimum starting budget of $3,000 per month in ad spend.
• 65% of the platform’s users will share a recent purchase to their story, creating significant awareness for the brand.
• 2%) of Snapchat users are on the platform to follow a specific brand or research products they are interested in.
• 75% of people who use it weekly put themselves in the “always shopping” category 50% of Pinterest users are on the platform specifically to shop online.
• Pinterest users engaging with online shopping is growing 20% year-on-year Pinterest’s penetration rate is highest in the US (30.
• Of all the users who visit Pinterest weekly, 85% have made a purchase from a brand’s pin.
• From a Return on Ad Spend (ROAS) perspective, Pinterest offers a 32% better return than other digital platforms.
• 80% of surveyed Pinterest users say that they have discovered a new brand while using the platform.
• 97% of Pinterest users that use the search feature, are not looking for specific brand items.
• Referrals from Reddit result in 5% more sales than those coming from YouTube and 6% more than Twitter.
• 8 billion social media users worldwide, we’re talking about 60% of the global population!
• Digital Marketing ROI Statistics and Guide: Digital Marketing ROI Statistics Before we dig into the good stuff, let’s start with the key statistics:Digital Marketing ROI Statistics Email marketing has the best average ROI at a huge 3,600%SEO marketing has an average ROI ratio of 22:1, equating to 2,200%!
• Not only is it 40% better at converting in comparison to platforms like Facebook and Twitter, but for every $1 invested, businesses see an average of $36 dollars in return.
• According to research carried out by Litmus, this could increase your ROI by up to 107%.
• On average, 53% of traffic for your business will be driven by organic searching.
• Getting it right is pretty important, given that content marketing is 62% less expensive than outbound marketing efforts, like email blasts, but still manages to provide three times as many leads!
• Technical SEO, such as optimizing your site for mobile, has an ROI of 117% and sees bigger returns than plain ol’ Standard Content Marketing with just a 16% ROI.
• Thought Leadership Marketing, which focuses on audience personas, is the most successful however with an average 748% ROI.
• For example, 89% of marketers claim that the ROI generated from influencer marketing is comparable, if not higher, than that for other platforms.
• In fact, social media recently stole the advertising crown from paid search, boasting year-on-year growth of 25% and exceeding $137 billion compared to the $135 billion made by search.
• 80+ Essential Social Media Marketing Statistics for 2022: Here are some of the most interesting stats we discovered:77% of social media marketers say social media marketing has been somewhat to very effective for their company this year.
• What’s more, 37% of marketers who said social media marketing was somewhat to very ineffective cited COVID-19, likely due to the rapid change in strategy.
• 82% of marketers say they repurpose content across social media channels.
• Short-form videos is the top social media format used by 54% of social media marketers, followed by live streaming, live audio chatrooms, and user-generated content.
• 80% of marketers say funny content is the most effective on social media.
• 84% of marketers target Millennials as part of their social media strategy.
• The biggest challenge marketers face on social media is creating engaging content, reported by 27% of respondents.
• 67% of marketers say they work with micro-influencers with 10K-100K followers or subscribers.
• Conversely, only 29% say they work with mega influencers with more than 1 million followers.
• 25% of respondents said they believe funny content is most effective with Gen Z.
• Image Source Channel-Specific Social Media Statistics Facebook Statistics In a 2021 HubSpot Blog poll, 79% of marketers report buying paid advertising on Facebook.
• (HootSuite) Facebook is a popular source of news with 31% of Americans regularly getting their news from the platform.
• (Pew Research) According to the same poll, more than 50% of marketers plan on increasing their investments in Facebook, YouTube, and TikTok in 2022.
• (HubSpot) Facebook ads are used by 70% of marketers, and there were 10 million active advertisers on the platform in Q3 2021.
• (Statista) In a HubSpot Blog poll, 79% of marketers plan to continue investing in Twitter Spaces in 2022.
• (HubSpot) Link clicks account for 92% of all user interaction with tweets.
• (Twitter) 99% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll say they plan to continue to invest the same amount or increase their investment in Twitter.
• (HubSpot) 93% of Twitter community members are open to brands getting involved in conversation, such as providing help and support.
• Instagram Statistics In a 2021 HubSpot Blog poll, 58% of marketers plan to leverage Instagram Reels in 2022.
• (Statista) 20% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll report generating the biggest ROI when working with influencers on Instagram, only behind Facebook.
• (HubSpot) 98% of marketers say Instagram is the most influential platform for influencer marketing, which is 44% higher than Facebook.
• (Sprout Social) 61% of social media marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll say they plan to increase their investment in 2022.
• (Instagram) In a 2021 HubSpot Blog poll, 73% of marketers prefer Instagram for influencer marketing.
• (eMarketer) As of January 2022, 59% of LinkedIn users were between 25 and 34 years old.
• (LinkedIn) 87% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog survey said LinkedIn offered average or high ROI.
• (HubSpot) 82% of B2B markers report finding the greatest success on LinkedIn.
• (LinkedIn Marketing Solutions) Over 46% of all social media traffic to company websites comes from LinkedIn.
• (LinkedIn) 40% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog survey say they plan to increase their investment in the platform in 2022.
• 5% of marketers use YouTube for influencer marketing, according to a 2021 eMarketer report.
• (eMarketer) 50% of social media marketers surveyed by the HubSpot Blog say they plan to increase their investment in YouTube in 2022.
• In fact, 20% of respondents say they plan to invest in this platform the most.
• (Statista) In a 2021 HubSpot Blog poll, 44% of marketers plan to leverage YouTube for the first time in 2022.
• (YouTube) YouTube accounts for more than 25% of total worldwide mobile traffic.
• (HootSuite) TikTok Statistics 70% of TikTok users agree they feel a deeper connection to people they interact with on TikTok compared to other social networks.
• (TikTok) In a 2021 HubSpot Blog poll, 61% of marketers plan to increase their investment in TikTok marketing in 2022.
• (HootSuite) 61% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll say they plan to increase their investment in TikTok in 2022.
• (HubSpot) 12% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll say they work with influencers the most on TikTok.
• (Statista) 50% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll plan to increase their investment in Reddit.
• (Reddit) 23% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll plan to leverage Reddit for the first time in 2022.
• (Statista) Only 2% of social media marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog plan to invest in Reddit the most in 2022.
• (HubSpot) 49% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll buy paid ads on Reddit.
• (HubSpot) Reddit is an unlikely place for influencer marketing but 38% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll say they work with influencers on the platform.
• Whether you’re considering hiring an external social media consulting service or creating a role in-house, take a look at these trends that demonstrate the importance of social media consulting:Answering a complaint on social media can increase customer advocacy by 25%.
• (Convince & Convert) 79% of consumers expect brands to respond within a day of reaching out over social media, but average brand response rates across all industries is lower than 25%.
• (Sprout Social) 79% of people say that user-generated content on social media significantly impacts their purchasing decisions.
• 61 Social Media Marketing Statistics You Need To Know in 2024: Influencer Marketing Global Landscape Statistics Globally, 72% of marketers work with influencers and creators on Instagram, making it the top social media platform marketers state they work with influencers and creators on.
• 80% of marketers work with smaller creators/influencers with under 100k followers.
• 25% of marketing agencies and brands devote between 10 and 20% of their marketing budget to influencer marketing.
• Globally, 39% of brands, marketing professionals and agencies state they work with up to 10 influencers.
• Influencer marketers work with influencers/creators in fashion the most (41%), followed by lifestyle/vlog (40%), fitness/health (37%), food (34%), travel (33%), and family (33%).
• 35% of consumers in the US said they had purchased a product or service promoted by virtual influencers.
• 67% of marketers plan to increase their budget for influencer marketing in the next 12 months.
• Influencer fraud is on the decrease, with just 37% accounts impacted in 2022 compared to 50% in 2021.
• Influencer Marketing Benefits & Engagement Statistics 62% of social media users trust influencers over A-list celebrities, as they feel influencers authentically share their love for specific brands and products.
• 32% of marketers state ‘increased engagement’ as the metric most effectively fulfilled by influencer marketing, making it the top metric.
• 19% cited ‘social media traffic increase’ and 11% mentioned a lifting of brand metrics.
• Social media influencer posts are the number 1 way to get people to try new products with 35% of people stating it has made them try something new.
• 32% of Gen Z have bought a purchase as a result of an influencer’s recommendation.
• Influencer Marketing ROI Statistics Instagram yields the highest ROI for influencer marketing with 30% of marketers stating it is their top channel for ROI.
• 20% say they get their biggest ROI from Facebook and the same for YouTube, whereas 14% claim it to be TikTok.
• 29% of influencers in the US would work with a brand just for free products if they loved the brand.
• 51% say that influencer marketing has helped them to acquire better customers.
• B2B Influencer Marketing Statistics 86% of B2B brands consider their influencer marketing successful.
• The top qualities that B2B marketers look for in a B2B influencer are:relevance of audience (98%), audience sees them as trustworthy (87%) and subject matter expertise (78%).
• Webinars are the top favoured form of B2B influencer marketing content at 81%, followed by social media 74% and blog posts 71%.
• 30% of B2B marketers in the US planned to explore influencer marketing more in 2023.
• 73%, Mid-tier influencers with 50,000 to 500,000 followers representing 6.
• 38% and finally,mega-influencers and celebrities with more than one million subscribers who account for 0.
• TikTok Influencer Marketing Statistics TikTok influencers with 1,000 to 10,000 followers make up 67% of TikTok influencer accounts worldwide.
• This is followed by micro-influencers with 10,000 to 50,000 followers with 23% and mid-tier influencers with 50,000 to 500,000 followers, accounting 9.
• YouTube Influencer Marketing Statistics People and blogs is the most popular category for YouTube influencers with 21% of posted influencer videos being related to this topic.
• Media company videos follows with 6% and brand aggregator content at 2%.
• Top 150 B2B Marketing Statistics for 2024:Trends, SEO, & More: 38 is the average CPC for Twitter ads 86% of B2B marketers use Twitter for content marketing 29% of B2B marketers use Twitter ads for content marketing Facebook $7.
• 97 is the average CPC for Facebook ads 83% of B2B marketers use Facebook for content marketing 66% of B2B marketers use Facebook ads for content marketing 43% of B2B marketers obtained clients through Facebook Instagram $7.
• 56 is the average CPC for Instagram ads 46% of B2B marketers use Instagram for content marketing 17% of B2B marketers use Instagram ads for content marketing B2B video marketing statisticsVideo is one of the top B2B marketing trends for 2024, but why?
• Today, 56% of B2B companies use their in-house team, plus a third-party partner to market their business online.
• [Updated] Digital Marketing Statistics 2024 – Don’t Miss These Updates!: 49% of businesses say that organic search brings them the best marketing ROI.
• Over 20% of companies say the leads generated is the main factor they base on their success of their marketing channels.
• When asked, “What factors lead to success in content marketing,” 55% of marketers say creating more content and posting more often.
• Content marketing generates three times as many leads as traditional outbound marketing but costs 62% less.
• 69% of the most successful businesses plan to increase their content marketing budgets—that’s impressive.
• 49% of businesses say that organic search brings the best marketing ROI.
• 70% of internet users want to learn about products through content versus traditional advertisements.
• Only 58% of marketers say they are often successful in achieving their marketing goals.
• Jab* Jab* 34% of consumers prefer to learn about products by searching the internet, highlighting the importance of optimizing your website for SEO.
• 70% of companies are investing in content marketing, which encompasses visual marketing strategies.
• 57% of content downloads generate leads with the highest conversion rates.
• Long-form content will get 77% more backlinks and triple the traffic compared to shorter posts.
• Here are some of the biggest challenges when it comes to content and email marketing— Limited internal resources 28%, lack of strategy 28%, and lack of content 23%.
• 8% is the average conversion rate for websites using video, compared to 2.
• 71% of consumers who have had a good social media service experience with a brand is likely to recommend it to others.
• 30% of millennials engage with a brand on social at least once a month.
• Almost 90% of marketers say their social marketing efforts have increased exposure for their business, and 75% say they’ve increased traffic.
• A whopping 93% of brands claim to have gotten a new customer from a video posted on one of their social media channels.
• 94% of marketers use Facebook advertising regularly, which translates to about 3 million businesses that use Facebook for marketing.
• 51% of web traffic referrals from social media (Hootsuite)There is a “trust” factor when it comes to Instagram and the users behind the app.
• “With a good presence on Instagram, businesses can cater to their clients’ needs much easier, as 70% of them don’t mind ads when watching videos on Instagram.
• 42% of internet users have an annual income of $75,000 or more use Instagram.
• 77% of content marketers say LinkedIn produces the best organic results.
• (almost 60% of LinkedIn’s users) “It’s not a surprise that more than half of LinkedIn users are in the age group starting and growing their careers.
• Ad spending on X dropped by 71% in December 2022 (Reuters) Most of X’s audience (38.
• 54% (Statcounter) Google has been and still will be on top when it comes to being your dedicated search engine.
• 6% close rate, while outbound leads (such as direct mail or print advertising) have a 1.
• 6% (Backlinko)The #1 result in Google has a 10x higher CTR compared to the #10 result.
• (Ahrefs)On the local SEO front, 76% of people who search on their smartphones for something nearby visit a business within a day.
• 24 Financial Content Marketing Stats to Prepare for 2024 | NYTLicensing: 47% of buyers view 3-5 pieces of content before engaging with a sales rep.
• 90% of loan and mortgage consumers, 85% of check-cashing consumers, and 76% of tax return preparation consumers start their journey with an online search.
• Almost 9 out of 10 of investors surveyed (86%) are spending an hour or more researching.
• Searches for “mobile banking app” increased around the world by more than 100% when compared to the previous year.
• 80% of people appreciate learning about a company through custom content.
• The top content marketing challenges financial organizations face or expect to face is lack of resources (37%), inability to measure effectiveness (37%), and lack of budget (36%).
• Futhermore, more than 50% of banks either do not measure their marketing ROI, or only measure it in less than 25% of their campaigns.
• When marketing financial products or services, respondents reported that 28% of marketers view their in-house talent as competently trained in marketing technology.
• While 95% of financial marketers say they are familiar with content to some degree, 46% say they are not an expert but they know a thing or two.
• The top three content marketing activities for financial marketers included social media marketing (77%), digital display advertising (62%), and video content (53%).
• There is a 52% average finish rate for content pertaining to the finance industry.
• The financial services sector makes up over 14% of overall spend in online advertising.
• According to Google, mobile searches related to “financial planning and management” and “best credit card(s)” have increased by 70% over the last two years.
• More than 50% of online investors aren’t tied to a brand when beginning their search.
• More than half (51%) of Americans are now using some form of contactless payment.
• In addition, 41% of web traffic to the finance industry comes from organic search.
• 53% of senior marketers plan to bring in external martech support to plug gaps in their knowledge.
• 59% of decision-makers believe that thought leadership content is a more trustworthy way to evaluate a company.
• 82% of marketers report actively using content marketing, up 70% from last year.
• 75 Digital Marketing Statistics:Stats, Facts & Trends: Open rates for emails are the highest (at 24%) from 6pm to 11pm.
• (Annual Email Marketing Report) 72% of people claim that being able to check social media takes the guesswork out of buying a new product.
• (Influence Central) 67% of marketers use a marketing automation platform to help with lead generation and organization.
• 5% higher open rates and 152% higher click-through rates than create and send marketing messages 63% of emails are opened on mobile devices Those using Campaign Monitor (which accounts for a small percentage of actual email marketers) sent 31.
• 9% find it totally unacceptable 80% of people prefer an email signature with a professional title such as CEO, VO, etc.
• In fact 60% of people look to recipes, 57% to photos/videos/images, 53% to testimonials, 51% to reader comments, and 42% look to life hacks when it comes to buying products or services.
• In Databox’s latest survey, it was reported that 40-70% of marketers’ qualified leads aren’t yet ready to buy – which means there’s a lot of work to be done to land a conversion.
• Instagram nabs 19% more clicks than the same ads on Facebook or Twitter.
• After all, high-quality content has the ability to drive traffic to a blog by up to 2,000%.
• 33% of searches result in a page 1 Google organic click Pages 2 and 3 of Google only get 5.
• According to Statista, the main reason people abandon their online shopping carts is because they find out near the end of the checkout process that the shipping costs are too high (63% of people agree).
• According to Drift’s 2019 State of Conversational Marketing, 34% of customers struggle with finding answers to simple questions while shopping online.
• In addition, this study found:Instant communication is a must – 44% of people want an instant response when talking to a live person online.
• The means of communication are changing – Only 14% of people prefer filling out an online form on a website when they have a question, compared to the 86% of people that want to use a chatbot instead.
• The leaders in chatbot communication are retailers – 40% of people claim to have engaged with an online retailer via chatbot within the last 12 months.
• Following behind are healthcare providers (22%), utility companies (21%), and entertainment companies (20%).
• Social Media Marketing Statistics:44 Stats For Marketers In 2023: 82% Of The US Population Has At Least One Social Media Profile The chance of getting your organization’s messaging to consumers in the US is easier than ever.
• Because you can find up to 82% of the US populace on at least one social media platform.
• 90% Of Social Media Marketers Are Confident Of Bringing In A Positive ROI In 2023 The 2023 State of Social Media report shows many social media marketers want to prove their ROI.
• 20% Of Gen Z, Millennial, & Gen X Social Media Users Contact Brands Through DMs This stat from HubSpot’s Social Media Report should be enough to get you interacting with your fans online.
• 87% Of Social Media Marketers Think Consumers Will Find Brands On Social Media More Often Than Through Search Engines This isn’t hypothetical.
• The HubSpot Social Media report says, “Almost a quarter (24%) of consumers aged 18-54 already go to social media first to search for brands.
• 90% Of Social Media Marketers Say Building An Active Online Community Is Critical To Success In 2023 (HubSpot Social Media Report) As a marketer, you spend a lot of time, energy, and resources to connect with, engage, and share information with followers.
• 48% Of Social Media Marketers Share Similar Content Across Various Platforms (HubSpot Social Media Report) Creating fresh content for each social media platform is hard work.
• 33% Of Social Media Marketers Plan To Invest Most In Short-Form Videos In 2023 (HubSpot Social Media Report) Short-form videos like Instagram reels and stories, TikTok videos, and YouTube shorts are great for generating brand awareness.
• 96% Of Marketers Say Video Marketing Has Increased User Understanding Of Their Product Or Service If a picture is worth a thousand words, then a video will be worth tens of thousands or a million words.
• 87% Of Marketers Say Video Marketing Has Helped Them Increase Sales According to a Wyzowl report, this figure has skyrocketed from a meager 64% in 2015.
• 47% of a Facebook Ad’s Performance Is Based on Images 23% Of Marketers Are Exploring Social Media For Targeted Ads If you want to get leads or customers at the door fast, consider using social media ads like most marketers.
• 93% Of Social Media Advertisers Use Facebook Advertising For your content to break through the noise on Facebook, you have to boost your posts or turn them into advertisements.
• 49% Of 18 To 29-Year-Olds Have Purchased Something They Saw In A Social Media Ad The younger generation’s journey to purchasing a product is changing.
• 37% Of Facebook Users Who Click On An Ad Make A Purchase Facebook is one of the most popular social media advertising platforms.
• 90% Across all industries, WordStream found that the average click-through rate of Facebook ads is .
• 47% Of A Facebook Ad’s Performance Is Based On Images This data from a Databox study proves you have to include dynamic images in your Facebook ads.
• 55% of respondents said video content drives more ad clicks on Facebook.
• 91% Of Americans Are Using Social Media With 91% of Americans active on different social networks, using social media can help get your business in front of them at the right time.
• 7% Are Female If your business is looking to target a large number of males or females, start with Facebook.
• 73% Of US Facebook Users Have a College Degree Targeting an educated audience?
• 55% Of LinkedIn Users in the United States Are From High-income Households After LinkedIn, Twitter comes at 46%, Twitch at 43%, Reddit and Tumblr at 41%.
• 42% Of 12 to 34-Year-Olds Use Twitter This data from the Infinite Dial shows Twitter is still an active platform for young people.
• 3% of 25 to 44 Year Olds Use Facebook About 2 Billion People Use Facebook Daily 7% of Gen Z Facebook Users Plan to Quit the Platform in 2023 49.
• 3% Of 25 To 44-Year-Olds Use Facebook While most Facebook users are under 50, don’t count the older generations out just yet.
• 7% Of Gen Z Facebook Users Plan To Quit The Platform In 2023 Seven percent isn’t a mass exodus from Meta.
• What’s concerning is that 25% of Gen Z also plan to spend less time on the platform.
• 48% Of 30-to-64-Year-Old Americans Get News From Instagram Pew Research found that almost half of American adults get news from Instagram.
• 61% Of 12-to-17-Year-Olds Use Instagram Weekly This figure increased from 57% to 61% when Facebook use by this demographic declined to 40%.
• TikTok Statistics TikTok Statistics TikTok Has 1 billion Global Active Users 69% of 12-to-17-Year-Olds Use TikTok Weekly TikTok Has Multiple Audience Categories TikTok Has 1 Billion Global Active Users One billion users is a huge milestone because TikTok launched in 2016.
• 69% Of 12-to-17-Year-Olds Use TikTok Weekly The Gen Z love entertainment.
• Snapchat Statistics Snapchat Statistics Snapchat Has 750 Million Monthly Active Users Most Snapchat Users Are Gen Z and Millennials Snapchat Comprises Less Than 2% Of the US Digital Ad Market Snapchat Has 750 Million Monthly Active Users This figure is valid as of July 2023, according to Snapchat.
• Most Snapchat Users Are Gen Z & Millennials Snapchat reaches 90% of the 13 to 24-year-old population and 75% of the 13 to 34-year-old population in over 20 countries.
• Snapchat Comprises Less Than 2% Of The US Digital Ad Market Snapchat has many users, but most are millennials.
• 55% of respondents said video content drives more ad clicks on Facebook.
• 15 Digital Marketing Mediums Infographic – Stats To Help Your Business: According to statistics, marketers with documented strategies and marketers with a strategy including defined processes are respectively 538% and 466% more likely to achieve success.
• Currently, about 97% of marketers use social media to reach their audience and approximately 76% of consumers have purchased a product they have viewed through social media posts.
• Shoppers spend 138% more when approached via emails and the average return rate is $38 for every $1 that is spent.
• It comes as no surprise that email is a popular means of communication across all industries and used by 86% of professionals for business communication.
• About 94% of consumers exit a website with poor graphics and 57% of mobile users do not recommend a website with a poor design.
• Many marketers have realized the benefits of content marketing and approximately 70% of them invest actively in content marketing, allowing them to generate an average of 3 times more leads as compared to paid marketing.
• Almost all businesses invest in some sort of graphic design with approximately 69% of marketers saying they consider visual content to be either very important or an absolutely necessary component of their content marketing strategy.
• Many businesses have discovered the benefits of SEO and therefore approximately 64% of marketers actively invest in SEO.
• Statistics show that revenue increases by around 23% when branding is consistent across all channels.
• About 75% of companies who implement marketing automation witness a positive ROI in their first year, while 63% have been known to outperform competitors through marketing automation.
• Companies with successful lead generation techniques have 50% more sales-ready leads and 56% of organizations exceed their revenue goals due to effective lead generation.
• In fact, about 90% of people have been known to make an online purchase sometime in their life and 80% in the past month alone.
• Product videos are known to be able to increase purchases by over 144% and videos on landing pages can improve conversions by 86%.
• Statistics show that about 48% of users feel frustrated after visiting a poorly optimized website on their mobile device, while 88% of them say they wouldn’t return to the website after having a poor experience.
• In fact, over 94% of a consumer’s impressions are design-related, while 75% of people form an impression about a brand based on its website aesthetics.
• 25 Content Marketing Statistics for 2024 | NYTLicensing: As a whole, 90% of all organizations use content in their marketing efforts.
• In addition, content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing channels, and of these leads, they are 6 times as likely to convert.
• In fact, content marketing works so well that 73% of B2B marketers and 70% of B2C marketers use content marketing as part of their overall marketing strategy.
• According to HubSpot, 90% of marketers using short-form video will increase or maintain their investment this year.
• Furthermore, 50% of marketers are creating and sharing video content, with short-form video content being the most popular.
• A CMI report found that 80% of respondents report that creating brand awareness is their number one goal, 72% of respondents want to build credibility and trust, and 68% say educating audiences with their content is their third priority.
• With voice search accounting for at least 20% of all mobile searches on the web, this will mark a shift in how brands will produce content in 2024.
• In fact, 88% of marketers who already invest in SEO plan to maintain or increase their investment.
• In fact, 33% of Gen Zers have bought a product based on an influencer’s recommendation in the past three months.
• Additionally, 89% of marketers who already use influencer marketing plan to keep up or increase their investment.
• A full 96% of marketers choose to use Linkedin for organic social marketing, with the runner-up being Facebook at 80%, and Twitter at 71%.
• LinkedIn is still the most popular, with 80% of surveyed B2B brands using LinkedIn paid ads.
• In 2023, 70% of Content Marketers Reported Having a Strong Content Strategy in Place.
• In 2024, B2B technology organizations reported using email marketing 44% of the time and email newsletters 39% of the time.
• 74% of Content Marketers Craft Content Based on Specific Stages of the Customer Journey.
• 79% of marketers say that blog posts are an effective channel to distribute content, reach customers, and build brand awareness.
• This is followed by 56% choosing in-person events and only 15% choosing online learning platforms.
• 90% of B2B marketers report that they use their brand’s social media platforms to distribute their content to their audience.
• Comparatively, 73% reported using email newsletters and 56% used webinars.
• 59% of Marketers who measure content marketing rate their ability to demonstrate the ROI as excellent or very good.
• 48% of B2B marketers think that their brand needs to improve both the quality and conversions of their audiences.
• 63% of content marketers report that content marketing has helped them to build loyalty with customers.
• 81% of respondents said that content marketing helped them to create brand awareness, and 63% of respondents reported success in building a growing loyalty with existing clients and customers.
• Only 28% of Marketers Rate Their Organization’s Overall Level of Content Marketing as Extremely Successful.
• 100 Digital Marketing Statistics to Support Your 2022 Strategy | Marketing Evolution: 88 percent of mobile users who search for a store on Google Maps visit a related store within a week – and 76% visit within a week.
• Leaders are 53% more likely to think machine learning assists marketing teams in evaluating data to understand consumer intent.
• 5 percent of total global retail sales by 2021 More than two thirds of e-commerce website traffic comes from Google, with 43% coming from organic and 26% coming from CPC.
• 100+ Digital Marketing Statistics to Drive Your Campaigns in 2024 – The Loop Marketing Inc: 53% of marketers spend at least half of their budget on lead generation.
• 40% of marketers say proving the ROI of their marketing activities is their biggest challenge.
• More than half of smartphone users have discovered a new company or product when searching on their phone – and 76% who search on their phones want to visit a business the same day.
• One in three people respond to text message CTAs, and 47% of those end up making a purchase.
• 75% of those using a search engine will only go as far as the first page of search results.
• 83% of marketers believe that higher quality content posted less often is the most effective SEO route compared to lower quality content published at a higher frequency.
• Less than 6% of pages will rank in the top 10 results within a year of publication.
• 85% of marketers rely on website analytics and SEO tools for campaign tracking, and Google Analytics is the most-used tool.
• 87% of queries with more than 10,000 monthly searches consist of only one or two words.
• Yelp appears in the top five search results for 92% of Google web queries, including a city and business category.
• Content Marketing Statistics 73% of marketers say content marketing is essential for their overall strategy.
• 70% of marketers actively invest in content marketing, and 78% of companies have one to three content specialists.
• Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing but generates three times as many leads.
• Social Media Statistics 91% of markets planned to increase or maintain their investment in YouTube in 2023.
• 72% of marketers say Instagram is the most important social media platform for influencer marketing.
• 96% of B2B marketers use LinkedIn for organic content distribution and 83% for paid social.
• Social media advertising is used by 83% of marketers and ranked second in success behind search engine marketing.
• Facebook ad spending totaled more than $31 billion in 2020, up 5% from 2019.
• With 96% of brands using it, Google Ads is the most popular PPC network.
• About 80% of Google’s total revenues come from Google Ads, with 96% of brands spending money on the platform.
• 74% of brands call PPC a massive driver for their business, and 64% plan to increase their budget in the next year.
• About four times as many people will click a paid search ad on Google (63%) than on any other search engine.
• 90% of B2B marketers say email newsletters are an essential source of success in their content marketing plan.
• And, 69% of email recipients say they can tell if an email is spam just by the subject line.
• You are up to six times more likely to get a click from an email than from a tweet – and including a video can increase that by up to 300%, while social sharing buttons increase CTR by 158%.
• 2016 US Digital Marketing Budgets:Statistics and Trends | Smart Insights: Social Media spending to increase Social media spend is set to increase markedly in the next few years:doubling from 10% of today’s marketing budgets to 20% by 2021.
• Only 3% of CMOs surveyed reported said social was contributing ‘very highly’ to the companies performance, whilst about a fifth said it wasn’t at all important to performance.
• This makes sense as it’s following where users actually spend their time, but given that in 3 years time over 65% of time spent on the web may be on mobile devices, it may make sense to increase mobile budgets even more rapidly.
• 20 Social Media Marketing Statistics to Power Your Strategy: Social media is the #1 most popular advertising channel for small businesses Advertising on social media remains as popular as ever, with recent reports saying that 70% of small businesses use it as part of their marketing efforts, 36% higher than the second most popular channel, print advertising.
• 5% of their marketing budgets on social media No two marketing budgets are the same, but on average, business owners spend 14.
• 5% of their marketing budget on social media strategies, according to the CMO’s 2022 survey.
• While this figure has decreased since the height of the pandemic in June 2020, when businesses spent over 23% of their budget, experts project these social media marketing stats to grow even further in the next few years as social media steadily regains influence.
• And in the next five years, they project that number will increase to over 21%, nearing the high set in the early days of the COVID-19 pandemic.
• 38% of small business owners (SBOs) say Facebook is the most effective social media advertising platform Recent years have witnessed the growth of modern social media giants like TikTok and Snapchat.
• But 38% of small business owners still find Facebook the most effective to advertise on.
• SBOs find social media marketing up to 7% more effective than digital ads Digital marketing encompasses many fronts, and two of the most prominent are social media marketing and paid ads on Google or websites.
• However, social media marketing statistics from Visual Objects found that 7% more small business owners found social media as their most successful digital marketing strategy than paid ads on Google and Microsoft.
• Social media ads take up 30% of small business’ ad budgets Paid ads are one of the most proven and reliable methods to gain results within a period of time, and social media ads remain the most popular, as the previous stat shows.
• According to social media advertising statistics, small businesses spent up to 30% of their advertising budget on social media alone in 2021.
• For SBOs, photos & videos are 81% more effective than news articles when educating new customers Social media is a great tool for educating audiences about your product or service.
• When it comes to the best type of content to post, most small business owners find photos and videos most effective at generating engagement—81% more effective than sharing business news and updates.
• 83% of small businesses post on social multiple times a week Consistency is key to your social media strategy’s success, as evidenced by social media marketing statistics from GetApp.
• The survey found that 83% of small businesses posted new content on social media multiple times per week, with only a small percentage posting once a week or less.
• And 19% of small businesses even posted on social media several times a day.
• 25% of internet users use social media to find new products to buy While social media may be saturated, you’ll still find a decent chance of gaining new customers and increasing sales from it.
• According to social media business statistics from Meltwater, 25% of social media users across all age groups say their primary use of social media was to find new products to buy.
• 55% of consumers discover new businesses on social media If there’s one advantage small and local businesses have over big-name legacy brands, it’s social media marketing.
• This is because recent social media marketing statistics from Sprout Social found that 55% of customers discover new brands and small businesses on social media.
• 66% say social media’s biggest benefit is increasing sales It’s no wonder social media marketing growth is part of every business’ strategy:it offers a multitude of benefits, including helping increase business revenue.
• A 2022 study found that 66% of business owners say that the biggest benefit of using social media to market their business was in helping increase sales.
• Meanwhile, 51% say social media is most helpful for accessing new customers, and 47% said it improves customer relationships.
• 33% of consumers are highly likely to buy from a small business recommended by a social media influencer If you’re thinking of entering influencer marketing, take these social media marketing statistics as a green light.
• A 2021 study found that 33% of consumers are highly likely to buy from a small business if they’re recommended by an influencer on social media, even if they aren’t familiar with its products.
• 29% of social media influencers are paid in product freebies Entering influencer marketing might seem like a daunting and costly task, but that isn’t usually the case:nearly one in three (29%) of social media influencers are paid in product freebies given by brands.
• Only 12% of influencers are paid more than $1,000 for their posts, while 19% are paid less than $500.
• 88% of Gen Z use YouTube more than any other social media platform You’d be forgiven for assuming that TikTok would be the best way to market to Gen Z audiences, today’s youngest consumers.
• However, statistics on social media marketing find that YouTube is still their most-used social media site, with 88% of the population active on the platform.
• Over 90% of adults aged 36+ use Facebook In spite of all the new social platforms that have sprung up in recent years, from BeReal to Meta’s Threads, Facebook is still the most used platform for older generations, namely Gen X (aged between 36 and 55) and Baby Boomers (aged over 55).
• Ninety percent of Gen X and 96% of Boomers use Facebook regularly, compared to just 36% of Gen Z.
• 51% of consumers want to see content about products or services from brands on social media When it comes to what users want from your brand, social media usage statistics say that the majority (51%) still prefer content about your product or service.
• Meanwhile, a growing number are also becoming more interested in seeing customer testimonials, with 39% selecting it as their preferred brand content.
• 63% higher engagement rate than Facebook While Facebook is more popular, TikTok is the more active platform of the two, at least in the past year.
• 93% of all internet users are on social media Just how many people use social media?
• That’s over half of the world’s population and about 93% of all internet users.
• While different social platforms work better than others for different types of businesses, The 2022 Small Business Advertising Report revealed that 38% of small businesses say Facebook is the most effective platform for business-to-consumer (B2C) marketing.
• According to social media marketing stats, over 80% of small businesses say social media’s biggest benefit is in helping promote products and services.
• Top Digital Marketing Data [Q2 2022 Stats]: Interest was so high that from 2022 to 2023, topics on learning about AI increased by 550%, according to an analysis we conducted of over 15,500 news articles and blogs.
• 5%Sample:4,420 respondentsSource:Hootsuite Social Media Consumer 2024 Survey AI is inevitable on social, and scaling back on its use now would be like reverting from computers to typewriters.
• The majority (60%) of organizations have a presence there, but only a third of them feel strongly that it benefits their business—which might explain the 7% drop in brand use.
• views, 49% followers, 43% clicks/traffic, 21% leads, 14% sales/revenue, 4% time spent on site/app, 3% sentiment, 3% share of voice, 2% pipeline, 2% survey-based brand awareness.
• Interest was so high that from 2022 to 2023, topics on learning about AI increased by 550%, according to an analysis we conducted of over 15,500 news articles and blogs.
• The majority (60%) of organizations have a presence there, but only a third of them feel strongly that it benefits their business-which might explain the 7% drop in brand use.
• views, 49% followers, 43% clicks/traffic, 21% leads, 14% sales/revenue, 4% time spent on site/app, 3% sentiment, 3% share of voice, 2% pipeline, 2% survey-based brand awareness.
• 120+ Digital Marketing Statistics of 2024 for Online Growth: 49% of marketers say that organic search has the best return on investment (ROI).
• Over 90% of people read reviews online before making a purchasing decision.
• 54% of customers say they get annoyed if they are targeted with an ad for something they’ve already bought.
• 78% of marketers say they have a small marketing team of between one and three people.
• These teams usually included a writer (52%), a social media manager (36%), and an SEO specialist (34%).
• 58% of customers are comfortable with their data being used transparently, but only 63% say companies are generally transparent about how their data is used.
• Nearly 80% of very successful content marketers spend more than 10% of their total marketing budgets on content.
• 67% of marketers report SEO as the most effective tactic they implement to grow their content strategy.
• Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates three times as many leads.
• The top three content marketing KPIs marketers report using are organic traffic (76%), leads generated (62%), and sessions (60%).
• 52% of marketers say social media and community building is a top priority, as is improving content quality, followed by audience research.
• 51% of companies say updating old content is the most efficient tactic.
• 84% of marketers list “brand awareness” among their B2B content marketing goals.
• Companies with blogs produce 67% more leads per month than those without.
• 54% of content marketers say generating quality leads is their biggest challenge.
• The three most popular content formats are videos (45%), short-form articles (31%) and success stories (28%).
• 45% of internet users aged 25–34 report listening to podcasts regularly.
• The two most popular content distribution channels are social media (94%) and email (76%).
• Videos on a website can increase the average time spent on a page by 88%.
• 40% of users won’t engage with a website if its layout is unattractive.
• 50% of internet users say that they consider website design as a factor in formulating their opinion on a business.
• 73% of marketers say email marketing is their best digital channel for ROI.
• 60% of consumers subscribe to a brand’s list to get promotional messages and deals, compared to only 20% who follow brands on social media.
• Segmented email campaigns have a 14% higher open rate and a 75% higher click rate compared to non-segmented email campaigns.
• Companies that A/B test every email see email marketing returns that are 37% higher than those of brands that don’t.
• Emails with personalized subject lines had a 50% higher rate compared to emails that didn’t use personalization.
• Leads that are actively nurtured by marketing produce 20% more sales opportunities.
• Companies that nurture leads generate 50% more sales at 33% lower costs.
• Landing pages have the highest conversion rate (23%), while pop-ups have the second-lowest conversion rate (3%).
• 53% of marketers spend at least half of their budget on lead generation.
• Only 17% of marketers A/B test their landing pages to improve conversion rates.
• 42% of companies consider email to be one of their most crucial lead generation channels.
• 73% of leads are not sales-ready the first time they interact with your brand.
• 63% of leads who inquire about your business won’t be ready to convert for at least three months.
• Most marketers agree that LinkedIn is the most effective social media channel for B2B lead generation, but only 47% of marketers use LinkedIn.
• Paid ads and social media account for less than 10% of B2B website traffic, leads, or sales.
• 51% of smartphone users have discovered a new company or product when conducting a search on their smartphones.
• 76% of people search on their smartphones for something nearby or want to visit a business the same day.
• 33% of SMS recipients react to CTAs in SMS marketing messages, and 47% of those end up making a purchase.
• SMS marketing click-through rates for e-commerce brands can be as high as 36%.
• 59% of shoppers surveyed say that being able to shop on mobile is important when deciding which brand or retailer to buy from.
• 61% of people tend to shop on mobile websites that allow them to apply search filters.
• 51% of shoppers say they use Google to research a purchase they plan to make online.
• 85% of marketers report using website analytics and SEO tools to track their campaigns.
• Businesses allocate around 15% of their marketing budget toward social media marketing.
• 62% of people said they were more interested in a product after seeing it in a Facebook Story.
• Only 11% of marketers consider making use of user-generated content to be a tactic worth using.
• 81% of marketers have synced their social media platforms with commerce systems.
• 72% of customers prefer learning about a product or service by way of video.
• 57% of marketers believe video is the hardest form of content to produce.
• 84% of people say that they’ve been convinced to buy a product or service by watching a brand’s video.
• 87% of video marketers on LinkedIn described the platform as an effective video marketing channel.
• 87% of video marketers say that video has increased traffic to their websites.
• People are able to retain a message 95% better when the information is received in the form of a video compared to just 10% when reading it in text.
• 50% of marketers believe inadequate adoption of AI is holding them back from achieving their goals.
• 2% of marketers spend over 40% of their marketing budget on AI-driven campaigns.
• 91% of Fortune 1000 companies are increasing their investment in artificial intelligence.
• The adoption of generative AI is highest in the marketing and advertising sector (37%).
• Technology (35%) and consulting (30%) are the other two sectors showing increased use of AI.
• 26% of businesses are applying AI techniques such as natural language processing (NLP) to marketing and sales.
• Essential Content Marketing Statistics for 2024 | ClearVoice: Here are some important content marketing 2024 statistics related to ABM:97% of marketers who use ABM say it delivers a higher ROI than other marketing activities.
• (WARC) 94% of B2B marketers use ABM (WebFX) 80% of marketers intend to increase their ABM budget.
• Here are some critical AI statistics related to content marketing:84% of digital marketing leaders believe AI helps with personalization.
• (Zippia) 82% of marketers say AI has impacted how they plan to create content.
• (Hubspot) 79% of businesses say AI has contributed to revenue increases in their marketing and sales departments.
• (Zippia) 76% of marketers using generative AI say they use it for basic content creation and copywriting.
• (Insider Intelligence) 61% of marketers say that AI is the most essential aspect of their data strategy.
• According to an Edison Research study, 70% of Americans age 12 and older have listened to online audio in the past week.
• Here are some crucial content marketing statistics related to podcast marketing:Over 62% of U.
• Here are some essential video content marketing 2024 statistics you should know:91% of brands use video as a marketing tool.
• 100+ Up-To-Date Content Marketing Stats (2023): 5% in the 2-4 hour range (Orbit Media) Blog posts containing a relevant image receive an average of 94% more views than posts without an image (MDG) 90% of bloggers include at least one image in their posts.
• 55% of Americans listen to podcasts (Statista) 49% of podcast listens happen at home versus 22% in the car (Podcast Insights) 51% of US podcast listeners are men.
• 5 million active podcasts (Podcast Insights) Smartphones are the main medium by which podcast content is consumed (Edison Research) 54% of U.
• 048% on Twitter (Rival IQ) The same Rival IQ study found that the average number of posts each day is 0.
• 7% more shares on social compared to short headlines (Backlinko) Content containing 1,000-2,000 words fetch an average of 56.
• 1% more shares on social compared to content with fewer than 1,000 words (Backlinko) 1.
• 3% of all articles published online receive 75% of all social shares (Backlinko) Headlines in the form of a question tend to receive 23.
• 55% of B2C marketers outsource at least part of their content creation (Content Marketing Institute) B2C content produces 9.
• B2B Social Media Marketing Statistics: According to HubSpot, 85% of companies ranked short-form videos as the most effective type of social content, and 64% of marketers plan to invest more in short-form video.
• However, when B2B marketing teams that use video were surveyed, 86% said that video has helped increase website traffic, 84% say video has helped them generate leads, and 78% say that video has helped them directly increase sales.
• 1%) The key here is to focus on creating short, quippy, relatable content.
• In 2021, the average engagement rate for videos under 60 seconds was 51%.
• Videos that range from 30 to 60 minutes in length only have a 25% engagement rate.
• Globally, 47% of internet users ages 16 to 64 have spent more time on social media in 2020 than they did in 2019.
• (Warc) 95% of B2B marketers use social content as a part of their content marketing strategy, making it the most widely-used type of content.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 25% of B2B marketers say that social media content is the highest-performing type of content for building brand awareness.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 91% of B2B marketers use social media to distribute content organically, making it one of the top content distribution channels.
• (Content Marketing Institute) Social media is a source in making purchasing decisions for 84% of B2B executives and 75% of overall B2B buyers.
• (IDC) 50% of marketers plan to increase their investments in Facebook, YouTube, and TikTok —indicating that video content will be huge.
• (LinkedIn) 82% of B2B marketers have reported the greatest success on LinkedIn compared to other social channels.
• (LinkedIn) 79% of B2B marketers who used paid ads on social media said that LinkedIn produced the best results.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 93% of Twitter community members are open to brands getting involved in conversations—particularly to provide help and support.
• 85% of Twitter users earn more than $30,000 annually, and 34% earn $75,000 or more.
• (Pew Research Center) Tweets with one or more hashtags are 55% more likely to be retweeted.
• (Buffer) 61% of marketers plan to increase their investment in TikTok marketing.
• (Apptopia) TikTok had 1 billion users in 2021, with approximately 53% of users between ages 19-39 and 19% of users over 40.
• (Statista) 44% of marketers plan to leverage YouTube for the first time.
• Digital Marketing Statistics, Ad Spends, Ad Growth, Ad Share: From the total digital advertising market, 69% of ad spending will be from mobile devices in 2022.
• By 2027, 53% of all digital advertising market spending will come from mobile devices.
• By 2027, programmatic advertising will account for 89% of digital advertising revenue.
• By 2027, 71% of all digital advertising market spending will come from mobile devices.
• 86% of digital advertising revenue will come from programmatic advertising by 2027.
• By 2027, 72% of all digital advertising market spending will come from mobile devices.
• 88% of digital advertising revenue by 2027 will come from programmatic advertising.
• 91By 2027, 73% of all digital advertising market spending will come from mobile devices.
• Programmatic advertising will account for 92% of digital advertising revenues by 2027.
• By 2027, 51% of the digital advertising market spending will come from mobile devices.
• By 2027, programmatic advertising will account for 86% of digital advertising revenues.
• By 2027, mobile devices will account for 62% of the total digital advertising market spending.
• By 2027, programmatic advertising will account for 89% of digital advertising revenues.
• 72% of the digital advertising market will come from mobile devices by 2027.
• By 2027, programmatic advertising will account for 86% of digital advertising revenues.
• 79% of the digital advertising market will come from mobile devices by 2027.
• Programmatic advertising will account for 92% of digital advertising revenue by 2027.
• By 2027, 57% of all digital advertising market spending will come from mobile devices.
• 88% of digital advertising revenues by 2027 will come from programmatic advertising.
• In 2027, mobile will account for 55% of the total digital advertising market.
• Programmatic advertising will account for 93% of digital advertising revenue by 2027.
• By 2027, 53% of all digital advertising market spending will come from mobile devices.
• Digital Advertising Market:Programmatic Advertising will generate 90% of digital advertising revenues by 2027.
• Online advertising shares in Argentina are estimated to be 64% in 2022.
• The percentage of online advertising shares in Colombia is anticipated to be 44%.
• 6% in 2020 as businesses conducted most of their operations online due to imposed COVID-19 restrictions by respective governments.
• In 2016, the share of digital advertising spending was only 12% of the total advertising spending in India, which then increased to 15% in 2017, and reached 30% in 2021.
• In 2022, the share of digital advertising spending is expected to index 34%, and then 38% by 2023.
• PPC Marketing Statistics – AovUp (formerly Woosuite): PPC Marketing Stats Highlights Google holds 92% of the market share for search engines worldwide.
• 2 Other PPC Marketing Stats3 Conclusion PPC – Key Statistics Google holds 92% of the market share for search engines worldwide.
• Google owns 92% of the search engine market, including paid and organic searches.
• According to PPC stats, paid advertisements redirect 65% of the traffic.
• PPC traffic results in a 50% higher conversion rate than organic link visitors.
• 40% of them say it’s getting harder and harder to maintain a competitive budget in such a heavily saturated space.
• Almost two-thirds of users click on an ad, and 20% make at least one weekly purchase.
• Also, 70% of mobile users call the business directly from Google search.
• Other PPC Marketing Stats The top three ads at the top of the first search engine results page get all the clicks at 40%.
• 75% of people say they click on ads because they expect an answer to their question.
• Customers are 155% more likely to search for brand-specific terms when exposed to display ads.
• Digital Marketing Statistics for 2024 | Digital Third Coast: 36% of marketers are attempting to integrate traditional and digital marketing efforts.
• 82% of marketers who regularly blog see positive ROI from inbound marketing in general.
• Businesses will spend $110 billion on digital advertising by 2020 (Source:EMarketer) Traditional marketing generates 50% fewer interactions with customers than digital marketing.
• Digital Marketing & Paid Search Statistics 93% of online interactions start with a search engine.
• 90% of people haven’t made up their mind about a brand before a search.
• Google is responsible for 67% of smartphone search traffic and 94% of organic traffic.
• Digital Marketing & SEO Statistics 61% of marketers agree that improving SEO and growing organic presence is their top inbound marketing priority.
• 53% of businesses that spend more than $500 per month on SEO services rate themselves as “extremely satisfied” compared to businesses that spend less than $500 per month.
• 72% of marketers have agreed that relevancy serves as a determining factor for SEO performance.
• 70-80% of people ignore paid search results, choosing to only click on organic search results.
• 7% for traditional outbound methods such as cold-calling or direct mail.
• Content Marketing Statistics The cost of content marketing is 62% less than traditional methods.
• Nearly 40% of marketers say content marketing is a very important part of their overall marketing strategy.
• 39% of marketing budget is spent on content marketing by the most effective B2B marketers.
• 58% of marketers said “original written content” is the most important type of content, outdoing visuals and videos.
• 72% of marketers think that branded content is more effective than magazine advertisements.
• Up to 81% of marketers plan to increase their use of original written content.
• According to LinkedIn, the top 3 content marketing tactics are blogging (53%), social media (64%), and case studies (64%).
• Blogging is an effective form of marketing according to 56% of marketers, and 1 in 10 say it generates the biggest return on investment.
• Companies that blog receive 97% more links to their website (Original source:Hubspot State of Inbound Marketing, 2014).
• 18% of marketers choose WordPress as their website content management system.
• Managing a Content Marketing Strategy 78% of companies have a team of one to three content specialists.
• 42% of companies have a designated content strategist executive to ensure all content is meeting branding expectations and being released at the right time.
• Content Marketing, Lead Generation & ROI 54% of companies measure content marketing ROI.
• About 49% of marketers are learning to drive content to align with the buyer’s journey.
• 47% of buyers viewed at least 3 to 5 pieces of content before deciding to speak with a sales rep.
• 62% of buyers say they can make a purchase selection based on digital content.
• Strategic landing pages help 68% of B2B businesses acquire new leads (Original source:Marketo, 2018).
• More than ¼ of the top-performing marketers allocate more than 10% of their working media budget to measurement and analytics.
• PPC & Digital Marketing Statistics 91% of smartphone owners have made a purchase after seeing a relevant ad.
• 37% of internet users worldwide use ad blockers Social Media & Digital Marketing Top-performing social content:video, images, offers/promotions, articles, reviews, infographics.
• 89% of marketers claim that the ROI they get from influencer marketing is almost the same if not higher than that from other platforms.
• The most common content marketing delivery mechanism is social media, used by 87% of marketers.
• B2B companies utilize LinkedIn 94% of the time and Twitter 87% of the time.
• Facebook The number of marketers who say Facebook is “critical” or “important” to their business has increased 83% in just two years.
• Twitter marketing 81% of millennials check Twitter at least once a day.
• Marketers have witnessed an increase of 760% in email revenue from segmented campaigns.
• 72% of consumers prefer their marketing communication to be via email over other channels.
• The Top Digital Marketing Channels (Ranked By Statistics): By 2022, it’s predicted that 82% of website traffic will come from video.
• In addition, businesses are still spending 46% of their budget on content creation.
• 39% of men and 36% of women are monthly podcast listeners in the United States.
• Content Strategy With these statistics, it’s no surprise that 70% of marketers invest in content marketing and 40% of marketers say content marketing is an important part of their strategy.
• In addition, 78% of companies have a team of one to three content specialists.
• Organic Search 64% of marketers invest time in search engine optimization.
• That’s because 49% of users utilize Google to discover new products and services.
• Mobile Search Mobile optimization is a top SEO tactic for businesses — almost 25% of businesses use it.
• Not only that, but 60% of customers contacted a business directly on their phones after finding the business on a search result.
• 69% of customers still think the option to shop in-person is important.
• In addition, 46% of buyers confirm inventory online before visiting a store.
• Over the past couple of years, there have been a 900% increase in “near me” and “today/tonight” keywords.
• In addition, there has been a 200% increase in keywords with “now” and “open” keywords.
• 70% of web users utilize the “click to call” feature on a business’ search engine results.
• In fact, 65% of web users aged 25-49 use voice search on voice-enabled devices at least once a day.
• Not only that, but organic search generates most e-commerce sessions — organic search caused 33% of shopping experiences as opposed to 32% caused by paid search.
• Instagram’s video platform, IGTV, is also becoming more popular — 28% of marketers include IGTV in their video marketing strategy.
• This includes video — 79% of marketers use Facebook as a video marketing channel.
• In addition, 51% of teenagers between the ages of 13 and 17 have a Facebook account.
• 30% of B2C and 25% of B2B businesses use Pinterest to market their business.
• In addition, 20% of marketers say an improved email design benefits their campaign.
• That’s because 40% of people over the age of 18 open their emails on their phones.
• 68% of marketers state paid advertising is “very important” to their marketing strategy.
• Content Marketing Stats 2020: 65% of marketing leaders believe that a brand is a critical driver of buyer behavior on existing customers, and 58% believe it impacts prospects.
• Approximately 60% of marketers rate content marketing as extremely important or very important to their marketing strategy.
• Defining and documenting your strategy is important even more because less than 40% of content marketers do so.
• SEMRush report claims that the top goals of content marketing are generating high-quality leads (75%) and attracting more traffic to the site (71%).
• 46% of companies didn’t shell more than $10k on content marketing in 2019.
• They tend to run between 1 to 3 specialists for 78% of companies with the top three roles being:content creators, social media managers, and SEO content managers.
• Mantis research found that only 39% of marketing teams have conducted an original research in the past 12 months.
• As per the Hubspot State of Marketing Report, around 64% of marketers invest in SEO.
• Research by Brightedge confirms that organic traffic continues to occupy the top spot at 53% for most sectors.
• 8% by moving just one position up in rankings (considering all other things equal).
• In their analysis of 912 million blog posts, Backlinko and BuzzSumo found that 94% of all blog posts have zero external links.
• Well, you might already be using social media given that it’s the most popular marketing channel leveraged by 94% of businesses surveyed by SEMRush.
• Business Blogging and B2C Content Marketing Statistics Did you know that 77% of people on the internet read blogs?
• However, only 33% of B2C content marketers reported a documented content marketing strategy.
• Further, only 50% of the respondents report creating content for every stage of the funnel.
• That’s the reason only 54% of organizations agree that they provide their customers with optimal experiences across their engagement journey.
• The top three technologies B2C marketers use to assist with content marketing are:social media publishing/analytics at 84% analytics tools at 83% and email marketing software at 72% 6.
• For instance, 38% of the bloggers that spend 6+ hours on a post report “strong results.
• Bloggers earning over $50k per year use 343% as many email-collection methods as compared to their lower-income peers.
• 70% of these high-income bloggers are also more likely to be active or very active promoters than lower-income bloggers.
• 55% of B2C organizations outsource some content marketing activities, and the most outsourced task done by 80% of companies is content creation.
• 86% of B2C marketers fact check their content to ensure accuracy, and 60% prioritize the audience’s informational needs over their sales/promotional message.
• B2B Content Marketing Statistics Did you know that 61% of all B2B transactions start online, and 51% of customers turn to social media to do their initial research?
• Indeed, in an analysis of 500 SaaS companies, the top 10% SaaS blogs averaged 104,000 organic search visits.
• In the last 12 months, 86% of B2B marketers report creating brand awareness, 79% have educated their audiences, and 75% have built credibility/trust.
• Further, 44% of these top performers operate as a centralized content marketing group that works across the organization.
• 32% of B2B marketers lack a full-time person dedicated to content marketing.
• Content creation is the most outsourced content marketing activity, with 84% of respondents likely to outsource it.
• When it comes to links, 93% of B2B content ends up attracting zero external links.
• A survey of tech B2B buyers found 53% of respondents finding videos as most useful.
• When it comes to content marketing strategy, 88% of the most successful B2B marketers prioritize the informational needs of their audience over their organization’s sales/promotional message.
• 46% of top performing B2B content marketers leverage influencer/media relations (vs.
• Marketing Charts found that 69% of B2B organizations will focus on measurement and analytics in 2020.
• Of the 80% B2B marketers using metrics to measure content performance, 59% are doing an excellent or outstanding job at demonstrating ROI.
• While over 40% of B2B organizations are likely to invest MORE time and money on content marketing in 2020, their top priority isn’t quantity.
• 48% of B2B content marketers will focus on the quality of their audience and conversions.
• 36% of surveyed marketers report an yearly budget of less than $100,000.
• 80% of people say that they switch between online search and video while buying.
• The Social Media Examiner industry report found that 62% of marketers plan to increase their YouTube organic activities.
• And in their future video marketing activities, 71% plan to increase their use of YouTube.
• Before launching, don’t forget to add subtitles as it could make users stick around for about 40% longer.
• Web users scan text and read about 20% of the words on page during an average visit.
• Further 65% of the general population are visual learners, and after three days of consumption, they can remember 65% of the visual information vis-à-vis 10% recall for written content.
• A Venngage survey of 200 content marketers predicted that visuals would remain an integral part of marketing strategies in 2020 and 2021 for 66% of businesses.
• This year 25% of marketers anticipate spending between 10% to 20% of their total budgets on visual content creation.
• 74% of marketers said that they used visuals in more than 70% of the articles they published.
• Your palette selection is important as colors can improve your brand recognition by up to 80% as per Xerox.
• 50+ Critical Social Media Marketing Statistics for Your Business (2022): With 90% of users saying they watch video online at least once a month, it’s easy to see why marketers see video as their most valuable content marketing assets.
• Around 63% of people say messaging apps are where they feel more confident sharing and talking about content.
• That said, around 5% of Facebook’s worldwide monthly active users are fake accounts.
• 86% of Facebook users are between the ages of 18-29, while 77% are aged 30-49 years old.
• More than half of those users identify as female, with only 46% identifying themselves as male.
• Around 15% of Facebook users in the United States use the platform to shop for products.
• In fact, 50% of users want to discover new products through Facebook Stories.
• After seeing a product/service in a story, 58% say they have browsed the brand’s website to get more information.
• 5% identify as females, aged 18-24 If you use these data when deciding what to post on Instagram, make sure your posts are catering to Generation Z and younger millennials so you can get higher engagement and potentially for sales.
• And with 81% of people using Instagram to research products and services, you might want to start looking into adding shoppable posts into your marketing strategy.
• Twitter users are Democrats, with 30% of Americans identifying that way.
• On the other hand, only 21% of Twitter users are Republican, although 26% of Americans identify as one.
• But that said, 71% of American Twitter users use the platform to read news updates.
• After all, 53% of Twitter’s audience is more likely to buy new products.
• When looking at who uses YouTube, it’s important to note that 80% of YouTube users come from outside the U.
• That said, Americans do make up a good proportion of YouTube users, as you can see below:81% of U.
• adults use YouTube Of the urban adults, 84% use YouTube, compared to only 74% of rural adults 82% of adult males and 80% of adult females are using YouTube Let’s break that down by country.
• And when you consider that 10% of the most popular content attracts 79% of the views, it might seem impossible trying to reach your target audience on the platform.
• Wellness videos:Interest in videos related to relaxing is rising, with watch times increasing by over 70% in 12 months.
• Livestreams:Almost 24% of social media users report watching video livestreams regularly.
• You have a potential audience of 945 million users aged 18 and above that you can reach when you use TikTok ads:53% of those users identify as females, while almost 47% identify as males.
• 30 Crucial Social Media Marketing Statistics 2024 – TrueList: Social Media Marketing Statistics (Editor’s Choice) 54% of internet users turn to social media to research products.
• (GlobalWebIndex) 64% of users make a purchase after watching a video on social media.
• (Report Linker) According to 62% of marketers, social listening is the best Social media marketing tactic.
• (Statista) 33% of internet users would rather contact a brand via social media than call them.
• Another interesting fact is that 99% of social media users access their social media via smartphones.
• 90% of customers will look up online reviews before visiting a brand’s social media page.
• Be sure to post authentic user reviews, as 90% of shoppers can recognize fake online reviews.
• 72% of US social media users have written a review for a business at some point.
• In 2019, about 66% of social media shoppers stated that they wrote an online review at least once, while 2020 saw a big increase in online reviews, with 72% of US social media consumers reporting that they wrote online reviews for a local business.
• 57% of marketers find social media stories to be an effective means of advertisement.
• 6% of advertisers stated that social media stories were either “somewhat effective” or “very effective” for their businesses.
• 6% said that they thought stories were “very effective” in helping them promote their business, while 35% found them to be “somewhat effective.
• Social listening is the number one tactic for 62% of social media marketers.
• Social media ads statistics show that 62% of marketers have recognized that social listening is an indispensable tool in attracting prospective customers and clients.
• Social media marketing statistics also show that 64% of shoppers ended up making a purchase after seeing brand video content on their social media platforms.
• 3% of marketers, social media is an important part of their marketing strategy.
• 5% of marketers claim social media is very important for their overall marketing strategy, while for 30.
• 8% in the 3 months leading up to April 2022 Social media marketing data shows that Instagram’s ad reach decreased in the past quarter, which placed it 4th in DataReportal’s ranking of the most active social media platforms in the world.
• B2B social media statistics show that the vast majority of both B2B and B2C marketers choose Facebook as their primary means of advertisement, with 89% and 96% of them being active on the platform, respectively.
• The second most popular platform is LinkedIn, used by 81% of B2B marketers and 53% of B2C marketers.
• The third spot belongs to Instagram, where B2C advertisers take the lead, with 83% using the platform, as opposed to 72% of B2B marketers.
• 22% of all social media marketing activities are done by social media marketing companies.
• and it’s no surprise that around 22% of overall social media marketing activities are performed by professionals.
• 90% of top salespeople and 71% of sales professionals use social selling tools.
• Then, 78% of millennials use social selling tools, with 63% saying social selling is crucial for their business.
• Social media marketing stats show that 90% of prospective buyers said that they never respond to such calls and would rather turn to social media or similar types of advertisement instead.
• 78% of social sellers outsell their competition who are not on social media.
• Social media marketing stats show that up to 78% of them make more sales than the competition.
• 31% of B2B professionals find social selling helpful in building a relationship with customers.
• They also find social media helpful for referrals, as up to 84% of social media buyers will make a purchase after getting a warm referral, increasing the odds of a sale up to 4 times.
• Social media marketing facts further show that up to 70% of B2B companies find that those referrals close faster than other types of leads and convert better.
• Around 10% of social media sellers closed at least five deals because they were active on social media.
• Social media users have gotten used to having all the brand information at their fingertips, which is why social media statistics for business show that 10% of sellers managed to close five or more deals just by being active on social media.
• 33% of internet users would rather contact a brand via social media than call them.
• 70% of sales professionals use LinkedIn to track down leads and close sales.
• In second place is, obviously, Facebook, with 64% of sales representatives.
• Twitter (43%), YouTube (41%), and Instagram (39%) are also commonly used among sales professionals.
• 98% of sales representatives reach their quotas through social media sales.
• That’s exactly why social media marketing statistics show that 98% of sales reps with over 5,000 LinkedIn connections said that reaching and exceeding their quotas was easy using the platform.
• 77% of B2B buyers do independent research before talking to salespeople.
• Just under 40% of businesses think of social selling as an efficient way of reducing contact research time.
• 39% of businesses with a social media presence believe that the primary purpose and benefit of social selling is to help them reduce contact research time.
• According to social media marketing stats, more than 50% of total revenue across 14 major industries is generated by social sales.
• The countries that are most active on social media are the United Arab Emirates at 99%, South Korea at 89.
• About 96% of small and medium-sized businesses use social media of their choice.
• 24 Must-Know SMS Marketing Statistics For 2022 | Swift Digital: 61% of businesses are expected to increase SMS marketing budgets due to the pandemic.
• 60% of Australian adults in 2020 relied solely on a mobile phone for home telecommunication.
• 60% of Australian Adults in 2020 relied solely on a mobile phone for home telecommunication.
• 89 million mobile connections in Australia, equivalent to 130% of the population.
• 61% of businesses were expected to increase their text marketing budgets in 2020.
• Investment in SMS marketing is expected to increase by 50%, while spending on other channels is anticipated to decrease.
• 5% and 20% in March and April 2020, respectively, in response to the Pandemic.
• 83% of Millennials open SMS messages within 90 seconds of receiving them.
• Consumers expect to interact with businesses via text, with 43% proactively texting companies.
• 39% of business use SMS messaging in some form to communicate with customers.
• SMS Marketing Statistics (Editors Choice) The SMS open rate for Australia is 94%.
• 61% of businesses are expected to increase SMS marketing budgets due to the pandemic.
• 54% of people claim significant frustration if they can’t send a business an SMS.
• 60% of Australian adults in 2020 relied solely on a mobile phone for home telecommunication.
• 60% of Australian Adults in 2020 relied solely on a mobile phone for home telecommunication.
• Over 70% of Australians aged 18-44 don’t have fixed-line phone service at home and only use a mobile phone.
• 89 million mobile connections in Australia, equivalent to 130% of the population.
• Just 2% of the population of East Asia and the Pacific region don’t have mobile connectivity.
• 61% of businesses were expected to increase their text marketing budgets in 2020.
• Investment in SMS marketing is expected to increase by 50%, while spending on other channels is anticipated to decrease.
• 5% and 20% in March and April 2020, respectively, in response to the Pandemic.
• 83% of Millennials open SMS messages within 90 seconds of receiving them.
• Consumers expect to interact with businesses via text, with 43% proactively texting companies.
• 59% of users prefer a phone’s inbuilt communications features over third-party apps.
• 39% of business use SMS messaging in some form to communicate with customers.
• 75% of SMS recipients are frustrated if they can’t respond to a business on the same number.
• 54% of people claim significant frustration if they can’t send an SMS to a business at all.
• 2023 Digital Marketing Statistics – Boomcycle Digital Marketing: 72% of online marketers describe content creation as their most effective SEO tactic.
• Mobile app marketing also plays a significant role, especially considering 94% of Facebook’s ad revenue comes from mobile.
• SEO proves successful for 89% of marketers, while video is used as a tool by 86% of businesses.
• Now, when it comes to PPC campaign strategies and display ad effectiveness, consider these stats:About 65% of small to mid-sized businesses engage in PPC (usually Google Ads) campaigns.
• SEO’s impact on organic search rankings is undeniable, with 53% of all website traffic coming from organic searches.
• Businesses that utilize blogging as part of their SEO strategy see 55% more traffic to their websites.
• Furthermore, your lead generation efforts are likely to prosper with SEO, as it boasts a lead-to-close rate of nearly 15%.
• Social media engagement is paramount for your brand’s visibility:91% of businesses use social media to reach their customers (effectively?
• ) Influencer marketing has become a powerful strategy, with 93% of well-funded marketers finding it effective.
• Personalized Subject LinesIncrease open rates by 50%Personalization grabs attention, boosting engagement.
• Consider these figures:38% of people disengage with unattractive websites.
• ”) Too bad for B2B, as the latest marketing stats reveal that video advertising boosts brand recall by 33%, demonstrating its effectiveness.
• Furthermore, videos on landing pages can increase conversion rates by up to 80%.
• com 73% OF MARKETERS BELIEVE THAT SOCIAL MEDIA MARKETING HAS BECOME ‘SOMEWHAT EFFECTIVE’ OR ‘VERY EFFECTIVE’ FOR THEIR BUSINESS GROWTH.
• com 54% OF CONSUMERS USE SOCIAL MEDIA FOR RESEARCH ON BRANDS AND PRODUCTS.
• com 68% OF CONSUMERS SAY THAT SOCIAL MEDIA ALLOWS THEM TO COMMUNICATE AND INTERACT WITH BRANDS.
• com INCREASED BRAND VISIBILITY IS THE PRIMARY BENEFIT OF EMPLOYING SOCIAL MEDIA FOR ADVERTISING, ACCORDING TO 93% OF MARKETERS.
• com 80% OF CONSUMERS HAVE PURCHASED SOMETHING AFTER IT WAS RECOMMENDED BY AN INFLUENCER.
• com 49% OF CONSUMERS BETWEEN THE AGES OF 18 AND 29 HAVE ADMITTED TO PURCHASING SOMETHING IN RESPONSE TO SEEING A SOCIAL MEDIA AD.
• com CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MARKETING OVER SOCIAL MEDIA ENCOURAGES CONSUMERS TO SPEND 20-40% MORE MONEY ON PRODUCTS AND SERVICES.
• com 72% OF COMPANIES WILL UTILISE DATA COLLECTED THROUGH SOCIAL MEDIA TO MAKE WELL-INFORMED BUSINESS DECISIONS.
• com 91% OF BUSINESSES ARE EXPECTED TO INCREASE THEIR SOCIAL MEDIA MARKETING BUDGETS WITHIN THE NEXT 3 YEARS.
• com 41% OF GEN Z AND MILLENIALS MAKE AN IMPULSE PURCHASE ON SOCIAL MEDIA EVERY 2-3 WEEKS.
• com View this post on Instagram A post shared by Creative Freelancer and Virtual Assistant | Amy (@onethreefourcreative) 43% OF CONSUMERS HAVE INCREASED THEIR USE OF SOCIAL MEDIA IN THE LAST 12 MONTHS TO DISCOVER NEW PRODUCTS AND BRANDS.
• com 80% OF BUSINESS EXECUTIVES BELIEVE THAT IT IS VERY IMPORTANT OR EVEN ESSENTIAL TO INVEST IN SOCIAL MEDIA MARKETING.
• 54 content marketing statistics (with key takeaways): Whether you’re refreshing a strategy or starting from scratch, these content strategy statistics may help you define your roadmap:69% of businesses plan to increase their content marketing budgets in 2023.
• (Semrush, 2023) In 2020, 70% of marketers reported changing their targeting/messaging strategy.
• (B2B Content Marketing, 2021) 64% of marketers have adjusted their editorial calendar in the past year.
• (B2B Content Marketing, 2021) 53% of marketers have changed their content distribution/promotion strategy before 2021.
• (B2B Content Marketing, 2021) Nearly 80% of B2B marketers report having a content marketing strategy, but only 43% have documented their strategy.
• (B2B Content Marketing, 2021) 79% of marketers reported “generating more quality leads” to be their top content priority in 2021.
• (Semrush, 2020) Only 31% of B2B marketers reported their organization was extremely or very successful with content marketing in the last 12 months.
• Here’s how other content marketers are performing:Only 4% of marketers measure ROI over a six-month period or longer.
• (LinkedIn, 2021) The top priority for 44% of marketers is to better measure the ROI of demand gen efforts.
• (Google, 2020) Content marketing creates three times as many leads as traditional marketing and costs 64% less.
• (Hubspot, 2023) A 2020 Ziflow survey found that the main priority for 55% of marketing agencies was to increase creative output and project bandwidth.
• (Ziflow, 2020) Revisions also account for delays — 52% of marketing teams said an asset is revised between three and five times before it is considered final.
• (Ziflow, 2020) 54% of marketing leaders attributed creative production delays to having more projects than their team could handle.
• (HubSpot, 2021) 65% of marketers find it challenging to create engaging content that also ranks well in search results.
• Over 50% of surveyed marketing leaders said they were busier than ever following the COVID-19 crisis in March 2020.
• 82% of companies report using content marketing as a key strategy, up from 70% in 2020.
• (Blogging Wizard, 2023) 57% of B2B marketers expect investment in social media/community building during 2023, up from 37% the previous year.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2023) 44% of B2B organizations have seen their sales cycles increase in the past year, and yet marketers continue to feel pressure to provide concrete proof of ROI.
• (LinkedIn, 2020) 92% of B2B marketers now have an ABM program, and 68% of them use automation.
• (Martech, 2020) 46% of B2B marketers planned to increase their marketing spend in 2020 vs the previous year, 12% of those by more than 9%.
• (Statista, 2021) 95% of B2B customers view content as a marker of trust when evaluating a business.
• (Ziflow, 2020) In 2020, 86% of B2B companies outsourced content creation, and 30% outsourced content distribution.
• Use these blog content statistics to promote budget and team expansion in this area:A whopping 98% of marketers use written content as part of their content marketing strategy.
• (Backlinko, 2023) 89% of content marketers used blog posts in their content creation strategy in 2020.
• (MarketingProfs, 2020) 55% of marketers say blog content creation is their top inbound marketing priority.
• (HubSpot, 2021) Desktop traffic accounts for 83% of all traffic to marketing blogs.
• (HubSpot, 2021) 57% of marketers say that blogging has brought in new customers (OptinMonster, 2021) Takeaway:As you can see from the statistics above, blogging is a very influential form of content marketing.
• (Adobe Experience Cloud, 2023) Around 40% of marketers say the pandemic affected their plans around video marketing.
• (Wyzowl, 2021) 91% of marketers are satisfied with the ROI they’ve seen from video marketing on social media.
• Audio Content Statistics From voice search to Google’s algorithms to tips on how to maximize your existing content, here’s what to pay attention to:52% of people who use voice assistants do so several times a day.
• (Quora Creative, 2020) 17% of marketers plan to incorporate podcasts into their content marketing strategy.
• Here’s the inside scoop:72% of marketers say content creation is their best SEO tactic.
• (OptinMonster, 2023) 42% of marketers say improving their SEO is a concern.
• (Semrush, 2020) The use of search engine marketing and pay-per-click ads have increased from 51% to 65%.
• (HubSpot, 2021) In 2020, 75% of marketers reported SEO was the most effective content marketing tactic they implemented during the year.
• That was followed by updating and repurposing existing content, a strategy used by 61% of respondents.
• (Semrush, 2020) 72% of marketers say content creation is their best SEO tactic.
• (IAB, 2021) 89% of marketers said social media was the most popular content distribution channel used in 2020.
• (B2B Content Marketing, 2021) In the past year, the use of social media advertising and paid ad posts increased from 60% to 83%.
• The Future of Content Marketing From budgets to performance, here are the trends worth paying attention to this year:94% of marketers in 39 countries are budgeting for content marketing.
• (Semrush, 2020) 68% of marketers have planned on increasing their content marketing budget this year.
• (Semrush, 2020) Digital ad spend grew 12% in 2020 and shows no sign of slowing down.
• Powerful Digital Marketing Statistics and Facts for 2023: SEO Statistics 68% of all online interactions start with a search engine.
• The organic search figure at 53% is up from the 51% found in the 2014 research.
• 72% of online marketers consider high-quality content creation as the most efficient SEO tactic.
• Based on the latest research carried out by GetResponse, welcome emails are opened at least 82% of the time.
• The average number of people who open their emails via mobile devices is 49%.
• 2 billion social media users who are active every day, which translates to about 42% of the population.
• As research has shown, nearly 98% of sales representatives, who have over 5,000 LinkedIn connections find it easy to achieve or exceed their quota.
• According to HubSpot research, at least 71% of customers who receive a good experience with a brand via social media, are likely to recommend it.
• Here are some of their key findings:Over 74% of companies surveyed already have a website personalization program in place.
• In 2020, retention (58%) has overtaken conversion (55%) and acquisition (45%) as the key goal for website personalization.
• However, this was identified as an area of high potential growth, as 89% expected to be using it by the end of next year.
• The three biggest obstacles that stand in the way of scaling a personalization strategy are:A lack of expertise (37%), limited functionality (36%), and a lack of time (35%).
• Mobile Commerce Statistics A substantial portion of the population- at least 96% – own a mobile phone.
• A study done by the Pew Research Center reveals that at least 96% of the American population owns a cellphone.
• To break it down, 81% own a cellphone while 15% own a cellphone that is not a smartphone.
• To illustrate just how important it is to make your marketing channels mobile-friendly, consider this – more than 40% of online transactions were performed on a mobile device within 4 months.
• 51% of consumers make use of mobile devices to identify new brands and items on the market.
• In a recent survey, up to 51% of consumers claimed that they now use their mobile gadgets to find new brands and products.
• Based on research, 88% of customers don’t bother returning to a website if they’ve had an awful experience.
• Similarly, 61% of users said that if they didn’t find what they were looking for right away on a mobile site, they’d quickly move on to another site.
• The organic search figure at 53% is up from the 51% found in the 2014 research.
• com/resources/reports/email-marketing-benchmarks), welcome emails are opened at least 82% of the time.
• 2 billion social media users who are active every day, which translates to about 42% of the population.
• com/20-shocking-social-selling-statistics/) has shown, nearly 98% of sales representatives, who have over 5,000 LinkedIn connections find it easy to achieve or exceed their quota.
• aspx), at least 71% of customers who receive a good experience with a brand via social media, are likely to recommend it.
• In 2020, retention (58%) has overtaken conversion (55%) and acquisition (45%) as the key goal for website personalization.
• However, this was identified as an area of high potential growth, as 89% expected to be using it by the end of next year.
• The three biggest obstacles that stand in the way of scaling a personalization strategy are:A lack of expertise (37%), limited functionality (36%), and a lack of time (35%).
• org/internet/fact-sheet/mobile/) reveals that at least 96% of the American population owns a cellphone.
• To break it down, 81% own a cellphone while 15% own a cellphone that is not a smartphone.
• 10 Visual Content Marketing Statistics You Must Know: Content with relevant images gets 94% more views than content without images.
• 35% of marketers say visual imagery is the most important form of content for their business.
• It is said that a picture speaks a thousand words, and a video speaks ten times that amount According to this study from HubSpot, video can increase your brand recognition by 95%.
• 85% of all consumers have watched videos online at least once per day, and 87% use their mobile devices every day.
• Content with relevant images gets 94% more views than content without images.
• 35% of marketers say visual imagery is the most important form of content for their business.
• Mind-Blowing Digital Marketing ROI Statistics (2023): Key Digital Marketing ROI Statistics The average return on investment from email marketing stands at 4,200%.
• realized a 60% returning customer rate simply from video content marketing.
• 72% of companies attribute their success to keeping tabs on their content marketing ROI.
• Based on a study done by Content Marketing Institute, 72% of the most prosperous companies compute the ROI of their content marketing compared to 22% of the least successful companies.
• 89% of marketers claim that the ROI they get from influencer marketing is almost the same if not higher than that from other platforms.
• 64% of Internet users are more likely to purchase a product online after watching a video.
• According to HubSpot, at least 64% of individuals will proceed to buy an item once they’ve watched a video explaining more of the product’s details.
• Based on research done by Treepodia, this marketing technique can increase your ROI by 49% and improve your CTR by 74%.
• Videos incorporated on landing pages boost the conversion rate by up to 86%.
• According to EyeView Digital, one such technique is to add videos that can boost the conversion rate by 86%.
• Research shows that this marketing platform costs 62% less compared to traditional methods, yet it results in 3 times as many leads.
• 60% of customers expect brands to provide consistent and precise information across online platforms – be it their website, third-party sites or social media platforms.
• Top 10 Content Marketing Statistics | Semetrical: A survey by Semrush reveals that 91% of marketers achieved success with their content marketing activities in 2021.
• According to Content Marketing Institute, an incredible 81% of marketers believe that content marketing is a core business strategy and a key driver for success.
• Discover how we used content marketing to increase our client’s monthly organic traffic by 599% over a three-year period, and increased online revenue by 79% in just three months.
• 62% of B2B decision-makers rely on practical content to guide their buying decisions.
• DemandGen studies reveal one of the most impactful B2B content marketing statistics, which is that 62% of B2B decision-makers rely on practical content to guide their buying decisions.
• So, if your brand isn’t creating the relevant content your B2B audience craves, you could be falling behind competitors and losing out on this 62% of customers – or even more!
• Find out how we used content to drive organic growth for a leading office provider, increasing the number of B2B organic leads by 139% within a year!
• The Content Marketing Institute reports that 67% of marketers experienced an increase in demand and leads off the back of their content marketing efforts, which presents a 7% rise from the previous year.
• 64% of the most successful B2B marketers have a documented content strategy.
• According to Content Marketing Institute, only 40% of B2B marketers actually have a documented content marketing strategy, yet 64% of the most successful B2B marketers have a documented content marketing strategy.
• Content marketing generates 3x the number of leads than outbound marketing and costs 62% less.
• Content marketing costs approximately 62% less than these methods, too.
• Google data shows that 71% of B2B searches begin with a generic search, as opposed to a branded search.
• And more generally, 68% of online experiences begin with a search engine.
• Demand Metrics reveals that the majority of people (70%) would rather read blog articles to get information than do so through advertisements.
• Content Marketing Institute reports that 72% of marketers are producing significantly more content than they did a year ago, which means the competition is rising!
• 35 Interesting Infosys Stats and Facts [and More] 2023 – Learn Digital Marketing: As of 2022, Infosys’ top 5 clients contribute 13%, top 10 clients contribute 20.
• 45% of B2B content marketers expect their content marketing budget to increase in 2024 (Source: Forbes)
• Creating content is a key marketing strategy for 57% of SaaS companies — (Source:Gitnux)Content creation is a marketing strategy, not a tactic.
• 42% of SaaS marketers said updating existing content has boosted their content marketing value — (Source:Insivia)One of the worst mistakes you can make when investing in content marketing is creating one piece of content and ignoring it forever.
• 47% of SaaS companies find case study blog posts to be effective — Source:Uplift ContentPutting together a compelling case study is one of the most powerful strategies for showcasing your product and attracting future customers.
• 64% of B2B buyers report that podcasts were helpful at the beginning of their buying journey — Source:SiegemediaPodcasting is an effective content marketing strategy for SaaS businesses in technical verticals.
• 40% of hukwbuyers said they engaged with at least three pieces of content before they contacted a sales rep — Source:SiegemediaAs Louis Grenier says, “All people have pains and dreams, but there’s one missing ingredient to turn them into a buyer.
• SaaS buyers spend 27% of their time during the buying process conducting independent online research — Source:Gartner.
• 91% of SaaS businesses say that video as a marketing tool has helped increase their traffic — Source:Wyzowl state of marketing video reportVideo content marketing creates valuable and engaging videos that attract, nurture, and convert business leads.
• 7% of SaaS marketing professionals say the most significant challenge with visual content is producing engaging visuals on a consistent basis — Source:Siegemedia.
• Content marketing costs SaaS businesses 62% less than traditional marketing — Source:Demand metric.
• ‍80% of B2B technology marketers report that writing is the most important of all content marketing skills, followed by digital media skills (77%) and data analysis skills (65%) — Source:SaaSPartners.
• You can imagine that the SaaS industry has increased in size by around 500% over the past seven years.
• 25+ Essential Digital Marketing Statistics (2024) – Intellipaat: Digital marketing is expected to expand at a compound annual growth rate of 10% between 2020 and 2026.
• The digital display is expected to expand at a 15% CAGR, while the search is expected to rise at a 12% CAGR.
• Just in the last year, 65% of firms boosted their digital marketing spending.
• Digital marketing budget expenditure in firms increased by 15% between 2021 and 2022.
• More than 20% of businesses believe that the quantity of insights generated is the key factor in deciding how effective their marketing platforms are.
• By 2023, it is anticipated that more than 82% of web traffic will consist of video.
• Business emails typically have a click-through rate (CTR) of roughly 3%.
• The open rates of emails with customized subject lines might rise by 50%.
• Commercial emails have an average 45% open rate and an average 18% click-through rate.
• Required fields are marked *Comment * Name * Email * Looking for 100% Salary Hike ?
• Digital Marketing Statistics to help skyrocket 2024 | Engati: In 2026, 69% of the overall advertisement spending will be generated via smartphones.
• Roughly 87% of the Digital Advertising revenue will be generated via programmatic advertising in 2026.
• Desktop takes 39% of ad spending as of 2023, while smartphones take 61%.
• By 2026, desktops will have 31% of the ad spending share, and mobile phones will have 69%Non-programmatic ad spending holds a mere 16% share in 2023, while programmatic holds 84%.
• 20% of businesses measure Digital Marketing’s success by counting the number of leads generated.
• According to a survey from Gartner, 72% of the marketing budget goes towards Digital Marketing.
• Google is the world’s biggest search engine, catering to 92% of global searches.
• The marketing job demand is set to increase by 10% by 2026, as per a survey by the Bureau of Labor.
• Customers spend 50% more with businesses that regularly respond to reviews.
• Over 90% of people read reviews online before making a purchasing decision.
• Digital Advertisements can increase a brand’s awareness by 80%62% of marketers use software for Customer Relationship Management.
• 20% of marketing email campaigns need to be optimized for mobile phones.
• Mondays have the highest opening rate – 22% while Sundays have the lowest with 20.
• 82% of digital marketers implement email marketing globally, of which 65% use automated emails.
• Nearly 70% of email recipients can simply tell if an email is spam by reading its subject line.
• The conversion rate increases by 56% if an Email has an emoji in its subject line rather than plain text.
• 46% of customers prefer to be contacted by brands via emails‍Content Marketing Statistics42.
• 80% of those who considered themselves successful in content marketing have documented their content marketing strategies.
• Nearly 80% of successful content marketers spend more than 10% of their marketing budgets on content.
• 27% of marketers have a budget of less than $1000 monthly for content marketing.
• 20% of marketers have a budget of 3 to 5K, while only 6% have a budget of over $20,00049.
• 52% of marketers say social media and community building is a top priority, as is improving content quality, followed by audience research.
• 45% of marketers say that Videos are the top-performing content for their brands.
• Businesses allocate around 15% of their marketing budget toward social media marketing54.
• 50% of small businesses on WhatsApp report increased customer engagement.
• 69% of active WhatsApp users say the messaging app is their primary communication tool.
• Messages sent via WhatsApp have a 70% higher response rate than SMS marketing.
• Revenue increased 21% year-over-year (in constant currency) in Q1 of 202370.
• Over 98% of Facebook’s audience login to the platform via mobile phones.
• Nearly 56% of marketers from the United States and the United Kingdom use Instagram to collaborate with influencers120.
• 76% of marketers in an insider intelligence survey said they use AI for basic content creation and to write copy.
• Gartner forecasts that 30% of outgoing marketing messages from big businesses will be generated by AI by 2025.
• According to Mailchimp, 50% of marketers believe inadequate adoption of AI is holding them back from achieving their goals.
• 2% of marketers spend over 40% of their marketing budget on AI-driven campaigns.
• 91% of Fortune 1000 companies are increasing their investment in artificial intelligence.
• A Statista survey shows that the adoption of generative AI is highest in the marketing and advertising sector (37%).
• Technology (35%) and consulting (30%) are the other two sectors showing increased use of AI.
• 26% of businesses are applying AI techniques such as NLP to marketing and sales‍Future of Digital Marketing (2023 & Beyond)129.
• It is predicted that 69% of the overall advertisement spending will be generated via smartphones.
• One Statistic also reveals that 90% of mobile users need to be made aware of what they want to purchase.
• As per the marketing insider group, over 50% of digital marketers will increase their content marketing budget in 2023.
• 61% of shoppers prefer shopping from businesses with augmented reality offerings.
• Why Content Marketing Matters:The Statistics, Evidence and Trends You Need to Know — 1827 Marketing: 71% of respondents to the Content Marketing Institute’s annual B2B survey stated that content has become more important to their organisation over the past year.
• And according to Semrush, only 3% of the 1,700 marketers and business owners surveyed felt that content marketing was unsuccessful for their brand.
• 50% of respondents expected their content marketing budget to increase.
• This was down from 66% the previous year, suggesting caution in economically turbulent times.
• (Content Marketing Institute, “B2B Content Marketing Budgets, Benchmarks, and Trends 2023”)33% of most successful marketers spend at least 50% of their total marketing budget on content marketing.
• (Content Marketing Institute, “B2B Content Marketing Budgets, Benchmarks, and Trends 2023”)When asked what areas of demand generation would see budget prioritisation, 43% of respondents said content marketing.
• (Hubspot, 2023 State of Marketing Report)44% of businesses surveyed plan to expand their content team in 2023, with a further 53% maintaining current staffing levels.
• (Semrush, “State of Content Marketing 2023”)47% of respondents expect their business to hire content creators including writers, designers, photographers, videographers, etc.
• 16% plan to hire subject matter experts to create unique, high-level content.
• (Content Marketing Institute, “B2B Content Marketing Budgets, Benchmarks, and Trends 2023”)Content marketing costs 62% less than most other types of marketing while delivering 3 times the number of actual leads on average.
• 66% of successful B2B content marketers said it helps nurture leads, subscribers, and their brand’s audience.
• (Content Marketing Institute, “B2B Content Marketing Budgets, Benchmarks, and Trends 2023”)83% of B2B content marketers said it helped build brand awareness.
• (Content Marketing Institute, “B2B Content Marketing Budgets, Benchmarks, and Trends 2023”)62% of successful B2B content marketers said that it generates sales and revenue for their business.
• 1% of keywords were transactional indicating people were interested in buying a product or service.
• (Semrush, State of Search 2023)59% for successful B2B content marketers said content marketing helps them build an audience of subscribers who may become leads.
• (Content Marketing Institute, “B2B Content Marketing Budgets, Benchmarks, and Trends 2023”)Brands that publish original or primary research on their blog are 41% more likely to receive backlinks, higher search result rankings, media mentions, and leads.
• ”)35% of business bloggers with strong results said lead magnets and gated content are among the most effective for their brand, tied with guides and ebooks.
• (Semrush, “State of Content Marketing 2023”)Only 40% of all B2B content marketers have a documented B2B content marketing strategy, yet 64% who identify as highly successful do.
• 81% of B2B content marketers report tracking their results in 2022 compared to 75% in 2021.
• The top metrics they track include 86% website traffic, 83% engagement with marketing email messages, 83% website engagement, 79% conversions, 74% social media analytics, and 59% tie between search rankings and email subscribers.
• (Content Marketing Institute, “B2B Content Marketing Budgets, Benchmarks, and Trends 2023”)Despite this, 65% of marketers say they can’t quantitatively show their impact (CMO and Semrush).
• 47% believed that they owe their content marketing success to effective audience research.
• (Semrush, “State of Content Marketing 2023”)33% audit their content twice a year.
• A further 24% once a year, and just over 20% do it over three times a year.
• 53% see an increase in engagement, and 49% see an increase in their rankings.
• (Semrush, “State of Content Marketing 2023”)Effective marketers are 46% more likely to integrate automation into their workflow so they can focus on content creation, engaging prospects, and higher-level work.
• 35% of marketers thought understanding their Return on Investment (ROI) for their campaigns is very or extremely important.
• (Hubspot, 2020)But 48% of B2B marketers said their biggest challenge is measuring the performance of content across platforms.
• (Content Marketing Institute, “B2B Content Marketing Budgets, Benchmarks, and Trends 2023”) 81% of marketers track KPIs, but only 49% felt confident that their organisation measures performance accurately.
• 45% said setting the right Key Performance Indicators (KPI) was a challenge.
• (Content Marketing Institute, “B2B Content Marketing Budgets, Benchmarks, and Trends 2023”) 86% said privacy concerns and losing cookies and other tracking data have made them adjust their marketing plan.
• 58% company culture encouraging collaboration between the departments, 15% a clear content marketing plan, 12% an easy way for content marketing to communicate and share content with sales, 9% want more clarity about the buyer’s journey.
• (LinkedIn and Content Marketing Institute, Content Marketing:Unlocking Sales & Marketing Performance)They also noted that the sales team did not use around 80% of content created by content marketers.
• For example, 62% of B2B consumers read or engage with three to seven pieces of content before connecting with a salesperson.
• 11% are super researchers who engage with over seven pieces of content first.
• (Demand Gen Report 2022)B2B buyers shared their frustrations about content, 39% want marketers to tone down the sales pitch, 37% prefer shorter content, 36% like to see solid data and research, 36% don’t want to be overwhelmed with copy, 30% want more insights from thought leaders and experts.
• (Hubspot, 2023 State of Marketing Report)On the question of what length of article or blog post yields the best results:39% said under 1,500 words and 32% blog posts or articles longer than 1,500 words.
• Blog posts that include a video receive 70% more traffic, but only 8% of blog posts do.
• While articles and blog posts remain popular, 41% of marketers reported to Hubspot that they were looking to shake things up in the marketing mix.
• The other most effective content marketing tactics of 2022 included:48% in-person events, 47% virtual events, 46% research reports, 43% white papers or ebooks, 36% case studies and videos .
• Types of content B2B prospects prefer to include 67% webinars, 55% reports featuring original research like survey results, 56% E-books, 54% articles or blog posts, 52% white papers, 49% case studies, and 41% newsletters.
• The content they most appreciate early:62% want infographics, 58% blog posts, 56% podcasts, 55% white papers and 41% webinars.
• 48% prefer webinars, 34% white papers, 31% tie between blog posts and infographics, and 27% prefer podcasts.
• At the end of the buying process, preferences change with 17% preferring podcasts, 11% tie between white papers and webinars, 10% blog posts, and 7% infographics.
• 69% of marketers use a newsletter to share their content and reach their audience.
• Here’s how the other platforms stack up:76% Facebook, 70% Twitter, 65% YouTube, and 57% Instagram.
• 42% of all marketers publish on TikTok, and 26% plan to start in 2023 despite concerns about privacy.
• (Hubspot, 2023 State of Marketing Report) However, only 9% of B2B marketers publish on TikTok.
• (Content Marketing Institute, “B2B Content Marketing Budgets, Benchmarks, and Trends 2023”)Only 35% of all marketers tailor content to each social media platform.
• 46% of all marketers repurpose the same content across platforms without optimising it.
• Effective marketers are 27% more likely to tailor their content to the platform and its audience.
• (Hubspot, 2023 State of Marketing Report)Facebook has the top Return on Investment of social platforms at 22%, however this is down from 40% in 2021.
• 29% of marketers plan to use targeted social media ads to help them reach specific audiences without the use of third-party cookies.
• Their B2B survey shows that 67% of marketers plan to use ads like social media boosts to distribute their content.
• 48% share social media content containing relevant links, while 42% prefer quick stats or insights.
• 41% prefer a strong story that they believe resonates with their followers.
• When asked which type of content delivers the highest return on investment, 25% of respondents said video, 12% said images, 9% said blog posts, 8% case studies, 7% tie between podcasts and infographics.
• (Hubspot, 2023 State of Marketing Report)32% of B2B marketers are using a marketing automation system to help manage their content.
• (Content Marketing Institute, “B2B Content Marketing Budgets, Benchmarks, and Trends 2023”)While 19% of businesses who use AI content generation tools reported success, 24% of businesses who do not use AI content generation reported the same showing no clear strategic advantage.
• (Semrush, “State of Content Marketing 2023”)As customers grow increasingly concerned about privacy, 86% of marketers need to adapt to changing regulations, standards, and tools.
• (Hubspot, 2023 State of Marketing Report)Only 36% of marketers currently include interactive content in their content marketing strategy, with 64% missing out on the links it can provide.
• (Gitnux) 74% of B2B marketers say providing value is the top factor in content marketing success.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 80% of B2B technology marketers report that writing is the most important of all content marketing skills, followed by digital media skills (77%), and data analysis skills (65%) (SaaSPartners.
• io) 57% of the most successful B2B tech companies outsource their SaaS content marketing activities.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 78% of Chief Marketing Officers (CMO) view custom content as the future of marketing.
• Over 50% of SaaS platforms already make content an integral part of their online strategy, while 78% of CMOs insist that it’s importance to the growth of the industry is only going to grow in years to come.
• Audience Behaviors Online users spend 20% of their online time consuming content.
• (DemandMetric) 78% of users perceive a relationship between themselves and a company using custom content.
• (DemandMetric) SaaS buyers spend 27% of their time during the buying process conducting independent online research.
• (Gartner) More than 30% of SaaS subscribers cancel their subscription within the first three months.
• (0101Marketing) Content marketing costs SaaS businesses 62% less than traditional marketing.
• (DemandMetric) The average SaaS startup spends an average of 75% of revenue on sales and marketing in the first three years.
• (Zipdo) SaaS businesses who use content marketing produce lead generation growth of up to 400%.
• Blogging 98% of SaaS companies have blogs, and 42% of marketers said updating existing content has boosted their content marketing value.
• (Insivia) B2B brands with regularly maintained blogs generate 67% more leads than those that don’t.
• (DemandMetric) 90% SaaS companies post blogs as part of their online strategy.
• (MailUp) SaaS landing pages with a strong CTA get an 80% increase in conversion rates, and sign-up forms can be increased by 34%.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 47% of SaaS companies find case study blog posts to be effective.
• Refine Content Strategy Video 91% of businesses say that video as a marketing tool has helped increase their traffic.
• (Wyzowl State of Video Marketing 2023 Report) 57% of video marketers created screen recorded video in 2022.
• (Wyzowl State of Video Marketing 2023 Report) More than 70% of sales professionals say custom-recorded video produces more opens, clicks and responses than text-based emails.
• (Business Wire) 51% of B2B SaaS marketing professionals say webinars and webcasts were their most successful form of video content, followed by interviews with industry experts at 36%.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 91% of SaaS apps find success with a webinar format that includes at least two speakers.
• Use of video as a marketing channel is at an all-time high, its usage among businesses growing 30% in the last five years.
• 5% of SaaS marketing professionals say infographics and other original visual graphics generate the most engagement.
• (Venngage) People following directions that combine text with illustrations successfully follow those directions 323% better than those following directions that don’t feature illustrations.
• 7% of SaaS marketing professionals say the biggest challenge with visual content is producing engaging visuals on a consistent basis.
• Social Media YouTube is the top driver of social media traffic for 98% of leading SaaS companies, followed by Facebook (96%), LinkedIn (78%) and Twitter (72%).
• (Mike Sonders) 86% of consumers looking to buy IT products (including SaaS subscriptions) use social media to help make a decision.
• (SocialPilot) 76% of Internet users buy a product or service after seeing it on social media.
• Content Promotion 81% of the most successful B2B content marketers promote their content using paid methods.
• (Content Marketing Institute) Social media advertising is the most used form of paid content promotion in the B2B industry, used by 77% of top marketers.
• This is followed by SEM (Search Engine Marketing) and PPC (Pay Per Click) at 65%.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 75% of B2B content marketers using paid social media ads choose LinkedIn as their primary platform, while 79% said it produced the best results.
• Challenges and Obstacles 59% of B2B technology marketers say creating content is a challenge.
• (Content Marketing Institute) The top three reasons why businesses don’t use video content are lack of time (30%), lack of knowledge (18%), and inability to convince key decision makers to invest in video (10%).
• 2% of marketers say their biggest challenge is sourcing data and statistics for their content.
• (Venngage) 67% of B2B content marketing teams have been asked to produce more content without being allocated more resources.
• While traditional approaches like blogging and social media remain pivotal, video is undoubtedly entering its zenith, with fewer than 10% of businesses not making use of video-based content to market their business.
• – CMO 60% of all social media traffic to B2B websites comes from Facebook, Twitter and LinkedIn.
• 93% of shoppers’ buying decisions are influenced by social media because 90% trust peer recommendations.
• – #Socialnomics 2014 Just 18% of consumers trust posts by brands or companies on social sites like Facebook and Twitter.
• Customer service requests through “eService” channels – including web, social and chat – are expected to grow to 53% in 2015.
• – Bluewolf 90% of enterprises say they use social media to respond to customer service inquiries – yet 58% of consumers who have tweeted about a bad experience never received a response from the offending company.
• – SteamFeed Instagram grew by 50% between March and December 2014, and exceeded the 300 million user mark.
• – Simply Measured Today, 86% of top brands have Instagram accounts, up from 71% last year.
• – Simply Measured Tweets with images receive 18% more clicks, 89% more favorites and 150% more retweets.
• – BufferSocial When people follow a brand on Twitter, 72% are more likely to make a future purchase from that brand.
• – Twitter Facebook posts with less than 250 characters get 60% more engagement – SteamFeed Posting to Facebook on Fridays is likely to result in better engagement:17% of weekly comments, 16% of weekly likes and shares, and 25% of videos played occur on that day.
• 20+ B2B SEO Statistics to Inform Your Marketing Strategy in 2024 – Growfusely: B2B Purchase Journey Begins Online 27% of the B2B purchase journeys begin with online searches.
• Furthermore, 41% of B2B buyers go through at least three websites before approaching for sales.
• 49% of B2B companies are using SEO to achieve various marketing objectives.
• Content marketing, which also contributes to SEO, is second with 43% votes.
• 34% of B2B marketers said that SEO was responsible for most of their leads and sales.
• While in-person trade shows and events (highest in budget spent) ranked 4th with 27% votes.
• 2% of marketers use 3 to 5 different metrics to measure SEO success while 40.
• An analysis of 912 million web pages shows that 93% of B2B content does not get any backlinks.
• Out of the remaining 7%, only 3% of content gets backlinks from one or more sources.
• 2% More Backlinks The analysis of 912 million web pages shows that longer articles are more likely to get backlinks and social shares.
• When compared, listicles received 203% more social shares than infographics and 218% more shares than how-to posts.
• 6% Organic Traffic The goal of most B2B SEO campaigns is to rank first in search engine results for relevant keywords.
• 160+ Digital Marketing Statistics of 2024:Trend, Data, and Fun Facts: 5% of company revenue across almost all industries in 2022, according to Gartner’s annual CMO Spend and Strategy Survey.
• In 2022, technical SEO was the highest priority for SEO professionals at 15%.
• 77% of people use search engines (Google) to start their patient journey.
• Updating an existing title tag with an SEO optimized one can increase page clicks by more than 437%.
• Longtail keyword searches enjoy a 3-5% higher CTR in the organic search results8.
• 56% of businesses allocate less than one-quarter of their marketing budget to link building.
• 92% of marketers continue to value video as an ‘important part’ of their marketing strategy.
• 70% of clicks in Google search results go to organic, with 30% going to AdWords.
• 5% of businesses say that PPC campaigns help inform/assist their SEO efforts.
• Search engine optimization can increase the business value of a blog visit by 429%.
• Updating an existing title tag with an SEO optimised one can increase page clicks by more than 437%.
• 76% of American consumers purchased a product after seeing a brand’s social post.
• 49% of social media users depend on and trust influencers for product recommendations.
• 90% of brands want to build brand awareness through social media, 77% of them use it to maintain brand reputation, while 71% of them use it for building and managing an engaged community.
• Brands have seen a 33% increase in purchase intent resulting from ad exposure on LinkedIn.
• On mobile and desktop SERPs, the first page that ranks for a domain on a search is different 35% of the time.
• 40% of users that have a bad experience with the mobile version of your website go directly to your competitor shortly after.
• When searching on mobile, Google is the preferred choice of 96% of smartphone users.
• 69% of smartphone users said they would make purchases from businesses if their mobile websites addressed their queries or concerns.
• 40% of shoppers consult 3 or more channels (often while shopping) before making a purchase.
• 82% of marketers are actively investing in content marketing, 10% report not using content marketing, and 8% are unsure if their company uses content marketing.
• 40% of B2B marketers have a documented content marketing strategy, and 64% of the most successful B2B marketers have a documented content marketing strategy.
• 73% of people admit to skimming blog posts, while 27% consume them thoroughly.
• 51% of the businesses that invest in content marketing publish content every day.
• 6% more engagement than static content, with buyers spending an average of 8.
• Short articles/posts of fewer than 3,000 words (83%) and videos (61%) are the top two content types that B2C marketers used in the last 12 months.
• In addition to using their organization’s website to distribute content in the last 12 months, more than 50% of B2C respondents used blogs, email newsletters, and email.
• 93% of content marketers believe that video converts the same or better than other forms of content.
• Among the B2C marketers who used paid social media platforms, the majority chose Facebook (91%) and Instagram (59%).
• 44% of users consume 3-5 pieces of content before engaging with a business.
• At least one piece of content is created every day by 60% of marketers.
• 76% of content marketers use organic traffic as a key metric to measuring content success.
• 94% of content marketers are using social media as a distribution channel for their content.
• The majority of marketers (62%) look at page views to know how well their content is performing.
• The top technologies used by content marketing teams are social media posting (65%), website analytics tools (50%), and email marketing software (44%).
• 33% of marketers send weekly emails and 26% send emails multiple times per month.
• 77% of marketers have seen an increase in email engagement over the last 12 months.
• 81% of B2B marketers say their most used form of content marketing is email newsletters.
• When evaluating content performance, 47% of B2B marketers rely on email engagement.
• Globally, Mondays see the highest email open rates (22%), compared to the lowest open rates on Sundays (20-3%).
• 92% of adults that are online use email, with 61% using it on an average day.
• 45% of marketers send emails for their email marketing campaigns on a weekly basis.
• 30% of marketers still send the same volume of emails to users regardless of engagement.
• 99% of email users check their inbox every day, with some checking 20 times a day.
• 55% of respondents say email marketing is the most often automated channel.
• Segmented emails make readers 50% more likely to click on a link within the email.
• 99% of email users check their email every day, some as much as 20 times a day.
• 86% of business professionals prefer to use email when communicating for business purposes.
• Adding a blog to your existing website can increase traffic by as much as 434%.
• The most popular types of content produced are blog posts (85%) and infographics (61%), followed by social sharing assets (56%).
• 65% of companies who say their content marketing is very successful, do content audits more than twice a year.
• Having content that’s backed by data is 73% more persuasive than publishing a post without one.
• 23% of bloggers reported that they need 2–3 hours to write a blog post.
• 82% of marketers who blog consistently see positive ROI from inbound links and increased rankings in search engines.
• 60% of consumers feel connected to a brand after reading custom content.
• 72% of overall marketing budgets get put towards digital marketing channel161.
• 181 interesting digital marketing statistics for 2024: 69% of businesses plan to increase their content marketing budgets in 2023.
• (Semrush, 2023) 82% of companies report using content marketing, up from 70% in 2020.
• (Blogging Wizard, 2023) 65% of content marketers can’t consistently measure content ROI.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2022) Content marketing creates three times as many leads as traditional marketing and costs 64% less.
• (Showpad, 2020) Only 31% of B2B marketers reported their organization was extremely or very successful with content marketing in the last 12 months.
• (B2B Content Marketing, 2021) 37% of small organizations, 54% of medium-sized organizations, and 75% of large organizations report outsourcing part of their content marketing efforts.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 47% of B2B marketers don’t measure ROI from their content marketing efforts.
• (Point Visible) B2C marketers dedicate an average 26% of their total marketing budget towards content marketing.
• (Content Marketing Institute) Generating quality leads is the main goal of 79% of marketers in 2021 (eMarketer, 2020) 46% of B2B marketers planned to increase their marketing spend in 2020 vs the previous year, 12% of those by more than 9%.
• 9% for Twitter in 2020 (eMarketer, 2021) Video is the #1 form of media used in content strategy, overtaking blogs and infographics.
• (HubSpot) In 2020, US adults spent 7 hours 50 minutes consuming digital media per day, up 15% (59 minutes) over the average daily time spent in 2019.
• (Hubspot, 2020) 70% of marketers are actively investing in content marketing.
• (HubSpot, 2020) 75% of B2C marketers think their organization is successful with content marketing.
• By 2022, over 80% of all global internet traffic will come from streaming and downloading videos (Cisco).
• (Digiday) 87% of video marketers report a positive ROI — a number that is also trending upwards over time (Wyzowl).
• 78% of video marketers say that video marketing has improved their company’s bottom line (Wyzowl).
• 51% of B2B decision-makers use YouTube videos to research purchases (Hootsuite) 96% of current video marketers plan to increase or maintain their video spend, a number that is up from last year (Wyzowl).
• 85% of marketers rank short-form videos as the most effective type of social media content in 2021 (HubSpot) 64% of marketers plan to invest more in short-form video in 2022.
• (HubSpot) US adults spend 2 hours 13 minutes watching videos per day, up from 1 hour 46 minutes in 2019 (eMarketer, 2021) The most commonly-created types of videos are explainer videos (73%), social media videos (67%), presentation videos (51%), sales videos (41%), and video ads (41%).
• (Wyzowl, 2021) In a 2018 HubSpot survey, 54% of consumers wanted to see more video content from a brand or business they support.
• 96% of global traffic comes from Google search, Google Images, and Google Maps.
• (Think With Google) CTR of emails with emojis in subject line is 56% higher.
• 7% of pages will rank in the top 10 search results within a year of publication.
• (Ahrefs) 75% of people never scroll past the first page of search engines.
• (AdBadger, 2019) 74% of brands say PPC is a huge driver for their business.
• (State of PPC 2019/2020, 2019) 64% of brands are planning to increase their PPC budget in the next 12 months.
• (State of PPC 2019/2020, 2019) PPC visitors are 50% more likely to purchase something than organic visitors.
• (Unbounce, 2019) 62% of marketers stated they will increase their PPC budgets for the following year.
• (Hanapin) Google Ads’ Display Network reaches 90% of internet users via 2 million websites.
• 22 billion on search in 2024 (eMarketer) 75% of users never scroll past the first page of search results.
• (AdBadger, 2019) 74% of brands say PPC is a huge driver for their business.
• (State of PPC 2019/2020, 2019) 64% of brands are planning to increase their PPC budget in the next 12 months.
• (State of PPC 2019/2020, 2019) PPC visitors are 50% more likely to purchase something than organic visitors.
• (Unbounce, 2019) 62% of marketers stated they will increase their PPC budgets for the following year.
• (Hanapin) Google Ads’ Display Network reaches 90% of internet users via 2 million websites.
• (PowerTraffick) 56% of digital media professionals think programmatic advertising will be the most vulnerable to brand risk incidents in 2021.
• 32% of e-commerce website visits via tablet devices were converted into purchases in Q2 2020.
• (Statista, 2020) Longer landing pages can generate up to 220% more leads.
• (Marketing Experiments) 50% of shoppers will abandon carts because of high extra costs like shipping, tax, and fees.
• 42% for every extra second of page-load time (Portent, 2019) Companies spend just $1 on conversion rate optimization for every $92 spent on customer acquisition.
• Relatable content will grow significantly in 2023 as 46% of social media marketers will leverage it for the first time.
• (HubSpot Blog, 2023) 47% of social media marketers say their brand sells directly within social media apps.
• (Statista) 81% of businesses prefer to use video marketing on Facebook.
• (Buffer) 96% of B2B marketers use LinkedIn for organic content distribution and 83% for paid social ad campaigns (Sprout Social) Instagram has a higher order value than Facebook despite having fewer users.
• (Shopify) 873% of Gen Z uses TikTok according to our consumer trends survey.
• 85% of them use Instagram, but TikTok is the platform Gen Z spends the most time on.
• (Hubspot, 2023) 88% of consumers are more likely to purchase from a company after reading reviews from other customers on social media.
• (Sprout Social Index) Online 15% of marketers use social media data to measure ROI.
• (GlobalWebIndex) In 2019, over 87% of video marketers on LinkedIn described the platform as an effective video marketing channel.
• (HubSpot, 2020) When examining B2B advertising, social media advertising was used by 83% of marketers and ranked second in success (29%) behind search engine marketing (33%).
• Not optimizing for the mobile user is akin to neglecting around 50% of your potential customer base.
• (DataReportal) 63% of mobile traffic is reported to come from video content.
• (Ericsson) Nearly 50% of buyers start product searches from their mobile devices.
• (Statista) 64% of global marketers feel confident in their ability to measure and optimize platform-specific and channel-specific marketing ROI.
• (Nielsen) Ericsson Mobility Report predicting a 25% increase in mobile traffic by 2025.
• (Ericsson, 2020) Mobile devices are used for over 40% of online transactions.
• More than 60% of B2B buyers report that mobile played a significant role in a recent purchase.
• (JoshMDawson) 46% of people would not purchase from a brand again if they had an interruptive mobile experience.
• (LinkedIn) 50% smartphone users are more likely to expect to purchase something immediately while using their smartphone.
• (Statista, 2021) If the mobile page takes longer than 3 seconds to load, 53% of people will leave it.
• 5% compound annual growth rate (CAGR) until 2024, and account for 44% of all eCommerce transactions.
• 6% of consumers perform price comparison in-store on their mobile device.
• (Statista, 2019) 28% won’t buy when they are required to create an account to checkout.
• 52 billion (eMarketer, 2020) Amazon will account for 50% of all US eCommerce sales by 2021 (Statista, 2020) Search and navigation are the most important site elements for online shoppers (Statista, 2020) In 2019, e-retail sales accounted for 14.
• (Marketing Charts) Over 70% of B2B decision makers prefer remote human interactions.
• (McKinsey) Product specs (67%) and product comparisons (65%) were cited as the most useful types of content during the B2B decision-making process.
• (Marketing Charts, 2020) 89% of B2B researchers gather information about potential purchases through the internet (Google) Of the average 13 pieces of content buyers reported consuming, an average of 8 came directly from the vendor, with the remaining 5 being from third-party sources.
• (Marketing Charts, 2020) 60% of B2B marketers say they are facing reduced or stagnant budgets for 2023.
• (LinkedIn) B2B marketers are expected to personalize their content to more than one decision-maker, with almost two-thirds (63%) of teams being composed of at least 3 decision-makers.
• (Marketing Charts, 2020) Between February and March 2020, the number of B2B brands offering webinars grew by 36%, from 245 to 332.
• (Statista, 2020) During a 2019 survey conducted among B2B marketing professionals in the United States, it was found that 50% of respondents believed e-mail to be the most effective channel in producing a high return on investment.
• (Statista, 2020) 46% of marketers stated that they were planning to increase their B2B content marketing spending in the following 12 months, out of which 12% planned to increase it by more than 9%.
• 10 Key Visual Content Marketing Statistics for 2023: Users are 30% more likely to send payment when visuals are involved with your marketing (Xerox)Visual content marketing describes the use of visual content, such as images, videos, infographics, and even memes, to inform, engage, and connect with your audience in service of growing your business.
• In fact, users are 30% more likely to send payment when visuals are involved with your marketing.
• 84% of consumers agree that watching promotional videos have convinced them to purchase a product or service.
• On average, people retain 55% more information when it is paired with an image (bloggingwizard)6.
• Personalized imagery has been shown to decrease cart abandonment rates by 17% and improve conversion rates by 200% (Hyperise)For those without the time and money for video marketing, images provide an easier avenue to engagement than their motion-based counterparts.
• Personalized imagery has even been shown to decrease cart abandonment rates by 17% and improve conversion rates by 200% (Hyperise).
• Almost 41% of survey respondents said infographics and illustrations are the most effective for achieving their marketing goals (Venngage) 9.
• The click-through-rate of a meme campaign is 14% higher than email marketing (Forbes council)Memes often rely on humor and timely events, so they aren’t likely to be as effective or popular as videos, images, and infographics when it comes to your overall visual content marketing strategy.
• Access seodashboard.hibu.com. Hibu Performance Dashboard | Hibu digital marketing results, stats and tools: We found that 89% of them (8 requests) were addressed to the original Seodashboard.
• Social media advertising and marketing in the United States – statistics & facts | Statista: 53% Detailed statistics Revenue growth of social media advertising in the U.
• 2022, by generation Share of consumers who think Photoshop and generative AI are acceptable for use in social media marketing 25% Detailed statistics Attitudes towards the usage of generative AI for social media ads in the U.
• Digital Marketing Industry Statistics [Fresh Research] • Gitnux: 82% of marketers are actively investing in content marketing, with 40% of B2B marketers having a documented content marketing strategy and 69% actively investing time in SEO.
• By 2026, the Digital Marketing industry is predicted to reach $807 billion, with desktop taking 31% of the ad spending share and mobile phones taking 69% The global digital advertising and marketing market is estimated to grow from $350 billion in 2020 to $786.
• 96% of global traffic comes from Google Search, Google Images, and Google Maps, with SEO driving 1,000%+ more traffic than organic social media.
• 82% of marketers are actively investing in content marketing, with 40% of B2B marketers having a documented content marketing strategy and 69% actively investing time in SEO.
• Content marketing revenue is set to double by 2026, with 37% of industry professionals spending $10K or less, 42% of marketers planning to increase their budgets, and 61% of companies measuring ROI.
• 9% of survey respondents have made a purchase after seeing a social media advertisement.
• Facebook is the most popular platform for digital marketers, with 93% of them using it, and it is responsible for 25% of all digital ad spending.
• There are 10 million active advertisers on Facebook, and 44% of users shop for products on Instagram weekly.
• Digital Marketing Industry:The Most Important Statistics By 2026, the Digital Marketing industry is predicted to reach $807 billion, with desktop taking 31% of the ad spending share and mobile phones taking 69%.
• 82% of marketers are actively investing in content marketing, with 40% of B2B marketers having a documented content marketing strategy and 69% actively investing time in SEO.
• Digital Marketing Industry:Statistics Overview By 2026, the Digital Marketing industry is predicted to reach $807 billion, with desktop taking 31% of the ad spending share and mobile phones taking 69%.
• 96% of global traffic comes from Google Search, Google Images, and Google Maps, with SEO driving 1,000%+ more traffic than organic social media.
• 82% of marketers are actively investing in content marketing, with 40% of B2B marketers having a documented content marketing strategy and 69% actively investing time in SEO.
• Content marketing revenue is set to double by 2026, with 37% of industry professionals spending $10K or less, 42% of marketers planning to increase their budgets, and 61% of companies measuring ROI.
• Email campaigns offering coupons have a five times higher purchase rate than regular emails, and 64% of small businesses leverage email marketing to build awareness and connect with their audience.
• 92% of marketers in companies with more than 100 employees in the US are expected to use social media for marketing, 67% of consumers expect brands to have a social media presence, and 37.
• 9% of survey respondents have made a purchase after seeing a social media advertisement.
• Facebook is the most popular platform for digital marketers, with 93% of them using it, and it is responsible for 25% of all digital ad spending.
• There are 10 million active advertisers on Facebook, and 44% of users shop for products on Instagram weekly.
• Key B2B Content Marketing Statistics You Need to Know in 2023 – SEOmator: 73% of B2B marketers use content marketing while 70% of B2C do it as their overall strategy.
• In 2023, 91% of B2B marketers use content marketing, up from 82% in 2022.
• 63% of B2B marketers say content marketing is effective in driving sales.
• 58% of B2B marketers say content marketing is effective in improving brand awareness.
• 55% of B2B marketers say content marketing is effective in building relationships with customers.
• 86% of effective content marketers have someone overseeing their content marketing strategy.
• On average, businesses allocate 30% of their marketing budget to content marketing.
• 74% of B2B firms utilize content marketing for lead generation, while the primary goal is to enhance brand awareness (82%).
• me)59% of B2B marketers say content marketing has helped them increase their website traffic.
• (Source:Content Marketing Institute)57% of B2B marketers say content marketing has helped them improve their brand awareness.
• (Source:Content Marketing Institute)Here are some additional statistics from 2023 on the effectiveness of B2B content marketing:69% of businesses plan to increase their content marketing budgets in 2023.
• (Source:Content Marketing Institute)71% of B2B marketers say content marketing has become more important to their organization in the last year.
• 82% of B2B marketers say content marketing is an effective way to build relationships with customers.
• (Source:Content Marketing Institute)72% of B2B buyers say they are more likely to do business with a company that provides them with valuable content.
• (Source:DemandGen Report)60% of B2B buyers say they have purchased from a company after reading their blog.
• (Source:HubSpot) -58% of B2B buyers say they have shared content from a company with their colleagues.
• (Source:DemandGen Report)54% of B2B buyers say they have contacted a company after reading their content.
• Blog posts:61% of B2B marketers say blog posts are their most effective content format.
• Infographics:55% of B2B marketers use infographics in their content marketing efforts.
• eBooks:48% of B2B marketers use eBooks in their content marketing efforts.
• White papers:46% of B2B marketers use white papers in their content marketing efforts.
• Videos:44% of B2B marketers use videos in their content marketing efforts.
• Podcasts:39% of B2B marketers use podcasts in their content marketing efforts.
• Social media:92% of B2B marketers use social media to distribute their content.
• Email:Email content is widely loved by B2B businesses, with 93% of B2B marketers using it.
• Webinars:55% of B2B marketers use webinars in their content marketing efforts.
• Events:56% of B2B marketers use events in their content marketing efforts.
• (Source:Harvard Business Review)Only 14% of large B2B companies have a customer-centric culture.
• 83% of B2B marketers believe that content quality is the most important factor in differentiating themselves from the competition.
• 72% of B2B marketers believe that covering untapped topics/stories is a great way to differentiate themselves from the competition.
• The majority of SaaS businesses (99%) believe that a 14-day free trial is the best length of time to allow potential customers to try their product or service.
• 57% of B2B marketers plan to increase their content marketing budget in 2023.
• 3%By 2023, video production costs are expected to account for 62% of the total marketing budget, making video one of the most popular content formats.
• Video Marketing Statistics:Websites with Video Do Better in SEO: ROI of Video Marketing In their 2020 report, Wyzowl found:89% of video marketers say video gives them a good ROI.
• Animoto‘s Social Video Forecast also suggests that 91% of marketers are satisfied with the ROI of video on social media.
• Both its B2B and B2C research for 2020 showed that:71% of B2B marketers use marketing videos.
• And videos on average get 135% more interaction than posts with just images.
• Also keep in mind that on Facebook, square videos get about 30% more views than videos in landscape.
• 13 Striking Social Media Marketing Statistics for 2021: 73% of marketers evaluate their social media marketing campaign as “somewhat effective” or “very effective.
• ” 37% of consumers find inspiration to buy a product on social media platforms.
• 48% of social media users claim responsiveness increases their willingness to purchase from a brand or company.
• In 2021, social media gained 400 million new users, marking a 10% growth in just one year.
• Social networks stats show that 54% of social media users research products online.
• In addition, 37% have visited a brand’s social media page, and 36% have liked or followed the account.
• According to social media statistics, 36% of millennials are online almost constantly.
• As of January 2021, over 40% of internet users are on social media for work-related purposes.
• 50% of people who have visited a company’s website buy their product or service.
• 73% of marketers consider their social media marketing campaign somewhat or very effective.
• Well, data shows that YouTube channels earning over $10,000 per year have increased by 50% year over year.
• Data suggests that 70% of viewers purchased a product after seeing the brand on YouTube.
• Social media data also shows that creating ads that target users by intent instead of demographics result in a 100% higher purchase intent.
• Social media research shows that the majority of users (70%) don’t search for specific brands on the platform.
• 74% of people who follow small or medium businesses on social media expect updates on future products.
• For example, 74% of people who follow small and medium businesses on Twitter expect updates on future products.
• 49% of consumers depend on influencers’ recommendations on social media platforms.
• 39 Content Marketing ROI Statistics You’ll Want to Share: Content Marketing and Digital Marketing Statistics 2022 Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing but drives 3 times as many leads.
• Content marketing has made 70% of consumers feel closer to companies The top three ways marketers measure the success of content marketing strategy are social media analytics (67%), website traffic (63%), and website engagement (49%).
• The primary goals for running marketing campaigns are brand awareness (88%) and building loyalty among existing customers (50%).
• Companies with blogs create 67% more leads per month than companies without.
• Source Content Creation Statistics 2022 82% of marketers actively use content marketing in 2021, up from 70% in 2020.
• The most popular technologies used in content strategy are analytics tools (83%), social media analytics (80%), and email marketing (75%).
• Almost 40% of marketers say content creation is a very important part of their overall marketing strategy.
• The top areas of content marketing investment in 2022 are video (69%) and events (61%).
• B2B Marketing ROI Benchmarks B2B marketers with blogs gain 67% more leads B2B companies spend 26% of their total marketing budget on content marketing.
• If the sales as a result of the campaign are $30,000, the formula would be ($30,000-$5,000) ÷ $5,000 = 500%, or 5:1.
• However, 5:1 or 500% is considered a good general benchmark for a marketing ROI.
• How to Set Up Content Marketing Attribution Only 52% of marketers currently use marketing attribution reporting, so there’s a lot of room for improvement in the industry.
• HubSpot reported that 88% of those marketing said that videos gave them a positive ROI.
• That’s because they noticed an 87% increase in website traffic and an 80% increase in sales due to video.
• Pandemic Changes Are Here to Stay 70% of B2B marketers reported that the pandemic made a moderate to major impact on their content marketing strategy.
• 85% expect that some of the changes will stay in effect for the foreseeable future.
• While the use of in-person events decreased drastically (down to 42% in 2021 from 73% in 2020), they are back on the rise.
• 52% of businesses are expected to increase in-person events, and 39% say they will do more hybrid events.
• 25 Digital Marketing Stats You Need to Know In 2023 – SocialToaster: According to Smallbizgenius, 84% of consumers expect brands to create their own content.
• Social Media has taken over the globe, and our free time, with 59% of the world population using social media.
• It’s critical that you invest in ads that engage your users, “70%-80% of users ignore sponsored search results.
• Through paid ads, 28% of internet users have found new products and services – making paid media a necessary component of any successful marketing effort.
• “Email collection forms were the most successful at converting viewers, with a 15% conversion rate in 2020.
• 44% of B2B website traffic is directed to the homepage, as opposed to the landing page.
• “88% of online shoppers won’t return to a site after a bad user experience.
• For instance, 70% of people look at a bulleted list and only 55% look at a list without bullets.
• 70% of users abandon their cart before checkout because of poor or unoptimized UX.
• 49% of businesses say that the best marketing ROI was through organic growth.
• A recommendation from family and friends can make 83% of Americans more likely to complete a purchase.
• Social Media Statistics in the UK – Red Rag Marketing: Currently, there are 53 million active users in the UK, which equates to 78% of the entire British population.
• However, this figure rises slightly to 81% when you include those who do not actively use social media but still use it for passing information to friends, clients, or family members.
• However, the number of social media users from that age group went up from 35% in 2015 to 59% in 2020.
• Gender In the United Kingdom, female respondents who reported creating a profile on any social media site rose from 56% to 84% between 2010 and 2020.
• Similarly, a survey conducted at the end of 2020 revealed that 80% of male respondents said they had a profile on social networking platforms.
• Home Internet and Social Media Usage Internet access has become far more widespread in the UK, reaching 96% of British households from January to February 2020.
• The percentage of households with internet connections remained low among those households in which an adult aged 65 years and over lived, accounting for only 8% on average.
• Still, the proportion had increased steadily from 4% at the beginning of the century.
• For example, the percentage of adults who shopped online in January and February of 2020 was 87%, more than double that of 2008.
• 15 Key SEO Statistics to Know When Building Your Marketing Plans – Lumar: 17% CTR for paid) 3) Ranking matters:pages in position 1 on Google search receive 81.
• 5% more clicks than pages in position 2 — and 10x the clicks of position 10 results.
• In a Vodafone case study, they found a 31% improvement in LCP was tied to an 8% increase in sales.
• 9) Case Study:A 300ms reduction in load time correlated to 12% more user engagement and 9% more pageviews per session.
• 13) 53% of marketers who use SEO have a strategy for optimizing videos and images 14) 66% of enterprise website teams employ 6 or more in-house SEOs (for websites with 10k+ URLs) 15) The biggest SEO challenge for enterprise businesses?
• Executing improvements and monitoring large sites at scale, according to 60% of executives surveyed.
• ) [Source:Sistrix study] 89% of marketing leaders surveyed believe organic search will drive more revenue in the years to come.
• [Source:Lumar & Econsultancy research] Organic search & the buyer’s journey:51% of shoppers surveyed use Google to research the purchases they plan to make online.
• [Source:Google/Ipsos Global Retail Study] How your website’s technical health influences business goals:Even a one-second delay in mobile load times can reduce conversion rates by up to 20%.
• (In a Vodafone case study, they found a 31% improvement in LCP correlated to an 8% increase sales.
• dev] Case Study:A 300ms reduction in load time correlated to 12% more user engagement and 9% more pageviews per session.
• [Source:Google Search Central] Case Study:Utilizing website intelligence tools contributed to a 17% YoY increase in organic traffic and a 50% increase in digital conversions for Lumar users.
• [Source:Lumar case studies] Staying competitive with your brand’s website efforts in 2023:20% of marketers surveyed saw a significant increase in their budget for organic marketing last year.
• [Source:Search Engine Journal] 88% of marketers who have an SEO strategy in place expect to maintain or increase their investment in 2023.
• [Source:HubSpot] 53% of marketers who use SEO have a strategy for optimizing videos and images.
• [Source:HubSpot] 66% of enterprise website teams employ 6 or more in-house SEOs (for websites with 10k+ URLs).
• Executing improvements and monitoring large sites at scale, according to 60% of digital leaders surveyed.
• 25 billion website visits, GrowthBadger found that more than 50% of this website traffic, for most industries, came from organic search.
• 17% CTR for paid) The top result in Google’s organic search results has an average click-through rate (CTR) of 27.
• 6% percent, according to Backlinko data — compare this to the average 3.
• 17% CTR for paid search ads (across all industries studied) on Google, according to WordStream data.
• 5% more clicks than pages in position 2 — and 10x the clicks of position 10 results.
• 8% As we’ve noted above, research looking at 4 million Google search results conducted by Backlinko, found that pages in the number 1 spot in Google’s organic search results generally have a click-through rate of 27.
• 9% – notably higher than ‘standard’ organic results) The CTR of organic search results can also be influenced by whether or not your content is displayed in the search engine results pages (SERPs) with or without certain ‘enhanced SERP features’.
• ) 5) 89% of marketing leaders surveyed believe organic search will drive more revenue in the years to come 89% of marketing leaders surveyed in our report with Econsultancy felt that organic search would drive more revenue for their organizations in the years to come.
• In the survey, nearly half (46%) of respondents estimated that organic search influenced more than a quarter of their organization’s revenue.
• And more than a quarter (26%) felt it influenced 50% of their organization’s revenue.
• Furthermore, of the top performers surveyed, 42% strongly agreed that performing well in organic search results is a key indicator of the overall health of a business.
• 6) Organic search & the buyer’s journey:51% of shoppers surveyed use Google to research the purchases they plan to make online According to the Google/Ipsos Global Retail Study, more than half of consumers research their purchases using a search engine before hitting ‘buy’.
• Take the ‘awareness’ stage of the customer’s journey — even before a potential customer reaches that ‘consideration’ stage mentioned above, 65% of consumers surveyed said they use search in “I Want to Buy” moments — and 39% said they were influenced to make a purchase by a relevant search.
• How your website’s technical health influences business goals:7) Even a 1-second delay in mobile load times can reduce conversion rates by up to 20%.
• Even a one-second delay in mobile load times can reduce conversion rates by up to 20%, according to Mary Ellen Coe, the president of Google Customer Solutions.
• In a Vodafone case study, they found a 31% improvement in LCP was tied to an 8% increase in sales.
• dev, they report that Vodafone, a major European telecom company, found that a 31% improvement in LCP was tied to an increase in sales by 8%.
• 9) Case Study:A 300ms reduction in load time correlated to 12% more user engagement and 9% more pageviews per session.
• A 300-millisecond reduction in Largest Contentful Paint (LCP) correlated to 12% more user engagement and a 9% increase in pageviews per session.
• The Cox team achieved a 17% YoY increase in organic traffic after leveraging Lumar’s Analyze app.
• For Arriva Bus in the UK, using the right website intelligence tools also contributed to a 50% increase in digital conversion alongside an increase in search engine visibility.
• Staying competitive with your website efforts in 2023:11) 20% of marketers surveyed saw a significant increase in their budget for organic marketing last year Companies are investing more in organic marketing.
• Last year, 20% of marketers surveyed saw a significant increase in their budget for organic marketing (including website and SEO efforts), according to Search Engine Journal.
• (The number of marketers who saw a significant increase in paid channel budgets, meanwhile, was 13%.
• ) 12) 88% of marketers who have an SEO strategy in place expect to maintain or increase their investment in 2023.
• According to HubSpot data, a majority (88%) of marketers with SEO strategies in place expect to either increase or maintain their current level of investment in this key marketing tactic.
• 13) 53% of marketers who use SEO have a strategy for optimizing videos and images SEO is not about only keywords and content in 2023.
• According to HubSpot survey data, 53% of marketers who leverage SEO as part of their marketing strategy have processes in place specifically to optimize their videos and images.
• For these very-large websites, 66% of respondents reported that they employed at least 6 in-house employees who worked on SEO.
• 5% of respondents had no dedicated team member in-house who worked on SEO.
• Executing improvements and monitoring large sites at scale, according to 60% of executives surveyed.
• Best B2C Content Marketing Statistics: In fact, only 63% of B2C marketers are using paid media now, compared with 78% the previous year.
• That may well be justified as just 9% of website visitors come from paid search compared with 17% of traffic coming from organic (unpaid) search.
• But not only is it an easy marketing output, in some ways it has become necessary, as 43% of businesses said video was made essential by new challenges like the COVID-19 pandemic.
• 55% of video marketers create their own videos in house, and 40% of businesses spend $0 to $450 on a typical video – with an in-house team of video content producers and a low average spend, you should be able to embed quick and cheap video into your marketing game plan and work at scale.
• 117 Content Marketing Statistics, Trends, and Data Every Marketer Should Know
• Source Here are more stats on content marketing teams:Only 5% of marketing pros said their content team was structured for future success — the majority (50%) said their team “needs work.
• ” (Knotch) 30% of companies outsource content creation, but 70% keep it in-house.
• (Semrush) Among B2B brands, 44% of top performers have a centralized content team that works on brands and initiatives across the organization.
• (Content Marketing Institute) Nearly all marketing pros say their content teams will either grow (48%) or stay the same (49%) — just 2% say they plan to downsize.
• (Semrush) Content marketers love their jobs — 85% say it offers them a meaningful career path.
• More than 80% of people are online at least once a day, while more than 30% say they spend most of their time online.
• (Pew Research) 91% of B2B marketers are using content marketing to achieve their goals.
• (CMI) Fewer B2C brands (86%) say they’re using content marketing as a top strategy.
• (CMI) A large percentage (40%) of marketing pros said they do not have a content marketing strategy.
• Here’s what we can learn about content marketing success:A majority (55%) of marketers who reported their content marketing strategy was a success focused primarily on improving content quality.
• (Semrush) Among tech marketers, 32% said their content marketing efforts in 2022 were “extremely” or “very” successful, while a majority (53%) said they were “moderately” successful.
• (CMI) B2B marketers are slightly less likely to say their content marketing efforts were extremely or very successful (29%) but more likely to say they were moderately successful (56%).
• (CMI) 65% of marketers do not regularly evaluate the success of their content strategy.
• (CSR) Over 60% of marketers measure content marketing success through sales.
• Source Other goals and challenges of content marketing include the following:Using content to attract leads is the biggest challenge (41%) for marketers.
• (Semrush) Among B2C marketers, creating engaging content is the biggest challenge for 56%.
• (CMI) The biggest challenge to creating effective content articles is budget, according to 47% of marketers.
• (Marketing Charts) 58% of marketers say the biggest barrier to strategic content management is communication across teams.
• (Marketing Charts) Among marketers, 70% say their top goal for social media content is to increase brand awareness.
• (CMI) The top three content assets used by B2B brands in the last 12 months include short articles (89%), videos (75%), and case studies (67%).
• (CMI) In-person events are back, with 48% of B2B marketers saying they were the most effective content asset in the last 12 months.
• (CMI) Among B2B buyers, 95% said they view content as a marker of trust when entering the decision stage.
• (Ziflow) 84% of B2B marketers say content creation is what they’re most likely to outsource.
• Here’s the data:65% of B2C marketers say they prioritize the audience’s needs over their sales goals.
• (CMI) The top three types of content assets created by B2C marketers in the last year include short articles (83%), videos (61%), and infographics (51%).
• (CMI) Of video content, the most successful types were how-tos (38%) and expert interviews (37%).
• (CMI) Facebook was the top social media platform for B2B brands, at 88% usage.
• (CMI) 62% of B2C marketers plan to use influencer marketing in their content strategy in the coming year.
• (HubSpot) Over 80% of B2C marketers are investing more of their budget into inbound content marketing this year.
• Source Here’s more of what you should know about user-generated content:79% of consumers say UGC impacts their purchasing decisions.
• (Oberlo) 62% of consumers say they’re more likely to click on content that’s been created by a customer.
• (Tint) 60% of consumers say they wish brands would tell them what kind of content they should create.
• (Tint) When it comes to authenticity, 60% of consumers believe UGC is more genuine than content created by brands.
• (Taggbox) Brands that include UGC on their website notice a 90% increase in the time spent on the site.
• Just 4% of marketers actually measure ROI over a period greater than six months.
• (HubSpot) 72% of marketers say they see content marketing ROI in increased customer engagement and increased number of leads.
• (CMI) Marketers struggle to prove the ROI of content marketing, with only 35% saying they can do so quantitatively — 44% only have qualitative or anecdotal evidence, and 21% can’t show the impact at all.
• Here are some of the details on content audits:Among successful content marketing brands, 65% conduct a content audit more than twice a year.
• (Semrush) Of unsuccessful brands, 46% never ran a content audit in the previous year.
• (Semrush) Most brands who conduct a content audit combine it with SEO, with around 70% looking at on-page, off-page, and technical SEO.
• 70% of marketers are actively investing in their content marketing strategy.
• (HubSpot) Most brands are allocating around 26% of their marketing budget to content.
• (BloggingWizard) A majority of brands expect to increase their content budget in the next 12 months, with 32% projecting a medium increase, 25% planning a small increase, and 15% gearing up for a large increase.
• (Semrush) Marketers are investing more in the following content assets:social media content (41%), high-quality written content (40%), and content promotion and distribution (40%).
• Here’s some of the hottest data on SEO and content:72% of marketers report that content creation is their best-performing SEO tactic.
• (OptinMonster) Conversely, 75% of marketers also said that SEO is their best-performing content tactic.
• (Semrush) Over 90% of web pages get zero organic search traffic on Google.
• (Ahrefs) Over half (53%) of online shoppers search for content on a brand/product before they buy.
• (Google) SEO was cited as the #2 most effective tactic (46% of respondents) for improving content marketing in the last year.
• In fact, among SaaS brands, it’s a key indicator of success:To break it down:That’s 98% of top-performing SaaS brands that have a blog.
• (WordPress) 55% of B2B marketers say blogging works the best for moving prospects through the sales funnel.
• (Orbit Media) The most effective content formats within a blog are gated content (35%) and downloadable guides.
• (35%) (Orbit Media) 73% of marketers say updating old blogs is part of their content marketing strategy.
• 82% of marketers are increasing their podcasting budget or keeping it at the same level in the next year.
• (Statista) Over half (54%) of podcast listeners say they’re more likely to purchase from brands they’ve heard advertise on a podcast.
• (Edison) 38% of B2C marketers claim that the highest content marketing ROI comes from podcasting.
• (HubSpot) Branded content in podcasts grew by 82% between 2020 and 2021.
• Here’s what you need to know about content images and infographics:45% of content marketers use infographics as part of their content marketing strategy.
• (HubSpot) Marketers said that over half (51%) of their content in 2021 contained visual content.
• (Venngage) Original graphics were the most widely used type of visual content (36%) in 2021.
• (Venngage) When asked which type of visual content performed the worst, the biggest group of marketers (41%) said stock photos.
• (Venngage) Only 10% of auditory information is retained, but when a visual is added, 65% is retained.
• (HubSpot) Visual content, like infographics, can boost readership by up to 80%.
• Here are the stats that matter:The main goal of video marketing, according to 36% of marketers, is to increase brand awareness.
• (HubSpot) 37% of brands using video content produce it in-house, compared to just 14% that outsource to an agency.
• (Statista) The largest group of marketers make videos a few times a week (36%), while 14% do so daily.
• (Biteable) 32% of businesses are using video content to increase sales.
• (Biteable) 74% of marketers believe that video content has a better ROI than standard visual imagery, while 68% say it has a better ROI than Google Ads.
• (On24) Audience engagement is cited as the biggest challenge of virtual events, but it’s also the biggest predictor of success, according to 49% of marketers.
• (Markletic) 84% of marketers say running virtual events costs them less than hosting an in-person event.
• (Wild Apricot) Over half (52%) of those hosting virtual events saw the same attendance or even greater than they’d expect at an in-person event.
• We’ve got you covered:88% of marketers say they have plans to make anywhere from 10%-30% of their content interactive in the next year.
• (OptinMonster) When it comes to engagement, most marketers say that quizzes (69%) and contests/games (75%) are the most effective.
• (CMI) 79% of marketers say that interactive content helps consumers retain brand messaging better than standard content.
• You’ve got to be ready for what’s ahead, so here’s the data you need:More searches now happen on phones (59%) compared to computers (39%) and tablets (2%).
• (Statcounter) 83% of the digital audience now accesses social media exclusively on their mobile device.
• ” (Convince and Convert) 96% of smartphone users searching with Google.
• (Oberlo) 90% of marketers rely on email marketing for organic content distribution.
• (Oberlo) Using A/B marketing for marketing emails can ramp up conversion rates by 49%.
• (Campaign Monitor) Adding a personalized subject line to your marketing emails can increase open rates by 50%.
• (Oberlo) Including video content in your emails can increase click rates by 300%.
• 35%, but the very top-performing websites usually see conversion rates around 11%.
• (Statista) The highest converting industry in B2B is finance and professional services at around 10%.
• (MarketingSherpa) 68% of businesses do not have a CRO strategy in place.
• (Hotjar) Websites with over 40 landing pages convert more, but 62% of B2B brands only have fewer than six pages.
• Here’s the list:Over half (54%) of social media users utilize their platforms to research products.
• (GWI) 90% of online shoppers look up brand reviews before visiting that brand’s social media profile.
• (Bright Local) Close to 60% of brands rely on social media Stories and say they have been effective in their content marketing efforts.
• (Buffer) 88% of marketers say that social media is very important or somewhat important to their overall content marketing strategy.
• (Buffer) 73% say that it’s not only important but it’s also an effective part of content marketing.
• We’ve got you covered:Globally, 94% of marketers are now budgeting for content marketing.
• (Visual Oak) 45% of B2B brands have upped their content marketing budget in the last 12 months, and that number will trend upward.
• (StartupBonsai) 86% of marketers report that their website traffic grows when they share and prompt video content.
• (StartupBonsai) 81% of marketers use email marketing software to share their content.
• (Visme) Many marketers use paid promotion channels to share their content, including 72% on Facebook, 61% on paid search, 46% on banner/display ads, and 32% on email partnerships.
• (Oberlo) Therefore, it’s not surprising that 63% of marketers list content creation as their biggest challenge.
• (CMI) 69% of marketers describe trouble finding outside partners with the right expertise as their main concern with outsourcing.
• Digital Marketing Statistics for 2022 – inSegment Digital Marketing Blog: (Statista) Relative to Q3 2021, Q3 2022 has a 12% increase in social spending.
• (Hootsuite) Annual social media advertising spending will increase an estimated 17% from the previous year.
• (Hootsuite) Shoppable images and videos push consumers towards completing a purchase the most, accounting for 24% of all respondents.
• Here are some of the most important changes in social media trends we witnessed during the pandemic:43% of internet users aged 16-64 spent more time on social media.
• (Smart Insights) 16% created and uploaded more videos (Smart Insights) The most popular social media sites each offer something unique to consumers.
• (Hootsuite) Almost 60% of the world’s internet users log into Facebook each month.
• (Hootsuite) The equivalent of 36% of the world’s population has a Facebook account.
• (Hootsuite) Less than 1% of users use Facebook alone and no other social media platforms.
• (Pew Research Center) 99% of the time, YouTube is being used in parallel to another, or multiple, social media platforms.
• (Pew Research Center) The male/female split of YouTube viewers comes out at 54% men and 46% women.
• (Statista) 70% of viewers bought from a brand after seeing it on YouTube.
• (Hootsuite) Intent-driven targeted ads cause a 100% lift in purchase intent when compared to demographic targeting.
• (Vox) The US population’s overall feeling towards TikTok online is positive, at about a 57% positive sentiment.
• (Statista) Venezuela, Sri Lanka, Kenya, and Mexico also saw an increase of over 20% on iOS devices during the same period.
• (Statista) Over 63% of all videos with the highest CTR highlight their key message or product within the first 3 seconds.
• (9 Creative Tips | Auction Ads on TikTok) Shooting vertical TikTok videos give you a 25% higher watch-through rate.
• (Statista) 50% of Instagram users admit to clicking on a brand’s website after viewing one of their stories.
• (Hootsuite) Instagram Usage Over 90% of users watch videos on Instagram each week.
• (Meta) 92% of users claim to have acted instantaneously after seeing a product advertised on Instagram.
• (Meta) As well as this, 50% of respondents are most interested in a brand after seeing it on Instagram.
• (Meta) Source:Statista SNAPCHAT Snapchat Users 23% of US adults use Snapchat.
• (Statista) LinkedIn had a 26% year-over-year growth in revenue in Q4 of 2022.
• Here are some of the latest account-based marketing statistics for 2022:67% of brands employ ACM strategies.
• (Spice Works) ACM was up 15% to 70% in 2021 when compared to 2020 (50%).
• (ITSMA) Companies implementing account-based marketing strategies have seen up to 208% growth in their market revenue.
• (Terminus) 55% of ABM users tailor content to target accounts in specific roles.
• (Spice Works) Advanced data management is key to successful ABM, according to 43% of marketers.
• Here are the all-important audience marketing statistics for 2022:There’s been a 36% increase in the number of Americans doing the majority of their household and grocery shopping online.
• (GWI Gen Z Report) A quarter of B2B organizations allocate only 5% of their total budget to marketing.
• (Statista) 41% of B2B businesses conduct their marketing activities in-house (Statista) Spending on 3rd-party audience data has ground year-on-year in the US.
• (Statista) 45% of Pinterest users have a household income of over $100,000.
• (StatCounter) Organic searches from Google account for 43% of all eCommerce traffic.
• (Statista) 62% of marketers worldwide consider SEO and search algorithms crucial in 2022.
• (Statista) 70% of digital marketers consider SEO better than PPC for generating sales.
• Here are some important PCC marketing stats for 2022:Between 2019 and 2024, US digital ad spending will grow from 132 to 279 billion dollars, representing 53% of global digital ad spending.
• (Statista) 17% of global online buyers spend money in e-grocers and supermarkets.
• (Statista) 54% of US shoppers bought an item online because it could be delivered straight to their homes.
• (Statista) 70% of consumers in the US receive mistargeted ads at least once a month.
• (Statista) 40% of global Instagram users engage with the mobile app daily.
• (Statista) 72% of all internet users will exclusively use mobile devices by 2025.
• (Bankmycell) 92% of worldwide users accessed the internet through a mobile device in 2022.
• Check out our top content marketing statistics for 2022 right here:59% of digital marketers consider video as their preferred media format.
• (Hubspot) 69% of B2B marketers worldwide would invest in video content marketing.
• (Statista) 50% of marketers in the US hired content creators to produce educational content.
• (Statista) 84% of consumers in the US stated that they were more likely to trust brands if they included user-generated content in their marketing initiatives.
• (Statista) 69% of B2B marketers worldwide said they would invest in video marketing in 2022.
• (Statista) 64% of marketers are interested in 2022 to invest more in interactive content (polls, augmented reality, etc.
• (Hubspot) 80% of marketers consider funny content as being the most effective type of content used on social media.
• Blogging Statistics for 2022 Blogs with a video can increase organic search results by 157%.
• (Orbit Media) A company’s inbound link total can increase by up to 97% by simply having a blog.
• (Hubspot) 35% of marketers plan to use video format for the first time in 2022.
• (Hubspot) 53% of marketers optimize their video content for visual search engines.
• (Hubspot) 65% of marketers worldwide use videos on Facebook for marketing purposes.
• (Hubspot) 33% of video marketers worldwide consider revenue growth and sales as their primary marketing goal for 2022.
• (Statista) 51% of marketers plan to invest more in short-form video content.
• 4% of companies want to create new types of video content, including original branded series.
• (Hubspot) 27% of consumers in the US stated that it was very likely that a brand’s newsletter would influence them to purchase products.
• (Statista) In 2022, 52% of email opens worldwide went through Apple Mail Privacy Protection services.
• (Statista) Email marketing continues to be the most effective online marketing tactic, with 45% of e-shoppers being influenced by it.
• (Statista) Over 68% of US consumers prefer to be contacted by brands via email.
• (Hubspot) 79% of marketers ranked email in their top three channels for effectiveness.
• (Hubspot) 40% of US millennials stated that a brand’s regular email newsletter would influence them to buy a product.
• 21 Digital Marketing Statistics for Small Businesses in 2024: Websites that invest in SEO get 86% of all online clicks If you’ve ever wondered why SEO is such a pillar in digital marketing, it’s because so much of the online population only interacts with the front page of the internet—i.
• A study by Backlinko found that the first 10 websites on Google’s search engine results get 86% of all organic clicks on average, while a paltry 14% goes to all the websites on the second page and beyond.
• 43% of users use the internet mainly for brand & product research When potential customers are in the stage of deciding whether or not to purchase from your business, a good number of them will use the internet to find out more about your brand.
• For over 43% of internet users, researching brands and products is the main reason they use the internet at all.
• 45% of audiences will visit a local business with a strong online presence Your online presence can directly influence your physical store’s foot traffic too.
• Studies found that out of all consumers who research brands online, 45% will proceed to visit a store’s physical location if it has a strong online presence.
• The digital marketing industry is set to grow by 13% in 2028 Digital marketing plays such a substantial role in businesses’ growth, so it’s no surprise that its industry is also set to grow in the next few years.
• Experts say that the digital marketing industry is projected to grow by 13% in 2028, and it’s currently worth $320 million in 2023.
• 43% of business owners say digital marketing is most effective for brand awareness While different digital marketing strategies work better for some businesses than others, most agree on one thing:digital marketing is best for building brand awareness.
• A recent study by Mailjet found that nearly 43% of business owners and marketers set brand awareness as their biggest area of opportunity in digital marketing, closely followed by improving customer relationships (41%).
• Only 23% of websites rank in the top three Google search results SEO can often be a fierce competition.
• According to HubSpot, only 23% of websites rank in the top three search results.
• This means over 75% of all websites still struggle to gain traffic—a substantial number, given that there are about 1.
• Digital ads have an average ROI of 200% According to digital marketing stats from Google, every dollar advertisers spend on digital advertising earns them $2 back, which equates to a 200% average return on investment (ROI).
• Online advertising revenue has grown by 50% since 2020 If there’s ever been a time to try online advertising, it’s right now.
• jumped from $139 billion in 2020 to over $209 billion in 2022—a 50% growth in just two years.
• 33% of small businesses use social media as their main digital marketing strategy post-pandemic The COVID-19 pandemic undoubtedly increased social media activity for businesses and consumers alike.
• A recent study by UpCity found that 33% of businesses focus most of their digital marketing efforts on social media—an increase of 6% from before the pandemic.
• 39% of consumers are likely to purchase directly from social media When it comes to marketing your small business digitally, social media is one of the key players, and with good reason.
• A study found that over 39% of consumers said they were likely to purchase directly from brands on social media, a 3% increase from just last year.
• Over 90% of consumers research on social media when making purchase decisions While not all customers purchase directly on social media, you can bet a good majority of them will use it to research your brand.
• A survey found that over 90% of customers regularly used social media to research a brand when deciding whether or not to continue with a purchase.
• Of the number above, nearly 25% said they always turned to social media when making purchase decisions.
• In contrast, only 8% of customers rarely or never use social media at all.
• 50% of B2B marketers find social media the most effective digital marketing strategy Here’s probably one of the more surprising digital marketing stats from this year—for 50% of B2B marketers, social media marketing was the most effective digital marketing strategy for driving revenue.
• It was even ahead of content marketing and email marketing, which garnered 47% and 41% of votes, respectively.
• The average email open rate in 2022 was 18% Email marketing is a staple in small business digital marketing—it’s not as cluttered as social media, and it’s more personal than digital ads.
• In 2022, the average open rate for marketing emails across all industries was just under 18%, with nonprofit email organizations on the upper end of the statistic (31%) and the health and fitness industry on the lower (10%).
• Over 47% of small businesses found success with email campaigns Email marketing offers many benefits for small businesses.
• In a 2022 survey, around 47% of small business owners said they found success with their email marketing campaigns.
• And, on average, 60% of businesses of all sizes found some success with email.
• 42% of small businesses say email marketing will have the highest ROI in a recession Email marketing has proven its effectiveness in returning revenue, and not just for large enterprises.
• A survey found that nearly 42% of small business owners chose email marketing as the best digital marketing strategy for ROI during a recession.
• The influencer marketing industry is set to grow by 28% in 2025 If there’s one major emerging player in the digital marketing field, it’s influencer marketing.
• According to digital marketing statistics from Statista, the influencer marketing industry is set to grow by nearly 28% in 2025.
• Around 32% of businesses find influencer marketing most effective for generating online engagement.
• 26% of small businesses have a monthly digital marketing budget of less than $500 Digital marketing can be one of the most cost-effective strategies for growing small businesses.
• In fact, a survey found that 26% of small businesses had a monthly digital marketing budget of less than $500 in 2022.
• Small businesses spend an average of $534 a month on digital ads On average, most small businesses spend around 8% of their budget on marketing.
• However, that figure is likely to increase:the study also found that 93% were planning to spend more on digital advertising in the following years.
• Only 19% of small businesses work with a digital marketing agency Digital marketing encompasses many tasks, which can often be overwhelming for any small business owner—especially when you have a dozen other responsibilities to juggle.
• Despite this, only 19% of small business owners work with a full-time digital marketing agency, according to digital marketing agency statistics from UpCity.
• Over 80% of marketers use AI in digital marketing It’s no exaggeration that artificial intelligence (AI) has exploded in this year alone, and you may have even tried using it for simple tasks like research or task organization.
• And if you have, you’re definitely not alone:Over 80% of marketers have integrated AI into their digital marketing strategies, according to research by Statista.
• Consider these digital marketing stats:over 30% of customers1 discover brands via top-ranking websites on search engines.
• Meanwhile, digital ads can generate up to 200% ROI2, and search-optimized websites get over 80% of all online clicks3.
• 47 PPC Stats to Empower Your Marketing Strategy in 2024: Editor’s Choice As of 2021, Google owns 92% of the global search market share.
• Customers are up to 70% more likely to buy your product when you use retargeting.
• (Web FX) Over 40% of online transactions now happen on mobile, so more businesses must pay more attention to mobile optimization and PPC strategies as they go hand in hand.
• Combining audience with remarketing campaigns boosts conversion rates by 40%.
• Lunio reported that 40% of brands don’t allocate much money for pay-per-click ads—which may keep you from generating the desired results.
• It’s also worth noting that Google owns 92% of the search engine market, including paid and organic search.
• Display campaigns alone reach over 90% of all internet users worldwide.
• When exposed to display ads, customers are 155% more likely to search for brand-specific terms.
• (SERP Watch) About 40% of all clicks on the first page of a search engine are for the top 3 ads at the top, according to recent PPC statistics in 2022.
• 21% of Facebook ads convert, making it the highest converting platform available.
• (One PPC, Outreach Monks) Outreach Monks reported that 70% of marketers find SEO better than PPC, while the remaining 30% disagree.
• (BetterSEO, Search Engine Journal) When the pandemic hit, the world consumed 207% more content due to time spent indoors—boosting online marketing.
• About 94% of users head straight to the organic results and skip search ads.
• (Search Engine Land, Start-up Bonsai)Start-up Bonsai reports that 79% of brands rely on PPC to drive their businesses forward.
• (Search Engine Land) The 2022 Google data states that the company released its earnings report from the previous year, revealing that Google Ads contributed 82% of its Q4 2021 revenue.
• With about 89% of marketers saying that remarketing is the best option to reach customers, PPC is something to look into.
• Digital ad spending will account for over 60% of the global ad revenue in 2022.
• (Valve+Meter) About 89% of marketers confirmed building a brand helps attract customers.
• Incorporating PPC ads into your campaign can increase brand awareness by 80%.
• (WordLead) According to PPC stats, paid advertisements redirect 65% of the traffic, while organic search results only get 35% of the clicks.
• It wouldn’t be a surprise also to report that 54% of people search the internet for local listings every month, while 12% use it daily.
• It also helps that Google Chrome is the most popular browser in the world, with a 76% market share.
• (PPC Resellers, Word Stream) According to Word Stream, consumers are 155% likelier to look up brand names and items once they see displayed ads like search results or social media posts.
• PPC traffic has a 50% greater conversion rate than visitors from organic links.
• 92% of Instagram users followed a brand, clicked on their website, or purchased on the platform.
• 84% of users are open to discovering local and small businesses or new products.
• With its size, the Silicon Valley giant will continue to get the lion’s share of the profits from social media ads, with 80%.
• At least 40% of internet shoppers use social networking platforms to get information about products and services.
• For example, Facebook businesses report an ROI of 152% from social media marketing.
• (Search Marketing) Although most companies agree that PPC helps them a lot, 49% only see the need to spend less than $50 thousand per month for PPC traffic.
• Brands and agencies make up 40% of those who believe that their PPC expenditure should be more significant than it is.
• (Search Engine Land) The number was up 22% from the previous quarter’s still impressive $44.
• (LyfeMarketing, Word Stream) Word Stream reports that 96% of Google’s revenue comes from Google Ads—simple proof that advertising on the platform leads to gains for both Google and business owners.
• The Mobile PPC Stats With 47% of smartphone users unable to live without their phones, the mobile space has become a field of interest for marketing, SEO, and gaming executives.
• (Power Traffick, Luisa Zhou)With 51% of worldwide ad spending directed to mobile devices, marketing methods must also adapt for such devices.
• Almost two-thirds of users click on an ad, and 20% make at least one purchase per week.
• Recent statistics on mobile marketing show that 70% of mobile clients who discover your company online will take action within an hour.
• Also, 69% of mobile users call the business directly from Google search.
• (The Guardian) Google boasted a 35% income increase from 2020 to 2021—$61.
• Experts predict that by the end of 2022, the tech giant will grab 29% of the entire $602 billion global digital ad market.
• Ads statistics reveal that 81% of people use ad-blockers to filter out the most irritating of them.
• However, results displayed at the top of the page can be as high as 8%.
• However, results displayed at the top of the page can be as high as 8%.
• Digital Marketing Statistics in Canada for 2024 | Made in CA: 1%Audio, including podcasts and streaming, grew its revenue the most by 59%.
• Google is the dominating search engine, with almost 92% of Canadians reporting they use it as their main search engine.
• 94% of small businesses in Canada use social media for marketing at least once a month and 52% do so daily.
• 3% of the revenue came from consumer products and goods while wellness services represented only 1.
• 2% of the revenue, the biggest increase was in audio, where the revenue was up 59% from the previous year.
• With a 50% share, Google is the dominating force in the digital advertising market, followed by Facebook with 33%.
• Search engine market share in CanadaAccording to Statista, in September 2021, Google was by far the leader of the search engines with a nearly 92% share of the market.
• 94% of small businesses in Canada post on social media monthly and 79% weekly.
• Only just over half of the small business post daily and 6% does it less often than once per month.
• Companies are most likely to use Instagram and Facebook with both platforms used by around 80% of businesses.
• Many Canadian companies are planning to increase their spending on social media advertising with 84% saying they will spend more on Facebook adverts, nearly 60% investing more on YouTube, and 48% on LinkedIn.
• All genders are active on Facebook, with a small majority being women (53%).
• Stories on Facebook get around 500 million viewers and 74% of Facebook users log in every day.
• 2% more interactions than pictures on Instagram and engagement with brands is 10 times higher than on Facebook.
• 85 billion active monthly users by the end of 2023 and 62% of those are men.
• 83% of the users who sent a tweet to a company said they were more likely to do business with companies that replied to them.
• 53% of Twitter users have made a purchase of products they first saw on Twitter.
• It has more affluent users than the other platforms, with 44% of the users earning over 75,000 USD per year.
• Since LinkedIn is a platform for professionals, it is a useful tool for business-to-business sales and is 277% more effective than Facebook.
• 4% say they will check a new email as soon as they receive it and over half of the population checks their email over fifteen times per day.
• People aged 35 or younger were the most likely to trust online advertising, with 40% perceiving them as trustworthy.
• According to Statistics Canada, in 2020, 82% of Canadians shopped online compared to 77% in 2018.
• The biggest age group for online shopping is the 25-44-year-olds where 95% said they shopped online in a Statistics Canada survey on online shopping.
• People aged 15-25 group were the second biggest consumers, with 90% shopping online in 2020.
• The group that was least engaged with online shopping was the over-65 group where only 55% said they had shopped online.
• In 2020, 76% of the people who answered the survey said they had bought physical goods online and 68% had bought digital goods and services.
• Only 9% had bought accommodation services, but that figure was likely impacted by the pandemic.
• Out of the 18% who had not bought online, 73% said they had not shopped online because they had no need or interest to do so.
• 23% said they had concerns over the security of online shopping and 18% said they wanted to see the product in person before parting with their money.
• 5% of Canadians using the internet in some capacity and six daily hours spent on the Internet, companies cannot underestimate the power of digital marketing.
• 94% of small businesses in Canada use social media for marketing at least once a month and 52% do so daily.
• Audio, including podcasts and streaming, grew its revenue the most from 2020 to 2021 by 59%.
• Essential Digital Marketing ROI Statistics in 2024 • ZipDo: This 122% average ROI serves as a beacon of promise, instilling confidence in businesses seeking to maximize their returns and make informed marketing decisions.
• One statistic that holds paramount importance in this domain is the predominance of revenue per dollar spent, with a staggering 49% of professionals adopting this measurement to analyze their marketing ROI.
• One intriguing insight garnering attention in the blogosphere is the finding that nearly half of all marketers (46%, to be precise) rely on a purchase funnel model to gauge the effectiveness of their digital marketing efforts.
• 07% average ROI for Search Engine Optimization (SEO) illuminates the path towards potential success.
• Soaring to an astounding 300%, this figure sheds light on the immense rewards that a well-executed content marketing strategy can unleash.
• However, measuring the fruits of one’s labor is of utmost significance, as demonstrated by the fact that a whopping 74% of marketers grapple with gauging the return on investment (ROI) of their content marketing efforts.
• Within this blog post, we unravel an eye-opening statistic that is sure to capture marketers’ attention:a staggering 63% of marketers are boosting their Google Ads budgets, resulting in a 20%-50% surge in ROI.
• Amidst this vast ocean, LinkedIn emerges as a phenomenal treasure trove, boasting an astounding 171% average ROI on lead-generation campaigns.
• 9% average ROI, a testament to the indomitable prowess of the digital marketing kingdom.
• Plunge into the fascinating realm of ROI statistics, and watch as the compelling 16% average return on investment for display ads takes center stage.
• This revelation of over 40% of marketers lacking web analytics tools in their arsenal serves as a stark reminder of the importance of staying informed on all aspects of campaign performance.
• A compelling insight that commands attention is that a striking 98% of marketers witness a surge in digital marketing ROI when they strategically emphasize location-based marketing tactics.
• This 122% average ROI serves as a beacon of promise, instilling confidence in businesses seeking to maximize their returns and make informed marketing decisions.
• One statistic that holds paramount importance in this domain is the predominance of revenue per dollar spent, with a staggering 49% of professionals adopting this measurement to analyze their marketing ROI.
• One intriguing insight garnering attention in the blogosphere is the finding that nearly half of all marketers (46%, to be precise) rely on a purchase funnel model to gauge the effectiveness of their digital marketing efforts.
• 07% average ROI for Search Engine Optimization (SEO) illuminates the path towards potential success.
• Soaring to an astounding 300%, this figure sheds light on the immense rewards that a well-executed content marketing strategy can unleash.
• However, measuring the fruits of one’s labor is of utmost significance, as demonstrated by the fact that a whopping 74% of marketers grapple with gauging the return on investment (ROI) of their content marketing efforts.
• Within this blog post, we unravel an eye-opening statistic that is sure to capture marketers’ attention:a staggering 63% of marketers are boosting their Google Ads budgets, resulting in a 20%-50% surge in ROI.
• Amidst this vast ocean, LinkedIn emerges as a phenomenal treasure trove, boasting an astounding 171% average ROI on lead-generation campaigns.
• 9% average ROI, a testament to the indomitable prowess of the digital marketing kingdom.
• Plunge into the fascinating realm of ROI statistics, and watch as the compelling 16% average return on investment for display ads takes center stage.
• This revelation of over 40% of marketers lacking web analytics tools in their arsenal serves as a stark reminder of the importance of staying informed on all aspects of campaign performance.
• A compelling insight that commands attention is that a striking 98% of marketers witness a surge in digital marketing ROI when they strategically emphasize location-based marketing tactics.
• 20+ Latest Content Marketing Statistics To Improve Your Strategy: (Content Marketing Institute) 79% of companies use content marketing to generate quality leads.
• Surprisingly, only 35% of organizations have a dedicated person or team that works on content marketing full time.
• For large organizations (1,000+ employees), 40% of them would have two to five people working on their content.
• Source:Content Marketing Institute 84% of organizations have a content marketing strategy.
• However, only 11% said that they consider their strategy to be an excellent one.
• For instance, 49% of those surveyed reported social media as the hardest skill to master.
• Breaking down the numbers, 5% said that their organizations were extremely successful.
• 24% believed they were very successful while 46% reported being moderately successful.
• Source:2020 B2C Content Marketing Benchmarks, Budgets & Trends 79% of companies use content marketing to generate quality leads.
• It doesn’t appear to be a changing goal either as this is also the goal that topped in 2019 at 75%.
• Other goals for 2020 included improving brand reputation (57%), improving customer engagement and loyalty (47%), promoting the positioning of new products (26%), increasing the number of payments (17%), and others (2%).
• 73% in 2021 and is expected to grow further in the next couple of years.
• During the 2021 Content Marketing World conference, Sitecore Product Marketing Director (Experience Platform) Jill Grozalksy Roberson stated that 59% of consumers feel like companies have lost touch with the human element of customer experience.
• She then went on to say that 47% of people are seeking downtime from the internet due to digital fatigue.
• 50% of marketers said that a desire for perfection is one of the biggest hurdles to their content production.
• However, less than 40% of those marketers document their marketing strategy.
• In a survey, 79% of B2B marketers stated that their organizations have a content marketing strategy.
• And of those organizations, 70% reported making moderate to major changes in their strategy due to the pandemic.
• Interestingly, a significant part of these organizations—about 36%—do not document their content marketing efforts.
• Only 43% said that they do keep track of their content marketing strategy.
• Source:Content Marketing Institute 78% of B2B consumers prioritize the content source’s trustworthiness.
• On the other hand, 65% prefer that their content come from industry influencers.
• 51% of respondents said that they find themselves overwhelmed by the amount of content available online.
• For 50% of users, they prefer their content to be mobile-optimized so that they can access information through a smartphone or a tablet.
• According to the 2018 Content Preferences Survey Report, 71% of survey respondents said that they check a blog as they went through their buying journey.
• People also listened to podcasts (64%), looked at infographics (76%), read case studies (79%), attended webinars (66%), and watched videos (49%).
• 5% of respondents even said that they started blogging more during this time while only 27.
• In a survey of 1,024 people in the United States, 75% of respondents said that they prefer blog posts or articles to come in under 1,000 words.
• In a survey of bloggers, marketers, and business owners, 30% said that having quality content is the most important factor if you want to be viewed with credibility.
• These include designing a good blog site (17%), posting consistently (15%), being active on social media (13%), having great authors (12%), and getting positive testimonials or comments (5%).
• 96% of respondents said that having multiple authors on a site also generates credibility.
• 66% of buyers said that blog posts were instrumental in their buying process.
• 93% of marketers who use videos said they’re very important to their marketing strategy in 2021.
• This is also up from the previous year wherein 85% said they use video.
• The most common type of video they have are explainer videos (73%), social media videos (67%), presentation videos (51%), sales videos (41%), and video ads (41%).
• Source:Wyzowl 86% of marketers said video content drives traffic to their sites.
• 86% of marketers said that thanks to video content, traffic to their sites have increased.
• Not only that, 83% added that videos helped increase the average time that users spend on their landing pages.
• What’s even better is that 94% of marketers claimed that their videos helped customers and potential buyers understand what their product or service is all about.
• 84% went on to say that videos helped them generate new leads for their business.
• And thanks to videos, 43% of video marketers experienced a reduction of calls for customer support.
• According to a Renderforest survey, 78% of site owners experienced increased traffic to their website after adding videos.
• 71% also said that the average time that people spent on their pages increased after offering video content.
• Furthermore, 69% of users generated more leads after the changes were made.
• The most common video assets used were explainer videos (62%), logo animations (46%), presentations (43%), advertisements (38%), demos (33%), slideshows (30%), and others (17%).
• The survey also points out that user-generated content makes up 60% of all videos created and posted online.
• TikTok Statistics In Malaysia That You Need To Know – Resolute – Digital Marketing Agency Malaysia: •Females account for 54% of TikTok Malaysia users, while males account for 45.
• Essential Content Marketing ROI Statistics in 2024 • ZipDo: The Latest Content Marketing ROI Statistics Unveiled 89% of marketers claim that content marketing provides a better ROI than traditional marketing methods.
• Enter content marketing, taking center stage like a maestro, as it commands the attention of an astonishing 89% of marketers who vouch for its superior ROI compared to traditional marketing methods.
• 92% of marketers consider content to be a valuable business asset for driving long-term ROI.
• Diving into the world of content marketing ROI statistics, one cannot ignore the striking revelation that a whopping 92% of marketers view content as a valuable business asset for driving long-term ROI.
• Small businesses that use content marketing experience a 126% increase in lead generation compared to businesses that don’t.
• Imagine raising your leads by an astonishing 126%, merely by implementing content marketing strategies.
• 52% of marketers believe content marketing had a positive impact on their search rankings on the SERPs.
• As we dive into the sea of Content Marketing ROI Statistics, we stumble upon a striking revelation:a remarkable 52% of marketers have experienced the perks of content marketing, as it bolstered their search rankings on the SERPs.
• Diving into the realm of Content Marketing ROI statistics, one cannot help but marvel at the astonishing revelation that content marketing incurs 62% fewer expenses compared to its traditional counterparts.
• In the realm of content marketing ROI, the revelation that a striking 70% of B2B marketers attribute an upsurge in leads to blogging paints a compelling picture.
• 47% of buyers viewed 3-5 pieces of content before engaging with a sales rep.
• 59% of B2C marketers say that creating high-quality content is their most effective SEO tactic.
• In the realm of content marketing ROI statistics, the nugget of insight revealing 59% of B2C marketers identifying high-quality content creation as their most effective SEO tactic carries substantial weight.
• Delving into the realm of Content Marketing ROI Statistics, one cannot overlook the significance of the compelling data point revealing that whitepapers sway the judgment for a striking 76% of B2B buyers.
• 55% of B2B marketers say they are unclear on what content marketing effectiveness looks like.
• Take, for instance, the intriguing revelation that organic search fuels 51% of content consumption.
• 92% of marketers consider content to be a valuable business asset for driving long-term ROI.
• Small businesses that use content marketing experience a 126% increase in lead generation compared to businesses that don’t.
• 52% of marketers believe content marketing had a positive impact on their search rankings on the SERPs.
• 47% of buyers viewed 3-5 pieces of content before engaging with a sales rep.
• 59% of B2C marketers say that creating high-quality content is their most effective SEO tactic.
• 55% of B2B marketers say they are unclear on what content marketing effectiveness looks like.
• The Latest Content Marketing ROI Statistics Unveiled 89% of marketers claim that content marketing provides a better ROI than traditional marketing methods.
• Enter content marketing, taking center stage like a maestro, as it commands the attention of an astonishing 89% of marketers who vouch for its superior ROI compared to traditional marketing methods.
• 92% of marketers consider content to be a valuable business asset for driving long-term ROI.
• Diving into the world of content marketing ROI statistics, one cannot ignore the striking revelation that a whopping 92% of marketers view content as a valuable business asset for driving long-term ROI.
• Small businesses that use content marketing experience a 126% increase in lead generation compared to businesses that don’t.
• Imagine raising your leads by an astonishing 126%, merely by implementing content marketing strategies.
• 52% of marketers believe content marketing had a positive impact on their search rankings on the SERPs.
• As we dive into the sea of Content Marketing ROI Statistics, we stumble upon a striking revelation:a remarkable 52% of marketers have experienced the perks of content marketing, as it bolstered their search rankings on the SERPs.
• Diving into the realm of Content Marketing ROI statistics, one cannot help but marvel at the astonishing revelation that content marketing incurs 62% fewer expenses compared to its traditional counterparts.
• In the realm of content marketing ROI, the revelation that a striking 70% of B2B marketers attribute an upsurge in leads to blogging paints a compelling picture.
• 47% of buyers viewed 3-5 pieces of content before engaging with a sales rep.
• The significance of the statistic – “47% of buyers viewed 3-5 pieces of content before engaging with a sales rep” – within the realm of a blog post about Content Marketing ROI Statistics lies in its astounding revelation about buyers’ behavior.
• 59% of B2C marketers say that creating high-quality content is their most effective SEO tactic.
• In the realm of content marketing ROI statistics, the nugget of insight revealing 59% of B2C marketers identifying high-quality content creation as their most effective SEO tactic carries substantial weight.
• Delving into the realm of Content Marketing ROI Statistics, one cannot overlook the significance of the compelling data point revealing that whitepapers sway the judgment for a striking 76% of B2B buyers.
• 55% of B2B marketers say they are unclear on what content marketing effectiveness looks like.
• However, one statistic stands out like a beacon:“55% of B2B marketers say they are unclear on what content marketing effectiveness looks like.
• Take, for instance, the intriguing revelation that organic search fuels 51% of content consumption.
• Digital Marketing Statistics:How Is Digital Marketing Changing In 2024?: Mobile devices now account for 55% of the global market share of online access with desktops coming in second place at 43%.
• 62% of marketers plan to increase content marketing budgets within the next fiscal year.
• The top 3 results on Google get over 75% of all organic search traffic.
• 84% of consumers purchased a product because they watched a marketing video.
• 53% There is no doubt that Google is more popular than any other search engine.
• 09% Over 75% of all searchers only click on the first 3 search results.
• The bottom 7 results end up fighting out for less than 25% of organic traffic.
• 63% of websites get no organic search traffic from Google within the first year.
• This might seem like a lot of money but the average SEO campaign generates an ROI of 275%.
• B2B blogs with educational content get 52% more organic traffic than B2B blogs with company-focused content.
• Mobile devices now account for 55% of the global market share of online access with desktops coming in second place at 43%.
• In fact, 25% of all internet users access the internet solely on a mobile device.
• 59% of online shoppers say that being able to buy on a mobile device is very important when deciding where to buy.
• About half (50%) of all website traffic globally is generated on mobile.
• If you just optimise marketing for desktop devices, you are neglecting at least 50% of online traffic – possibly even more.
• Mobile ecommerce (also called m-commerce) increased by more than 30% worldwide throughout 2020.
• 77% of mobile internet users said that they found targeted mobile ads annoying rather than helpful.
• 13% of business social media accounts are managed by the owners of the business.
• 75% of marketers say that their social media marketing efforts lead to increased traffic.
• 97% of people who buy products online have used social media at least once in the last month.
• 7% of social media users spent an additional one to two hours per day on social media during 2020.
• 7% of marketers increased their social media activity when the pandemic began.
• The truth is it works… About 80% of online buyers have made a purchase from a social media ad.
• 73% of social media marketers’ main goal is to acquire customers using social ads.
• Facebook is the most popular social media platform used by 94% of B2B and B2C marketers.
• LinkedIn is the top B2B social media marketing platform with 95% of B2B marketers using LinkedIn.
• This is more than double Instagram where only 32% of US internet users have a profile.
• Only 7% of businesses that use Twitter said that they saw an improvement in brand preference.
• 91% of marketing executives list LinkedIn as the top place to find quality content.
• 57% of traffic on LinkedIn is from mobile devices, which means there is a good chunk of LinkedIn users (43%) accessing LinkedIn from a desktop device.
• 83% of online consumers said they preferred YouTube as their main video platform.
• 62% of marketers plan to increase content marketing budgets within the next fiscal year.
• An overwhelming 77% of online users said they regularly read blog posts.
• 59% of B2C marketers increased their content marketing budgets in 2020 compared to 2019.
• 83% of B2C content marketers use blog posts or short articles as an essential part of their content marketing strategy.
• 88% of the most successful content marketers prioritise valuable information over sales messages.
• This is in stark contrast to the 50% of least successful content marketers who are more sales-focused.
• 96% of online consumers have watched a video about a product or service.
• 84% of consumers purchased a product because they watched a marketing video.
• 78% of online video marketers say video has directly increased their sales.
• 74% of marketers said the pandemic made them more likely to use video for marketing.
• 48% of marketing professionals said email marketing was highly effective to drive more conversions.
• 74% of B2C marketers said that they regularly use their email newsletters for content marketing as well.
• 85% of B2B use email marketing software to manage and distribute all of their content.
• Mobile video ad spend made up about 72% of the digital ad spend in 2021.
• Research shows that retargeting can lift ad engagement rates by over 400%.
• But 54% of customers said they get annoyed when targeted with an ad for something they’ve already bought.
• The truth is that even a 1-second delay reduced customer satisfaction by 16%.
• 70% of websites in Google’s search results now have mobile-first indexing.
• Make sure that your site:Loads fast on both desktop & mobile Provides a good user experience Google has said that they remove ​​37% of URLs from their top 10 when the search query is made from a mobile device.
• On top of that, mobile commerce (or m-commerce) grew by more than 30% worldwide during 2020.
• 77% of mobile internet users said that targeted mobile ads are annoying rather than helpful.
• 52% of European ecommerce retailers say influencer marketing offers the best ROI for their business at the moment.
• ” This year, 75% of ecommerce stores say that they are actively working or plan to work with social media influencers.
• 46 Content Marketing Statistics That Matter in 2024: Hopefully, by now, your company is one of the 91% of B2Bs and 86% of B2Cs that are currently using content marketing.
• Content marketing is an important area of active investment for 97% of marketers.
• 97% is a very large proportion of the marketing community, which means that a solid content marketing strategy is absolutely essential.
• 46% of businesses plan to increase their content creation spend this year.
• 62% of marketing agencies saw an increase in the number of clients seeking content marketing services Why?
• Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional outbound methods, yet it generates three times the number of leads.
• 90% of customers see a benefit from content marketing Of course, it would be interesting if we had a specific reason why this is the case.
• Most of us view traditional advertisements as transactional:say, 30% off the whole site for Black Friday.
• It is easy for a customer to ask why they should accept that 30% off from your company instead of another one.
• Among buyers of B2B products and services, 95% consider content to be a worthwhile way to evaluate any business.
• 82% of customers report a preference for brands with a content presence.
• Using content marketing to build customer loyalty is the goal of 52% of content marketing clients Many industries are very competitive, and for most businesses, it is better to retain customers than to constantly be replacing the same ones.
• 66% of marketers are increasing investment in branded content creation.
• For 42% of companies, the content specialist team is between one and three people.
• 55% of content marketing strategies focused on improving the quality of content To me this means that companies have already built out their content, measured the ROI, and now know that they need to up their game as competition increases and the industry matures.
• 85% of American adults go online at least once a day Furthermore, when you break these statistics down into different age brackets, it shows that:16.
• Young adults aged 18-29, the proportion who are ‘almost constantly’ online, is a staggering 48% What does this mean for marketers?
• According to one survey, “72% of marketers say content marketing increases engagement.
• Interestingly, 20% of survey respondents said that they are looking to add messaging apps as a distribution channel for their content.
• 53% of website traffic originates from search engines, and blogs are one of the best tactical ways that marketers can improve their search engine optimization, including through organic search.
• 75% of marketers said that SEO was their most efficient content marketing tactic.
• For 71% of B2B industry professionals, purchasing decisions are influenced by reading a corporate blog at some point.
• Demand for video content is increasing:54% of consumers want to see more original content in video format 37.
• Video is a powerful marketing tool:86% of marketing professionals use video as a marketing tool 38.
• The power of YouTube:As the second largest search engine, YouTube was estimated to be utilized by 89% of marketers.
• 86% of businesses now use video as a marketing tool, a sharp rise from 63% and 81% in previous years.
• 51% of companies have used Instagram in their video marketing efforts and this is up from 41% in the previous year.
• Perhaps most importantly, the survey found that 68% plan to use it this year.
• Of the people surveyed, 73% said that video would be their preference for learning about a new product.
• 41% of Americans listen to podcasts at least monthly This is what makes them so attractive.
• As the chart above shows, it is estimated that 32% of the US population listen to at least one podcast each month.
• 93% of people will listen to most of a podcast episode, with 52% listening to an entire episode Of course, there are many more forms of content marketing than just blogging, video and podcasts.
• 80 SEO Statistics That Prove the Power of Search [2022 Update] – SMA Marketing: 68% of all trackable website traffic is sourced from organic and paid search.
• 67% of clicks go to the top five websites in search engine results and the results from 6 to 10 yield less than 4% of the clicks.
• 50% of visitors are more likely to click a result if the brand appears multiple times in search engine results.
• Inbound leads, such as SEO, cost 61% less than outbound leads, such as direct mail or cold calling.
• Marketers using both organic SEO techniques and pay-per-click ads see an average of 25% more clicks and 27% more profits compared to using a single technique.
• 57% of B2B marketers stated that SEO generates more leads than any other marketing initiative.
• 88% of people perform some type of online research before making a purchase online or in-store.
• 70-80% of people ignore paid search results, choosing to only click on organic listings.
• 55% of searchers don’t know which links in the Search Engine Results pages are PPC ads.
• And up to 50% of users shown a Search engine Results page screenshot could not identify paid ads.
• 40% of people abandon a website that takes 3 seconds or longer to load.
• A 1-second delay in page response can result in a 7% reduction in conversions.
• Marketers see SEO as becoming more effective, with 82% reporting effectiveness is on the rise, and 42% of this group stating effectiveness is increasing significantly.
• Approximately 55% of searches are done on mobile, 43% are done on desktop, and 3% are done on a tablet.
• 93% of consumers use the internet to find a local business, with 34% searching every day.
• 72% of consumers who perform a local search visit a store within 5 miles of their current location.
• 61% of mobile searchers are more likely to contact a local business if they have a mobile-friendly site.
• 88% of consumers trust online reviews as much as they trust personal recommendations.
• Companies that blog have 434% more indexed pages than those that don’t.
• Updating and republishing old blog posts can increase traffic by more than 100%.
• 72% of marketers say the single most effective SEO tactic is relevant content creation.
• 47% of consumers view 3-5 pieces of content created by a company before talking to a salesman from that company.
• 62% of B2B marketers and 51% of B2C marketers have optimized their blogs for mobile in order to improve SEO.
• A page that is ranking in the top 3 search results has a 75% chance of also ranking for the same query done via voice search.
• Google has 78% of desktop/laptop search market share and 92% of total search engine market share for mobile devices.
• 11% account for most of the remaining desktop/laptop search engine market share.
• Google “near me” mobile searches that contain a variant of “can I buy” or “to buy” grew 500% between 2015 and 2017.
• On Google, 18% of organic clicks go to the first search result, 10% go to the second, and 7% go to the third.
• 49% of Google searches don’t result in a click, demonstrating the increasing emphasis on optimizing for SERPs.
• Three-fourths of people (75%) say paid search ads make it easier to find the information they are searching for on a website or search engine.
• More than one-quarter of people (26%) click on a paid search ad because it mentions a brand they are familiar with.
• 5% of people couldn’t identify ads vs organic results if there were no ads in the right column.
• 49% of businesses receive more than 1,000 average Search views of their Google My Business listing per month, and 33% receive 1,000+ views on Maps.
• On average, the return on ad spend for Google Ads is 200% or $2 for every $1 spent.
• 87% of people who own a smartphone use a search engine at least once a day.
• 40% of mobile website visitors will leave the site if it takes more than 3 seconds to load.
• 60% of smartphone users have contacted a business directly using the search results (e.
• 4 Stats That Prove You Should Use Infographic For Marketing Right Now | Content Marketing Design Agency With Pro Infographic Designers: ) People remember 65% of information when presented in visual formTips:Conclusion We have entered a very competitive era in online marketing.
• A professional designer, however, is recommended if you want a 100% unique and branded infographic.
• ) Infographics can increase web traffic by 12% In an internet-driven economy, traffic is the lifeblood of any online business.
• With infographics, you can boost traffic to your content by up to 12%, according to Demand Gen Report.
• ) People remember 65% of information when presented in visual form A study by the European Journal of Cognitive Psychology revealed that people remember 65% of information if it’s presented in visual form.
• In comparison, they’ll only remember 10% of that information if they received it through hearing or plain text.
• Here’s Why Infographics are Surviving the Test of Time as a Great Marketing Tool Jan 9, 2024 | Infographic BlogsDid you know that infographics have the potential to increase website traffic by 12% and are 30 times more likely to be read fully than text?
• An amazing product and a humorous take on office life, resulted in a stunning 89% completion rate on average.
• 37 Must Know Digital Marketing Statistics for 2024 [Infographics] – RebelMouse: 58% of marketing professionals indicated they used social media posting tools to leverage their content marketing efforts in a 2022 poll.
• According to a global survey conducted in 2022, 27% of marketers spent less than $1,000 per month on content marketing, while 10% paid $10,000 to $20,000 per month.
• As of 2023, mobile accounted for over 50% of all web traffic globally in the first quarter of 2023.
• The global marketing automation industry’s revenue increased by an expected 22% to $5.
• Facebook was the most popular platform among international marketers in January 2023, with 89% of users, closely followed by Instagram with 80%.
• In 2022, 23% of American B2B marketers aimed to incorporate AI and automation into their strategies to enhance customer data analysis.
• An international survey conducted in 2022 revealed that, compared to 88% in 2021, 90% of marketing professionals in 35 countries employed AI solutions to automate client interactions.
• Furthermore, the same proportion of marketers as last year, 88% — reported that AI continued to help with personalizing the consumer journey across several channels.
• A global poll of marketing professionals conducted in 2022 revealed that 39% of respondents trusted AI to expedite email send times, and 42% trusted AI for real-time content and offers customization.
• survey, 16% of respondents aged 35–44 found brand/advertiser-generated AI images highly appealing.
• survey, 12% of respondents aged 18–34 found generative AI images in influencer-created social media advertising highly appealing.
• In 2022, 32% of marketers employed AI and marketing automation for offers, email personalization, and paid advertising.
• Furthermore, for product and content recommendations, content ideas, and email subject line personalization, 22% of respondents coupled AI with marketing automation.
• survey conducted in October 2022, B2B marketers who used chatbots had notable increases in lead generation:26% saw increases of 10–20%, 25% saw increases of 5–10%, and 15% saw increases of more than 30%.
• In a 2022 poll, 30% of marketers claimed they used a CMS over social media to leverage their content marketing activities.
• Over 34 million (45%) of the 77 million websites in the world are powered by WordPress.
• 36% of websites do not use popular CMS platforms like Squarespace, Wix, and WordPress.
• Enterprise companies spend about 28% of their marketing budget on CMS platforms.
• 64+ Social Media Marketing Statistics (2024 Research): 77% of marketers retarget Facebook/Instagram advertising as a marketing strategy.
• 71% of businesses plan to create more videos for social media marketing in 2024.
• Over 90% of users regularly engage with influencers on YouTube, Instagram, TikTok, and Snapchat.
• 33% of marketers say Instagram offers all social media platforms the highest ROI.
• The average annual growth rate from 2023 to 2027 is forecasted to be 5%.
• 48%Facebook Messenger-24% In the United States, Social media users have an average of 7.
• Around 84% of people aged 18-29 use at least one social media platform.
• According to Forbes, social media usage has been more common among the younger generation, with 84% of those aged between 18 and 29 and 81% of people aged between 30 and 49 actively using at least one social media platform.
• Age groupThe percentage of people who use at least one social media platform18 to 29 years old84%30 to 49 years old81%50 to 64 years old73%More than 65 years old45% 99% of users access social media through mobile or tablet.
• However, you may find the statistics surprising:99% of users connect to social media through a tablet or smartphone, with 78% using their phones exclusively for this purpose.
• 8 million 77% of marketers retarget Facebook/Instagram advertising as a marketing strategy.
• Also, 69% of marketers retarget Google advertising, while 55% retarget email marketing.
• Businesses often adopt new technology, so it is no surprise that in today’s digital business, 77% of small businesses use social media to connect with their audiences.
• Additionally, 44% of companies use it to build brand awareness, and many small businesses (41%) rely on social media to generate revenue.
• This is evidenced by 90% of social media users following at least one brand on it.
• The purchase process can differ among customers who bought products they saw on social media, with 11% buying immediately, 44% postponing their online purchase later, and 21% buying in-store.
• However, it is notable that 76% of users have purchased being influenced by a brand’s social media post, indicating the significant impact of social media on the retail industry.
• 5% Facebook’s overall social commerce add-to-cart conversion rate is 34.
• On social media, short-form videos, typically less than a minute in length, are gaining attention from 66% of consumers due to their brevity and authenticity.
• Additionally, 34% of consumers appreciate the more genuine nature of the shorter form.
• According to Wyzowl, video marketing was the most popular among businesses in 2023, with 91% of them using it–a 5% increase from the previous year.
• In fact, since 2019, over 90% of marketers believe video marketing is a vital element of their overall marketing strategy.
• However, one of the most popular categories is social media videos, with 71% of companies utilizing them.
• Other popular types include explainer videos, presentation videos, testimonial videos, and video ads, with usage rates of 70%, 50%, 46%, and 46%, respectively.
• Additionally, 91% of marketers report that video marketing can boost website traffic.
• Here are some of the key statistics regarding influencer marketing:50% of millennials believe in influencers’ product recommendations.
• A significant proportion of Millennials (50%) now trust product recommendations from social media influencers more than their favorite celebrities (38%).
• The main reason behind this trust is authenticity:88% of millennials value authenticity in the influencer they follow.
• 1 billion *Projected 28% of affiliate marketers use bloggers as influencers for marketing.
• Based on a study by Influencer Marketing Hub, bloggers are the top choice for affiliate campaigns, with 28% of affiliate marketers utilizing them.
• Review and coupon sites are preferred by 19% and 15% of affiliate marketers, respectively.
• 62 billion Over 90% of users regularly engage with influencers on YouTube, Instagram, TikTok, and Snapchat.
• However, most people (95%) primarily engage with influencers on YouTube and TikTok, while 94% of users engage with influencers on Instagram weekly.
• Social Media PlatformThe percentage of users who engage with influencers weeklyYouTube95%TikTok95%Instagram94%Snapchat92%Pinterest87%Twitch83%Triller75% 79% of influencer marketers in the United States say measuring campaign performance is their biggest challenge.
• The foremost obstacle is measuring campaign performance, followed by determining influencer ROI, which 76% of marketers reported as challenging.
• In addition, 68% of marketers prefer Facebook, while 48% choose YouTube.
• Facebook Statistics Around 90% of marketers use Facebook for their marketing campaigns.
• Moreover, 25% of Facebook users in the United States fall within the age range of 25 to 34.
• Instagram Statistics 33% of marketers say Instagram offers the highest ROI of all social media platforms.
• According to HubSpot, the most popular selling feature is Instagram Shops, used by 22% of social media marketers, followed by Facebook Shops at 21% and Instagram Live Shopping at 19%.
• Facebook came in second place, with 25% of marketers voting it as the highest generator of ROI.
• Due to these factors, 29% of social media marketers plan to invest in Instagram over other social media platforms.
• The countries with the highest LinkedIn ad reach rates are the United Arab Emirates at 88% and the Netherlands at 76.
• 45% of Pinterest users have a household income of over $100K, while 21% earn $30K or less.
• Sprout Social reports that 53% of Twitter users utilize the platform to stay up-to-date with the latest news.
• Additionally, men account for 63% of Twitter users, while women account for 37%.
• However, despite its wide use, 71% of marketers desire to decrease their time spent on Twitter by 2023.
• Users spend an average of 19 minutes daily on the platform, with 90% of this time coming from mobile devices.
• Ecommerce Marketing Statistics 2023 | Digital Third Coast: To get you started with your ecommerce marketing strategy, we’ve gathered together the latest statistics about the industry:Ecommerce Statistics US ecommerce statistics 80% of Internet users in the US have made at least one purchase online (99firms) Ecommerce sales were up 7.
• 52 billion (eMarketer) 61% of online shoppers made an online purchase related to fashion, which is higher than any other product category (99firms) On average, only 2.
• 8 trillion globally in 2023 (Statista) The US ranks second in ecommerce sales globally, with ecommerce being a 19% share of the total retail sales and $843 billion in annual sales.
• 1% of global retail sales in 2019 (99firms) Ecommerce Marketing & Research How do ecommerce businesses earn loyal customers?
• Research reveals 64% of US cardholders do it anyway (Let’s Talk About Money) Credit cards are the preferred method of ecommerce payment, globally.
• After Covid-19 hit, forecasters estimated retail sales will decrease by 10%, which equates to a $190.
• 89 billion spent in the first quarter of 2019 (Digital Commerce 360) In April 2020, US retailers’ online revenue growth was up 68%, year-over-year (Forbes) US and Canadian ecommerce orders increased 129% year-over-year in 2020 (Forbes) Online conversion rates increased 8.
• 8% in February, reflecting a level of shopping urgency typically seen during Cyber Mondays (Forbes) The portion of people shopping for food online has increased 24.
• 7% year-over-year (PYMNTS) The portion of consumers shopping online for retail purchases is up 34.
• The State of Content Marketing in 2023 [Stats & Trends to Watch]: Instagram is used by 65% of social media marketers, just behind Facebook at 67%.
• 22% of marketers say Instagram has the most growth potential in 2023 than any other platform.
• 44% of marketers say the most significant benefit of working with small influencers is that it’s less expensive.
• In fact, 90% of marketers using short-form videos will increase or maintain their investment in 2023, and 21% plan to leverage short-form videos for the first time in the same year.
• This coincides with the videos consumers prefer to watch, as 73% of consumers prefer to watch short-form videos to learn about a service or product.
• A recent study commissioned by Google Cloud found 82% of shoppers want a brand’s values to align with theirs.
• Furthermore, the same study found 75% of consumers would part ways with a brand over conflicting values.
• So, it’s no wonder 30% of marketers are creating content that reflects their brand’s values, making it one of the most popular trends in marketing.
• According to Google Cloud’s study, sustainability is a value most consumers (52%) are interested in.
• Influencer marketing is expected to see significant growth in 2023 with 17% of marketers planning to invest in it for the first time.
• According to Nielsen Scarborough, 42% of Americans seek the advice of others for purchase decisions and they want advice from relatable sources.
• Relatable content will grow significantly in 2023 as 46% of social media marketers will leverage it for the first time.
• Among those using it, 49% plan to increase their investment, and 43% keep investing the same amount.
• Additionally, funny content will see the 2nd most investment of any content type in 2023, and 33% of social media marketers plan to use it for the first time next year.
• We found that 93% of Gen Z spend an average of four hours daily on social media, and 57% of Gen Z have discovered a new product on social media within the past three months.
• Furthermore, 28% of Gen Z consumers bought a product through a social media app.
• When surveying a mix of B2B and B2C marketers, SEO has the fourth largest ROI, and most marketers using it (88%) will increase or maintain their investment in 2023.
• ) In a recent survey of 600+ bloggers and SEOs, 75% of respondents believe these changes will improve search experiences, leading to more use of search platforms.
• Content Marketing Statistics For 2024 (Must Know Data): Content Marketing Statistics 2024:Top Picks 73% of B2B marketers and 70% of B2C marketers use content marketing.
• 72% of marketers believe their content marketing strategy has increased engagement and traffic.
• 83% of marketers say focusing on quality rather than quantity of content is better, even if it means posting less often.
• 40% of marketers believe creating more visual and video content improves their content marketing.
• 73% of B2B and 70% of B2C marketers use content marketing as part of their marketing strategy.
• Meanwhile, 61% of content marketers have created or used videos in 2023.
• The usage of long-form articles increased from 22% in 2022 to 42% in 2023.
• Content Marketing Strategy 83% of marketers say it’s better to focus on quality rather than quantity of content, even if it means posting less often.
• Over 41% of marketers measure the success of their content marketing strategy through sales.
• 42% of the marketers use content automation, 82% use SEO tools, and 88% use web analytics tools.
• Types Of Content 83% of the content marketers create articles and posts, while 61% create videos.
• The usage of long-form articles, including videos, blogs, and infographics, increased to 42% from 22% recorded last year.
• Short content of 300 to 900 words attracts 21% less traffic and 75% fewer backlinks than articles of average length (900–1200 words).
• 87% of marketers say that video has increased traffic to their websites.
• According to 67% of marketers, video content has gained the most importance in the last year.
• 38% of the marketers say that the video content produces the best results.
• Content Consumption 51% of the content consumption comes from organic searches.
• 91% of the people wanted to see more video content from their favorite brands.
• Benefits of Content Marketing Content marketing generates over three times as many leads as outbound marketing and costs 62% less.
• Plus, 63% of marketers say that content marketing helps to nurture the leads, and 50% say that it helps build loyalty with existing clients.
• Websites with blogs have 434% more indexed pages than those without a blog.
• 81% of marketers reported that content marketing helped them create brand awareness.
• Meanwhile, 63% of the respondents reported success in building a growing loyalty with existing clients and customers.
• 70% of the people said that they would rather get to know a company through an article rather than an advertisement.
• Challenges Of Content Marketing 57% of the content creators cited that creating the right content for the audience is one of the major challenges of content marketing.
• Scaling content production is one of the most common challenges cited by 48% of content marketers.
• 48% of content marketers think aligning content with the buyer’s journey is challenging.
• Meanwhile, 45% of marketers think aligning content efforts across sales and marketing is a huge challenge.
• Meanwhile, 53% and 48% of them say that changes to the social media algorithm and data management and analytics are one of their biggest concerns.
• 69% of the marketers said that the time required to produce video content is a challenge.
• 46% use it to research headlines and keywords, and over 36% use AI tools for writing.
• 48% of content writers cited that working with new technology, such as AI, was the most popular skill of interest in 2023.
• It was followed by interests like improving data analytics/data science skills (42%), and leadership skills (42%).
• 58% of marketers using generative AI for content creation said increased performance is the top benefit.
• 62% of content marketers are concerned that AI will result in less respect for skilled writers/editors.
• Less respect for skilled writers and editors:62% Writing/editing is viewed as a commodity:55% Lower compensation for writers/editors:46% Fewer jobs for content marketers:45% Large workload for writers/ editors:17% Not concerned about AI-related impacts:17% 19.
• 2% of marketers spend over 40% of their marketing budget on AI-driven campaigns.
• 53 Social Media Marketing Statistics for 2024 | SMM Facts & Stats: 9% of the world’s population (The University of Maine) 6 billion people are projected to use social media in 2027 (Statista) Channel-Specific Social Media Statistics The follow statistics are broken down into the different social media marketing channels.
• 562 billion adults each month (Data Reportal) 80% of people who are on TikTok are looking for funny or entertaining content (Data Reportal) YouTube Statistics YouTube’s user base is expected to hit 1.
• 20+ Content Marketing Statistics that Show the Power of Content – Gist: For medium- and large-sized businesses, content marketing cost up to 41% less per lead than paid search.
• According to Hubspot, companies that blog have 434% more indexed pages than businesses without blogs.
• Since 77% of Internet users read blogs, these tidbits of information are a subtle way to gain your audience’s attention.
• After all, 70% of people would prefer to learn about a company through an article than an ad — so just start writing!
• 47% of buyers view at least 3–5 pieces of content before they contact a sales representative.
• 96% of B2B buyers look for more information from industry thought leaders before buying.
• Furthermore, 82% of customers have a more positive outlook on a company after reading custom content, and 70% of customers feel closer to a business after engaging with their content.
• As a result, 74% of companies find that lead quality and quantity went up as they introduced a content marketing strategy.
• In 2017, 53% of marketers claimed that content marketing was their top inbound strategy.
• B2B marketers, in particular, allocate up to 28% of their budget to content creation.
• However, 87% of content writers are still struggling to produce material that engages their buyers.
• 49% of marketers are now focusing on using a buyer’s journey map to organize their content strategy.
• Only 8% of marketers consider themselves effective or very effective at measuring content ROI.
• However, 87% of brands use sales lead quality, 71% of companies use website traffic, and 67% use SEO ranking to measure the effectiveness of their content marketing.
• 17+ Must Know Digital marketing facts and Stats – Blog: Searching Vs Buying Behaviour According to statistics, 80% of the people in United States are using internet regularly.
• Out of these, 97% uses it to search for products that they eventually end up buying.
• Email Optimization Importance It is estimated that over 55% of emails are now opened on a mobile device which means that email optimization for mobile devices is necessary.
• Internet Users on Social Media It is reported that over 70% of internet users are present on at least one social media platform, which means that a majority of users can in fact be reached through social media.
• Results revealed that about 90% of marketers said that social media is important for their businesses.
• Social Media Marketer Social Media Usage 66% of online marketers are using social media for approx 7 hours or more and 39% for 10 or more hours in a week.
• Mobile Users Stats According to the reports from Google’s ‘The Mobile Playbook’, 94% of users uses smartphone for local information online.
• Based on the same report, 51% of those users visited the store they found online.
• with around 80% of searches being conducted through this search engine alone.
• Google handles 79% of Queries Data for the August 2016 shows that Google holds the highest market share of all the desktop searches, with over 79%, followed by Bing (9.
• In a survey conducted with SEO industry leaders, 94% of the participants shared that the title tag was the best place to insert keywords in order to pursue higher rankings on search engines But The recent algorithm has changed everything.
• That simply mean that even if you could somehow dominate the top 1000 keywords on search engines, you would be losing out on about 90% of the total search traffic in play.
• Different Result for Mobile Mobile With about roughly 50% of the internet’s traffic originating from mobile devices, Google rewards websites, which are designed to respond to the user’s device and load themselves accordingly.
• According to the comScore results for February 2016, approximately 64% of searches have been conducted through Google search engine.
• Bing’s share in the total number of searches is approximately 21%, followed by Yahoo!
• Search Query Statistics Google’s market share on mobile devices is over 90%, followed by Yahoo!
• with approximately 5% and Bing with approximately 6% of the market share.
• While Google takes up the largest part of search engine market share in the USA and India, Baidu takes up over 60% market share in China, where Google falls behind with less than 5%.
• Most Popular Analytics Google Analytics is most popular analytics tool which is used by 87% of Analytic Agencies who provide professional web trafficking services to other businesses.
• Using a good workstation improves your productivity Using double screen improves work productivity by 16% In Work from home environment, Having a good workstation encourages employees and end up performing 160% in productivity compare to the people who work on bed 19.
• TOP DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS IN 2023 | Amra And Elma LLC: 1 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #1 – digital marketing generates 50% more interactions with customers than traditional marketing 2.
• 55% in the next 12 months, while digital marketing spending is projected to increase by 13.
• 4 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #4 – content marketing costs 62% less than traditional methods and it generates 3x more leads 2.
• 5 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #5 – 70% of consumers want to learn about products through content, such as articles or blog posts, as opposed to traditional ad methods 2.
• 6 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #6 – 44% of respondents could recall a brand immediately after seeing a digital ad and 75% of people who received direct mail were able to remember the brand 2.
• 7 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #7 – 41% of marketers believe that events are more effective than digital advertising, email, and content marketing 2.
• 8 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #8 – 64% of consumers say watching a marketing video on Facebook has influenced their purchase decision in the last month 2.
• 9 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #9 – 79% of households say they read or scan direct mail ads 2.
• 10 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #10 – 60% of marketers across various industries have already shifted their efforts toward digital marketing 2.
• 11 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #11 – 56% of customers find print marketing to be the most trustworthy type of marketing 2.
• 12 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #12 – 39% of customers say they try a business for the first time because of direct mail advertising 2.
• 13 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #13 – 49% of all consumers aged between 18 and 29 have made a purchase after viewing a social media ad 2.
• 15 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #15 – 81% of consumers go online to do research before heading out to the store and making a purchase 2.
• 16 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #16 – Facebook is used by more than 60% of all Americans on a regular basis 2.
• 17 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #17 – 90% of businesses said that social media was their primary or secondary channel for promoting content 2.
• 18 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #18 – TV advertising is responsible for as much as 72% of all brand awareness 2.
• 19 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #19 – print advertising is the most trusted format, with 82% of respondents saying that they trust it when making purchasing decisions 2.
• On the other side, TV advertising is responsible for as much as 72% of all brand awareness.
• In fact, 90% of businesses said that social media was their primary or secondary channel for promoting content.
• According to a recent study, digital marketing generates 50% more interactions with customers than traditional marketing.
• 55% in the next 12 months, while digital marketing spending is projected to increase by 13.
• DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #4 – content marketing costs 62% less than traditional methods and it generates 3x more leads Traditional marketing methods can be quite costly, often eating up a large portion of the budget.
• As per DemandMetric, content marketing costs 62% less than traditional methods and it generates 3x more leads.
• According to Marketing Profs, only 44% of respondents could recall a brand immediately after seeing a digital ad.
• In contrast, 75% of people who received direct mail were able to remember the brand.
• DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #9 – 79% of households say they read or scan direct mail ads According to the US Postal Service’s (USPS) Certified Direct Mail Professional (CDMP) program, direct mail remains an effective way to reach potential customers.
• In fact, survey found that 79% of households say they read or scan direct mail ads.
• This means they’re not only likely to read direct mail, but nearly 80% of households actually do it.
• DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #10 – 60% of marketers across various industries have already shifted their efforts toward digital marketing With the advent of digital media, businesses have been forced to adapt their marketing strategies to keep up with the times.
• According to research, 60% of marketers across various industries have already shifted their efforts toward digital marketing.
• DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #11 – 56% of customers find print marketing to be the most trustworthy type of marketing In a world full of different marketing messages, it can be hard to know who to trust.
• The study found that 56% of customers find print marketing to be the most trustworthy type of marketing.
• DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #12 – 39% of customers say they try a business for the first time because of direct mail advertising According to US Data Corporation, 39% of customers say they try a business for the first time because of direct mail advertising.
• DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #13 – 49% of all consumers aged between 18 and 29 have made a purchase after viewing a social media ad According to Statista, nearly half (49%) of all consumers aged between 18 and 29 have made a purchase after viewing a social media ad.
• DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #16 – Facebook is used by more than 60% of all Americans on a regular basis According to a research, Facebook is used by more than 60% of all Americans on a regular basis.
• Seven in ten Facebook users say they use the site daily, and 49% who say they use the site several times a day.
• 90% of businesses said that social media was their primary or secondary channel for promoting content, and nearly 80% said that it was their most effective channel.
• DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #19 – print advertising is the most trusted format, with 82% of respondents saying that they trust it when making purchasing decisions A recent survey by MarketingSherpa found that the most trusted advertising formats are all traditional media.
• Print advertising, such as newspaper and magazine ads, is the most trusted format, with 82% of respondents saying that they trust it when making purchasing decisions.
• Television advertising is the second most trusted format, with 80% of respondents saying that they trust it.
• Direct mail advertising, such as flyers and coupons, is the third most trusted format, with 76% of respondents saying that they trust it.
• Radio advertising is the fourth most trusted format, with 71% of respondents saying that they trust it.
• Finally, outdoor advertising, such as billboards and bus stop ads, is the fifth most trusted format, with 70% of respondents trusting it.
• A recent study found that 49% of consumers aged 18-29 have made a purchase after viewing a social media ad.
• However, the study also found that 39% of customers say they try a business for the first time because of direct mail advertising.
• A recent study found that 78% of Americans now own a smartphone, making it the most common device for accessing the internet.
• 1 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #1 – digital marketing generates 50% more interactions with customers than traditional marketing 2.
• 55% in the next 12 months, while digital marketing spending is projected to increase by 13.
• 4 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #4 – content marketing costs 62% less than traditional methods and it generates 3x more leads 2.
• 5 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #5 – 70% of consumers want to learn about products through content, such as articles or blog posts, as opposed to traditional ad methods 2.
• 6 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #6 – 44% of respondents could recall a brand immediately after seeing a digital ad and 75% of people who received direct mail were able to remember the brand 2.
• 7 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #7 – 41% of marketers believe that events are more effective than digital advertising, email, and content marketing 2.
• 8 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #8 – 64% of consumers say watching a marketing video on Facebook has influenced their purchase decision in the last month 2.
• 9 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #9 – 79% of households say they read or scan direct mail ads 2.
• 10 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #10 – 60% of marketers across various industries have already shifted their efforts toward digital marketing 2.
• 11 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #11 – 56% of customers find print marketing to be the most trustworthy type of marketing 2.
• 12 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #12 – 39% of customers say they try a business for the first time because of direct mail advertising 2.
• 13 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #13 – 49% of all consumers aged between 18 and 29 have made a purchase after viewing a social media ad 2.
• 15 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #15 – 81% of consumers go online to do research before heading out to the store and making a purchase 2.
• 16 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #16 – Facebook is used by more than 60% of all Americans on a regular basis 2.
• 17 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #17 – 90% of businesses said that social media was their primary or secondary channel for promoting content 2.
• 18 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #18 – TV advertising is responsible for as much as 72% of all brand awareness 2.
• 19 DIGITAL MARKETING VS TRADITIONAL MARKETING STATISTICS #19 – print advertising is the most trusted format, with 82% of respondents saying that they trust it when making purchasing decisions 2.
• 30 Digital Marketing Statistics for Marketers in 2022: Engaging email subscribers remains the most difficult challenge for 45% email marketers.
• Recent statistics indicate that 75% of Gmail users access their emails via mobile devices.
• Blog posts are the top B2C marketing content format, with 83% of companies using it within the last 12 months.
• Quality content is the most important design element that contributes to creating an effective customer experience, say 58% of marketers.
• The use of video for marketing needs has increased by 23% over the last three years.
• 94% of video marketers claim video has helped to increase user awareness.
• Video marketers say video has directly helped to boost their sales by 78%.
• 83% of marketers reported feeling confident in their social media efforts.
• 71 billion in revenues in 2021, accounting for 30% of all internet ad revenues.
• 64% of people said they now prefer to message rather than call a business.
• 59% of marketeers agree that customer service via social media channels has increased in value for their businesses.
• Mobile share of organic Google visits to business websites increased to 61%.
• Smartphones combined for 61% of organic Google visits in the first quarter of 2021, which represents a 2% increase from Q1 2021.
• 73% of all e-commerce sales this year coming from mobile Shopping through smartphones and tablets will expand further.
• Here’s why it matters:Pinners (85% of which use mobile devices to access the platform) are open to finding new products and ideas.
• 82% of marketers reported major investments to improve their SEO strategy.
• It was reported that 93% of online experiences begin with a search engine.
• Next year, businesses should keep up with optimizing their website for local search results considering that 75% of consumers search for local stores and locations.
• In 2021, 70% of businesses altered their SEO content strategy to generate better results.
• SEO stats predict that altering strategy and content can be effective in increasing organic traffic by 111%.
• Essential Visual Content Marketing Statistics in 2024 • ZipDo: Painting a vivid picture with the colors of data, the captivating statistic reveals that infographics have the prowess to amplify web traffic by an impressive 12%.
• Having a featured image increases the odds of getting your content shared by 80%.
• Visual Content Marketing Statistics reveal astounding insights such as an 80% increase in content sharing rates when featuring an image.
• The potency of tweets embellished with images is undeniable, as they garner a staggering 150% more retweets compared to their unadorned counterparts.
• Undoubtedly, the realm of visual content marketing is on an upward trajectory, and the staggering figure of 74% of marketers incorporating visuals into their social media articles stands as a testament to this phenomenon.
• Illuminating the power of visual storytelling in the realm of content marketing, the captivating statistic, ‘Visual content is 43% more persuasive than text alone,’ weaves a tale of the undeniable impact that visuals play in engaging and influencing consumer behavior.
• 60% of consumers are more likely to consider or contact a business when they see an image in search results.
• Yet a gleaming treasure trove of data reveals that an astonishing 60% of consumers are more likely to pursue or interact with businesses that flaunt eye-catching images in search results.
• Articles with relevant images receive 94% more views than those without images.
• Painting a vivid picture with the power of numbers, the astounding revelation that articles adorned with relevant images captivate 94% more views than their imageless counterparts truly highlights the magnetic allure of visual content.
• 91% of consumers aged 18-34 trust online reviews and visual content as much as personal recommendations.
• Diving into the world of visual content marketing, one cannot ignore the profound impact of a captivating statistic:a staggering 91% of consumers aged 18-34 place their trust in online reviews and visual content at a level equal to personal recommendations.
• Diving into the world of visual content marketing, one cannot ignore the jaw-dropping surge of visual content on Facebook, boasting an astronomical 130% yearly increase.
• In the realm of visual content marketing, the fact that a mere 20% of a 600-word webpage captures the average reader’s attention serves as a testament to the sheer power of visuals.
• In the dynamic realm of visual content marketing, the statistic revealing users spending 88% more time on web pages showcasing videos serves as a testament to the captivating power of this multimedia format.
• Having a featured image increases the odds of getting your content shared by 80%.
• 60% of consumers are more likely to consider or contact a business when they see an image in search results.
• Articles with relevant images receive 94% more views than those without images.
• 91% of consumers aged 18-34 trust online reviews and visual content as much as personal recommendations.
• Painting a vivid picture with the colors of data, the captivating statistic reveals that infographics have the prowess to amplify web traffic by an impressive 12%.
• Having a featured image increases the odds of getting your content shared by 80%.
• Visual Content Marketing Statistics reveal astounding insights such as an 80% increase in content sharing rates when featuring an image.
• The potency of tweets embellished with images is undeniable, as they garner a staggering 150% more retweets compared to their unadorned counterparts.
• Undoubtedly, the realm of visual content marketing is on an upward trajectory, and the staggering figure of 74% of marketers incorporating visuals into their social media articles stands as a testament to this phenomenon.
• Illuminating the power of visual storytelling in the realm of content marketing, the captivating statistic, ‘Visual content is 43% more persuasive than text alone,’ weaves a tale of the undeniable impact that visuals play in engaging and influencing consumer behavior.
• 60% of consumers are more likely to consider or contact a business when they see an image in search results.
• Yet a gleaming treasure trove of data reveals that an astonishing 60% of consumers are more likely to pursue or interact with businesses that flaunt eye-catching images in search results.
• Articles with relevant images receive 94% more views than those without images.
• Painting a vivid picture with the power of numbers, the astounding revelation that articles adorned with relevant images captivate 94% more views than their imageless counterparts truly highlights the magnetic allure of visual content.
• 91% of consumers aged 18-34 trust online reviews and visual content as much as personal recommendations.
• Diving into the world of visual content marketing, one cannot ignore the profound impact of a captivating statistic:a staggering 91% of consumers aged 18-34 place their trust in online reviews and visual content at a level equal to personal recommendations.
• Diving into the world of visual content marketing, one cannot ignore the jaw-dropping surge of visual content on Facebook, boasting an astronomical 130% yearly increase.
• In the realm of visual content marketing, the fact that a mere 20% of a 600-word webpage captures the average reader’s attention serves as a testament to the sheer power of visuals.
• In the dynamic realm of visual content marketing, the statistic revealing users spending 88% more time on web pages showcasing videos serves as a testament to the captivating power of this multimedia format.
• 24 Statistics That Should Influence Your Digital Marketing Strategy in PH: It’s such a strong force that’s driving massive changes with over 38% or $77 billion of the total ad spending expected to go to digital next year, whereas TV ad spending only stands at 35.
• Demographics of Filipino Internet Users 65% of the Filipinos aged 15-19 years old use the Internet.
• In the same age bracket, 75% of access the Internet through various devices (e.
• Other age groups use the internet fairly lower at 48% (20-29 years old), 40% (30+ years old), 13% (40+ years old), and 4% (50+ years old).
• Others access the Internet through mobile broadband subscription (55%) and broadband subscription (less than 10%).
• In the Philippines, the internet is accessed through mobile at 38%.
• Online shopping comes in at second place with 29% of the total Filipino Internet users.
• Other online activities are watching videos (19%), playing online and mobile games (15%), d searching based on location (13%).
• Filipinos pay their online purchases in different ways:cash (53%), credit cards (36%), and bank transfers (10%).
• 64% of online Filipinos check information first online before making a purchase.
• Also, they value other people’s brand review and opinion at 89%.
• According to Nielsen, Filipinos are okay with getting targeted by online ads at 35%.
• 83% of them appreciate online ads because they said it made their lives better.
• Furthermore, 43% of them don’t bother that their online activity is being tracked as long as they see ads that are relevant.
• Essential content marketing statistics for 2020 | Smart Insights: 69% of B2B marketers have a documented content strategy More B2B marketers than ever before are documenting their content strategies, with 41% saying this is the case this year.
• This figure has been increasing slightly over the last couple of years, rising from 39% in 2019 and 37% in 2018.
• When looking at B2B marketer with successful strategies, 69% document them compared to just 16% of the companies who are least successful with their marketing.
• 76% of marketers use organic traffic as a measure of content success Organic traffic and the positive impact on SEO are the main measures of content marketing success for businesses.
• Some 76% of marketers said that organic traffic is the key metric they use to measure the success of their content, showing that although other channels are driving traffic, organic is still very much king when it comes to content.
• Instead, 62% said that the number of leads they get is a sign that their content is working.
• This is compared to the 60% who look at sessions and pageviews – signs of good engagement – and the 47% who use conversion rate as a key content success metric.
• Bounce rate is also low on the list, with just 31% naming it as a metric.
• It takes 65% more time to write a blog than in 2014 It is now taking more time to create blogs, with the average writing time in 2019 hitting three hours and 57 minutes – a 65% increase from 2014’s two hours and 24 minutes.
• Last year saw 19% of bloggers spending six hours or more writing blogs, whereas, in 2014, just 4.
• 84% of B2B marketers are outsourcing content creation The fact that blogs now take so much time to create could be a factor in the decision for many organizations to outsource content creation.
• In B2B companies, 84% of marketers outsource their content creation activities, suggesting that fewer businesses are opting to have any content capabilities managed in-house.
• 26% of blogs include videos but 41% of bloggers report strong results from videos Content is no longer about written content.
• For example, although 93% of blogs contain images, only 30% of bloggers say they get “strong results” from this content format.
• In comparison, 26% of blogs contain videos, which 41% say deliver strong results.
• On top of this, just 7% of blogs contain some form of audio content – such as podcasts – however, a third (33%) of bloggers say this is effective, showing that alternative forms of content need to be included in your content marketing strategy.
• 67% of marketers say SEO is the most effective marketing tactic Despite alternative content delivering strong results, the most efficient content marketing tactic continues to be search engine optimization.
• Around 67% of marketers say that SEO was the most efficient tactic that was implemented last year, and it is likely that this will continue into 2020.
• Other tactics that proved to be particularly successful last year that marketers should bear in mind for 2020 included updating and repurposing existing content (51%), creating more video/visual content (37%) and optimizing the customer journey (35%).
• 45 Statistics That Prove the Long-Term ROI of Content Marketing: 71% of B2B buyers said that they consume blog content during a purchase.
• 64% of respondents stated that they consider podcasts a valuable type of content in the early stage of their buyer’s journey.
• 47% of respondents stated that they value webinars in the mid-stage of their buyer’s journey.
• 40% of respondents stated that they consume 3–5 pieces of content before reaching out to a salesperson.
• 65% of content consumers stated that they prefer content from prominent industry influencers.
• Case studies (79%), webinars (66%), video (49%), and interactive content (36%) are the most preferred types of content for B2B buyers.
• Nearly 50% of buyers watch product videos before making a purchasing decision.
• 67% of respondents reported that the quality of a product image influences their purchasing decision.
• The stats below prove that B2B marketers are becoming more confident with their content strategy, with 95% of them stating that their organization represents a valuable and trusted content resource to their audience.
• What’s more, the Content Marketing Institute’s report for 2018 showed that 89% of the most successful B2B marketers have a content marketing strategy.
• 91% of interviewed B2B marketers said that their organization uses content marketing.
• 35% of interviewed B2B marketers stated that they measure content marketing ROI.
• 47% of B2B marketers stated that they don’t measure content marketing ROI.
• 70% of interviewed marketers said that they can demonstrate how content marketing has grown their number of leads and increased customer engagement.
• Social media posts (95%), blog posts (89%), and email newsletters (81%) are the top three types of content B2B marketers have used in the past 12 months.
• 34% of interviewed marketers expect their content marketing budget to increase in 2020.
• 43% of respondents stated that their company is in the mature state of content marketing maturity.
• Cultivating relationships with customers is another great concern, with 82% of marketers stating that their organization is interested in creating content that builds loyalty with customers.
• In 2018, 57% of the interviewed B2C marketers stated that they expected to boost their content marketing budget in 2019.
• Content creation (56%) and paid content distribution (37%) are the two areas in which B2C marketers increased their budget in 2018.
• 68% of interviewed marketers stated that they use paid methods to distribute content.
• 64% of B2C content marketers stated that their company is extremely committed to content marketing.
• 40% of B2C marketers think that their company’s ability to make use of content marketing technologies is intermediate.
• Social media analytics (85%), email marketing software (77%), and analytics tools (71%) are the top three technologies that B2C marketers are using to manage their content marketing efforts.
• 68% of B2C marketers that use content marketing technologies stated that they help them gain a better insight into how content is performing.
• And 58% of the interviewed marketers stated that they expected that their ROI would continue to increase.
• The DMA Marketer Email Tracker for 2019 showed that 62% of interviewed marketers were measuring the ROI of their email marketing campaigns.
• 71% of B2B marketers were satisfied with their ability to calculate ROI, whereas B2B organizations (48%) needed a longer time to measure their performance.
• 76% of marketers reported an increase in open rates and 75% said click-throughs have been higher over the last 12 months.
• 67% of marketers stated that 20% of their marketing budget was spent on email marketing in 2018.
• Email marketing campaigns that contain video content generate 96% higher click-through rates than campaigns that don’t use video content.
• 75% of content marketers stated that they drive better ROI when they add visuals in their content.
• Animoto’s Social Media Report for 2020 showed that 91% of marketers are satisfied with the ROI of video marketing on social media.
• 93% of brands landed a new customer by posting a video on social media.
• Adding video content on your website can drive an 80% increase in conversion rates.
• 83% of interviewed marketers were satisfied with the ROI of video marketing.
• 82% of them stated that video marketing is their key marketing strategy.
• – 71% of B2B buyers said that they consume blog content during a purchase.
• 64% of respondents stated that they consider podcasts a valuable type of content in the early stage of their buyer’s journey.
• 47% of respondents stated that they value webinars in the mid-stage of their buyer’s journey.
• 65% of content consumers stated that they prefer content from prominent industry influencers.
• Case studies (79%), webinars (66%), video (49%), and interactive content (36%) are the most preferred types of content for B2B buyers.
• Nearly 50% of buyers watch product videos before making a purchasing decision.
• pdf) showed that 89% of the most successful B2B marketers have a content marketing strategy.
• 91% of interviewed B2B marketers said that their organization uses content marketing.
• 35% of interviewed B2B marketers stated that they measure content marketing ROI.
• 47% of B2B marketers stated that they don’t measure content marketing ROI.
• 70% of interviewed marketers said that they can demonstrate how content marketing has grown their number of leads and increased customer engagement.
• Social media posts (95%), blog posts (89%), and email newsletters (81%) are the top three types of content B2B marketers have used in the past 12 months.
• 34% of interviewed marketers expect their content marketing budget to increase in 2020.
• Cultivating relationships with customers is another great concern, with 82% of marketers stating that their organization is interested in creating content that builds loyalty with customers.
• – In 2018, 57% of the interviewed B2C marketers stated that they expected to boost their content marketing budget in 2019.
• Content creation (56%) and paid content distribution (37%) are the two areas in which B2C marketers increased their budget in 2018.
• 68% of interviewed marketers stated that they use paid methods to distribute content.
• 64% of B2C content marketers stated that their company is extremely committed to content marketing.
• 40% of B2C marketers think that their company’s ability to make use of content marketing technologies is intermediate.
• Social media analytics (85%), email marketing software (77%), and analytics tools (71%) are the top three technologies that B2C marketers are using to manage their content marketing efforts.
• 68% of B2C marketers that use content marketing technologies stated that they help them gain a better insight into how content is performing.
• And 58% of the interviewed marketers stated that they expected that their ROI would continue to increase.
• – The DMA Marketer Email Tracker for 2019 showed that 62% of interviewed marketers were measuring the ROI of their email marketing campaigns.
• 71% of B2B marketers were satisfied with their ability to calculate ROI, whereas B2B organizations (48%) needed a longer time to measure their performance.
• 76% of marketers reported an increase in open rates and 75% said click-throughs have been higher over the last 12 months.
• 67% of marketers stated that 20% of their marketing budget was spent on email marketing in 2018.
• – 75% of content marketers stated that they drive better ROI when they add visuals in their content.
• 82% of them stated that video marketing is their key marketing strategy.
• Top 28 Digital Marketing Stats to Blow Your Mind: The average open rate across all industries is 80%, and the average click-through rate is 2.
• 89% of PR Pros Highlight the Importance of Personal Relationships With Journos21.
• 8%First Page Sage has calculated the click-through rates (CTR) for the various positions in Google’s search engine.
• 2% These CTRs compared favorably to those for the top four ad positions:Ad Position 1:2.
• Even less unsurprisingly is that the vast majority (90%) will either maintain or increase their investment in short-form video.
• In 2022, both pre-produced and livestream video enjoyed a growth rate of 89%.
• What makes this even more impressive is that livestream video’s growth rate was up by nearly 20% from the previous year.
• According to HubSpot’s data on consumer trends, 20% of Gen Zers and 25% of millennials have contacted a brand about customer service via social media.
• Their 2023 State of Marketing Report found that 29% of marketers are already using social media direct messages (DMs) for customer service, while 15% plan to use it for the first time in 2023.
• Considering that 30% of millennials and Generation Z consumers have purchased a product directly via social media recently, we can also expect to see a lot more brands starting to sell their products on social media channels like Facebook, TikTok, and Instagram.
• 64% of the marketers surveyed used Facebook, followed closely by Instagram with 58% and YouTube 57%.
• That said, HubSpot’s study found that more than half of marketers (56%) will increase their investment in TikTok in 2023.
• 78% of B2B Brands Use Email NewslettersAlthough email marketing is a comparatively old style of digital marketing, it is still seen as valuable by many firms, coming in as the third most popular content marketing activity in the Content Matters 2022 Report.
• That said, HubSpot’s report found that email open rates decreased across the board by more than 12%.
• Nearly 80% of Brands List Accessibility as a PriorityHubSpot’s data found that 77% of brands feel that making their emails more accessible is important.
• However, fewer than 10% admit that they implement best practices to make their email messages more accessible.
• For example, 75% of the respondents said they trust editorial sites compared to 54% who trust social media sites.
• Consumers Prefer to See Their Recommendations Personalized with HeadlinesAnother finding of the Outbrain-Savanta study was that household decision-makers are significantly more likely to prefer personalized recommendations (59%) and headlines (58%) than non-decision makers (54% and 52%).
• 18% Monetize Content by Selling Ad SpacesAccording to a study completed at the end of 2022 among professionals working in content marketing, 18% monetized their content by selling ad spaces.
• 89% of PR Pros Highlight the Importance of Personal Relationships With JournosResearch completed by PRophet and The Harris Poll reveals that 89% of PR professionals feel that personal relationships with journalists are more important than ever.
• However, more than half (53%) feel that they lack the capacity to maintain these relationships.
• Content Creation Is the Most Important PR TaskCision found in their 2023 Comms Report that 22% of their respondents considered content creation to be their single most important PR task.
• This was followed by analytics and reporting (21%) and attribution and ROI (17%).
• However, three years later and only 14% indicated media outreach and influencer management as their second most important concern.
• More Than Nine in 10 PR Pros Believe AI Will Transform Their ApproachAccording to the research completed by PRophet and The Harris Poll, 92% of PR pros feel that AI is worth exploring.
• What’s more, 90% believe that it will leave them with more time to dedicate to higher value tasks.
• Effective Marketers Are 46% More Likely to Use AutomationHubSpot has found that effective marketers are 46% more likely to use automation than marketers that have admitted that their strategies are ineffective.
• Salesforce’s data suggests that this could even be higher and, according to their stats, 70% of top-performing marketers have a fully defined AI strategy in place.
• Considering that the HubSpot’s research found that 42% of marketers stated that their workload has increased from 2021 to 2022 and that it’s expected that they’ll run nine campaigns per quarter in 2023, embracing automation and AI tools will be the smart move.
• 62% of Marketers Have Invested in AISalesforce research reveals that 62% of marketers have invested in AI to help them deliver more data-driven, personalized experiences.
• To put this number into better perspective, 90% have invested in a CRM system, while 89% have invested in an account-based marketing (ABM) platform.
• 90% of Marketers Use AI for Customer InteractionsWhen Salesforce asked marketers how they are using AI, the vast majority (90%) revealed they use it for automating customer interactions.
• A Quarter Will Use Interviews for the First TimeHubSpot’s research found that 25% of marketers plan to use interviews for the first time in 2023.
• Half Have a Web3 StrategyJust over half (51%) of marketers have a Web3 strategy in place.
• Of the 49% that don’t have a strategy yet, 46% plan to create one in the future.
• The average open rate across all industries is 80%, and the average click-through rate is 2.
• 6% Snippets Have a Very High CTR on Google Image and Videos Have Less of an Impact on CTRs in Google Than You’d Expect 91% of Brands Use Social Media What percent of marketing is digital?
• 95+ Mind-Blowing Digital Marketing Statistics to Learn From: (Statista) Buyers spend 138% more when marketed via email as compared to those who don’t receive email offers.
• 5% of brands say email marketing is critical to their company’s success and brand awareness.
• (GetResponse) Sales emails with 200-250 word length have the highest response rate of 19%.
• (Reply) 77% of B2B marketers utilize email marketing to drive sales and website visits.
• (SuperOffice) B2C email campaigns experience 8% more unique opens than B2B campaigns.
• (emfluence) Sending 3 abandoned cart emails results in 69% more orders than just one email.
• (Omninsend) Emails with personalized subject lines tend to generate 50% higher open rates.
• (Marketing Dive) 95% of marketing teams who use AI for email creation say it’s “effective,” and 54% rate it “very effective.
• (LinkedIn State of Sales Report) Social selling provides 45% more sales opportunities than traditional sales.
• (LinkedIn) Salespersons who use social selling close 40-50% more new business than those who don’t.
• (Sales for Life) IBM boosted its sales by 400% by implementing a social selling program.
• (IBM) 75% of B2B buyers utilize social networks (like Facebook and Instagram) to be more informed about vendors they’re interested in.
• (Startup Bonsai) About 70% of sales professionals use social selling tools for lead generation.
• 6% of online users between the ages of 16 and 24 prefer to use social media platforms for online brand research.
• (Hootsuite) 39% of B2B professionals say social selling reduces their lead search time, and 33% say it increases their leads.
• (Statista) 24% of retail purchases are expected to take place online by 2026.
• (Oberlo) China is the largest eCommerce market globally, generating almost 50% of the world’s transactions.
• (Statista) Nearly 9 out of 10 (88%) consumers read reviews when discovering a local business.
• (Podium) 52% of eCommerce consumers worldwide consider sustainability important.
• (Pew Research) Mobile commerce alone is expected to make up 44% of all eCommerce sales by 2024.
• (Insider Intelligence) More than 61% of Google Search visits come on mobile devices.
• (Statista) Over 90% of mobile phone users check their smartphones within the first hour of waking up.
• (BrightEdge) 60% of marketers consider inbound strategies (like SEO, blog content, etc.
• (HubSpot) SEO generates 1,000%+ more traffic compared to organic social media.
• (Backlinko) 39% of buyers are influenced by a relevant search when making a purchase.
• (Internet Live Stats) 28% of searches for local businesses result in a purchase.
• (Think With Google) 50% of search queries consist of 4 or more words (WordStream) “Where to buy” and “near me” mobile queries have experienced a growth of over 200% between 2017 and 2019.
• (HubSpot) 51% of businesses investing in content marketing publish content daily (The Manifest).
• A survey revealed that 44% of respondents consume 3 to 5 pieces of content on average before engaging with a vendor.
• (EarthWeb) 73% of respondents like to learn about a product or service through short-form videos.
• (Wyzowl) 81% of marketers consider content as a core business strategy.
• (CMI) Content marketing generates over 3 times as many leads as outbound marketing, costing 62% less.
• (Reuters) (SensorTower) Most B2B marketers try to stay ahead of the competition by focusing on content quality (83%) and covering untapped topics/stories (72%).
• (CMI) 87% of B2B and 65% of B2C marketers prioritize fulfilling their audience’s informational needs over-delivering sales or promotional messages.
• 5% of brands using it for their campaigns, Tiktok is the most popular platform for influencer marketing.
• (Influencer Marketing Hub) 70% of people prefer to get information from blogs rather than traditional advertisements.
• (Demand Metric) The most popular types of content formats are “how-to” articles, with a 77% preference among readers.
• Following closely are news and trends articles, which are favored by 49% of readers.
• (Statista) 70% of people have made a purchase from a brand after seeing it on YouTube.
• (Edison Research) Companies that apply inbound marketing tactics can generate 126% more leads than those that don’t.
• (Weave) 88% of consumers trust user reviews to the same extent as personal recommendations.
• (Invesp) 70% of individuals are willing to trust recommendations from unknown individuals, while 92% trust recommendations from peers.
• (Nielsen) 87% of consumers won’t use a business with less than a 3-star rating.
• (Retail Touchpoints) 96% of users actively seek out negative customer reviews.
• (PowerReviews) Testimonials can increase conversions on sales pages by 34%.
• (VWO) After reading a positive review about a company, 50% of consumers visit the company’s website, getting closer to making a purchase or joining their email list.
• (HubSpot) Customers are ready to spend 31% more on a business that has outstanding reviews.
• (Invesp) A one-star increase in Yelp rating results in a 5-9% increase in revenue.
• (Harvard Business School) 56% of users experience FOMO or “fear of missing out.
• (Zuko) Utilizing visual content such as videos on landing pages can result in an 86% improvement in conversions.
• (Eyeview) Approximately 74% of conversion rate optimization programs lead to increased sales.
• (MarketingSherpa) Personalized call-to-actions (CTAs) can potentially convert 42% more visitors than generic ones.
• (HubSpot) High-performing companies allocate at least 5% of their budget to Conversion Rate Optimization (CRO).
• (Adobe) Conducting A/B testing for landing page designs can increase conversions by 12%.
• (Blogging Wizard) Conversion rates increased by 77% for marketers who used marketing automation solutions.
• (VentureBeat) Even a 1-second delay in site speed can reduce conversions by up to 7%.
• (Akamai) Implementing multi-step forms in WordPress can lead to a significant increase of 300% in conversions.
• (Venture Harbour) Asking for telephone numbers in lead generation forms can cause a 5% decrease in conversions.
• (Unbounce) Marketers using optimization software witness an average boost of 30% in conversions.
• Top Digital Marketing Statistics & Insights Driving ROI in 2023: About 25% of marketers chose to put their marketing dollars into video — with podcasts coming in a distant second at 10%, and investments in images, blog posts, and case studies registering single-digit percentages.
• Comparatively, long-form videos ranging anywhere from 6 to 60+ minutes engage at rates from 36% down to 16%.
• Nearly 30% of marketers use social engagement as a benchmark for understanding content effectiveness, and 25% of primarily B2C marketers rely on influencer marketing to boost sales.
• About 42% of email recipients skim messages instead of reading them, which means messaging needs to be concise, relevant, and high-quality to get their attention.
• 1 What’s more, customers want a hyper-personalized experience — and 83% are willing to exchange their information to get it.
• About 42% of email recipients skim messages instead of reading them, which means messaging needs to be concise, relevant, and high-quality to get their attention.
• 1 — HubSpot State of Marketing 2023 Content marketing remains impactful The potential for an economic downturn in 2023 saw 55% of marketers rethinking their marketing strategies and 25% actively adjusting their marketing goals.
• Nearly half (46%) of marketers attribute better personal effectiveness and more successful plan strategies to these tools.
• As a result, 86% of marketers have adopted new strategies for reaching customers, including social media and targeted ads, universal identifiers, and contextual advertising.
• Content Marketing—Statistics, Evidence and Trends — 1827 Marketing: Companies using content marketing generated 97% more backlinks and landed 434% more search engine results pages (SERPs) than those that didn’t.
• It cost 62% less and resulted in 5X as many sales leads (SEMrush, 2019).
• 36% of enterprise marketers say they’ve shifted paid advertising budget dollars to content marketing in the last 12 months (Content Marketing Insititute/MarketingProfs, 2020).
• 98% of B2B marketers now believe that content performance justifies its cost (Walker Sands, 2019).
• A content marketing ROI case study by Tiger Fitness showed the got a 60% returning customer rate with video content marketing (Marketing Sherpa, 2017).
• 72% of marketers reported their business views content as a core business strategy (Content Marketing Institute/Informa Connect, 2020).
• 45% of marketers said that at least 50% of their campaigns are content-led (World Media Group, 2019).
• 48% of business buyers said they engaged with between three and five pieces of content before connecting with a salesperson.
• 30% said they consume five or more pieces of content before even engaging with a salesperson (Demand Gen Report, 2020).
• 52% of buyers said they were definitely more likely to buy from a vendor after reading its content (MarketingCharts, 2020).
• 70% of marketers said that SEO was better than PPC for generating sales (Databox, 2019).
• 67% stated that SEO is the most effective tactic they implemented in 2019.
• 51% considered updating existing content to be the second most effective tactic (SEMrush, 2019).
• 7%) in the UK have slashed their social media usage in the last 12 months.
• 29% cited feeling overloaded as their reason for deleting or suspending their social media account.
• 50% of marketers say that personalizing content and experiences is a key challenge for social media from now on (Hootsuite, 2019).
• Only 57% of personal emails are now being opened by recipients, while only 37% are viewed as being useful (Adobe, 2019).
• 27% of marketers report an average email open rate for bulk sends of only 11-15% (Validity, 2019).
• 72% of consumers now only engage with personalised marketing messages (SmartInsights, 2019).
• Triggered email open rates are 76% higher, on average than non-triggered email open rates (Epsilon, 2019).
• 86% of B2B marketers have used content marketing in the year to raise brand awareness (Content Marketing Institute, 2019).
• 81% of B2B respondents say they share business-related content with their LinkedIn network.
• 70% say they pass along content to peers and colleagues via email (Demand Gen Report, 2020).
• 63% of marketers have successfully used content marketing to build loyalty with existing customers in the past year (Content Marketing Institute/MarketingProfs, 2019).
• 74% of companies found that content marketing increased lead generation, both in quality and quantity (Curata, 2017).
• 1% higher quota attainment than those without a content strategy (CSO Insights, 2019).
• 88% of purchase decision-makers believed that thought leadership was effective in enhancing their perceptions of an organisation (Edelman, 2019).
• 49% of respondents used content marketing successfully in the last 12 months to generate sales/revenue (up from 39% reported in 2019) (Content Marketing Institute/MarketingProfs, 2020).
• 50% of marketers ranked the ability to understand and connect with the audience’s values, interests, and pain points as the top success factor for their strategy (Content Marketing Institute, 2020).
• 65% of B2B buyers cited vendor websites as one of their most highly influential content sources.
• 48% said third-party websites were the most important and 39% found third-party articles by independent publishers most influential (MarketingCharts, 2020).
• Over half (51%) of consumers say that email is the best way for brands to contact them (SmarterHQ, 2019).
• When asked how their content consumption habits have changed over the past 12 months, 51% of B2B buyers placed a higher emphasis on trustworthiness of the source.
• 44% prefer content optimised for mobile devices, 43% prefer content from industry influencers, 43% prefer shorter formats, 39% get more content from social/peers, and 34% prefer more interactive content (Demand Gen Report, 2020).
• Content marketing growth statistics show that 77% of marketers say that their company has a content marketing strategy.
• Meanwhile, 69% of successful B2B marketers now have a documented content marketing strategy (up from 62% in 2018).
• In 2020, the global artificial intelligence (AI) software market is expected to grow approximately 154% year-over-year (Statista, 2020).
• 75% of marketers say they use at least one type of marketing automation tools (Social Media Today, 2019).
• 51% of marketers agree that using more data to create customised content around their customer journey is a top priority for the next 12 months (Altimeter, 2019).
• 54% of B2B marketers use marketing automation software to assist them with their content marketing efforts.
• 75% of B2B marketers say marketing technology provides better insight into how content is performing (Content Marketing Institute/MarketingProfs, 2019).
• According to B2B marketers, the top advantages of marketing automation are improved user experience and relevance of communications (60%).
• Higher conversion rates (59%), better quality leads (57%), and generating more leads (57%) are other top advantages (Emailmonday, 2020).
• Top content formats B2B purchasers engage with during their buying process include video (65%), white papers (60%), blog posts (56%), webinars (54%), case studies (54%), research/survey reports (54%) and e-books (48%) (Demand Gen Report, 2020).
• Nearly 90% of marketers find repurposing content to be more effective (and cost-efficient) than creating new content from scratch.
• Video content marketing statistics show 95% of marketers say video has helped increase user understanding of their product or service.
• 68% of all B2B marketers say they’ve used content marketing successfully to build credibility with their audience (CMI).
• Law Firm SEO Stats 2024 (Actually Updated!) – On The Map Marketing: As per data from 2021 from Ruler Analytics (as you’ll see later in the article), search generates 66% of call conversion in the legal sector.
• 4% rate of seven channels (it was benchmarked against by Ruler Analytics).
• In a 2020 research by Brandmuscle, SEO was rated as the most effective channel by 79% of surveyed participants.
• 84% of their law firms planned to increase their spending on digital marketing technology and programs:However, law firm SEO is challenging.
• An analysis of 500 location-based websites by the Milestone Research department found that local and organic searches together make up to 69% of digital traffic:Paid search traffic dwarfs at 8% in comparison.
• Ruler Analytics 2021 analysis of 100M data points found that:Organic search generates 66% of the call conversion in the legal sector, Further, it had a conversion rate of over 4% compared with the overall 2.
• Only 27% of law firms maintain a blog, and a measly 5% of lawyers maintain a personal blog.
• Further, 46% of all bloggers state that clients retained their services because of their blogs.
• Site design (36%), search engine optimization (27%), and social media (24%) are among the tasks most likely to be handled by external marketing consultants.
• Only 46% of respondents in the ABA survey above reported having a marketing budget.
• 13% of respondents said that “no one” at their law firm is responsible for marketing in their firms.
• Then, it’s time to dedicate up to 15% of your revenue to marketing (depending on your business goals and current growth stage).
• However the overall utilization rate (as visible in the screenshot above) remains low at 31% — indicating an industry-wide problem faced by law firms.
• It found that:64% of organic clicks went to directories, review sites, and non law-firm websites, But 31% of all map clicks went to the firm’s website link, highlighting its importance.
• A Reboot Online 2020 study found that:A lack of internal linking (at 73%) and not investing in proper keyword research (at 67%) are the top two issues in law firm SEO, The next issues include incorrect page indexation, low-value thin content, and poor backlink profile.
• 58% of visitors looking for legal services come from paid search visits.
• iLawyerMarketing 2020 survey found that:85% of respondents prefer using Google as a primary source for research when looking for a lawyer, The majority would like to talk to three law firms before choosing a lawyer, And 98% would read online reviews of the attorney before hiring them.
• 5% of ranking pages from law firm sites use relatively recent and professional photos, WordPress is the default content management system, with 62.
• 2% of law firm sites on page 1 using it, Law firms that frequently update and add more content pull in 400% traffic than firms with inactive blogs.
• 29% of lawyers said a client retained their legal services due to social media use.
• The Good2bSocial 2021 Social Law Firm Index found that:100% of its surveyed law firms are on LinkedIn, and 75% had podcasts.
• 4% rate of seven channels (it was benchmarked against by Ruler Analytics).
• Australian SEO and Content Marketing Statistics [Updated 2023]: (Search Engine Journal) 75% of users never scroll past the first page of search results.
• (HubSpot) 88% of shoppers trust online reviews as much as personal recommendations.
• (New Media Campaigns) Including a video in a post increases organic traffic from search results by 157%.
• (US statistics) (Search Engine Land) Voice Search 57% of Australians use Voice Search (B&T) 20% of mobile queries are voice searches (Google) 16% to 20% of queries that get asked every day have never been asked before.
• (read-write) The number of voice queries increased by 3,400% between 2008 and 2017.
• (HubSpot, 2017) Google claims its voice recognition accuracy is now at 92%.
• (CNBC, 2018) Blogging 55% of marketers say blog content creation is their top inbound marketing priority.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 42% of companies have hired a designated content strategist executive.
• 52% Google continues to be the powerhouse of the search world and even increased its market share by around 1% in 2018.
• Bing on the other hand saw a decline of about 1% and new player DuckDuckGo is slowly making growth that’s worth keeping an eye on.
• 94% Even as Google moves to mobile-first indexing, the majority of Australian users are still on desktop.
• According to the Content Marketing Institute 2018 survey, 90% of Australian marketers use social media posts for marketing purposes with 56% of marketers agreeing that social media is the most effective in helping their organization achieve specific goals.
• Here’s the breakdown:Facebook:93%LinkedIn:87%Twitter:74%YouTube:64% Source:Content Marketing Institute The above groups of statistics clearly show why marketers are focusing on social media platforms and specifically Facebook.
• State of Visual Content Marketing:The Statistics | Crackitt: Marketing, SEO & Traffic 37% of marketers said visual marketing was the most important form of content for their business, second only to blogging (38%).
• 51% of B2B marketers prioritized creating visual content assets in 2016.
• 74% of social media marketers use visual assets in their social media marketing, ahead of blogs (68%) and videos (60%).
• Cisco projects that global internet traffic from videos will make up 80% of all internet traffic by 2019.
• 34% of B2C marketers say pre-produced video will be critical to content marketing success.
• Having a video on a landing page makes it 53% more likely to show up on page 1 of the SERP.
• Adding an explainer video on your landing page triggers 20% average conversion and a big bang of sales and engagement.
• The average CVR for websites using video is 8%, compared to 2.
• The 25-34 (millennial) age group watches the most online videos and men spend 40% more time watching videos on the internet than women.
• Researches show that coloured visuals increase people’s willingness to read a piece of content by 80%.
• Video 51% of marketing professionals worldwide name video as the type of content with the best ROI.
• 59% of executives agree that if both text and video are available on the same topic, they are more likely to choose video.
• 5% of marketers and small business owners who have used video marketing say it had a direct impact on their business.
• 62% of B2B marketers rated videos as an effective content marketing tactic.
• Viewers retain 95% of a message when they watch it in a video compared to 10% when reading it in a text.
• Email Using the word “video” in an email subject line boosts open rates by 19% and click-through rates by 65%.
• Live Video In 2016, 14% of marketers used live video as part of their social media marketing.
• Mobile Video 51% of all video plays are on mobile devices — this growth represents a 15% increase from 2015 and a 203% increase from 2014.
• Videos under five minutes in length account for 55% of total video consumption time on smartphones.
• 360 Degree Video 29% more people viewed a 360-degree video than the same video in traditional format.
• Infographics were the B2B content marketing tactic with the biggest increase in use, from 2015 to 2016, up from 50% to 58%.
• People following directions with text and illustrations do 323% better than people following directions without illustrations.
• Images When people hear information, they’re likely to remember only 10% of that information three days later.
• However, if a relevant image is paired with that same information, people retained 65% of the information three days later.
• Tweets with images receive 150% more retweets than tweets without images.
• 46% of marketers say that their current marketing and storytelling strategies are critically dependent on photography.
• Pinterest stats depict that 88% of consumers have purchased a product they pinned and 49% have purchased 4 or more products that they’ve pinned.
• Twitter 82% of Twitter users watch video content on Twitter 90% of Twitter video views happen on a mobile device.
• 50 Mobile Marketing Stats to Know for 2024 – Digital Examiner: 59% of mobile users report being as comfortable with mobile advertising as they are with other outlets such as TV.
• During the COVID-19 pandemic, Google ad conversions have fallen as much as 30% in the evening hours during times of increased coronavirus search activity.
• 40% of American adults report giving their child a cell phone by the age of 10.
• Mobile data traffic is expected to increase 25% from current levels by 2025.
• 94% of participants in a Facebook study held their smartphones while watching television.
• 75% of Americas admit to bringing their mobile phone into the bathroom.
• The amount of mobile data traffic is expected to grow by 700% between 2016 and 2021.
• 21% of millennials report accessing mobile apps at least 50 times per day.
• In fact, 90% of smartphone users report that they have not selected a particular brand whenever they perform a search for a new product or service.
• 60% of Google searches are performed from mobile devices, nearly double the volume from five years ago.
• This is clear when looking at the data which shows that 60% of Google searches are now performed from a mobile device.
• The likelihood of a local search resulting in an in-store visit increases by 35% when performed from a mobile device.
• With nearly 96% of all mobile search traffic, Google is far ahead of the next two competitors, Yahoo and Bing.
• By the year 2022, 69% of search ad growth will be from mobile (which will grow over time).
• 80% of shoppers have used a mobile device while shopping inside a physical store to look up product information.
• 59% of shoppers prefer to frequent stores that offer a mobile shopping experience.
• 90% of buyers report that an excellent mobile experience is likely to convince them to make a repeat purchase from the same company.
• An excellent mobile experience is also likely to convince up to 90% of buyers to return for another purchase.
• 79% of smartphone users report having made a purchase online with their device within the last 6 months.
• Data shows that nearly 80% of smartphone users have made a mobile purchase in the last 6 months and are therefore likely to do so again in the future.
• Recent metrics show that 55% of all online visits to websites from major consumer verticals were from smartphones.
• 88% of smartphone users report increasing their use of mobile coupons over the last 3 years.
• Nearly 90% of smartphone users have used digital coupons on their mobile devices within the last few years, a statistic that highlights just how popular they have become.
• 71% of teenagers watch an average of over 3 hours of videos online daily.
• Using video content for marketing campaigns can grow revenue 49% faster than non-video campaigns.
• It is clear why this is the case when you look at the data that shows marketing with video can grow revenue up to 50% faster than other means.
• The fact that over 70% of YouTube video content is accessed through mobile devices shows how convenient streaming video has become.
• With over 90% of mobile users actively sharing video content with others, it is possible to get a very wide reach from a single clip that goes viral.
• Of the 4 billion active users on social media, 99% of them access websites through their mobile device.
• Pinterest is the most active social media network on mobile, with 64% of traffic coming from mobile devices.
• With 20% of leading websites still not optimized for mobile devices, this represents a massive missed opportunity for additional traffic.
• Manufacturing Content Marketing Benchmarks and Statistics to Improve Your 2023 Strategy: 8% in 2022, there’s no denying the total number of online retail sales is still impressive at $1.
• 3% of companies in June 2020 saw and understood the importance of content marketing.
• In 2022, that number hit 78% for companies in the manufacturing industry.
• 52% of manufacturing marketers agree videos provided the best results in the last 12 months.
• Among the various video formats used, 53% of surveyed marketers said how-to videos, such as product explainers and instructional videos, produced the best content marketing results.
• 94% of marketers agree that video content has increased their audience’s understanding of their products, making them more inclined to make a purchase.
• Short articles and posts 83% of surveyed marketers agree that short articles and posts (fewer than 3,000 words) ranked as the best content in 2021.
• 43% of manufacturing marketers reported short articles and posts were the most result-producing content.
• In another Content Marketing Report for 2022, 30% of surveyed bloggers, marketers, and business owners concluded that producing quality blog content is essential for establishing credibility with potential customers.
• Virtual events, webinars, and online courses In 2021, 70% of manufacturing marketers hosted virtual events, webinars, or online courses.
• 35% of surveyed marketers agreed these online events were the best video format to publish.
• The most used owned media platforms in 2021 were:Organization’s website (92%):On your website, you can promote your content, products and services, and virtual events.
• Email newsletters (74%):Email newsletters are a great way to distribute your content to subscribed users and provide them with valuable knowledge and tools.
• Emails other than newsletters (63%):Messages such as promotional and retention emails can distribute your content, reward engaged subscribers with special offers, or showcase new products and services.
• The top three earned media channels for manufacturing companies in 2021 were:Media/public relations (61%):Builds brand awareness and amplifies your brand.
• Speaking/presenting at events (51%):Getting a shout-out during a presentation circulates your content to a direct audience.
• Collaborative social spaces (27%):These shared spaces promote collaboration and learning and make transferring knowledge more accessible.
• Guest posts and articles in third-party publications came in a close fourth with 26%, followed by influencer partnerships with 24% (CMI).
• Content Marketing Metrics and Performance According to the 2022 Manufacturing Content Marketing Report, 75% of manufacturing marketers surveyed said their organization measures content performance.
• The report lists website traffic (73%), website engagement (69%), and email engagement (67%) as the top three ways to measure content marketing distribution and performance.
• Content That Builds Brand Awareness and Trust In 2021, the top goal for 88% of surveyed manufacturing marketers was to create brand awareness, followed by gaining credibility and trust with customers (67%) and educating their audience (63%).
• It’s no surprise 85% of manufacturing companies said they were going to invest in video in 2022 (Wyzowl).
• Changes to (SEO)/search algorithms (62%) and data management/analytics (62%) have been key focuses for manufacturing marketers.
• 53 Essential Telstra Stats and Facts:Revenue, Market Share and Employees – Learn Digital Marketing: Australia’s government once owned 100% of the telecommunications company Telstra.
• Telstra is the number one mobile network provider in Australia, with a market share of 44%.
• Today it retains a staggering 44% market share following the finalization of privatization back in 2011.
• 19 Mind-Blowing SEO Stats To Improve Your Inbound Marketing – Growbo: GeneralSEO Stat #1:40% of Online Shoppers Start a Product Search With a Search Engine (Statista)Recent findings from Statista suggest that search engines are the most popular way for online consumers to discover a product or service.
• SEO Stat #2:Organic Search Accounts for 53% of All Web Traffic (BrightEdge)Display ads, paid search, and social are nothing compared to the juggernaut that is organic SEO.
• To put that into perspective, the next most dominant source of traffic is “Other” — which only makes up 27% of all traffic.
• SourceSEO Stat #3:SEO Provides the Highest-Quality Leads for 60% of Sales Teams (HubSpot)A 2018 global report from HubSpot shed light on how useful SEO is for sales teams.
• According to the survey findings, 60% of sales teams say that, among a few other things, their best leads come from content/blog articles.
• SourceSEO Stat #4:Google Has a 92% Search Engine Market Share (Statcounter)It’s no secret that Google has a near monopoly in search engine market share.
• As of March 2022, Statcounter finds that 92% of all internet searches are done through Google.
• 63% of All Content Gets Zero Traffic Through Google (Ahrefs)Ahrefs, an SEO-obsessed company that offers, you guessed it, SEO tools, did a little analysis on over one billion pages.
• SourceSEO Stat #7:94% of Blog Posts Have No External Links (Backlinko)So since Google likes content with backlinks, you’d think everyone would be adding plenty of hyperlinks in their content, right?
• Well, it turns out that 94% of blog posts don’t even have a single external link, according to Backlinko (fitting name, right?
• SEO Stat #8:69% of Marketers See Positive Results Stem From Link-Building (Aira)When Aira surveyed 253 marketers back in 2021, about 7 out of 10 of them said that building links improves their organic search rankings.
• 5% of Marketing Teams Outsource Their Link-Building (uSERP)Link-building doesn’t exactly happen overnight.
• No wonder over 60% of marketing teams use agencies, contractors, and freelancers to carry out their link-building efforts, as reported by uSERP.
• 60% of All Clicks Come From the Top Five Search Results (Advanced Web Ranking)Advanced Web Ranking’s research indicates that any time someone clicks on a search result, there’s a nearly 7 out of 10 chance they’ll click on one of the first five results they see.
• 1% of All Searches Use Question Keywords (Backlinko)When people have a question, they often go to Google for an answer.
• 82% of Search Inquiries End Without a Click (SparkToro)SparkToro analyzed 5.
• 48% of desktop Google searches resulted in zero clicks, that number is up to 77.
• com’s survey of 1,250 online shoppers — where 53% of respondents said they expect e-commerce pages to load in 3 seconds or less.
• SEO Pro OpinionsSEO Stat #16:36% of SEO Experts Deem Title Tags as the Most Important Factor in SEO (Databox)According to survey results from Databox, over a third of marketing professionals say that the title tag is more influential than any other SEO factor.
• SourceSEO Stat #17:75% of Marketers Believe SEO Is Helping Them Meet Their Goals (HubSpot)Marketers today are quite confident that their SEO strategy is working — with 3 out 4 of them telling HubSpot that their SEO efforts are helping them with their marketing goals.
• 3% of SEO Pros Struggle Proving ROI (GoodFirms)Trying to prove that SEO produces business results is difficult.
• 3% of them said a top challenge of theirs is proving ROI to stakeholders.
• SourceSEO Stat #19:70% of SEO Pros Prefer SEO Over PPC (Databox)70% of the SEO professionals that Datbox surveyed stated that SEO is more effective than PPC when it comes to driving sales.
• Top Digital Marketing Data [Q2 2022 Stats]: Interest was so high that from 2022 to 2023, topics on learning about AI increased by 550%, according to an analysis we conducted of over 15,500 news articles and blogs.
• 5%Sample:4,420 respondentsSource:Hootsuite Social Media Consumer 2024 Survey AI is inevitable on social, and scaling back on its use now would be like reverting from computers to typewriters.
• The majority (60%) of organizations have a presence there, but only a third of them feel strongly that it benefits their business—which might explain the 7% drop in brand use.
• views, 49% followers, 43% clicks/traffic, 21% leads, 14% sales/revenue, 4% time spent on site/app, 3% sentiment, 3% share of voice, 2% pipeline, 2% survey-based brand awareness.
• Interest was so high that from 2022 to 2023, topics on learning about AI increased by 550%, according to an analysis we conducted of over 15,500 news articles and blogs.
• The majority (60%) of organizations have a presence there, but only a third of them feel strongly that it benefits their business-which might explain the 7% drop in brand use.
• views, 49% followers, 43% clicks/traffic, 21% leads, 14% sales/revenue, 4% time spent on site/app, 3% sentiment, 3% share of voice, 2% pipeline, 2% survey-based brand awareness.
• The Local Digital Marketing Stats Every Franchise Brand Must Know: 89% of people search for a local business on their smartphone at least once a week.
• Customers are 70% more likely to purchase a product when a company utilizes retargeting.
• 72% of consumers that did a local search visited a store within five miles.
• 86% of customers are looking for local business information on large search and social channels.
• The User-Generated Content Marketing Stats You Need to Know in 2022 – TINT Blog: (State of User-Generated Content)76% of consumers have purchased a product because of someone else’s recommendation before.
• (State of User-Generated Content)72% of consumers believe that reviews and testimonials submitted by customers are more credible than the brand talking about their products.
• (State of User-Generated Content)62% of consumers report that they are more likely to click on content like ads, websites, social posts, or emails, that feature customer photos rather than an image created by the brand.
• (State of User-Generated Content)60% of consumers wish that more brands would tell their fans and customers what type of content they want them to create.
• (State of User-Generated Content)72% of users will accept a brand’s request to use their content, meaning people are excited to participate when brands ask them for rights to repurpose their content.
• (State of User-Generated Content)64% of consumers have tagged a brand or used a hashtag on social media before.
• (State of User-Generated Content)63% of consumers believe that visual testimonials are more credible than written testimonials.
• (State of User-Generated Content)62% of consumers report that they are more likely to click on content like ads, websites, social posts, or emails, that feature customer photos rather than an image created by the brand.
• (State of User-Generated Content)Social media users increased by more than 13% from 2020 to 2021, with nearly a half billion new users joining.
• (State of User-Generated Content)Email Content Marketing StatsWhen emails contain user-generated content, click-through rates increase by about 73% and produce more conversions.
• 20% of retail, e-commerce, and consumer goods and services companies are personalizing emails based on gender, race, ethnicity.
• Marketers who use segmented campaigns note as much as a 760% increase in revenue.
• Using user-generated content in social media ads can reduce cost-per-click (CPC) by 50%.
• (State of User-Generated Content)Web Content StatsThere has been an increase of 29% in web conversions when websites featured user-generated content.
• Websites with featured user content saw a 20% increase in return visitors.
• Additionally, these websites recorded a 90% increase in time spent on-site.
• 49% of marketers agree that the metaverse will impact their brand and marketing strategies in 2022.
• (State of User-Generated Content)45% of consumers agree that they would unfollow a brand due to too much self-promotion.
• (State of User-Generated Content)78% of consumers feel that they can tell when a brand is advertising to them.
• (State of User-Generated Content)71% of marketers plan on showing more diversity, inclusivity, and accessibility in their content in the future.
• (State of User-Generated Content)72% of consumers believe that reviews and testimonials submitted by customers are more credible than the brand talking about their products.
• (State of User-Generated Content)76% of consumers have purchased a product because of someone else’s recommendation before.
• (State of User-Generated Content) 75% of consumers report that they are likely to search for reviews and testimonials before making a purchase.
• Pre-COVID, 46-85% of socially-engaged travelers used their smartphones for researching airfare, hotel rooms, vacation packages, or in-destination activities, and social content influenced their conversion rates.
• 70 – 80% of travelers also want to book travel that has flexibility when it comes to canceling or rebooking.
• EmailWhen emails contain UGC, click-through rates increase by about 73%.
• Digital AdvertisingConsumers are 62% more likely to click on customer content rather than branded content and are 4-6x more likely to purchase from purpose-driven companies.
• 102 Surprising Digital Marketing Statistics for 2023: Over 70% of internet users prefer quality content over any form of advertising to get information about a product or service.
• Over 60% of businesses increased their online marketing spending in 2022.
• On average, businesses put around 5-15% (small to large companies) of their revenue towards budgets for digital marketing in 2022.
• According to a study by MarketingSherpa, 68% of B2B businesses have not identified or measured their conversion rates.
• A study by Econsultancy reveals that a 1-second delay in page load time can lead to a 7% reduction in conversions.
• A report by Adobe shows that personalization can increase conversion rates by up to 202%.
• Organic Search (SEO) 49% of businesses receive their highest traffic and ROI from organic search.
• The largest search engine Google holds over 92% of the global search engine market share.
• Around 53% of all web traffic generates from search engines (organic search).
• Over 60% of marketers believe that SEO is still the best way to generate traffic and leads to a website.
• Over 75% of all Google users never go to page two when searching for something on Google.
• Over 45% of all Google searches are from people looking for a local product or service.
• The page ranking in the 1st position of Google SERP for any keywords has an average CTR of 31%.
• Blogging More than 50% of marketers consider blogging still relevant and one of their top content marketing strategies.
• Businesses with a blog tend to get around 55% more traffic to their main websites.
• More than 57% of all businesses that have a blog have earned at least one customer through their blog.
• Over 68% of people find it easy to trust a business/website with a blog.
• 53% of digital marketers believe this is the best strategy for inbound marketing 1 out of 10 blog posts increases their organic traffic over a duration of time Compounding blog posts are able to generate 10% of more revenue and 38% more audience Companies posting 16+ blogs per month get 3.
• A study by Nielsen found that podcast listeners are highly engaged with the content they listen to, with 80% of respondents saying they listen to all or most of each episode.
• A report by Podcast Insights shows that podcast listeners are educated, affluent, and influential, with 51% of monthly listeners having an annual household income of $75,000 or more.
• According to a study by Midroll, 61% of podcast listeners report having purchased a product or service they heard about on a podcast.
• Social Media & Reviews Consumers tend to spend almost 50% more with brands that respond to online reviews and comments on social media.
• Over 90% of people will search online and/or read reviews of a brand before making a purchase from it.
• Social media marketing accounted for over 30% of all digital advertising spending in 2022.
• On average, around 15% of the marketing budget of a business goes to social media.
• As of 2022, over 90% of businesses were using social media as a part of their marketing campaigns.
• According to HubSpot, content with relevant images gets 94% more views than content without relevant images.
• A report by Venngage shows that 45% of marketers believe that visual content is their most important type of content.
• According to a study by Cisco, by 2022, 82% of all internet traffic will be video content.
• A report by Social Media Examiner found that 80% of marketers use visual assets in their social media marketing and that visuals are the most commonly used type of content on social media.
• YouTube Let’s discuss the statistics of digital marketing that demonstrate the importance of Youtube:According to HubSpot, content with relevant images gets 94% more views than content without relevant images.
• Source:viralwoot A report by Venngage shows that 45% of marketers believe that visual content is their most important type of content.
• According to a study by Cisco, by 2022, 82% of all internet traffic will be video content.
• A report by Social Media Examiner found that 80% of marketers use visual assets in their social media marketing and that visuals are the most commonly used type of content on social media.
• Clickthrough Rate Check out some more online marketing statistics that show the value of clickthrough rate (CTR):The average CTR for Google Ads across all industries is around 18%.
• 7%, while the average CTR for the top organic result on the desktop is 19.
• According to a study by OptinMonster, a high-converting landing page typically has a CTR of 20% or higher.
• Marketing Analytics Here are some digital marketing facts that give an idea about the importance of marketing analytics:Over 60% of marketers use some kind of CRM software for generating their digital marketing industry reports.
• A study by Forrester Research found that companies that are adept at data-driven marketing are six times more likely to achieve an annual revenue growth rate of 15% or more.
• Poor quality content and bad layout are the two main reasons why over 38% of users leave a website immediately after opening it.
• Adblocking Here are some internet marketing statistics that demonstrate the vital role of adblocking:According to a survey by eMarketer, in 2022, 27% of internet users in the US are expected to use ad-blocking software on at least one of their devices.
• According to a survey by HubSpot, 64% of users say they find ads annoying and intrusive, and 84% have left a website because of an intrusive or irrelevant ad.
• A study by PageFair found that 30% of internet users in the US use ad-blocking software because they feel that there are too many ads on websites.
• According to a study by GlobalWebIndex, 47% of consumers say they use ad-blocking software because they want to protect their privacy and security online.
• Blogging Here is the list of digital marketing statistics that show the value of blogging:According to a study by HubSpot, businesses that blog receive 97% more backlinks to their website than businesses that don’t blog.
• A study by Sprout Social found that 90% of consumers say they use social media to communicate directly with brands.
• According to a study by Pew Research Center, 69% of adults in the US use social media.
• After social media (89%), email marketing is the most popular marketing channel in terms of the percentage of all businesses that use it (87%).
• Paid Advertising Here are online advertising statistics that help you to analyze the significance of paid advertising:With a 200% ROI, PPC (pay-per-click) is among the most successful digital marketing strategies in terms of return on investment.
• Digital advertising on Google and social media can increase brand awareness by up to 80%.
• Using a retargeting ad can increase the probability of a successful purchase by up to 70%.
• Google Ads is the primary source of income for Google and accounts for almost 96% of the search giant’s revenue.
• Google Ads has a very high average conversion rate of over 80% across all industries.
• Digital Coupon Marketing – Statistics and Trends [Infographic] – Invesp: 5% of US internet users have redeemed a digital coupon or code at least once in 2016 and is expected to reach 59% by 2016.
• Approximately 40% of smartphone users will redeem a mobile coupon at some point during 2016.
• 19 visual Content Marketing Statistics to Know in 2024 – TrueList: (Smart Things) People remember only 10% of what they heard three days later.
• (LucidPress) 50% of creators spend less than five hours a week on visual content.
• (Relevance) 82% of all global consumer internet traffic will be video in 2022.
• (Forbes) 95% of B2B customers evaluate a company based on visual content.
• (Ziflow) 41% of marketers post visual content two to five times a week.
• (Venngage) 40% of marketers say Covid-19 changed their video strategies.
• And not only that, 90% of all information transmitted to the brain is visual, and the brain processes this type of information 60,000 times faster than text.
• But, add to that a related and relevant image, and the retention rate grows to as much as 65%.
• It’s no wonder then that visual content marketing statistics suggest that anywhere from 51% to 80% of businesses are very invested in visuals.
• 50% of marketers report spending less than five hours per week making visuals.
• 22% dedicate between five and 10 hours a week to visual content, while 29% spend between over 10 and more than 20 hours.
• Most of them use video as the main medium but still 67% use illustrations or photos and 59% love infographics.
• What’s more, some 62% said that ebooks and whitepapers were most effective while 47% claimed that case studies bring the best results.
• It’s no wonder then that Facebook posts from brands that featured images got 87% of all engagements.
• Visual content statistics further show that over at LinkedIn, images, as a rule, get a 98% higher number of comments.
• As for Twitter, tweets with images get a massive 150% more retweets than those without, as well as 18% more clicks.
• 70% of companies invest in the creation of visual marketing strategies.
• Around 25% of marketers use content creation for the promotion of products and mainly use video as a medium.
• Only 20%, however, use branded storytelling as a content creation strategy, digital marketing statistics show.
• This is important because everyone is on the go since for example, 90% of videos on Twitter are played on mobile devices and 85% of people use multiple devices at once.
• This is why 73% of videos are two minutes or shorter, to relay their message fast and not lose the battle with our ever-decreasing attention span.
• Visual content statistics show that 58% of consumers report that the stories have piqued their interest in a product or brand.
• Around 70% said they watch Facebook Stories more than Instagram or Snapchat.
• 8% of all Facebook advertising revenue, marking a significant increase from the 13.
• 5% more likely to get conversions if your own customers are making it, visual content marketing statistics show.
• 95% of B2B customers create an opinion and evaluate a company based on its visual content.
• Up to 86% of B2B companies did not create the content themselves choosing to outsource the job to other teams or digital marketing agencies and another 30% chose to outsource the distribution of their own content.
• 40% of content creators report that Covid changed their video-making strategies for 2020.
• Visual content marketing stats show that up to 91% of marketers are happy with the video ROI with the medium having overtaken other types of visual content such as infographics and blog content as the leading form of visual marketing.
• 41% of content creators post visuals between two and five times a week.
• Just over a quarter of marketers post visuals between five and 10 times a week, while 17% do so even more times, visual content marketing stats confirm.
• 62% of marketers use visuals primarily as part of blog content or landing pages.
• Social media follows, with the social media visual content distribution analysis by platform looking like this:49% use visuals for Facebook 47% use visuals for Instagram 42% use visuals for LinkedIn 33% use visuals for Twitter.
• Then, 43% of marketers use visuals for print and other types of branding.
• Reports further show that tutorials introduced in VR have a 36% better recall rate compared to classic YouTube tutorials.
• This is why revenue from shopping ads on the platform grew by a full 100% in 2019, according to visual marketing statistics.
• Social media marketing statistics also show that pins featuring products and services in action are 67% more likely to generate sales, further underscoring the importance of visual content.
• At least that’s what 50% of viewers in this age bracket do, according to visual content stats.
• 17% of content marketers spend more than five hours a week creating and distributing infographics.
• Up to 90% of everything that is received by the human brain during one day is visual.
• In fact, our attention is driven by images and content with visuals gets 94% more views than content without, according to visual content stats.
• Marketing trends show the growth of visuals to almost a complete 100% in almost half of the surveyed marketers.
• For 2020 alone, respondents reported using visual content in 91% to100% of their content.
• 23% of marketers meanwhile said they used visuals in 70% to 90% of their content.
• Up to 91% have stated that, according to visual content marketing statistics.
• Content Marketing Roi Statistics [Fresh Research] • Gitnux: Content Marketing ROI:The Most Important Statistics 71% of B2B buyers read blog content before purchasing from a brand80% of content created by marketing teams goes unused by sales.
• 65% of marketers cannot quantitatively demonstrate the impact of their marketing efforts.
• See the best Content Marketing Software 80% of content created by marketing teams goes unused by sales.
• 65% of marketers cannot quantitatively demonstrate the impact of their marketing efforts.
• For 35% of marketers, understanding the ROI of their campaigns is either very or extremely important.
• For the largest percentage of marketers (38%), content development is the best local link-building strategy that generates the highest ROI.
• Although 83% of marketers use metrics to measure the performance of content, only 51% understand how their content is performing, and the remaining 17% either don’t use metrics or don’t know if metrics are tracked.
• Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional advertising and generates 3x more leads.
• Check out our latest Content Marketing Statistics Supplementary Statistics 89% of content marketers say content marketing generates more leads than traditional marketing methods.
• On average, content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates three times more leads.
• B2B companies that blog generate 67% more leads per month than those that don’t.
• Small businesses with blogs generate 126% more leads than those without.
• 80% of businesses believe their content marketing efforts are effective.
• 47% of B2B buyers consume three to five pieces of content before engaging with a salesperson.
• 68% of consumers feel more positive about a brand after consuming content from it.
• 70% of people would rather learn about a company through an article than an advertisement.
• 88% of B2B marketers use content marketing in their marketing strategies.
• 92% of marketers report their organization views content as a business asset.
• 57% of marketers say they’ve gained new customers specifically through blogging.
• 22% of content marketers don’t know what their content marketing ROI is.
• Content marketing leads to a 97% increase in click-through rate and a 13-time increase in ROI compared to traditional marketing tactics.
• 75% of content marketers are optimizing their emails for mobile devices, resulting in higher ROI.
• 30 Impressive Infor Stats and Facts:Usage, Employees and Revenue – Learn Digital Marketing: Only 1% of today’s businesses have no cloud infrastructure whatsoever, proving the incredible importance of ERP.
• 8 years Around 40% of Infor employees are female, whilst around 60% are male The average Infor employee is White (57%), whilst Asian and Latinx employees make up 26% of the company’s employee roster (13% each).
• London Digital marketing manager salary stats | How Much Does a Digital marketing manager in London Make? | Adzuna: 3% more than the average national salary for Digital marketing manager jobs.
• 100+ Social Media Statistics to Know in 2024 – The Loop Marketing Inc: Contents Toggle Social Media StatisticsFacebook StatisticsX StatisticsInstagram StatisticsLinkedIn StatisticsYouTube StatisticsTikTok StatisticsSnapchat Statistics Social Media Statistics The total number of social media users only grew 3% YOY from 2022 to 2023.
• 94% of marketers repurpose their content across various social media platforms.
• Facebook’s popularity with teenagers has dropped from 71% in 2015 to 32% in 2022.
• 33% of Americans get their news from Facebook, making it the dominant social media news source.
• 82% of B2B content marketers who use social media distribute content on X.
• And while you probably scroll LinkedIn a lot less than the big three (X, Facebook, Instagram), LinkedIn generates leads 227% more effectively than Facebook and Twitter.
• A majority of LinkedIn users (80%) are those driving business decisions.
• Most (94%) of people using a streaming service on their television watch a YouTube video.
• 70% of YouTube viewers say they have purchased a product after seeing a YouTube ad about said product.
• Over 75% of people aged 13-34 in the US, UK, Australia, France, and the Netherlands use Snapchat.
• 47 game-changing digital marketing statistics to accelerate growth in 2022 – GoVisually: Email Get Started Content marketing statistics 46% of B2B marketers planned to increase the money spent on marketing content in 2020 vs.
• the previous year (Statista) According to 87% of marketers, content marketing helped meet their brand awareness goals in 2020 (Statista) User-generated content on Facebook affected up to 26.
• This amount of time has increased from 1 hour 46 minutes in 2019 (eMarketer)According to 94% of video marketers, video has helped increase user understanding of their product and service (Wyzowl)Out of all the types of content, B2B brands collaborate with influencers.
• Email marketing statistics87% of marketers use email marketing to spread information about their business (Content Marketing Institute) The average email open rates are 18%, and click-through rates are 2.
• 96% of worldwide traffic comes from Google Images, Google Search, and Google Maps (Sparktoro) The top result in Google’s organic search results has an average CTR of 31.
• 2%) felt that they were not prepared for it (LinkDoctor) About 45% of shoppers worldwide buy online and then pick up from the store (Think With Google) Key takeaway:Search Engine Optimization (SEO) is one of the most beneficial investments you can make for your business when it comes to marketing.
• 5% of the budget for their marketing was devoted to mobile marketing (Statista) Mobile banner advertising is projected to reach approximately 152.
• Visual Social Media and Content Marketing Statistics 2024: Did you know people remember around 70% of what they see & hear (videos), as opposed to only 20% of what they hear (audio) and 30% of what they see (images)?
• Landing pages with video lead to 800% more conversions (FunnelScience).
• 96% of B2B Companies planned to use video in their content marketing in 2023.
• 74% of marketers believe that content adorned with visuals will reap better business results.
• Stats roundup:How social media marketing has changed after Covid-19: Global ad spend on Facebook and Instagram grew 43% year-on-year in Q3 2021 Global ad spend across Facebook and Instagram is soaring in the wake of the pandemic, according to new data found in Emplifi’s State of Social Media and CX Q3 2021 report.
• Analysis indicates that combined spend on these platforms grew by 43% year-on-year during Q3 2021, matching the peak seen in 2020’s golden quarter.
• Sixty percent of US B2B marketers now use Instagram, up from 30% in 2020 A summer 2021 report from US advertising agency SageFrog has found sixty percent of B2B marketers in the region now use Instagram as part of their marketing mix.
• This figure is up from just 30% reported mid-way through 2020, demonstrating the power social media advertising, particularly that which is image and video-based, has had throughout the pandemic.
• Unsurprisingly, LinkedIn remained the most implemented social platform by the B2B companies surveyed and has been used by 86% of these brands in the past year.
• Seventy-nine percent also use Facebook, ranking it second, while a further 60% regularly use Twitter for their marketing communications.
• Aside from Instagram’s recent rise in popularity amongst this demographic, YouTube has also gained traction, with an additional 20% of respondents using the platform compared to last year, bringing the current total to 56%.
• In particular, branding has become a more highly-prioritised area of investment, with 27% of respondents increasing their spend in this area for 2021 versus 17% in 2020.
• Social CPM grew 41% year-on-year in Q2 2021 Data from Skai reveals global social CPM grew 41% year-on-year in Q2 2021 to an average of $6.
• Total social ad spend rose 41% on the same quarter a year before – the most badly-affected period throughout the pandemic – but increased just 3% on a quarter-on-quarter basis.
• Meanwhile, ad spend on campaigns designed to grow brand awareness, traffic and reach shot up 114%, driven by a 62% increase in CPM, demonstrating a shift away from campaigns that target direct action from consumers.
• It predicts total social advertising spend will grow by 10% as of the end of 2021, rising further to 12% in 2022.
• Growth rate of Facebook MAUs and ad revenue continues to slow as life returns to ‘normal’ Facebook’s Q3 2021 financial statement shows the growth rate of Monthly Active Users (MAUs) on Facebook continues to slow, rising just 6% on the same period the year before to hit 2.
• Family Monthly Active People (MAP) grew 12% year-on-year, matching the rate of growth reported a quarter earlier in Q2 2021, and indicating engagement remains stable across Facebook’s wider offering of social and messaging apps.
• Despite a gradual decline in Facebook usership, total ad revenue rose by 33% over the three months to September, it remains several percentage points above pre-pandemic levels of growth.
• While, again, this third quarter figure represents a slowdown from the 50%+ figures revealed in Q2, this is in line with the company’s expectations that it would “decelerate significantly on a sequential basis as we lap periods of increasingly strong growth.
• This figure is up from an average 2 billion searches per month in 2016 – or a 150% increase – according to Social Media Today.
• The number of searches per Pinner, according to analysis, has increased 31% year-on-year for those in the Gen Z age category, while the overall number of searches made by this demographic rose 96%.
• These results are reflective of a sharp increase in Monthly Active Users over the past year, up 30% to 478 million by the first quarter of 2021 as consumers found themselves with more time to search for inspiration and for their next online purchase.
• Indeed, data Pinterest released in April 2021 shows searches for ‘vacations’ rose 75% in March 2021, three times faster than the average search volume for the month across the last 2 years.
• Meanwhile, there was an 85% increase in searches for ‘outfits’ April compared to April 2020, and interest in ‘home renovation’ in Q1 2021 was 65% higher than in Q1 2019.
• Findings from an IPA report confirmed that the social media platform more than doubled its reach to 15-24 year olds throughout the initial coronavirus lockdown, up from 14% to 30%.
• 35% of TikTok users have watched less TV and content from streaming services since downloading the app We Are Social’s 2022 trends report, titled Think Forward 2022, revealed 35% of TikTok users have watched less TV and content from streaming services since they downloaded the app.
• So far, 30% of those aged 18-34 that took part in the study said they use social media with their volume up more now than they did before Covid-19, highlighting a renewed relationship between content and sound that brands should to take note of.
• This is particularly true for the youngest cohort studied for the report – Gen Z – 43% of whom agree that algorithms are having a negative impact on their ‘media diet’.
• 3% year-on-year at the height of the 2020 holiday season SocialBakers’ Q4 2020 Social Media Trends report found that global social media ad spend grew 50.
• 3% year-on-year during the peak of the 2020 holiday season (Around mid-December), rising to a massive 92.
• Across nine different sectors analysed, average social spend increased by 33% in Q4 2020 compared to levels seen the quarter before.
• Globally, CPC rose 9% year-on-year at the highest point of the golden quarter in 2020, while average CPC across key industries grew 27.
• There was a particularly large increase in CPC for ads placed in the Facebook News Feed, climbing 12% since Q4 2019 to $0.
• Furthermore, close to a fifth (17%) of consumers purposely turn to social apps for shopping.
• Of those that do, 35% cited convenience as a key purchase driver, while 26% also said they liked how quick it is to check out.
• However, more than half (57%) admitted to neglecting online security by not always reviewing third party ratings for the websites they were purchasing from.
• Fifty-eight percent of respondents claimed they were dissatisfied with their purchases and 38% were in the process of trying to process a refund or return of such items.
• Worryingly, with more than half (54%) failing to check the refund/returns policies of social retailers, just one-fifth said they have received a full refund via the method with which they first paid and 88% said they have been left out of pocket for at least one purchase.
• 3bn Research conducted by IAB and TikTok for Business found creator marketing in Europe grew 14% year-on-year in 2020 to reach €1.
• Data shows that creator marketing growth is slowing, the 2020 figure of 14% is down from 38.
• 4% in 2019 and nearly 50% in 2018, however the amount of investment in this format has almost tripled in the last three years.
• Additional analysiss from WARC suggests that up to 45% of marketers now use the short-form video app for campaigns, marking TikTok the second most preferred platform for influencer marketing behind Facebook.
• Snap DAUs rise 23% year-on-year in Q3 2021, marking fourth consecutive quarter of >20% growth Snap has once again seen rapid growth in revenue and Daily Active Users (DAUs) as we move into the latter half of 2022.
• In a Q3 2021 financial statement, the social media company reported it was able to match the ‘record’ DAU growth rate it achieved in the quarter prior, and mark four consecutive quarters of >20% growth in the metric.
• This quarter’s 23% uplift equates to an extra 57 million users engaging with the app daily compared to the same period the year before.
• Ad revenue remained high – up 57% year-on-year – but shows signs of slowing from the 66% and 116% increases it saw in Q1 and Q2 of 2021, respectively.
• A July 2021 survey found 7% of marketers plan to increase their budget for TikTok influencer marketing campaigns A July 2021 report from SocialPubli, titled The State of TikTok Influencer Marketing 2021 indicates 53.
• 7% of marketers plan to increase their budget for TikTok influencer marketing campaigns in 2021, after the social app has seen explosive growth over the last 18 months.
• Data shows nearly 88% of marketers agree TikTok influencer marketing is effective as part of their wider digital and social marketing strategies.
• Part of this could be down to superior audience engagement on TikTok – 87% of influencers that use a multiple platforms told the study that they had recorded higher levels of engagement on the short-form video app than on other social apps.
• Although influencers appear to be dominating TikTok in terms of performance metrics, only 17% share weekly content that is brand or product focused.
• 5% of influencers have spent more time on TikTok, with 60% doubling their time spent on the app compared to pre-pandemic levels.
• According to its Q4 2020 financial statement, the platform acquired over $705 million in revenue over the three months to December 31st, a 76% increase on the £399 million reported in the same period of 2019.
• Snapchat comes next with a 62% growth rate, reaching $911 million in revenue compared to $560 million in Q4 2019.
• More than 1 in 5 Millennials are using social media less than they used to More than 1 in 5 (22%) of Millennials, globally, are using social media less than they used to, according to data collected in Q3 2020 and published by GlobalWebIndex in Q1 2021.
• However, those with this sentiment have been found to mostly use the platforms for ‘social reasons’ – as opposed to other activities like shopping – making them 19% more likely than others in their cohort to ensure they aren’t missing out on anything being posted.
• But they appear to be taking more action to rectify this, with 26% setting up their devices to monitor screen time vs.
• Despite the negative effects of these platforms, Millennials are surprisingly the most optimistic about social media’s role in society – on average, 38% say these platforms are ‘good for society’, rising to 45% in particularly heavy users.
• 4% quarter-on-quarter in Q3 2020 SocialBakers’ Q3 2020 Social Media Trends Report has found that global social ad spend rose 56.
• 7% in North America, with the widespread Facebook ad boycott in this and other regions throughout Q2 partly responsible for the sharp upturn in Q3.
• 30 Content Marketing Statistics to Power Up Your Strategy in 2022 | Databox Blog: About 30% of the companies we surveyed think that new content ideas are everyone’s responsibility.
• Also, more than 50% of those companies come up with new content ideas at least once a week.
• Most Companies’ Content Teams Consist of 1-3 Marketers Over 60% of companies employ between 1 and 3 content marketers on their content teams.
• Also, 80% of the surveyed companies stated they write for people (and not for search engines).
• The Primary Reason for Writing Content Is to Attract New Visitors Attracting new visitors is the main reason more than 50% of marketers write content.
• Oppositely, 47% of correspondents stated that they write content to nurture and educate leads and prospects.
• But actually, blogging is more effective now than it was 2 years ago, at least for 68% of marketers we asked.
• Most companies recognize the importance of blog updates:about 70% of our contributors have a process for blog updating.
• Almost Half of Social Media Managers Schedule Content One Month in Advance Nearly 50% of the social media managers we surveyed prefer to schedule content at least a month in advance.
• CEOs Set Marketing Goals in a Large Minority of Teams CEO sets the content marketing goals for more than 40% of teams.
• 6% of companies we surveyed use data to make content decisions most of the time.
• The Vast Majority of Experts Measure Post Conversion via Organic Traffic Almost 80% of the experts measure how well a post converts in terms of getting organic traffic.
• About 63% also measure leads by post and some 58% look at the sales each post brings.
• 15 Visual Content Marketing Statistics That’ll Blow Your Mind: Better recall:Up to 65% for visual content after three days Studies have shown that people can recall 65% of the visual content that they see almost three days later.
• In comparison to about 10% of written content three days after it’s read.
• 5% of marketers say that original graphics, like infographics, perform best Using boring stock images as your visuals will not help your marketing efforts in 2018.
• 5% of marketers said that graphics like infographics are the most valuable.
• 30% of marketers create their own visuals Only 30% of marketers create their own visuals, so it’ll be easy for you to get ahead of the pack.
• 30% more bloggers were using multiple images in 2017 than in 2016 In 2017, more bloggers were using multiple images in their articles than in any year prior.
• People follow visual instructions 323% better than written instructions One of the reasons that multiple images or infographics are so effective is that people follow them and can read them better.
• 74% of marketers use visuals in their social media content If social media is more of your specialty, visual content marketing can help you as well.
• With almost 75% of marketers using visuals on social media, it may seem that your content will not stand out.
• You get 37% higher engagement on Facebook if you use a visual Facebook posts with images also drive more engagement than those without any images.
• 51% of B2B writers put visual content at the top of their list of priorities It’s not only bloggers that are seeing the potential of using more visual content in their marketing.
• Articles with images get 94% more views Omitting images from your articles will only cause people to ignore them from the beginning.
• Articles with images get 94% more views than their visual-lacking counterparts.
• Video will be part of 80% of all internet content by 2019 Video is about to take over the content marketing world.
• In two short years, over 80% of all content that is shared on the internet will be in video form.
• 2023 Content Marketing Stats & Trends: Marketers Moving Budget to Content According to the Content Marketing Institute, 43% of marketers surveyed say their 2021 budgets were higher.
• Sixty-six percent of the group expect increases in their 2022 budget, and one in five say the increase will be greater than 9%.
• Digital Video Becoming Essential 86% of businesses use video as a marketing tool, and 93% of marketers who use video say that it’s an essential part of their marketing strategy.
• The most commonly created types of videos are explainer videos (73%), social media videos (67%), presentation videos (51%), sales videos (41%), and video ads (41%).
• Trust & Inclusivity Matter According to Forbes, 96% of the top-performing B2B content marketers have said their audience views their brand as a credible and trusted source.
• While 38% of customers are more likely to trust brands that show diversity in their advertising, 71% of consumers say they would be willing to spend more money to support products and services from a brand they trust.
• YouTube and Facebook continue to dominate the online landscape, with 81% and 69%, respectively.
• Search Engine Optimization is an important element of Content Marketing In 2021, 69% of content marketers invested in SEO, using it for strategic keywords (70%), localization (50%), and mobile optimization (48%).
• Podcast listeners are much more active on every social media channel (94% are active on at least one – vs.
• Podcast listeners are more likely to follow companies and brands on social media, and 80% listen to all or most of each podcast episode.
• Eighty-three percent of marketers are conducting market research, and 88% of companies use market research to make business decisions.
• Of those surveyed, 67% of marketers plan on increasing market research spend in the next year.
• The top two technologies B2B organizations use to assist with content marketing are analytics tools (86%) and email marketing software (85%).
• Social Media Marketing:Statistics, Trends, and Data. – TheB2BHouse: 50% of Gen Z and millennial users now use social media to decide on their product purchases, compared to 38% of adults overall.
• Social media ranked higher than website/blog (36%) which was the second most popular digital marketing channels.
• 73% of marketers they currently use Livestream videos as well, making it the second most popular content type products by Marketers.
• The least used content type is Virtual experiences (46%) with 33% of marketers report they plan to use more virtual experiences.
• However, user engagement with Twitter posts rose by 263%, with posting and video posting activity rising only by 17% and 22%, respectively.
• Email marketing was the most automated marketing channel, according to 65% of respondents.
• 80Social media effectiveness to drive salesTop tactics to drive virtual registrations – rated by marketersWith the increase of webinar usage (+162% YoY, according to ON24), marketers are constantly on the lookout for the best ways to drive registrations.
• 80% of marketers rated the website is the most essential tool for driving registrations.
• 60% of respondents rated social media as on of the top three channels to drive virtual registrations.
• For context, there are estimated 7B people in the world, which means almost 83% of the world will rely on social media by 2027.
• 6% of respondents mentioned that they use social media to keep in touch with friends and family.
• While the number of users on TikTok grew by 32% YoY, most of these users were Gen X and Baby boomers.
• 28% of Gen Z respondents also follow influencers and experts on social media.
• Millennials (23%) and Gen X (16%) also use social media to follow influencers.
• Millennials (49%) and Gen X (27%) also mentioned social media is used to find new products, other than online search.
• United Arab Emirates (45%), Mexico (39%), Poland (38%) are the other top 5 countries who trust social media advertising.
• Social media has the largest decrease in trust, by 8%, compared to 2021.
• Time spent on social media on a typical dayThis year, participants have expressed more interest in travelling more (+24%) and spending less time on social media (+9%), according to GWI.
• An increase of +13% of audiences now use social media for their news sites.
• 118 Essential B2C Content Marketing Stats [and Facts] 2024: Conclusion General B2C Content Marketing Stats 2024 82% of marketers are actively investing in content marketing.
• The global content marketing industry is expected to grow at an annual growth rate of 16%.
• Content marketing also boosts conversion rates that are six times higher than other advertising methods On average, content marketing costs 62% less than other types of marketing.
• The number of businesses using content marketing increased from 70% in 2019 to 82% in 2020.
• 75% of organizations outsource content creation due to its time intensity.
• 40% of outsourcing organizations delegate content distribution, while 25% outsource their entire content strategy.
• 79% said that in 2021 lead generation was their main content marketing priority.
• In 2021, 54% of B2C content marketers noticed that their budgets remained stable, with 27% noting that their budgets had increased and 18% noting that their budgets had decreased.
• As of 2021, 62% of B2C content marketing teams remained stable in size, while 27% increased and 11% decreased in size.
• Images and Photos Content Marketing Statistics In 2020, 48% of content marketers surveyed said that 91-100% of their content includes visuals, while 23% said they included visuals in 70-90% of their content.
• Internet users typically read only 20% of all the text on a webpage during their visit.
• On average, people remember only 10% of written content and 65% of visual content.
• 26% of content marketers predict relying over 80% of their marketing strategies on visuals.
• 25% of marketers predicted that they would invest between 10% and 20% of their total budgets on visual content creation.
• 74% of marketers use visuals consistently in over 70% of the written content pieces they publish.
• 90% of bloggers add visual content to their blog articles, but only 3% include over ten images per blog post.
• Including more than ten images in a blog post increases the chances to get better results by 39%.
• 43% of content marketers struggle at producing visual content consistently.
• 90% of consumers claim that they prefer video content from their favorite brands to other types of content.
• 49% of content marketers use Facebook videos in their content strategy.
• Only 25% of content marketers use Instagram stories in their content strategy.
• 78% of website owners claim that their website traffic has increased thanks to video content.
• Only 18% of people prefer reading a written article rather than watching a short video on the topic.
• 68% of people will finish watching a video that lasts less than a minute.
• 55% of people watch video content daily Websites with video content have an average conversion rate of 4.
• 9% for websites that do not use any video content at all On average, landing pages with videos have a conversion rate of 80%.
• — Brian Dean Webinar Marketing Statistics 61% of marketers include webinars in their content strategy.
• The pharmaceutical industry has the highest live webinar attendance rate at 63%, followed by the consulting industry (50%) and the advertising industry (33%).
• 83% of content marketers consider webinars to be an effective strategy.
• Tuesdays are the days with the most webinar registrations (24%), followed by Thursdays (16%) and Wednesdays (15%) On average, between 2% and 5% of attendees purchase something at the end of the webinar.
• 93% of participants attend webinars from their desktops and only 7% from mobile devices.
• Webinars in the communication industry have the highest conversion rate (67%), followed by training webinars (44%) and marketing webinars (39%).
• 89% of marketers claim that webinars are the most effective lead generation strategy.
• Only 39% of B2C businesses hosted webinars in 2020, compared to 67% of B2B businesses.
• There are over 160 million podcast listeners in the US, which accounts for almost 50% of the US population.
• In 2021, 41% of Americans over 12 years old listened to podcasts every month.
• Surprisingly, 65% of all podcast listeners listen to the whole podcast episode.
• 68% of all podcast listeners listen to all of the podcast episodes they have downloaded.
• In 2020, 68% of Americans over 12 years old listened to some type of online audio each month.
• In 2020, 14% of Americans over 55 years old listened to a podcast monthly.
• 79% of podcast listeners listen to podcasts on their mobile phones, while only 15% listen to them on their laptops.
• 28% of podcast listeners listen to podcasts as an audio source in their car.
• 21% of podcast listeners listen to four or five different podcasts in a week.
• Only 11% of podcast listeners focus on listening to only one podcast in a week.
• Statistics on Content Marketing Channels 2024 In 2021, webinars and online course content increased by around 12% from the previous year.
• Blog posts and short articles were the most common content form used by B2C marketers in 2020 (83%).
• Long-form articles (over 3,000 words) were the least common content form used by B2C marketers in 2020 (22%).
• In 2020, 75% of B2C marketers used email marketing as their top content marketing strategy.
• 72% of B2C marketers used paid channels for content marketing in 2020, accounting for a 13% drop from the previous year.
• Surprisingly, Facebook is the most common social media platform that B2C marketers used in 2020 (97%) The use of Instagram by B2C content marketers in 2020 increased by 7%, while the use of YouTube increased by 10%.
• Content Promotion and SEO Statistics 2024 64% of digital marketers invest in search engine optimization.
• 67% of digital marketers believe that SEO is the most effective content marketing strategy.
• 76% of content marketers believe that organic traffic is the key metric to measure their content strategy success.
• 94% of content marketers use social media as their primary content distribution channel.
• Mobile Content Marketing Statistics 70% of the total digital media time is spent on smartphones.
• B2C Content Marketing During Pandemic Statistics 63% of B2C organizations have changed their targeting and/or messaging strategy due to the COVID-19 pandemic.
• 54% of B2C organizations adjusted their content calendar due to the pandemic.
• 46% of B2C companies changed their promotion strategy due to the pandemic.
• 82% of businesses adjusted their content strategy to the pandemic very quickly.
• 83% of B2C businesses relied on blog posts and short articles during the pandemic.
• During the pandemic, 74% of B2C businesses relied on email newsletters.
• During the pandemic, 62% of B2C businesses relied on pre-recorded videos.
• The number of marketers using in-person events to promote their business dropped by 11% between 2019 and 2020.
• The number of marketers using online events, webinars, and online courses in 2020 increased by 12% from 2019.
• The number of marketers using live streaming in 2020 increased by 22% % from 2019.
• 82% of B2C marketers used social media to distribute their content organically during the pandemic.
• It is estimated that 55% of all B2C businesses outsource some part of their content marketing activities.
• Moreover, 80% of those businesses choose to outsource content creation specifically, as it is the most time-consuming content marketing activity.
• Only 5% of digital marketers rate their B2C organizations’ content marketing efforts as extremely successful.
• In comparison, 1% think that their content marketing efforts are not successful at all.
• Moreover, 80% of those businesses choose to outsource content creation specifically, as it is the most time-consuming content marketing activity.
• In comparison, 1% think that their content marketing efforts are not successful at all.
• Essential Digital Marketing Automotive Industry Statistics in 2024 • ZipDo: The Latest Digital Marketing Automotive Industry Statistics Unveiled More than 70% of consumers who own cars start their shopping journeys online, not at dealerships.
• In the realm of car ownership, it reveals that a staggering 70% of consumers ditch the conventional dealership visit, instead, they ignite their shopping journeys in the digital arena.
• On average, automotive marketers spend 33% of their total marketing budget on digital advertising.
• In the swirling vortex of today’s marketing strategies, it’s intriguing to spotlight that automotive marketers allocate a striking 33% of their total marketing budget for digital advertising.
• Relatively 90% of all consumers use smartphones to compare vehicles on the spot.
• The explosive statistic revealing that an impressive 90% of all consumers utilize smartphones to evaluate vehicles right then and there serves as a wake-up call to the automotive industry, indicating that they can no longer afford to ignore the digital realm.
• Digitally-influenced car buyers closely follow TV advertisements (22%), then newspaper ads (18%).
• In automotive digital marketing, 82% of consumers will read online reviews for local businesses.
• The figure – 82%, is a clear demonstration of a major percentage of customers weaving their purchase decisions around the tapestry of online reviews.
• Around 25% of car buyers use social media as a source for vehicle purchasing.
• With approximately 25% seeking insight from their online peers, not leveraging the powers of these platforms as part of an automotive digital marketing strategy is akin to muting a choir in the middle of a captivating aria.
• The revelation that almost 63% of car buyers first acquaint themselves with new vehicles online can fire up a booster for digital marketing strategies in the automotive industry.
• As such, the 63% statistic becomes the cryptographer’s key to strategizing digital marketing campaigns for the automotive industry – focusing on attractive online representations, informative literature and engaging content that showcases vehicles and tips the decision-making balance.
• Websites are the most extensively used digital channel for car purchase, with 85% of buyers using them.
• Highlighting the potency of online platforms in today’s auto industry, it’s important to spotlight how a staggering 85% of buyers utilize websites for car purchases.
• So, fire up your engines, marketers, the race towards website excellence has started, and it’s a thrilling journey that 85% of consumers have already embarked on.
• More than 50% of all vehicle buyers use their smartphone to access auto content.
• Navigating the endless highway of digital marketing trends, one particular statistic stands out like a beacon:over 50% of all vehicle buyers utilize their smartphone to access auto content.
• YouTube is recognized as the most influential platform, affecting 40% of car shoppers who visited a dealership after watching a video online.
• Unveiling this powerful perspective, let’s shed light on a captivating statistic-YouTube, the giant of digital platforms, sways a striking 40% of car shoppers to hit a dealership following an online video-viewing experience.
• Automotive businesses using AI in email marketing campaigns saw an increase in revenues by 37%.
• The impressive 37% revenue surge observed specifically in the automotive sector, elucidates that AI’s integration into email marketing campaigns isn’t just effective – it’s crucial towards driving remarkable change in digital marketing landscapes.
• 61% of auto marketers see mobility services as an opportunity area on the digital front.
• Painting the landscape of the digital marketing sphere in the automotive industry, we unearth the golden nugget that 61% of auto marketers identify mobility services as an untapped potential.
• Over 50% of automotive businesses believe investment in digital skills and technology is the most pressing business requirement.
• 88% of car purchasers use the internet to shop, making automotive the second highest category.
• The statistic revealing that 88% of car purchasers rev up their internet engines to shop draws a stunning roadmap for why digital marketing is crucial for automotive businesses.
• 80% of auto shopping is now done digitally with nearly half on mobile devices.
• The surge into the digital space is dramatically redefining the auto-shopping landscape, with an astounding 80% of auto shopping now unfolding digitally, and almost half of that action taking place on mobile devices.
• On average, automotive marketers spend 33% of their total marketing budget on digital advertising.
• Relatively 90% of all consumers use smartphones to compare vehicles on the spot.
• Digitally-influenced car buyers closely follow TV advertisements (22%), then newspaper ads (18%).
• In automotive digital marketing, 82% of consumers will read online reviews for local businesses.
• Around 25% of car buyers use social media as a source for vehicle purchasing.
• Websites are the most extensively used digital channel for car purchase, with 85% of buyers using them.
• More than 50% of all vehicle buyers use their smartphone to access auto content.
• YouTube is recognized as the most influential platform, affecting 40% of car shoppers who visited a dealership after watching a video online.
• Automotive businesses using AI in email marketing campaigns saw an increase in revenues by 37%.
• 61% of auto marketers see mobility services as an opportunity area on the digital front.
• Over 50% of automotive businesses believe investment in digital skills and technology is the most pressing business requirement.
• 88% of car purchasers use the internet to shop, making automotive the second highest category.
• 80% of auto shopping is now done digitally with nearly half on mobile devices.
• The Latest Digital Marketing Automotive Industry Statistics Unveiled More than 70% of consumers who own cars start their shopping journeys online, not at dealerships.
• In the realm of car ownership, it reveals that a staggering 70% of consumers ditch the conventional dealership visit, instead, they ignite their shopping journeys in the digital arena.
• On average, automotive marketers spend 33% of their total marketing budget on digital advertising.
• In the swirling vortex of today’s marketing strategies, it’s intriguing to spotlight that automotive marketers allocate a striking 33% of their total marketing budget for digital advertising.
• Relatively 90% of all consumers use smartphones to compare vehicles on the spot.
• The explosive statistic revealing that an impressive 90% of all consumers utilize smartphones to evaluate vehicles right then and there serves as a wake-up call to the automotive industry, indicating that they can no longer afford to ignore the digital realm.
• Digitally-influenced car buyers closely follow TV advertisements (22%), then newspaper ads (18%).
• In automotive digital marketing, 82% of consumers will read online reviews for local businesses.
• The figure – 82%, is a clear demonstration of a major percentage of customers weaving their purchase decisions around the tapestry of online reviews.
• Around 25% of car buyers use social media as a source for vehicle purchasing.
• With approximately 25% seeking insight from their online peers, not leveraging the powers of these platforms as part of an automotive digital marketing strategy is akin to muting a choir in the middle of a captivating aria.
• The revelation that almost 63% of car buyers first acquaint themselves with new vehicles online can fire up a booster for digital marketing strategies in the automotive industry.
• As such, the 63% statistic becomes the cryptographer’s key to strategizing digital marketing campaigns for the automotive industry – focusing on attractive online representations, informative literature and engaging content that showcases vehicles and tips the decision-making balance.
• Websites are the most extensively used digital channel for car purchase, with 85% of buyers using them.
• Highlighting the potency of online platforms in today’s auto industry, it’s important to spotlight how a staggering 85% of buyers utilize websites for car purchases.
• So, fire up your engines, marketers, the race towards website excellence has started, and it’s a thrilling journey that 85% of consumers have already embarked on.
• More than 50% of all vehicle buyers use their smartphone to access auto content.
• Navigating the endless highway of digital marketing trends, one particular statistic stands out like a beacon:over 50% of all vehicle buyers utilize their smartphone to access auto content.
• YouTube is recognized as the most influential platform, affecting 40% of car shoppers who visited a dealership after watching a video online.
• Unveiling this powerful perspective, let’s shed light on a captivating statistic—YouTube, the giant of digital platforms, sways a striking 40% of car shoppers to hit a dealership following an online video-viewing experience.
• Automotive businesses using AI in email marketing campaigns saw an increase in revenues by 37%.
• The impressive 37% revenue surge observed specifically in the automotive sector, elucidates that AI’s integration into email marketing campaigns isn’t just effective – it’s crucial towards driving remarkable change in digital marketing landscapes.
• 61% of auto marketers see mobility services as an opportunity area on the digital front.
• Painting the landscape of the digital marketing sphere in the automotive industry, we unearth the golden nugget that 61% of auto marketers identify mobility services as an untapped potential.
• Over 50% of automotive businesses believe investment in digital skills and technology is the most pressing business requirement.
• 88% of car purchasers use the internet to shop, making automotive the second highest category.
• The statistic revealing that 88% of car purchasers rev up their internet engines to shop draws a stunning roadmap for why digital marketing is crucial for automotive businesses.
• 80% of auto shopping is now done digitally with nearly half on mobile devices.
• The surge into the digital space is dramatically redefining the auto-shopping landscape, with an astounding 80% of auto shopping now unfolding digitally, and almost half of that action taking place on mobile devices.
• 5 Digital Marketing Stats to Develop Your CRE Marketing Strategy | inMotion Real Estate Media: 76% of all online experiences in B2B start with a search engine Your company’s digital footprint is all the information that exists on the internet about your business.
• In fact, according to data from BrightEdge, 76% of all online experiences in B2B start with a search engine (BrightEdge).
• Companies that excel at lead nurturing generate 50% more sales ready leads at a 33% lower cost.
• In fact, recent studies show that lead-nurturing can generate 50% more sales-ready leads at 33% lower cost, according to data from Invesp.
• Companies that blog get 55% more web traffic Over the last 5 years Google has invested significantly in enhancing the user experience by providing increasingly accurate and relevant search results.
• And according to data from Hubspot (Hubspot), companies that blog get 55% more web traffic.
• Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates about 3 times as many leads.
• Below is a running list of some of the top commercial real estate events of 2024 from… Read On 64% of commercial real estate experts predict increased search traffic in 2014 One of the areas of CRE that’s most changed over the past couple of years is marketing.
• 2020 SEO Stats For YouTube & Video Marketing: A study from Searchmetrics reveals 62% of Google universal searches include Video, and 8 of 10 of the video results come from YouTube rather than other video platforms.
• Compared to click-through rates on plain text-based content, video click-through is 41% higher, so you’re getting more traffic to your website, increased brand awareness, and a better return on investment in your content creation efforts.
• 2024 Digital Marketing Statistics You Can’t Miss! | upGrad blog: Here are some other handy, insightful statistics about e-mail marketing that can prove convenient… About 49% of your customer e-mails are opened on mobile devices.
• Around 74% of marketers believe that e-mail marketing leads to an increase in customer engagement.
• Close to 88% of all customers seek transparency about their shared personal information with your brand.
• The following digital marketing statistics about the importance of CRO would help you learn more about it:About 86% of customers prefer watching visual content like videos on landing pages, thus observing a significant boost in conversions.
• Despite the importance of having sufficient CRO statistics, more than 68% of small businesses don’t follow any solid-customer rate optimization strategy.
• Adding up any custom call to action (CTA) can help drive 42% more visitors to your online website.
• A few of them are:Over 72% of brand marketers reveal that meaningful content development is their crucial SEO tactic, as it helps your brand to reach a newer audience.
• According to research, mobile payments will continue to grow at a pace of 27% during the 2022-2025 period.
• According to research, mobile payments will continue to grow at a pace of 27% during the 2022-2025 period.
• According to research, mobile payments will continue to grow at a pace of 27% during the 2022-2025 period.
• According to research, mobile payments will continue to grow at a pace of 27% during the 2022-2025 period.
• Top Content Marketing Funnel Characteristics [SEMrush Survey Stats]: Did you know that only 9% of marketing professionals worldwide evaluate the performance of their existing content strategy as “excellent”?
• Content Marketing Funnel Overview Though the vast majority (87%) of marketers create content for different customer journey stages, the top of the funnel remains the most popular one – 95% of marketers create TOFU content.
• Then comes the middle of the funnel (MOFU), covered by 86% of our respondents.
• Finally, 76% of the survey participants create bottom-of-the-funnel (BOFU) content.
• “87% of marketers rely on content throughout different stages of the customer journey, while half of them find it challenging to encourage audiences to move to the next funnel stage.
• ” TOFU Content Top Stats According to 70% of our respondents, organic search is the most efficient channel in attracting traffic at this funnel stage.
• Social media marketing and email marketing are the channels mentioned by 60% and 54% of marketers, respectively, which highlights the importance of delivering value through several touchpoints with audiences.
• 72% of the survey participants described “How-to” guides as an absolute leader at the top of the marketing funnel.
• However, the importance of such tried and tested formats as landing pages (mentioned by 35% of marketers), as well as infographics and checklists (selected by 28% and 27% of marketers, respectively), did not diminish either.
• It’s no surprise that with the above formats our respondents use the number of visitors as their core metric (73%) to evaluate content success.
• Then comes conversion rate with 54% of the votes and time on page with 52%.
• MOFU Content Top Stats Surprisingly, here, “How-to” guides also work best to generate leads, according to 44% of our survey participants.
• However, these are logically followed by more product-specific and application-oriented formats like product overviews (40%) and case studies (34%).
• While organic search remains the most efficient (69%) channel for generating leads, followed by email marketing (54%) and social media marketing (52%), lead nurturing is carried out mostly via emails (72%).
• Moreover, when a website visitor becomes a lead, 43% of marketers switch to success stories, 38% to product overview, and 36% to case studies to push these leads towards conversion.
• That’s why conversion rate was chosen as the key metric for content efficiency by 75% of our respondents, along with number of leads (54%) and number of visitors (44%).
• BOFU Content Top Stats As the deal moves to its closure, 51% of marketers rely on the product overview as the main factor that drives payments, trying to explain the value they deliver in every detail.
• Other arguments for the purchase are believed to be found in customer reviews (49% of votes) and success stories (43% of votes).
• As for the channels that drive payments, email marketing turns out to be most effective (73%).
• Then comes organic search (61%) and paid advertising (47%), which proves that strong content is capable of striking you a deal overnight.
• It’s no surprise that at the bottom of the funnel the majority (73%) of marketers use conversion rate and other income-related metrics such as the number of payments (53%) and ROI / ROMI (43%) to measure their success.
• We learned that the absolute majority (88%) decide what content to create based on keyword research, and 73% rely on competitor analysis.
• Almost half of respondents (49%) use in-house knowledge and results to decide on what content to create – they conduct content audits and refer to the sales or customer support team.
• Encouraging prospects to move through the funnel was considered one of the most challenging tasks when building a funnel by 50% of our respondents.
• 71% of them use email follow-ups to facilitate the process, 67% try to improve internal links and make the content easier to find, and 56% suggest related content to answer more specific queries.
• Other serious challenges mentioned are creating content that generates quality leads (52%) and creating content that attracts traffic (48%).
• As for the effectiveness of the funnel as a whole, 36% of the survey participants measure it by conversion rate, 23% the number of payments, and 15% by the number of leads and ROI / ROMI.
• The majority of our respondents (41%) work for small businesses (companies of 1-10 employees), which are mostly either B2B (43%) or B2C (33%) companies.
• Top 10 Social Media Statistics Every Marketer Should Know | Digital Marketing Institute: Social media itself has seen a 13% global increase in usage since the previous year.
• In fact, statistics in America from the Pew Research indicate that 68% of adult Americans use Facebook, while 73% use YouTube.
• Older computer-literate users are more comfortable with the older Facebook platform, as the same Pew Research indicates 41% of total Facebook users being 65 years or older.
• YouTube, on the other hand, managed an astounding 94% of its total user population occupying the 18-24 age demographic according to the same data, so this will be an interesting trend to watch.
• Twitter Is Bad for ROI, But Great for MarketingWhile Google itself, as a search engine is the #1 platform for ROI in terms of marketing, and Facebook impresses with a 30% share.
• Twitter comes in last with just 2% of respondents in a survey indicating that they saw any kind of return on investment for their efforts here.
• However, while Twitter might stumble on actual, hard ROI numbers, 47% of respondents surveyed said that it was very effective for marketing to the public.
• So it’s not a complete surprise that marketers have found that including images in Tweets increases the chances of a retweet by 150%.
• Furthermore, the retweet phenomenon is also followed up by people using the “favourite” function 89% more times, as well as the tweets themselves getting 18% more clicks.
• Instagram passed one billion users in 2018 and continues to grow at 5% every quarter, beating even Facebook’s own growth for the year.
• In fact, 42% of respondents in a 2018 survey indicate they are “taking a break” from Facebook, while 26% say they have deleted the app entirely and no longer use it.
• In addition, 54% of Facebook users have now adjusted their privacy settings, so there’s a general feeling of distrust growing around the social media giant.
• 22 Key Statistics For Successful B2B Social Media Marketing Programs | KoMarketing: Oberlo reports that half of all US adults with a degree use LinkedIn, and 25% of all LinkedIn users are senior-level influencers.
• B2B marketers report 80% of their social media leads come from LinkedIn, and 40% say LinkedIn is the most effective channel for driving leads.
• Statistica found that 25% of social media marketers at B2B companies use Pinterest to market their businesses.
• Hubspot reported each additional social channel you add to your social media marketing plan can increase ROI and effectiveness by 35%.
• According to Forrester, 68% of people don’t think brands share interesting content.
• According to SproutSocial, 54% of marketers say video is the most effective format for reaching social goals.
• 53% say images are best, 30% say text-based posts, 26% choose video, and 25% say live video drives the highest ROI.
• Sprout Social reports 88% of consumers are likely to buy from a brand after reading reviews on social media.
• 4% of B2B buyers are more likely to buy after reading a trusted review.
• Facebook says their Carousel ads, which allow brands to share several images in one ad, see 30-50% lower cost-per-conversion and 20-30% lower cost-per-click than single-image link ads.
• According to a Hootsuite survey, 60% of all businesses plan to increase their Instagram budget, and nearly half plan to do the same for Facebook, YouTube, and LinkedIn.
• A 2021 survey by Hootsuite reported the top outcomes brands want to achieve on social include increased acquisition (74%), increased brand awareness (64%), and driving conversions like leads, purchases, or product inquiries (45%).
• Eighty-eight percent of marketers say social media strategy positively impacts the bottom line, but only 1 in 4 reports those results to their manager or team — and just 10% use social media data to inform business decisions.
• 37 Stats That Make the Case for Content Marketing ROI: Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates three times as many leads.
• 82% of marketers are using content marketing in 2021, up 70% from the year prior.
• 79% of content marketers use content marketing to generate high-quality leads.
• 24% of B2B marketers have shifted their paid advertising spend to content marketing in the past year.
• 82% of consumers feel more positive about a company after reading custom content.
• 60% of top performers in content marketing have a documented strategy, while 79% of the least successful companies in content marketing don’t.
• 41% of buyers view three to five pieces of content before engaging with a sales rep.
• 87% of B2B buyers say online content has a major or moderate impact on vendor selection.
• 48% of B2B C-suite executives report that thought leadership content directly led them to give a company their business.
• 81% of consumers research a product or service online before purchasing.
• More than 85% of internet users prefer to click on organic search results instead of ads.
• Content marketing strategies generate over 400% more leads per $1,000 within 36 months compared to paid search campaigns.
• Video traffic represents more than 60% of all downstream internet traffic.
• 78% of marketers who used video in their content strategies say it directly helped increase sales.
• 84% of consumers have been convinced to buy a product or service after watching a brand’s video.
• Content marketing revenue growth is projected to increase more than 16% by 2027.
• 62% of marketing agencies have seen an increased demand for content marketing services.
• 52% of marketers indicate a strong commitment to content marketing, showing a 26% increase from 2018.
• 70% of marketers believe that their content marketing efforts are more successful now than the year prior.
• 117 Cool Chatbot Statistics 2024 [Learn Digital Marketing]: In Summary Key Chatbot Statistics and Trends this 2024 Chatbots are the fastest-growing brand communication channel, and the chatbot market size has increased by 92% over the last couple of years.
• In 2020, almost one-quarter of purchasers used chatbots when communicating with businesses, which is a 13% increase from the previous year.
• 67% of consumers worldwide have interacted with a chatbot in the previous 12 months.
• A chatbot platform can answer as much as 80% of all standard simple questions.
• 27% of consumers were unsure whether the last customer support interaction they had was with a chatbot or a real person.
• More than 40% of consumers use conversational marketing tools for purchases, making them an excellent addition to your salesforce.
• 2% of consumers report having a neutral or positive customer experience with chatbots.
• 58%, which is 2% higher than the rate for discussions that get passed over to human agents.
• The US has the most chatbot users (36%), followed by India (11%) and Germany (4%).
• 41% of people who start online chat conversations with businesses are C-level executives.
• 27% of consumers are currently interested in AI (artificial intelligence) support tools.
• 37% of people use a customer service bot to get a quick answer in an emergency.
• Almost 50% of female shoppers like chatbots and choose them to communicate when making purchases online, whereas only 36.
• Chatbot Adoption Statistics 58% of B2B companies use chatbots, while only 42% of B2C websites have chatbots, according to Relay.
• 39% of businesses use chatbots to make their websites more interactive.
• 35% of consumers say they would like to see more companies taking advantage of chatbots.
• 24% of enterprises, 15% of mid-sized companies, and 16% of small businesses are currently using chatbots.
• 53% of service organizations say they plan to use chatbots within 18 months, which is a 136% growth rate.
• 56% of businesses consider chatbots to be driving disruption in their industry.
• Chatbot Conversion Statistics Average chatbots generate 35-40% response rates.
• The best bot experiences with more engaged customers can generate up to 90% response rates.
• Chatbot technology can increase website conversion rates on average by between 10% and 100%, depending on the industry.
• E-commerce stores that have adopted the social media Facebook Messenger chatbot along with an abandoned cart chatbox have been able to boost revenue by between 7 and 25%.
• Better bot experiences together with more engaged audiences, are getting 80-90% response rates.
• Business leaders claim that, on average, chatbots have increased sales by 67%.
• 57% of businesses say that chatbot delivers a massive ROI on minimal investment.
• According to 68% of consumers, they like chatbots because they provide speedy answers.
• Chatbots have helped cut operational customer service costs by up to 30%.
• 60% of consumers thank that chatbot can’t understand their needs as well as a human.
• 60% of consumers would prefer to wait and speak to a human rather than a chatbot.
• Chatbot Marketing and Business Statistics Chatbots are used by 55% of businesses to generate higher-quality leads.
• 40% of US, EU, and Chinese businesses use pre-built AI programs, including virtual agents and chatbots.
• Chatbots are most commonly used for sales (41%), customer support (37%), and marketing (17%).
• Top AI (artificial intelligence) chatbots use is for voice-to-text dictation (46%) and support team collaboration on tasks (26%).
• 64% of businesses believe that chatbots will allow them to provide a more customized customer experience.
• 50% of businesses plan on spending more on voice assistants than on mobile apps.
• Conversations between brands and customers via Messenger have a 30% better ROI than retargeting ads.
• 33% of internet users prefer conversational chatbots when making reservations and ordering online.
• The top three work-related AI chatbots are Microsoft Cortana (49%), Apple Siri (47%), and Google Assistant (23%).
• 53% of consumers are more likely to shop if they can message the business.
• 48% of people would rather a chatbot was able to solve their issues above having a personality.
• Industry-Specific Statistics The top five industries that benefit most from using chatbots are real estate (28%), travel (16%), education (14%), healthcare (10%, and finance (5%).
• Finance Projections are that chatbots will handle 75-90% of banking and healthcare customer queries by 2024 Cost savings from banking chatbots will reach $7.
• Travel/Hospitality Two-thirds of people surveyed said they would find a chatbot useful (40%) or very useful (26%) in relation to the management of their business and work travel arrangements.
• When making travel plans or comparing booking options, 37% of users would prefer to deal with an intelligent chatbot.
• If it could save them time and money, 87% of users would choose a travel chatbot to interact with.
• By 2024, over 70% of chatbot conversations will be with retail chatbots.
• In 2019, a survey found that more than 40% of US consumers had used chatbots to engage with the retail industry.
• 22% of the most successful online stores sell clothes, followed by health products (9%), furniture (9%), electronics (8%), and jewelry (8%).
• Recruiting By the end of 2024, expectations are that 35% of organizations will use chatbots for a large part of the recruitment process.
• XOR, a recruiting chatbot vendor, claims their chatbot solution improves the recruitment process by 33%, screens 85% more resumes with the same budget, and spends 50% less per hire.
• According to a survey by Allegis, 58% of candidates were happy to interact with AI and recruitment chatbots during the early stages of the application process.
• Chatbots for Customer Support Statistics If you use abandoned cart chatbots alongside Messenger, you can boost your eCommerce revenue by up to 25%.
• You can expect to save 30% on customer support costs by using chatbots.
• In 2019, a growth rate of 136% was the prediction for customer service organizations.
• 58% of consumers say their customer service expectations have been changed by chatbots.
• 64% of customer support agents who use chatbots say they have more time to solve more complex and challenging problems.
• 16% of Americans have used Alexa or Google Home chatbots when shopping.
• Chatbot Implementation Statistics 53% of companies use AI chatbots in their IT department, and only 23% use them for administrative tasks.
• Software represents around 40% of all cognitive artificial intelligence spending, and two areas of focus are conversational artificial intelligence and machine learning applications.
• Around 47% of organizations plan to have chatbots for customer support by the end of 2021.
• 80% of businesses are projected to integrate some form of conversational bot system by 2024.
• 85% of customer interactions might be handled without a human agent by the end of 2021.
• According to a survey by Relay, 58% of B2B companies and 42% of B2C companies actively use chatbots.
• 100+ Freshly Updated Digital Marketing Statistics – 2024: 91% of businesses used video as an important part of their marketing strategy in 2023.
• Digital marketing witnessed a US$271billion growth in 2023 Online Ads Statistics Research shows that search ads can increase brand awareness by 80%.
• 52% of B2B marketers use native advertising along with sponsored content.
• 70% of internet users want information about new products or services through descriptive content instead of advertisements.
• Search Engine Optimization Statistics 70% of businesses believe that SEO generates more sales than PPC.
• Out of billions of searches that Google receives daily, 15% of searches are unique and have never been seen before.
• 76% of Near me local searchers on a mobile device visit a business within a day.
• 49% of businesses believe that organic searches bring them the highest ROI.
• 75% of people never scroll past page one of Google’s first results page.
• Organic traffic (from the Google search engine) accounts for 43% of the total traffic for eCommerce sites.
• 53% of marketers recommend guest posting as the most effective link-building strategy.
• Companies that blog have 55% more visitors, 97% more inbound links, and 434% more indexed pages than those that don’t.
• In 2023, less than 1% of the searchers will go to the second page of Google search results.
• 98% of people read reviews before making any purchase for local businesses.
• TikTok remained the fastest-growing social media network in 2022, with 40% of businesses planning to use TikTok in their social media strategy.
• 80% of B2B businesses use Twitter to get organic results for their social media marketing.
• 63% of ads on TikTok, which have the highest CTR share their message within 3 seconds.
• Around 30 million businesses can be viewed on Snapchat maps 77% of Facebook users visit a business profile at least once a week.
• 50% of US small and medium-sized businesses use marketing automation for email drip campaigns, while 47% reported using it for social media reactions.
• Research shows that 58% of users check their emails before surfing the internet for other activities.
• 49% of consumers report looking forward to receiving emails from their favourite brands.
• 77% of marketers believe email nurturing is the best way to re-engage leads.
• 22% of consumers are likelier to open an email with subject lines that show some sense of urgency.
• 95% of marketers use generative AI for email creation, and rate is an effective way to do so.
• Conversion Rate Statistics 74% of conversion rate optimization programs result in increased sales.
• 79% of new leads are never converted into sales due to the absence of lead nurturing.
• Less than 79% of marketers use A/B testing to improve their conversion rates on landing pages.
• 84% of marketers believe putting more time and resources into the lead nurturing program will lead to better conversion rates.
• Websites with superior user interfaces result in 200% higher conversion rates than poorly designed websites.
• Yahoo witnessed 59% more conversions for the users who search after seeing a display ad.
• A 1-second delay in your site speed can reduce the conversion rate by 7%.
• 81% of the customers compare product prices on mobile while shopping offline.
• 53% of users use search engines to know specific information about the product they wish to buy.
• 💡 Interesting Read Mobile Marketing Statistics E-commerce Marketing Statistics Research shows that 80% of consumers are more likely to convert when they are provided with personalized experiences.
• 73% of all consumers are more likely to purchase a product or service when explained through a video by the brand.
• 35% of brands leverage AR/VR in their digital marketing strategies, and 42% plan to increase their investment in 2022.
• There is a 10% growth in the digital marketing budget among all sections in 2023 Content Marketing Statistics 73% of B2B and 70% of B2C marketers use content marketing as their overall marketing.
• 58% of US marketers increased their content creation performance using AI.
• 83% of marketers say focusing on quality rather than quantity of content.
• Statistics That Showcase the Importance of Medical Content Marketing | Digital Branding | Healthcare Brand Promotion: The Need for Medical Content Is Increasing About 7% of all searches in Google are health-related.
• 66% of internet users use search engines to know about specific medical problems or diseases.
• 70% of people prefer to be introduced to a business through content rather than ads.
• More than 70% of patients will look for a new healthcare provider if the existing provider’s website lacks information.
• About 66% of marketers now vouch for content marketing as an effective tactic.
• 26% of the marketers have described their content marketing efforts as being very successful.
• 95% of healthcare organisations plan to include content marketing in their marketing strategy.
• The Influence of Online Reviews on Patients More than 90% of patients read online reviews to determine the quality of service offered by healthcare providers.
• About 71% of patients read online reviews to choose a new doctor or hospital.
• 43% of millennials are expected to change their healthcare providers in the coming years.
• The Potential That Calls Hold 45% of marketers say that phone calls have higher conversion rates.
• The Power of Social Media Platforms More than 40% of patients make their healthcare decisions based on content on social media.
• Content has an 80% higher readership rate when visuals like infographics, images and charts are used in it.
• 62% of all healthcare institutions are outsourcing their medical content development efforts.
• 14 SEO Stats That Will Change Your Search Marketing Forever: Updating older content can increase organic traffic by 111% 5.
• 57% of B2B marketers agree that SEO generates more leads than any other strategies 8.
• 81% of consumers perform online research before making a large purchase Mobile SEO stats 9.
• 87% of people with smartphones use a search engine once per day 10.
• Mobile searches including the word “Best” have increased by 80% 11.
• 40% of mobile visitors will leave your website if it takes more than three seconds to load Local SEO stats 12.
• 72% of consumers visit a store within 5 miles of their current location after performing a local search 13.
• 40% of all e-commerce sales during holidays come from smartphones Final thoughts on SEO statistics SEO statisticsThese are general SEO stats that you can use to improve your search marketing campaigns and performance.
• 50% of all searches on Google are four words or longer (Source)Half of all users using Google search for terms that are what we consider long tail.
• Updating older content can increase organic traffic by 111% (Source)A common dilemma marketers face is deciding whether to produce new content or update older ones.
• It’s been found that updating old blog posts with new content and images can result in a 111% increase in organic traffic.
• 7% of outbound leads (Source)I personally believe that every business needs a healthy balance of inbound and outbound marketing.
• 93% of all online experiences begin with a search engine (Source)Think of the last time you wanted to know the answer to a question or learn something.
• 57% of B2B marketers agree that SEO generates more leads than any other strategies (Source)What’s the heart and lungs of a B2B organization?
• 81% of consumers perform online research before making a large purchase (Source)Do you sell high-ticket items?
• This is why 81% of consumers perform their due diligence online before buying anything.
• 87% of people with smartphones use a search engine once per day (Source)Mobile devices have become the go-to platform for surfing the internet, using social media, and checking emails.
• Seeing as 87% of smartphone users find themselves searching for something via a search engine every day, it’s critical that you optimize websites for mobile users.
• Mobile searches including the word “Best” have increased by 80% (Source)Similar to the rise of “Near me” keywords via voice search, phrases including “Best” have blown up.
• 40% of mobile visitors will leave your website if it takes more than three seconds to load (Source)We live in what I like to call the “Amazon era.
• It should be no surprise that 40% of mobile users will leave if your website takes more than three seconds to load.
• 72% of consumers visit a store within 5 miles of their current location after performing a local search (Source)This is a fascinating local SEO statistic.
• 40% of all e-commerce sales during holidays come from smartphones (Source)Do you operate an online store?
• 2015 Digital Marketing Stats:The Good, the Bad and the Intriguing – Onimod Global: Good Content marketing in 2015 generates 3 times as many leads as traditional outbound marketing, but costs 62% less.
• 28% of marketers have reduced their advertising budget to fund more digital marketing.
• 84% of top performing companies are using or plan to start using marketing automation by 2015.
• 73% of B2B marketers use video as a content marketing tactic, and 7% of marketers plan on increasing their YouTube marketing.
• 70% of marketers were not confident in their companies ability to measure the return on mobile ad spend.
• 52% of Americans think that most online shopping sites need improvement, whilst 79% of Brazilians2 and 87% of Chinese people think this.
• 83% of consumers reported that they have had a “bad experience with social media marketing.
• However, just 62% of marketers say that LinkedIn is effective, while 50% say the same for Twitter and only 30% of B2B marketers view Facebook as effective.
• December 2014 20% of companies said Digital Marketing is very much separate from the rest of their marketing/advertising efforts, whilst only 14% said they were a ‘digital first organisation.
• 91% of people have unsubscribed from company emails they have previously opted into.
• Only 8% of companies have an email marketing team, despite the fact it is often rated as the platform the delivers the highest ROI of any digital marketing tactic.
• Yet 39% of marketers say they have no strategy for mobile email, and only 11% of emails are optimized for mobile Intriguing 15% of Google searches have never been searched for before.
• 60% of all Internet activity in the US originates from mobile devices and about half of total Internet Traffic flows through mobile apps.
• 50% of all mobile searches are conducted in hopes of finding local results, and 61% of those searches result in a purchase.
• 36 Must-Read Digital Marketing Research Stats: The most used campaign type amon all Facebook campaigns in Brand Awareness – 55% (Wordstream, 1029).
• 30% of marketers are using last-click attribution to conversion (Wordstream, 2019).
• Phones and tablets combined produce 74% of retailer Google search ad clicks in Q1 2019, an eight-point increase from a year earlier (Merkle, Digital Marketing Report Q1 2019).
• 75% of marketers say that their social media marketing efforts have led to increased traffic.
• Even if you are doing everything right, you can still expect to win the sale around 2% of the time (BigCommerce 2017)9.
• For the majority of online transactions, the path from awareness to conversion is very short — 71% of consumers make their purchase within a week of awareness or desire (KPMG Global Survey – the truth about consumers 2017)The path from awareness to conversion is very short.
• Less than half (43%) of companies with online stores report seeing significant traffic from social media (MarketingSherpa ecommerce benchmarks 2017).
• In these countries, more than 38 % of consumers said price and promotions were the factors that drove their most recent product choice (KPMG Global Survey – the truth about consumers 2017)Price and promotions drive 38% consumers to make their most recent product choice.
• Price and promotions drive 38% consumers to make their most recent product choice.
• Price and promotions drive 38% consumers to make their most recent product choice.
• 22% of omnichannel sellers sell through other marketplaces (including Amazon, Etsy, eBay, etc.
• E-commerce is growing 23% year-over-year, yet 46% of American small businesses do not have a website (BigCommerce 2017).
• 53% of marketers say blog content creation is their top inbound marketing priority.
• 54% of B2B marketers rate their content marketing strategy as ‘moderately effective’ (Smart Insights)19.
• Marketers believe research reports (46%) generate leads with the highest customer conversion rate (Ascend2 – Lead Generation to increase conversions report)20.
• Total site sessions produced by organic search declined by about 2% in Q1 2019, down from 2% growth in Q4 2018 (Merkle, Digital Marketing Report Q1 2019).
• Mobile accounted for over 50% of all organic search visits in Q1 2019, the first time passing that milestone (Merkle, Digital Marketing Report Q1 2019).
• 61% of marketers say growing SEO/organic presence is a high inbound marketing priority (HubSpot, State of Inbound 2018).
• Businesses that show up on the first page of results get 92% of consumer traffic (Joal House 2019).
• One-third of respondents (33%) click on a paid search ad because it directly answers their search query (Clutch, Search Engine Marketing:Why People Click on Paid Search Ads, 2019).
• Google display campaigns reach 80% of global internet users (Google Benchmarks and Insights).
• Nearly two-thirds of people (63%) are most likely to click on a Google search advertisement.
• The number of people who are most likely to click on search ads on other sites – Amazon (15%), Youtube (9%), and Bing (6%) – is less than half of the number who are most likely to click on Google search ads (Clutch, Search Engine Marketing:Why People Click on Paid Search Ads, 2019).
• 70% of millennials like it when they can click on a product from an ad.
• People who visit a website after clicking on a PPC ad are 50% more likely to make a purchase compared to visitors who clicked on an organic search result (Wordlead, 2019).
• On average, most businesses see a 200% return on their investment when purchasing Google Ads (Power Traffick, 2019).
• 17+ Content Marketing Stats to Strategize Over in 2022: Let’s jump right into the most important takeaways:Essential Content Marketing Statistics (Editor’s Choice) Content marketing revenues increase by 14% each year.
• In the US, “strategy” is one of the most sought-after skills in the content marketing sphere, appearing in 60% of job offerings.
• Content marketing on social media increases total exposure of their products and services, or so 88% of marketers say.
• For comparison, the global revenue of digital advertising reached $463 billion in 2021, which means content marketing accounts for around 10% of the total marketing revenues.
• (Source:Statista) This is another interesting fact about content marketing, especially for those who plan to start a career in this field—60% of all job postings in the field list “strategy” as a desired skill.
• Social media content generation (53%), and SEO (41%) are next on the list, whereas things like metrics (24%), research (20%), and blogging (14%) don’t appear in job offerings as much.
• In 2017, 37% of North American B2B marketers documented a content marketing tactic, but that number turned into 39% in 2018, 41% in 2019, and 43% in 2020.
• The growing trend is also present in the B2C sector, where 73% of North American marketers develop and publish content, though (like in the B2B sphere) only 42% have it documented.
• Some professionals say content marketing spend should account for approximately 30% of your total marketing investment, but the actual number varies from company to company.
• Though the majority of bloggers write how-to articles, many of them also make use of infographics (30%), conduct interviews (41%), write opinion pieces (44%), and talk about current events and trends (49%).
• 20% of US marketers believe that users actually read the content they develop.
• In fact, 31% of marketers claim users click on the links within the text.
• However, the statistics also show that marketing experts are somewhat less optimistic about their content directly affecting the users, with only 14% of them strongly agreeing with this statement.
• In fact, half of the worldwide industry professionals regard new and returning visitors as crucial metrics, whereas 46% of them pay close attention to conversion rates.
• According to marketers, other important indicators are interactions on social media (32%), time spent on a page (29%), number of downloads (25%), and page scroll (10%).
• For instance, the majority of marketers in the UK agree that emails (65%) and social media content (57%) are the most powerful resources to reach consumers, but opinions are split 50-50 regarding blogs.
• Fewer marketers think ebooks (36%), videos (28%), and infographics (20%) are impactful, whereas webinars, online presentations, and illustrations fall even further down the perceived-effectiveness scale.
• For instance, Facebook ads have an 87% ROI (calculated over a three-year period) whereas online PR can get you a slightly smaller figure (62%).
• As for email campaigns, they’re the third most profitable digital marketing strategy, right behind SEO (748% ROI) and Webinars (430%).
• 88% marketers worldwide believe that content marketing on social media increases the exposure time of their products and services.
• (Source:Statista) Moreover, 79% report that social media content marketing leads to increased traffic, 69% say that it generates leads, and 61% state that it helps build a loyal fanbase.
• 81% of marketing experts consider videos essential aspects of their strategies.
• According to the latest statistics, 73% of marketers use livestream videos, which allows them to establish a more direct contact with their users, whereas 54% of marketers add videos when building the company’s landing page.
• Moreover, content marketing statistics indicate that 47% of companies embed videos in their emails, which is an example of how different subtypes of content marketing can be combined.
• Digital Marketing Statistics (How Many Businesses Use Digital Marketing?) – Colorlib: 4 billion in 2022 Nearly 90% of companies plan to use marketing automation You may also be interested in reviewing our most important advertising statistics collection.
• Nearly 60% of small businesses use digital marketing First, almost 90% of small businesses use some type of advertising, whether traditional or digital, or a mixture of both.
• Moreover, 58% of small businesses use digital marketing, and nearly all plan to invest more of their marketing budgets into it.
• Fun fact, the six most common digital marketing channels small businesses invest in are 1) social media (73%), 2) website (73%), 3) email marketing (57%), 4) SEO (49%), 5) video (34%) and 6) content marketing (32%).
• 72% of the UK’s marketing experts direct their budgets toward online marketing More than two-thirds of the UK’s marketing experts are directing their budgets (most of it) toward online marketing.
• 56% of marketing funds are oriented to digital channels In the annual CMO marketing spending research, Gartner reported that 56% of the budget is allocated to digital channels and 44% to offline channels.
• Furthermore, more than 50% of the digital spending is invested in paid channels (social, search, display and video).
• Nearly 70% of startups use marketing tools, but too few use them properly While 68% of startups use marketing technologies in their organization, only 59% have a strategic plan for using them.
• Unfortunately, 41% of startups without a plan usually say the tech doesn’t meet their business objectives (which is obvious, don’t you think?
• 69% of total ad spending will be mobile by 2027 With mobile becoming bigger each passing year, digital marketing is also revolving more around investing in mobile advertising (more than ever before).
• Almost 81% of digital advertising revenue will be generated through programmatic advertising by 2027 Artificial intelligence and technology are growing in popularity by the day and are already highly valued by marketers all over the world.
• Combine technology and advertising, and you get programmatic advertising, which will account for nearly 81% of total digital advertising revenue by 2027.
• Almost half of the businesses don’t have a defined digital marketing strategy Even though 45% of businesses are doing digital marketing, they don’t have a defined strategy for it.
• Moreover, 38% of businesses have it integrated into their marketing strategy and 17% have a defined strategy laid out in a document.
• Marketers who plan their marketing are 331% more successful than those who don’t Those marketers and marketing teams that plan and document their strategies are more than three times likelier to experience success than those that don’t.
• However, only 17% of marketers always plan their marketing campaigns ahead of time.
• 33% of marketers use paid advertising for brand awareness When growing a business organically, it can take a lot of patience because it can take months, heck, years to see some tangible success.
• Customers are 59% likelier to convert through search after seeing a display ad When potential buyers see a display ad, and they end up doing a search related to it, they are nearly 60% likelier to convert.
• Interestingly, the search activity can rise by 155% after customers see a display ad, while 27% of customers are more prone to search for a business.
• Facebook is the most popular social media platform amongst marketers globally In a global survey, a whopping 90% of respondents said they used Facebook as a marketing platform to advertise their business.
• ) When it comes to the social media advertising market, Facebook’s market share accounted for 16% in 2022.
• Increased exposure is the main benefit of using social media marketing When asked professionals which are the main benefits of social media marketing, 85% reported using it to increase exposure.
• Almost 70% of marketers will increase their video activities on Instagram 68% of worldwide marketers stated they would increase their video activities on Instagram, while one percent less said they would do so on YouTube.
• Over 64% of small businesses use email marketing Although social (Facebook in particular, 69.
• 6%) is still the most preferred way of reaching customers, small businesses’ second method is email marketing (64.
• 45% of marketers send emails weekly Have you ever wondered how often you should send emails to your subscribers?
• 45% of marketers do it weekly, while over 30% do it several times a week.
• Moreover, over 40% reported that Tuesdays are the best time to send marketing emails, while marketers don’t prefer Fridays and weekends.
• 72% of marketers reduce email frequency to those who are no longer opening messages When the stats report that subscribers aren’t opening emails or clicking links, 72.
• 9% of marketers don’t change the frequency, sending the same volume of emails to everyone on their email list.
• A/B testing can increase your ROI by nearly 30% If you’re not satisfied with the performance of your email marketing campaigns, you MUST test and optimize them.
• One of the best and most straightforward approaches is A/B testing (always test one thing at a time), which can increase you’re return by up to 28%.
• Marketing emails influence 59% of subscribers’ purchasing decision Email marketing is powerful.
• Almost 60% of respondents reported that marketing emails influence their purchasing decisions.
• In addition to that, 34% make purchases multiple times monthly but only 3% once or more weekly.
• 9% said they never purchased or that marketing emails have no impact on their purchasing decisions.
• The industry’s average bounce rate is approximately 10% When considering all industries, the average email bounce rate is 10.
• Google’s search engine market share is at 85%+ Google has been leading the search engine market for a long time and is FAR ahead of the competition.
• Its one of the highest current search engine market shares was in 2018 at over 91% but has slightly dropped in 2023 to 85.
• You can increase your CTR by 32% by moving up one position If you jump from fourth to third position in Google, it can mean a whopping increase of 32% in click-through rate.
• Yes, jumping to the first position will have a much higher CTR (74% improvement) than jumping to the fifth one (29% improvement).
• But moving from tenth to ninth position will mean scoring 11% more clicks.
• Fun fact:Less than 6% of pages rank in Google’s top ten search results for at least one search query.
• 3% of websites have no backlinks/referring websites One of the reasons for receiving no traffic from Google is having no backlinks or referring domains – that’s 66.
• Over 90% of businesses use video as a marketing tool Video is getting increasingly popular, thanks to YouTube and other video-sharing platforms.
• Thus, in 2023, 91% of businesses will use video as a marketing tool, a 5% jump from 2022 and a 30% jump from 2016.
• 70% of those not using marketing videos will start in 2023 While there are many reasons for not using video marketing (lack of time, not knowing where to start, too expensive, etc.
• 71% of marketers create social media videos Everyone’s on social media, and everyone’s binging on videos (usually hours per day), so it’s no secret that 71% of marketers created social media videos in 2022.
• Other popular types were explainer videos (70%), presentation videos (50%), testimonial videos (46%), video ads (46%) and teaser videos (42%), to name a few.
• Only 4% spend $20,000 on marketing videos A very tiny percentage (4%) of marketers spend tens of thousands of dollars on creating (the ultimate) marketing videos for their campaigns.
• Spend on videoShare of respondents$0 – $50042%$501 – $1,00018%$1,001 – $5,00025%$5,001 – $10,0009%$10,001 – $20,0003%$20,000+4%How much do marketers spend on a video Source:Wyzowl Influencer Marketing Statistics 38.
• Almost 90% of marketers name Instagram as the most important platform for influencer marketing A survey from 2020 found that 89% of marketers chose Instagram as the most crucial platform for influencer marketing, followed by YouTube in second place (70%).
• 33% of Gen Zers made a purchase based on influencers’ recommendations A HubSpot survey found that around one-third of Gen Zers made a purchase based on influencers’ recommendations in the past three months (when the survey was sent out).
• 1 in 4 marketers benefit from influencer marketing While one in four marketers currently leverage the power of influencer marketing, the rate will likely increase because of the excellent return on investment (9%).
• It’s said that nearly 20% of marketers will invest in this type of marketing for the first time in 2023.
• In addition, 89% of marketers already using influencer marketing plan to invest even more into it.
• Micro-influencers have a higher engagement rate (60%) than macro-influencers The size of the influencers’ following may not be that important.
• After all, micro-influencers have a much better engagement rate (up to 60%) than macro-influencers.
• Fun fact:50% of millennials trust the influencers they follow, while less than 40% trust their favorite celebrities.
• Around 62% of marketers use built-in marketing or CRM software for reporting Marketing reporting (and organization) is key to reap the benefits of it.
• Approximately 62% of marketers reported using built-in marketing or CRM software for reporting (statistics).
• Nearly 90% of companies plan to use marketing automation Shortly, 87% of companies plan to invest in marketing automation, while only 2% say they don’t plan to use it.
• Remember, More than 70% of successful companies use automation because it benefits them in many ways regarding growth.
• 100% of teams where marketing and sales work together use Martech You rarely see 100% mentioned in any statistical roundup, but we’re doing it (for the first time).
• [Infographic] 48 statistics why personalization is important in digital marketing: ─Gartner Only 15% of CMOs believe their company is on the right track with personalization ─McKinsey 42% of B2B marketers report their marketing efforts are not fully personalized.
• ─Folloze 39% of B2B marketers say their personalized marketing strategy is only somewhat advanced, while 15% say their personalization strategy is not at all advanced.
• ─Folloze 95% of retailers state personalization as a top strategic priority (64% say it’s a TOP 3 priority).
• ─McKinsey 36% of retailers state that personalization is necessary just to keep up with industry changes.
• ─McKinsey Revenue impact Personalizing web experiences creates a 19% uplift in sales.
• ─ Instapage 87% of marketers report a measurable lift from personalization, while 54% of marketers report a lift of more than 10%, and 13% report more than 30%.
• ─ Evergage 15% of retailers saw 100-300% increase in new customer conversions.
• ─McKinsey Companies that personalize their content can increase revenue 10% or more in retail.
• ─McKinsey Offering helpful messages requires a depth of customer insight that can increase brand intent, purchase and repurchase rates, and cart size up to 20%.
• ─Gartner 44% of consumers say they are likely to do repeat purchases after a personalized shopping experience.
• ─Segment 49% of shoppers have bought a product they initially didn’t intend to buy after a personalized recommendation.
• Meanwhile, 40% say they bought something more expensive because of a personalized experience.
• ─Segment 21% of retailers saw customer traffic double, while 59% saw traffic increase 25-50%.
• ─McKinsey Customer experience and brand 52% of consumers and 65% of B2B buyers are likely to switch brands/vendors if a company doesn’t personalize their communications to them.
• ─Salesforce 54% of B2B buyers want personalized recommendations across all interactions with a company.
• ─Evergage 98% of marketers agree personalization helps them create a better customer relationship.
• ─Evergage 71% of consumers feel frustrated by the lack of personalization when shopping.
• ─McKinsey Consumer expectations drive personalization efforts in retail and 46% of retailers see personalization as a way to be more customer-centric.
• ─McKinsey 74% of millennials are frustrated with brands that send irrelevant and generic emails.
• ─SmarterHQ 82% of B2B buyers want the same experience as when they’re buying for themselves.
• ─Salesforce 72% of business buyers expect vendors to personalise engagement to their needs.
• ─Salesforce For 84% of customers, being treated like a person, rather than number is very important to win their business.
• ─McKinsey Personalization can make marketing 10-20% more efficient by saving costs.
• ─Alterra Group Personalization can increase marketing spend efficiency by 30%.
• ─Adweek 10% of retailers believe personalized marketing can also help them achieve higher marketing budget efficiency.
• ─McKinsey Challenges Marketing leaders also report that 78% of them struggle to scale personalization, partly due to a lack of key competencies in the organization.
• ─Gartner 54% of B2B marketers believe personalization is harder for B2B than B2C.
• ─Folloze 67% of retailers state gathering, integrating, and synthesizing data needed for personalization as the greatest challenge.
• ─ McKinsey 41% of retailers state delivering personalized marketing was hindered by finding the right solutions partner.
• State Of Content Marketing:125+ Latest Content Marketing Statistics For 2023 – Smemark: According to a recent survey, a massive 72% of marketing professionals today describe their content marketing campaigns as falling between flat-out ineffective and only mildly effective.
• Content marketing usage statistics 82% of marketers are actively investing in content marketing, 10% report not using content marketing, and 8% are unsure if their company uses content marketing.
• (2021) Image Source:Hubspot 60% of marketers report that content marketing generates demand/leads.
• In addition, 70% of marketers say that content marketing helps to educate the audience, and 60% say that it helps build loyalty with existing clients/customers.
• (2021) Image Source:CMI 81% of marketers view content as a core business strategy (2021).
• Image Source:CMI About 66% of marketers expected to increase their content marketing budget in 2022.
• (2022) Image Source:CMI 59% of companies reported having 1-5 employees dedicated to content marketing.
• (2022) Image Source:CMI Content marketing strategy statistics Only 5% of B2B marketers don’t plan to develop a content marketing strategy (2022).
• Image Source:eMarketer 51% of the businesses that invest in content marketing publish content every day (The Manifest).
• (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) Image Source:CMI Only 40% of B2B organizations reported having a documented content marketing strategy.
• (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) Image Source:CMI The top five areas of investment for 2022:video (69%), events (digital, in-person, hybrid) (61%), owned-media assets (57%), paid media (55%), social media management/community building (39%).
• (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) Image Source:CMI The five most common content marketing goals in 2021:creating brand awareness (80%), building credibility/trust (75%), educating audiences (70%), building loyalty with existing customers/clients (60%), and generating demand/leads (60%).
• (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) Image Source:CMI On average, content marketers reported that 69% of the content they create is for the top of the funnel.
• Only 43% of the content they create is for the middle of the funnel, 20% for the bottom, and 18% for retention.
• (The State of Content Marketing 2020 by SEMrush) Image Source:SEMrush Content marketing ROI statistics 72% of the most successful marketers in North America measure the ROI of their content marketing (eMarketer).
• Image Source:eMarketer Of marketers surveyed, 83% measure the success of their content based on website engagement (69%), conversions (67%), website traffic (65%), email engagement (64%), or social media analytics (51%).
• Image Source:CMI In the past 12 months, most B2B marketers reported content marketing being most effective in creating brand awareness (80%), building credibility/trust (75%), and educating audiences (70%).
• (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) 60% of marketers report that content marketing generates demand/leads.
• In addition, 70% of marketers say that content marketing helps to educate the audience, and 60% say that it helps build loyalty with existing clients/customers (CMI).
• Image Source:CMI Content distribution statistics 76% of B2B marketers reported increasing (45%) or maintaining (31%) their paid content distribution investment in the past 12 months.
• (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) Image Source:CMI Social media remains the most popular with 77% of content marketers using paid distribution on various platforms as part of their content strategy.
• (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) The top five B2B organic (non-paid) social media platforms that produced the best results in the last 12 months:LinkedIn (77%), Facebook (37%), Instagram (27%), YouTube (21%), and Twitter (17%).
• (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) More than half (58%) of B2B content marketers said virtual events/webinars/online courses produced the best results for their content marketing in the last 12 months.
• (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) LinkedIn is the social media platform most frequently used for B2B content distribution (75%), followed by Facebook (69%) and Instagram (30%).
• (Demand Gen Report 2021 Content Preferences Survey Report) Image Source:Demand Gen LinkedIn is used by 96% of B2B content marketers (CMI).
• B2C marketers who use at least two organic social media platforms report that Facebook (59%) and Instagram (21%) produce the best overall content marketing results (CMI).
• Only 28% of B2B marketers don’t use paid content distribution channels (CMI).
• Only 28% of B2C marketers don’t use paid content distribution channels (CMI).
• 82% of marketers reported that video has become more important than ever as a medium.
• (State of Video 2022 by Vidyard) Image Source:Vidyard YouTube remains the most widely used video platform for content marketers, with 88% of video marketers planning to use it in 2022.
• (State of Video Marketing 2022 by Wyzowl) The number of marketers using TikTok as a marketing tool has increased 13% from last year to 33%.
• (Statista) Image Source:Statista B2B content marketing statistics Only 4% of B2B marketers don’t plan to develop a content marketing strategy (CMI).
• 87% of B2B marketers prioritize the audience’s informational needs over the organization’s sales/promotional messages (CMI).
• 78% of B2B marketers employ keyword research for SEO while creating content (CMI).
• Only 28% of B2B marketers don’t use paid content distribution channels (CMI).
• LinkedIn is the social media platform most frequently used for B2B content distribution (75%), followed by Facebook (69%) and Instagram (30%).
• (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) Only 40% of B2B organizations reported having a documented content marketing strategy.
• (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) About 50% of all B2B marketers said they outsource content marketing activities, and 65% said their biggest challenge is finding partners with adequate subject matter expertise.
• (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) The top five B2B organic (non-paid) social media platforms that produced the best results in the last 12 months:LinkedIn (77%), Facebook (37%), Instagram (27%), YouTube (21%), and Twitter (17%).
• (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) More than half (58%) of B2B content marketers said virtual events/webinars/online courses produced the best results for their content marketing in the last 12 months.
• Only 6% of B2C marketers don’t plan to develop a content marketing strategy (CMI).
• B2C marketers who use at least two organic social media platforms report that Facebook (59%) and Instagram (21%) produce the best overall content marketing results (CMI).
• Only 28% of B2C marketers don’t use paid content distribution channels (CMI).
• 73% of B2C marketers employ keyword research for SEO while creating content (CMI).
• Organic search statistics 68% of online experiences begin with a search engine (Brightedge).
• 53% of shoppers say they always do research before a purchase to ensure they are making the best possible choice (Google).
• In 2020, 75% of content marketers reported that organic search (aka SEO) was the most effective content marketing tactic they implemented during the year.
• That was followed by updating and repurposing existing content, a strategy used by 61% of respondents.
• (The State of Content Marketing 2020 by SEMrush) 69% of marketers actively invest in SEO (HubSpot).
• 71% of marketers say that targeting strategic keywords is their top SEO tactic (HubSpot).
• (Ahrefs) Image Source:Ahrefs 78% of B2B marketers employ keyword research for SEO while creating content (CMI).
• 73% of B2C marketers employ keyword research for SEO while creating content (CMI).
• How-to articles are the most popular content formats (77%), followed by news and trends (49%), and guides and ebooks (47%) (Statista).
• Long articles/posts stood out as an area where those who are most successful reported better results than respondents overall (43% vs.
• (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) Long reads of 3000+ words get 138% more traffic than those with fewer than 500.
• (The State of Content Marketing 2022 by SEMrush) 78% of articles with fewer than 500 words haven’t been shared, period.
• Articles with seven or fewer words in their H1 average 36% more organic traffic than those with 14 or more words.
• 70% of viewers bought from a brand after seeing it on YouTube (Google).
• (State of Video 2022 by Vidyard) 79% of people say they’ve been convinced to buy or download a piece of software or app by watching a video (Wyzowl).
• That number jumps to 96% when asked if a video convinced them to buy a product or service.
• (State of Video Marketing 2021 by Wyzowl) 96% of people have watched an explainer video to learn more about a product or service (Wyzowl).
• 69% of respondents prefer to learn about a product or service from a short video.
• In fact, articles with more than three videos generated 55% more backlinks than those with none.
• (State of Video Marketing 2021 by Wyzowl) This number was consistent in 2021 but has grown from 85% in 2020, 81% in 2018, 63% in 2017, and 61% in 2016.
• YouTube remains the most widely used video platform for content marketers, with 88% of video marketers planning to use it in 2022.
• (State of Video Marketing 2022 by Wyzowl) The number of marketers using TikTok as a marketing tool has increased 13% from last year to 33%.
• (State of Video Marketing 2022 by Wyzowl) A whopping 92% of marketers who use video say that it’s an important part of their content marketing strategy.
• (State of Video Marketing 2022 by Wyzowl) An overwhelming 92% of video marketers feel the level of noise and competition has increased in the last year.
• (State of Video Marketing 2021 by Wyzowl) 91% of marketers feel the pandemic has made video more important for brands (Wyzowl).
• (State of Video Marketing 2022 by Wyzowl) 86% say video has helped them generate leads.
• (State of Video Marketing 2022 by Wyzowl) 49% of video marketers say video has reduced the number of support calls they’ve received – up 6% from last year.
• (State of Video Marketing 2022 by Wyzowl) 94% say video has helped increase user understanding of their product or service.
• (State of Video Marketing 2022 by Wyzowl) 81% of video marketers say video has directly helped increase sales, and 87% of video marketers say video gives them a good return on their investment.
• (State of Video Marketing 2021 by Wyzowl) About 91% of marketers say their webinars have been a success, making it the most effective video marketing channel, according to State of Video Marketing 2021 by Wyzowl.
• 82% of marketers reported that video has become more important than ever as a medium.
• (State of Video 2022 by Vidyard) 93% of content marketers believe that video converts the same or better than other forms of content.
• (State of Video 2022 by Vidyard) About 74% of B2B consumers are only willing to spend 10 minutes or less watching video content, while 44% won’t spend more than 5 minutes.
• (Demand Gen Report 2020 Content Preferences Survey Report) About 35% are willing to watch 30-60 minutes if it is a webinar.
• 9% of B2B decision-makers use YouTube to research purchases (Hootsuite).
• 51% of B2B marketers reported webinars/webcasts/web series delivering the best results for them in the past 12 months.
• 80% of podcast listeners listen to all or most of each episode (Podcast Insights).
• Posts with more than seven images get 116% more organic traffic than articles containing just text.
• (The State of Content Marketing 2022 by SEMrush) Audience behavior and preferences statistics 55% of respondents said they relied even more on content to research and inform purchase decisions than they did in 2021.
• (Demand Gen Report 2022 Content Preferences Survey Report) A majority of B2B buyers (62%) said they engage with 3-7 pieces of content before connecting with a salesperson, and 11% said they typically consume more than seven pieces of content.
• (Demand Gen Report 2022 Content Preferences Survey Report) 51% of B2B buyers reported that “using data and research to support claims” made content more memorable and more likely to trigger a sales call for them.
• (Demand Gen Report 2022 Content Preferences Survey Report) 39% of B2B buyers reported that B2B vendors could improve their content by curbing sales messages.
• (Demand Gen Report 2022 Content Preferences Survey Report) 37% of B2B buyers reported that B2B vendors could improve their effectiveness by creating shorter content.
• (Demand Gen Report 2022 Content Preferences Survey Report) 41% of B2B buyers reported putting more emphasis on the trustworthiness of the source of content.
• (Demand Gen Report 2022 Content Preferences Survey Report) About 43% of people said they find research/survey reports to be most valuable when researching B2B purchases.
• (Demand Gen Report 2022 Content Preferences Survey Report) 52% of B2B buyers report that they would like to see content organized by topic according to issue/pain point, 51% by topics, 46% by industry/vertical, and 42% by business role.
• (Demand Gen Report 2022 Content Preferences Survey Report) In the early stages of their buyer’s journeys, 81% of B2B buyers report enjoying listicles, 72% infographics, 66% blogs, and 62% videos.
• (Demand Gen Report 2021 Content Preferences Survey Report) In the mid-stage of their buying journey, 50% want to see assessments, 49% research and reports, and 46% case studies.
• (Demand Gen Report 2021 Content Preferences Survey Report) Case studies (35%), third-party reports (31%), and assessments (18%) are preferred in the late stages.
• (Demand Gen Report 2021 Content Preferences Survey Report) About 74% of B2B consumers are only willing to spend 10 minutes or less watching video content, while 44% won’t spend more than 5 minutes.
• (State of Video Marketing 2022 by Wyzowl) When asked how they’d most like to learn about a product or service, 73% of respondents said they’d prefer to watch a short video than read a blog post, view an infographic, or watch a webinar, among other things.
• (State of Video Marketing 2022 by Wyzowl) 85% of people want to see more videos from brands in 2021 (Wyzowl).
• 53% of shoppers say they always do research before a purchase to ensure they are making the best possible choice (Google).
• Sexism, price deflation, social media spend:5 killer stats to start your week – Marketing Week: Majority of filmmakers say the ad industry is sexist New research reveals 84% of filmmakers – 76% of males and 87% of females – think the ad industry is sexist, while 73% of female directors say they’ve witnessed sexism first hand while working in the sector.
• Another 56% of female directors claim they would have more of a chance at winning a brief if they were a man.
• And only 19% of female filmmakers say they have not been impacted by the gender pay gap.
• Currently, 93% of ads are made by men while just 12% of creative directors in London are female.
• Additionally, 71% of filmmakers [male and female] believe a lack of female directors is having a negative impact on the creative work in the ad industry.
• 7% of marketers suggesting they are able to prove its impact quantitatively, and 39.
• 3% of marketers who said they were able to quantify results last year, and the 45% who were unable to prove social’s impact.
• Three-quarters of consumers would switch to a new brand for cheaper prices Three-quarters of consumers say they would consider switching to a new brand if it offered cheaper prices (76%), better quality (76%), a discount (72%) or enabled them to save time (60%).
• This is despite just 24% saying they consider brands they haven’t tried before when making new purchases, indicating customers tend to stick with what they know.
• TV (45%) and online search (43%) are the key ways for consumers to find out about a new product or service.
• Visual Content Marketing Statistics:52 Must-Know Insights: Research indicates that articles with images receive 94% more views than those without, while videos on landing pages can increase conversion rates by 80%.
• Furthermore, 65% of senior marketing executives believe that visual assets (photos, videos, illustrations) are core to how marketers communicate their brand story.
• 65% of people are visual learners, making visual content an essential part of any marketing strategy.
• Moreover, marketing statistics show that visual content receives 94% more views than text-only content, highlighting its effectiveness in capturing audience attention.
• Posts with images on social media platforms also receive 150% more engagement compared to those without visuals, according to marketing statistics.
• Furthermore, marketers utilizing visual content marketing strategies experience a 27% higher click-through rate, demonstrating how visual elements can drive user interaction and conversion rates.
• The demand for visual content among marketers has surged by 40% in the past year, reflecting its growing significance in brand communication and engagement strategies, according to marketing statistics.
• Brands that incorporated compelling visuals into their storytelling witnessed a remarkable 20% increase in customer engagement during these challenging times, according to marketers.
• Moreover, marketers reported that virtual events and webinars using engaging visual content experienced an unprecedented surge in attendance by an astounding 200%, according to a source.
• The Power of Video Marketing ROI Impact Businesses that invest in visual content marketing, according to marketers, have a 63% higher chance of achieving positive ROI, as reported by the source.
• Visual content increases conversion rates by an average of 86% according to marketers.
• Companies that use video marketing, according to marketers, grow their revenue 49% faster than those that don’t.
• This is evident from the substantial increase in conversion rates in the market, with an average boost of 86% as a source, showcasing the effectiveness of visual elements in driving consumer action.
• Furthermore, businesses leveraging video marketing experience accelerated revenue growth, outpacing their counterparts by 49%.
• Interactive visuals, such as quizzes or polls, boost user engagement in the market by up to 80%.
• Incorporating relevant images into articles significantly amplifies their visibility and reach, garnering a staggering 94% more total views compared to text-only articles, according to visual content marketing statistics.
• Interactive visuals, like quizzes or polls embedded within content, play a pivotal role in boosting user engagement levels substantially upwards by up to an impressive margin of 80% in the market.
• Over 50% of consumers say they are more likely to purchase after watching a shoppable video, according to visual content marketing statistics.
• Brands using shoppable videos report an average increase in sales of 30% according to visual content marketing statistics.
• Websites with visually appealing layouts experience a 38% lower bounce rate in the market compared to those without.
• Furthermore, visual content has been found to increase the average time spent on a website by an impressive 47% in the market.
• Moreover, tweets accompanied by visual content receive an astounding 150% more retweets than those comprising text only.
• It’s been found that visual posts generate an astounding 650% higher engagement in the market than text-only ones.
• Posts with relevant visuals in the market also boast a 180% higher engagement rate compared to those without.
• Businesses leveraging Instagram Stories experience a substantial increase in reach and engagement in the visual content market – typically ranging from 15% to as high as 25%.
• A staggering 73% of consumers express their inclination to purchase from brands that use high-quality images in the visual content market.
• 5% increase in conversion rates, showcasing the power of authentic visuals in driving consumer action.
• Research indicates that consumers are a striking 85% more likely to purchase after watching a product video, emphasizing the persuasive influence of videos in conveying product details effectively in the visual content market.
• Studies reveal that individuals can retain up to 65% of product information three days after exposure if it is presented visually—a testament to the effectiveness and memorability of visual stimuli.
• High-quality product images hold immense potential for driving conversions, as they result in an impressive 63% higher conversion rate compared to lower-quality or non-visual representations.
• By 2022, 84% of communications will be visual, making it the most important type of content for 32% of marketers.
• Implementing a well-thought-out strategy centered around visual content can significantly impact website traffic, potentially leading to an increase of up to 300%.
• Statistics show that tweets with visual content receive 18% more clicks, 89% more likes, and a staggering 150% more retweets than text-only tweets.
• Including visual content in a tweet can increase engagement by a substantial 35% in the market.
• Moreover, tweets with images have a remarkable 55% higher chance of being retweeted compared to those without visuals.
• Moreover, consumers are found to be 71% more likely to make a purchase based on social media referrals that include visual content such as photos or videos.
• Research indicates that users spend 10% more time viewing video ads compared to static ads, highlighting the captivating nature of videos in retaining viewer interest.
• For instance, incorporating engaging visuals can increase the time spent on a webpage by up to 100%.
• Studies show that memes can increase brand awareness by up to 60% among these demographics.
• Brands that successfully incorporate memes into their marketing strategy experience a significant 55% increase in engagement.
• Live video streaming has gained immense popularity, with 82% of internet users preferring this dynamic form of content over traditional social media posts.
• Approximately 71% of consumers anticipate encountering AR applications while browsing products online or in-store.
• Strategies for Visual Content Success Implementing Tactics Optimizing images for SEO can significantly boost organic search visibility, with a potential increase of up to 63%.
• Studies show that posts with images receive 94% more views than those without.
• Video marketing has proven to be highly effective, with 85% of businesses using video reporting as an effective tool.
• Social media platforms heavily favor visual content, with visuals generating 650% higher engagement than text-only posts.
• Articles containing relevant images get 94% more total views compared to those without visuals.
• Social Media Marketing ROI Statistics [Fresh Research] • Gitnux: 40% of social media marketers believe paid advertising is more effective than organic reach for ROI.
• 46% of marketers say their main challenge in measuring social media ROI is determining the appropriate metrics to use.
• Posts with images produce 650% higher engagement rates than text-only posts in social media marketing.
• On average, companies allocate 9% of their marketing budgets to social media marketing.
• B2B marketers see having the wrong target audience as the biggest barrier to ROI on social media (26%).
• 51% of retailers say social media drives at least 10% of their website traffic.
• The Most Important Statistics 83% of marketers say that social media return on investment (ROI) is difficult to measure.
• Social Media Marketing Roi Statistics Overview 40% of social media marketers believe paid advertising is more effective than organic reach for ROI.
• 46% of marketers say their main challenge in measuring social media ROI is determining the appropriate metrics to use.
• Posts with images produce 650% higher engagement rates than text-only posts in social media marketing.
• On average, companies allocate 9% of their marketing budgets to social media marketing.
• B2B marketers see having the wrong target audience as the biggest barrier to ROI on social media (26%).
• 51% of retailers say social media drives at least 10% of their website traffic.
• 2022 Social Media Usage Statistics in the UAE – Award-Winning Marketing Agency in Dubai: According to a new study reported by the Telecommunications and Digital Government Regulatory Authority, the UAE has a usage rate of 106% — the only place on the globe to surpass 100%.
• 5%) More people spend their time accessing these social media platforms on their mobile devices than on desktop or laptop computers.
• So far, nearly 70% of total internet users use more than one social network.
• At least 80% of people active on these social networks are on Facebook at least once a day.
• 70% Social Media Advertising in the UAE Social media advertising is huge in the UAE, just like in other countries.
• Most of these users are in the 25 to 34 age group, with 30% accounting for men and 13.
• Access account.hibu.com. Hibu Performance Dashboard | Hibu digital marketing results, stats and tools: 1 s 45/100 10% TBT (Total Blocking Time) Value550 ms 54/100 30% CLS (Cumulative Layout Shift) Value0.
• We found that 66% of them (27 requests) were addressed to the original Account.
• Requests Breakdown Number of requests can be reduced by 20 (65%) Requests Now 31 After Optimization 11 Images JavaScript CSS The browser has sent 31 CSS, Javascripts, AJAX and image requests in order to completely render the main page of Account Hibu.
• Visual Content Marketing Statistics [Fresh Research] • Gitnux: 60% of marketers predict that the use of infographics will increase in 2021 compared to 2020.
• 74% of marketers say that more than 70% of their content contains visual elements.
• 54% of consumers want to see more video content from a brand or business they support.
• 72% of marketer respondents said video content converts more than written content.
• The search volume for “infographic” increased by 800% between 2010 and 2012.
• Visual assets get 40 times more shares, articles with images receive 94% more views, and videos result in 1200% more shares.
• About 80% of marketers use visuals, infographics increase traffic by up to 12%, and 60% predict more infographic use.
• Visuals grab attention and help comprehension, as 90% of information processed is visual and 65% of people are visual learners.
• Around 95% prefer short videos for purchase decisions, and 74% of content has imagery or graphics.
• Tweets with images get 150% higher retweets, and Facebook posts with pictures see 2.
• Videos are used by 85% for promotion and 72% believe they convert better.
• Visuals in blog posts hold attention 37 seconds longer, and emails with images have 46% higher click-through rates.
• Infographics are shared 3 times faster, with search volume increasing 800% from 2010 to 2012.
• 60% of marketers predict that the use of infographics will increase in 2021 compared to 2020.
• Knowing that 65% of people are visual learners, it is essential for marketers to create content that appeals to this demographic in order to maximize their reach and engagement.
• 74% of marketers say that more than 70% of their content contains visual elements.
• 54% of consumers want to see more video content from a brand or business they support.
• 72% of marketer respondents said video content converts more than written content.
• The search volume for “infographic” increased by 800% between 2010 and 2012.
• Content Marketing Statistics:The Facts You Can’t Ignore: (Forbes) Email campaigns (87%) and educational content (77%) are the top content marketing methods B2B marketing teams use to nurture their audience.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 57% of B2B buyers make their purchase decision before ever speaking to a salesperson.
• (SERP Watch) 91% of B2B marketers use content marketing to reach customers.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 72% of marketers who have used content marketing say it has increased their number of leads.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 69% of content is created for the top of the funnel.
• 43% is created for the middle, 20% for the bottom, and 18% for retention.
• (SEMRush) After reading custom content, 82% of consumers feel more positive about a brand.
• (HubSpot) 75% of content marketers say they drive better ROI when they add visuals to their content.
• (Brightedge) Google is responsible for more than 90% of the world’s search queries online.
• (SparkToro) 95% of people only look at the first page of search results.
• (Brafton) 53% of shoppers say they always do online research before making a purchase to ensure they are making the best possible choice.
• (Bright Edge Research) 75% of brands say the most efficient content marketing tactic they use is search engine optimization.
• Companies with blogs generate 67% more leads per month than companies without.
• (Demand Metric) Companies that blog receive 97% more links to their website.
• (SERP Watch) 70% of people prefer to get information from blogs than traditional advertisements.
• (Demand Metric) 56% of marketers who leverage blogging say it’s effective and 10% say it generates the biggest return on investment.
• (HubSpot) How-to articles are the most popular content formats (77%), followed by news and trends (49%), and guides and ebooks (47%).
• (Medium) 54% of decision-makers say they spend more than one hour per week reading and reviewing thought-leadership content.
• (Siegemedia) 55% of marketers say blog content creation is their number one inbound marketing priority.
• (HubSpot) 47% of B2B customers view three to five posts before talking to a salesperson.
• (Curata) 65% of companies that succeed in content marketing run content audits more than twice a year.
• (Statista) 72% of consumers prefer their marketing communication to be via email over other channels.
• (SERP Watch) 87% of B2B marketers say email is one of their top free organic distribution channels.
• (Content Marketing Institute) Segmented emails have conversion rates 208% higher than batch-and-blast.
• (SERP Watch) Marketers who use segmented email campaigns noted as much as a 760% increase in revenue.
• (HubSpot) 74% of Baby Boomers think email is the most personal channel to communicate with brands.
• (Content Writing Jobs) Fridays see the highest email open rates (nearly 19%), compared to the lowest open rates (17%) on Saturdays.
• (Statista) 31% of B2B marketers say email newsletters are the best way to nurture leads.
• Can you believe that content marketers who use video get around 66% more leads per year and adding video content to your website can drive an 80% increase in conversion rates?
• (HubSpot) 75% of consumers aged 18-34 watch videos at least once daily.
• (Aberdeen Group) 26% of consumers are less likely to finish a video if they need to turn their phones horizontally to watch.
• (Google) 46% of content marketers who leverage short-form video consider it effective.
• (HubSpot) 60% of people would rather buy a product recommended by a YouTuber than one recommended by a movie or TV star.
• (SERP Watch) 88% of video marketers feel that video gives them a positive ROI.
• (Wyzowl) 39% of viewers would never watch a video from a brand again if they had a negative viewing experience on mobile.
• (Animoto) 79% of people say they’ve been convinced to buy or download a piece of software or app by watching a video.
• (Wyzowl) 43% of video marketers say video has reduced the number of support calls they’ve received.
• (Wyzowl) 96% of people have watched an explainer video to learn more about a product or service.
• (Oberlo) 54% of Gen Z and 49% of Millenials say social media is their preferred channel for ad influence.
• (Hubspot) 92% of B2B marketers prefer LinkedIn to other social networks.
• (SERP Watch) LinkedIn is 277% more effective at lead generation than Facebook or Twitter.
• (Hubspot) 82% of B2B markers report finding the greatest success on LinkedIn.
• (LinkedIn Marketing Solutions) Over 46% of all social media traffic to company websites comes from LinkedIn.
• (LinkedIn) 79% of people say that user-generated content on social media significantly impacts their purchasing decisions.
• (Stackla) 64% of consumers report that watching a marketing video on Facebook has influenced a purchase decision.
• (Hubspot) 85% of marketers rank short-form videos as the most effective type of social media content.
• (DataBox) 93% of Twitter community members are open to brands getting involved in the conversation, such as providing help and support.
• (Instagram) Answering a complaint on social media can increase customer advocacy by 25%.
• (Convince & Convert) 83% of people use Instagram to discover new products and services and 87% said they took a specific action, like making a purchase, after seeing product information.
• 45% of global internet users between 25-34 listen to podcasts (BuzzSprout) 43% of monthly podcast users listen to an entire podcast episode (Edison Research) Spotify is the most popular online audio brand.
• (Podcast Insights 2021) 65% of podcast listeners listen to an entire podcast episode.
• (Forbes) 78% of B2B buyers use case studies when researching purchases.
• (SERP Watch) 76% of buyers say they will share information in exchange for a white paper, 63% for an e-book, and 57% for a case study.
• Approximately 80% of companies that do PPC marketing use Google AdWords.
• PPC visitors are 50% more likely to complete a desired action, such as call, book, or purchase, compared to organic visitors.
• Over 65% of people trust Google ads compared to ads on Facebook or TikTok.
• Approximately 83% of Millennials open text messages within the first 90 seconds of receipt.
• Over 80% of consumers have received marketing SMS messages from a business.
• Over 75% of consumers have a positive perception of companies that offer SMS communication.
• Source:G2 Not only that, but also 60% of consumers believe businesses should contact them more through text messages.
• Effective Dental Marketing for Millennials and Gen Z Patients Content Marketing Per lead, inbound marketing costs 62% less than outbound marketing tactics, such as PPC ads.
• Source:B2B Content Marketing Trends Report Approximately 70% of consumers read reviews before deciding on a product/ business.
• Source:Think with Google A whopping 95% of search engine users never go beyond page one of the search results.
• Source:Fresh Chalk In 92% of the searches that contain a city and a business category, Yelp makes it into the top five results.
• 66% of marketers believe that traditional advertising is less effective than digital advertising.

• Nearly 60% of adults prefer to receive marketing information via email.
• Over 75% of consumers prefer to see ads that are relevant to them instead of generic ads for a product.
• 85% of marketers believe that targeting and personalization in digital marketing campaigns is more effective than traditional marketing.
• In 2021, digital marketing’s share of total ad spending worldwide is set to reach 50%.
• 45% of small businesses invest in both digital and print marketing channels.
• Consumers spend 40% of their media time on digital media, surpassing traditional media.
• 72% of consumers prefer to receive marketing content via email rather than social media.
• Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates approximately 3 times as many leads.
• 77% of consumers stated that they have been convinced to buy a product after watching a video, underscoring the power of digital marketing.
• The Most Important Statistics 88% of businesses will engage in digital marketing in 2021, leaving only 12% solely focused on traditional marketing.
• Consumers are 68% more likely to open an email about entertainment, events, or hobbies than traditional business correspondence.
• Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics Overview 66% of marketers believe that traditional advertising is less effective than digital advertising.
• Nearly 60% of adults prefer to receive marketing information via email.
• Over 75% of consumers prefer to see ads that are relevant to them instead of generic ads for a product.
• 85% of marketers believe that targeting and personalization in digital marketing campaigns is more effective than traditional marketing.
• In 2021, digital marketing’s share of total ad spending worldwide is set to reach 50%.
• 45% of small businesses invest in both digital and print marketing channels.
• Consumers spend 40% of their media time on digital media, surpassing traditional media.
• 72% of consumers prefer to receive marketing content via email rather than social media.
• Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates approximately 3 times as many leads.
• 77% of consumers stated that they have been convinced to buy a product after watching a video, underscoring the power of digital marketing.
• 88% of businesses will engage in digital marketing while only 12% focus solely on traditional methods.
• Consumers are 68% more likely to open emails about entertainment than business correspondence and 66% of marketers believe that traditional advertising is less effective than its digital counterpart.
• Additionally, nearly 60% of adults prefer email as their primary source for receiving information from brands and over 75 percent want ads tailored specifically towards them instead of generic content.
• 45 B2B Content Marketing Statistics You Should Know in 2023: The B2B marketing teams with the highest success rates spend 40% of the marketing budget on content marketing.
• According to the Content Marketing Institute, 93% of content on B2B sites receives no links from other sites.
• 77% of B2B agencies and companies offer an email newsletter as a major part of their content marketing plan.
• 5% of American companies with 100 or more employees utilized digital content marketing strategies, while 87% of B2B companies used digital content marketing in the same year.
• The top 5 formats that B2B marketers used as a channel to distribute content for marketing purposes are email (93%), social media (92%), blog posts (79%) real-life and in-person events (56%), virtual events, and webinars (55%).
• Surprisingly, only 42% of B2B content marketing conduct audience research by speaking directly with their customers.
• As per Search Engine Watch, 66% of all B2B marketers use paid channels to distribute their content.
• 60% of customers consider inquiring and buying a product after reading any kind of content about it, based on a study done by Demand Metric.
• 92% of B2B and B2C marketers think of the content they produce as their most valuable marketing asset.
• Although content marketing costs 62% less money than traditional marketing techniques.
• 76% of people expect brands to contribute to their well being and quality of life.
• 58% of content provided to customers is considered hollow and meaningless.
• The top 2 most outsourced content marketing activities is writing with 44% and graphic designing with 41%.
• 62% of B2B decision-makers still prefer to consume content on a desktop or laptop.
• Your website is still the best place to host your content, with 63% of survey respondents going directly to a company’s website when looking for information.
• B2B companies that offer consistent blogging have 67% more leads monthly, compared to companies that don’t blog regularly.
• According to 52% of B2B marketers, blogging is the most essential tactic for their success in content marketing.
• It takes 3 to 5 pieces of content before 40% of B2B buyers reach out to the seller.
• 75% of B2B marketers are more likely to use blogging for their social media content, while 61% of B2C marketers include blogs in their content.
• Only 2% of articles created by B2B brands result in 75% of the social shares of all B2B content.
• In 2018, it was found that 49% of B2C marketers rely on outsourcing agencies to create their content.
• On average, blogs with relevant images receive 94% more views compared to articles without images.
• 68% of B2B and B2C marketers say that they plan to add more images in the future.
• Bloggers who spend longer time creating their blog post (about 6 hours) are 56% more likely to receive better content marketing results than those who spend less time on their content creation.
• 50% of bloggers who create long-form blog posts are more likely to expect better content marketing results.
• Numbers in headlines are a work of magic, 36% of readers are more likely to pick and click an article with a number in the main title and headlines.
• Social media comes third as the most effective type of content that B2B marketers use in their content marketing at 41%.
• More than 70% of B2B marketers who’ve been using social media for the last 12 months reported that it helped them improve sales.
• 45% of B2B marketers use social media sharing to measure the success of their marketing strategy.
• However, 60% still believe that web traffic is the golden standard and 51% rely on sales lead quality.
• 7 seconds looking at a given piece of content In 2018, 58% of customers reported that they prefer visual types of content on social media rather than written ones.
• In the same research, 59% of consumers said they’re looking for posts that teach them something new.
• 80% of social media marketers said that increasing their brand awareness is their main goal of social media marketing.
• 84% of B2B buyers constantly share business-related posts and content on LinkedIn.
• 78% of B2B marketing companies think that LinkedIn is the most powerful social marketing media platform for their type of content.
• 55% of B2B buyers around the world find video the most useful type of content.
• The B2B marketing teams with the highest success rates spend [40%](https://contentmarketinginstitute.
• 5% of American companies with 100 or more employees utilized digital content marketing strategies, while [87%](https://www.
• pdf) that B2B marketers used as a channel to distribute content for marketing purposes are email (93%), social media (92%), blog posts (79%) real-life and in-person events (56%), virtual events, and webinars (55%).
• As per Search Engine Watch, 66% of all B2B marketers use paid channels to distribute their content.
• com/blog/how-to-outsource-content-writing) is writing with 44% and graphic designing with [41%](https://www.
• Your website is still the best place to host your content, with [63%](https://www.
• It takes 3 to 5 pieces of content before [40%](http://e61c88871f1fbaa6388d-c1e3bb10b0333d7ff7aa972d61f8c669.
• com/social-media-marketing-industry-report-2019/) of B2B marketers are more likely to use blogging for their social media content, while 61% of B2C marketers include blogs in their content.
• Only 2% of articles created by B2B brands result in [75%](https://backlinko.
• Bloggers who spend longer time creating their blog post (about 6 hours) are [56%](https://www.
• Social media comes third as the most effective type of content that B2B marketers use in their content marketing at [41%](https://contentmarketinginstitute.
• However, 60% still believe that web traffic is the golden standard and 51% rely on sales lead quality.
• Content Marketing Statistics You Should Know: B2C companies spend 22% of their total marketing budget on content marketing.
• However, most successful companies spend closer to 40% of their total marketing budget on content marketing.
• About 86% of businesses engage in blogging, while 67% of businesses send emails.
• 1% higher win rates than those without a content strategy (CSO Insights).
• 80% of people prefer learning about a company through custom content (Demand Metric).
• B2C Stats on Content Marketing When it comes to strategy for B2C content marketers, a report by the Content Marketing Institute (CMI B2C) notes:71% of B2C marketers agree that their company needs a content marketing strategy.
• Meanwhile, 20% of marketers plan to have a documented content strategy within 12 months.
• Insofar as the preferred content marketing format for B2C marketers, 94% chose social media marketing, and 80% prefer blogs and short articles.
• 39% of B2C content marketers say their companies are in a sophisticated or mature phase of content marketing maturity.
• The top strategic goals that B2C marketers have achieved through content marketing in the last 12 months are:create brand awareness (84%), educate their audience (75%), build credibility and trust (65%), and generate demand and leads (61%).
• But interestingly, only 48% have used content to directly generate sales and revenue.
• According to the B2B Content Marketing:Benchmarks, Budgets and Trends report by the Content Marketing Institute (CMI B2B):43% of B2B marketers have a “documented” content marketing strategy.
• 36% of B2B marketers have a content marketing strategy, but have not documented it.
• Another 17% plan to have a content marketing strategy in the next 12 months.
• As far as strategic goals, additional B2B marketing stats from the Content Marketing Institute are:86% of B2B content marketers rated creating awareness of their brand as their biggest goal over the past 12 months.
• The answers may surprise you:For B2C content marketers, only 51% measure ROI on content marketing, according to the Content Marketing Institute (CMI B2C).
• Other top metrics are website traffic (80%), website engagement (79%), and social media analytics (76%).
• For B2B marketers, the good news is that 81% are using metrics to track their performance.
• Email opens, clicks, and other email stats are the next most common tracked metric at 86%.
• But ROI for content marketing is proven and pays off, as per the following statistics:The cost of acquiring a new customer through content is around 15% less than through paid channels for subscription-based businesses (Profit Well).
• Subscription-based businesses using content see 5-10% better retention rates (Profit Well).
• 96% of marketers find content marketing to be effective for their companies (Zazzle).
• For B2B company content marketing budgets (per CMI B2B):47% had an annual content marketing budget of less than $100,000.
• For small businesses of under 100 employees, about 57% of those had budgets under $100,000.
• Even more interesting:32% of small businesses did not have any established budget for content marketing.
• 5% of people use online search to gather information about a product or company.
• A 2020 report from SEMrush explains:Creating content that generates quality leads is the biggest challenge for 54% of marketers.
• 60% of marketers do not outsource content creation at all, but apparently do it all themselves.
• The report also reveals that 94% of marketers use social media content to raise awareness.
• For example, 60% of smartphone users have reached out to a business directly using the search results (Think with Google).
• About 86% of B2B marketers use their organization’s blog to distribute marketing, according to the Content Marketing Institute’s B2B Content Marketing:Benchmarks, Budgets and Trends 2020 report.
• Companies that blog receive 55% more internet users to their websites than those that don’t blog (HubSpot).
• According to an Edelman research survey:Around 88% of decision-makers think thought leadership is an effective tool to enhance an organization’s perceptions.
• However, only 17% of respondents rate the quality of thought leadership they read as very good or excellent.
• Here are useful email marketing statistics:87% of B2B marketers use emails in their content marketing (CMI B2B).
• 80% of organizations believe that email marketing is effective to increase customer retention (Emarsys).
• 53 to 73% of millennials prefer communications from businesses via emails (HubSpot).
• Almost half of B2B marketing experts use white paper marketing, with 47% saying they used white papers in the last 12 months (CMI B2B).
• 57% of B2B buyers said they are willing to share information in exchange for case studies, 63% would do so for e-books, 66% would share information in exchange for third-party or analyst reports, 76% would do so for white papers and 79% would share information in exchange for a webinar.
• Meanwhile, 19% of buyers will exchange information for podcasts and videos, and 24% of buyers will do the same for infographics (Demand Gen Report).
• And running content marketing campaigns costs 62% less than traditional marketing.
• According to Wyzowl’s Video Marketing Statistics 2020 report (Wyzowl), here are some video content marketing stats:87% of those surveyed said video marketing has increased traffic to their websites, and 81% of respondents said video marketing increases the time visitors spend on the page.
• 96% of people have said that they have watched an explainer video to understand a product or service.
• 87% of respondents say that video marketing has increased traffic to their websites, and 81% of respondents say videos increase the time visitors spend on the page.
• Animoto research says:About 88% of video marketers are satisfied with the ROI of video marketing efforts on social media.
• Also, 93% of video marketers say that posting a video on social channels leads to acquiring a customer.
• As a result, 59% of users spend more time listening to podcasts than they do on social media.
• 3% of respondents said they bought an item after listening to an ad on a podcast.
• 3% of podcasters state that marketing and building an audience are among their top challenges.
• What’s more, according to The Infinite Dial report on podcasting from Edison Research, the appetite for this particular content marketing platform is growing:Consider that 75% of Americans age 12+ are now aware of podcasting, which is 5% up from 2019.
• 49% of respondents said visuals are very important to their marketing strategy.
• 74% of marketers said more than 70% of their content includes some form of visual.
• 62% of respondents said they create visuals for blogs or landing pages.
• So it is no surprise that the most commonly used visuals are stock images (40%).
• Other frequently used visuals are original graphics (34%), videos and presentations (14%), and charts and data visualizations (8%).
• 72% of marketers spend less than 10 hours each week producing visual content.
• 36% of marketers use an online tool or graphic maker to create this type of content.
• Tweets with images receive 150% more engagement than those tweets without images (Buffer).
• The breakdown is as follows for small businesses with under 100 employees:44% have no full-time person assigned to marketing with content.
• B2B companies spend 26% of their total marketing budget on content marketing.
• B2C companies spend 22% of their total marketing budget on content marketing.
• However, most successful companies spend closer to 40% of their total marketing budget on content marketing.
• About 86% of businesses engage in blogging, while 67% of businesses send emails.
• 15 Content Marketing Statistics that Prove the Value of Your Efforts: 8% of internet users were blocking advertising on their connected devices.
• (Demand Metric) 70% of people would rather get information about a company or learn something from an article or blog post rather than from a traditional advertisement.
• For instance, only 22% of millennials want to see email from a brand they support, while 57% of 45 – 54-year-olds do.
• Conversely, 52% of millennials want to see video from brands they support while only 25% of those 45-54 do.
• 71% of a B2B respondent pool stated they reviewed a blog while on their buying journey.
• 32% of consumers check out a brand’s social media presence before checking out their website.
• Podcasts were cited by 64% of B2B respondents as a valuable content format in the early stage of the buying journey — only falling short of infographics (76%) (Demand Gen Report) 6.
• Cisco projected that more than 80% of all Internet traffic will be video by 2021—which means brands definitely need a video content strategy.
• When asked how they’d most like to learn about a new product, over two-thirds (68%) of consumer said a short video would be best, way ahead of text-based articles (15%),infographics (4%) presentations and pitches (4%) ebooks and manuals (3%).
• 65% of B2B content consumers strongly agree they have higher preferences for credible content from industry influencers.
• 73% of consumers have been impacted by a brand’s social media presence when making a purchase decision.
• Content marketing generates over three times as many leads as outbound marketing and costs 62% less.
• (Demand Metric) Content marketing generates over three times as many leads as outbound marketing and costs 62% less.
• 75 Digital Marketing Quotes, Facts and Statistics: Click to Tweet Source:Coschedule The best time for emails to be opened is after work hours 6pm-11pm Click to Tweet Source:Campaign Monitor Emails with personalized subject lines are 50% more likely to be opened.
• Click to Tweet Source:Hubspot Mobile ad blocking has increased 90% year-over-year.
• Click to Tweet Source:Hubspot Nearly 75% of digital ad spending to be mobile by 2019 Click to Tweet Source:Marketing Land Chapter 4:Content Marketing Statistics Blog posts are becoming more visual and longer.
• Click to Tweet Source:Hubspot 11% of marketers plan to add podcasting to their marketing efforts in the next 12 months.
• Click to Tweet Source:State of Inbound The number of monthly podcast listeners grew from 21% to 24% between 2016 and 2017 Click to Tweet Source:Edison Research 8% of marketers are planning to add the blogging platform Medium to their marketing efforts in the next 12 months.
• 74 billion monthly smartphone users (February 2017) Click to Tweet Source:Expanded Ramblings 79% of adult internet users use Facebook.
• Click to Tweet Source:Pew Internet 59% of Americans with social media accounts believe that social customer service makes it easier to get questions and issues resolved.
• Click to Tweet Source:Hootsuite 28% of Americans with social media accounts prefer to engage with a brand on social media rather than go to a brick-and-mortar location.
• Click to Tweet Source:E consultancy Almost half of retailers (46%) indicate that customers use the internet to research major products, but usually make a purchase in-store Click to Tweet Source:Forbes 72% of consumers who did a local search visited a store within five miles.
• Click to Tweet Source:Adwords Google now handles at least 2 trillion searches per year Click to Tweet Source:Search Engine Land 50% of search queries are four words or longer.
• Click to Tweet Source:Wordstream 40% of adults now use voice search once per day Click to Tweet Source:Branded3 Chapter 7:Display Advertising Statistics In 2016, 91% of people say ads are more intrusive today than two years ago.
• Click to Tweet Source:Hubspot 72% of consumers say they would have a lower opinion of a brand if they subjected the consumer to a pop-up ad.
• Click to Tweet Source:Hubspot 54% of survey respondents said they didn’t trust banner ads Click to Tweet Source:Bannersnack 58% of users say they don’t click on ads, because they aren’t relevant, and 57% are concerned about security and privacy.
• 05% Click to Tweet Source:Smart insights Chapter 8:Video Marketing Statistics 51% of people have a lower opinion of brands that use auto playing video ads.
• Click to Tweet Source:Animoto Companies which use videos in their marketing grow revenue 49% faster year-on-year than those which don’t.
• Need-To-Know Content Marketing Statistics: While content marketing costs 62% less than outbound marketing, it generates more than three times as many leads.
• Content creation ranked the highest as a contributing factor to B2B marketing success with 89%, with strategy in 2nd at 72%.
• The prevalence of “People Also Ask” panels has risen 10X over the past three years, and is now in 85% of SERPs According to the American Marketing Association, the average U.
• Types of Content That Bring The Most Value Adding a blog to your website can increase the chances of ranking by 434% Infographics are liked and shared on social media 3X more than any other type of content.
• People who watch videos stay on a site two minutes longer on average and are 64% more likely to make a purchase.
• Compounding blog posts make up 10% of all blog posts and generate 38% of overall traffic.
• Marketers who do email marketing correctly see an average of 760% increase in revenue from segmented, customized marketing campaigns 86% of consumers would like to receive promotional emails from companies they do business with at least monthly, and 15% would like to get them daily.
• 56% of consumers say customer testimonials are helpful Types of Content Takeaway As preferences shift from textual to visual, content marketers need to keep their ideal consumer in mind.
• 59% of marketers say inbound produces the highest quality leads for their sales team.
• 72% of those who have calculated ROI have confidence in their marketing strategy (only 49% of those who haven’t calculated ROI feel confident in their strategy).
• 80% of B2B marketers will focus on lead gen as a content marketing goal over the next 12 months.
• 78% of organization use website traffic to determine how well its content marketing is producing results.
• The most-used B2B content marketing tactics are social media content (83%), blogs (80%), and email newsletters (77%).
• 52% of B2B marketers said blogs were the most critical tactic for success in 2017.
• Email is the most popular way to distribute content (93%), with LinkedIn in second at 89%.
• B2C Content Marketing Statistics 74% of B2C marketers report having a content marketing strategy (40% said it’s documented and another 34% have a verbal strategy).
• 76% of those who have a strategy said it includes a plan to operate content marketing as an ongoing business process, not simply as a campaign.
• 78% of B2C marketers say they can demonstrate, with metrics, how content marketing has increased audience engagement.
• 74% say brand awareness is a primary goal of their overall content marketing over next the 12 months.
• Most frequently used tools in B2C are:analytics tools (78%), social media calendars (68%), and a dedicated email platform (63%).
• When asked what techniques they use to learn about their audience(s), 59% of B2C marketers said keyword research, 54% said social listening, and 54% said website analysis.
• Only 36% of marketers say they can demonstrate that content marketing has lowered the cost of customer acquisition, but 78% say it has increased customer engagement.
• 60% of consumers won’t purchase from a brand with poorly written content, overly personalized content, or content that isn’t optimized for mobile B2C Takeaway It is important to recognize the value in building a long-term customer base.
• Digital Marketing Stats Every Dentist Should Know: 32% use TV for research 20% use magazines for research 18% use newspapers Pew research reports that 80% of internet users have searched a health related topic online Google data shows us that patients are being thoughtful and strategic in their online search.
• 48% did more than two weeks of research before scheduling an appointment 61% visited two or more hospital websites before converting For patients who book appointments digital content is the critical link to conversion.
• Users tapped into the following resources while searching for care:83% Provider website 54% Insurance provider website 50% Health information website 26% Consumer generated reviews hbspt.
• 34% of all adults — have downloaded at least one app that is meant to support healthy living.
• 44% of patients searching on a mobile device end up scheduling an appointment.
• 61% of Americans age 65 and older are now active internet users, up from 14% in 2000 Social media usage has tripled among those 65 and older since 2010.
• (Pew) Online Content Affects Patient Decisions 41% of consumers say that content found on social media will likely impact their choice of hospital or treatment center (PwC).
• (Greystone) 55% of health care organizations use a digital marketing firm to help with digital strategies.
• How Social Media Impacts a Brand:The Stats | Redefine Marketing Group: Follow Us – Contact Us Search for Back Social Media 16 min read How Social Media Impacts a Brand:The Stats Author Jason Martinez Published August 15, 2019 Share via:8 Shares 8 More than 40% of digital consumers use social networks to research new brands or products.
• 78% of people who complain to a brand via Twitter expect a response within an hour 28% of marketing agencies that face difficulties when determining the impact of social media efforts.
• According to Instagram, 80% of Instagram users follow at least one business on Instagram, and more than 200 million people visit at least one business profile every day.
• And 71% of consumers who have had a good social media service experience with a brand are likely to recommend it to others as reported by Ambassador.
• According to GlobalWebIndex, more than 40% of digital consumers use social networks to research new brands or products.
• Instagram Business states that 60% of Instagram users claim they’ve discovered at least one new product on the platform.
• And half of Generation Z and 42% or Millenials say social media is the most relevant ad channel, according to Adobe.
• Brandwatch says that 96% of the people that discuss brands online do not follow those brands’ owned profiles.
• 78% of people who complain to a brand via Twitter expect a response within an hour as reported by Lithium.
• I’m sure some of us can relate to the social media statistics from MDG that state how 44% of businesses are not able to measure the impact of social media on their business, with only 20% saying they were able to quantify the success of the social media efforts.
• Rise above the 28% of marketing agencies that face difficulties when determining the impact of social media efforts.
• How to Set a Social Media Marketing Budget in 2022 (Stats and Pro Tips): LinkedIn Research found that 77% of digital marketers admit they measure ROI within the first month of their campaigns, even though they know their sales cycle is 3 months or longer.
• Similarly, Oracle Data Cloud research tells us that only 47% of a social media marketing campaign’s value is seen in analytics in the first four weeks.
• In fact, agencies like LoudBird can cost up to 50% less than an employee.
• Top Content Marketing Statistics for 2023:Trends & Insights: 76% of enterprise marketers say content marketing has become more important to their organization.
• 96% of decision-makers say content marketing has been effective for their brand.
• 88% of marketers use content marketing to achieve their goal of increasing brand awareness and building trust and credibility.
• 80% of very successful content marketers spend more than 10% of their total marketing budgets on content.
• 71% of content marketers planned to increase their content marketing budgets for 2023.
• Content marketers are increasingly embracing digital channels, with 77% of businesses using social media and 64% using email to reach customers.
• 9 out of 10 consumers expect brands to provide content, but 58% of what’s out there is not considered meaningful content.
• User-generated content (UGC) is one of the most effective forms of content marketing, with close to 80% of consumers saying that UGC highly impacts their purchasing decisions.
• 96% of global traffic comes from Google Search, Google Images, and Google Maps.
• 60% of marketers get their highest quality leads from inbound marketing.
• Fresh content performs better in search, with 27% of high-performing content only a month old or less.
• In fact, 73% of consumers prefer to watch short-form videos when learning about something.
• Here are even more video content marketing statistics that truly prove the power and popularity of video content:89% of consumers have been convinced to make a purchase after watching a video.
• 96% of consumers have watched an explainer video to learn more about a product or service.
• 96% of video marketers say videos impact their ROI by increasing brand and product awareness, generating more leads, driving traffic and sales, and reducing support queries.
• Among marketers who do not engage in video marketing, 30% say they lack the time to do it, 18% don’t know where to start, and 10% think video is too expensive.
• To take advantage of this trend, 70% of non-video marketers will be creating online videos for the first time in 2023.
• When it comes to video types, 66% of video marketers are doing live-action shorts, 57% produce screen-recorded videos, and 55% are into animation.
• 71% of marketers produce social media videos, 70% create explainer videos, 46% shoot testimonial videos, 46% do video ads, 42% launch teaser videos, and 36% focus on product demo videos.
• According to video marketers, the most effective video marketing platforms are YouTube (78%), LinkedIn (69%), and Instagram (67%).
• 2% of all websites, with roughly 70 million new posts and 77 million new comments added each month.
• Companies that blog regularly receive 97% more backlinks and 67% more leads than those that don’t blog at all.
• 92% of content marketers publish blog posts as part of their marketing strategy.
• For B2B businesses, creating and posting more content (52%) and improving content (51%) are the top tactics for gaining more organic traffic.
• To amplify content reach, 53% of marketers use email, 51% buy social media ads, 29% invest in sponsorships like webinars and podcasts, 28% use PR and media outreach, 25% leverage influencer marketing, 16% promote on aggregate sites like Reddit, and 11% use guest posting.
• The trend will continue for the foreseeable future, predicting growths of 11%, 8.
• Businesses make $2 for every $1 spent on pay-per-click ads — resulting in a 200% ROI.
• Customers are 155% more likely to search for brand-specific terms after viewing display ads.
• Customers are 70% more likely to make a purchase from a retargeting ad.
• 59 billion people around the world are on social media — roughly 60% of the world’s population.
• TikTok is the fastest-growing social media platform, with a staggering 100% growth from 2020 to 2022.
• Facebook is the most-used platform by marketers worldwide (89%), with Instagram coming in second place (80%).
• Reels, or short-form videos, account for 30% of the time people spend on Instagram.
• 6% of TikTok users look for funny or entertaining content on the platform.
• Twitter has around 556 million monthly active users worldwide, with 53% using the platform to read the latest news and discourse on trending topics.
• Video is the most shareable type of content, with 51% of online users saying they are more likely to share a video with their friends than a social media post, blog post, or product page.
• 50% of Millennials trust product recommendations from influencers, compared to only 38% from their favorite celebrities.
• 89% of marketers will increase or maintain their investment in influencer marketing in 2023.
• 68% of marketers ran influencer campaigns on Instagram in 2022, followed by Facebook (52%) and TikTok (42%).
• Influencer videos accounted for 60% of all video views on Facebook in the US.
• 82% of marketers think AI-generated content is just as good (or better!
• According to 57% of marketers, it takes less than six months to learn how to use AI technology.
• 49% of marketers believe AI is good at writing clear or easy-to-read content, but it is not very reliable when it comes to generating accurate or error-free content.
• 7% of marketers are already using AI tools for work, with 69% adopting ChatGPT.
• 33% of businesses plan to use ChatGPT to write website content, and 44% will use AI to write content in other languages.
• 1% of marketers agree that understanding AI is important for their job, while 85.
• Adopting AI in sales can increase leads by as much as 50%, reduce costs by up to 60%, and cut back call time by up to 70%.
• 29% of marketers believe that AI in email marketing can improve revenue.
• 33% of organizations are already using generative AI in at least one business function, and 40% plan to invest more in the technology.
• According to a Forrester report, robots will replace 7% of jobs in the US by 2025.
• 9% of businesses have already replaced some human tasks with AI solutions, and 81.
• 6% of marketers think content writers’ jobs are at risk because of artificial intelligence.
• What’s refreshing to note is that 80% of those who considered themselves to be very successful at content marketing have a documented content marketing strategy.
• According to Sprout Social, 91% of marketing executives anticipate their company’s social media marketing budget will increase over the next three years.
• According to Content Marketing Institute survey respondents, video production costs will make up 62% of their total marketing budget by 2023 – making video one of the most popular content formats today.
• B2B Content Marketing Statistics:Why It’s Worth It in 2023: Despite the value that meticulously designed content marketing represents, 63% of businesses don’t have a documented gameplan when it comes to marketing.
• This reflects changing buyer habits too, with 55% of B2B buyers relying more on content to make purchasing decisions in 2022 than they did in 2021.
• Indeed, more than one in ten (13%) of B2B marketers believed a steady supply of leads was the best way to keep up relations with their sales team.
• Here’s what one told us:Heat Pump Source “We increased our traffic by over 900% by using SEO for content marketing.
• 8 billion social media users globally in April 2023, which amounts to almost 60% of the total global population.
• Social media has undoubtedly made itself a key channel for marketing, as 75% of B2B buyers use social media to make purchase decisions.
• It will come as no surprise then, that 89% of B2B marketers use LinkedIn to generate leads.
• A rather remarkable 15% of B2B leaders used TikTok to market their businesses in 2022.
• ” Angel Martins, Marketing Specialist – Blogging StatisticsAccording to the Content Marketing Institute, 60% of B2B marketers struggle with creating engaging content, yet it’s crucially important to get your blogging right as 71% of B2B buyers read at least one blog post during their research.
• For instance, just one in five (21%) of B2B companies used video marketing in 2022, according to Sagefrog Marketing Group.
• Yet the same report found 32% are looking to explore video marketing more in 2023.
• B2B SEO Statistics To Help You Justify Your Marketing Spend: With 34% of these qualified leads originating from SEO, it’s evident that organic search plays a crucial role in the B2B buyer’s journey.
• According to 57% of B2B marketers, SEO generates more leads than any other marketing initiative.
• With 57% of B2B marketers highlighting SEO as their primary lead source, it suggests that SEO is not only effective but also offers a favorable return on investment compared to other marketing channels.
• B2B marketers who have blogs get 67% more leads than those who don’t (Optinmonster) Purchase decisions in the B2B space are often based on trust, expertise, and thought leadership.
• The fact that B2B marketers with blogs generate 67% more leads than those without highlights the pivotal role of long-form content marketing in establishing credibility and authority in the industry.
• During B2B research endeavors, 89% of B2B researchers leverage the internet.
• When it comes to researching business purchases, 90% of B2B researchers rely on search as their primary tool.
• At work, 80% of B2B buyers utilize mobile devices and more than 60% report that mobile played a significant role in a recent purchase.
• (BCG) This BCG study also found that… 70% of B2B buyers increased mobile usage significantly in the past few years, with 60% expecting to continue to increase mobile usage.
• More than 90% of B2B buyers report they’re likely to purchase from the same vendor again if they have a superior mobile experience.
• While SEO is an undeniably powerful addition to a full-funnel marketing strategy, we would never recommend putting 100% of your marketing budget towards SEO.
• According to 57% of B2B marketers, SEO generates more leads than any other marketing initiative.
• B2B marketers who have blogs get 67% more leads than those who don’t (Optinmonster)4.
• During B2B research endeavors, 89% of B2B researchers leverage the internet.
• When it comes to researching business purchases, 90% of B2B researchers rely on search as their primary tool.
• At work, 80% of B2B buyers utilize mobile devices and more than 60% report that mobile played a significant role in a recent purchase.
• Content Marketing Statistics in Canada for 2024 | Made in CA: Content Marketing Statistics for Canadians 88% of Canadian companies are using at least one form of content marketing.
• 84% of consumers expect entertaining content that provides solutions and creates experiences.
• 82% of B2C companies consider content marketing as a key strategy to reach new customers.
• 81% of content marketers say video content is the most difficult content to create.
• Google is the most popular search engine in Canada with a 91% market share.
• 81% of Canadian companies use email and newsletters for content marketing.
• Use and cost of content marketing in Canada Statistics for content marketing show that 88% of companies in Canada use at least one form of content marketing as part of their marketing strategy.
• 91% of B2B companies and 86% of B2C companies have a content marketing strategy in place.
• Content marketing is a cost-effective way for companies to get their message out there, costing around 62% less than traditional marketing.
• 56% of Canadian businesses say they have plans to increase spending on content creation and 28% will reduce their traditional marketing budget in favor of content marketing.
• 84% of consumers expect companies to create entertaining content that tells a story, provides them with solutions, and creates experiences and events.
• 70% of consumers also want to learn about the products through content marketing.
• B2B content marketing Using blogs is an important tool for B2B marketers as 71% of B2B buyers read blog posts.
• While 81% of B2B companies use blogging as a key marketing strategy, posting regular content poses challenges to companies and 64% of B2B companies outsource their content writing.
• Another important tool for B2B marketers is videos since 82% of consumer traffic comes through video content from their blogs, social media, or YouTube.
• As a result, 64% of B2B marketers have or are planning to increase their video marketing.
• The main content marketing challenges B2B companies face include having a small team (67%), and not having enough time (44%).
• Only 4% of B2B companies feel having a content marketing strategy is not needed.
• As a result, only 43% of Canadian B2B companies have a documented marketing strategy, 34% say they have “an approach” but it is not formalised and 21% publish content but they have no strategy for it.
• B2C content marketing More and more companies understand the value of content marketing with 82% of B2C marketers conserving it as a key strategy.
• Between 2018 and 2019, there was a 68% increase in using audio and visual content to market directly to customers.
• 60% of B2C marketers say they are committed to content marketing and on average 26% of the total marketing budget of B2C companies is spent on content marketing.
• 61% of Canadian consumers say they have made a purchase after they read a recommendation on a blog and businesses that post on blogs generate 126% more traffic compared to those who don’t.
• 5 times more traffic and while some people may say blogs are not as popular as they used to be, 77% of all internet users still read blogs, and posts with images have a 94% higher viewing rate.
• Videos While videos might be one of the best ways to bring in more traffic, they are also some of the most challenging content marketing tools, with 81% of marketers saying video content is the most difficult kind of content to create.
• However, 99% of marketers who already use video as part of their marketing strategy say they will continue in the future.
• Video marketing works because 65% of people remember visual content better and video is even more memorable than still images.
• 75% of consumers watch videos at least once a day and 87% of them wish brands would post more videos.
• Millennials are the most likely generation to consume video content, with 77% watching at least one video every day and 50% saying they will stop what they are doing to watch an entertaining new video.
• Social media While other forms of content marketing are also useful, 95% of content used in content marketing is posted on social media, according to the Content Marketing Institute.
• 70% of marketers have also opted for paid advertising on social media and 40% of brands already use Instagram.
• 75% of Facebook users visit the website at least once a day while Instagram is visited by 500 million people every day.
• SEO For any content marketer, mastering SEO is vital as most traffic to their websites comes through search engines and Google holds 91% of the search engine market in Canada.
• 5% of online searches are four words or longer, so websites and blog posts that utilise longer key phrases are likely to rank higher on searches.
• Appearing on local searches is key for brick-and-mortar companies as 75% of consumers who find helpful information about local companies are more likely to visit the physical store.
• 6% closing rate, which is significantly higher than leads from traditional outbound leads, including direct mail and print advertising, which have a 1.
• Emails and Newsletters 81% of companies use emails and newsletters to market their products or services.
• 7% of Canadian consumers check their email each time they pick their phone up and a quarter have a habit of checking emails first thing in the morning.
• Consumers aged 25-34 are most likely to open marketing and newsletter emails as 31% of them say they open all the emails they get.
• 75% of people in that age group have made a spontaneous purchase based on email or newsletter marketing, compared to 50% of the overall population.
• According to a survey by Semrush, 55% of companies feel that improving the quality of their content made the biggest difference for them and 46% feel that search engine optimization was their biggest content marketing success in 2021.
• Other big successes were creating and posting videos and other visual content for 41% and repurposing existing content for 35% of the companies.
• The least successful strategies were trying out new channels at 20% and using social media influences in their content at 14%.
• Content marketing goals Moving forward, 45% of Canadian companies want to use content marketing to increase the awareness of their brand and 37% want more traffic to their website.
• 36% of companies will also focus on generating leads, while only 27% say they want to increase sales and revenue through content marketing.
• 23% of Canadian companies also look to improve customer loyalty and engagement.
• The key areas for content marketing investment among companies in Canada are building their social media presence and community with 41% and improving the quality of their written content with 40%.
• Only 11% of the companies said they would invest in producing audio content.
• While 92% of marketers and businesses identify content marketing as an important asset for them, creating and posting valuable content consistently can be challenging.
• 61% of companies say changes to algorithms on search engines pose the biggest challenge for them when content marketing, while 45% are also concerned about algorithm changes on social media.
• 7% of content marketers find the constant need to create engaging visual content challenging.
• 27% of businesses say they find the lack of data challenging when creating their content.
• 28% of them feel that not having a solid content marketing strategy makes creating content challenging for them.
• The cost of content marketing is 62% cheaper than traditional marketing.
• Social media is the most commonly used content marketing with 95% of companies who use content marketing using social media.
• 10 Stats That Prove The Importance of Social Media Marketing: 64% of users purchase products after watching a video on social media3.
• 33% of users would choose to contact a brand via social media instead of calling4.
• Over 93% of brands acquire at least one new customer from a video they posted on social media5.
• 71% of users who had positive experiences with a company on social media are likely to recommend them to others6.
• 49% of consumers depend on social media influencers for recommendations8.
• 40% of surveyed people said they’re unlikely to create an emotional connection with a brand they haven’t engaged with on social media10.
• 46% of consumers will buy from brands they’re familiar withWant to up your social media game?
• 54% of web users use social media to research productsSource:TruelistPeople don’t just use search engines for researching and buying products anymore.
• 64% of users purchase products after watching a video on social mediaSource:BiteableVideo content on social media is an excellent way of providing engaging and helpful content to your audience and promoting your products.
• With 64% of brands getting sales from doing precisely that, it’d be crazy not to!
• As part of that 33%, one of the first places I’ll look when researching a brand is social media.
• Aside from the ease of use benefits, many people have anxiety around making and receiving phone calls, with 76% of millennials reporting they become anxious when their phone rings.
• Over 93% of brands acquire at least one new customer from a video they posted on social mediaSource:AnimotoWith almost every brand winning at least one customer from posting on social media, incorporating social into your digital marketing strategy is a bit of a no-brainer.
• 71% of users who had positive experiences with a company on social media are likely to recommend them to othersSource:Lyfe MarketingThe right social media strategy can work wonders for your brand awareness and credibility.
• 52% of online brand discovery comes from social media channelsSource:Lyfe MarketingIf you want to increase your brand awareness and visibility, social media is the place to do it.
• 8% of the world’s population), you have an almost unlimited reach potential.
• The takeaway here is that social media can help you build powerful emotional connections with your customers, and with 40% of consumers saying that they usually only make connections with brands on social media, it’s what your audience might want!
• 46% of consumers will buy from brands they’re familiar withSource:Fit Small BusinessBrand recognition and trust are essential factors in a customer’s buying decision, and without them, you’ll struggle to bring in leads and sales.
• Additionally, 47% of consumers will pay more for brands they trust, so if you can nail your content and build trust with your audience, you won’t just see more leads and sales coming in but potentially higher average order values as well!
• 10 Digital Marketing Statistics for Aged Care Providers in Australia: Points of Differentiation for Aged Care Providers 68% of aged care marketers say that a website is the most effective channel to acquire clients.
• Almost 90% of Australians in 50- to 70-year-old bracket have a smartphone that can connect to the internet.
• (Office of the eSafety Commissioner) Facebook users in Australia aged 45 to 65 doubled from from 14% in 2010 to 30% in 2016.
• (Google) Aged Care Marketing Budget and Priorities in Australia Media spend in the aged care and retirement sectors increased year on year by 28%.
• (The Weekly Source) Senior living marketers name their top 3 priorities:lead generation (78%), brand awareness (58%), and sales (53%) (Brooks Adams Research).
• Here are some of the findings:60% of providers had dated website content 60% of providers in suburban sites, the first point of contact was unable to answer questions 80% of providers do not return phone calls to prospects hbspt.
• 100+ B2B Content Marketing Statistics You Need to Know: 84% of people expect brands to produce content that entertains, provides solutions and produces experiences and events.
• That said many marketers don’t know how to use content marketing and as much as 63% of businesses don’t even have a documented content strategy.
• Other content marketing statistics worth taking note of include:35% of marketers report that creating engaging visual content consistently is one of their top struggles.
• 56% of businesses reported they want to increase their content creation spending 61% of marketers ranked improving “their ability to measure and analyze their marketing efforts” as a vital priority.
• Changes to SEO is the top concern (61%) of content marketing organizations (followed by social media algorithm changes at 45%) 91% of consumers are prepared to reward brands for their authenticity.
• Content Marketing ROI Statistics The latest CMI research report shows that 70% of B2B marketers say their content marketing is more successful than it was a year ago.
• Blog traffic generation increases up to 30% after you post 24–51 blog posts.
• 43% of B2B marketers say “blogging” is the most important content they produce.
• 47% of B2B customers read about four blog posts before talking to a salesperson.
• 55% of marketers want to focus on blog creation as their top inbound marketing priority.
• 46% of blog posts were 500–1000 words long in 2018, compared to only 8% that were more than 2000 words.
• 34% of bloggers reported “always” utilizing analytics when tracking blog performance.
• Audio and Podcast Statistics According to Statista, 45% of global internet users aged 25-34 listen to podcasts.
• It is also probably why the State of Inbound report reveals that 17% of marketers plan to add podcasting to their marketing efforts in the next 12 months.
• According to Edison Research:Monthly podcast listeners grew from 24% of Americans to 26% year over year.
• Other statistics worth noting are :In the US alone, almost 1 in 5 Americans listen to audiobooks, and 40% listen to podcasts.
• 50% of homes report being fans of at least one podcast and 22% consider themselves “avid” fans.
• According to Podcast Insights, 49% of podcast listening happens at home.
• Video is trusted by 40% of millennials and half of those aged 18-34 would stop what they’re doing to watch a new video.
• The CMI’s content marketing statistics show 72% of B2B marketers and 76% of B2C marketers use video.
• It’s pretty effective:Aberdeen Group says marketers who use video get 66% more leads per year.
• According to Wyzowl (an animated explainer video company):87% of businesses now use video as a marketing tool.
• )91% of video marketers consider video an important part of their marketing strategy.
• )90% of video marketers feel the level of competition and noise has increased in the past year.
• But despite this – 99% will continue to use video in 2019, with 88% saying they’ll spend more than they did in previous years.
• User preferences 96% of people say they’ve watched an explainer video to learn more about a product or service.
• 79% of people say a brand’s video has convinced them to buy a piece of software or app.
• 68% of people say they’d most prefer to learn about a new product or service by watching a short video.
• This makes video more popular as a learning tool than text-based articles (15%), infographics (4%) presentations and pitches (4%) ebooks and manuals (3%).
• Video Marketing Effectiveness 94% of video marketers say video has helped increase user understanding of their product or service.
• 84% of marketers say video has helped them increase traffic to their website.
• Facebook Video 84% of video marketers have used Facebook video as a channel.
• Instagram Video 51% of video marketers have used Instagram video as a channel.
• LinkedIn Video 51% of video marketers have used LinkedIn video as a channel (Up from 38% in 2018.
• Twitter Video 45% of video marketers have used Twitter video as a channel (Up from 39% in 2018.
• Facebook Live 35% of video marketers have used Facebook Live as a channel (Up from 34% in 2018.
• Interactive Video 23% of video marketers have used Interactive video as a channel (Up from 20% in 2018.
• Snapchat12% of video marketers have used Snapchat video as a channel (Up from 11% in 2018.
• Virtual Reality 11% of video marketers have used VR as a channel (Down from 14% in 2018.
• Mobile Video An overwhelming majority of people split their video viewing time between mobile and desktop, with just 1% saying they watch ALL their video on desktop and just 6% saying they watch exclusively on mobile.
• 34% say they watch ‘mainly’ on mobile, and 17% ‘mainly’ on desktop, with 42% watching ‘pretty much equally’ across mobile and desktop.
• Vertical Video 87% of people say they typically hold their phone ‘vertically’ for general use such as web browsing, email and texting.
• 82% of people find it annoying or off-putting to watch videos with a ‘black bar’ where the video hasn’t been properly optimized to display in their chosen orientation.
• Video-Sharing Statistics 48% of people said they’d be most likely to share video content with their friends, ahead of any other type of content.
• Video came out ahead of social media posts (23%), news articles (16%), blog posts (5%) and product pages (3%).
• Webinar Marketing Statistics According to Go to Webinar’s report:29% of all webinars are produced by software and technology companies followed by financial services firms and educational institutions.
• 92% of GoToWebinar users agree that webinars are the best way to engage a large, remote audience.
• 59% of registrations occur less than a week before the webinarEmail drives 57% of webinar registrations this is followed by social media which drives 15% of registrations.
• Marketing webinars have an average attendance rate of 44%78% of marketing webinars use live Q&A, but only 15% use polls.
• 93% of marketers agreed that interactive content is effective in educating its buyers versus just 70% for static content.
• 88% of marketers said that interactive content is effective in differentiating their brand from their competitors.
• 81% of marketers agree that interactive content is much more effective at grabbing people’s attention than static content.
• 66% of marketers have reported greater audience engagement after using interactive content.
• 79% of marketers said that combining interactive content with other content marketing tactics increases message retention.
• 79% of marketers said interactive content can be reused a lot, leading to repeat readers.
• 75% of marketers said non-gated interactive content offers a sample of the brand and nurtures leads.
• 68% of marketers said interactive content makes it easy to repurpose passive content.
• 54% of marketers use interactive assessments, making it the most common type of content.
• 88% of mobile users searching for local information take action within a day of finding results.
• 53% of mobile users will close a website if it takes more than three seconds to load.
• 12% rate for desktop traffic) 81% of mobile search queries derive from Google.
• A delay of one second in page response can reduce the conversions by 7%.
• At least 50% of marketers surveyed feel their email campaigns are very poor to average.
• 33% of marketers report custom video drives the most engagement out of all visual content for them, but only 6% reported live video specifically.
• 64% of B2B marketers increased their use of audio/visual content in the past year, but only 43% of marketers overall actually used/developed video snippets.
• 81% of respondents claim that video is still the hardest type of content to produce.
• 70% of marketers reported that content incorporating visuals assets performed better than those without.
• 87% of marketers are using still email to nurture their audience, while only 45% are using storytelling.
• 74% of B2B marketers created long-form written content in the past year.
• Only 37% of people dedicated time to producing social media story content in the past year.
• 64% said they prefer podcasts at the top-of-the-funnel, while 48% said webinars were valuable to them in the mid-stage of their buying journey.
• Content Marketing Distribution Statistics 71% of the most successful b2b content marketers are using paid methods to distribute content, compared to only 55% of the least successful.
• 80% report paid distribution as an effective way to attract a new audience, while 65% report it as an effective way to generate traffic when organic isn’t delivering.
• Content Marketing Budget & Reporting Statistics Over 50% of marketers expect to increase their content marketing budget in 2018.
• According to a study, when asked if they’re tracking their content marketing ROI, 51% of marketers either said “no” or “unsure.
• ” — Only 25% report being extremely proficient in tracking their content marketing metrics overall.
• 4 Content Marketing Stats Every B2B Marketer Should Know: 97% of marketers include content marketing strategies More than anything, this shows that the industry is basically entirely in agreement that content marketing is an essential strategy.
• Not Everyone Has Got the Message… Despite a majority of marketers including content marketing strategies, a surprising percentage of B2B organisations (32%) have no one employed on a full-time/dedicated content marketing team, with just an average of 4% with a dedicated team of over 11 people.
• Similarly, over half (58%) of B2B organisations have just one person running their entire content marketing strategy!
• 65% of marketers say case studies and success stories are the biggest value drivers Say you’re looking for a restaurant to eat at for the evening.
• 67% of marketers want more resources for content creation Every business wants an ace team of writers at the helm who can shift and shape their writing style to the task at hand, but relying on the pure skill of your writers won’t get you great content all the time.
• 44% of B2B buyers typically consume 3-5 pieces of content before engaging This further speaks to the long-term nature of content marketing and how its main focus is on building trust with an audience.
• This is further backed up by a not insignificant 70% of consumers who say that they prefer to learn about a product or service through content rather than traditional advertising.
• Cannabis Marketing Statistics 2023 | Digital Third Coast: While only 40% of adults born before 1945 are in favor of decriminalization (Gallup) 61% of Baby boomers and members of 63% of Generation X are close to the national average in terms of favorable views of marijuana legalization (Gallup) Americans are more likely to use cannabis daily than Canadians.
• 80+ Law Firm Marketing Statistics:Social Media, Website & SEO: Top Stats At A Glance In 2023, the majority of law firms, approximately 87%, are utilizing Google Ads as part of their digital marketing strategy.
• 63% of US law firms decided to increase their marketing budget, indicating a willingness to invest more in promotional efforts.
• 83% of law firms reported a noticeable rise in website visits as a direct result of their Google Ads campaigns.
• 64% of law firms witnessed an increase in display advertising impressions as a result of their Google Ads campaigns.
• Google Ads remains the most popular choice for online advertising among law firms, with approximately 70% of them using this platform.
• 25% 46% 66% 78% Submit Answer function submitAnswer() { var selectedAnswer = document.
• 98% of legal firms say that intake software helps them make better decisions about marketing.
• 65% of legal firms say that Intake software helps them close more clients.
• 79% of legal firms say that Intake software helps them use their time more efficiently while getting new clients.
• 145% of legal firms allocate a portion of their marketing budget to remarketing efforts, specifically to follow up with leads that didn’t convert into customers initially.
• 91%, report having repeated interactions with the same clients multiple times.
• 1Although 74% of firms express confidence in their marketing strategies, a significant number of them, around 70%, acknowledge that they are also investing money in low return-on-investment (ROI) campaigns.
• Approximately 83% of legal firms outsource their marketing work to external marketing firms.
• Yes, approximately 45% of legal firms allocate a portion of their marketing budget to remarketing efforts.
• The average allocation for marketing in legal firms is approximately 49% of their annual budget.
• 1In the future, about 66% of legal firms express their intention to increase their investment in website development and improvement.
• 2Approximately 48% of legal firms express their interest in increasing the budget for online marketing through popular channels.
• 1On average, a company will allocate approximately 49% of its marketing budget to remarketing efforts.
• 1Hourly rates are the most prevalent billing method provided by 97% of law firms.
• 3 Interactive Infographic Only 37% of law firms offer flat fees for any type of legal matter.
• Only 31% of law firms offer the ability for clients to pay online for legal services.
• 4Lawyers fail to collect payment for approximately 12% of the hours they bill.
• Hourly rates are the most common billing method offered by law firms, and lawyers typically bill for only about 31% of an 8-hour workday.
• Around 48% of legal firms express their interest in increasing their budget for online marketing through popular channels.
• On average, a company will allocate approximately 49% of its marketing budget to remarketing efforts.
• MarketSplashMarketSplash TeamThe statistics reveal that a significant majority of law firms, approximately 84%, are successfully generating leads through organic social media traffic.
• 2A total of 17% of law firms indicated that they handled their digital marketing in-house and did not outsource it to external agencies or consultants.
• MarketSplashMonique SolomonsRoughly 33% of law firms acquire leads through online review sites.
• 1Around 41% of law firms experience traffic from clients who find them by searching on digital professional directories, aiming to avail themselves of legal services.
• 1Daily, 33% of law firms utilize Facebook for marketing purposes, leveraging the platform to engage with their audience and promote their services.
• 1 Law Firm Size Percentage Using Video For Marketing Law Firm Size Percentage Using Video for Marketing Soloists 10% 2-9 Lawyer Firms 19% 10-49 Lawyer Firms 18% All Respondents 28% Among all law firms, 51% utilize Google Analytics to assess their marketing budget allocation.
• 1 Additionally, 45% of law firms rely on Facebook Insights, while 37% make use of Twitter Analytics to make informed decisions on where to invest their marketing funds.
• 1 Social Media Presence Of Law Firms Platform Percentage of Firms Maintaining Presence LinkedIn 87% Facebook 61% Twitter 37% Instagram 13% Approximately 77% of lawyers leverage social media as a tool for career development and networking, while 52% utilize it for client development.
• 6Roughly 45% of law firms employ LinkedIn as a platform for their marketing efforts.
• Approximately 77% of lawyers leverage social media as a powerful tool for career development and networking, connecting with peers, potential clients, and industry professionals.
• Around 52% of lawyers utilize social media as a means for client development, engaging with potential clients and promoting their legal services effectively.
• Roughly 45% of law firms actively use LinkedIn as a platform for their marketing efforts, tapping into its wide professional network to connect with potential clients and business partners.
• 24% of law firms had their website management handled by the marketing team.
• 2 Around 21% of firms relied on external consultants to manage their websites.
• 2 In 13% of firms, the responsibility for managing their website fell to a single lawyer.
• 2 For 12% of firms, website management was carried out by firm administrators.
• 2 Just 17% of respondents mentioned that they could schedule consultations through their firm’s website.
• 8Currently, 94% of law firms have established their presence online with a website.
• 8Around 69% of law firms confirm that their websites are mobile-friendly, while 26% are uncertain about the mobile-friendliness of their websites.
• 8Partner profiles are the most prevalent content on law firm websites, with approximately 99% of websites including them.
• 8About 59% of law firm websites include legal articles that are written in-house by the firm’s attorneys or staff.
• 8Approximately 55% of law firms showcase recent successful cases on their websites.
• 8Approximately 37% of law firms indicate that they maintain a blog on their websites, and this percentage is higher among larger firms compared to smaller ones.
• 8As high as 88% of law firms utilize their blogs primarily for client development purposes.
• 8 Marketing Methods Used By Law Firms Marketing Method Percentage of Law Firms Print Marketing 25% Direct Mail 18% Radio 9% Yellow Pages 8% Event sponsorships remain a significant marketing channel for 50% of law firms.
• 67%) of law firms expressed their intention to increase their investments in their websites in the near future.
• Approximately 50% of law firms consider event sponsorships as one of their main marketing channels.
• 67%) of law firms have expressed their intention to increase their investments in their websites in the near future.
• As high as 88% of law firms utilize their blogs mainly for client development purposes.
• The average law firm experiences an impressive 526% return on investment (ROI) from its SEO efforts over a three-year period.
• A staggering 75% of users never scroll past the first page of search results, emphasizing the crucial importance of top rankings.
• MarketSplashMonique SolomonsBy enhancing their SEO strategies, a typical law firm witnesses an average increase of 21% in organic traffic to their website.
• 9In a comprehensive law firm study, 79% of surveyed legal professionals rated SEO as the most effective channel for marketing and acquiring new clients.
• 11A significant proportion of legal firms, approximately 56%, opt to outsource their SEO efforts to external marketing firms.
• It offers substantial returns on investment, with an average ROI of 526% over three years.
• By enhancing their SEO strategies, a typical law firm can experience an average increase of 21% in organic traffic to their website.
• According to a comprehensive law firm study, 79% of surveyed legal professionals rated SEO as the most effective channel for marketing and acquiring new clients.
• SEO is of paramount importance for law firms, as 85% of potential clients prefer to use Google as their primary source for research when searching for a lawyer.
• 15 Mind-Blowing Social Media Statistics | Roadside Dental Marketing: With that said, here are 15 of the “freshest” stats to help you flavor your dental marketing strategy:Social media statistics 97% of consumers used social media in the past month.
• Hootsuite 43% of consumers use social media when researching things to buy.
• 27% of social media users say they find new products through paid social ads (following word-of-mouth, TV ads, and search engines).
• Global Web Index 68% of Americans use Facebook and 74% of Facebook users check it daily.
• HubSpot YouTube is the preferred form of social media marketing worldwide, preferred by 83% of all consumers.
• 300+ Digital Marketing Stats to Drive Your Marketing Strategy – Marketing Insider Group: Content Marketing Stats 84% of digital marketing leaders acknowledge the role of AI in enhancing personalization.
• (Zippia) 82% of marketers report that AI significantly influences their content creation plans.
• (Hubspot) 79% of companies have observed revenue growth in marketing and sales due to AI.
• (Zippia) 76% of marketers using generative AI apply it for basic content creation and copywriting tasks.
• (Insider Intelligence) 61% of marketers consider AI a crucial component of their data strategy.
• (DemandSage) Image Source:Bloggers Passion 88% of marketers plan to increase or maintain their investment in SEO.
• (Hubspot) 75% of marketers recognize SEO as their most effective content strategy.
• (Semrush) 75% of users don’t look beyond the first page of search results.
• (DemandSage) 49% of marketers believe organic search yields the best ROI.
• (Search Engine Journal) 97% of marketers incorporate customer data into their decision-making process.
• (Statista) 80% of businesses deem personalization as essential for growth.
• (Adobe) 80% of consumers are more inclined to purchase from companies offering personalized experiences.
• (Slideshare) 80% of marketers using audience segmentation report a rise in sales.
• (NotifyVisitors) Marketers utilizing buyer personas achieve 73% higher conversion rates.
• (Startups Magazine) Over 90% of brands utilize social media for marketing.
• (Engati) 76% of social media users have bought items they saw on social platforms.
• (Forbes) 73% of marketers find social media to be effective for their business.
• (Statista) 97% of marketers using Account-Based Marketing (ABM) report it delivers higher ROI than other marketing activities.
• (Growth Badger) A majority of bloggers, over 50%, fall within the age range of 21 to 35 years.
• (Truelist) Blog posts are the leading content format, utilized by 90% of marketers for achieving content objectives.
• (DemandMetric) Nearly 60% of marketers recognize the value of blogging.
• (DemandMetric) Websites with active blogs have 434% more indexed pages and 97% more inbound links compared to those without blogs.
• (BKA Content) Businesses that maintain blogs generate 67% more monthly leads than those without blogs.
• (HubSpot) 80% of bloggers affirm that blogging contributes to significant marketing success.
• (Orbit Media) 90% of businesses employ content marketing tactics like blogging.
• (DemandMetric) Companies that blog attract 55% more website visitors than non-blogging companies.
• (Orbit Media) 88% of bloggers who gate content see some or strong results, with 35% reporting strong results.
• (OrbitMedia) 70% of consumers prefer learning about a company through articles over advertisements.
• Original visuals like infographics are considered the most effective by 40% of content marketers.
• (Orbit Media) 88% of marketers incorporate visuals in more than half of their blog articles.
• (Venngage) Bloggers who publish 2-6 times per week are 50% more likely to report strong results.
• (Orbit Media) 52% of bloggers find engaging with readers through content increasingly challenging.
• (Orbit Media) Producing original visuals consistently is a struggle for 35% of content creators, despite its effectiveness.
• (HubSpot) B2B bloggers spend on average 26% more time on each post compared to B2C bloggers.
• (Worldometers) 21% of search engine users click on more than one result.
• (Ahrefs) In the US, 53% of people research products using search engines before making a purchase.
• (Up Inc) Google dominates nearly 86% of the global search engine market.
• (Backlinko) 84% of search engine users turn to Google three or more times daily.
• (Backlinko) 49% of marketers agree that organic search offers the best ROI among all marketing channels.
• (LinkedIn) 72% of consumers who conducted a local search visited a business within 5 miles.
• (HubSpot) 97% of people learn about local businesses online more than anywhere else.
• (SEO Tribunal) 72% of desktop/tablet users and 67% of mobile users prefer ads tailored to their location.
• (Think With Google) Approximately 80% of consumers use search engines for local information.
• (Think With Google) 88% of mobile searches for local businesses result in a visit to the store within a week.
• (Think With Google) Following a local mobile search, 76% of individuals visit the business within a day, and 28% of these searches lead to a purchase.
• (Think With Google) About 94% of keywords receive 10 or fewer monthly searches.
• (WordStream) Approximately 15% of Google searches are unique and have never been searched before.
• (Google) 95% of the entire keyword database gets less than 10 searches per month.
• (Ahrefs) More than 29% of keywords with 10,000 monthly searches consist of three or more words.
• (Ahrefs) Roughly 74% of link builders create fewer than 10 links per month.
• (Ahrefs) Voice Search Stats Over 40% of voice search results come from featured snippets.
• (Brafton) 58% of consumers utilize voice search to find local businesses online.
• 9% of marketing executives believe their businesses have the skills to utilize marketing analytics effectively.
• (HBR) 72% of marketers consider content crucial for improving client retention.
• (Mailchimp) Google Analytics allows cross-platform data analysis and can reduce reporting time by 50%.
• (Mailchimp) Leading marketers are 72% more likely to invest in improving the quality/volume of first-party data they collect.
• (ThinkWithGoogle) Image Source:Think With Google Over 70% of people describe themselves as channel-agnostic, flexible about buying offline or online.
• (Martech) Digital marketing accounts for nearly 60% of marketing spending, as per the AMA’s 2021 CMO survey.
• (Martech) The US Bureau of Labor Statistics forecasts a 10% annual increase in employment for marketing managers over the next eight years.
• (UChicago) 57% of marketers likely draw incorrect conclusions by misinterpreting data.
• (MarketingEvolution) 66% of marketers find data analytics vital, and 63% agree on the importance of data literacy.
• (MarketingEvolution) 76% of marketing leaders base decisions on data analytics.
• (MarketingEvolution) 37% of marketers find demonstrating the value of marketing analytics as one of their top challenges.
• (MarketingEvolution) Leaders are 53% more likely to believe machine learning aids in analyzing consumer intentions.
• (MarketingEvolution) Marketing analytics is the most significant investment, accounting for 16% of annual expenditures.
• (MarketingEvolution) Paid search comprises about 39% of a company’s total marketing budget.
• (MarketingEvolution) 37% of respondents in Gartner’s survey find manual data gathering a hindrance to team effectiveness.
• (MarketingEvolution) 32% of marketers consider competition and marketing analytics crucial for their initiatives.
• (MarketingEvolution) 57% of marketing research analysts hold a bachelor’s degree, and 39% have a master’s degree.
• (MarketingEvolution) The demand for market research analysts is expected to grow 22% from 2020 to 2030.
• (MarketingEvolution) Over 80% of marketers report that their decisions are now predominantly data-informed.
• (SAS) Smartphone analytics predict a 25% increase in mobile traffic by 2025, according to the Ericsson Mobility Report.
• (ThinkWithGoogle) The employment of market research analysts is projected to grow 19% from 2021 to 2031.
• 68% of the total internet users (Demand Sage) Experts predict that the number of podcast listeners will reach 504.
• (Demand Sage) Image Source:Demand Sage 84% of podcast advertisements are dynamic.
• (Spiralytics) 82% of marketers plan to maintain or increase their podcast investments.
• (Hubspot) Video Marketing Stats 91% of consumers express a desire for more online videos from brands.
• (Hubspot) 90% of marketers credit video with aiding in lead generation.
• (DemandSage) 87% of marketers report a direct, positive impact on sales from video marketing.
• (Wyzowl) 72% of customers would rather watch a video than read about a product (Gitnux) Image Source:Gitnux Websites with video content are 53x more likely to rank on page one of Google SERPs.
• (Gitnux) 89% of people say watching a video has convinced them to buy a product or service.
• (Demand Sage) The average user spends 88% more time on websites that have videos.
• (Demand Sage) 85% of internet users in the United States watch online video content.
• (Demand Sage) YouTube is the most widely used video marketing platform, with 90% of video marketers using it.
• (Demand Sage) Only 36% of marketers have published ‘live’ video content, such as live streams on social media channels.
• (Demand Sage) Webinar Marketing Stats 95% of businesses consider webinars a crucial part of their marketing strategy.
• (On24) 73% of B2B companies view webinars as the best method to generate high-quality leads.
• (GoTo) 76% of webinars are primarily focused on generating leads and sales.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 73% of B2B webinar attendees typically convert to leads.
• (WebinarCare) In the B2C sector, only 20%-40% of webinar attendees convert.
• (BigMarker) 41% of attendees feel that 30 minutes is the ideal webinar runtime.
• (BigMarker) Only 44% of those who pre-register for webinars actually attend.
• (WebinarCare) 80% of B2B marketers use their websites to drive webinar registrations.
• (Statista) 29% of people register for webinars on the same day they take place.
• (WebinarCare) Only 15% of attendees register for webinars 15 days or more in advance.
• (WebinarCare) 92% of attendees find Q&A sessions at the end of webinars beneficial.
• (Ruler Analytics) A/B testing landing page designs increases conversions by 12%.
• (Campaign Monitor) 47% of marketers consider email their most effective marketing channel.
• (Techjury) 43% of US respondents check their work emails outside business hours.
• (Statista) 49% of consumers prefer to receive weekly promotional emails from favorite brands.
• (AWeber) Including the word “video” in email subject lines increases open rates by 19% and click-through rates by 65%.
• (AWeber) Including videos in emails can increase click rates by up to 300%.
• (DataReportal) Only 25% of users access Facebook via laptop or desktop.
• (Khoros) 40% of Facebook advertisers use the Click-to-Messaging format.
• (Khoros) 83% of users say they discover new products and services on Instagram.
• (Statista) Less than 7% of Instagram’s advertising audience is over 55.
• (Khoros) 77% of X users have a better impression of a brand when they respond to a post.
• (Khoros) Lead Generation & Nurturing Stats 65% of businesses say generating traffic and leads is their biggest marketing challenge.
• (HubSpot) 93% of B2B companies say content marketing generates more leads than traditional marketing strategies.
• (Marketo, Forbes) 93% of B2B buying processes start with an online search.
• (Pinpoint Market Research and Anderson Jones PR) 96% of visitors who come to your website aren’t ready to buy.
• (Marketo) 68% of B2B companies will use landing pages to nurture new sales leads for future conversion.
• (HubSpot) 74% of companies say converting leads into customers is their top priority.
• (HubSpot) 48% of businesses say most of their leads require “long cycle” nurturing with many influencers.
• (Ascend2) 54% of email marketers say increasing engagement rate is their number one priority.
• (Ascend2) Targeting users with content relevant to their position along the buying process yields 72% higher conversion rates.
• (Aberdeen) 51% of email marketers say email list segmentation is the most effective way to personalize lead nurturing.
• 1% of businesses don’t use any attribution model to measure marketing performance.
• (Bizible) Only 29% of brands nurture their existing customers beyond the initial purchase.
• (Demand Gen) 85% of marketers say lead generation is their most important content marketing goal.
• (ZipDo) Image Source:ZipDo 57% of marketers say lead nurturing is the most valuable feature of automation software.
• (Ascend2) 79% of top-performing companies have been using marketing automation for three or more years.
• (Pardot) The biggest benefits of automation are saving time (74%), increased customer engagement (68%), more timely communications (58%), and increased opportunities including up-selling (58%).
• (Adestra) 91% of users believe marketing automation is “very important” to successfully marketing across multiple channels.
• (VB Insight, APSIS) 58% of best-in-class marketing automation users say the most useful metrics for measuring performance are Conversion Rate and Revenue Generated.
• (Ascend2) 63% of companies using marketing automation outsource all or part of it.
• (MarketingCharts) 91% of marketers say marketing automation helps them achieve their objectives.
• (Liana) Marketers who use automation are 46% more likely to report having an effective marketing strategy.
• (Ascend2) 18% of companies use automation as their primary email marketing tactic.
• (Dash Research) 81% of marketers expect to compete primarily on customer experience in the next two years.
• (MarketingEvolution) 88% of customers say the experience a company provides is as important as its products or services.
• (PwC) As many as 86% of consumers claim they would leave a brand after 2-3 bad customer service experiences.
• (Emplifi) Consumers will pay up to a 16% price premium for a positive customer experience.
• (Salesforce) 62% of customers say their experience in one industry affects their expectations of other industries.
• (Salesforce) 64% of consumers want chatbots to provide the same quality of service as a human customer service agent.
• (Zendesk) For 80% of buyers, speed of delivery is a prime factor in customer experience.
• (PwC) 60% of consumers say they’ll become repeat buyers after a personalized experience.
• (SuperOffice) 41% of “customer-obsessed” companies achieved a 10% or greater revenue growth.
• (MarketingCharts) 70% of CX leaders struggle to increase customer loyalty.
• (IDC, Emplifi) 60% of customers disagree that brands are providing a good customer experience.
• (IDC, Emplifi) Over half of businesses think their customers are satisfied with their self-service options, yet only 15% of customers agree.
• (NICE) Brands that deliver great customer experiences can achieve revenue growth 4-8% higher than the industry average.
• (Bain) Ecommerce & Online Shopping Stats By 2026, 24% of retail purchases are expected to take place online.
• 8% of Ecommerce sales, the highest market share of all Ecommerce companies.
• (Adobe Analytics) 57% of online shoppers report shopping internationally.
• (National Retail Federation) The most common reason online shoppers abandon their cart is because of additional costs like shipping, taxes, and fees (48%).
• (Statista) 24% of online shoppers abandon their cart because the site wanted them to create an account.
• (SEMrush) 22% drop out of an online shopping session because shipping is too slow.
• (IPC) The online shopping cart abandonment rate on mobile devices is 84%.
• (National Retail Federation) Millennials shop on social media the most—55% of people aged 18 to 24 in the United States have made a purchase on social media.
• (Insider Intelligence) China has the highest rate of social commerce shoppers—nearly 50% have purchased from social networks.
• (Paypal) 49% of social commerce shoppers have had an influencer’s recommendation impact their purchase.
• (Intuit) Mobile commerce sales are expected to account for 6% of all retail sales in 2023.
• Essential Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics in 2024 • ZipDo: The Latest Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics Unveiled 72% of consumers prefer learning about products through content over traditional advertising.
• In the realm of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics, the revelation that a sweeping 72% of consumers favor discovering products via content as opposed to conventional advertisements speaks volumes.
• 89% of all companies include content marketing in their digital marketing strategies.
• Traditional Marketing, a powerful weapon emerges in the form of content marketing which has been embraced by a staggering 89% of all companies within their digital marketing strategies.
• When we delve into the opinions of marketing connoisseurs, we uncover an intriguing figure:approximately 44% of marketing experts advocate for the superior return on investment (ROI) of digital marketing compared to its offline counterparts.
• In the ongoing debate between digital marketing and traditional marketing, the statistic revealing that 72% of users visit a store within 5 miles after viewing a mobile ad sheds light on the persuasive power of mobile advertising in the digital realm.
• Email marketing has an average ROI of 122%, which is more than 4x higher than other marketing formats.
• In the battle between Digital Marketing and Traditional Marketing, the astonishing figure of Email marketing’s 122% average ROI emerges as a powerful contender, dwarfing alternative marketing formats by an impressive 4x.
• On average, 47% of marketing budgets are spent on digital marketing, compared to 53% on traditional marketing.
• The intriguing interplay between 47% of marketing budgets being allocated to digital marketing and 53% to traditional marketing lays the foundation for a stimulating debate in the realm of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics.
• 61% of internet-enabled consumers perform research online before making a purchase decision.
• In the battleground of Digital Marketing versus Traditional Marketing, the statistic revealing that an impressive 61% of internet-enabled consumers conduct online research prior to making a purchase decision serves as powerful ammunition for digital marketing enthusiasts.
• 28% of consumers claimed that social media influenced their buying decisions.
• In the ongoing battle between Digital Marketing and Traditional Marketing, the statistic revealing that 28% of consumers are swayed by social media in their purchasing choices serves as a powerful weapon for the digital front.
• The 28% factor certainly tips the scale towards digital dominance in the marketing arena, presenting a persuasive case for the supremacy of social media and digital marketing over their traditional counterparts.
• 85% of retailers believe that search marketing (including paid and SEO) is the most effective customer acquisition tactic.
• A striking 85% assert that search marketing, which encompasses both paid and SEO efforts, reigns supreme as the most effective customer acquisition tactic.
• 88% of marketers believe that marketing personalization helps deliver a superior customer experience.
• The impressive figure of 88% of marketers believing in the value of marketing personalization for delivering an unparalleled customer experience, undoubtedly serves as a testament to its significance.
• This empowers businesses to not only forge stronger connections and nurture customer loyalty but also to capture the hearts of 88% of marketers keen on harnessing the prowess of personalization for an unrivaled customer experience.
• 92% of adults aged 60 and above prefer traditional media (TV, radio, and print) over digital media.
• A staggering 92% of adults in this demographic showcase a penchant for these conventional outlets, emphasizing the value and impact traditional marketing experiences in creating strong connections with this mature, discerning audience.
• 84% of companies have a digital marketing strategy, but only 11% have a clear digital marketing plan.
• Diving into the realm of digital marketing versus traditional marketing, a striking revelation emerges:a staggering 84% of companies now uphold a digital marketing strategy.
• Yet, the plot thickens as merely 11% have a coherent digital marketing plan in place.
• 45% of small business owners are still not using digital marketing for their businesses.
• When delving into the realm of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics, it’s intriguing to discover that a significant 45% of small business owners have yet to embrace the power of digital marketing for their businesses.
• Video content produces 86% more views for businesses than those using only static visuals or text advertisements.
• Driven by the power of statistics, our attention shifts towards a remarkable figure:video content outshines static visuals or text advertisements by generating a whopping 86% more views for businesses.
• 53% of mobile users abandon sites that take longer than 3 seconds to load.
• The remarkable statistic, revealing that an overwhelming 53% of mobile users discard websites that fail to load within 3 seconds, becomes a critical factor in this contest.
• In the realm of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics, the striking figure of 58% global internet usage illustrates the vast potential of digital marketing to reach a colossal audience.
• Online advertising was expected to account for 53% of global advertising spending in 2020.
• In the epic battle of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing, the 2020 forecast of online advertising capturing a dominant 53% of global advertising spending is a testament to digital marketing’s meteoric rise.
• 9% of online marketers see improving SEO and organic presence as a top priority.
• 9% of online marketers charging full steam towards securing their organic presence and fortifying their SEO strategies, it’s apparent that optimizing for search engines has become a critical weapon in their online arsenal.
• Delving into the realm of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics, the revelation that Google Ads boasts a staggering 200% return on investment rate, on average, is a beacon, illuminating the path towards marketing success.
• 97% of millennials use social media as an integral part of their marketing strategy.
• Traditional Marketing Statistics, the striking figure of 97% of millennials leveraging social media as a crucial component of their marketing arsenal underscores the dramatic shift taking place in the marketing landscape.
• Digital marketing efforts (specifically, content marketing) were 62% cheaper yet generated 3 times more leads than traditional marketing.
• As companies grapple with budget constraints and the desire to maximize impact, a marketing approach that is 62% more cost-effective while simultaneously creating a lead generation machine to the tune of three times the output highlights the sheer potency of digital marketing.
• The Latest Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics Unveiled 72% of consumers prefer learning about products through content over traditional advertising.
• In the realm of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics, the revelation that a sweeping 72% of consumers favor discovering products via content as opposed to conventional advertisements speaks volumes.
• 89% of all companies include content marketing in their digital marketing strategies.
• Traditional Marketing, a powerful weapon emerges in the form of content marketing which has been embraced by a staggering 89% of all companies within their digital marketing strategies.
• When we delve into the opinions of marketing connoisseurs, we uncover an intriguing figure:approximately 44% of marketing experts advocate for the superior return on investment (ROI) of digital marketing compared to its offline counterparts.
• In the ongoing debate between digital marketing and traditional marketing, the statistic revealing that 72% of users visit a store within 5 miles after viewing a mobile ad sheds light on the persuasive power of mobile advertising in the digital realm.
• Email marketing has an average ROI of 122%, which is more than 4x higher than other marketing formats.
• In the battle between Digital Marketing and Traditional Marketing, the astonishing figure of Email marketing’s 122% average ROI emerges as a powerful contender, dwarfing alternative marketing formats by an impressive 4x.
• On average, 47% of marketing budgets are spent on digital marketing, compared to 53% on traditional marketing.
• The intriguing interplay between 47% of marketing budgets being allocated to digital marketing and 53% to traditional marketing lays the foundation for a stimulating debate in the realm of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics.
• 61% of internet-enabled consumers perform research online before making a purchase decision.
• In the battleground of Digital Marketing versus Traditional Marketing, the statistic revealing that an impressive 61% of internet-enabled consumers conduct online research prior to making a purchase decision serves as powerful ammunition for digital marketing enthusiasts.
• 28% of consumers claimed that social media influenced their buying decisions.
• In the ongoing battle between Digital Marketing and Traditional Marketing, the statistic revealing that 28% of consumers are swayed by social media in their purchasing choices serves as a powerful weapon for the digital front.
• The 28% factor certainly tips the scale towards digital dominance in the marketing arena, presenting a persuasive case for the supremacy of social media and digital marketing over their traditional counterparts.
• 85% of retailers believe that search marketing (including paid and SEO) is the most effective customer acquisition tactic.
• A striking 85% assert that search marketing, which encompasses both paid and SEO efforts, reigns supreme as the most effective customer acquisition tactic.
• 88% of marketers believe that marketing personalization helps deliver a superior customer experience.
• The impressive figure of 88% of marketers believing in the value of marketing personalization for delivering an unparalleled customer experience, undoubtedly serves as a testament to its significance.
• This empowers businesses to not only forge stronger connections and nurture customer loyalty but also to capture the hearts of 88% of marketers keen on harnessing the prowess of personalization for an unrivaled customer experience.
• 92% of adults aged 60 and above prefer traditional media (TV, radio, and print) over digital media.
• A staggering 92% of adults in this demographic showcase a penchant for these conventional outlets, emphasizing the value and impact traditional marketing experiences in creating strong connections with this mature, discerning audience.
• 84% of companies have a digital marketing strategy, but only 11% have a clear digital marketing plan.
• Diving into the realm of digital marketing versus traditional marketing, a striking revelation emerges:a staggering 84% of companies now uphold a digital marketing strategy.
• Yet, the plot thickens as merely 11% have a coherent digital marketing plan in place.
• 45% of small business owners are still not using digital marketing for their businesses.
• When delving into the realm of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics, it’s intriguing to discover that a significant 45% of small business owners have yet to embrace the power of digital marketing for their businesses.
• Video content produces 86% more views for businesses than those using only static visuals or text advertisements.
• Driven by the power of statistics, our attention shifts towards a remarkable figure:video content outshines static visuals or text advertisements by generating a whopping 86% more views for businesses.
• 53% of mobile users abandon sites that take longer than 3 seconds to load.
• The remarkable statistic, revealing that an overwhelming 53% of mobile users discard websites that fail to load within 3 seconds, becomes a critical factor in this contest.
• In the realm of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics, the striking figure of 58% global internet usage illustrates the vast potential of digital marketing to reach a colossal audience.
• Online advertising was expected to account for 53% of global advertising spending in 2020.
• In the epic battle of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing, the 2020 forecast of online advertising capturing a dominant 53% of global advertising spending is a testament to digital marketing’s meteoric rise.
• 9% of online marketers see improving SEO and organic presence as a top priority.
• 9% of online marketers charging full steam towards securing their organic presence and fortifying their SEO strategies, it’s apparent that optimizing for search engines has become a critical weapon in their online arsenal.
• Delving into the realm of Digital Marketing Vs Traditional Marketing Statistics, the revelation that Google Ads boasts a staggering 200% return on investment rate, on average, is a beacon, illuminating the path towards marketing success.
• 97% of millennials use social media as an integral part of their marketing strategy.
• Traditional Marketing Statistics, the striking figure of 97% of millennials leveraging social media as a crucial component of their marketing arsenal underscores the dramatic shift taking place in the marketing landscape.
• Digital marketing efforts (specifically, content marketing) were 62% cheaper yet generated 3 times more leads than traditional marketing.
• As companies grapple with budget constraints and the desire to maximize impact, a marketing approach that is 62% more cost-effective while simultaneously creating a lead generation machine to the tune of three times the output highlights the sheer potency of digital marketing.
• Digital Marketing Statistics | Runaway Digital: The way you find what your looking for has changed dramatically with online marketing – 68% of all web searches start there!
• 78% clicking and making an actual purchase or taking some other action after seeing those pages.
• 3% of all website visits, which means that if you have a site with the right keywords in it then your chances are high for success!
• 92% of global traffic comes from the search engine, images and maps on their website!
• 72% of online marketers consider high-quality content creation as the most efficient SEO tactic.
• 60% of marketers say that inbound SEO is their highest quality source for leads, while blog content and social media are also incredibly valuable tools.
• 6% conversion rate, SEO leads have the highest closing rates among all of our offers and it’s possible they could make up 25% or more your total sales volume per month!
• Here are some stats about ranking well on Google:The top-ranking page gets the most search traffic only 49% of the time.
• 7% of pages will rank in the top 10 search results within a year or less!
• 22% of the time, but they’re even more sparing with fat-head keywords and long tail phrases than typical key word variations!
• The average level at which Google displays these different types varies significantly – 38% for “fat head” terms versus 34% for “long Tail”.
• The researchers found out that 66% of pages had no links, but only 26 percent were from 2014 or earlier – indicating it’s time for marketers and webmasters alike to start paying attention!
• 6% of domains have reciprocal links, meaning that some of the sites they link to also link back and forth between them as well!
• 87% of keywords with more than 10,000 monthly searches consist simply one or two words and not much else!
• 53% of keywords with ten searches per month or fewer consist of only one or two words.
• 41% more for monthly retainers, and a 275% more for one-off projects than those who’ve been in business for fewer than two years.
• 76% of people who search on their smartphones for something nearby visit a business within a day.
• Yelp appears in the top five search results for 92% of Google web queries that include a city and business category.
• 54% of smartphone users search for business hours and 53% search for directions to a local store.
• “Where to buy” + “near me” mobile queries have grown by over 200% from 2017–2019.
• 51% of smartphone users have discovered a new company or product when conducting a search on their smartphones.
• 51% of consumers make use of mobile devices to identify new brands and items on the market.
• 7% of the clicks, whereas ranking in position #1 on desktop gets you 19.
• Approximately 75% of voice search results rank in the top 3 for that query.
• Marketers who used segmented campaigns noted as much as a 760% increase in revenue.
• 78% of marketers have seen an increase in email engagement over the last 12 months.
• 31% of B2B marketers say email newsletters are the best way to nurture leads.
• B2B Email Marketing Statistics 81% of B2B marketers say their most used form of content marketing is email newsletters.
• 87% of B2B marketers say email is one of their top free organic distribution channels.
• 90% of content marketers say email engagement is the top metric they track to measure content performance.
• Mobile Email Marketing Statistics 35% of business professionals check email on a mobile device.
• The average number of people who open their emails via mobile devices is 49% Apple iPhone is the most popular mobile client for reading emails with 29% of all opens occurring on this platform.
• B2C Email Marketing Statistics 80% of business professionals believe that email marketing increases customer retention.
• 59% of respondents say marketing emails influence their purchase decisions.
• On average, the open rate for welcome emails is 82% The most opened emails relate to hobbies, with an open rate of 27.
• Social media digital marketing statistics Nearly 50% of the world’s population uses social media.
• While 71% of teens claimed to use the platform in 2015, the number has now dropped to 51%.
• If your Facebook ads contain images, then they will be between 75% and 90% more effective.
• With 36% of viewers watching political Story content, politics is the top-Facebook Stories topic.
• In Q3 of 2019, Twitter had more than 145 million monetizable daily active users — a 17% YoY growth.
• Twitter’s 2019 Q3 revenue was $824 million, or 9% higher than Q3 in 2018.
• 83% of the people who sent a Tweet to a company and received a response, felt better about the company and were more likely to do business with them.
• Only 3% of Tweets about customer service issues call out the company’s username with the @ symbol.
• Instagram continues to attract a younger audience with 72% of teens saying that they use the platform.
• Ad spending on Instagram is 23% higher than on Facebook according to an internal analysis by Merkle.
• In 2019, an estimated 25% of Facebook’s total ad revenue came from Instagram.
• By the end of 2020, Instagram’s share of that revenue will grow to 30% globally.
• Over 46% of all social media traffic to company websites comes from LinkedIn.
• 54% of all people want marketers to put out more video content, and this is an excellent place to begin.
• Roughly 50% of TikTok’s global audience is under the age of 34 with 26% between 18 and 24.
• Video digital marketing statistics Videos attach 300% more traffic and help to nurture leads.
• Including a video on your landing page can boost your conversion rate by up to 80%.
• Nearly 50% of internet users look for videos related to a product or service before visiting a store.
• 65% of executives have gone to the marketer’s site and 39% have called them on the phone after watching a marketing video.
• 97% of marketers say video has helped users gain a better understanding of their products and services.
• 50% of viewers aged 18-34 said they would stop what they were doing to watch a video from their favourite creator.
• 64% of consumers will make a purchase after watching branded videos on social platforms.
• 100 + Mind-Blowing Content Marketing Statistics (2024): Video was the primary form of content produced in 2021, followed by blog articles (produced by over 50% of marketing teams) and lastly, infographics (HubSpot).
• 67% of B2B content teams say top-of-funnel content is the type of content they create most (Databox).
• 46% of businesses say they want to increase their content marketing spending in 2022 (CMI).
• 33% of marketers who currently don’t use artificial intelligence (AI) or automation tools have plans to in 2022 (HubSpot).
• Only 2% of companies reported decreasing their content marketing team’s size due to COVID-19 (CMI).
• In 2021, the top five content areas people were planning on investing in include:content creation (70%), website improvements (66%), events – digital and hybrid (48%), content distribution (46%), and social media management (39%) (CMI).
• 60% of the best B2B marketers have a well-planned content marketing strategy (CMI).
• 95% of B2B customers view content as an essential way of establishing trust when considering working with a business (Ziflow).
• 52% of B2B buyers said they “definitely” are more likely to purchase from a company after consuming its content (Marketing Charts).
• Email campaigns (87%) and educational content (77%) are the most popular content types B2B marketers use for nurturing their customers (CMI).
• 95% of B2B marketers create social media content, making it the most popular type of content (CMI).
• 6% of B2C marketers have no plans of developing a content marketing strategy (CMI).
• 73% of B2C marketers use keyword research as part of their content creation process (CMI).
• 60% of B2C marketers view content marketing as an essential part of their marketing campaigns (PointVisible).
• B2C marketers use live video at a higher rate (66%) than B2B marketers (24%) (Statista).
• 40% of B2C content marketers only do a competitor analysis once per year (or not at all) (Conductor).
• B2C marketers deploy an average of 26% of their marketing budget for content marketing.
• The most successful content marketers deploy 40% of their budgets (CMI).
• 96% of people have watched an explainer video when researching a product or service (Wyzowl).
• Approximately 91% of marketers think video is more important post-COVID-19.
• 91% of marketers claim to be satisfied with the ROI from video marketing on social media (Animoto).
• 76% of marketers view video as their most effective content type (HubSpot).
• 97% of consumers and marketers believe video helps consumers better understand products or services (Wyzowl).
• Video content on a website can increase conversion rates by 80% (Smart Insights).
• 64% of B2B respondents cited podcasts as a valuable content type for users in the early stages of the buying journey, followed by 76% for infographics (DemandGen).
• 80% of podcast listeners listen to most of each episode they consume (Podcast Insights).
• The number of people over 12 who have heard about podcasts increased from 22% in 2006 to 75% in 2020 (2 billion + people) (Statista).
• podcast listeners are aged 12–34, 32% (ages 35–54), and 20% are over 55 (Edison Research).
• SEO content statisticsNearly 70% of all online experiences start with a search on a search engine (Brightedge).
• 32% of consumers look at a brand’s social media before visiting their website (Animoto).
• 75% of marketers reported SEO as their most successful content marketing strategy.
• The next most effective was updating and repurposing content (used by 61% of respondents) (Semrush).
• Google’s research shows that comparison searches using “best” have increased by 80% in the last two years (Google).
• Social media statisticsSenior social media use has increased by 66% in the last five years, with 45% of seniors now using social media in total (Pew Research Center).
• 94% of content marketers use social media as a content distribution channel (Semrush).
• 89% of marketers said social media was their most popular content distribution channel (CMI).
• Social media advertising / promoted posts increased from 60% to 83% in 2020 (CMI).
• The most popular content formats are how-to guides (77%), news and trends (49%), and guides and eBooks (47%) (Statista).
• 89% of content marketers utilize blog articles as part of their content strategy (MarketingProfs).
• 57% of marketers report blogging has helped customers find them (OptinMonster).
• 36% of bloggers writing 3,000 words + per post reported the best results (Orbit Media).
• 71% of B2B respondents read a blog article during their buying journey (DemandGen).
• Content strategy statisticsNearly 40% of marketers say content marketing is crucial for their marketing strategy (HubSpot).
• 70% of marketers reported changing their messaging and targeting strategy in 2020 (CMI).
• 79% of marketers reported that increasing quality leads was their top priority in 2021 (Semrush).
• 63% of content marketers use their content marketing strategy to build loyalty with their current customers (CMI).
• 63% of businesses have no official documented content strategy (Marketing Profs & CMI).
• Content ROI statisticsOnly 4% of marketers measure ROI over 6 months or more (LinkedIn).
• The top priority for 44% of marketers is improving their measurement of ROI for demand generation (HubSpot).
• 75% of content marketers state that they receive a better ROI when incorporating visuals in their content (Contently).
• 40% of survey respondents said they consume 3–5 content pieces before contacting a salesperson (DemandGen).
• 31% higher open rates versus non-segmented email campaigns (Mailchimp).
• Only 22% of millennials want emails from brands they support versus 57% of 45–54-year-olds (HubSpot).
• Email marketing has an ROI of 40% for every dollar spent (Smart Insights).
• 87% of marketers use email marketing to distribute their content (CMI).
• Adding videos to your emails can help increase click rates by 300% (Martech Advisor).
• 49% of respondents said they want to receive weekly promotional emails from their favorite brands (Statista).
• A/B testing can help to increase email marketing ROI by up to 37% (Litmus).
• 85% of B2B marketers are or plan to use interactive infographics as part of their content strategy (DemandGen).
• 75% of respondents agree that non-gated interactive content results in a superior degree of lead nurturing (CMI).
• Content marketing via augmented reality is expected to increase since 67% of marketing agencies already use this as part of their content efforts (Vibrant Media).
• 94% of marketers agree interactive content is effective for educating customers (Inc).
• 88% of marketers stated interactive content helps differentiate their brand from competitors (SnapApp).
• 43% of consumers stated they prefer interactive video over other video content as it gives them the option to choose what information they want to engage with (MarketingCharts).
• 88% of companies with budgets between $100 million and $1 billion were already experimenting with AR in 2018 (Deloitte).
• The Latest B2B Content Marketing Trends, Statistics and Insights for 2021 – circle S studio: Here are some key insights from the report:Most companies have a content marketing strategy, but less than half have documented it In this year’s survey, 79% of B2B marketers reported that their organization has a content marketing strategy.
• There is a correlation between having a strategy and effectiveness, as 60% of the most successful content marketers have a documented content marketing strategy.
• The pandemic has required businesses to respond quickly and the research found that 83% of B2B marketers made quick changes to their content marketing.
• Of those B2B marketers with a content marketing strategy, 70% made major or moderate adjustments to their strategy due to the pandemic.
• 22% view those adjustments as short-term while 66% view them as both short- and long-term.
• The top three changes made in response to the pandemic include updating targeting/messaging strategy (70%), adjusting the editorial calendar (64%), and changing the content distribution and promotion strategy (53%).
• When asked to rate the success of their overall content marketing efforts, this year 85% of marketers said their efforts were either extremely successful (5%), very successful (26%) or moderately successful (54%).
• A somewhat significant number of marketers (14%) considered their efforts minimally successful and only 1% reported their efforts to be not at all successful.
• B2B marketers who reported high levels of content marketing success (extremely/very successful) said the top two factors contributing to that success were the value their content provides (83%) and website changes (60%).
• On the flip side, marketers who reported low levels of content marketing success (minimally/not at all successful) said it was mostly due to content creation challenges (63%) and strategy issues (51%).
• These goals include creating brand awareness (87%), building credibility/trust (81%), educating audiences (79%), generating demand/leads (75%), building loyalty with existing clients/customers (68%) and nurturing subscribers/audience/leads (60%).
• The majority of B2B companies track content performance Highlighting the importance of metrics, 81% of B2B content marketers report their organization is using metrics to measure content performance.
• The top 5 metrics tracked to measure content performance are website traffic (90%), email engagement (86%), website engagement (84%), conversions (80%) and social media analytics (76%).
• Blogging remains the cornerstone of content marketing As in previous years, blog posts/short articles are the number one (93%) content type used by B2B marketers in the last 12 months.
• Following blog posts in popularity are email newsletters (77%), case studies (68%) and videos (68%).
• Of all the content types they use, B2B marketers reported that blog posts/short articles and virtual events/webinars/online courses (both tied at 22%) produced the best overall content marketing results for their organization in the last 12 months.
• Although it was one of the most popular content marketing methods in years past, the use of in-person events has decreased to 42% from 73%.
• But with the decrease in in-person events, the use of virtual events/webinars/online courses has increased to 67% from 57%.
• Similarly, the use of live-streaming content has increased to 29% from 10%.
• In fact, 89% used social media as an organic content distribution channel in the last 12 months, with email marketing (87%) and the company website/blog (86%) as close seconds and thirds.
• Nearly all B2B marketers (96%) use LinkedIn for organic content distribution, as well as Twitter (82%), Facebook (82%), YouTube (62%) and Instagram (49%) rounding out the top five.
• 72% of the B2B content marketers use paid methods to distribute content (down from 84% last year), and of that group 83% use social media advertising/promoted posts.
• Other paid content distribution channels include search engine marketing/pay-per-click (65%), sponsorships (60%), banner ads (48%), native advertising/sponsored content (35%) and partner emails (33%).
• When it comes to social media advertising and promoted posts, LinkedIn is the top choice (80%), followed by Facebook (67%), Twitter (27%), Instagram (26%) and YouTube (17%).
• Small content marketing teams serving the entire organization is the most common team structure The majority of marketers (55%) reported that their organizations have a small (1-5 dedicated people) content marketing team serving the entire organization.
• While only 11% of large organizations (1,000+ employees) have a large team (11 or more dedicated people), nearly half (43%) of medium organizations (100-999 employees) have 2-5 employees serving the entire organization.
• Interestingly, 35% of respondents reported that they have no one full-time dedicated to content marketing, while most companies regardless of size are most likely to have teams of 1-5.
• Nearly half of B2B marketers outsource at least one content marketing activity When asked about outsourcing, 49% of B2B marketers outsource at least one content marketing activity.
• Large firms are the most likely to outsource (61%), with small firms the least likely to outsource (37%).
• The activity most likely to be outsourced is overwhelmingly content creation (86%), regardless of company size, content marketing budget, or overall content marketing success.
• Interestingly, the top reported challenge for B2B marketers who outsource is finding partners with adequate topic expertise (69%).
• Half of B2B marketers indicated there was no change in their content marketing spending in the first half of 2020 as a response to the pandemic 53% of B2B marketers indicated there was no change in their content marketing spending in H1 2020 in response to the pandemic.
• Another 29% reported a decrease in spending, and 18% actually reported an increase.
• While 69% of B2B marketers expect their content marketing spending to stay the same (57%) or decrease (12%) in the second half of 2020 compared to the first half, nearly one-third (30%) expect their spending to increase.
• 36% of B2B content marketers reported a 2019 annual content marketing budget of less than $100,000, while the average reported annual budget for all respondents was $185,000.
• 50+ Digital Marketing Statistics for 2024 [SEO, SMM, CRO]: 7% of pages will rank in the top 10 search results within 1 year of being published.
• Here’s a list of social media statistics in 2023– The number of social media users increased only by 3% from January 2022 to January 2023.
• (SproutSocial) Social media recently took over paid search as an advertising tool, growing 25% YoY and exceeding paid search over just $2 billion.
• (G2) In 2023, 29% of marketers plan to invest more in Instagram than any other platform.
• Listed below are some important content marketing statistics – 73% of B2C marketers employ keyword research for SEO when creating content.
• How-to articles are the most popular content formats (77%), followed by news and trends (49%), and guides and ebooks (47%).
• (CMI) 83% of marketers want to focus on the quality of content rather than the quantity, even if it means posting less often.
• (Hubspot) 80% of marketers think automation generates more leads and conversions.
• (Digital Media Stream) Effective blog headlines drive 500% more traffic.
• Listed below are some global digital marketing statistics for advertising – 46% of the page clicks go to the top 3 PPC ads.
• (Hosting Tutorials) 30% of consumers say that influencer recommendations are one of the key factors in deciding about the purchase.
• (Statista) 70% of users have purchased a product after viewing an ad about it.
• (WYZOwl) 39% of marketers who used video as a marketing tool for the first time in 2022, said they were able to do so because it had become easier to convince others in the business of the value of video content.
• (Zenithmedia) 86% of marketers choose video marketing as their primary promotion tool.
• (Omnisend) 81% of SMBs still consider email marketing as their primary customer acquisition channel.
• (Campaign Monitor) 90% of marketers believe personalisation is the future.
• (Optinmonster) 47% of email recipients will open your email solely based on subject lines.
• 6% is the average conversion rate for ecommerce websites for organic leads.
• (Monsters Insights) Only 22% of the businesses are happy with the conversion rate.
• (Econsultancy) Personalized CTAs generate 42% more conversions than non-personalized CTAs (Hubspot).
• (Marketing Evolution) Marketing teams that document their strategy are 313% more likely to report success than those that don’t.
• 8 Digital Marketing Stats from 2021 (And How To Leverage Them in 2022) – DEKSIA: Additionally, a study from eMarketer found that digital advertising spending will have increased 25% in 2021 from 2020.
• Further, entertainment, retail, and CPG will all increase their digital ad spending by more than 30% this year.
• Paid Search is Still in High Demand (Up 39%) Seeing that Google pulled such huge ad revenue results in 2021, it’s no surprise that paid search advertising is still in high demand.
• In fact, spending in this category went up 39% in 2021, accounting for $98.
• 20% of Ad Budgets are Spent on Social Media Advertising Social media advertising is growing, and fast.
• According to Forbes, social media ad spending increased 36% compared to last year, totaling $58.
• com, online searches for “TikTok ads” are up 102% from last year, and up 375% in the last 2 years.
• YouTube & Twitch Advertising is up 47% from 2020 This stat comes from Forbes again.
• Less Than 1 out of 10 Businesses Have Their Own YouTube Channel Unfortunately, a vast majority of businesses (91%) don’t have a YouTube channel, according to brandwatch.
• Content Marketing Statistics from 2020 and Beyond: (CBRE) Email subject lines of 6-10 words had the highest open rate, at 21%.
• (Invesp) 80% of users ignore paid search results and move straight to organic rankings.
• (IMPACT) Search engines (like Google) send 300% more traffic to sites than social media.
• (McKinsey and Company) Google is still dominating the market with 70% of all global desktop search traffic (Net Marketshare) Facebook ad spending was 32% higher in 2021 than 2020.
• Indeed, if your business hasn’t focused on content marketing up to this point, it’s a good idea to start—especially since 60% of B2C businesses are using content marketing strategies (Review42).
• (Review 42) 42% of marketers can’t measure the results of their campaigns.
• (Review 42) 72% of marketers believe branded content is more effective than traditional advertising.
• (Wordstream) 61% of customers who have made a purchase did so after reading a blog post.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 34% of bloggers have a means to analyze the performance of a blog post.
• (Hubspot) 95% of content used in content marketing is made for social media.
• (Lifewire) Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing (Wordstream) yet was estimated to become a $300 billion industry in 2020.
• (Venngage) 53% of mobile users will close a website if it takes longer than 3 seconds to load.
• (Think with Google) Only 66% of B2B marketers will prioritize a customer need over their own sales message in content.
• Roughly 60% of people purchase a product after reading a post about it.
• (Demand Metric) 86% of people reported wanting more videos from brands.
• (Backlinko) Over 60% of larger organizations stated that they outsource content marketing work.
• (Content Marketing Institute) Around 94% of marketers expressed that video content has helped them increase understanding around their product or service.
• To stay relevant amongst the sea of content more than 50% of marketers will create more of it.
• Roi Of Digital Marketing Statistics [Fresh Research] • Gitnux: 4% growth in 2021, surpassing 100 billion dollars for the first time since 2018.
• ROI of Digtial Marketing:Most Important Statistics 73% of in-house and 75% of agency marketers rated email marketing as excellent or good for ROI in a 2019 survey of global marketers, with 57% based in the UK.
• Paid search advertising spending on Google in the US increased 34% in Q3 2021, with a 25% increase in cost-per-click and an 8% increase in clicks compared to the same period in 2020.
• 73% of in-house and 75% of agency marketers rated email marketing as excellent or good for ROI in a 2019 survey of global marketers, with 57% based in the UK.
• Paid search advertising spending on Google in the US increased 34% in Q3 2021, with a 25% increase in cost-per-click and an 8% increase in clicks compared to the same period in 2020.
• Social media impressions have increased by nearly 20% year-on-year, but traditional forms of advertising are seeing a decrease in clicks and clickthrough rates, leading to uncertainty among global marketers on the ability to measure ROI.
• 34% of global marketers were uncertain about their ability to measure social media marketing ROI in early 2020, while 30% believed they could measure it.
• 3% indicates that email marketing is an effective way to reach and engage with customers, and that businesses can expect to see a return on their investment in this area.
• The main content production objectives for companies in France in 2020 were to acquire/transform new customers (40%) and gain notoriety/increase traffic (38%), with profitability being the main expectation for content investment.
• Investing in SEO can result in a 42% average ROI for businesses and generate 1000% more traffic than organic social media, making it a worthwhile investment to focus on and measure for positive ROI.
• 4% growth in 2021, surpassing 100 billion dollars for the first time since 2018.
• Content Marketing Statistics for 2024: 37% Compound Annual Growth Rate (CAGR) expected (2022-2027), as 71% of marketers recognize its growing importance for brand storytelling.
• Consider this:in the past year alone, a whopping 71% of marketers emphasized its heightened significance to their brands.
• [Technavio]93% of B2B marketers and 86% of B2C marketers use content marketing.
• 40% of B2B content marketers have a documented content marketing strategy.
• [CMI]70% of content marketers say their organizations integrate content strategy into the overall marketing sales/communication/strategy.
• According to Hubsopt, 83% of marketers say it’s better to focus on content quality over quantity.
• [Hubspot]But according to Semrush, 55% of marketers who create more content and post more frequently helped the most to boost their content ranking.
• 94% of small businesses have plans to boost their marketing spending in 2024.
• [Taradel]24% of marketers said that content marketing takes up one-fourth or more of the total marketing budget.
• [CMI]45% of marketers believe that their content marketing budget will increase in 2024.
• [CMI]80% of content marketers who are successful spend more than 10% of their marketing budgets on content.
• [Semrush]69% B2B marketers say they would increase their spending on video, followed by thought leadership content (53%), and in-person events (47%).
• 61% of successful marketers conduct content audits two or more times a year.
• [Databox]53% of marketers say updating their content helped increase engagement while 49% saw an increase in traffic and/or rankings.
• [DemandSage]51% of marketers say that content requests go through a centralized content team in large organizations (100-plus employees).
• [HubSpot]48% of content marketers want to learn to work with new technologies like AI.
• 31% of marketers say that having “no structured content production process” is one of the big challenges when scaling content production.
• [CMI]But only 31% of marketers say that they’re using the right tools to manage their content.
• [Web Tribunal]90% of content marketers leverage websites and blogs the most in their content strategy.
• 2% more referring domain backlinks than content shorter than 1000 words.
• Here are some essential video content marketing statistics you should know for 2024:Videos will account for a whopping 82% of all consumer internet traffic by 2025, while video streaming will make up 91% of global internet traffic.
• [Integral Ad Science]53% of marketers say that case studies/customer stories and videos deliver some of their best results.
• [CMI]69% of B2B content marketers think that their companies would increase their investment in video.
• [CMI]40% of marketers said creating more visual, and video content improved their content marketing.
• [Semrush] 97% of marketers said that video helped increase user understanding of their product or service, while 76% said that it helped them increase sales and revenue.
• [Statista]82% of marketers plan on investing the same or more into podcasts or other audio content moving forward.
• Jonathan Perelman of BuzzFeed 90% of marketers use social media platforms (organic), followed by blogs (79%), and email newsletters (73%) to distribute content.
• [CMI]When it comes to paid content distribution channels, 78% use social media advertising/promoted posts.
• [CMI] 62% of marketers said that pay-per-click produces the best results for distributing content.
• 72% of the successful marketers measure the ROI of their content marketing.
• 46% of B2B marketers agree their organization measures content performance effectively.
• [CMI]Content marketing costs 62% less than outbound marketing and provides 3x better lead generation.
• [Insider Intelligence]73% of marketers use conversions as the most frequently used metric to assess content performance.
• Other metrics are email engagement (71%), website traffic (71%), website engagement (69%), and social media analytics (65%).
• [CMI] 84% of marketers have problems integrating/correlating data across multiple platforms when it comes to measuring content performance.
• But it’s not an easy feat since about 45% of marketers said that optimizing content for SEO is one of the biggest challenges of content creation.
• 82% of marketers say generative AI has impacted how they plan to create content.
• [Hubspot]69% of marketers say it is important to their overall content strategy.
• [Hubspot]76% of marketers using generative AI say they use it for basic content creation and copywriting.
• [Insider Intelligence]91% use free tools like ChatGPT while about 27% pay for AI tools such as Jasper.
• [CMI]73% of consumers, on average, trust content written by generative AI tools.
• [Capgemini] 61% of marketers have no guidelines for using generative AI tools.
• VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS IN 2023 | Amra And Elma LLC: 2 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #2 – 35% of Instagram Story users prefer shorter, narrative-style stories 2.
• 3 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #3 – around 62% of marketers are using webinars as visual content marketing tools with success rates of 91% 2.
• 3 times the engagement of those without them (37% increase in engagement) 2.
• 7 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #7 – using the word ‘video’ in the subject line of an email can increase open rates by 6% and click rates by 65% 2.
• 8 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #8 – 93% of companies have obtained a new customer after sharing a video on social media 2.
• 9 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #9 – viewers remember 95% of a message when they watch it in a video, as opposed to 10% when reading it in text 2.
• 10 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #10 – 35% of video marketers had used Facebook Live as a marketing channel and 74% reported that it had worked well for them 2.
• 11 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #11 – 84% of consumers agree that watching promotional videos has convinced them to purchase a product or service 2.
• 13 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #13 – 75% of Instagram users take action after watching a brand’s video ad on the platform 2.
• 14 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #14 – Internet users spend 88% more time on websites and web pages that feature video content 2.
• 15 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #15 – 49% of marketers said that visual content marketing was ‘very important’ to their overall strategy 2.
• 16 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #16 – 72% of consumers would rather learn about a product or service they are interested in through a video 2.
• 17 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #17 – 74% of marketers now incorporate visual elements into more than 70% of their content 2.
• 18 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #18 – 70% of respondents in a recent survey claimed that they watch Facebook Stories more often than Snapchat or Instagram 2.
• 19 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #19 – 69% of consumers keep the sound off when watching online videos, as opposed to social media stories, which are watched with the sound on by 56% of consumers 2.
• 20 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #20 – videos on landing pages can lead to 800% more conversions 2.
• 22 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #22 – since 2000, the searches for the term ‘infographics’ had increased by 800% 2.
• Webinars also taking lead with 40% of marketers using webinars as visual content marketing tools with success rates of 83%.
• VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #2 – 35% of Instagram Story users prefer shorter, narrative-style stories As visual content marketing becomes increasingly popular, it’s important to understand the trends and preferences of users.
• According to a recent Hubspot survey, 35% of Instagram Story users prefer shorter, narrative-style stories.
• VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #3 – around 62% of marketers are using webinars as visual content marketing tools with success rates of 91% According to a survey, visual content marketing tools like webinars are becoming increasingly popular, with around 62% of marketers using them currently.
• And success rates are high, with 91% of those that have used webinars for visual content marketing considering themselves successful.
• 5% According to research, infographics and illustrations are the visual content types that perform the best in terms of engagement.
• 3 times the engagement of those without them (37% increase in engagement) A study by BuzzSumo found that posts with images on Facebook receive 2.
• In addition, social media strategist Jeff Bullas reports that Facebook posts with photos receive an average 37% increase in engagement.
• VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #7 – using the word ‘video’ in the subject line of an email can increase open rates by 6% and click rates by 65% According to a research, using the word ‘video’ in the subject line of an email can increase open rates by 6%.
• Click rates go up by 65% when ‘video’ is used in the subject line, and unsubscribe rates decrease by 26%.
• Including a video thumbnail in the email can also improve subscriber engagement by nearly 41%.
• According to recent studies, roughly 93% of companies have obtained a new customer after sharing a video on social media.
• According to a study, viewers remember 95% of a message when they watch it in a video, as opposed to 10% when reading it in text.
• 36% of respondents said they planned to keep using the platform, making it one of the most popular channels among video marketers.
• VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #11 – 84% of consumers agree that watching promotional videos has convinced them to purchase a product or service Visual content marketing is a powerful tool that can convince consumers to purchase a product or service.
• According to Wyzowl, 84% of consumers agree that watching promotional videos has convinced them to purchase a product or service.
• VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #13 – 75% of Instagram users take action after watching a brand’s video ad on the platform A recent study found that 75% of Instagram users take action after watching a brand’s video ad on the platform.
• VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #14 – Internet users spend 88% more time on websites and web pages that feature video content Video is an effective way to communicate complex information in a concise and visual manner.
• According to SocialMediaToday found that Internet users spend 88% more time on websites and web pages that feature video content.
• According to a recent survey of marketers, 49% of respondents said that visual marketing was ‘very important’ to their overall strategy, and 22% said it was ‘important’.
• VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #16 – 72% of consumers would rather learn about a product or service they are interested in through a video A recent study by SocialMediaToday showed that 72% of consumers would rather learn about a product or service they are interested in through a video.
• In fact, visual content is so effective that it can increase conversion rates by up to 80%.
• When it comes to video marketing specifically, viewers are able to retain 95% of the information they watch, compared to only 10% when reading text.
• Infographics have become particularly popular, with 65% of B2B marketers in North America using them as a part of their marketing strategy, as per Content Marketing Institute.
• VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #18 – 70% of respondents in a recent survey claimed that they watch Facebook Stories more often than Snapchat or Instagram Facebook Stories is a visual content marketing tool that allows businesses to share photos and videos with their followers.
• The platform has quickly become popular with consumers, with 70% of respondents in a recent survey claiming that they watch Facebook Stories more often than Snapchat or Instagram.
• VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #19 – 69% of consumers keep the sound off when watching online videos, as opposed to social media stories, which are watched with the sound on by 56% of consumers According to Verizon Media, 69% of consumers keep the sound off when watching online videos.
• This is in contrast to social media Stories, which are sometimes watched with the sound on by 56% of consumers, and always watched with the sound on by 29% of consumers.
• VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #20 – videos on landing pages can lead to 800% more conversions According to a recent survey, 70% of marketers believe that content adorned with visuals will reap better business results.
• People are drawn to visual content and are more likely to engage with it – videos on landing pages can lead to 800% more conversions as per FunnelScience.
• VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #22 – since 2000, the searches for the term ‘infographics’ had increased by 800% The appeal of infographics is that they can convey a lot of information in a concise and visually appealing way.
• With 74% of marketers now incorporating visual elements into more than 70% of their content, and 49% saying that visual content is ‘very important’ to their overall strategy, it’s clear that there is a demand for quality visuals.
• Additionally, 35% of video marketers have used Facebook Live as a marketing channel and 74% reported that it had worked well for them.
• 2 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #2 – 35% of Instagram Story users prefer shorter, narrative-style stories 2.
• 3 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #3 – around 62% of marketers are using webinars as visual content marketing tools with success rates of 91% 2.
• 3 times the engagement of those without them (37% increase in engagement) 2.
• 7 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #7 – using the word ‘video’ in the subject line of an email can increase open rates by 6% and click rates by 65% 2.
• 8 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #8 – 93% of companies have obtained a new customer after sharing a video on social media 2.
• 9 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #9 – viewers remember 95% of a message when they watch it in a video, as opposed to 10% when reading it in text 2.
• 10 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #10 – 35% of video marketers had used Facebook Live as a marketing channel and 74% reported that it had worked well for them 2.
• 11 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #11 – 84% of consumers agree that watching promotional videos has convinced them to purchase a product or service 2.
• 13 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #13 – 75% of Instagram users take action after watching a brand’s video ad on the platform 2.
• 14 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #14 – Internet users spend 88% more time on websites and web pages that feature video content 2.
• 15 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #15 – 49% of marketers said that visual content marketing was ‘very important’ to their overall strategy 2.
• 16 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #16 – 72% of consumers would rather learn about a product or service they are interested in through a video 2.
• 17 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #17 – 74% of marketers now incorporate visual elements into more than 70% of their content 2.
• 18 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #18 – 70% of respondents in a recent survey claimed that they watch Facebook Stories more often than Snapchat or Instagram 2.
• 19 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #19 – 69% of consumers keep the sound off when watching online videos, as opposed to social media stories, which are watched with the sound on by 56% of consumers 2.
• 20 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #20 – videos on landing pages can lead to 800% more conversions 2.
• 22 VISUAL CONTENT MARKETING STATISTICS #22 – since 2000, the searches for the term ‘infographics’ had increased by 800% 2.
• 35+ Key Social Media Marketing Statistics (2023 Updated Data): Social Media is Utilized By Most Americans, With 76% of the Population Actively Using these Platforms.
• Around 44% of Internet Users Aged 16 to 64 Have Made Social Media Their Primary Source of Information When Researching.
• 64% of Consumers Believe in Brands That Have an Active and Positive Social Media Engagement.
• 76% of Users Make Buying Decisions Based on What They Discover on Social Media.
• 66% of Employees Utilize Social Media for Interaction and Communication with Coworkers.
• 84% of Social Media Content Sharing Occurs Away From Where It Was Initially Posted.
• 97% of People Who Make Online Purchases Have Looked at Social Media in the Last Month.
• 90% of Consumers Will Likely Communicate With a Brand Using Social Media.
• 86% of Americans Will Likely Seek Alternative Shopping Options if a Brand Lacks Transparency.
• Live Video is Considered the Most Transparent Form of Content by 43% of Consumers.
• The Primary Goal for 80% of Marketers is to Enhance Social Media Engagement.
• 53% of Consumers Believe Businesses Take a Stance Primarily to Enhance Their Marketing Efforts.
• 70% of Consumers Anticipate that Businesses will Adopt a Stance on Important Issues.
• 43% of Consumers View Live Video as the Most Effective Means of Achieving Transparency.
• Social Media is Utilized By Most Americans, With 76% of the Population Actively Using these Platforms.
• Around 44% of Internet Users Aged 16 to 64 Have Made Social Media Their Primary Source of Information When Researching.
• 64% of Consumers Believe in Brands That Have an Active and Positive Social Media Engagement.
• 76% of Users Make Buying Decisions Based on What They Discover on Social Media.
• 66% of Employees Utilize Social Media for Interaction and Communication with Coworkers.
• 84% of Social Media Content Sharing Occurs Away From Where It Was Initially Posted.
• 97% of People Who Make Online Purchases Have Looked at Social Media in the Last Month.
• 90% of Consumers Will Likely Communicate With a Brand Using Social Media.
• 86% of Americans Will Likely Seek Alternative Shopping Options if a Brand Lacks Transparency.
• Live Video is Considered the Most Transparent Form of Content by 43% of Consumers.
• The Primary Goal for 80% of Marketers is to Enhance Social Media Engagement.
• 53% of Consumers Believe Businesses Take a Stance Primarily to Enhance Their Marketing Efforts.
• 70% of Consumers Anticipate that Businesses will Adopt a Stance on Important Issues.
• 43% of Consumers View Live Video as the Most Effective Means of Achieving Transparency.
• The figures for social media saw a 10% growth from 2021 to 2022 Social media is utilized by most Americans, with 76% of the population actively using these platforms.
• Around 44% of internet users aged 16 to 64 have made social media their primary source of information when researching.
• Live video is considered the most transparent form of content by 43% of consumers.
• 2% of Gen Y are active on social media platforms 64% of consumers believe in brands that have an active and positive social media engagement.
• 76% of users make buying decisions based on what they discover on social media.
• In 2023, social media platforms will undeniably transform into a vital aspect of daily life for billions of individuals worldwide, making up 60% of the world’s population.
• 4% of the world’s population is now active on social media, with the primary barrier for non-users being internet connectivity.
• The latest statistics reveal that 60% of global internet users access the web through mobile devices.
• Social Media is Utilized By Most Americans, With 76% of the Population Actively Using these Platforms.
• A recent Hootsuite survey indicated that 75% of individuals aged 13 and older are active on social media.
• In the long run, it’s foreseeable that 100% of individuals aged 13 and above will be connected to the internet and engaged in social media.
• Around 44% of Internet Users Aged 16 to 64 Have Made Social Media Their Primary Source of Information When Researching.
• Think about it this way:If we assume people sleep for about 7 to 8 hours daily, we spend about 15% of our waking hours on social media.
• 2% participating in social media, although the older generations might use fewer platforms than the younger ones.
• 64% of Consumers Believe in Brands That Have an Active and Positive Social Media Engagement.
• Recent statistics indicate that 56% of Americans maintain multiple social media accounts, each serving a particular purpose.
• 76% of Users Make Buying Decisions Based on What They Discover on Social Media.
• Additionally, a survey has demonstrated that 93% of marketers use Facebook to connect with their audience.
• 66% of Employees Utilize Social Media for Interaction and Communication with Coworkers.
• 84% of Social Media Content Sharing Occurs Away From Where It Was Initially Posted.
• A recent survey highlights that 84% of content sharing occurs independently from the platform where it was initially posted.
• Recent research indicates that adding a location tag can boost engagement by 79%, and involving another user can increase engagement by 56%.
• Recent findings from Statista highlight that 40% of individuals aged 18-34 who regularly use the internet have purchased through social media platforms in the past month.
• A recent Hootsuite survey reveals that over 75% of internet users use social media for product research.
• 97% of People Who Make Online Purchases Have Looked at Social Media in the Last Month.
• Remarkably, a staggering 97% of buyers need to verify the authenticity of both the product and the seller.
• A recent survey showed that 71% of customers who had experienced a positive social media interaction with a company would recommend the brand to others.
• The same survey found that 80% of consumers have decided to buy something because they have seen it recommended by a social media influencer.
• 90% of Consumers Will Likely Communicate With a Brand Using Social Media.
• Recent research indicates that 90% of consumers use social media to communicate with businesses.
• However, a recent survey found that people find out about 52% of brands via social media.
• The study highlighted that 50% of individuals aged 18 to 29 bought a product in the past year solely because it was promoted on social media.
• According to surveys, the typical consumer buying through social media will spend 20-40% more than those shopping through traditional online stores or physical retail settings.
• 86% of Americans Will Likely Seek Alternative Shopping Options if a Brand Lacks Transparency.
• In a recent survey, 86% of Americans expressed willingness to take their business elsewhere.
• Live Video is Considered the Most Transparent Form of Content by 43% of Consumers.
• According to a recent survey, 43% of consumers believe that live video is the most effective means of demonstrating transparency.
• If creating live videos is not feasible, standard videos remain a potent tool, with 67% of consumers finding them effective in illustrating transparency.
• The survey revealed that 53% of social media users consider transparency essential concerning product changes.
• The Primary Goal for 80% of Marketers is to Enhance Social Media Engagement.
• Hootsuite’s recent data reveals that 80% of social marketers publish content on social media primarily to enhance engagement.
• This strategy proves effective, with a notable 50% of companies using social media for over two years reporting sales growth.
• Furthermore, 93% of marketers acknowledge that exposure and resulting engagement constitute the most significant advantages of advertising on social media.
• 53% of Consumers Believe Businesses Take a Stance Primarily to Enhance Their Marketing Efforts.
• Another study reveals that 53% of consumers think businesses primarily take a stance for image, publicity, and marketing benefits.
• Notably, 40% of consumers view businesses partnering with non-profits as more authentic.
• 70% of Consumers Anticipate that Businesses will Adopt a Stance on Important Issues.
• A recent survey indicated that 70% of customers anticipate this alignment.
• However, the same study revealed that 55% of consumers are inclined to discontinue their association with a business with differing opinions.
• 43% of Consumers View Live Video as the Most Effective Means of Achieving Transparency.
• The survey indicated that 67% of consumers consider them an effective means of showcasing transparency.
• Furthermore, the survey revealed that 53% of social media users deem transparency crucial, especially regarding product changes.
• 140+ Eye-Opening Digital Marketing Statistics for 2021!: Email marketing is the key strategic channel according to 91% of marketers.
• Objectives for email marketing campaigns include sales (62%), engagement (50%), brand awareness (47%), and building loyalty (45%).
• General Social Media StatisticsUsing a social media platform to market your products and services is powerful:83% of marketers ranked social media as an important channel.
• 86% of consumers buying IT products use social media to make a decision.
• IBM increased its sales by an impressive 400% thanks to its inbound social selling program.
• 98% of sales reps with at least 5,000 LinkedIn contacts reach or surpass their sales quota.
• InstagramInstagram is the most popular visual marketing platform and is particularly well suited for businesses that are targeting Millennials:33% of social media users use Instagram discount codes.
• Instagram’s addressable advertising audience, compared to the population aged 13+, is 15%.
• LinkedIn’s addressable advertising audience, compared to the population aged 13+, is 11%.
• 79% of Twitter followers are more likely to recommend the brands they follow.
• Google currently holds over 92% of the worldwide search engine market share.
• An unbelievable 80% of purchases start online, even if they end in-store.
• 70% of businesses surveyed by databox confirmed that SEO generates more sales than Pay Per Click (PPC).
• Improving SEO and organic presence is a top inbound marketing priority for 61% of marketers.
• Digital marketing professionals that combine organic SEO and PPC ads see 25% more clicks and 27% greater profits when compared to results from just one technique.
• 84% of internet users say they’ve searched online for a product or service to buy.
• 42% made their online purchase using a laptop or desktop computer while 55% made an online purchase via a mobile device.
• Lead generation forms have an average of 11 fields and a conversion rate of 17% while contact forms with only 4 fields have conversion rates of only 1%.
• A 1-second delay in loading reduces your conversions by a depressing 7%.
• Businesses using video as a marketing tool have increased by 41% since 2016.
• The types of videos created are explainer videos (73%), social media videos (67%), presentation videos (51%), sales videos (41%), and video ads (41%).
• 24% of video marketers said they used video for the first time in 2020.
• 96% of people have watched an explainer video to learn more about a product or service.
• 84% say they’ve been convinced to buy a product or service by watching a brand’s video.
• 79% have been convinced to buy or download a piece of software or app by watching a video.
• 86% of video marketers say video has increased traffic to their website.
• A striking 55% of internet users bought something online via a mobile phone in the past month.
• This distinction makes a big difference to your marketing strategy, as is shown by these statistics:77% of B2B purchasers said they would not speak to a salesperson until they did their own research.
• 67% of B2C and 41% of B2B companies have acquired a customer through Facebook.
• Surprisingly, 36% of marketers planned to explore automation and Artificial Intelligence as a marketing and sales strategy.
• 5% higher open rate and a 152% higher click-through rate than generic email newsletters.
• Businesses that excel at lead nurturing generate 50% more sales-ready leads at a 33% lower cost.
• 78% of marketers said that email was the most effective online channel for lead nurturing campaigns.
• 65% of businesses say generating traffic and leads is their biggest marketing challenge.
• 74% of companies say that converting leads into buying customers is their top priority.
• Perhaps surprisingly, 96% of visitors that come to your website aren’t ready to buy.
• 68% of B2B companies will use landing pages to nurture new sales leads for future conversion.
• 49% of businesses say most of their leads require “long cycle” nurturing with many influencers.
• 51% of email marketers say email list segmentation is the most effective way to personalize lead nurturing.
• 51% of advertising and marketing managers say that losing a highly skilled team member unexpectedly would have a significant adverse impact on their business because they’d be hard to replace.
• 45% said they would be stretched thin but could find a replacement quickly.
• More than 60% of creative marketers managed more than four unique projects every week.
• 78% of all marketing work is subject to at least one type of compliance.
• Millennials overspend to avoid FOMO, with 40% overspending or going into debt to keep up with their friends.
• 73% of Millenials who went into debt to keep up with their friends kept it a secret.
• 27% of Millenials responded that they felt uncomfortable saying “no” when a friend suggested an activity they couldn’t afford.
• The biggest things creating FOMO for Millenials are travel (59%), parties and events (56%), and food (29%).
• Facebook is the most common contributor to FOMO at 72%, then Instagram (14%), Twitter (11%), and Pinterest (8%).
• 56% of people are afraid of missing out on events, news, and important updates if they are away from social networks.
• 5% higher open rate and a 152% higher click-through rate than generic email newsletters.
• Content Marketing Statistics Australia – Red Search: 3% of Australian Brands Changed Their Content Marketing Strategy During the PandemicA market study by Venngage revealed that more than 64% of small and medium Australian businesses recalibrated their content marketing according to changes brought about by the global health crisis.
• On the other hand, about 36% said they don’t have to realign their techniques amid the COVID-19 pandemic.
• Creators Spend About 5 Hours Developing New ContentAbout 36% of content creators reported consuming about 5 to 10 hours of developing visual marketing content.
• 5% takes 10 to 20 hours to produce new content for SEO and digital marketing.
• Visual Media Content is Dominating the IndustryMost Australian digital brands reported that over 91% of their content includes visual elements and graphics.
• About 21% of respondents claimed to have used visual content for 80% of their website content, while 7.
• 6% of respondents utilise original design for content marketing, while only 14.
• 3% visualise their content and insights through charts and infographics.
• 84% of B2B Companies Outsource Content MarketingA Smart Insights study showed that roughly 84% of B2B brands rely on content creation and marketing outsourcing.
• Moreover, visual content such as charts, infographics, and others are growing by 56% compared to last year.
• Original Content is Most Effective in Achieving Digital Marketing GoalsMore than half (57%) of digital brands in Australia reported that using original content and infographics helped them achieve their goals better than stock photos (7.
• The Race for Content Marketing Led Brands to Spend 30% of Their BudgetMany Australian brands are investing in the rapidly growing content marketing industry.
• That’s why about 36% of brands spend as much as 21%-30% of their marketing budget on content marketing.
• 1% allocate approximately 10% of their marketing budget to publish new content and update and refresh old content.
• Moreover, market changes and digitalisation caused by the pandemic drove brands to increase their content marketing spending by 10%.
• Roughly 7% estimate their budget spending to be as high as 70% in 2021.
• Visual Content is Crucial for More than 71% of Australian BrandsThe same study by Venngage showed that 71.
• 4% of Australian brands say that visually appealing content and data are vital to their overall digital marketing strategy.
• 6% believe that visual content is helpful but not very significant for digital marketing.
• Social Media Content Dominates as the Type of Content for B2B MarketersOut of the three most prominent content types, social media content ranks as the most effective medium for content marketing at 95%.
• Blog posts and short articles rank second at 89%, while newsletter and email marketing fall third at 81%.
• 6% of Australian Brands rely on In-House Content DevelopersOut of 200 digital brands and marketers, 28.
• Over Half of Brands Say Blog Content is a Marketing PriorityAn industry study showed that 55% of B2C businesses focused on blog content development in their overall digital marketing strategy.
• 7% of Marketers Publish Content More Than 5 Times WeeklyMore brands are hopping into content marketing for SEO and digital marketing strategies.
• About half of the respondents produce 2 to 5 content materials weekly, while roughly 36% publish up to 10 times in the same period.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: 47% of consumers are blocking ads In a survey of 93,803 internet users aged 16 to 64, GlobalWebIndex has found that 47% of global internet users use an ad blocker today.
• APAC narrowly leads in ad blocking, with 50% of respondents in this region having used an ad blocker to stop ads in the past month.
• In terms of the top motivations for ad blocking, 48% say it is because there are far too many ads, while 47% say it is because ads are annoying or intrusive.
• Programmatic Best Practice Guide 53% of Next sales are made online It’s been reported that annual sales for UK retailer Next have continued to fall, while its online business has grown.
• Despite recent investment in its high street presence, sales in Next’s stores fell nearly 8% last year to £1.
• According to Next, 53% of its sales are now made online, with online profits jumping nearly 14% in 2018.
• This is in contrast to offline performance, where annual profits at its high street stores fell by just over 20%.
• Despite this, Next insists that its stores are an integral part of business, stating that more than half of online orders were delivered to stores last year, while more than 80% of returns were also made through stores.
• 29% of TV ads not ‘viewable’ Finally, a new study from IPG Media Lab has revealed that 29% of TV adverts are not actually seen by viewers.
• The study found that 29% TV ad deliveries are not ‘viewable’, meaning that nobody is in the room for at least two seconds while the ad is airing.
• In comparison to this, 31% of digital video was classed as not viewable.
• 20% of marketers ‘will never truly understand’ customer buying decisions A new report from Clicktale has revealed that brands are still struggling to get to grips with customer experience.
• In a survey of over 200 marketing professionals, 20% of respondents said they feel they will “never truly understand” their customers’ buying decisions.
• The report states that the reason for this is because 34% of respondents are unable to unite data between their web and mobile-optimised sites to create a single customer view, while 39% struggle to unite data from their websites and mobile apps.
• This inability also means that 71% of brands can’t action customer insights in real time, while 73% are struggling to provide a consistent experience across channels.
• Just 20% of fashion retailers share customer reviews and product ratings New research from Fresh Relevance has revealed that retailers are at risk of losing sales by failing to provide product ratings and review information consistently.
• In a survey of 2,000 UK consumers and 50 top retailers, 61% of UK respondents said they base their purchase considerations on detailed reviews from other customers and 56% on product star ratings.
• However, just 20% of the fashion retailers surveyed are actually providing this information.
• Just half of footwear brands surveyed provide star ratings and customer reviews, and 60% of jewellery, accessories, and electronics brands currently share these details on their websites.
• Interestingly, beauty brands are leading the way in meeting customer expectations, with 100% of those surveyed providing ratings and reviews information.
• The results found that the UK ranks weakest across the board, generating the highest total bug count, accounting for 45% of all bugs found.
• Content Marketing Statistics:2023 Trends & Predictions: It also said 46% of businesses plan to increase content spending this year.
• Here’s what we found:91% of B2B businesses are currently using content marketing.
• 71% of B2B marketers say content marketing has become more important in the last year.
• Only 29% of those surveyed consider their content marketing successful.
• 49% of those surveyed were challenged to align their content marketing efforts with sales.
• Documented Content Strategy Did you know that 42% of marketers say they struggle to produce content consistency and measure it?
• In addition, 37% of marketers said they planned but had not yet documented a content strategy.
• Specialist Creators According to Content Marketing Institute, 46% of businesses plan to increase their content creation spending in 2023.
• It also said 46% of businesses plan to increase content spending this year.
• Here’s what we found:91% of B2B businesses are currently using content marketing.
• 71% of B2B marketers say content marketing has become more important in the last year.
• Only 29% of those surveyed consider their content marketing successful.
• 49% of those surveyed were challenged to align their content marketing efforts with sales.
• Documented Content Strategy Did you know that 42% of marketers say they struggle to produce content consistency and measure it?
• What’s more, according to SemRush, 40% of businesses don’t even have a documented content strategy in place.
• In addition, 37% of marketers said they planned but had not yet documented a content strategy.
• Specialist Creators According to Content Marketing Institute, 46% of businesses plan to increase their content creation spending in 2023.
• In addition, 47% of marketers surveyed said they will hire or contract a dedicated content creator, and 22% said they’d hire a dedicated social media marketer.
• Best Startup Statistics [2023] Learn Digital Marketing: Conclusion General Startup Statistics 2024 69% of entrepreneurs in the US start their businesses at home.
• According to a report from the National Association of Small Business, 35% of small businesses are LLCs, followed by S-corporations (33%), corporations (19%), sole proprietorships (12%), and partnerships (2%).
• The State of Startups Statistics 45% of European startups said that they have easy access to financing.
• 32% of European startups said they had difficulty getting access to funding.
• 66% of European startups said that their primary funding source is self-financing, whereas 9% were funded through business angels and 7% from venture capital firms.
• 42% of startups in the UK, Canada, and the US had venture capital as their primary funding source.
• If a startup founder has previously achieved business success, they’ve got a 30% chance of being successful again with their next venture.
• 82% of successful business owners consider their qualifications and experience enough to run a company.
• 29% of startups failed because they ran out of funding and personal money.
• In 2018, 82% of businesses that went under did so because of problems with cash flow.
• The top causes of small business failure are no market need (42%), running out of cash (29%), not having the right founding team (23%), getting outcompeted (19%), pricing/cost issues (18%), and user-unfriendly product (17%).
• Effect of the COVID-19 Pandemic on Startups 77% of startup founders said they faced potential failure in 2020 due to the global pandemic.
• Since the beginning of the pandemic, typical startups have laid off an average of 33% of their staff.
• Since the start of the pandemic, 72% of startups have experienced a decrease in revenue.
• More than 40% of companies experienced a revenue decline of 40% or more.
• Expense cutbacks have been made by an average of 22% of startups due to the pandemic.
• Between March and April 2020, Portugal’s business formation experienced a 70% decline.
• Turkey (58%), France (54%), and Hungary (47%) have also been severely impacted.
• Fintech deals fell to around 30% in the second quarter of 2020, compared to the year’s first quarter.
• 2% of entrepreneurs say they are optimistic about startups, so much so that they were planning to start one in 2021.
• 9% of respondents believe that now is an excellent time to start a business.
• 9% of entrepreneurs were more likely or very likely to start a new business now than in the previous three months.
• 7% of entrepreneurs said they were less likely to start a business now than three months ago.
• 3% said that the pandemic had increased their interest in controlling their destiny through company ownership.
• 8% said that the pandemic has made them lean towards pandemic-resistant businesses.
• 72% of startup founders say they feel optimistic that the recruitment pace will increase in 2021.
• Analysts are predicting that the US will experience a 5% economic growth rate.
• Less than 1% of startups evolve into unicorn startups such as Airbnb, Uber, Stripe, Docker, and Slack.
• 65% of startups admit to not being confident they’ve got enough money to start their business.
• 93% said they calculated they might run short of money in less than 18 months.
• The most popular small business financing methods in 2018 were:personal funds (77%), bank loans (34%), borrowing from family and friends (16%), donations from family and friends (9%), online lenders (4%), angel investors (3%), venture capital (3%), and crowdfunding (2%).
• 73% of startups want to invest more in their social media, and 57% plan to increase investment in email marketing.
• Startup Founder Demographics and Diversity Statistics Reason for starting 26% of people who start a small business say they did it because they were ready to be their own boss.
• 19% of people starting a small business say that the opportunity presented itself, and they took it.
• 2% of new business startups say they were dissatisfied with corporate America.
• 3% started a new small business after a life event such as death or divorce.
• In 2019, 73% of small business owners identified as male, while 25% identified as female.
• Education 33% of people starting a small business have a High School/GED.
• When it comes to age, the largest percentage of small business owners are in the 50-59 age bracket, while the smallest percentage is over 70 (40%).
• Small Business Statistics for Startup Teams 99% of US businesses are considered small, which means they have less than 500 employees.
• A startup owner can spend 40% of their working day doing tasks that generate no income, such as payroll, hiring, and HR tasks.
• A startup’s chance of success increases when there are two founders, three times the customer growth, and 30% more investment.
• In 2020, 34% of freelancers were forced to start new projects because of the pandemic.
• Startups Industry Specific Statistics The industries with the maximum number of small business startups in 2018 were business services (11%), food-restaurant (11%), health/beauty/fitness (10%), general retail (7%), and home services (6%).
• 4% NPM), management of companies and enterprises (16% NPM), and activities related to real estate (14.
• 7% NPM), semiconductor and other electronic component manufacturing (0.
• Construction Startup Statistics The failure rate in construction is the second highest at 53%.
• AI technology is all set to boost construction industry startup profits by 71%.
• As of 2018, the tech startup industry has the highest startup company failure rate of 64%.
• Between 2007 and 2016, tech-based wage growth was 20% compared to just 3% for the average US wage growth.
• Between 2007 and 2016, electronics and computer manufacturing startups have risen by 78%.
• Around 31% of commercial real estate investors plan to invest in prop-tech companies.
• 26% of commercial real estate investors plan on partnering with prop-tech companies.
• The Future of Startup Statistics 60% of entrepreneurs agree that AI is currently the most promising innovation technology and will remain so for the next decade.
• When asked about long-term goals, 50% of company leaders said the acquisition was the most realistic scenario.
• 2%) and the second-largest percentage of failed startups in the United States (13.
• Around 90% of startup companies funded will not make it to the initial public offering (IPO).
• 2%) and the second-largest percentage of failed startups in the United States (13.
• The Big List of Content Marketing Statistics | Brafton: Semrush Only 30% of marketers say the COVID-19 pandemic will not change their plans in 2022.
• Influitive 65% of marketers say case studies and success stories are the biggest value drivers for their business.
• Hubspot 70% of marketers use account-based marketing strategies to target their content.
• Hubspot 72% of marketers say their company uses reporting tools for data analysis.
• Oracle 58% of companies with more than 80 marketing employees say their efforts were “extremely successful” last year compared to 33% at companies with marketing departments of 30 or fewer employees.
• Oracle 82% of organizations plan to add, remove or replace components of their marketing tech stack to improve performance.
• Altimeter Only 13% of companies rely purely on internal creative ideas, while others employ a mix of company goals, competitor analysis, audience needs and digital data.
• Altimeter Nearly half (46%) of marketers plan to use better data to create personalized content that serves the customer journey.
• Deloitte 83% of consumers in 2021 are aware that brands are using their personal data and 71% of users expressed concern over how companies are using their personal data.
• Brafton Most marketers agree that blog articles (68%) and downloadable assets like eBooks and white papers (62%) are the best way to learn about content marketing.
• B2B Content Marketing Trends Content Marketing Institute 77% of B2B marketers report having a content marketing strategy, though only 40% documented their strategy.
• Content Marketing Institute 66% of B2B marketers expect their 2022 content marketing budget to increase over their 2021 budget.
• WPromote Social media has the biggest impact on the customer experience for 57% of B2B marketers.
• Content Marketing Institute 50% of B2B marketers outsource content marketing activities.
• Content Marketing Institute The top 2 content marketing-related areas of investment for 2022 are expected to be video (69%) and events (digital, in-person or hybrid) at 61%.
• WPromote 67% of B2B marketing executives expect to increase spend on marketing technology.
• WPromote 60% of B2B marketers say that “wasted time” is the greatest cost associated with lead generation struggles.
• Vidyard 68% of B2B marketing influencers regard research and case studies to be the most trusted type of content.
• Demand Gen 44% of B2B buyers typically consume 3 to 5 pieces of content before engaging with a vendor.
• Demand Gen 79% of B2B buyers say that vendor content had a significant impact on a buying decision.
• B2C Content Marketing Trends Content Marketing Institute 70% of B2C marketers report having a content marketing strategy, though only 39% documented their strategy.
• Content Marketing Institute 50% of B2C marketers outsource content marketing activities.
• Content Marketing Institute 65% of B2C marketers prioritize the audience’s informational needs over their organization’s sales/promotional message.
• Oracle 37% of B2C marketers are testing and implementing tactics in new social platforms like TikTok, Discord and Twitch.
• Hubspot Influencer marketing is a tactic that 61% of B2C marketers plan to use in 2022.
• Content Marketing Institute 61% of B2C marketers expect their 2022 content marketing budget to exceed their 2021 budget.
• Content Marketing Institute 72% of B2C marketers predicted their organization would invest in video in 2022.
• Semrush 69% of marketers use social media to distribute and promote their content organically.
• Social Media Examiner 88% of marketers say social media marketing increases business exposure.
• Demand Gen 71% of B2B professionals use LinkedIn to share business-related content.
• Animoto 93% of brands got a new customer because of a video on social media.
• Email Marketing Statistics Semrush 54% of marketers use email marketing to distribute and promote their content.
• DMA 72% of marketers use email to engage with consumers across the customer journey.
• Litmus 80% of email marketers use name, company name and other profile data to personalize email sends.
• Litmus On average more than 65% of marketers create at least 2 versions of an email to segment and personalize the content.
• DMA 41% of marketers send emails to their mailing lists on a daily basis.
• Litmus 30% Email marketing is very critical to company success for 30% more marketers now than before the pandemic.
• Litmus 43% of marketers are changing how they measure email performance because of Apple’s Mail Privacy Protection.
• DMA 51% of marketers believe consumers open and read at least half of the emails they receive, though most consumers (59%) report that they open and read less than half.
• Blogging Statistics Hubspot 48% of companies that have a content marketing strategy leverage blogging.
• ” Semrush Articles with 7 or fewer words in their H1 get 36% more average organic traffic than those with 14 or more words.
• Moz Re-optimizing your content can increase the number of clicks a page generates by more than 40%.
• Brafton 70% of websites in the HR industry that generate more than 100,000 organic visitors per month write 2 or more blogs per week.
• Visual Content Marketing Statistics Venngage Almost half (48%) of marketing content contains visuals.
• Venngage 49% of marketers primarily use visual content on blogs and websites followed by social channels such as Facebook and Instagram.
• Hubspot 56% of content marketers who use infographics say that they’re the most effective marketing content type.
• Hubspot 42% of marketers plan to increase budget in virtual reality (VR) and augmented reality (AR).
• Venngage Around 50% of content marketers spend less than 5 hours a week creating visual content.
• Wyzowl 92% of marketers value video as an ‘important part’ of their marketing strategy.
• Wyzowl The majority of marketers say video has helped them increase understanding of their product or service (94%), improve brand awareness (93%), boost traffic (87%) and generate leads (86%).
• Vidyard 93% of sales and marketing professionals believe that video converts the same or better than other forms of content.
• Vidyard 91% of organizations are maintaining or increasing video content production budgets.
• Social Media Examiner 71% of marketers plan to increase their YouTube video marketing efforts.
• Wyzowl 88% of people say they’ve been convinced to buy a product or service by watching a brand’s video.
• Wyzowl 69% of people say they’d most prefer to learn about a new product or service by watching a short video.
• Lemonlight 62% of consumers say they prefer to watch video content on a smartphone or tablet.
• Unbounce 81% of marketers know speed impacts their conversions, yet only 3% say faster load times are their top priority.
• Content Marketing Institute Both B2B (69%) and B2C (67%) marketers say website engagement provides the most insight into content performance.
• Altimeter 63% of companies use website analytics to create personalized/customized content.
• Search Engine Optimization Statistics Hubspot 69% of marketers actively invest time in SEO.
• Semrush 61% of marketers say improving the quality and authenticity of their content increases organic search ranking.
• Hubspot Over 50% of marketers use keyword rankings and organic traffic to measure the success of their SEO strategies.
• Hubspot Almost 25% of companies invest in mobile optimization as a top SEO tactic.
• Think With Google Over 40% of shoppers go to Google when researching a purchase they plan to make in-store or online.
• Search Engine Marketing Statistics Brainlabs 74% of brands say that pay-per-click is a huge driver for their business.
• Brainlabs 58% of marketers spend less than $50,000 per year on PPC tactics.
• Brainlabs The top platforms that brands spend money on are Google (90%), Facebook (81%) and Microsoft (59%).
• Brainlabs 65% of marketers say paid search is the most effective PPC channel.
• Hubspot 79% of marketers report buying paid advertising on social media in 2021.
• Formstack 78% percent of marketers rely on Google AdWords and social media advertising to promote their messages.
• Formstack 54% of marketers conduct paid campaigns to generate better quality leads WordStream Sponsored search results account for 65% of clicks, compared to 35% for organic results.
• eMarketer About half of adult US internet users said that when brands use their data in advertising, it helps them discover (50%) and find (49%) products and services that interest them — but 44% said this often feels invasive.
• Audio Content Statistics Infinite Dial 68% of people in the US over age 12 have listened to online audio in the last month.
• Infinite Dial 28% of people in the US over age 12 listen to a podcast on a weekly basis.
• Hubspot 80% of marketers who leverage audio content and podcasts plan to invest the same amount or more budget in 2022.
• Edison Research 51% of podcast listeners who are 18+ and listen to 5 or more hours of podcasts every week say they pay more attention to ads on podcasts than on other media.
• Edison Research 53% of podcast listeners say their opinion of a company is more positive when it’s on a podcast they regularly listen to.
• Virtual Event Marketing Statistics Hubspot 40% of marketers plan to increase their investment in virtual events, webinars and conferences in 2022.
• Vimeo 59% of companies host webinars for lead generation and marketing purposes such as promoting their brand, product or service.
• Content Marketing Institute Webinars are the highest-performing video format for more than half (51%) of B2B marketers.
• Eventbrite 53% of virtual event consumers said they plan to attend both virtual and in-person events in the future — even when it is safe to gather in person again.
• Demand Gen Almost half (49%) of B2B buyers say webinars are the most valuable content format in the early stages of the buying process.
• Vimeo Virtual event attendees say that quality of speakers (64%) and relevance of content (63%) encourage them to sign up for events.
• Top 10 content marketing statistics in 2022: Social media is the most effective way to reach out to potential customers, with 78% of companies using it as a marketing tool.
• 70% of people who read blog posts will either take action or buy something.
• 85% of people who purchase due to a content marketing campaign were contacted through email.
• 83% of content marketing companies say that it has increased their revenue by at least 20%.
• 91% of marketers say that they are increasing the amount of user-generated content on their websites.
• 97% of marketers use interactive website content, such as surveys and quizzes to engage with customers.
• 85% of marketers say that they measure the effectiveness of their content marketing campaigns using some metric, such as bounce rate.
• A study by the Content Marketing Institute (CMI) found that 62% of marketers use content marketing in their businesses.
• This number has been increasing yearly, with 78% of marketers utilizing content marketing in 2022.
• In 2018, 71% of marketers said that creating quality content was essential to their success as a business.
• Additionally, 72% of marketers said that building an audience was crucial to their success as a business.
• In 2018, 50% of marketers said content marketing was one of the most effective ways to improve their SEO ranking.
• Furthermore, 50% of marketers said that creating high-quality content was one of the most effective ways to improve their SEO ranking.
• A study by The Content Marketing Institute (CMI) found that 81% of marketers publish their content online, up from just 54% in 2009.
• According to a study by Aberdeen Group, 65% of B2B marketers publish at least one print piece each month.
• For example, if your website has a 1% drop in visitors, 1,000 people visited your website and spent an average of 30 minutes.
• If your website had a 2% drop in visitors, it means that 800 people visited your website and spent an average of 30 minutes on it.
• Social media is the most effective way to reach out to potential customers, with 78% of companies using it as a marketing tool.
• 70% of people who read blog posts will either take action or buy something.
• 85% of people who purchase due to a content marketing campaign were contacted through email.
• 83% of content marketing companies say that it has increased their revenue by at least 20%.
• 91% of marketers say that they are increasing the amount of user-generated content on their websites.
• 97% of marketers use interactive website content, such as surveys and quizzes to engage with customers.
• 85% of marketers say that they measure the effectiveness of their content marketing campaigns using some metric, such as bounce rate.
• A study by the Content Marketing Institute (CMI) found that 62% of marketers use content marketing in their businesses.
• This number has been increasing yearly, with 78% of marketers utilizing content marketing in 2022.
• In 2018, 71% of marketers said that creating quality content was essential to their success as a business.
• Additionally, 72% of marketers said that building an audience was crucial to their success as a business.
• In 2018, 50% of marketers said content marketing was one of the most effective ways to improve their SEO ranking.
• Furthermore, 50% of marketers said that creating high-quality content was one of the most effective ways to improve their SEO ranking.
• A study by The Content Marketing Institute (CMI) found that 81% of marketers publish their content online, up from just 54% in 2009.
• According to a study by Aberdeen Group, 65% of B2B marketers publish at least one print piece each month.
• For example, if your website has a 1% drop in visitors, 1,000 people visited your website and spent an average of 30 minutes.
• If your website had a 2% drop in visitors, it means that 800 people visited your website and spent an average of 30 minutes on it.
• Social media is the most effective way to reach out to potential customers, with 78% of companies using it as a marketing tool.
• 70% of people who read blog posts will either take action or buy something.
• 85% of people who purchase due to a content marketing campaign were contacted through email.
• 83% of content marketing companies say that it has increased their revenue by at least 20%.
• 91% of marketers say that they are increasing the amount of user-generated content on their websites.
• 97% of marketers use interactive website content, such as surveys and quizzes to engage with customers.
• 85% of marketers say that they measure the effectiveness of their content marketing campaigns using some metric, such as bounce rate.
• A study by the Content Marketing Institute (CMI) found that 62% of marketers use content marketing in their businesses.
• This number has been increasing yearly, with 78% of marketers utilizing content marketing in 2022.
• In 2018, 71% of marketers said that creating quality content was essential to their success as a business.
• Additionally, 72% of marketers said that building an audience was crucial to their success as a business.
• In 2018, 50% of marketers said content marketing was one of the most effective ways to improve their SEO ranking.
• Furthermore, 50% of marketers said that creating high-quality content was one of the most effective ways to improve their SEO ranking.
• A study by The Content Marketing Institute (CMI) found that 81% of marketers publish their content online, up from just 54% in 2009.
• According to a study by Aberdeen Group, 65% of B2B marketers publish at least one print piece each month.
• For example, if your website has a 1% drop in visitors, 1,000 people visited your website and spent an average of 30 minutes.
• If your website had a 2% drop in visitors, it means that 800 people visited your website and spent an average of 30 minutes on it.
• [Infographic] 48 statistics why personalization is important in digital marketing: ─Gartner Only 15% of CMOs believe their company is on the right track with personalization ─McKinsey 42% of B2B marketers report their marketing efforts are not fully personalized.
• ─Folloze 39% of B2B marketers say their personalized marketing strategy is only somewhat advanced, while 15% say their personalization strategy is not at all advanced.
• ─Folloze 95% of retailers state personalization as a top strategic priority (64% say it’s a TOP 3 priority).
• ─McKinsey 36% of retailers state that personalization is necessary just to keep up with industry changes.
• ─McKinsey Revenue impact Personalizing web experiences creates a 19% uplift in sales.
• ─ Instapage 87% of marketers report a measurable lift from personalization, while 54% of marketers report a lift of more than 10%, and 13% report more than 30%.
• ─ Evergage 15% of retailers saw 100-300% increase in new customer conversions.
• ─McKinsey Companies that personalize their content can increase revenue 10% or more in retail.
• ─McKinsey Offering helpful messages requires a depth of customer insight that can increase brand intent, purchase and repurchase rates, and cart size up to 20%.
• ─Gartner 44% of consumers say they are likely to do repeat purchases after a personalized shopping experience.
• ─Segment 49% of shoppers have bought a product they initially didn’t intend to buy after a personalized recommendation.
• Meanwhile, 40% say they bought something more expensive because of a personalized experience.
• ─Segment 21% of retailers saw customer traffic double, while 59% saw traffic increase 25-50%.
• ─McKinsey Customer experience and brand 52% of consumers and 65% of B2B buyers are likely to switch brands/vendors if a company doesn’t personalize their communications to them.
• ─Salesforce 54% of B2B buyers want personalized recommendations across all interactions with a company.
• ─Evergage 98% of marketers agree personalization helps them create a better customer relationship.
• ─Evergage 71% of consumers feel frustrated by the lack of personalization when shopping.
• ─McKinsey Consumer expectations drive personalization efforts in retail and 46% of retailers see personalization as a way to be more customer-centric.
• ─McKinsey 74% of millennials are frustrated with brands that send irrelevant and generic emails.
• ─SmarterHQ 82% of B2B buyers want the same experience as when they’re buying for themselves.
• ─Salesforce 72% of business buyers expect vendors to personalise engagement to their needs.
• ─Salesforce For 84% of customers, being treated like a person, rather than number is very important to win their business.
• ─McKinsey Personalization can make marketing 10-20% more efficient by saving costs.
• ─Alterra Group Personalization can increase marketing spend efficiency by 30%.
• ─Adweek 10% of retailers believe personalized marketing can also help them achieve higher marketing budget efficiency.
• ─McKinsey Challenges Marketing leaders also report that 78% of them struggle to scale personalization, partly due to a lack of key competencies in the organization.
• ─Gartner 54% of B2B marketers believe personalization is harder for B2B than B2C.
• ─Folloze 67% of retailers state gathering, integrating, and synthesizing data needed for personalization as the greatest challenge.
• ─ McKinsey 41% of retailers state delivering personalized marketing was hindered by finding the right solutions partner.
• 50+ Content Marketing Statistics You Need To Know [2024]: Content Marketing Strategy Statistics Content marketing is an essential part of the marketing strategy for 97% of marketers.
• 55% of marketing professionals reported that improving content quality made their content marketing strategy successful.
• 4% of content marketers reported that 91-100% of their content comprises visual elements.
• 2% of content marketers spent 0-10% of their budget on creating visual content, however, they were expected to spend 21-30% of their budget on visuals in 2022.
• According to content marketing statistics, 86% of businesses prefer leveraging video content format for marketing their products/services.
• Marketers report that 78% of customers purchase a product/service after going through a video.
• YouTube, a video streaming site by Google, is the most popular website in the United States by traffic and 73% of marketers are using it.
• In a survey, 96% of the customers revealed they watch an explained video to get more information about a product or service.
• Video is a highly effective content type amongst millennials, with 40% of them trusting it.
• Data suggests that the search volume of the term ‘Infographics’ has increased by over 800% in the last two years.
• 7% of marketers struggle with problems related to design and visual content.
• Updating the existing blog content has remained an effective technique for 51% of organizations.
• An article with over 7000 words of content drives 4x more traffic and is shared 43% more than an article of an average length (1500-2000 words).
• According to the data, 82% of content marketers receive a positive ROI from blogging.
• The latest data for 2022 revealed that 62% of Americans aged 12+ listen to podcasts.
• Podcasts form a significant part of the marketing strategy for 50% of content marketing specialists.
• Open rate is the most tracked email marketing metric with 95% of the businesses tracking it, while the conversion rate is being tracked by only 55% of the customers.
• 46% of professionals stated that their company spent at least $10,000 on content marketing in 2019.
• 78% of the top brands were successful with their content marketing in the year 2022.
• According to data, 58% of marketers around the world allocated their content marketing budget to contract content creators/agencies, while 51% of them spent it on content management tools.
• Content marketing cuts down costs by 62% as compared to traditional marketing.
• 72% of marketers planned to increase their content marketing budget in 2022 as compared to traditional marketing.
• In a survey conducted in 2021, roughly 40% of the participating marketing professionals stated that these were the major challenges faced by them as well.
• 100+ Need-To-Know Social Media Marketing Statistics (2024): This coincides nicely with the number of Americans discussing politics on Twitter which comes in at 42%.
• 71% of American Tweeters actually read the latest news on the platform.
• The truth is, most of its users spend 26% more time with ads on Twitter than other social media users.
• Video is Twitter’s fastest-growing advertising tool, and when you take into account that Twitter ads with video are 50% cheaper in cost-per-engagement, then you can see why it’s a viable option.
• 73%, year-over-year, it’s a good opportunity to convert traffic into leads.
• Tweets with hashtags tend to get almost 100% more engagement than those without, providing an easy way to get more eyes on your content.
• However, over one-third (36%) of Facebook’s audience are still 45 or older.
• But you might also be shocked to know that 43% report that they get their news from Facebook.
• But only 15% use it to shop for products which can be frustrating for advertisers when you consider how many people can be reached through Facebook ads, which we’ll look at next.
• Especially when 26% of people who click on ads report making a purchase.
• It’s also worth paying attention to the mobile user experience for Facebook ads because 94% of ad revenue comes from mobile advertisements.
• For example, did you know that Facebook will usually reject an ad image that contains more than 20% text?
• Running an online giveaway is a great way to do this – especially when you know that over 20% of Instagram users visit a business profile daily.
• This is likely due to the platform being available in 80 languages, which covers 95% of the internet’s population.
• This leads nicely into the state of YouTube advertising, with mobile ads getting peoples’ attention 83% of the time.
• (Source:Ipsos) The fact that 95% of YouTube ads are audible likely plays into this.
• With 92% of Fortune 500 companies using LinkedIn, it’s safe to say that this is the best social network for connecting with like-minded professionals.
• In fact, 45% of them are in upper management, highlighting the hiring power of the platform.
• When considering your options for advertising on LinkedIn, it’s worth noting that 58% of B2B advertisers like LinkedIn’s ROI on ads.
• It turns out InMail has a 300% higher response rate than traditional email, which makes it far easier for you to reach the right candidate for your latest job openings.
• (Source:Demand Wave) And from the same source, 71% of those people say they use LinkedIn as part of their marketing strategy.
• Top Digital Marketing Stats Every Hospital Should Know About: (PwC) 33% of patients already use mobile for health research and appointment booking (Google) Digital Isn’t Only for the Young 61% of Americans age 65 and older are now active internet users, up from 14% in 2000 Social media usage has tripled among those 65 and older since 2010.
• (Pew) Online Content Affects Patient Decisions 41% of consumers say that content found on social media will likely impact their choice of hospital or treatment center (PwC).
• 5 Statistics Healthcare Marketers Should Know About Digital Marketing: To help medical marketers keep up with the latest in digital marketing, here are five statistics every professional needs to know:5% of Google searches are for health-related information:That is one in every twenty searches, which is a lot of patient-initiated medical searching.
• In fact, a Google study revealed that 77% of patients used search prior to booking an appointment.
• 62% of smartphone owners use their devices to look up information about a health condition:The web as we know it is evolving into a mobile entity.
• 41% of patients say social media does influence their selection of a healthcare provider:The medical community will have to be more social and open to engaging in conversations with the patient community.
• Inbound marketing can deliver 54% more leads into the marketing funnel:The traditional methods of outbound advertising are no longer effective in healthcare marketing.
• 48 Social Media Marketing Statistics for 2023 – 99firms: 277% more leads are generated on LinkedIn than on Facebook and Twitter.
• 71% of consumers with a good social media experience are likely to recommend the brand to others.
• The COVID-19 pandemic prompted people to spend more time online, and stats show that an average user will dedicate 15% of their day to social media platforms.
• The adoption rate for social media users accelerated by more than 13% in 2021.
• Statistics on social media marketing show 43% of social media users admit to using these platforms as a discovery engine.
• As many as 99% of social media consumers worldwide report regularly accessing social media platforms from their mobile phones.
• 98% of Pinterest users have tried out things they found on the platform.
• The latest Pinterest stats show that 89% of Pinners are on the platform for purchase inspiration, while another 50% of US users frequently shop on Pinterest.
• Facebook is the leading platform for marketers, with over 90% using it.
• In the latest worldwide survey, Facebook won on account of having the most extensive reach, as 93% of social media marketing experts are using it.
• Social media marketing data reveal Instagram comes in second with 78% of marketers using it, and LinkedIn third with 61%.
• More visibility and exposure and raising brand awareness are the most critical social media marketing factors for 90% of marketers.
• Fewer than 8% of marketers believe that social media marketing is “somewhat ineffective” or “very ineffective.
• 1% are uncertain because calculating social media ROI is more complicated than other marketing channels.
• Social media marketing stats meanwhile show 77% of consumers are more likely to buy from a brand they follow on social media.
• Marketers are increasingly confident in social media marketing’s benefits, with nearly 90% seeing it as very or somewhat important to their overall strategy.
• Nearly 70% of social marketers see brand awareness as a priority in their strategy.
• Social media marketing facts show raising brand awareness is still a top priority for 69% of marketers.
• Increasing web traffic is in second place for 52%, followed by growing a brand’s audience for 46%.
• 50% of consumers follow brands on social media to learn about new products/services.
• Research, which examined consumer expectations from brands on social media, showed that half of users want to learn about new products and services, closely followed by 48% who want to be entertained.
• For followers of brands they are already loyal to, the third place goes to staying up-to-date with company news (40%).
• Research on why consumers drop brands on social media points to poor customer service as the primary reason, with 56%.
• Social media statistics for business show sharing irrelevant content follows with 51%, while 43% of consumers claim they’ve seen one too many ads.
• 277% more leads are generated on LinkedIn than on Facebook and Twitter.
• 74% of visitor-to-lead conversion rate, compared to below 1% for both Facebook and Twitter.
• 27% of B2B companies believe social media to be indispensable in their marketing campaigns.
• Social media marketing data shows Facebook is used by 91%, LinkedIn by 79%, and 70% report using Twitter for marketing.
• Over 80% of executives check social media before making a purchasing decision.
• Social media for business statistics reveal that 84% of executives use social media before making purchasing decisions.
• A platform with half a billion users, LinkedIn accounts for 80% of lead generation for marketers.
• B2B marketers mostly use this network to deliver content and say it generates 50% of traffic to B2B websites.
• Social media marketing data shows that a whopping 91% of marketing executives also believe LinkedIn to be the platform for relevant leads and content.
• Social media marketing facts reveal that 85% of businesses opt for third-party tools, such as HubSpot, Buffer, and Sprout Social.
• More than 70% of consumers with a pleasant social media experience are likely to recommend the brand to others.
• 71% of satisfied customers are likely to recommend strongly performing brands to the people in their network, amplifying the effect of social media marketing efforts.
• 60% of marketing professionals identify measuring ROI as one of their most significant social media marketing challenges.
• 3% of marketers think they can quantify the impact of social media marketing.
• After following a brand on social media, 87% of consumers report visiting its website or app.
• 78% of consumers also report visiting a brand’s physical store (if it exists) after following it on social media.
• 71% of people complaining to a brand on Twitter expect a response within an hour.
• Social media marketing data analysis shows over 80% would recommend it to others.
• Instagram shopping posts have increased traffic for brands by as much as 2,600%.
• Just under 70% of brands use influencer marketing on Instagram, according to social media marketing facts.
• While influencers will often use several social media platforms, Instagram takes the cake as the most popular, with 67% of influencer campaigns targeting Instagram users.
• Influencer marketing is reported as the least popular on Twitter and Twitch, with 15% and 8%.
• 98% in 2019 and even 99% in 2020 of its total revenue came from paid advertising.
• Snap’s product, Spectacles, accounted for an insignificant part of income, 1% and 2% in 2019 and 2020, respectively.
• Social media ads statistics show that just over two-thirds of the company’s revenue (64%), originated in the US.
• The engagement levels are stunning, the highest of all social media and 22% higher than on Facebook.
• Marketing analysts also compared the audience size of the 50 largest brands on Facebook and Instagram, and the results show a 35% larger audience on the latter.
• Said metrics include:CTR (link click-through rate)CRM (cost per 1,000 impressions)Landing page conversion rateEffective Facebook ads should have a CTR above 1% and a CRM lower than $40 on average.
• Businesses worldwide are reacting to Instagram’s rising popularity, as 90% of top brands have an account.
• 98% median engagement rate for Instagram across all industries, decreasing from 1.
• Predictions for 2022 reveal a whopping 82% of online content will be video.
• Social media marketing stats show that 73% of videos in 2020 were shorter than 2 minutes.
• 82% of those who use the internet also have at least one account on social media.
• Social media usage statistics show boomers are less likely to use other social networks and 19% more likely to share content.
• Social media marketing statistics point to 55% of consumers of all ages trust UGC over other marketing forms.
• For millennials, video content from YouTube makes 67% of all their online video consumption.
• The latest data shows over 50% of businesses worldwide are using social media to increase their virtual presence.
• Social media usage statistics by country reveal that 63% of businesses in Australia used social media in 2020.
• The average spending on social media marketing is 10%-20% of total digital marketing budgets.
• We can’t point to an exact number, but we can tell you 78% of salespeople who use social media outsell their peers who don’t.
• Social media marketing industry facts reveal 90% of top salespeople use social selling tools.
• Companies with social selling processes are 40% more likely to achieve their revenue goals.
• Social media statistics point to a stunning 53% of the world population regularly using social media.
• Social media marketing statistics point to 90%-97% of marketers using social media as an essential part of their strategy.
• Content Marketing Statistics That Define the Industry in 2023 | SerpWatch: Top Content Marketing Statistics | Editor’s Choice There was a 13% increase in the digital marketing budget in 2020.
• The latest statistics reveal that content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing.
• In 2020, 45% of B2B content marketers stated that the COVID-19 pandemic made a moderate impact on their content marketing strategy.
• 86% of video marketers say video has increased traffic to their website in 2021.
• Around 62% of consumers are more likely to buy a product that has customer photos and videos.
• 46% of marketers revealed that their companies spent around $10,000 on content marketing efforts in 2019.
• The 2020 digital marketing statistics reported a 13% increase in digital marketing budget compared to the previous year.
• According to the latest content marketing cost statistics, traditional marketing costs 62% more than content marketing.
• Statistics on content marketing effectiveness reveal that 60% of marketers believe that content marketing helped them nurture subscribers in 2020.
• 29% of B2B content marketers reported an increase in technology spending in the last 12 months of 2019.
• B2B content marketing statistics reveal that 87% of B2B marketers stated content marketing helped their organizations achieve brand awareness.
• The results indicated that 81% of respondents believed that their organizations managed to build credibility amongst customers with the help of content marketing.
• In addition, 75% of them revealed that they could generate leads, while 68% stated that they managed to build loyalty with existing clients.
• However, only 45% of marketers reported that content marketing can support their organization in launching a new product.
• The 2020 content marketing statistics show that 45% of B2B content marketers said that the pandemic has had a moderate impact on their content marketing strategy.
• The current content marketing trends reveal that over 36% of consumers in the US made an impulse buy that was based on an ad since the beginning of 2020.
• Organic LinkedIn usage by B2B marketers increased to 96% in the last 12 months.
• Content writing statistics from 2021 report that 78% of B2B marketers use keyword research tools for SEO while creating content.
• Visual content statistics indicate 86% of video marketers consider videos have increased traffic to their website in 2021.
• Millennials are the most targeted group of digital marketing campaigns—since the start of the pandemic, 43% of millennials spend more time watching video content.
• Video content marketing stats reveal that 60% of businesses use video as a marketing tool in 2021.
• Social media marketing ROI statistics for 2020 show that 30% of marketers believe they are able to measure social media ROI.
• According to visual content marketing stats, nearly 62% of consumers were more likely to buy a product if customer photos and videos were available.
• 4% of respondents stated that Instagram’s UGC affected their shopping decisions, while 16.
• 60% of content marketing budget spend should be allocated for content promotion and no more than 40% for content creation.
• According to 2019 content marketing facts, 46% of marketers stated their company spent up to $10,000 on content marketing efforts.
• Even though many companies are finally seeing the potential that content marketing brings, data shows that only 17% of companies worldwide invested between $10,000 and $25,000 in their content marketing campaigns in 2019.
• 10 Social Media Advertising Stats Marketing Professionals Can’t Ignore: Digital media and technology activity increased by 24% from 2015 to 2016.
• In 2015, global analysts predicted a 33% increase in spending for social media ads.
• 25% of people who see a social ad, will then respond by visiting the store or website.
• According to eMarketer, in addition to the 25% who see a social ad and visit a store or website, between 14 – 17% will ultimately convert by purchasing a product or service.
• According to eMarketer, this number will jump to 49% in 2016 as the platform opens up advertising opportunities to all businesses.
• Over 50% of B2B marketers rank social media as a “very” or “somewhat” low cost ad option.
• 60% of all time spent on digital media is performed on a mobile device.
• Over 90% of advertisers and agencies plan to run Facebook video ads this year.
• 25 Social Media Marketing Statistics You Need to Know in 2022: But this increased focus is causing the price of digital advertising to increase by 45% on average.
• Facebook and Instagram saw an increase of 60% in how much marketers spent on their ads year over year from 2020 to 2021.
• In the US, 68% of internet users are on social media, with the percentage increasing with how young the user is.
• This breaks down into 90% of teenagers being on social media, 90% of millennials, 77% of Gen Xers, and 48% of Baby Boomers.
• And 40% of internet users between the ages of 18 – 34 are using social media to buy products.
• Even more telling is that 54% of internet users sign on to social media for product research.
• Nearly 71% of customers who have positive social media interactions with a brand recommend it to their friends.
• And when companies interact with customers on social media, customers will spend anywhere from 20% to 40% more on products.
• And if people like your branded content, they’ll share it – 74% of users share branded video content.
• But unfortunately, 40% of customers are using ad blockers, which disables the ability of your ads to get through to your customers.
• 49% of users between the ages of 18 and 29 have bought a product they saw from a social media ad.
• Surprisingly, 86% of US internet users valued transparency so much that if the brand wasn’t being transparent, they’d buy items from a different company.
• Social consciousness is also very important to consumers, with 70% saying that they want brands to take public stands on issues.
• This sentiment is true across the political spectrum, with 78% of liberals and 52% of conservatives agreeing that brands should be more political.
• But taking a public stand can have a huge backlash because 55% of consumers said they might boycott a disagreeable brand.
• The verdict is in:social media marketing campaigns are used by pretty much everyone, with 92% of American businesses utilizing them.
• And the rate is even higher among small business owners, with 96% of them using social media marketing campaigns.
• 90% of businesses say it has improved their exposure, and 75% of marketers say that these campaigns have increased traffic to their websites.
• By the end of 2025, digital advertising spending is expected to be $315 billion, which is an increase of an astounding 106% from 2020 levels.
• Social Media Marketing Statistics for 2024:All You Need to Know – InboundBlogging: 5% of Americans use social media in 2023, which corresponds to 246 million people.
• 1% of US businesses with over 100 employees use social networks for marketing purposes.
• 55% of consumers state that they use social media to learn about new businesses.
• More than 75% of the global population above 13 years old uses social media.
• 82% of people purchased a product found on social media through their phones.
• 76% of Americans expect brands to respond within 24 hours on social media.
• TikTok is the most used influencer marketing channel, leading with 56%.
• 1% of US marketers in organizations with more than 100 employees use social media as a marketing tool.
• 79% of the total internet users in the US had used at least one social media platform in January 2023.
• 80% of all users’ time on social media is spent on mobile devices, including both smartphones and tablets.
• 82% of shoppers had bought a product directly from their mobile phones after discovering it on social media.
• 27% of individuals access the internet through a mobile device, whereas just 39.
• Predictions suggest that 72% of all internet users will access the web solely via smartphones by 2025.
• Despite mobile prevalence, 75% of internet users between the ages of 16 and 64 still use laptops and desktop computers to access the internet.
• You can increase your engagement rate by 79% on Instagram posts by tagging the location.
• Your landing page’s conversion rate can rise by 80% if you include a product video.
• 74% of people who viewed an explanatory video about a product/service purchased it.
• 1% of global social media users said they use social media platforms for brand research, while 43.
• 49% of consumers say they rely on recommendations from social media influencers to make shopping decisions.
• 71% of customers are likely to tell their friends and family about a brand after having a positive encounter with it on social media.
• Nearly 40% of consumers between the ages of 18 and 34 have purchased a product through social media.
• The average Twitter user posts only 2 tweets per month, but 10% of users who are the most active in terms of volume, tweet 138 times every month.
• The top 10% of most active tweeters are generally women and focus more on politics.
• Native documents have the potential to generate 5x more clicks than any other content on the platform, reaching a CTR of 8% to 13%.
• For 61% of Pinterest users, the platform is their go-to place to start a new project.
• 46% of weekly Pinners say that they’ve discovered a new product or brand on Pinterest.
• YouTube is the fourth most used social media platform by marketers, with 52% leveraging the platform.
• 95% of US teens say they use YouTube, giving it the gold medal among teenage users.
• Facebook’s share of the social media advertising market is estimated to be 16%.
• Influencer Marketing Stats 68% of marketing organizations collaborate with social media influencers.
• 6% of internet users aged 16 to 64 follow influencers and experts on social media.
• 61% of companies have worked with influencers they already know from different campaigns.
• 9% of marketers plan to use machine learning and artificial intelligence to find influencers and create campaigns.
• 4% of businesses admit they’ve used a virtual influencer (a digital character that acts like a real human) in their campaigns.
• According to Hubspot’s survey, 80% of marketers work with micro-influencers with under 100K subscribers/followers.
• In contrast, just 16% of marketers claim to work with mega influencers who have more than 1 million followers.
• 90% of businesses cite new business creation as their primary ABM strategy objective.
• 56% of marketers think that a successful ABM strategy depends on personalized content.
• 5% of Americans use social media in 2023, which corresponds to 246 million people.
• 1% of US businesses with over 100 employees use social networks for marketing purposes.
• Millennials and Social Media Statistics 2022:Platforms and Marketing | WBL: The report further indicates that nearly 77% of the total US millennial population uses Facebook daily.
• Top Statistics About Millennials And Social Media:Editor’s Choice 79% of US millennials use social media multiple times a day.
• 82% of millennials make impulse purchases if they like the item enough.
• The 2019 survey conducted by Pew Research Center reported that 86% of millennials in the US use social media.
• According to the latest millennials and social media stats, 79% of millennials in the US use social media multiple times a day.
• According to social media usage statistics by age, 87% of US millennials use Facebook at least once a week.
• Out of 4,000 Adobe consumers, 19% think that millennials are most easily influenced by online content.
• According to YPulse’s millennial social media statistics, 43% of millennials spend more time watching video content during the COVID-19 pandemic.
• The latest data from Oberlo indicates that the most popular social media for millennials in the US is Facebook, with almost 80% active millennials.
• The most recent social media users statistics for 2021 reveal that millennials make up about 25% of LinkedIn users.
• Millennials and Zoomers are the most active on Reddit, as 36% of users are 18–29.
• At 22%, older Millennials and Generation X—aged 30–49—are the second biggest user group on the platform.
• Reddit figures indicate a downward trend in usage and engagement the older the user group is, as only 10% are 50–64 and 3% are over 65.
• 4% of millennials said that social media improved their life satisfaction.
• 4% of Americans think that social media improves their life satisfaction.
• 72% of millennials buy fashion and beauty products based on Instagram posts.
• The latest millennials and social media stats indicate that 70% of millennials trust brands that post videos about their products.
• The latest millennial market research shows that a brand’s social media presence impacts 75% of millennials’ purchasing.
• 82% of millennials purchase an item the first time they see it if they like it enough.
• According to Roy Morgan’s 2020 survey, 61% of millennials in Australia have an Instagram account.
• The latest BCG millennials and social media statistics indicate that 62% of millennials have spent more time on social media during the pandemic.
• The report further indicates that nearly 77% of the total US millennial population uses Facebook daily.
• According to the latest data, 86% of millennials use social media daily.
• 25 SEO Statistics that Prove the Power of Search – SMA Marketing: With 6 billion queries a day and roughly 15% of those searches having never been searched before, there is enough of the pie for everyone.
• png’ alt=’SEO Statistics ‘ 540px border=’0’ />Here are some of my favorites SEO statistics:According to Net Market Share (as of April 2017) the global marketing share percentage, in terms of the use of Search Engines heavily favors Google, with over 77%.
• (WordStream, 2016)71% of B2B researchers start their research with a generic search.
• (Google, 2015)72% of consumers who did a local search visited a store within five miles.
• A Guide to the Social Media Marketing Statistics in the Philippines – WAZILE Inc.: 7% of the total active social media users access social media via their mobile devices.
• Here’s the number of audiences you can potentially reach and engage using advertisements on the following platforms (Digital 2021:Philippines):Facebook – 83 million (53% female and 47% male) Facebook Messenger – 45 million (53.
• 8% male) To add, although social media doesn’t directly affect or increase your SEO efforts, let alone your search engine rankings, it still pays to know more about the search statistics.
• 10 Social Media Advertising Stats Marketing Professionals Can’t Ignore: Digital media and technology activity increased by 24% from 2015 to 2016.
• In 2015, global analysts predicted a 33% increase in spending for social media ads.
• 25% of people who see a social ad, will then respond by visiting the store or website.
• According to eMarketer, in addition to the 25% who see a social ad and visit a store or website, between 14 – 17% will ultimately convert by purchasing a product or service.
• According to eMarketer, this number will jump to 49% in 2016 as the platform opens up advertising opportunities to all businesses.
• Over 50% of B2B marketers rank social media as a “very” or “somewhat” low cost ad option.
• 60% of all time spent on digital media is performed on a mobile device.
• Over 90% of advertisers and agencies plan to run Facebook video ads this year.
• 15 Social Media Marketing Statistics Every SaaS Business Needs to Know | kenmoo.me: 93% of marketers agree that brand exposure is the main advantage of social media advertising.
• 75% of marketers say they have experienced an increase in website traffic due to their social media campaigns.
• 73% of marketers said that their social media marketing activities have been “somewhat effective” and “very effective” for their businesses.
• 43% of consumers surveyed said they had discovered new brands or products via social media.
• 90% of respondents will buy from brands they connect to on social media as they feel more loyal toward them.
• 71% of consumers who have had a good experience with a brand on social media are likely to recommend it to others.
• 81% of Instagram users surveyed said that they learn about products and services through the platform.
• 78% of salespeople using social media outperform their peers who don’t use social media.
• 93% of marketers say that Facebook is the most important social platform for their business.
• 62% of marketers say that social listening as a social media marketing strategy has helped them to acquire new customers.
• 66% of small businesses benefit from the use of social media for marketing purposes.
• 40% of Twitter users purchased following an influencer’s recommendation via the platform.
• Social media marketing has a 100% higher lead-to-close rate than outbound marketing tactics.
• The Most Important Travel SEO Marketing Statistics for 2024: As a result of this disruption, it is no surprise that over 90% of global travel marketers drastically reduced their marketing budget to keep their business afloat during these challenging times.
• A smart travel SEO strategy can help your business appear in search results, which is important since paid search only reaches 39% of search result pages with ads.
• It’s worth noting that 72% of people who conduct a local search will eventually visit a physical store as a resubecausesearch, that goes which travel businesses like agencies, tour operators, camps, and hotels.
• Studies show that 90% of individuals conduct all their holiday research online, typically starting 12 weeks before their trip to a chosen destination.
• In fact, for 60% of travelers, the first step is placing an online search.
• 81% in link acquisition, while those not leveraging social media see a slightly lower rate at 13.
• As a result of this disruption, it is no surprise that over 90% of global travel marketers drastically reduced their marketing budget to keep their business afloat during these challenging times.
• A smart travel SEO strategy can help your business appear in search results, which is important since paid search only reaches 39% of search result pages with ads.
• It’s worth noting that 72% of people who conduct a local search will eventually visit a physical store as a resubecausesearch, that goes which travel businesses like agencies, tour operators, camps, and hotels.
• Studies show that 90% of individuals conduct all their holiday research online, typically starting 12 weeks before their trip to a chosen destination.
• In fact, for 60% of travelers, the first step is placing an online search.
• 81% in link acquisition, while those not leveraging social media see a slightly lower rate at 13.
• As a result of this disruption, it is no surprise that over 90% of global travel marketers drastically reduced their marketing budget to keep their business afloat during these challenging times.
• Researchers have shown that “staycation” searches increased by more than 500% in July 2020 compared to just one year before.
• A smart travel SEO strategy can help your business appear in search results, which is important since paid search only reaches 39% of search result pages with ads.
• Appearing in organic search results is crucial to capturing the remaining 60% of searches.
• Across the internet, 81% of consumers on the internet find products and services by using search engines.
• It’s worth noting that 72% of people who conduct a local search will eventually visit a physical store as a resubecausesearch, that goes which travel businesses like agencies, tour operators, camps, and hotels.
• About 78% of local searches on search engines lead to a purchase being made offline.
• Based on data from Ruler Analytics, the majority of conversions, 85%, occur online, while a smaller percentage, 15%, occur over the phone.
• Studies show that 90% of individuals conduct all their holiday research online, typically starting 12 weeks before their trip to a chosen destination.
• In fact, for 60% of travelers, the first step is placing an online search.
• About, 90% of link builders state that no-follow links impact search rankings.
• 81% in link acquisition, while those not leveraging social media see a slightly lower rate at 13.
• About 32% of link-building professionals spend 1-2 hours for a single link, while 24% may require more time, with 3-5 hours per link.
• B2B Marketing Statistics 2023:SEO Trends, Growth and Facts: As of reports in 2023 over the world, 74% of B2B Marketers have set goals but out of which only 3% have achieved their marketing goals.
• As of reports in 2023 over the world, 74% of B2B Marketers have set goals but out of which only 3% have achieved their marketing goals.
• Editor’s choice According to Statista 2022, in-house marketing activities were conducted by 41% of B2B businesses.
• Whereas, to drive the sales rate higher 86% of B2B marketers have used LinkedIn.
• In 2022, around the world, 66% of B2B marketers have planned to increase their spending on B2B content marketing.
• After reading the content, almost 52% of buyers are more inclined to purchase from vendors in 2023.
• The major area of marketing spending comes from website development which is leading with 51%, followed by digital marketing (44%), content marketing (33%), Branding (27%), and social media (22%).
• com) In 2023 around the world, B2B buyers by 77% have faced an overly complex last deal in a B2B buying cycle.
• As of now, the B2B buying cycle is getting shorter According to the latest B2B marketing stats only 33% of B2B marketers have completed sales within four to six weeks.
• For enhancing sales rate 41% of marketers are currently using the B2B video marketing strategy.
• The significant purchase factor for buyers is content personalization and 63% of B2B teams include approximately 3 decision makers.
• According to Statista 2022, in the United States in-house marketing teams were observed in 56% of B2B companies, 38% of B2B companies had both outsourcing and in-house marketing, and 6% of companies’ marketing tasks were outsourced.
• The most implemented B2B tactic in 2022 was email marketing with a leading share of 84%, second best B2B tactic was social media used by 75% of B2B experts followed by content marketing and blogging (69%).
• companies spend on B2B marketing which dedicates 5% of their budget to marketing.
• Whereas, 23% of B2B companies didn’t put any effort into implementing B2B strategies and spent less than 1%.
• Only 47% understand the importance of B2B strategies which allocate almost 10% to the marketing sector.
• On the other hand, across the world, only 13% of companies have reported spending on total budget with more than 15%.
• com) As of 2022, around 32% of B2B companies have invested almost 5% of their annual budget for marketing.
• 21% of B2B companies have allocated 10% of their budget followed by more than 13% of B2B companies that have invested 15% of their budget, another 13% of B2B companies have allocated only 1% of their budget and 10% of B2B companies have allocated less than 1% budget for enhancing marketing.
• Whereas, the other activities that B2B marketing teams outsource are followed by content distribution (31%), content technology (22%), Content strategy (13%), Measurement (13%), Editorial planning (12%), and others (18%).
• It is expected that the United States is going to spend more than $30 billion on advertising by the end of 2023 projecting a share of 48%.
• com) In 2022, B2B marketers have stated that the best channel for generating leads with the highest return on investment (ROI) is 50% email marketing.
• com) As of 2022, in B2B businesses more than 60% of buyers were likely to make repeat purchases whereas, 62% of business buyers have preferred cooperating with old vendors.
• Video content played an effective role as over 70% of business buyers have watched videos for product research.
• B2B buyer’s purchasing decision was influenced directly by vendor website (70%), internet search (67%), Social media (53%), regular publication (47%), and email content (41%).
• Remote or digital interaction was preferred by 70% of B2B buyers and human or self-service interaction was preferred by 80% of B2B buyers.
• According to B2B digital marketing statistics, 70%-74% of B2B business buyers have spent half of their time doing online research on websites, video sites, social media, and search engine results in 2022.
• According to search engine optimization statistics, B2B marketers achieved 70% of organic traffic from searches.
• In 2022, almost 40% of the B2B Company’s revenue has increased by using organic search in content marketing.
• For finding out online information 71% of B2B clients preferred using search engines.
• Statistics by B2B Paid Marketing As of 2023, almost 16% of B2B companies claimed that the top spending of digital marketing is online advertising.
• For enhancing brand awareness and driving out paid traffic 6% of B2B firms have used YouTube.
• For launching advertising campaigns almost 80% of B2B marketers used Google Ads.
• In the case of sharing online content around 61% of B2B marketers used paid ads.
• B2B Marketing Statistics by Strategies The other effective strategies are followed by personalization (32%), Inbound Marketing (29%), Podcast and live streaming (27%), conversational marketing with chatbots (24%), and mobile-first strategy (22%).
• Some least used strategies are programming advertising, voice optimization, CMR, digital marketing, and SMM with shares holding 11%, 11%, and 5% respectively.
• uk) The five highest-performing strategies used by B2B markets in 2022 are account-based marketing (46%), video marketing (41%), influencer marketing (38%), artificial intelligence (38%), and retargeting (33%).
• Among B2B marketers across the world, the most popular social media platform is Facebook and 42% of B2B organizations have used social media to attract new clients.
• Across the world, B2B marketing specialist by 83% has shared their content on this platform, and Facebook ad campaigns were launched by 2/3rd of marketers.
• The main source of using social marketing is to increase brand awareness by 25% of marketing firms.
• Another way of increasing brand awareness in 84% of B2B businesses is influencer marketing.
• The second most popular social media platform is LinkedIn and almost 89% of businesses use it for generating leads and 65% of B2B business firms attract new clients by using this platform.
• According to marketing statistics, Instagram was used by 46% of B2B content marketing specialists.
• For enhancing potential client reach 17% of organizations used Instagram ads.
• Statistics by B2B Video Marketing As of 2023, video marketing spends 88% more time on their sites and helps in drawing user’s attention.
• More leads are attracted by video content along with increasing conversion rates which is claimed by 83% of B2B markets.
• Over the world, video marketing is used by 75% of companies to help increase ROIs.
• The most effective client conversion is experienced by 71% of video marketers.
• According to B2B marketing statistics, 31% of marketers believed that email engages more readers.
• Email messages are used as tools by 82% of marketing specialists for sharing informative content with others.
• For increasing sales opportunities, 81% of B2B content marketers have used newsletters to keep their subscribers informed.
• Around 16% of B2B companies or organizations will spend more on email marketing in 2023 across the world.
• Whereas, email marketing is termed as the top tool used by 59% of B2B organizations that helped in gaining sales.
• B2B Marketing Statistics by Industries Almost 50% of the High-tech B2B industry remained digital and in coming years the trends are expected to enhance more.
• Whereas, the high–tech industry remained extremely competitive in 2022 stated by 60% of organizations.
• Meetings with sales managers were avoided by 59% of B2B tech buyers The average cost for generating leads in the B2B financial sector is around $43 and for overcoming competitors in financial service sectors 77% of financial institutions have planned on implementing innovation.
• According to B2B marketing strategies, the largest B2B financial company is Stripe As of 2022, 26% of the budget was spent by B2B companies in manufacturing industries on marketing.
• B2B businesses in the worldwide healthcare industry have invested 18% of their budgets in marketing efforts.
• In the sectors of insurance, finance, and banking B2B companies have spent around 14% of their budget on marketing strategies.
• Whereas, only 2% of the budget was used on marketing by mining and construction-based B2B organizations.
• uk) As of 2023, B2B marketers have achieved successful content marketing by creating 83% brand awareness, and in 2022 it was around 80%.
• The other successful content marketing in 2023 and 2022 are followed by building/trust/growing credibility (77% and 75%), educating the audience (72% and 70%), Building loyalty with existing clients (63% and 60%), Generate leads (67% and 60%), and Nurture leads/subscriber (54% and 49%).
• It has been observed that B2B businesses those are having good content marketing strategies remain more beneficial for attracting new clients and worldwide 91% of marketers have used B2B marketing strategies in their businesses.
• B2B Marketing Statistics – Holistic SEO: Source:Content Marketing Institute 51% of B2C Marketers and 33% of B2B Marketers use Instagram.
• Source:Content Marketing Institute 65% of B2B Companies acquire customers with LinkedIn Ads at least once.
• Source:SmartInsights gives 2% less than the Content Marketing Institute.
• 67% of B2C Businesses and 41% of B2B Companies acquire customers on Facebook at least once.
• B2B Marketers use Facebook at a rate of 96% and LinkedIn at 83% as a digital marketing platform.
• Source:ComScore 75% of B2B Marketers use social media to support their purchasing decisions.
• Source:Hubspot Facebook (89%), LinkedIn (81%), and Twitter (75% probability) are the most used social media B2B channels.
• For Return on Investment, 59% of marketers say SEO is the best method for B2B Marketing.
• Source:Marketing Charts 59% of B2B Marketers use YouTube to promote their content.
• Source:Content Marketing Institute 75% of B2B Marketers definitely use video.
• Source:Content Marketing Institute 64% of B2B Marketers consider video marketing to be decisive for them.
• Source:Tabular Insights 71% of B2B Search searches begin with a general concept on Google.
• Source:Google 50% of B2B Marketers see content creation as their biggest hurdle.
• Source:LinkedIn 90% of B2B Marketers say it is difficult for them to generate interest.
• Source:Statista 70% of B2B Marketers prioritize content quality over quantity.
• Source:Kapost 88% of B2B Marketers consider case studies to be the most effective content type.
• Source:Content Marketing Institute 85% of B2B Marketers engage in content marketing on a regular basis.
• Source:Content Marketing Institute 81% of B2B Companies say blog posts are critical to conversion.
• Source:Nurture B2B Companies get 70% more leads if they publish 1-2 blog posts every month than if they don’t publish at all.
• Source:HubSpot 49% of B2B Marketers consider a tested sales tunnel essentially.
• Source:Statista 34% of B2B Blog readers state that B2B Companies publish content on topics that they are not interested in.
• Source:KoMarketing 53% of B2B Marketers have a one-person or multiple-person content production team.
• Source:Content Marketing Institute 95% of B2B marketers say readers use blog posts to see their company’s credibility.
• Source:Adscope 49% of B2B Marketers consider “article” content essential for their marketing.
• Source:Statista 70% of B2B Marketers consider producing more content than last year.
• Source:BuzzSumo 47% of B2B Customers read 3-5 pieces of content before speaking to a sales representative.
• Source:DemandGen Between 57% and 70% of B2B customers conduct research before contacting a B2B company for the first time.
• Source:Google 58% of B2B marketers say it takes longer to make a decision.
• Source:Business2Community 44% of B2B marketers leave their website if their contact information is not visible.
• Source:KoMarketing 70% of B2B Customers watch at least one video while making a decision.
• Source:Google 96% of B2B Customers prefer content that includes ideas from industry leaders.
• Source:DemandGen 73% of B2B Customers prefer personalized B2C-like content and experiences.
• Source:Google More than 50% of B2B Searches are performed on mobile devices.
• Source:Google 20% of B2B Sales are carried out through mobile marketing.
• Source:BCG 80% of B2B employees search for the products they will buy on tablets and mobile devices in the evening.
• Source:IDG Global Solutions 67% of B2B marketers make inbound marketing a priority.
• Source:HubSpot 70% of internet users use content to learn about products, not images.
• Source:B2B Marketing Insider 68% of B2B Companies do not have any defined sales channels.
• The engagement rates in B2B email marketing exhibit variability, typically falling within 20% to 30% for open rates and approximately 3% to 5% for click-through rates.
• Several research and surveys indicate that a substantial majority, ranging from 80% to 90%, of business-to-business (B2B) marketers believe that testimonials and customer reviews influence the purchasing decisions made by potential customers.
• According to industry reports for 2021, it has been suggested that the average conversion rates for B2B websites often fall within the region of 2% to 5%.
• Nevertheless, websites that demonstrate exceptional performance have the potential to attain significantly elevated conversion rates, occasionally surpassing the threshold of 10%.
• 20 content marketing statistics that will make you think – Marq: 85% of businesses have seen an increase in demand for content in the last year.
• 87% of businesses say at least some customers expect personalized content, and 43% say most customers expect personalized content.
• Only 32% of brands report that the majority of their content is personalized.
• 36% of businesses report that a majority of customer decisions are influenced by their brand’s content.
• 68% of brands believe most of their content is relevant to their customers.
• 83% of businesses believe content is most effective in the awareness and consideration stages.
• 86% of marketers and creatives believe content is most effective in the awareness and consideration stages.
• 60% of people in sales believe content is most effective in the consideration stage.
• 67% of survey respondents say content they consume from other businesses is irrelevant or only somewhat relevant.
• Over half of respondents (56%) think other brands’ content is only somewhat or not at all trustworthy.
• However people are or aren’t tracking their content, survey respondents estimated that content — specifically personalized content — could, on average, increase revenue by a whopping 48%.
• Survey respondents believe personalized content could increase a brand’s revenue by 48%.
• 48% of businesses say 50% or less of their content is regularly used by stakeholders.
• The majority of sales professionals say they use less than 50% of their brand’s content.
• Only 27% of brands actively measure the ROI of the content they produce.
• 64% of creative teams spend at least 5-10 hours per week on mundane content and edit requests.
• 7 content marketing stats that should shake higher education – and 5 ways to act on them | Cursive Content: 66% of prospective college students believe schools should have a social media presence.
• More than 90% of colleges have a Facebook fan page and 80% of prospective students use Facebook.
• Over the past two years, the number of colleges with blogs has grown from 36% to 55%, pointing to the growing recognition that content is key.
• 50 Visual Content Marketing Statistics:The Complete Guide | Pepper Content: People remember 65% of what they see three days later than 10 percent of what they hear.
• 88% of marketers said they used visual content in 50% or more of their content.
• For 42% of marketers, stock photography is the most commonly utilized visual material.
• Similarly, by 2022, the video will account for 80% of all internet traffic.
• The first impression is everything Visual information makes up 90% of the data sent to your brain.
• Approximately 11% of respondents to Venngage’s survey stated they spend more than 20 hours a week producing visual content.
• Marketers’ use of visual content Visuals are vital to 64% of marketers.
• Venngage’s annual poll found that 40% of respondents said they use them more frequently than any other sort of visual material.
• Despite being the most often utilized visual material, just 13% of respondents said stock photographs were the most effective.
• According to estimates, consumer internet traffic will be 82% video by 2022.
• That’s why 64% of individuals who view a sponsored social video end up making a purchase.
• That’s why 84% of those who took part in an Infographic World poll said infographics were successful.
• While adding a cinemagraph (a form of GIF) in an ad for Mist Twst raised CTR by a stunning 75%.
• According to a Venngage report, just 4% of marketers utilize memes and GIFs as their most often used visual material.
• According to 72% of marketers, branded content is more effective than magazine adverts.
• Include visuals in your blog 81% of companies choose to promote videos on Facebook.
• In contrast, just 16% of responders were successful with only one image.
• Visual social media platforms are popular among teens Instagram is used by 72% of teens, while Snapchat is used by 69% of the same age group.
• After seeing a brand or product in Stories, 58% of consumers said they were more interested in it.
• Notably, 20% of Americans use Twitter, totaling roughly 70 million users!
• LinkedIn users adore visuals LinkedIn is the most popular social networking site for B2B firms, with 80% of B2B marketers using it.
• On LinkedIn, the material is frequently seen as more reliable than that found on other sites, such as Facebook, accounting for 46% of all social traffic to B2B websites.
• 53% of individuals say they would select a brand that utilizes VR over a brand that doesn’t use VR if given the option.
• 69% of millennials prefer to conduct their product searches using images rather than text.
• Forty-nine percent of marketers say visual marketing is critical, while 22% say it is vital.
• People remember 65% of what they see three days later than 10 percent of what they hear.
• 88% of marketers said they used visual content in 50% or more of their content.
• For 42% of marketers, stock photography is the most commonly utilized visual material.
• Similarly, by 2022, the video will account for 80% of all internet traffic.
• Despite being the most often utilized visual material, just 13% of respondents said stock photographs were the most effective.
• According to estimates, consumer internet traffic will be 82% video by 2022.
• While adding a cinemagraph (a form of GIF) in an ad for Mist Twst raised CTR by a stunning 75%.
• According to a Venngage report, just 4% of marketers utilize memes and GIFs as their most often used visual material.
• After seeing a brand or product in Stories, 58% of consumers said they were more interested in it.
• On LinkedIn, the material is frequently seen as more reliable than that found on other sites, such as Facebook, accounting for 46% of all social traffic to B2B websites.
• 69% of millennials prefer to conduct their product searches using images rather than text.
• People remember 65% of what they see three days later than 10 percent of what they hear.
• 88% of marketers said they used visual content in 50% or more of their content.
• People remember 65% of what they see three days later than 10 percent of what they hear.
• Social media advertising and marketing in the Netherlands – Statistics & Facts | Statista: 3% of all users) Detailed statistics Netherlands Facebook users 2023, by age and gender Most common Instagram user Female, 25-34 years old (13.
• 151 Up-To-Date Content Marketing Statistics for 2022: General Content Marketing Statistics The most successful companies are 40% more likely to have a documented content marketing strategy.
• (HubSpot, 2021) 82% of surveyed companies say they actively use content marketing.
• (HubSpot, 2021) Only 4% of marketers measure ROI over a six-month timeframe or longer.
• (HubSpot, 2021) 94% of content marketers changed their content marketing strategy because of the pandemic.
• (HubSpot, 2021) 63% of companies reported an increase in their marketing budgets for 2021.
• (Semrush, 2020) 34% of outsourced content is plagiarized, and another 18% is written by AI.
• (2022, GrowthBadger) 69% of companies say most of their new content is for the top of their marketing funnel.
• (The Manifest, 2019) 55% of B2C marketers outsource at least one aspect of content marketing.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2020) Only 33% of organizations have a documented content strategy.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2020) Content Marketing ROI Statistics Only 4% of marketers measure ROI over a six-month timeframe or longer.
• (LinkedIn, 2021) 61% of companies that engage in content marketing have a way to measure their content marketing ROI.
• (Semrush, 2020) 44% of B2B marketers say their top priority is to measure the ROI of their demand generation activities better.
• (Demand Gen Report, 2021) 53% of B2B marketers say webinars are the best type of top-of-funnel marketing for bringing in high-quality leads.
• (Demand Gen Report, 2021) 83% of organizations surveyed say they are either very or somewhat confident that their website is helping them reach their marketing targets.
• (HubSpot, 2021) 72% of marketers say their company uses reporting tools.
• (Litmus, 2020) According to Twitter, brands that tap into trending topics see an 8% increase in brand awareness, a 7% increase in brand preference, and a 3% increase in purchase intent.
• (Twitter, 2018) About 40% of marketers say that content marketing is a “very important” part of their marketing strategy.
• (HubSpot, 2020) Social Media Marketing Statistics 82% of companies used social media marketing in 2021.
• (HubSpot, 2021) 82% of Americans over the age of twelve actively use social media.
• (Edison Research, 2021) TikTok was used by 44% of American 12-34 year olds in 2021, up from 25% in 2020.
• (Edison Research, 2021) 96% of B2B marketers who distribute content on social media organically use LinkedIn.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2021) 66% of B2B marketers say that compared to all other social media platforms, LinkedIn brought in the best organic content marketing results for their companies in the last year.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2021) 90% of video plays on Twitter occur on mobile devices.
• (Twitter, 2021) 87% of marketers use social media for content distribution.
• (Sprout Social, 2021) 67% of marketers who use TikTok say that it’s an effective marketing channel.
• (Wyzowl, 2021) Video Content Marketing Statistics (Including Live Streaming) Over 82% of all internet traffic is online video.
• (Wyzowl, 2021) Ecommerce product pages with embedded video convert 80% better than those without video.
• (Social Media Today, 2018) According to YouTube, channels that host a weekly live stream can expect up to 40% more subscribers.
• 5 times as much traffic and 32% more shares than articles without video.
• (Semrush, 2021) 84% of people say branded video content has convinced them to buy a product or service.
• (Wyzowl, 2021) 96% of people have watched an explainer video to learn about a product or service.
• (Edison Research, 2021) 94% of video marketers say the medium increases their users’ understanding of their product or service.
• (Wyzowl, 2021) 86% of video marketers say video has driven more traffic to their websites.
• (Wyzowl, 2021) The first 15 seconds of a video are critical:43% of consumers decide in that time whether they want to watch it until the end.
• (Podcast Insights, 2021) 78% of Americans aged 12+ are familiar with podcasting in 2021.
• ) (Edison Research, 2021) 57% of Americans aged 12+ have listened to a podcast.
• (Edison Research, 2021) 41% of Americans aged 12+ listen to podcasts each month.
• (Edison Research, 2021) In the United States, 43% of men and 39% of women listen to podcasts on a monthly basis.
• (Edison Research, 2021) 68% of Americans aged 12+ now listen to streaming online audio each month.
• (Edison Research, 2021) 33% of Americans aged 12+ now own a smart speaker.
• (Edison Research, 2021) 46% of Americans aged 12+ have ever listened to an audiobook.
• (Statista, 2020) 77% of marketers say they got more email engagement in 2021 than in 2020.
• (Litmus, 2020) 87% of B2B marketers use email to distribute their content.
• (HubSpot, 2021) The average open rate for triggered transactional emails is 53%.
• (Statista, 2020) B2B marketing emails get 47% higher CTRs than B2C emails.
• (GetResponse, 2020) Including a preheader increases email open rates by over 15%.
• (Campaign Monitor, 2021) According to Campaign Monitor, 72% of consumers say they’re more likely to open an email that mentions a discount in the subject line.
• (Campaign Monitor, 2021) 72% of content marketers use email for content distribution.
• (HubSpot, 2021) In 2021, 69% of marketers invested in SEO — up from 64% in 2020.
• (HubSpot, 2021) 75% of companies say their SEO tactics are effective at helping them achieve their marketing goals.
• (HubSpot, 2021) 70% of web searches are for long-tail keywords (phrases of 3+ words).
• (CWS, 2017) Organic search drives 51% of all online content consumption.
• 7% (Backlinko, 2021) Moving up a single position in organic search rankings will increase that page’s CTR by 30.
• (Backlinko, 2021) 89% of content marketers use SEO for content distribution.
• (Semrush, 2021) List articles get 80% more traffic than other types of posts.
• (Impact Plus, 2016) Bullet points help blog posts perform better:posts that have at least one list per 500 words of other text get 70% more traffic than posts that don’t.
• 5 times as much traffic and 32% more shares than articles without video.
• (GrowthBadger, 2021) Blog posts with one or more images get 2x as much traffic, 30% more shares, and 25% more backlinks than blog posts without images.
• 11 Video Stats that will Blow Your Content Marketing Mind: Videos increase people’s understanding of your product or service by 74% 75% of executives watch work-related videos on business websites at least once a week Online video users are expected to double to 1.
• 4% of Internet users view at least one video online over the course of a month Video is a key aspect of any content marketing strategy—and fueling your video channels with fresh, targeted content takes a content operation.
• Visual Content Marketing Statistics:20 Important From 2020: Infographics increase website traffic by up to 12%, but only if they are informative and optimized enough.
• HubSpots findings showed that 32% of marketers increased investment in visual content marketing during 2020.
• One more proof in favor of visual content is the fact that almost half of the buyers (49%, to be precise) view 3-5 pieces of content before making a purchase or engaging in talks with a sales agent.
• Those companies have 434% more indexed pages compared to the companies that do not blog.
• One more data from Content Marketing Institute survey showed that over 60% of all online purchases are the direct result of a customer reading a blog and finding useful info there.
• CMI survey also showed that the majority of marketers that work in the B2B sector (73%) strongly believe that blog posts enriched with visual elements are the most effective content type for the current generation of customers.
• Answers collected by eMarketer showed that 60% of marketers create at least one piece of content daily.
• Over 70% of marketers are actively investing resources in content marketing, making it better and more appealing to potential clients.
• DemandMetric claims that 80% of people appreciate learning about a company through visual content, especially if it is unique.
• 86% of highly effective organizations have someone in charge of content strategy.
• The same study from DemandMetric showed that companies could save up to 62% when using content marketing over traditional marketing.
• Research showed that 60% of marketers use one piece of content between two and five times.
• Digital marketing in Italy – Statistics & Facts | Statista: 5% Detailed statistics User reaction to direct e-mail marketing in Italy 2019, by type of company Click-to-open rate of B2C retail newsletters in Italy 11.
• 6% Detailed statistics Opening rate of DEM e-mails in Italy 2020, by B2C industry Show more factsShow less Loyalty marketing Share of companies using CRM systems for loyalty marketing services in Italy in 2018 37.
• 9% Detailed statistics Preferred tools for loyalty marketing in Italy 2018 Share of companies using apps for loyalty marketing services in Italy in 2018 24.
• 1% Detailed statistics Preferred tools for loyalty marketing in Italy 2018 Share of companies using proximity marketing tools for loyalty marketing services in Italy in 2018 15.
• Visual Content Marketing:Statistics Relevant In 2021: General Visual Content Marketing Stats Here’s why visuals are a must-have in your content marketing mix:Web users scan text and read about 20% of the words on a page during an average visit.
• Further 65% of the general population are visual learners, and after three days of consumption, they can remember 65% of the visual information vis-à-vis 10% recall for written content.
• A Venngage survey of 200 content marketers predicted that visuals would remain an integral part of marketing strategies in 2020 and 2021 for 66% of businesses.
• In 2020, 25% of marketers anticipated spending between 10% to 20% of their total budgets on visual content creation.
• 74% of marketers said that they used visuals in more than 70% of the articles they published.
• Because colors can improve your brand recognition by up to 80% as per Xerox.
• 80% of people say that they switch between online search and video while buying.
• 69% of marketers plan on increasing their use of YouTube video, 73% want to learn more about marketing on the platform, It’s also the number-one video channel, used by 55% of marketers.
• 70% of people used YouTube during 2020 to watch online replacements of live events.
• 56% of live streamers even agreed that watching them can be just as good as being at an event in person.
• Social Media Stats You Need To Know – YCS Marketing, LLC: (Pew Research Center) Only 45% of marketers think that their Facebook efforts are effective.
• (Buzzsumo) Facebook continues to have the most engaged users — 70% log on daily, including 43% who do so several times a day.
• (Pew Research Center) Facebook sends 82% of social media traffic to longer stories and 84% of social traffic to shorter news articles.
• (Pew Research Center) 63% of Facebook and Twitter users say each platform serves as a source for news about events and issues outside the realm of friends and family.
• (Pew Research Center) 73% of people say they use Facebook for professional purposes.
• (HubSpot) In the past two years, content consumption on Facebook has increased 57%.
• (HubSpot) 76% of people use their Facebook feed to find interesting content.
• 1460390947) Twitter Marketing Stats 23% of adult internet users use Twitter.
• (Pew Research Center) 3 in 10 online urban residents use Twitter, compared with 21% of suburbanites and 15% of those living in rural areas.
• (Pew Research Center) 30% of online adults under 50 use Twitter, compared with 11% of online adults ages 50 and older.
• (Pew Research Center) Twitter accounts for 16% of referrals to longer articles from social sites and 14% for shorter news articles.
• (Pew Research Center) In the past two years, content consumption on Twitter has increased 25%.
• 1460390947) LinkedIn Marketing Stats 25% of adult internet users use LinkedIn.
• (Pew Research Center) 46% of online adults who have graduated from college are LinkedIn users, compared with just 9% of online adults with a high school diploma or less.
• (Pew Research Center) 32% of employed adults are LinkedIn users, compared with 14% of online adults who are not employed.
• (Pew Research Center) In the past two years, content consumption on LinkedIn has increased 21%.
• (HubSpot) LinkedIn has 450 million members, but only 25% actively visit the professional social network each month.
• 1460390947) Instagram Marketing Stats On Instagram, photos showing faces get 38% more Likes than photos not showing faces.
• (Georgia Institute of Technology) 28% of adult internet users use Instagram.
• (Pew Research Center) 59% of Instagram users are on the platform daily, including 35% who visit several times a day.
• (Instagram) General Social Media Stats 64% of marketers are using social media for six hours or more and 41% for 11 or more hours weekly.
• (Social Media Examiner) Nearly 19% of marketers spend more than 20 hours each week on social media.
• (Social Media Examiner) 83% of all marketers actively pursue social media marketing initiatives.
• (Aberdeen) As of 2015, 35% of all those 65 and older report using social media, compared with just 2% in 2005.
• (Pew Research Center) As of 2015, 90% of young adults use social media, compared with 12% in 2005.
• (Buffer) Researchers found that colored visuals increase people’s willingness to read a piece of content by 80%.
• Top 13 Content Marketing Stats you need to know: Those who do are 74% more likely to get strong results” – Orbit Media Creating a blog and making it successful is just not enough.
• “The average blog post is now 1,142 words (up 41% since 2014)” – Orbit Media With the ever-changing search engine’s algorithm, the competition to get ranked on the first page of Google has increased drastically.
• “Paid content promotion is up 5x since 2014” – Orbit Media Fact – “98% of the searchers make their decisions from page 1 of Google” Therefore, it has become extremely crucial for businesses to secure theirs.
• A report by Google shows that businesses typically see a 200% ROI from AdWords.
• “Only 8% of marketers consider themselves “very successful” or “extremely successful” at tracking content marketing ROI.
• “57% of B2B buyers have already made their purchase decision before ever speaking to a sales person.
• “The most common content marketing delivery mechanism is social media, used by 87% of marketers.
• “Gamification is the least common content marketing tactic, with only 10% of marketers using it.
• However, this strategy has not been used much and only 10% of marketer apply gamification in the real world.
• 50+ Digital Marketing Stats 2024:Must Read | Huptech Web: 86% of the global search engine market (Statistica) According to 75% of people never go past the first search results page (DemandSage) Ranking at the No 1 position on Google results in a 39.
• 8% organic click-through rate (First Page Sage, 2023) The SEO industry is forecasted to be worth almost $218 billion by 2030 (Forbes) Fast loading pages rank significantly higher than pages that load slowly (Backlinko) The first organic result on mobile searches gets 27.
• 33% of searchers say they click on a search ad because it directly answers their query (Clutch) According to Google, advertisers see a return of $2 for every $1 they spend on Google Ads (Google) Traffic from pay-per-click (PPC) converts at 3.
• Mobile Marketing 61% of website visitors won’t return to a website that isn’t mobile friendly Mobile advertising spending will reach nearly $413 billion by 2024 (Statista) 31% of retail spending was made on mobile devices in the U.
• 85 billion users by 2027 (Forbes) 76% of social media users have purchased something they saw on social media The United States remains the largest social media ad market globally (Statistica) 94% of marketers use Facebook.
• Of those people, 58% of consumers check their email first thing in the morning (OptinMonster) 84.
• 3% of consumers say they check their emails at least once a day (Pathwire) 82% of marketers send emails with no more than 60 characters in the subject line (Backlinko) Including a recipient’s name in your email subject line increases open rates by up to 18.
• 30% (Superoffice) Including videos in your email can increase clickthrough rates by up to 300% (Martechadvisor) Adding a call-to-action button in your emails instead of simply a text link can lead to a 28% increase in click-throughs (CampaignMonitor) Segmented email campaigns also earn 100.
• 95% higher clickthrough rates as compared to non-segmented email campaigns (MailChimp) The best day of the week to send a marketing email is Tuesday.
• 8 min read Rishi Thakker February 16, 2024 The Ultimate Guide to Measuring Your Content Marketing ROI 21% of content marketers say that measuring ROI is the biggest challenge when developing content.
• Social media advertising and marketing in Europe – statistics & facts | Statista: Marketer usage Social media ad spend growth in Europe 7% Detailed statistics Social media ad spend growth in Europe 2017-2022 Social video ad spend in Europe 10.
• 7% Detailed statistics Marketing budgets in the UK 2022-2023, by platform Social media advertising spend in Germany 1.
• The 77 Statistics for Digital Marketing in 2022 you Need to Know: The Size of the Digital Marketing Industry The annual growth for the digital marketing industry is expected to be 9% year on year.
• Since 2021, nearly two-thirds of businesses (63%) have increased their digital marketing budgets.
• Nearly half of all businesses (49%) state that organic search brings the best ROI.
• The Dominance of Digital Marketing in a Brand’s Budget About 72% of a brand’s budget is spent on digital marketing channels.
• The average local business places up to 10% of their revenue into a digital marketing budget.
• The average large business claims that 14% of their revenue is put towards digital marketing.
• Consumer Behaviours Consumers will spend 50% more per order if a business regularly responds to reviews.
• Consumers will spend 500% more time on a website after seeing a bad review.
• 45% of consumers prefer to buy online and have the order delivered than pick up the product in-store.
• Nearly half of all searches (46%) are for local brands, products, and services.
• Display Advertising Statistics Display adverts will increase the brand awareness of a company by 80%.
• Consumers are 155% to search using brand-specific terms after seeing a display advert.
• Consumers are 70% more likely to purchase after seeing a retargeting advert.
• Consumers who search on Google or other search engines will convert 59% of the time.
• A consumer’s search activity will rise by 155% after they’ve seen a display advert.
• Only 4% of marketers will increase their digital advertising expenditure within 2022.
• The annual advertising expenditure for websites on social media is $134 billion in 2022, a 17% increase.
• More than 91% of brands will use social media to market to consumers and clients.
• 40% of businesses will use TikTok in their social media strategy during 2022.
• 87% of brands use email marketing to distribute content to their users.
• 78% of marketers in 2020 said email marketing is vital for the success of their brand.
• Websites Less than three-quarters (72%) of small businesses have a website.
• Nearly 60% of consumers would not recommend a business with a poorly designed mobile website.
• 70% of small business websites are missing a call to action on the homepage.
• Digital Marketing Reporting 62% of marketing professionals use CRM software for analyzing and creating professional reports on campaign success.
• 13 Must-Know Digital Marketing Statistics to Guide Your 2023 Planning: Users are more interested in organic results than paid for 94% of searches.
• A dedicated budget for conversion rate optimization can increase ROI by 30%.
• 60+ Compelling Digital Marketing Industry Statistics [2023]:How To Market Digitally In The U.S. – Zippia: Here are the key digital marketing statistics that every business person should know:As of 2022, 90% of marketers use content marketing.
• Only 37% of companies don’t have a clearly defined content marketing strategy.
• 55% of executives rely on decisions based on data rather than gut instinct-based decisions.
• Small businesses with blogs get 126% more lead growth than those without.
• 7% of the global industry, a percentage that highlights just how important marketing is for U.
• Only 35% of marketers think their content marketing strategy is very successful compared to their competitors.
• Meanwhile, the largest percentage of marketers, 46%, described their strategies as somewhat successful, while only 19% considered their strategy unsuccessful.
• And that percentage is even higher for marketers, for whom 75% generally choose to outsource at least some of their content creation.
• Digital marketing reaches 50% more customers than traditional marketing.
• According to our research:55% of marketers say blog content is their top inbound marketing priority.
• And there’s a reason why, as companies with blogs attract 67% more leads per month than those without them.
• Overall, 82% of companies who have used blogs as part of their marketing strategy see positive ROI.
• Only 42% of B2B marketers see positive results from content marketing campaigns.
• Unfortunately, that’s less than half of the 93% of B2B marketers who actively use content marketing for their business.
• Because of that, the most successful B2B marketers will dedicate up to 39% of their total marketing budget to content marketing alone.
• 75% of B2C marketers create content to educate the audience about their brand.
• Marketers also use content marketing to create brand awareness (84%), build credibility and trust (65%), and generate leads (61%).
• And that number is even higher for larger companies, as 85% of US companies with 100 employees or more regularly invest in content marketing.
• With that in mind, here are some top digital marketing data and technology facts:Data-driven marketing campaigns increase ROI by 500-800%.
• That’s why 32% of marketers report that data-driven marketing strategies are vital for successful strategies.
• Studies show that 63% of companies that use marketing automation outperform their competitors.
• 74% of companies began implementing automation tools in their marketing less than ten years ago.
• Of the companies who’ve started using automation tools and platforms, 42% started only 1-2 years ago, 32% started 5-9 years ago, and only 16% started more than a decade ago.
• From 2020 to 2021, installs of shopping apps increased by 10% globally.
• Further, usage of these apps has increased at an even more telling rate, 30% year-over-year.
• 61% of marketers say improving SEO and search engine rankings is their top priority.
• For context, consider that half of that percentage (30%) would be considered significant for anything labeled a “top priority” in the marketing world.
• Further, 75% of clicks will go to the first three results, and 25% will click on the first result.
• Finding local businesses and learning local information is a key aspect of most Google searches, as roughly 85% of consumers use the internet to discover and find local businesses.
• For example, 35% of home & garden searches related to “furniture near me” and “near me” searches when traveling also increased.
• 57% of marketers report that relevant content is the most effective SEO tactic.
• That includes the 49% who believe that relevant keyword/phrase research is the top priority when creating that relevant content.
• 72% of marketers report that content marketing has quantitatively improved audience engagement.
• While 72% say that all content marketing increases engagement, 56% of marketers also agree that personalizing this content promotes higher engagement rates.
• A whopping 93% of all online interactions start with search engines, meaning that you’d be potentially missing out on 93% of your potential customers if you were to ignore SEO altogether.
• With that in mind, here are some insights our research uncovered about digital marketing sales:68% of B2B businesses use landing pages for new sales leads.
• That said, it’s also worth mentioning that 48% of marketers will build a new landing page for every offer.
• And that lack of proper analysis shows, as 79% of marketing leads are never converted into sales.
• However, the importance of this goal also tends to become an issue for companies, as 65% of them note that generating traffic and leads is also their biggest marketing challenge.
• Even more telling is that in 2019, only two years prior, e-commerce sales only accounted for roughly 14% of all global retail.
• Personalized emails are vital for online businesses, as personalized subject lines generate 50% higher open rates.
• At the very least, these emails generate an average opening rate of 45%, as nearly half of those who receive them will open them.
• Overall, here are some facts about visuals in digital marketing:Videos on landing pages increase conversion rates by up to 80%.
• The fact is that 90% of the information inputted into the brain is visual, and the brain can process these visuals (say in a video advertisement) 60,000X faster than text.
• In general, 87% of marketers agree that videos help them generate a positive ROI.
• The majority of marketers say that 91-100% of their content includes visuals.
• The number of marketers saying this each year is increasing, as it reached 74% in 2019.
• For comparison, 64% of marketers said the same a year prior, meaning that visual marketing is rapidly becoming a dominant type of content for marketers.
• Here are some interesting facts about mobile marketing:47% of email campaign emails are checked from mobile devices.
• 1% through webmail, the fact is that mobile devices are huge when it comes to checking emails.
• A considerable 58% of people use their phones to check emails as soon as they wake up.
• 46% of voice searches are used to look for information on local businesses daily.
• smartphone owners who used voice searches, 71% now prefer to perform mobile searches by voice rather than typing.
• 51% of consumers identify new products and brands on their mobile devices.
• Here are the facts:81% of executives believe that marketing segmentation is crucial for increasing profits.
• However, even though most recognize its importance, only 25% said their companies used it effectively.
• Overall, personalized calls to action are far more effective than generic ones, up to 202% more effective.
• This, in turn, amounts to an average of 42% more potential customers visiting your website/store.
• Overall, here are some interesting facts about social media marketing:28% of Facebook users use the site to strengthen their professional network or follow brands and companies.
• Overall, 11% of Facebook users use the site to strengthen their professional network, while 17% use it to follow brands and companies.
• Facebook is the most widely used social media platform, with 93% of marketers using it.
• In order from most popular to least popular, other social media platforms used by marketers include Instagram (78%), LinkedIn (61%), YouTube (55%), Twitter (48%), TikTok (9%), and Snapchat (4%).
• While this average did take a dip to 12% in 2020 due to the pandemic, the overall year-over-year growth for social media ad spending has been significant.
• And that’s not all, as consumers are also 71% are more likely to purchase products and services when they come from social media referrals.
• Knowing that, here are some facts about consumer opinions to help you hone your marketing strategy:53% of consumers are more likely to purchase from transparent brands.
• Transparency is very important to consumers, as over 90% agree that it’s important to their purchasing decisions.
• Even further, a whopping 94% are more likely to be loyal to a brand that has complete transparency in its supply chain.
• Keeping that in mind, here are some of the biggest challenges facing digital marketers:63% of marketers say driving traffic and leads is their biggest content marketing challenge.
• On top of that, 37% of marketers also say they struggle with producing visuals regularly.
• According to our research:Professionally written content increases engagement by 28%.
• 7% of the global industry, a percentage that highlights just how important marketing is for U.
• Overall, 90% of marketers around the globe now use digital marketing due to the industry’s massive size and widespread internet use.
• The digital marketing industry is growing at a fast and healthy rate, at least 10% every year.
• 34% of small businesses outsource their digital marketing, and the percentage is even greater for large companies.
• What’s more, professionally written content increases engagement by 28%.
• For example, there are over 80,000 job openings for Digital Marketing Specialists, with an impressive 20% job growth rate.
• Conclusion With 90% of marketers using content marketing, digital marketing is currently an integral part of any marketer or businesses’ marketing strategy.
• After all, digital marketing reaches 50% more customers than traditional marketing.
• “Blogging Businesses Experience 126% Higher Lead Growth Than Non-Blogging Businesses.
• “61% of marketers say improving SEO and growing their organic presence is their top inbound marketing priority – Organic Search – Digital Logic.
• “B2B Marketing Research:68% of B2B marketers haven’t identified their Marketing-Sales funnel … and it shows.
• “RESEARCH NEWS:Articles with images get 94% more views than those without.
• “Personalized Call-To-Actions Convert 42% More Visitors into Leads than Generic CTAs.
• 6% of the global industry, a percentage that highlights just how important marketing is for U.
• What’s more, professionally written content increases engagement by 28%.
• For example, there are over 80,000 job openings for Digital Marketing Specialists, with an impressive 20% job growth rate.
• 15 Eye-Opening LinkedIn Video Stats to Inform Your Video Marketing in 2024 – THM SEO Agency: For 73% of B2B marketers, video content has been a game-changer, significantly boosting their marketing return on investment.
• Video Marketing Trends and Platform Preferences 79% of businesses have embraced LinkedIn for their video marketing efforts, trailing only behind of Facebook at 86% and YouTube at 90%.
• Over half, specifically 51%, of video marketers have incorporated LinkedIn videos into their promotional strategies.
• Looking ahead, 66% of video marketing professionals are planning to integrate LinkedIn into their future video marketing plans.
• A significant 74% of consumers on LinkedIn show a preference for authentic, less polished videos over highly produced ones.
• In contrast, only 26% of consumers express a preference for slick, professionally produced video content.
• Executive Insights and Marketing Impact Given a choice between video and text, 59% of executives would opt for video content on LinkedIn.
• A notable 54% of senior executives regularly share work-related videos with their colleagues on a weekly basis.
• For 73% of B2B marketers, LinkedIn video content has been a game-changer, significantly boosting their marketing return on investment.
• Social Media Addiction + Usage Statistics 2023 (Beyond Marketing) | Hook Agency: Mobile users account for approximately 91% of all social media users (Datareportal, 2024).
• A survey found that 71% of millennials check social media sites first thing in the morning (OnePoll, 2021).
• 45% of teenagers feel overwhelmed by the number of notifications they receive daily (Common Sense Media, 2021).
• Social Media Marketing Statistics for 2024 90% of brands use social media to increase brand awareness (Emarsys, 2021).
• Nearly 73% of marketers believe that their efforts through social media marketing have been “somewhat effective” or “very effective” for their business (Buffer, 2021).
• As of 2024, the average business spends between 20 – 30% of its total marketing budget on social media advertising (Web Strategies, 2024).
• 71% of consumers who have had a positive experience with a brand on social media are likely to recommend the brand to their friends and family (Lyfe Marketing, 2021).
• LinkedIn is the top-rated social network for lead generation – 79% of B2B marketers say LinkedIn has been an effective avenue for lead generation (LinkedIn, 2021).
• Over 80% of consumers discover products they like on Facebook (Facebook, 2024).
• Weekly Infographic:99+ Useful Retargeting Statistics Every Marketer Should Know – PageTraffic Buzz – SEO, Search Marketing, News, Events, Guide: Only 2% of shoppers who convert on their first encounter with an ecommerce site ever return to make additional purchases, according to Adroll!
• Some retargeting stats include:92% of consumers do not intend to purchase their first visit to a website.
• 76% of retargeted ads are more likely to get clicked than social media campaigns.
• 91% of marketers think retargeting is more effective than emails and displays.
• 100 Important & Mind Boggling B2B Marketing Statistics – Luca Tagliaferro | SEO Consultant: B2B Content Marketing StatisticsAccording to the Content Marketing Institute, over 90% of B2B site content has no backlinks to other sites.
• Highly successful B2B marketing teams spend about 40% of their total marketing budget on content marketing, a prevalent B2B marketing strategy.
• The leading five content marketing channels used by the most successful B2B companies are email (93%), social media (92%), blog posts (79%), real-life events (56%), and virtual events (55%).
• Over 50% of B2B clients prefer to buy from companies that create their content.
• Over 80% of B2B marketers have email newsletters as their most utilized type of content marketing.
• Over 60% of B2B content teams create majorly top-of-funnel content, while about 30% create content for those in the middle of the funnel.
• 80% of B2B consumers prefer articles over ads from potential B2B companies.
• Over 60% of successful B2B organizations have documented content marketing strategies.
• Over 30% of B2B marketers believe email newsletters are an excellent way to develop leads.
• About 90% of B2B marketers trace email engagement as the top performing metric.
• Over 80% of marketing professionals use email marketing to share their content with others.
• The average click-through rate for B2B emails is about 5%, and only one of five B2B emails gets opened.
• According to over 60% of B2B marketers, sales intelligence can optimize email send times.
• B2B Social Media Marketing Statistics Over 90% of B2B companies have a budget dedicated to content production.
• Social media is the most used content type, with 95% of B2B marketers using it.
• More than 80% of B2B businesses use influencer marketing to increase brand awareness.
• B2B companies consider LinkedIn the second most popular social media platform, as 86% of B2B marketers use it.
• In 2021, 82% of B2B content marketers utilized Twitter for organic marketing.
• Over 60% of B2B marketers have seen a return on investment from social media paid ads.
• 6% of B2B companies use YouTube ads to increase brand awareness and traffic.
• Over 80% of B2B marketers believe that video marketing aids lead generation and increase the B2B market conversion rate.
• 86% of businesses utilize video marketing as it resonates the best with marketing audiences, followed by website content and blog post links.
• Over 40% of consumers found branded video content more interesting than the photo and written content.
• 30% of B2B marketers view their video marketing strategy as more important than their website.
• B2B SEO Statistics 89% of B2B buyers use the internet to get information about prospective purchases.
• 29% of Google search users only visit one page from the search engine results.
• Organic search content marketing success creates about 40% of the revenue of B2B companies.
• B2B marketers are investing more in SEO as there was a 5% increase from 2020 to 2021.
• Over 70% of marketers use strategic keywords as their primary content marketing strategy.
• B2B Marketing Automation Statistics Almost all B2B executives (92%) have an account-based marketing program.
• 68% of B2B companies use automation to master their business processes.
• 94% of users stated that the design of a website helped them to make a first impression about the company.
• Over 50% of B2B firms spend over half their budget on website development.
• More than 40% of potential B2B customers do not look for contact information online if it’s available on the company website.
• B2B Marketing Teams Statistics 41% of B2B companies carry out their marketing activities in-house.
• B2B Marketing Financial Statistics 25% of B2B companies allot only 5% of their total budget to marketing.
• The average spend on paid advertising in the B2B industry increases by 20% yearly.
• Over 40% of B2B companies plan to increase their content marketing spend.
• B2B companies in the mining and construction business allocate 2% of their total budget for marketing.
• B2B companies in the financial industry spend 14% of their total budget on marketing.
• About 70% of company representations prefer digital interactions to real-life interactions.
• 70% of B2B clients report that their primary content source is from the B2B vendor website.
• B2B Lead Generation Statistics 50% of B2B created content is focused on developing brand awareness.
• 86% of B2B companies use their website as their primary lead generation source.
• Over 30% of digital marketers in B2B firms believe email marketing is the best lead generation tool.
• More than 70% of B2B companies use lead conversion as a performance metric.
• B2B Industry Statistics About 60% of the B2B market works exclusively digital.
• Over 60% of B2B companies are expected to increase their number of decision-makers in 2023.
• 66% of B2B buyers will switch to B2B companies that offer tailored quotes.
• 100+ Social Media Marketing Statistics for Business | SlickText: 91 billion), TikTok is the fastest-growing platform, which shot up with a 105% user increase in the past few years.
• In 2023, spending for social advertising is predicted to hit $226 billion and grow by over 11% in the next four years.
• According to 77% of marketers, social media has been a very effective platform for their companies.
• According to HubSpot, most social media marketers post anywhere from 4-6 times a week, and 82% reuse content across social media platforms.
• In the third quarter of 2022, Facebook’s daily user count had grown 3% from the previous year, sitting at 1.
• The platform accounts for a quarter of all ad spending, coming in just behind Google (28%) and ahead of Amazon (10%).
• Facebook is a mobile-first platform, with over 98% of users accessing the platform from their phones.
• The percentage of teens that used the platform fell from 71% in 2014-2015 to 32% in 2022.
• Don’t ignore Facebook stories–57% of brands feel they’re one of the most effective ways to promote their products.
• The platform’s live video engagement is 26%, which is higher than other social media platforms.
• If you’re looking for a benchmark, the average engagement on a Facebook post is just under 4% while organic reach is just over 5%.
• Although TikTok is the newest social platform on the scene, it gets the most engagement by far with an average engagement rate of almost 6%.
• TikTok’s engagement potential is falling, however, dropping by 28% per year.
• TikTok has impressive visibility, with the platform’s ads reaching about 19% of total internet users across the world.
• Influencers see engagement rates around 15%, which is more than triple the typical average.
• Despite high engagement, only 18% of marketers are actively using TikTok.
• TikTok Made Me Buy It is a real trend — 55% of TikTok users have purchased something after seeing a brand on the platform.
• Working with creators has been shown to boost views by as much as 193%.
• The most popular age range on LinkedIn is 25 to 34 years old, making up 60% of users.
• 97% of B2B marketers are using LinkedIn in their marketing strategy, and 82% of them rate LinkedIn as their most effective platform.
• Including a link in your post can boost engagement by an average of 45%.
• LinkedIn is ideal for finding and pursuing leads, proving to be 277% more effective than Facebook and Twitter.
• The average visitor-to-lead for LinkedIn is just under 3%, compared to .
• Almost 50% of social media traffic to a company’s website is funneled from LinkedIn.
• Most Instagram business accounts grow their following by about 1% each month.
• Around 1 in 3 Instagram users are expected to make a purchase through the platform in 2023, and 15% of American shoppers will start their buying journey on Instagram.
• 98% of marketers choose Instagram as their influencer platform, beating Facebook by almost 50%.
• Instagram Reels play a major role in engagement, as 91% of Instagram users report watching videos on the platform every week.
• In the United States, 10% of Twitter users compose 90% of the platform’s tweets.
• 52% of users check Twitter every day, 84% check weekly, and 96% check monthly.
• While most other platforms shave a fairly even split of gender demographics, Twitter’s user base is 70% male.
• While tweets are known for their brevity, ads on Twitter are viewed 26% longer than on other platforms.
• Just under 80% of Twitter users follow at least one brand, and it’s the number-one platform for brand interaction.
• According to Twitter, the platform’s ROI is 40% higher than other platforms.
• Twitter is one of the most liberal-leaning social media platforms, with 65% of users identifying as Democrats.
• Twitter users value brands that show support for social issues, with 77% of people reporting more positive feelings when they see brands support local and global causes.
• Top 10 Social Media Marketing ROI Statistics for 2024 | Sprinklr: By 2025, video content is expected to account for 82% of all consumer internet traffic.
• It’s no wonder that social posts created in collaboration with micro-influencers had 60% higher engagement rates.
• Last year 90% of customers reported that UGC has greater influence on their purchase decisions than conventional advertising.
• Additionally, more than 82% of marketers view it as a crucial planning component of their social media strategy.
• In fact, recent studies predict that AI will be used in 95% of all customer interactions by 2025.
• Additionally, customer issues may be resolved more quickly, and providing resolution will become 91% less expensive with conversational AI and bots.
• Companies that provide personalized experiences increase the likelihood that 80% of their customers would make a purchase again.
• 8% of marketers claimed that, of all social media platforms, Facebook had the highest return on investment.
• 100 Digital Marketing Statistics for 2024 – Plerdy: Digital marketing’s compound annual growth rate (CAGR) from 2020-2026 projected at 9%.
• 63% of businesses increased digital marketing budgets in the past year.
• 14% growth rate in digital marketing budget spending between 2020 and 2021.
• Return on Investment (ROI) and Success RatesPPC returns $2 for every $1 spent—200% ROI.
• Over 20% of businesses measure marketing success by the number of leads generated.
• Industry Demand and Job MarketMarketing job demand set to increase by 10% by 2026 according to the Bureau of Labor Statistics.
• Online Advertising EffectivenessDigital ads can increase brand awareness by 80%.
• Consumers are 155% more likely to look up brand-specific terms after display ad exposure.
• TikTok is the fastest-growing platform, with 40% of businesses planning to use it in 2023.
• ”25% of TikTok users researched or purchased a product after seeing an ad.
• 78% of marketers in 2020 said email is important to overall company success.
• 38% of people will stop engaging with a website if the content or layout is unattractive.
• Superior user experience on websites generates a 400% higher conversion rate.
• Nearly 60% of people wouldn’t recommend a business with a poorly designed mobile website.
• About 40% of people stop interacting with a website if images take too long to load.
• 70% of small business websites lack a call to action on their homepage.
• Nearly 90% of consumers will shop with a competitor after a poor website experience.
• E-commerce and Consumer BehaviorUS e-commerce revenue increased by 7% between 2021 and 2022.
• 60% of marketers either don’t understand or don’t know their Core Web Vitals.
• 73% of customers spend more with brands that demonstrate complete transparency online.
• The Value of SEO:Key SEO Statistics | Example Marketing: In this study, social media was the top result, with nearly 70% – but SEO was second, with 40% of organisations say that it was their primary approach.
• So, 40% of marketers believe SEO is the single most important thing you can do when it comes to marketing – a powerful vote in favour of SEO.
• A majority of marketers invest in SEOIn the same study, 69% of marketers reported that they had actively invested in their SEO strategy or activity in 2021.
• In the Hubspot survey, 71% of marketers said that their primary SEO strategy was looking for “strategic keywords”.
• Search engines are the internet for many peopleIn another stat that really underscores the importance of optimising your website for search engines, did you know that 68% of online experiences actually begin with a search engine?
• Search engine results are “winner takes all”You might have heard that search engine results are “winner takes all”, but did you know that recent research has demonstrated that the first result in Google gets around a third of all the clicks on the search engine – 32%!
• People research their purchases onlineMore than half (53%) of consumers in the US say that they research products online using a search engine, before they decide whether or not to buy.
• 74% The Journal Issue 12 The Journal Issue 11 Should You Cut Your Marketing Budget During An Economic Downturn?
• 5%)Factors that keep businesses from producing more video content include the following:Not enough time (66.
• 4%) – BufferWhen learning about a product or service, 72% of buyers prefer video content.
• – Social Media WeekWebsites with video content see users who spend 88% more time browsing.
• – Social Media WeekBy 2022, online videos will generate 82% of all consumer traffic on the web.
• – Social Media WeekVideo is the content preferred by 59% of executives.
• – Social Media WeekUse of interactive video leads to positive results for 83% of marketers, with 90% of interactive videos viewed all the way through.
• – Social Media WeekSource:Buffer, State of Social Report, 2019Influencer Marketing StatisticsRoughly 68% of marketers say that influencer marketing is somewhat-to-very effective.
• -BufferMarketers found that following platforms to be most effective for influencer marketing:Instagram (70%)Facebook (35.
• 1%)The most important measurements when running influencer campaigns include:Reach (31.
• 8%) – BufferMicro-influencers, those with 5,000-30,000 followers, accounted for 90% of all branded partnerships.
• When compared with traditional marketing, content marketing delivers 3 times the number of leads and costs 62% less.
• – Demand MetricContent marketing is actively invested in by 70% of marketers, with 60% indicating it is a very-to-extremely important part of their marketing strategy as a whole.
• 3%) – BufferB2C marketers create content to cater to varying audiences, with most content developed to generate brand awareness and interest.
• sales, newsletter subscriptions, reach, impressions, keyword rankings, click-through rate) – 6% – SEMrushSource:SEMrush, The State of Content Marketing 2019Social Media Marketing StatisticsThere are nearly 4 billion active social media users.
• – GlobalWebIndexMost marketers use social media for content distribution, specifically 94%.
• – SEMrushForty-two percent of internet users take to social networks to research a brand, and 21% have discovered a new brand based on a recommendation on social media.
• – GlobalWebIndexSocial media videos help 64% of online buyers make a purchase decision.
• – OmnicoreSnapchat users are more likely to impulse shop, to the tune of 60%.
• What’s more, 60% of digital marketers are increasing their Amazon ad budget.
• – Marin Software Most marketers (84%) plan to or currently use responsive search ads on Google, estimated to generate up to 10% more clicks and conversions when used with expanded text ads.
• – Marin SoftwareShoppable ads and images are growing in paid search and paid social, 65% and 62% respectively.
• 5% indicated that pay-per-click (PPC) campaigns help with search engine optimization (SEO) efforts, including helping to identify target keywords.
• PPC advertising, 70% of marketers say that SEO is more effective at driving sales compared with 30% for PPC.
• In fact, featured video clips on Google often contain the exact keyword in the title, 80% according to a recent study.
• 1 reason why nearly 91% of pages don’t get any traffic from Google is that they don’t have any backlinks.
• In fact, the use of “image search” via a mobile device increased more than 60% from 2016-2018, while voice search on mobile rose 27%.
• – Think with GoogleGoogle data also showed that mobile searches with the term “podcast(s)” have increased more than 80%.
• – Think with GoogleNinety-two percent of mobile users share video content, and video viewing through mobile devices has risen annually by 100%.
• – Social Media WeekSimultaneous multidevice usage is reported among 85% of adults.
• – Social Media WeekWhen people have a poor mobile experience, they’re 62% less likely to be future customers.
• – OmnicoreAd blocking on mobile devices has increased more than 60% since 2017, with 527 million currently using the technology.
• Poor user experience (UX) design is responsible for 35% of lost ecommerce sales.
• – CareerFoundryA majority of enterprise chief executives view UX as a competitive differentiator, 70% specifically.
• What’s more, 88% of users who have a bad website experience typically don’t return, while 90% of people discontinue using apps that perform poorly.
• In fact, 83% of people say it’s important they have a seamless experience across devices.
• – ToptalOmnichannel support could increase a company’s return on investment more than 100%.
• – ZendeskNearly 48% of omnichannel campaigns that employ text messaging are more likely to experience conversions.
• – OmnisendMarketers using 3 or more channels in a campaign as opposed to 1 benefited from a 287% higher purchase rate.
• 5 Shocking B2B Marketing Stats You Need to Know [2021] – Digital Clarity: B2B Buying Journey 43% of B2B purchases involve 8 or more stakeholders in the decision-making process (Google) B2B buying journeys and sales cycles can be long.
• B2B Podcasting 54% of podcast listeners say they are more likely to consider buying from the brands they hear advertised on podcasts (Edison Research) Not using podcasting in your marketing strategy?
• In 2018, it was reported that 17% of marketers were actively planning to add podcasting to their strategy (HubSpot).
• Reaching Modern B2B Buyers 94% of B2B buyers are fully informed about a business before making contact (Google) This is a staggering statistic that illustrates the importance of not focussing solely on conversions and sales as key performance indicators.
• Basing the ‘good results’ of an advertising campaign exclusively on last-click conversions is a short-sighted approach that does not take into consideration the fact that only 6% of people will convert on their first visit to your site.
• Data and Attribution 43% of B2B organisations don’t know which marketing or sales channels are driving them qualified leads (Digital Clarity).
• Hubspot’s State of Marketing Report 2021 revealed that only 54% of marketers are using attribution reporting to analyse which marketing channels are influencing buying decisions.
• Marketing and Sales Alignment 42% of B2B marketers rate the alignment between marketing and sales teams to be fair or poor (Content Marketing Institute) An essential ingredient for B2B companies’ growth is a synergy between marketing and sales.
• 67% of marketers said their customer relationship management (CRM) system is important to support their company’s sales enablement efforts (Content Marketing Institute).
• 50+ Powerful Content Marketing Statistics and Trends Every Content Marketer Must Know: Content Marketing Statistics and Trends 80% of content marketers plan on creating more content than the previous year according to the Content Matters 2022 Report by Parse.
• ly 48% of companies with a strong content marketing strategy consider blog content creation as a core content marketing activity, says HubSpot.
• 56% of marketers find blogging to be very effective and 10% find blogs deliver the biggest ROI among all content types.
• 54% of decision-makers (buyers) say they spend more than an hour every week reading thought-leadership pieces but more than 70% say that nearly half of thought-leadership content delivers no valuable information.
• 47% of marketers plan to increase spending by 11% or more, while another 25% of marketers hope to increase their budget up to 10%.
• :Source:SEMrush According to the 12th Annual Content Marketing Survey by CMI and MarketingProfs, the 4 major areas of content marketing investment in 2022 are likely to be videos (69%), events (61%), owned media assets (57%), and paid media (55%).
• The SEMrush survey, however, found that the top 3 key areas of investment in content marketing in 2022 will be Social Media and Community Building (41%), Better quality of written content (40%), and Content distribution and promotion(40%) – with Video (35%) at number 4.
• 47% of companies plan to grow their content marketing teams in 2022, according to SEMrush.
• Content Strategy Statistics HubSpot’s State of Content Marketing Report 2021 said that 82% of marketers actively use content marketing as an integral part of their strategy.
• Nearly 57% of content marketers have a documented content strategy according to SEMrush.
• The same SEMrush report also reveals that only 19% of marketers believe their content marketing strategy is at an advanced stage in terms of maturity.
• Though 36% do believe that their content marketing strategy is fairly developed.
• 4% of marketers made a reasonable amount of changes to their content marketing strategy after the Covid-19 pandemic, while another 38% of marketers said they made many more changes.
• Source:Venngage Content ideation is among the top 10 content marketing challenges with 25% of respondents voting for it in the SEMrush survey.
• Content SEO Planning Statistics HubSpot found in The State of Media & Content Planning in 2022 that organic search and SEO are leveraged by 36% of marketers and media planners.
• HubSpot also found that nearly 64% of marketers today believe mobile optimization to be a necessary and effective area of investment.
• Marketers are spending more time auditing and optimizing content, which includes improving UX on their blog/website (36%), identifying top-performing content (34%), finding content gaps (34%), and improving SEO and SERP rankings (33%).
• Searchers use Google autocomplete suggestions in their search 23% of the time, according to Backlinko.
• Content marketers who proactively plan their content marketing campaigns increase their chances of success by 331%, according to CoSchedule.
• 2% of businesses said they will rely heavily on visual content in 2021 and 2022, so these numbers only seem to be growing.
• 86% of businesses use video content as a core marketing tool, according to Wyzowl.
• Source:Wyzowl The top 4 reasons for not using video marketing as part of their content strategy by marketers in the Wyzowl report include lack of time (23%), not knowing where to start (16%), lack of interest (13%), and high costs of production (10%).
• As of 2021, YouTube was the most popular platform for consumers when it comes to watching video content, with 35% of respondents voting for it in a HubSpot survey.
• The Wyzowl survey shows that 86% of marketers have been able to increase lead generation with videos.
• Infographics are very popular among the latest trends in visual content marketing, with nearly 45% of marketers already investing in them according to HubSpot.
• 38% of those who haven’t experimented with infographics yet, plan to invest in this visual format in 2022.
• Audio Content Marketing Statistics 53% of marketers find audio content like podcasts to be effective digital marketing tools, according to HubSpot research.
• Though only 1% of them think it yields any considerable ROI, 80% still plan to invest in audio content in 2022 as they feel it drives engagement and helps build brand awareness.
• Audio chatrooms (like Clubhouse and Twitter Spaces) are trending in 2022 as 68% of marketers who are already using this marketing tool say that it’s extremely effective as a social media marketing strategy, though the ROI is low right now.
• Despite the growing popularity of podcasts and other audio content formats, only 11% of marketers consider audio content as a key area for investment in 2022, according to the SEMrush survey.
• Social Media Content Marketing Statistics The SEMrush State of Content Marketing report lists organic social media (69%) as the number 1 channel used for content distribution, followed closely by email marketing (54%).
• Short form videos are the most popular content type used by marketers on social media with 85% of marketers saying that it is the most effective.
• Live streaming and videos are a close second with 70% of marketers vouching for their effectiveness.
• List posts are shared 218% more than how-to posts on social media, according to Backlinko’s research.
• Source:Backlinko 67% of marketers have plans of increasing their investment in TikTok as a social media marketing channel.
• More than 84% of B2B decision-makers also use social media to make important purchase decisions.
• B2B Content Marketing Statistics 46% of B2B marketers plan to increase their content marketing budgets anywhere between 1% to 9% in 2022, according to the CMI/MarketingProfs survey.
• 58% of B2B marketers said that virtual events produced the best results for them in 2020-21, among all B2B content assets.
• 55% of B2B buyers say that if a piece of though-leadership content does not kindle their curiosity or interest, they are likely to move on to other content within a minute.
• More than 67% of B2B content marketers invest most of their time and resources in top-of-the-funnel content creation, according to Databox.
• B2C Content Marketing Statistics 81% of B2C marketers feel that their content marketing efforts were very, or at least moderately, successful over the past 12 months.
• The same survey by HubSpot also revealed that 51% of B2C marketers are planning to spend more on content marketing in 2022.
• The top content marketing goals of B2C marketers in 2022 are increasing brand awareness (49%), advertising products (44%), and increasing revenue (43%).
• 50% of marketers said they outsource at least one content marketing activity while 50% did not.
• Content Marketing ROI Statistics 51% of content marketers say they understand how their content is performing and track relevant metrics to measure performance, according to the Parse.
• But a huge 49% are still clueless about gauging content performance accurately.
• ly Only 35% of marketers believe measuring their content ROI is ‘Very’ or ‘Extremely’ important, according to HubSpot’s State of Marketing report 2021.
• 30% of content marketers consider maximizing content ROI as one of their primary goals in marketing, which means seeking tangible and real results from the content they publish.
• Influencer marketing seems to be generating a very high ROI as 57% of marketers find it to be effective and 11% also say it had the highest ROI when they tested different trends.
• Native ads are growing in popularity as 36% of content marketers say it’s effective and almost 5% call it their best ROI-generating strategy.
• ROI in video marketing is measured on the basis of engagement (62%), views (61%), and leads or clicks (60%) that videos get, according to the Wyzowl survey.
• Marketing Technology Statistics 62% of marketers surveyed by CoSchedule don’t use any kind of project management software to manage their content marketing projects, despite the fact that project management tools evidently contribute to marketing success.
• The CoSchedule report also shows that only 30% of marketers use project management software, 23% use marketing automation platforms and 34% use SEO planning platforms.
• When it comes to visual content though, 41% of marketers use an online tool or graphic maker, the Venngage survey revealed.
• The Big List of Content Marketing Statistics | Brafton: Semrush Only 30% of marketers say the COVID-19 pandemic will not change their plans in 2022.
• Influitive 65% of marketers say case studies and success stories are the biggest value drivers for their business.
• Hubspot 70% of marketers use account-based marketing strategies to target their content.
• Hubspot 72% of marketers say their company uses reporting tools for data analysis.
• Oracle 58% of companies with more than 80 marketing employees say their efforts were “extremely successful” last year compared to 33% at companies with marketing departments of 30 or fewer employees.
• Oracle 82% of organizations plan to add, remove or replace components of their marketing tech stack to improve performance.
• Altimeter Only 13% of companies rely purely on internal creative ideas, while others employ a mix of company goals, competitor analysis, audience needs and digital data.
• Altimeter Nearly half (46%) of marketers plan to use better data to create personalized content that serves the customer journey.
• Deloitte 83% of consumers in 2021 are aware that brands are using their personal data and 71% of users expressed concern over how companies are using their personal data.
• Brafton Most marketers agree that blog articles (68%) and downloadable assets like eBooks and white papers (62%) are the best way to learn about content marketing.
• B2B Content Marketing Trends Content Marketing Institute 77% of B2B marketers report having a content marketing strategy, though only 40% documented their strategy.
• Content Marketing Institute 66% of B2B marketers expect their 2022 content marketing budget to increase over their 2021 budget.
• WPromote Social media has the biggest impact on the customer experience for 57% of B2B marketers.
• Content Marketing Institute 50% of B2B marketers outsource content marketing activities.
• Content Marketing Institute The top 2 content marketing-related areas of investment for 2022 are expected to be video (69%) and events (digital, in-person or hybrid) at 61%.
• WPromote 67% of B2B marketing executives expect to increase spend on marketing technology.
• WPromote 60% of B2B marketers say that “wasted time” is the greatest cost associated with lead generation struggles.
• Vidyard 68% of B2B marketing influencers regard research and case studies to be the most trusted type of content.
• Demand Gen 44% of B2B buyers typically consume 3 to 5 pieces of content before engaging with a vendor.
• Demand Gen 79% of B2B buyers say that vendor content had a significant impact on a buying decision.
• B2C Content Marketing Trends Content Marketing Institute 70% of B2C marketers report having a content marketing strategy, though only 39% documented their strategy.
• Content Marketing Institute 50% of B2C marketers outsource content marketing activities.
• Content Marketing Institute 65% of B2C marketers prioritize the audience’s informational needs over their organization’s sales/promotional message.
• Oracle 37% of B2C marketers are testing and implementing tactics in new social platforms like TikTok, Discord and Twitch.
• Hubspot Influencer marketing is a tactic that 61% of B2C marketers plan to use in 2022.
• Content Marketing Institute 61% of B2C marketers expect their 2022 content marketing budget to exceed their 2021 budget.
• Content Marketing Institute 72% of B2C marketers predicted their organization would invest in video in 2022.
• Semrush 69% of marketers use social media to distribute and promote their content organically.
• Social Media Examiner 88% of marketers say social media marketing increases business exposure.
• Demand Gen 71% of B2B professionals use LinkedIn to share business-related content.
• Animoto 93% of brands got a new customer because of a video on social media.
• Email Marketing Statistics Semrush 54% of marketers use email marketing to distribute and promote their content.
• DMA 72% of marketers use email to engage with consumers across the customer journey.
• Litmus 80% of email marketers use name, company name and other profile data to personalize email sends.
• Litmus On average more than 65% of marketers create at least 2 versions of an email to segment and personalize the content.
• DMA 41% of marketers send emails to their mailing lists on a daily basis.
• Litmus 30% Email marketing is very critical to company success for 30% more marketers now than before the pandemic.
• Litmus 43% of marketers are changing how they measure email performance because of Apple’s Mail Privacy Protection.
• DMA 51% of marketers believe consumers open and read at least half of the emails they receive, though most consumers (59%) report that they open and read less than half.
• Blogging Statistics Hubspot 48% of companies that have a content marketing strategy leverage blogging.
• ” Semrush Articles with 7 or fewer words in their H1 get 36% more average organic traffic than those with 14 or more words.
• Moz Re-optimizing your content can increase the number of clicks a page generates by more than 40%.
• Brafton 70% of websites in the HR industry that generate more than 100,000 organic visitors per month write 2 or more blogs per week.
• Visual Content Marketing Statistics Venngage Almost half (48%) of marketing content contains visuals.
• Venngage 49% of marketers primarily use visual content on blogs and websites followed by social channels such as Facebook and Instagram.
• Hubspot 56% of content marketers who use infographics say that they’re the most effective marketing content type.
• Hubspot 42% of marketers plan to increase budget in virtual reality (VR) and augmented reality (AR).
• Venngage Around 50% of content marketers spend less than 5 hours a week creating visual content.
• Wyzowl 92% of marketers value video as an ‘important part’ of their marketing strategy.
• Wyzowl The majority of marketers say video has helped them increase understanding of their product or service (94%), improve brand awareness (93%), boost traffic (87%) and generate leads (86%).
• Vidyard 93% of sales and marketing professionals believe that video converts the same or better than other forms of content.
• Vidyard 91% of organizations are maintaining or increasing video content production budgets.
• Social Media Examiner 71% of marketers plan to increase their YouTube video marketing efforts.
• Wyzowl 88% of people say they’ve been convinced to buy a product or service by watching a brand’s video.
• Wyzowl 69% of people say they’d most prefer to learn about a new product or service by watching a short video.
• Lemonlight 62% of consumers say they prefer to watch video content on a smartphone or tablet.
• Unbounce 81% of marketers know speed impacts their conversions, yet only 3% say faster load times are their top priority.
• Content Marketing Institute Both B2B (69%) and B2C (67%) marketers say website engagement provides the most insight into content performance.
• Altimeter 63% of companies use website analytics to create personalized/customized content.
• Search Engine Optimization Statistics Hubspot 69% of marketers actively invest time in SEO.
• Semrush 61% of marketers say improving the quality and authenticity of their content increases organic search ranking.
• Hubspot Over 50% of marketers use keyword rankings and organic traffic to measure the success of their SEO strategies.
• Hubspot Almost 25% of companies invest in mobile optimization as a top SEO tactic.
• Think With Google Over 40% of shoppers go to Google when researching a purchase they plan to make in-store or online.
• Search Engine Marketing Statistics Brainlabs 74% of brands say that pay-per-click is a huge driver for their business.
• Brainlabs 58% of marketers spend less than $50,000 per year on PPC tactics.
• Brainlabs The top platforms that brands spend money on are Google (90%), Facebook (81%) and Microsoft (59%).
• Brainlabs 65% of marketers say paid search is the most effective PPC channel.
• Hubspot 79% of marketers report buying paid advertising on social media in 2021.
• Formstack 78% percent of marketers rely on Google AdWords and social media advertising to promote their messages.
• Formstack 54% of marketers conduct paid campaigns to generate better quality leads WordStream Sponsored search results account for 65% of clicks, compared to 35% for organic results.
• eMarketer About half of adult US internet users said that when brands use their data in advertising, it helps them discover (50%) and find (49%) products and services that interest them — but 44% said this often feels invasive.
• Audio Content Statistics Infinite Dial 68% of people in the US over age 12 have listened to online audio in the last month.
• Infinite Dial 28% of people in the US over age 12 listen to a podcast on a weekly basis.
• Hubspot 80% of marketers who leverage audio content and podcasts plan to invest the same amount or more budget in 2022.
• Edison Research 51% of podcast listeners who are 18+ and listen to 5 or more hours of podcasts every week say they pay more attention to ads on podcasts than on other media.
• Edison Research 53% of podcast listeners say their opinion of a company is more positive when it’s on a podcast they regularly listen to.
• Virtual Event Marketing Statistics Hubspot 40% of marketers plan to increase their investment in virtual events, webinars and conferences in 2022.
• Vimeo 59% of companies host webinars for lead generation and marketing purposes such as promoting their brand, product or service.
• Content Marketing Institute Webinars are the highest-performing video format for more than half (51%) of B2B marketers.
• Eventbrite 53% of virtual event consumers said they plan to attend both virtual and in-person events in the future — even when it is safe to gather in person again.
• Demand Gen Almost half (49%) of B2B buyers say webinars are the most valuable content format in the early stages of the buying process.
• Vimeo Virtual event attendees say that quality of speakers (64%) and relevance of content (63%) encourage them to sign up for events.
• 20 Content Marketing Statistics for 2023 – Fliki: This approach resonates with 90% of marketers participating in the HubSpot State of Marketing survey.
• Personalized Targeting with ContentThe same study revealed that 23% of respondents considered content-led communications most effective for personalized targeting.
• Embracing the Long-form RenaissanceAs per the Content Marketing Institute, B2C marketers have shifted towards long-form content, with 42% now using it, compared to 22% the previous year.
• The Rise of Short Articles and PostsShort articles and posts, typically ranging from 300 to 900 words, are favored by 83% of B2C marketers, as per the Content Marketing Institute.
• 8% of marketers found that original graphics, including infographics and illustrations, helped them achieve their marketing goals in 2020, as reported by Venngage.
• The Ascendancy of Video MarketingIn 2022, 72% of B2C marketers expected their organizations to invest in video marketing, according to CMI.
• 6% more engagement than static content, with users spending an average of 13 minutes on interactive content items, compared to 8.
• Based on the Content Marketing Institute Report, 70% of B2C marketers and 73% of B2B marketers have embraced content marketing as a core part of their marketing strategy.
• A whopping 97% of marketing professionals surveyed by Semrush achieved some success with their content marketing in 2021.
• The B2B Content Marketing Study by CMI revealed that 40% of B2B marketers have a documented content marketing strategy, while 33% have a strategy but don’t document it, and 27% have no strategy.
• Lockdowns and increased online activity led to a remarkable 207% surge in content usage.
• Facebook Reigns SupremeAccording to the Hubspot 2023 State of Marketing Report, Facebook emerged as the top distribution channel, used by 64% of marketers, followed by Instagram (58%), YouTube (57%), Twitter (43%), TikTok (42%), and LinkedIn (33%).
• The Quest for Practical ContentIn a 2021 DemandGen study, 62% of B2B decision-makers rely on practical content like case studies and visual content like webinars to make informed buying decisions.
• The 5-30 Minute SupremacySurprisingly, more than 50% of respondents stated they would commit 5-30 minutes to a piece of content.
• The Big List of Content Marketing Statistics | Brafton: Semrush Only 30% of marketers say the COVID-19 pandemic will not change their plans in 2022.
• Influitive 65% of marketers say case studies and success stories are the biggest value drivers for their business.
• Hubspot 70% of marketers use account-based marketing strategies to target their content.
• Hubspot 72% of marketers say their company uses reporting tools for data analysis.
• Oracle 58% of companies with more than 80 marketing employees say their efforts were “extremely successful” last year compared to 33% at companies with marketing departments of 30 or fewer employees.
• Oracle 82% of organizations plan to add, remove or replace components of their marketing tech stack to improve performance.
• Altimeter Only 13% of companies rely purely on internal creative ideas, while others employ a mix of company goals, competitor analysis, audience needs and digital data.
• Altimeter Nearly half (46%) of marketers plan to use better data to create personalized content that serves the customer journey.
• Deloitte 83% of consumers in 2021 are aware that brands are using their personal data and 71% of users expressed concern over how companies are using their personal data.
• Brafton Most marketers agree that blog articles (68%) and downloadable assets like eBooks and white papers (62%) are the best way to learn about content marketing.
• B2B Content Marketing Trends Content Marketing Institute 77% of B2B marketers report having a content marketing strategy, though only 40% documented their strategy.
• Content Marketing Institute 66% of B2B marketers expect their 2022 content marketing budget to increase over their 2021 budget.
• WPromote Social media has the biggest impact on the customer experience for 57% of B2B marketers.
• Content Marketing Institute 50% of B2B marketers outsource content marketing activities.
• Content Marketing Institute The top 2 content marketing-related areas of investment for 2022 are expected to be video (69%) and events (digital, in-person or hybrid) at 61%.
• WPromote 67% of B2B marketing executives expect to increase spend on marketing technology.
• WPromote 60% of B2B marketers say that “wasted time” is the greatest cost associated with lead generation struggles.
• Vidyard 68% of B2B marketing influencers regard research and case studies to be the most trusted type of content.
• Demand Gen 44% of B2B buyers typically consume 3 to 5 pieces of content before engaging with a vendor.
• Demand Gen 79% of B2B buyers say that vendor content had a significant impact on a buying decision.
• B2C Content Marketing Trends Content Marketing Institute 70% of B2C marketers report having a content marketing strategy, though only 39% documented their strategy.
• Content Marketing Institute 50% of B2C marketers outsource content marketing activities.
• Content Marketing Institute 65% of B2C marketers prioritize the audience’s informational needs over their organization’s sales/promotional message.
• Oracle 37% of B2C marketers are testing and implementing tactics in new social platforms like TikTok, Discord and Twitch.
• Hubspot Influencer marketing is a tactic that 61% of B2C marketers plan to use in 2022.
• Content Marketing Institute 61% of B2C marketers expect their 2022 content marketing budget to exceed their 2021 budget.
• Content Marketing Institute 72% of B2C marketers predicted their organization would invest in video in 2022.
• Semrush 69% of marketers use social media to distribute and promote their content organically.
• Social Media Examiner 88% of marketers say social media marketing increases business exposure.
• Demand Gen 71% of B2B professionals use LinkedIn to share business-related content.
• Animoto 93% of brands got a new customer because of a video on social media.
• Email Marketing Statistics Semrush 54% of marketers use email marketing to distribute and promote their content.
• DMA 72% of marketers use email to engage with consumers across the customer journey.
• Litmus 80% of email marketers use name, company name and other profile data to personalize email sends.
• Litmus On average more than 65% of marketers create at least 2 versions of an email to segment and personalize the content.
• DMA 41% of marketers send emails to their mailing lists on a daily basis.
• Litmus 30% Email marketing is very critical to company success for 30% more marketers now than before the pandemic.
• Litmus 43% of marketers are changing how they measure email performance because of Apple’s Mail Privacy Protection.
• DMA 51% of marketers believe consumers open and read at least half of the emails they receive, though most consumers (59%) report that they open and read less than half.
• Blogging Statistics Hubspot 48% of companies that have a content marketing strategy leverage blogging.
• ” Semrush Articles with 7 or fewer words in their H1 get 36% more average organic traffic than those with 14 or more words.
• Moz Re-optimizing your content can increase the number of clicks a page generates by more than 40%.
• Brafton 70% of websites in the HR industry that generate more than 100,000 organic visitors per month write 2 or more blogs per week.
• Visual Content Marketing Statistics Venngage Almost half (48%) of marketing content contains visuals.
• Venngage 49% of marketers primarily use visual content on blogs and websites followed by social channels such as Facebook and Instagram.
• Hubspot 56% of content marketers who use infographics say that they’re the most effective marketing content type.
• Hubspot 42% of marketers plan to increase budget in virtual reality (VR) and augmented reality (AR).
• Venngage Around 50% of content marketers spend less than 5 hours a week creating visual content.
• Wyzowl 92% of marketers value video as an ‘important part’ of their marketing strategy.
• Wyzowl The majority of marketers say video has helped them increase understanding of their product or service (94%), improve brand awareness (93%), boost traffic (87%) and generate leads (86%).
• Vidyard 93% of sales and marketing professionals believe that video converts the same or better than other forms of content.
• Vidyard 91% of organizations are maintaining or increasing video content production budgets.
• Social Media Examiner 71% of marketers plan to increase their YouTube video marketing efforts.
• Wyzowl 88% of people say they’ve been convinced to buy a product or service by watching a brand’s video.
• Wyzowl 69% of people say they’d most prefer to learn about a new product or service by watching a short video.
• Lemonlight 62% of consumers say they prefer to watch video content on a smartphone or tablet.
• Unbounce 81% of marketers know speed impacts their conversions, yet only 3% say faster load times are their top priority.
• Content Marketing Institute Both B2B (69%) and B2C (67%) marketers say website engagement provides the most insight into content performance.
• Altimeter 63% of companies use website analytics to create personalized/customized content.
• Search Engine Optimization Statistics Hubspot 69% of marketers actively invest time in SEO.
• Semrush 61% of marketers say improving the quality and authenticity of their content increases organic search ranking.
• Hubspot Over 50% of marketers use keyword rankings and organic traffic to measure the success of their SEO strategies.
• Hubspot Almost 25% of companies invest in mobile optimization as a top SEO tactic.
• Think With Google Over 40% of shoppers go to Google when researching a purchase they plan to make in-store or online.
• Search Engine Marketing Statistics Brainlabs 74% of brands say that pay-per-click is a huge driver for their business.
• Brainlabs 58% of marketers spend less than $50,000 per year on PPC tactics.
• Brainlabs The top platforms that brands spend money on are Google (90%), Facebook (81%) and Microsoft (59%).
• Brainlabs 65% of marketers say paid search is the most effective PPC channel.
• Hubspot 79% of marketers report buying paid advertising on social media in 2021.
• Formstack 78% percent of marketers rely on Google AdWords and social media advertising to promote their messages.
• Formstack 54% of marketers conduct paid campaigns to generate better quality leads WordStream Sponsored search results account for 65% of clicks, compared to 35% for organic results.
• eMarketer About half of adult US internet users said that when brands use their data in advertising, it helps them discover (50%) and find (49%) products and services that interest them — but 44% said this often feels invasive.
• Audio Content Statistics Infinite Dial 68% of people in the US over age 12 have listened to online audio in the last month.
• Infinite Dial 28% of people in the US over age 12 listen to a podcast on a weekly basis.
• Hubspot 80% of marketers who leverage audio content and podcasts plan to invest the same amount or more budget in 2022.
• Edison Research 51% of podcast listeners who are 18+ and listen to 5 or more hours of podcasts every week say they pay more attention to ads on podcasts than on other media.
• Edison Research 53% of podcast listeners say their opinion of a company is more positive when it’s on a podcast they regularly listen to.
• Virtual Event Marketing Statistics Hubspot 40% of marketers plan to increase their investment in virtual events, webinars and conferences in 2022.
• Vimeo 59% of companies host webinars for lead generation and marketing purposes such as promoting their brand, product or service.
• Content Marketing Institute Webinars are the highest-performing video format for more than half (51%) of B2B marketers.
• Eventbrite 53% of virtual event consumers said they plan to attend both virtual and in-person events in the future — even when it is safe to gather in person again.
• Demand Gen Almost half (49%) of B2B buyers say webinars are the most valuable content format in the early stages of the buying process.
• Vimeo Virtual event attendees say that quality of speakers (64%) and relevance of content (63%) encourage them to sign up for events.
• Must-Know Content Marketing Statistics [Current Data] • Gitnux: Content Marketing:The Most Important Statistics 79% of businesses rely on content marketing to produce high-quality leads.
• Content marketing is a vital company strategy according to 81% of marketers.
• 90% of marketers will continue devoting the same amount of funds and resources to content marketing next year, while 66% plan to increase it.
• General content marketing statistics 79% of B2B marketers reported their organization has a content marketing strategy.
• 32% of CMI survey respondents indicated their content marketing team ranges in size from 2 to 5 employees.
• However, 35% said they don’t have a person dedicated full-time to content marketing (this is more prevalent among small companies).
• 85 billion USD, and is expected to grow at a CAGR of 16% between 2020 and 2025.
• According to the survey, 75% of the public prefers articles they read to be under 1,000 words.
• 97% of Semrush survey respondents claimed that content was a tactic that formed an important part of their overall marketing strategy in 2021.
• There is a 22% increase in the search for “what is content marketing” along with other telltale searches that strongly indicate content marketing is on the rise.
• ​​47% of buyers view 3 to 5 pieces of content prior to engaging with a sales rep, and the majority of them expect brands to create content to gain their interest.
• 79% of businesses rely on content marketing to produce high-quality leads.
• 57% of content marketers, surveyed by Semrush, had a documented content marketing strategy.
• 19% reported an advanced content marketing strategy, 42% reported they are taking their first steps in content marketing.
• A study conducted by the Content Marketing Institute and LinkedIn reported that 80% of the content created by marketing teams goes unused by sales.
• 65% of marketers can’t quantitatively demonstrate the impact of their marketing.
• Content marketing is reportedly a vital company strategy according to 81% of marketers.
• Main content marketing tools and channels According to CMI, the most popular tools that marketers and their teams use while creating content are keyword research tools (78%) and editorial calendars (70%).
• Surprisingly, only 22% indicated they use fact-checking procedures/tools, revealing an important step missing for those striving to build trust/credibility with their audiences.
• The top channels marketers distribute content organically are social media platforms (89%), email (87%), and their organization’s website/blog (86%).
• And while 54% are speaking/presenting at virtual events, only 38% are writing guest posts for other publications (and even fewer are doing guest spots, working on media/influencer relations, or participating in collaborative social spaces).
• As for paid content distribution, the use of social media advertising/promoted posts increased to 83% from 60% last year, with low-cost opportunities likely being a factor.
• 64% of B2B buyers said they prefer podcasts at the top of the funnel, while for 48% of buyers webinars were valuable in the mid-stage of their buying journey.
• As for content formats that are more frequently shared with peers and colleagues, blog posts took the top spot, with 74% of respondents stating they share blogs regularly.
• Blog posts saw a notable year-over-year increase, with 71% stating they consumed blog content during the purchase process, compared to 66% last year.
• Other notable formats often shared with colleagues include case studies (64%), infographics (62%), webinars (61%), and third-party/analyst reports (55%).
• In terms of which channels content is most frequently shared, email (70%) and LinkedIn (52%) continue to rank the highest, which was similar to last year.
• Facebook saw notable growth, with 38% stating they occasionally or frequently share business-related content on the social platform.
• The latest content marketing trends The use of content creation/collaboration/workflow technologies increased to 58% in 2021 from 48% in the previous year.
• 49% of B2B buyers said they now rely more on content to research and make purchase decisions.
• 55% of successful content marketing strategies focused on improving the quality of content, 46% of those surveyed made SEO a priority.
• 41% are focused on creating more video and visual content, while 38% are updating and repurposing existing content.
• 35% voted for website optimization, and 28% are analyzing competitors’ content.
• 46% of companies that had highly successful content marketing increased their paid content promotional budget in 2021.
• 19% of companies believed their content marketing efforts were very successful in 2021.
• 33% were moderately successful, and 39% found their content marketing efforts to be only somewhat successful in 2021.
• More than 25% of marketers use direct messages to offer customer support, and 15% of marketers plan to try it for the first time in 2023.
• 88% of marketers who have an SEO strategy will increase or maintain their investment in 2023, which is a slight uptick from the year before (84%).
• 76% of content marketers measure their content marketing performance with organic traffic, while 22% use backlinks as the main metric.
• 90% of marketers will continue devoting the same amount of funds and resources to content marketing next year, while 66% plan to increase it.
• For 75% of content marketers, SEO was the most efficient content marketing tactic they implemented in 2020.
• Followed by publishing more “How to” guides and educational content (45%).
• 3% more social shares than headlines that don’t end with a question mark.
• 71% of B2B buyers read blog content before they purchase something from a brand.
• 45% of content marketers want to increase brand awareness, 37% want to attract more traffic to their website.
• 36% are focused on generating leads through content marketing, 27% of respondents want increased sales and revenue, and 23% strive for improved customer loyalty and engagement with their brand.
• Around 55% of respondents said it helped them the most to make their 2021 content strategy more successful.
• Collaborating more with industry influencers was mentioned by 14% of interviewed marketers.
• 88% of buyers agree that content producers need to focus less on product specifics and more on the value that can be brought to their business.
• 75% strongly agree that producers should use more data and research to support the claims and suggestions made in their content.
• 65% strongly agree that making content easier to access through fewer form fields or even single-click registration would also help vendor credibility.
• Semrush found that 53% of companies that were unsuccessful with content marketing in 2021 spent less than 5% of their marketing budget on content.
• 73% of companies who increased their spending from 10% to 70% of their total marketing budget to content marketing were very successful.
• Another survey on building an effective content marketing funnel showed that 48% of content marketers see creating content that drives traffic as their biggest challenge, and 83% consider organic traffic the key content efficiency metric.
• Supplementary Statistics Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates about 3 times as many leads.
• 47% of buyers viewed 3-5 pieces of content before engaging with a sales rep.
• 51% of companies report that updating old content has proven the most efficient content marketing tactic.
• 95% of B2B service buyers say they want content with more insight from industry thought leaders.
• 96% of people perceive blogs with multiple authors to be more credible.
• 63% of marketers find it most difficult to consistently produce engaging visuals.
• 97% of marketers say video has helped increase user understanding of their product or service.
• 30+ Bite-Sized Digital Marketing Statistics 2024 [Facts & Figures]: 2 trillion in the last year, capturing 60% of the worldwide online shopping market.
• 39%, according to data from over 200 million emails from Constant Contact.
• Nearly 30% of marketers surveyed use audience segmentation tactics to improve email engagement.
• Yes, adding a video to your email can increase your open rate by up to 13%.
• 33% of marketers send weekly emails, and 26% send emails multiple times monthly.
• 77% of marketers have seen an increase in email engagement over the last 12 months.
• Fridays see the highest email open rates (approximately 19%), compared to the lowest email open rates (17%) on Saturdays worldwide.
• The most effective strategies for email marketing campaigns are subscriber segmentation (78%), message personalization (72%), and email automation campaigns (71%).
• Nasdaq predicts more than 95% of all purchases will be done through eCommerce by 2040.
• Credit cards are the preferred payment method for eCommerce transactions, used in 53% of transactions.
• 23% of consumers who open an email on a mobile device will open that email again later, many times on a desktop.
• The average conversion rate for emails is around 18%, which means about 18 out of 100 people who opened an email made a purchase.
• According to Statista, around 80% of smartphone users in the United States have made a purchase from their smartphone in the past six months.
• (Verified Market Research) Over 50% of marketers say keyword rankings and organic traffic are the top ways they measure the success of their SEO strategies.
• 6% close rate, while outbound leads such as direct mail or print advertising only have a 1.
• (Source:Exploding Topics) Statista also reports that the global website traffic coming from mobiles is consistently hovering around the 50% since 2017.
• Over 55% of social media users in the US aged 18 to 24 made at least one purchase through social channels, followed by users aged 25-34 years old.
• 2 trillion in the last year, capturing 60% of the worldwide online shopping market.
• The average conversion rate for emails is around 18% and is only expected to grow year after year.
• 12 Statistics That Show The Importance of Visual Content In Social Media Marketing: comWhen people hear information, they’re likely to remember only 10% of that information three days later.
• However, if a relevant image is paired with that same information, people retained 65% of the information three days later.
• Cisco projects that global internet traffic from videos will make up 82% of all consumer internet traffic by 2022.
• However, if a relevant image is paired with that same information, people retained 65% of the information three days later.
• Content Marketing Statistics – The Ultimate List – Curata Blog: 5% of companies are increasing their content marketing staff levels in 2016.
• 20 Insights on Influencer Marketing | Digital Marketing Statistics | Workspace Digital: Influencer marketing was rated as the fastest-growing online customer-acquisition channel by 22% of surveyed companies, beating organic search in the second spot at 17% growth, paid search at 14% growth and email marketing at 15% growth (source).
• 39% of marketers say they plan to increase their influencer marketing budget in 2018 with 35% still unsure how to conduct changes to their budget, and only 5% say that their budgets will decrease.
• The remaining 21% say that their budgets will remain the same (source).
• Determining the actual ROI of influencers will be the biggest influencer marketing challenge for 2018, according to 76% of marketers (source).
• When measuring the success of influencer marketing programs, marketers cite engagement (90%), clicks (59%), and conversions (54%) as top performance indicators (source).
• 70% of businesses make $2 or more for every dollar invested, and 13% make $20 or more (source).
• 59% of micro-influencers (10,000 to 100,000 followers) say Instagram is the most effective platform for engaging their audience (source).
• 37% of marketers said that blogs were the most effective platform for influencer marketing (source), where non-celebrity bloggers are 10x more likely to influence an in-store purchase than celebrity bloggers (source).
• 40% of Twitter users have made a purchase as a direct result of an influencer tweet (source).
• 75% of marketing professionals say verified web traffic is the most important criteria when selecting an influencer (source).
• 76% of influencers value brands that give them creative freedom (source), and 47% of influencers say they prefer to work with brands whose values are in alignment with theirs (source).
• 30% of consumers are more likely to purchase a product endorsed by a non-celebrity blogger than a celebrity (source).
• 22% of marketers say influencer marketing is their most cost-effective channel (source), with 94% of marketers believe it is an effective tactic to get attention and 67% of marketers promoting content for their brand with the help of influencers (source).
• At least 45% of influencers receive about four proposals for influencer marketing campaigns every month, with 44% saying that they accept less than a quarter of the proposals they receive, and only 24% accept more than 50% of the offers they receive (source).
• 40% of people say they have purchased an item online after seeing it used by an influencer (source).
• 74% of people trust social networks to guide them to purchase decisions (source).
• 49% of people say they rely on recommendations from influencers before they buy something (source), while 90% of business decision-makers initiate their purchasing process by researching opinions from industry experts and peers (source).
• However, only 15% of B2B brands are running ongoing influencer marketing programs (source).
• 14 visual content marketing statistics for 2020 [Infographic]: With 49% giving the highest rating to the importance of visual content in their marketing strategy, it’s clearly seen as one of the key components of their work.
• Ultimate Content Marketing ROI Statistics Guide for 2024 – THM SEO Agency: Boost in Click-Through Rates:Implementing content marketing can increase click-through rates by 97% and amplify ROI 13-fold over conventional marketing strategies.
• Email Marketing Efficiency:An impressive 72% of successful companies are diligent in measuring their content marketing ROI, especially in email marketing.
• Content Marketing Effectiveness and ROI Content marketing is not only cost-effective, being 62% cheaper than traditional advertising, but it also triples the lead generation.
• Implementing content marketing can boost click-through rates by a staggering 97% and amplify ROI 13-fold over conventional marketing strategies.
• A significant 75% of content marketers are enhancing their email strategies for mobile compatibility, leading to a more substantial ROI.
• Nearly half (47%) of B2B buyers typically review three to five content pieces before initiating contact with a sales representative.
• Challenges in Measuring ROI A third of content marketers (33%) grapple with the complexities of measuring their efforts effectively.
• The top hurdles they face include integrating data across various platforms (48%), a lack of clear organizational KPIs (45%), and difficulties in linking performance data back to their original objectives (43%).
• Surprisingly, only 65% of marketers have pinpointed their key performance indicators (KPIs) for evaluating content marketing success, highlighting a gap in understanding and defining return on investment metrics.
• A significant 65% of marketers are unable to quantifiably prove the impact of their marketing endeavors.
• For 35% of marketers, grasping the return on investment of their campaigns is deemed very or extremely crucial.
• While 83% of marketers employ metrics to gauge content performance, a mere 51% have a clear understanding of their content’s effectiveness.
• Alarmingly, 22% of content marketers are in the dark about their content marketing return on investment.
• In the B2C sector, 57% are measuring the ROI of their content marketing efforts.
• Over half of B2B marketers, at 55%, confess to being uncertain about what effective content marketing really entails.
• Nearly half, 46% of marketers, cite measuring content marketing ROI as a primary challenge.
• Half of the marketers, 50%, struggle with assessing the effectiveness of their content.
• A significant 58% place a high priority on identifying which content is effective.
• Almost half, 47% of B2B marketers, don’t track the ROI of their content marketing.
• An impressive 72% of successful companies are diligent in measuring their content marketing ROI.
• A mere 8% of marketers feel confident in their ability to measure ROI, with only 2% considering themselves extremely successful at this task.
• 40% of marketers check on content success weekly, while 28% do it daily.
• Companies Believe in Content Marketing Cost-effectiveness is a major advantage of content marketing, as it demands 62% less investment than traditional marketing techniques while tripling the lead generation.
• A striking 87% of content marketers place a higher value on addressing audience needs rather than focusing on promotional content.
• Among the most successful brands in content over the past year, a notable 78% attribute their success to having a well-defined content marketing strategy.
• SEO stands out as the top performer in content marketing tactics, with 75% of brands acknowledging its efficiency in content marketing.
• Looking towards the future, 78% of content marketers are convinced that tailor-made content represents the next big leap in marketing.
• Despite the growing importance of content marketing, only 19% of companies report having a highly developed strategy in this area.
• In the B2C marketing realm, a substantial 86% of marketers are implementing content marketing strategies.
• Confidence in content marketing is high, with 80% of businesses believing in the effectiveness of their content marketing efforts.
• Content marketing is a key player in B2B strategies, with 88% of marketers incorporating it into their overall marketing plans.
• In the B2B sector, a commanding 91% of marketers utilize content marketing, showcasing its pivotal role.
• Commitment to content marketing is notably strong among B2C marketers, with 64% expressing extreme dedication to this approach.
• A convincing 89% of marketers report that content marketing yields a superior ROI compared to traditional marketing methods.
• An overwhelming 92% of marketers view content as a crucial business asset, essential for driving long-term ROI.
• Tiger Fitness saw a remarkable increase in returning customers, reaching a 60% rate, thanks to its video content marketing strategy.
• Content Marketing for Lead Generation Over 67% of marketers have seen a boost in lead generation or business demand through their content marketing strategies, marking a 7% increase compared to the previous year.
• In the tech sector, 95% of purchases are decided by buying committees, with nearly half (49%) of buyers solely relying on digital content and review platforms, bypassing direct interactions with vendor representatives.
• Leads originating from SEO efforts boast an impressive close rate of nearly 15%.
• 64% of small businesses leverage email marketing as a tool to connect with their customer base.
• While only 57% of small businesses plan to up their investment in email marketing, a higher percentage (78%) are inclined towards increasing their digital marketing budget.
• Before making a purchase, 71% of B2B buyers typically engage with blog content from the brand.
• B2B companies that maintain an active blog generate 67% more leads monthly compared to those without a blog.
• Small businesses with blogs see a 126% increase in lead generation over those without blogs.
• 57% of marketers attribute the acquisition of new customers to their blogging efforts.
• In the B2B realm, 70% have successfully demonstrated an increase in leads and customer engagement through content marketing.
• The power of visual content marketing is evident, with 93% of marketers gaining a new customer through social media videos.
• 70% of B2B marketers acknowledge that blogging is a key driver for lead generation.
• Lead generation is a top priority for 85% of marketers, closely followed by lead nurturing (78%) and sales (84%).
• A significant 72% of marketers report an increase in leads due to their content marketing efforts.
• Content marketing proves to be more cost-effective, costing 62% less than traditional marketing methods while generating three times as many leads.
• Small businesses that engage in blogging activities report a 126% increase in lead growth.
• A staggering nearly 80% of internet users regularly engage with blog content.
• Blogs optimized for SEO draw in 1,000% more traffic than those relying primarily on social media.
• Focusing on the quality of content has been a game-changer for 55% of successful content marketers.
• For 53% of marketers, blogging stands as the primary focus in their content marketing strategy.
• After reading blog content, 61% of consumers have been influenced to make a purchase.
• An impressive 82% of marketers who blog report experiencing positive ROI from their efforts.
• Companies that maintain a blog see a 55% increase in website visitors and a whopping 97% more links directed to their site.
• 14% of bloggers manage to earn a salary through their blogging endeavors.
• Marketers are Expanding Content Marketing Budgets Marketers dedicating between 10% and 70% of their budgets to content marketing are often classified as “very successful.
• ” Half of the marketers (50%) are gearing up to boost their content marketing budgets in 2024.
• A notable 15% of companies are in the dark about their content marketing expenditure.
• There’s been a 10% reduction in the outsourcing of content marketing tasks over the past year.
• The most frequently outsourced job in content marketing is writing, with 81% of companies hiring external writers.
• In the B2C sector, 27% of content marketing teams have expanded in size over the last year.
• On average, marketers allocate 26% of their entire marketing budget to content marketing.
• A substantial 80% of companies are planning to increase their budgets for digital marketing.
• About 24% of organizations allocate half or more of their total budget specifically to content marketing.
• A significant 72% of marketers believe that a well-crafted content strategy is crucial for marketing success.
• Consumers Enjoy Content Marketing 90% of customers acknowledge that their purchasing choices are swayed by online reviews.
• Nearly half (46%) of shoppers consider bloggers’ recommendations when making purchasing decisions.
• For news, business, and lifestyle updates, the 18-24 age group prefers search engines over Facebook, with 56% using search engines compared to 54% using Facebook.
• A staggering 99% of email users check their inbox daily, with some individuals checking as often as 20 times a day.
• 68% of consumers report a more favorable view of a brand after engaging with its content.
• B2B:Preferred content types among B2B buyers include case studies (79%), webinars (66%), videos (49%), and interactive content (36%).
• B2C:Areas seeing increased budget allocation include content creation (56%) and paid content distribution (37%).
• 78% of consumers feel that a brand is more helpful after they read its content.
• Post-engagement with brand content, 64% of consumers find the brand more trustworthy.
• Consumers are 131% more likely to purchase from a brand after reading its content.
• 68% of consumers actively read about brands that capture their interest.
• 60% of consumers enjoy engaging with content that is relevant to them from various brands.
• 65% of decision-makers are likely to visit a marketer’s website after watching a brand-focused video.
• After viewing a video focused on a brand, 64% of viewers are more inclined to make an online purchase.
• 60% of consumers are motivated to seek out a product after reading about it.
• 70% of consumers prefer discovering a company through articles rather than through advertisements.
• 82% of consumers develop a more positive view of a company after reading its custom content.
• 61% of consumers are more likely to purchase from companies that offer custom content.
• 78% of consumers feel a sense of relationship with companies that provide custom content.
• 70% of consumers feel a closer connection to a company as a result of its content marketing efforts.
• 79% of online shoppers dedicate half of their shopping time to product research.
• Before engaging with a sales representative, 47% of buyers review 3-5 pieces of content.
• 95% of B2B consumers rely on content as a trustworthy source for evaluating companies.
• 90% of consumers admit that content plays a role in their purchasing decisions.
• 48% of marketers create dedicated content for 3-5 different stages of the buying process.
• Content Marketing ROI and Social Media 60% of content marketers gauge the effectiveness of their social media strategies by tracking sales outcomes.
• In the realm of Visual Content Marketing, a striking 91% express satisfaction with the return on investment from video marketing on social media platforms.
• A substantial 72% of professionals agree that content marketing plays a crucial role in boosting engagement.
• 30% of experts believe social media channels are the most effective in driving website traffic.
• An overwhelming majority of 94% of B2B marketers utilize LinkedIn for disseminating their content.
• Among the pioneers in content marketing, 91% actively use LinkedIn in their strategies.
• A significant 94% express intentions to buy from a business they follow on X.
• ROI of Podcasting as Part of Content Marketing Strategy In the B2B sector, 64% of professionals find podcasts to be a highly valuable resource during the initial stages of their purchasing journey.
• A striking 80% of podcast listeners can recall brands that are advertised during the podcast episodes.
• Furthermore, 67% of these listeners remember specific product features or promotions mentioned in the podcasts.
• More than half of the audience (51%) show a greater inclination to purchase from brands they hear about in podcasts.
• Looking ahead, 29% of marketers are planning to boost their investment in long-form video content, while a significant 51% are focusing on increasing their investment in short-form video content.
• A substantial 75% of marketers report experiencing a more favorable return on investment (ROI) with visual content.
• The satisfaction rate with video marketing ROI stands high, with 83% of marketers content with the results.
• Incorporating video content on websites can potentially skyrocket conversion rates by an impressive 80%.
• Email campaigns that integrate video content witness a remarkable 96% higher click-through rate compared to those without video content.
• 5% of individuals searching on Google select the very first result that appears.
• The top three listings in Google search results capture a whopping 75% of all clicks.
• A significant 70% of online experiences begin with a user conducting a search.
• Google dominates the global search market, handling more than 90% of all search queries online.
• 70% of respondents believe that SEO strategies yield better sales outcomes compared to PPC (Pay-Per-Click) advertising.
• For 59% of B2C marketers, the creation of high-quality content stands as the most effective SEO technique.
• 52% of marketers recognize that content marketing has positively influenced their search engine rankings.
• Organic search plays a major role in how content is discovered, accounting for 51% of content consumption.
• Content Marketing Strategy and Challenges 44% of marketers identify content production as their most significant hurdle.
• A notable 46% of content marketers who don’t achieve their desired success fail to perform content audits.
• A substantial 69% of content is tailored specifically for the initial stage of the sales funnel.
• A surprising 80% of the content crafted by marketing teams is not utilized by their sales counterparts.
• Nearly half (42%) of B2B marketers consider themselves proficient in content marketing.
• 60% of marketers are dedicated to producing at least one content piece daily.
• Almost half (45%) of content marketers adhere to a weekly publishing schedule, ensuring regular content distribution.
• Email Marketing When it comes to Email Content Marketing, 62% of marketers track the ROI of their email marketing initiatives.
• For B2C organizations, email content marketing ranks as the second most popular method, with a substantial 74% adoption rate.
• Incorporating personalization in email subject lines can dramatically enhance open rates, showing an impressive 50% increase.
• Within the first hour of dispatch, 22% of email campaigns successfully capture the recipient’s attention, leading to them being opened.
• A staggering 85% of all email traffic is attributed to spam, highlighting a significant challenge in digital communication.
• A major cybersecurity concern is that 94% of malware finds its way to victims through email.
• Fridays stand out as the most effective day for email marketing, with the highest open rates nearing 19%.
• Conversely, Saturdays are the least effective for email campaigns, experiencing the lowest open rates at just 17%.
• Employing personas to refine email personalization can lead to a 10% increase in conversions and a 14% boost in email click-through rates.
• 76% of B2B buyers consider whitepapers a critical tool in their decision-making process.
• Interactive content is successful in generating conversions 70% of the time.
• By 2020, it was anticipated that 85% of customer interactions with businesses would occur without any human involvement.
• 47% of millennials place greater trust in financial services companies that produce valuable content.
• 86% of entrepreneurs report that publishing a book has been instrumental in growing their business.
• 26% of B2C organizations lack a dedicated individual for managing content marketing.
• 87% of B2C brands utilize website traffic as a key metric to assess content performance.
• Webinars are the most favored type of content among B2B buyers, with a preference rate of 57%.
• Nearly half (50%) of buyers view product videos prior to making a purchase.
• 67% of consumers admit that the quality of product images is a significant factor influencing their buying decisions.
• There’s been a 14% decrease in investment in paid content distribution, now at 67%, down from 81%.
• Essential Financial Services Digital Marketing Statistics in 2024 • ZipDo: 3% of total digital ad spending, making it the second-largest industry spender.
• 3% of total digital ad expenditures, the US financial services industry firmly secures its position as the second-largest industry spender.
• Digital marketing in financial services can see a return on investment (ROI) of over 32%.
• The remarkable statistic highlighting a return on investment (ROI) of over 32% for digital marketing in financial services underscores the pivotal role that digital campaigns play in this sector.
• With every ROI percentage point crucial for financial success, this 32% breakthrough showcases the undeniable value and necessity of embracing digital marketing in the financial services sphere.
• Nearly 80% of consumers use a mobile app for financial services or banking activities.
• 46% of financial advisors acquire new clients through social media marketing.
• In the realm of Financial Services Digital Marketing Statistics, the revelation that 46% of financial advisors successfully acquire new clients through social media marketing demonstrates the powerful impact of online platforms in shaping client relationships and driving business growth.
• 81% of financial service providers reported digital transformation progress in 2020.
• In the midst of an ever-evolving digital landscape, the astounding revelation that 81% of financial service providers embarked upon their digital transformation journey in 2020 showcases the accelerating need for financial service businesses to innovate and adapt.
• 47% of financial advisors plan to increase their spending on digital marketing in 2021.
• As we dive into the realm of financial services digital marketing, the striking figure of 47% of financial advisors gearing up to amplify their digital marketing investments in 2021 truly underlines a significant shift.
• 87% of millennials trust their financial service provider’s advice when gained through personalized digital experiences.
• In the realm of financial services digital marketing, the statistic – 87% of millennials placing their trust in personalized digital experiences provided by their financial service providers – speaks volumes.
• Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates three times as many leads for financial services providers.
• An impressive shift in marketing strategy, content marketing trims the budget by a substantial 62% compared to traditional methods, while simultaneously tripling lead generation.
• 95% of financial service marketers said they would prioritize video content in their digital marketing strategy.
• Around 63% of financial services providers currently use data-driven marketing strategies.
• Diving into the realm of financial services digital marketing, one cannot overlook the compelling statistic that approximately 63% of providers have embraced data-driven marketing strategies.
• 70% of financial service providers will invest heavily in digital channels to improve the customer experience by 2021.
• With a resounding 70% predicted to significantly invest in digital channels for enhancing customer experience by 2021, the message is crystal clear – adapt or be left behind in the competitive world of finance.
• 75% of financial service providers consider the customer journey as a top priority in digital transformation.
• With a staggering 75% of providers placing the customer journey at the forefront of their digital transformation, this statistic crystallizes the shifting sands of the financial ecosystem.
• 33%, this statistic not only gauges the effectiveness of emails in generating user engagement but also reveals the intrinsic affinity of potential clients towards financial service providers’ offerings.
• 33% signifies that their email endeavors are striking a chord, enticing readers to click for more information.
• 33% CTR stands as a testament to the potential of targeted, well-crafted emails to convert leads, foster brand loyalty, and contribute to business growth.
• In Q1 2020, mobile app downloads for Finance apps increased by 15% from the previous quarter, reaching 5.
• The remarkable surge of 15% in mobile app downloads for Finance apps during Q1 2020, culminating in a staggering 5.
• 93% of financial service executives believe digital channels will help personalize their clients’ experiences.
• Imagine a world where a staggering 93% of financial service executives are convinced that digital channels have the potential to tailor their clients’ experiences like never before.
• 74% of financial service providers using marketing automation have doubled their conversion rates.
• Undeniably, the staggering revelation that 74% of financial service providers employing marketing automation strategies have managed to double their conversion rates serves as a testament to the unparalleled power of digitization in revolutionizing the financial services landscape.
• Financial services companies experience a 50% higher conversion rate with mobile-responsive digital marketing campaigns compared to non-responsive designs.
• Amidst this landscape, one exceptional statistic stands as a beacon of enlightenment:Financial service companies that craft mobile-responsive digital marketing campaigns are claiming a conversion rate advantage, outshining their counterparts with non-responsive designs by an astonishing 50%.
• 89% of marketers in finance say email marketing results in increased client engagement and better retention.
• Delving into the realm of financial services digital marketing statistics, one cannot overlook the compelling figure that 89% of marketers in finance attribute higher client engagement and improved retention to email marketing.
• Nearly 80% of consumers use a mobile app for financial services or banking activities.
• 46% of financial advisors acquire new clients through social media marketing.
• 81% of financial service providers reported digital transformation progress in 2020.
• 47% of financial advisors plan to increase their spending on digital marketing in 2021.
• 87% of millennials trust their financial service provider’s advice when gained through personalized digital experiences.
• Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates three times as many leads for financial services providers.
• 95% of financial service marketers said they would prioritize video content in their digital marketing strategy.
• Around 63% of financial services providers currently use data-driven marketing strategies.
• 70% of financial service providers will invest heavily in digital channels to improve the customer experience by 2021.
• 75% of financial service providers consider the customer journey as a top priority in digital transformation.
• In Q1 2020, mobile app downloads for Finance apps increased by 15% from the previous quarter, reaching 5.
• 93% of financial service executives believe digital channels will help personalize their clients’ experiences.
• 74% of financial service providers using marketing automation have doubled their conversion rates.
• 89% of marketers in finance say email marketing results in increased client engagement and better retention.
• 3% of total digital ad spending, making it the second-largest industry spender.
• 3% of total digital ad expenditures, the US financial services industry firmly secures its position as the second-largest industry spender.
• Digital marketing in financial services can see a return on investment (ROI) of over 32%.
• The remarkable statistic highlighting a return on investment (ROI) of over 32% for digital marketing in financial services underscores the pivotal role that digital campaigns play in this sector.
• With every ROI percentage point crucial for financial success, this 32% breakthrough showcases the undeniable value and necessity of embracing digital marketing in the financial services sphere.
• Nearly 80% of consumers use a mobile app for financial services or banking activities.
• 46% of financial advisors acquire new clients through social media marketing.
• In the realm of Financial Services Digital Marketing Statistics, the revelation that 46% of financial advisors successfully acquire new clients through social media marketing demonstrates the powerful impact of online platforms in shaping client relationships and driving business growth.
• 81% of financial service providers reported digital transformation progress in 2020.
• In the midst of an ever-evolving digital landscape, the astounding revelation that 81% of financial service providers embarked upon their digital transformation journey in 2020 showcases the accelerating need for financial service businesses to innovate and adapt.
• 47% of financial advisors plan to increase their spending on digital marketing in 2021.
• As we dive into the realm of financial services digital marketing, the striking figure of 47% of financial advisors gearing up to amplify their digital marketing investments in 2021 truly underlines a significant shift.
• 87% of millennials trust their financial service provider’s advice when gained through personalized digital experiences.
• In the realm of financial services digital marketing, the statistic – 87% of millennials placing their trust in personalized digital experiences provided by their financial service providers – speaks volumes.
• Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates three times as many leads for financial services providers.
• An impressive shift in marketing strategy, content marketing trims the budget by a substantial 62% compared to traditional methods, while simultaneously tripling lead generation.
• 95% of financial service marketers said they would prioritize video content in their digital marketing strategy.
• In the realm of financial services digital marketing, a striking revelation has emerged from the voices of industry insiders – a sweeping 95% of financial service marketers underscore the importance of video content as the centerpiece of their digital marketing strategies.
• Around 63% of financial services providers currently use data-driven marketing strategies.
• Diving into the realm of financial services digital marketing, one cannot overlook the compelling statistic that approximately 63% of providers have embraced data-driven marketing strategies.
• 70% of financial service providers will invest heavily in digital channels to improve the customer experience by 2021.
• With a resounding 70% predicted to significantly invest in digital channels for enhancing customer experience by 2021, the message is crystal clear – adapt or be left behind in the competitive world of finance.
• 75% of financial service providers consider the customer journey as a top priority in digital transformation.
• With a staggering 75% of providers placing the customer journey at the forefront of their digital transformation, this statistic crystallizes the shifting sands of the financial ecosystem.
• 33%, this statistic not only gauges the effectiveness of emails in generating user engagement but also reveals the intrinsic affinity of potential clients towards financial service providers’ offerings.
• 33% signifies that their email endeavors are striking a chord, enticing readers to click for more information.
• 33% CTR stands as a testament to the potential of targeted, well-crafted emails to convert leads, foster brand loyalty, and contribute to business growth.
• In Q1 2020, mobile app downloads for Finance apps increased by 15% from the previous quarter, reaching 5.
• The remarkable surge of 15% in mobile app downloads for Finance apps during Q1 2020, culminating in a staggering 5.
• 93% of financial service executives believe digital channels will help personalize their clients’ experiences.
• Imagine a world where a staggering 93% of financial service executives are convinced that digital channels have the potential to tailor their clients’ experiences like never before.
• 74% of financial service providers using marketing automation have doubled their conversion rates.
• Undeniably, the staggering revelation that 74% of financial service providers employing marketing automation strategies have managed to double their conversion rates serves as a testament to the unparalleled power of digitization in revolutionizing the financial services landscape.
• Financial services companies experience a 50% higher conversion rate with mobile-responsive digital marketing campaigns compared to non-responsive designs.
• Amidst this landscape, one exceptional statistic stands as a beacon of enlightenment:Financial service companies that craft mobile-responsive digital marketing campaigns are claiming a conversion rate advantage, outshining their counterparts with non-responsive designs by an astonishing 50%.
• 89% of marketers in finance say email marketing results in increased client engagement and better retention.
• Delving into the realm of financial services digital marketing statistics, one cannot overlook the compelling figure that 89% of marketers in finance attribute higher client engagement and improved retention to email marketing.
• Content Marketing ROI Statistics:How to Monetize Your Content: Though marketers may have a general sense that content contributes to their company’s bottom line, a staggering 49% don’t understand how their content is performing, according to a recent Parse.
• One survey found that 79% of customers said that UGC influences their purchase decision.
• 100+ Latest Content Marketing Statistics for 2023: 81% of the least effective businesses don’t have a recorded content marketing strategy, compared to 64% of top performers.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2022) 81% of marketers view content as a core business strategy (Content Marketing Institute, 2021).
• Source:SEOwind Content Marketing Strategy Statistics 2024 90% of our respondents say that content marketing is part of their marketing strategy, and 66% say this strategy is documented—that’s compared to 57% who documented their strategy in 2022.
• (Semrush, 2023) Source:SEOwind 80% of those who considered themselves very successful in content marketing in 2022 have documented their content marketing strategies, as do 73% of content marketers who regard their efforts as successful.
• 46% of those surveyed considered SEO as having the greatest impact, whereas 45% publishing more content.
• Updating and repurposing existing content was mentioned by 38% of respondents as a success factor.
• (Semrush, 2023) Source:SEOwind 83% of marketers say it’s better to focus on quality rather than quantity of content, even if it means posting less often (Hubspot, 2022) 55% of marketers say creating more content and posting more often helped most with ranking their content organically.
• The second tactic that contributed to higher rankings was improving the quality of their content (53%), which was followed by creating more research-driven content (37%).
• Marketers reported also following tactics to contribute to boosting ranking:paying more attention to keyword research (36%), analyzing search intent for their content (35%), and improving technical SEO on their website (30%).
• 83% of marketers report that using content marketing in the last 12 months helped them create brand awareness (a 3% increase since last year), 77% build credibility and 72% educate the audience (2% increase each).
• Creating more content faster (and finding resources for it) is perceived as a challenge by 38% of research participants, and generating content ideas and generating enough traffic with the content by 35%.
• (Semrush, 2023) Source:SEOwind Creating content that appeals to different stages of the buyer’s journey is named the top current content marketing challenge by 61% of respondents.
• (Statista, 2023) The top five areas of investment for 2022 are video (69%), events (digital, in-person, hybrid) (61%), owned-media assets (57%), paid media (55%), and social media management /community-building (39%).
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2021) Source:Content Marketing Institute Content Marketing Team Statistics 2024 42% of companies have one to three specialists whereas 21% lack a content marketing person or team entirely.
• Source:Semrush 48% of companies were expected to grow their content team in 2022 (Semrush, 2022) Source:Semrush 59% of companies reported having 1-5 employees dedicated to content marketing.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2022) Source:Content Marketing Institute Content Marketing Outsourcing Statistics 2024 Companies outsource to freelance writers with reputable brands coming from referrals (47%).
• Digital marketing and content marketing agencies are in second place, with a result of 27%.
• Freelancers that provide their writing services on popular gig sites are the choice of 17% of respondents, and AI writing tools are in last place, but with a noteworthy result of 12% of votes.
• (Semrush, 2021) Source:Semrush When choosing a content provider, providing in-depth, high-quality content is the most important trait (44% of respondents).
• Reasonable prices also often prove to be a deciding factor (40% of respondents).
• 53% of respondents report having difficulty finding writers with experience while 41.
• Source:Semrush 75% of large companies outsource content marketing (Content Marketing Institute, 2021).
• About 50% of all B2B marketers said they outsource content marketing activities, and 65% said their biggest challenge is finding partners with adequate subject matter expertise.
• Videos and blog posts proved the most useful for 37% and 36% of companies, respectively.
• While success stories offered the best results for 22% of respondents, no other format type was reported as most valuable by more than 16% of organizations.
• Short articles and posts were the most common over the past year, with 89% of respondents reporting creation and use.
• Videos are also in high demand (75% of respondents), while case studies round out the top three (67%).
• Source:Content Marketing Institute B2B Content Assets That Produced the Best Results in the Last 12 Months (Content Marketing Institute, 2022) The impact of B2B content assets provides less clarity, with seven options delivering top results for 36-48% of respondents.
• Events scored high, with in-person gatherings reported as most valuable by 48% of businesses and digital options right behind at 47%.
• 12%) clearly joins these two as a core pillar of good content as the only other option selected by over 50% of organizations.
• 51% of content marketers use organic traffic as a key metric for measuring content success, 42% search rankings, and 40% leads.
• While no other option cracked the 20% threshold, four others were within 10% of the leader.
• Source:HubSpot Of marketers surveyed, 86% measure the success of their content based on website traffic, email engagement (83%), website engagement (83%), or conversions (79%).
• 45% indicated that overall engagement rose while 43% saw increased rankings or traffic.
• Only 11% indicated that nothing changed while even smaller numbers experienced a negative change, demonstrating the value of these updates.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2022) 48% of companies that have a content marketing strategy leverage blogging.
• (WordPress, 2022) 80% of surveyed bloggers report that their blog delivers “some results” or “strong results.
• ” (Orbit Media, 2022) 26% of bloggers say that blogging drives strong marketing results for their business.
• (Orbit Media, 2022) While most bloggers produce articles in the 500 – 2000 word range, a small minority of just 4% of bloggers write long-form posts of 3000 words or more.
• (Orbit Media, 2022) Source:Orbit Media 42% of bloggers create content around original research.
• Bloggers who conduct and publish original research are 41% more likely to report strong results.
• 36% of bloggers who spend more than 6 hours on writing a post report “strong results.
• ” (Orbit Media, 2022) The most popular blog content format is how-to articles (76%), followed by list-style posts (55%).
• The bloggers who publish 2-6 times per week are 50% more likely to report strong results.
• (Orbit Media, 2022) Source:Orbit Media 47% of bloggers typically include two or three images in their posts.
• (HubSpot, 2020) Long articles/posts stood out as an area where those who are most successful reported better results than respondents overall (43% vs.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2022) On average, content marketers reported that 53% of the content they create is for the middle of the funnel.
• Only 35% of the content they create is for the top of the funnel, 25% for retention, and 22% for the bottom of the funnel.
• 5 times (Semrush, 2022) Articles with seven or fewer words in their H1 get 36% more organic traffic on average than those with 14 or more words.
• (Semrush, 2022) 47% of articles that have an advanced headings structure (H2 + H3 + H4) belong to the highest-performing organic content group (Semrush, 2022) While the most common article type had only H2 tags, 28% of the blog posts in the high-performance group have H2s and H3s.
• (Semrush, 2023) 35% of articles with no H2 are low-performing (Semrush, 2023) Articles with one or two lists per 500 words get 68% more traffic than those with no lists (Semrush, 2022) Articles with 3-4 lists do better across all metrics.
• On the other hand, articles with no lists are the most common (68%)—and these underperform.
• (Semrush, 2023) Articles over 3,000 words get 138% more traffic than those with fewer than 500 words (Semrush, 2022) 78% of articles with fewer than 500 words have not been shared (Semrush, 2022) Only 16.
• (Semrush, 2023) Visual Content Marketing Statistics 2024 Adding more visuals (images and videos) to blog posts takes 3rd place among tactics that help blog posts rank higher (reported by 33% of marketers).
• (Semrush, 2023) Articles with more than seven images get 116% more organic traffic than articles containing just text.
• (Semrush, 2022) Articles with 7 or more images get the most backlinks (a percentage increase of 555% compared to those with no images) and the most unique page views (a 259% increase).
• 8% of marketers report that creating engaging visual content consistently is one of their biggest struggles.
• 4% said 91%-100% of their content contained some form of visuals (compared to 46.
• 4% of marketers used original graphics (like infographics and illustrations) for their visual content, while 33.
• (Venngage, 2022) Source:Venngage 41% said original graphics worked best for them, while only 11.
• 3% more traffic than those without, whereas articles with more than three videos generated 55% more backlinks than those with none.
• (Semrush, 2022) 87% of marketers stated that creating video content increases their website traffic (Wyzowl, 2022) Articles with at least one video also generate 70% more organic traffic than those without.
• (Semrush, 2023) 43% of respondents pointed to Short-form video formats performing best.
• (Semrush, 2023) 91% of businesses use video as a marketing tool in 2023.
• (Wyzowyl, 2023) 70% of ‘non-video-marketers’ plan to start online video marketing in 2023.
• (Wyzowyl, 2023) 95% of video marketers say that video marketing has helped them increase brand awareness, while 91% say that it has helped increase traffic.
• (Wyzowyl, 2023) 96% of people have watched an explainer video to learn more about a product or service.
• (Wyzowyl, 2023) 89% of people say watching a video has convinced them to buy a product or service.
• (Wyzowyl, 2023) According to a report by Wyzowl in 2023, 66% of marketers created live-action videos, while 57% created screen-recorded videos.
• (Wyzowyl, 2023) YouTube is the most widely used video marketing platform with 90% of video marketers trusting the world’s #1 video site.
• Next up is Facebook (86%), followed by Instagram (79%) and LinkedIn (also 79%) as a string to their video marketing bow.
• (Wyzowyl, 2023) 90% of marketers using short-form video will increase or maintain their investment next year, and 1 in 5 marketers plan to leverage short-form video for the first time in 2023.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2023) Among those who use generative AI tools, 91% use free tools (e.
• 38% use tools embedded in their content creation/management systems, and 27% pay for AI tools.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2023) About half (51%) use generative AI to brainstorm new topics.
• Many use the tools to research headlines and keywords (45%) and write drafts (45%).
• Fewer say they use AI to outline content (23%), proofread (20%), generate graphics (11%), and create audio (5%) and video (5%).
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2023) Asked if their organizations have guidelines for using generative AI tools, 31% say yes, 61% say no, and 8% are unsure.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2023) The top 3 main reasons why B2B marketers don’t use generative AI tools include accuracy concerns (36%), lack of training (27%), and lack of understanding (27%).
• 22% percent cite copyright concerns, and 19% have corporate mandates not to use them.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2023) Most Important Content Marketing Statistics according to marketing experts 28% of Marketers Use PR and Media Outreach (Semrush, 2023) Public relations is an integral part of content marketing, as it amplifies the content’s reach and impact.
• Ultimately, 28% of marketers using PR and media outreach to promote their content is a crucial statistic that marketers should know as they plan and develop their 2023 content marketing strategy, claims Gosia Hytry, Head of Content, Spacelift.
• Essential Social Media Marketing Roi Statistics in 2024 • ZipDo: The Latest Social Media Marketing Roi Statistics Unveiled 83% of marketers believe that social media marketing is vital for their business’s success.
• In the thriving landscape of social media marketing, a compelling 83% of marketers stand confident in the power of this digital platform to propel their business towards success.
• 21% of marketers have chosen LinkedIn as the most effective platform for B2B marketing.
• Delving into the realm of Social Media Marketing ROI Statistics, one cannot overlook the noteworthy finding that 21% of marketers tout LinkedIn as their champion for B2B marketing effectiveness.
• 49% of marketers cite improving sales and gaining new customers as their primary social media marketing goal.
• 45% of consumers are more likely to research a product when a brand’s employee posts about it on social media.
• Take, for instance, the enlightening statistic stating that 45% of consumers tend to research a product when they come across a brand’s employee advocating for it on social media.
• Around 89% of B2B marketers use content marketing, 76% of them include the use of social media in their content marketing strategies.
• A massive 89% of these marketers harness the power of content marketing, with 76% of them strategically weaving social media into the mix.
• 37% of marketers see organic social media as providing high return on investment.
• Delving into the realm of Social Media Marketing ROI Statistics, one cannot overlook the staggering impact of organic social media, as corroborated by a significant 37% of marketers vouching for its high return on investment.
• Only 7% of respondents believe that their organization measures social media marketing ROI effectively.
• In a world where social media marketing continues to reign supreme, one might be taken aback to discover a mere 7% of respondents have faith in their organization’s aptitude to effectively measure social media marketing ROI.
• 2% interaction rate per follower, a figure that surpasses Facebook’s meager 0.
• The compelling statistic revealing 80% of companies relying on this powerful platform to bolster their customer-centric initiatives sheds light on Twitter’s significant impact.
• In the dynamic world of social media marketing, where allocating resources effectively is paramount, one intriguing statistic emerges:a staggering 89% of marketing messages fall by the wayside, unnoticed by the target audience.
• In essence, perfecting the art of reaching and engaging the remaining 11% becomes crucial for maximizing desirable results.
• Only then can they harness the untapped potential of those elusive, yet highly lucrative, 11%.
• Instagram advertising influence has grown at 28%, while Facebook’s has maintained at 26% throughout 2021.
• One striking revelation from recent data showcases Instagram’s advertising prowess growing at an impressive 28%, outpacing Facebook, which held steady at 26% throughout 2021.
• Over 85% of marketers find success with social media marketing integrated with video content.
• The staggering 85% success rate attests to the undeniable prowess of this mighty duo, providing marketers with the ultimate recipe for stratospheric social media ROI.
• 46% of marketers have a documented strategy for managing social media marketing ROI.
• Delving into the numbers, we uncover that a significant 46% of marketers ensure their monetary gains are maximized by employing a documented strategy for managing social media marketing ROI.
• 82% of small businesses specifically choose Facebook as their desired marketing platform.
• Diving into the world of social media marketing, one might be intrigued to discover that a staggering 82% of small businesses consciously favor Facebook as their go-to hub for promotional endeavors.
• 21% of marketers have chosen LinkedIn as the most effective platform for B2B marketing.
• 49% of marketers cite improving sales and gaining new customers as their primary social media marketing goal.
• 45% of consumers are more likely to research a product when a brand’s employee posts about it on social media.
• Around 89% of B2B marketers use content marketing, 76% of them include the use of social media in their content marketing strategies.
• 37% of marketers see organic social media as providing high return on investment.
• Only 7% of respondents believe that their organization measures social media marketing ROI effectively.
• Instagram advertising influence has grown at 28%, while Facebook’s has maintained at 26% throughout 2021.
• Over 85% of marketers find success with social media marketing integrated with video content.
• 46% of marketers have a documented strategy for managing social media marketing ROI.
• 82% of small businesses specifically choose Facebook as their desired marketing platform.
• The Latest Social Media Marketing Roi Statistics Unveiled 83% of marketers believe that social media marketing is vital for their business’s success.
• In the thriving landscape of social media marketing, a compelling 83% of marketers stand confident in the power of this digital platform to propel their business towards success.
• 21% of marketers have chosen LinkedIn as the most effective platform for B2B marketing.
• Delving into the realm of Social Media Marketing ROI Statistics, one cannot overlook the noteworthy finding that 21% of marketers tout LinkedIn as their champion for B2B marketing effectiveness.
• 49% of marketers cite improving sales and gaining new customers as their primary social media marketing goal.
• 45% of consumers are more likely to research a product when a brand’s employee posts about it on social media.
• Take, for instance, the enlightening statistic stating that 45% of consumers tend to research a product when they come across a brand’s employee advocating for it on social media.
• Around 89% of B2B marketers use content marketing, 76% of them include the use of social media in their content marketing strategies.
• A massive 89% of these marketers harness the power of content marketing, with 76% of them strategically weaving social media into the mix.
• 37% of marketers see organic social media as providing high return on investment.
• Delving into the realm of Social Media Marketing ROI Statistics, one cannot overlook the staggering impact of organic social media, as corroborated by a significant 37% of marketers vouching for its high return on investment.
• Only 7% of respondents believe that their organization measures social media marketing ROI effectively.
• In a world where social media marketing continues to reign supreme, one might be taken aback to discover a mere 7% of respondents have faith in their organization’s aptitude to effectively measure social media marketing ROI.
• 2% interaction rate per follower, a figure that surpasses Facebook’s meager 0.
• The compelling statistic revealing 80% of companies relying on this powerful platform to bolster their customer-centric initiatives sheds light on Twitter’s significant impact.
• In the dynamic world of social media marketing, where allocating resources effectively is paramount, one intriguing statistic emerges:a staggering 89% of marketing messages fall by the wayside, unnoticed by the target audience.
• In essence, perfecting the art of reaching and engaging the remaining 11% becomes crucial for maximizing desirable results.
• Only then can they harness the untapped potential of those elusive, yet highly lucrative, 11%.
• Instagram advertising influence has grown at 28%, while Facebook’s has maintained at 26% throughout 2021.
• One striking revelation from recent data showcases Instagram’s advertising prowess growing at an impressive 28%, outpacing Facebook, which held steady at 26% throughout 2021.
• Over 85% of marketers find success with social media marketing integrated with video content.
• The staggering 85% success rate attests to the undeniable prowess of this mighty duo, providing marketers with the ultimate recipe for stratospheric social media ROI.
• 46% of marketers have a documented strategy for managing social media marketing ROI.
• Delving into the numbers, we uncover that a significant 46% of marketers ensure their monetary gains are maximized by employing a documented strategy for managing social media marketing ROI.
• 82% of small businesses specifically choose Facebook as their desired marketing platform.
• Diving into the world of social media marketing, one might be intrigued to discover that a staggering 82% of small businesses consciously favor Facebook as their go-to hub for promotional endeavors.
• Content Marketing Statistics & Facts (2023) — Redline Digital: Studies confirm its extensive reach and influence – 90% of organizations market with content.
• Visual content is hugely important, with 50%+ % of content consumption coming from organic search.
• These eye-opening statistics illustrate the importance of content marketing:About 89% of global search traffic comes from Google.
• Organic search (17%) and social media (16%) comprise the top three website traffic sources.
• Organic search traffic is the most widely used metric for gauging content success, tracked by over 50% of marketers.
• 88% of marketers have successfully reached their goals of creating awareness and building trust and credibility through content marketing.
• 63% of content marketers use their content strategy to build loyalty with their existing customers.
• 75% of surveyed said data-backed content was more trustworthy than content without data.
• 76% of bloggers write how-to-articles, the most comment type of content type.
• The bloggers who publish 2-6 times per week are 50% more likely to report strong results.
• 41% of bloggers create content based on original research rather than reporting on others’ findings.
• Bloggers who check Analytics for every article are 78% more likely to report strong results.
• Businesses that blog see lead growth of 165% compared to companies that don’t, which only see a 73% lead growth.
• 55% of consumers feel that businesses, rather than governments, play a more vital role in building a better future.
• 84% of survey participants think that companies and brands should communicate honestly about their commitments and promises, and 38% believe that companies indeed communicate honestly about their commitments and promises.
• Bloggers who check Analytics for every article are 78% more likely to report strong results.
• Some compelling statistics:68% of online experiences begin with a search query.
• 8% of link builders say link quality is more important than link quantity.
• 7% of SEOs consider link building an important part of their SEO strategy.
• 6% of domains have reciprocal links, meaning that some of the sites they link to also link to them.
• In a survey of content marketers, 66% consider thought leadership a “top priority” for their marketing organization.
• 71% of survey respondents said that purely educational content can be thought leadership.
• In thought leadership, expertise is what’s important, according to 68% of survey respondents.
• 65% of marketers surveyed say internal executives have been effective at increasing the influence of the brand.
• In the same study, over 70% agree that their customers rely on advice from industry experts and insiders.
• Here are the latest trends and numbers in content marketing:54% of businesses will increase their content marketing budgets this year.
• 66% of very successful content marketing teams have over four specialists, while only 32% of unsuccessful teams have more than four specialists.
• Only 12% of marketers currently use voice search tactics as part of their strategy.
• 19% of businesses using AI content generation tools report a successful content strategy.
• 24% of businesses not using AI content generation tools also report a very successful content strategy.
• By 2025, 30% of outbound marketing messages from large organizations will be synthetically generated, up from less than 2% in 2022.
• Only 66% of B2B marketers frequently prioritize their audience’s needs over their sales message when creating content.
• 91% of marketing pros Semrush surveyed succeeded with their content marketing in 2021.
• According to HubSpot, organic search accounts for 17% of website traffic, second only to direct at 22%.
• Businesses that blog see 165% more lead growth compared to non-blogging businesses.
• 71% said purely educational, expert-led content can be thought leadership.
• 73% of SEOs say link building is an important part of their SEO strategy.
• Very – about 74% of domains have reciprocal links where sites they link to also link back.
• Top 10 Content Marketing Statistics: The most engaging content marketing statistics are listed below:82% of marketers say they are actively investing in content marketing, 10% say they aren’t, and 8% need to figure out if their organization does (HubSpot).
• 64% of the most effective B2B marketers have a defined content marketing plan, compared to 40% of all B2B marketers (Content Marketing Institute).
• With a 7% rise over the previous year, 67% of marketers claim that content marketing creates demand or leads.
• Also, according to 72% of marketers and 63% of CMI respondents, content marketing helps to educate the audience and foster loyalty among current clients and customers.
• 73% of respondents say they scan blog content, compared to 27% who read it thoroughly (HubSpot).
• 51% of companies that use content marketing regularly provide new content (The Manifest).
• A majority (44%) of respondents indicate they typically consume three to five pieces of content before engaging with a vendor, even though 32% of respondents claim they are overwhelmed by the volume of content accessible (DemandGen).
• 81% of marketers consider content a fundamental business strategy (CMI).
• According to Content Marketing Institute (CMI), 80% of content marketers use case studies in their content marketing strategy.
• Here are some statistics you have to know about B2B content marketing:83% of B2B content marketers focus on creating good quality content, making them see themselves separated from competitors.
• (CMI) The top 3 content benefits, used by B2B, involve 89% short articles, 67% case studies, and 75% videos.
• (CMI) 95% of B2B buyers say they viewed content as their trust label during decision-making.
• (Ziflow) Of B2B marketers, about 84% said they are most likely to outsource content creation.
• (Backlinko) With 48% of B2B marketers citing them as their most successful content asset over the past 12 months, in-person events are returning.
• The statistics data to understand B2C content marketing:65% of B2C content marketers say they put their audience requirements before the sales goals.
• (CMI) The top 3 content assets they developed include 61% videos, 51% infographics, and 83% short articles.
• (CMI) B2C content marketers who prefer non-paid social media platforms outlined 62% for Facebook, 39% for Instagram, and 53% for LinkedIn have produced the best content overall.
• How-tos and expert interviews were the most popular categories of video content (38% and 37%, respectively).
• (CMI) With 88% utilization, Facebook was the most popular social media site for B2B brands.
• (CMI) When developing content, 73% of B2C marketers use keyword research for SEO (CMI).
• These data on digital content marketing demonstrate the effectiveness of content marketing:Only 4% of marketing professionals actually track ROI for periods longer than six months.
• (HubSpot) According to 72% of marketers, increasing consumer involvement, and a rise in leads are two indicators of content marketing ROI.
• (Semrush) While 65% of failing firms do not, 72% of successful brands track the ROI of their content marketing.
• Here are some of the most recent statistics on content and SEO:Content generation is the SEO strategy that marketers say performs the best, according to 72% of them.
• (OptinMonster) On the other hand, SEO was cited as their best-performing content strategy by 75% of marketers.
• (Semrush) On Google, less than 90% of websites receive organic search traffic.
• (Ahrefs) Before making a purchase, more than half (53%) of internet customers look up information on a brand or product.
• (Google) According to 46% of respondents, SEO was the second-most successful strategy for enhancing content marketing in the previous year.
• The main advantage of content marketing is that it costs 62% less compared to traditional marketing.
• Almost 55% of the B2B companies have invested in tracking and calculating the ROI and are proven successful.
• A study shows that 95% of the people only look at the results on page 1 in SERP.
• In addition, a whopping 75% of marketers believe SEO tactics are their main content marketing strategy.
• SEO is responsible for 61% of the traffic and leads generated for your brand.
• 76% of B2B marketers blog, and those who blog experience 97% additional links to their site.
• About 92% of marketers consider video content to be one of the important marketing strategies.
• Regarding generating leads, around 74% of marketers agree that video content marketing is a better option.
• Did you know the average attention span of readers dropped to 8 seconds, and more than 55% of the pages get viewed for less than 15 seconds?
• Visual images are very important for your content that about 69% of the marketers deem them “necessary”.
• The total amount spent on mobile ads is about $290 billion, with a CAGR of 21%.
• More than 86% of companies include UGC to be an effective part of their marketing strategy.
• 100+ Fresh Digital Marketing Statistics for 2021: Digital Marketing Statistics 58% of marketers say increasing sales or bringing in leads is their most important indicator of success.
• (Campaign Monitor, 2018) Strategy Marketers with a documented strategy are 313% more likely to report success.
• (CoSchedule, 2019) 45% of organizations don’t have a clearly defined digital marketing strategy.
• (ClickZ, 2019) 78% of global direct brand marketers believe digital marketing is important to their overall marketing efforts.
• (Statista, 2019) Only 22% of marketing departments have clarity on the themes of innovation that drive growth in their company.
• (The House of Marketing, 2019) More than 70% of advertisers see their ads as relevant, but only 8% of people think the ads they see online are.
• (Adobe Analysis, 2018) Investment Fewer than 10% of marketers plan to invest in chatbots, AI, live video, and influencer marketing in the coming year.
• (Campaign Monitor, 2018) 15% of the total digital media advertising revenue is attributed to affiliate marketing.
• (FocusVision, 2020) 91% of marketers use content marketing, but only 9% are fully satisfied with their strategy and 38% consider it to be an average one.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2020) The top 3 types of content B2B marketers use are social media content (95%), blog posts/short articles (89%), and email newsletters (81%).
• (SEMrush, 2020) 67% of content marketers cite search engine optimization as the most efficient tactic in content marketing.
• (SEMrush, 2020) Blogs & Written Content Written content is the most prevalent type of content marketing with 86% of marketers producing blog posts, 67% sending emails, 42% publishing case studies, and 36% writing success stories.
• (Orbit Media, 2020) Updating and republishing old blog posts with new content and images can increase organic traffic by as much as 106%.
• (Hubspot, 2019) In a survey by SEMrush, 67% percent of marketers reported SEO and 51% cited updating or repurposing existing content as the most effective methods for improving content performance.
• (SEMrush, 2020) Audio & Visual Content 60% of podcast listeners have purchased something from a podcast ad.
• (Midroll, 2019) 81% percent of listeners say the sometimes or always pay attention to podcast ads.
• (Edison Research, 2020) The number of monthly podcast consumers has grown by 16% year-over-year.
• (Edison Research, 2020) 40% of marketers cited original graphics, such as infographics, as the best performing type of visual content.
• (Venngage, 2020) SEO Statistics 70% of marketers see SEO as more effective than PPC.
• (SEMrush, 2019) Search Engines 68% of online experiences begin with a search engine.
• (Ahrefs, 2020) 15% of the billions of searches Google receives per day are entirely new queries that Google has not seen before.
• (Backlinko, 2019) 53% of shoppers start their product search online before entering a physical store.
• (Ahrefs, 2020) (BrightEdge, 2019) 65% of domains ranking for high-volume keywords are HTTPS.
• 0, 2020) 18% of domains ranking for high-volume keywords don’t have the keyword in the body.
• (Wistia, 2019) You’re 53% more likely to show up on the first page of Google if you have a video on your homepage.
• (Search Engine Watch, 2018) Social Media Marketing Statistics 74% of marketers worldwide are investing in social media marketing.
• (Hubspot, 2020) 72% of B2B marketers use paid social media ads/promoted posts.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2020) Half of Generation Z and 42% of Millennials identify social media as the most relevant channel.
• (Adobe Analysis, 2018) 4 in 10 internet users follow brands they like and 25% follow brands they are considering purchasing product or services from.
• (Global Web Index, 2019) 73% of consumers have been impacted by a brand’s social media presence when it comes to making a purchase decision.
• (Social Bakers Trends Report, 2019) Platforms 91% of retail brands are using at least 2 social media platforms.
• (OptinMonster, 2020) Facebook (68%) and YouTube (73%) are the most widely used online platforms among adults in the United States.
• (Pew Research Center, 2019) In 2019 LinkedIn has emerged as the most successful channel for video marketers, with an overwhelming 87% of LinkedIn video marketers describing it as an effective channel.
• (Wyzowl, 2020) 95% of B2B marketers use LinkedIn for organic content marketing.
• LinkedIn is also the top choice, at 76% for those who use paid social media platforms.
• (Pew Research Center, 2019) 53% of people who use stories in the Facebook family of apps state that they make more purchases as a result of viewing stories.
• (Pinterest Global Analysis, 2019) TikTok is ignored by most marketers, with only 5% using the platform.
• Additionally, 74% state they have no plans to use the platform for marketing in the next year.
• (Social Media Examiner Industry Report, 2020) Paid Advertising Statistics 74% of brands and 79% of marketing agencies say that PPC advertising is a huge driver for their business.
• (Hanapin Marketing, 2020) People are most likely to click on text paid search ads with a rate of 49%, in comparison to product listing ads (31%) and video ads (16%).
• (Clutch 2018) Paid Advertising Channels 73% of the paid search market belongs to Google.
• (MediaPost, 2019) Nearly two-thirds (66%) of brand marketers and agencies are extremely, very or moderately concerned about the oligopoly limiting their advertising options.
• (Google Economic Impact, 2019) The Google Display Network is able to reach 90% of internet users.
• (Backlinko, 2020) Automation 87% of marketers are using machine learning capabilities and features for bidding.
• (eMarketer, 2018) Video Marketing Statistics 83% of video marketers say video has helped them generate leads.
• (Wyzowl, 2020) 92% of marketers who use video say that it’s an important part of their marketing strategy.
• (Wyzowl, 2020) 87% of video marketers say video has increased traffic to their website.
• (eMarketer, 2019) 76% of adults and 85% of millennials have purchased a product after viewing a video.
• (Animoto, 2018) 83% individuals aged 55-64 have watched a video clip online in the past month.
• (Limelight Networks, 2019) 68% of viewers watch a video to the end if it’s less than a minute long.
• (Vidyard, 2019) Facebook videos lasting longer than one minute were watched to completion by less than 5% of viewers.
• (Social Bakers Trends Report, 2019) Email Marketing Statistics 91% of B2B marketers rated email as the channel that was most important to their overall content marketing success.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2017) 87% of B2B marketers rated email as their top content distribution channel (Content Marketing Institute, 2020) On average email marketing has a 4400% ROI.
• (OptinMonster, 2020) Triggered emails like cart abandonment emails achieve better results that the average ecommerce email – with an open rate of over 40% compared to 15%.
• (SaleCycle, 2018) As of 2020, Apple iPhone holds the largest portion of email client market share at 36% with Gmail in second at 27%.
• (Litmus Email Analytics, 2020) Only 47% of marketers are using email automation.
• (Emma, 2018) Segmentation & Personalization 28% of marketers say that audience segmentation has improved their email engagement.
• (Hubspot, 2020) 30% of email marketers that practice list segmentation see better open rates and 24% see better email deliverability, increased sales leads, and greater revenue.
• (Campaign Monitor, 2018) 70% of marketers said their highest performing emails were sent from a person, not a brand.
• (Campaign Monitor, 2019) Emails with a single CTA increased clicks 371% and sales 1617% in a case study by Marketing at Toast.
• 6 Email Marketing vs Social Media Statistics Prove Email Still Wins! –: On the other hand, social media marketing has a significantly lower ROI of 28% on average.
• The research compiled by Campaign Monitor indicates that 72% of consumers choose email to receive branded content from the company seeking their business, while just 17% of consumers choose to receive branded content via social media.
• In our survey, a huge proportion – 72% of consumers reported that they use email because they need it for their everyday life.
• Even teens, who are supposed to spurn email over social media, 75% actively use email in their daily lives.
• A large majority – 91% of consumers check their email at least once a day, while a smaller percentage – 66% of consumers use their smartphone to access social media.
• 74% of the consumers have a clear preference for email as a communication channel, even if businesses add other channels to the mix.
• ” In our email marketing survey, 60% of consumers reported that they delete an email that doesn’t look good on their smartphone.
• Even worse, 39% of consumers unsubscribe to receive emails in the future after they receive an unoptimized email on their smartphone.
• A huge proportion – 70% of consumers sign up to receive emails regarding discounts and offers.
• Another significant proportion – 55% of consumers opt-in to receive product or service information through email.
• 307 Social Media Marketing Statistics You Need to Know in 2024: 51% of US users visit Facebook several times a day, 23% visit Facebook once a day, and 26% visit Facebook less often.
• 7 out of 10 US adults use Facebook with 69% of American internet users using the social media giant.
• 74% of US Facebook users come from a high-income household earning over $75,000.
• The top 3 reasons for users to access Facebook are – keep in touch with family (88%), entertainment (33%), and news (23%).
• 78% of US users have discovered a product to purchase through Facebook.
• 5%), the lowest user base comes from senior users above the age of 65 (4.
• 94% of Facebook’s ad revenue is generated from mobile devices, which leaves only 6% from computers.
• The number of ad impressions on Facebook has increased by 37%, the average price on Facebook ads has decreased by 6%, the best of both worlds for small businesses.
• Native Facebook videos receive 72% higher interactions than Link posts on Facebook, 77% of all Facebook posts are link posts while 11% are video content.
• 85% of video views occur with the sound turned off, captions are incredibly important.
• 60 million businesses have a Facebook page, while 4 million businesses advertise on Facebook, 70% of the advertising is done outside the US.
• Although the average Facebook user has 155 friends, they consider just 28% of their friend list as genuine friends, 39% of users say they are connected to people whom they haven’t met in person.
• 21% engagement compared to pages with 1 million likes that received only 11.
• 3 times more time on Facebook via mobile devices than non-parents, 70% of parents believe they are more informed with Facebook than their parents who didn’t use Facebook.
• The first 3 seconds of a Facebook video ad provides 47% of the ad value.
• 48% of US consumers follow brands to receive discount codes and coupons.
• 46% of users unfollow a brand for posting too many promotions, while 15.
• Facebook posts that include an image receive 179% more engagement than ones without.
• 48% of people like a Facebook page for a promo code or discount coupon.
• 60% of Instagram users have discovered a new product while browsing Instagram while 62% of users have become interested in a product after viewing it on Instagram.
• There are over 25 million businesses that are active on Instagram, 80% of user accounts follow at least one business account.
• 72% of American teenagers find Instagram the 2nd most popular social platform after YouTube (85%).
• Instagram was the 4th popular social platform for American adults to receive their daily news, right behind Facebook (43%), YouTube (21%), and Twitter (12%).
• The gender distribution on Instagram is as follows – 51% of female users and 49% of male users.
• 63% of American users use Instagram daily, 21% use it weekly, and 16% use it less than a week.
• Among Americans, the top popular activates performed on Instagram are – Viewing photos (77%), watching videos (51%), sharing content with others (45%), networking (23%), news (18%), shopping (11%), and promoting business (9%).
• Instagram promotes discovery, 50% of user accounts use the ‘Explore’ option every month.
• Time spent watching an Instagram video has increased by 80% year over year, also the viewing intent of younger Instagram users has increased by 4 times.
• 56% of marketers believe that working with micro and mid-tier Instagram influencers is cost-effective.
• 50% of marketers find spotting fake followers on Instagram as the biggest challenge to the rising cost of influencers.
• American marketers plan to spend 69% of their marketing budget on Instagram, making it the top social media platform for building a marketing strategy.
• The #ad hashtag increased by 133% between 2018 to 2019 due to the number of Instagram influencers sponsoring content.
• An Instagram post can take 19 hours to receive 50% of the total engagement.
• Top brands on average gain 225 comments with 69% of comments coming after 48 hours.
• 83% of Instagram users were influenced into checking a brand out through a friend’s post.
• 85% of users access Pinterest from their mobile devices and over 50% of them live outside the United States.
• 77% of Pinterest users have discovered a new product or brand through pins, 98% of users have tried something new from Pinterest and 83% have purchased based on the content seen on Pinterest.
• Pinterest is preferred by 28% of marketers and ranks as the 6th popular social media platform for marketers after – Facebook, Instagram, LinkedIn, Twitter, and YouTube respectively.
• 41% of users have accessed Pinterest in a store while shopping for a product, 59% of users use Pinterest to find more information about their product purchases.
• 78% of shoppers believe that it’s useful to see content from brands on Pinterest.
• Unbranded searches resulted in 97% of the top 1,000 searches on Pinterest, which demonstrates Pinterest is the platform for discovery.
• 41% of high-income US households with over $75,000 in earnings used Pinterest while only 18% of low-income US households whose earnings were $30,000 or lower accessed it.
• 30% of American Pinterest users came from an urban environment, 30% came from a suburban area, and 26% came from a rural region.
• 38% of US adults that had a college degree used Pinterest while only 19% of adults that had studied till high school or less were on Pinterest.
• The ethnicity of US users on Pinterest are – White (33%), Black (27%), Hispanic (22%), and mixed/other ethnic groups (18%).
• In 2020, LinkedIn has achieved a 20% growth in revenue, a 50% increase in content shared, and an 89% increase in live streams.
• 39% of LinkedIn users pay for LinkedIn Premium, which comes in 4 tiers and costs from – $30, $60, $80, and $120 for monthly access.
• 50% of US users with a college degree use LinkedIn, while only 9% of those that have finished high-school or less have used LinkedIn.
• 45% of US LinkedIn users live in a household that earns over $75,000 a year, while 13% live in a household with a combined yearly income of less than $30,000.
• The ethnicity of US LinkedIn users is broken down as- White (26%), Black (28%), Hispanic (13), and mixed/other ethnic groups (33%).
• 30% of US LinkedIn users live in an urban environment, 27% live in a suburban area, and 13% live in a rural zone.
• 57% of users access LinkedIn from their mobile devices, 9 billion content impressions are generated on LinkedIn.
• 94% of B2B marketers use LinkedIn to promote their content and services, LinkedIn is the top social network for lead generation.
• With millions of likes, comments, shares, views, and engagement, LinkedIn has increased user engagement by 50% with each passing year.
• 60% of users are likely to engage with coworkers on LinkedIn over other connections.
• 95% of working professionals believe in friendship at work, 63% have a relationship with coworkers outside work.
• 30% of engagement from a company’s post comes from its employees who are 14 times more likely to share their company’s content over other content, posts from a regular employee are 53% more trustworthy than from the CEO.
• An ad on LinkedIn has the potential to reach up to 12% of the planet’s population.
• 70% of sales professionals are active on LinkedIn and close 51% more deals than their non-LinkedIn counterparts.
• While 89% of B2B marketers use LinkedIn for lead generation, 62% of them believe that LinkedIn generates twice the leads that other social channels do.
• 75% of buyers believe LinkedIn to be the most trusted source of information, the following 5 reasons are critical for a brand relationship – Trust (52%), Personal Relationships (45%), Responsiveness (45%), Quality Improvements (43%), and Value for Money (38%).
• 30% of recruiters utilize the advanced search tool and search by location, 40% of recruiters look for a profile with a summary that’s more than 40 more words and with increased importance towards personality.
• 50% of social traffic that is driven to B2B websites and blogs comes from LinkedIn.
• 1 million LinkedIn members have published a post on LinkedIn, with 130,000 posts being published every week and 45% of readers coming from high-ranking positions like – managers, CEOs, and VPs.
• 65% of businesses have acquired at least one customer through LinkedIn.
• LinkedIn is home to 50 million companies with 38% of marketers finding success.
• With 50% of graduates on LinkedIn, there’s never a shortage of qualified professionals to work for you.
• 85% of businesses have used video marketing as an essential marketing strategy, with video marketing replacing content marketing as the future of brand promotion, YouTube plays a key role for small businesses to gain organic traffic and make serious money.
• YouTube first launched its advertising program in August 2007, an animated overlay of the ad covered the bottom 20% of a video.
• YouTube channels that earn a 6-figure income have grown by over 40% year over year, the number of channels that earn a 5-figure income has risen by 50%.
• YouTube channels with 1 million subscribers have increased every year by 65%.
• 8 out of 10 people between the ages of 18 – 49 years access YouTube regularly with a 74% growth in YouTube viewership since 2015.
• 6 out of 10 people prefer online video platforms over television or live TV, about 50% of viewers below the age of 32 will never subscribe to a TV service by 2025.
• After Facebook, YouTube is the 2nd most popular social media platform with 79% percent of internet users having a YouTube account.
• 90% of people aged between 18 to 44 years have accessed YouTube at least once, 51% of users above the age of 75 have accessed YouTube.
• 9% of businesses have a YouTube channel to promote their products and services.
• 51% of marketers utilize YouTube ads to power their marketing campaigns, 62% of them are likely to increase their YouTube ad spend in the next year.
• YouTube receives 62% of ad time attention from its viewers while TV ads receive only 45% of user attention.
• 80% of YouTube viewers prefer the YouTube TrueView ad experience compared to the standard in-stream ads.
• 50% of online shoppers believe that online videos have helped them decide their products and brands, 90% of users have found new brands and products on YouTube, and 80% of users switch between search engines and video when product researching.
• 55% of shoppers have accessed an online video while shopping in a store, there’s a 110% growth in YouTube videos titled ‘Which [product] to buy’.
• 90% of US viewers prefer YouTube as their preferred digital video source.
• 70% of videos that people watch on YouTube are determined by a recommendation algorithm based on the user’s interests.
• 70% of all YouTube videos come from just 10% of channels, also 79% of all YouTube views go towards the top 10% of YouTube channels.
• 70% of users engage by commenting and following their favorite YouTube creator or channel.
• YouTube has made changes to their recommendation algorithm in 2019 causing a 70% reduction in videos that represent negativity, fake news, harmful misinformation, and borderline content.
• Across all genres on YouTube, 56% of screen time were by males and 44% by females.
• 81% of parents let their kids (aged 11 or younger) watch YouTube, 34% of parents report that their children access YouTube regularly.
• 51% of US users believe YouTube is important for learning things they haven’t done before, 28% of US users pass time on YouTube, 19% report using YouTube for deciding on a brand or product, and 19% use YouTube to understand events happening around the world.
• 70% of videos are recommended to them, which means a majority of your viewers didn’t intend to click on your video.
• The most popular demographic for Snapchat users are aged between 15 to 25 which are 48% of the total user base, 26-35 years are the 2nd most popular demographic at 30%, 36-45 years are 3rd with 18%, 46-55 years are 4th with 11% and users above 56 years are the least with a 5% count.
• 63% of Snapchat users return the following day to use the app, with 49% of users use the app multiple times a day, 14% use it once a day, and 36% use it less often.
• 95% of Snapchat users say they are happy to use the app and have rated Snapchat as a “feel-good” app.
• Due to large engagement, 60% of Snapchat users are likely to make impulse purchases.
• The age groups between 13-34 command a spending power of $1 trillion, hence Snapchat reaches over 90% of 13-24 age groups and 75% of 13-34 age groups in the US.
• As of October 2020, female users of Snapchat are 59% of the total user base and male users are 39%.
• 29% of American Snapchat users have a college education, 22% of users have completed at least high school, and 20% are graduates.
• 27% of American Snapchat users live in a household that earns below $30,000 a year, 26% live in a household with an annual income between $30,000 – $74,999, and 22% live in a high-income household of above $75,000 per year.
• 29% of American Snapchat users live in an urban environment, 20% live in a suburban environment, and 20% live in a rural environment.
• The ethnicity of American Snapchat users are – White (22%), Black (28%), Hispanic (29%), and mixed/other ethnic groups (21%).
• With 53% of people discovering new things to buy on Twitter, building a marketing strategy plan around tweets impact your sales greatly.
• Twitter is heavily male-centric with a ratio of 66% of male users to 34% of female users.
• The average Twitter user in the US is aged 40, while 63% of Twitter users are between 35-65 years.
• Twitter is the most preferred social app by global leaders, with over 83% of heads of state actively using it, 139 out of 167 countries have leaders with a Twitter account.
• Among US users, 80% of all tweets come from just 10% of the users, while the average American user posts 2 tweets, favorites 1 tweet, has 25 followers, and follows 89 accounts every month.
• 42% of US users used Twitter daily, while 29% used it weekly, and 29% used Twitter rarely.
• 59% of B2B marketers and 53% of B2C markets use Twitter as their social media strategy in 2020.
• Emotions that were most displayed on Twitter are as follows – Joy (31%), Disgust (21%), Sadness (16%), Fear (15%), Surprise (10%), and Anger (7%).
• Tweets with images received 150% more retweets, 18% more clicks, and 89% more Favorites.
• Brands that use Twitter had a 19% increase in customer satisfaction rate.
• Twitter is the #1 social media platform for discovery with 79% of people finding something new.
• Twitter videos have a watch time increase of year-over-year by 84%, the last 18 months have increased daily video views by 95%.
• Twitter videos between 6-15 seconds with captions performed best and increased emotional engagement by 33%.
• Twitter users are 53% more likely to buy new products upon launch and hence 67% of B2B businesses use Twitter as a digital marketing tool.
• Twitter is the place to build up hype as 53% of users buy new products on launch.
• 30% of the app’s downloads come from India with over 611 million lifetime downloads, China and US come 2nd and 3rd with 196 million and 165 million downloads respectively.
• Among the top 3 behaviors on TikTok – Watching someone else’s video is 1st with 68% engagement, liking and following someone’s video is 2nd with 63% engagement, and logging in without any activity is 3rd with 59% engagement.
• 4 million through in-app sales, it saw a 500% increase in revenue from May 2018 to April 2019.
• The top 4 trends on TikTok in 2020 are – Hashtag Challenge, Memes, Viral Food Marketing, and Influencer Marketing, Hashtag Challenge had the most user engagement with 35% of users taking part.
• 37% of US TikTok users live in a household with a combined income of over $100,000.
• TikTok thrives on entertainment and with 41% of youngsters accessing the app, it’s vital to reveal your inner personality.
• 4% by the end of 2020 and will bring in an estimated revenue of $43 billion.
• Social ad impressions have increased by 20% year over year, more people are viewing ads.
• 3% CTRs recorded among social networks in 2020, the CTR rates in 2018 were 2.
• Mobile users contribute to a majority of ad revenue, mobile ads resulted in 94% of Facebook’s advertising revenue.
• Video ads spend have increased 25% year over year, 70% of digital video advertisers use influencers on social media to advertise.
• 57% as of 2020, the top reason for abandonment by Americans was ‘Extra Costs/Shipping Fees’.
• 11% of the world’s internet users run ad blockers on their devices, which costs publishers $21.
• 8 billion in losses, the top 2 reasons for installing an adblocker were too many ads (63%) and irrelevant & annoying ads (48%).
• 58% of marketers consider social media to be very important to their marketing strategy.
• 73% of marketers consider social media to be effective for their business.
• 33% of marketers find social media organic advertising low cost while only 12.
• 3% of marketers find social media paid ads as a cost-effective solution.
• Many marketers still create content for the 6% of computer users leaving the huge smartphone potential untapped.
• While no marketer on earth can read 100% of their consumers’ minds, the next closest thing is- having information on consumer behavior.
• About 66% of Americans have heard of social media bots and 80% of them find them to be a negative experience.
• The average internet user spends 2 hours and 26 minutes on social media websites, 28% of internet users believe that ads on social media help them discover new products.
• Even with ad blockers installed, 45% of internet users are likely to buy from an ad.
• For 13% of internet users, adding a “Buy” button would increase their chances of purchasing a product, 23% of users prefer to buy a product after seeing likes and reading comments on social media.
• 70% of consumers want brands to take a stand on social and political issues, 47% of users want brands to voice their opinion on social media, 53% believe that brands only take a stand for marketing purposes.
• 55% of users would discontinue using a product if their brand didn’t align with their personal views.
• Healthcare (39%) was the top issue that consumers wanted brands to speak out on, followed by labor laws (38%) and climate change (36%).
• 66% of consumers believe that brands can make a real change when they take a stance on social media, while 44% believe that brands are trustworthy when taking a stance.
• 99% of users access social media from their mobile devices, which is 3.
• A 9% increase of social media users was recorded in 2020 with a total of 3.
• Among users aged 13+, the largest social media user base is located in Central America (86% of the population) while the lowest user base is in Middle Africa (13% of the population).
• 90% of US millennials (born between 1981-1996) use social media, 77% of US Gen X (born between 1965-1980) use social media, and US Baby boomers (born between 1946-1964) use social media.
• 71% of consumers that had a positive experience with a brand on social media recommend it to their friends and family.
• 49% of social media users rely on influencers to make their buying decisions.
• Every marketer’s worst nightmare is a world where 100% of its users use ad blockers.
• But luckily, the impact of ad blockers isn’t bad as 45% of users end up making a purchase.
• In the US alone, 90% percent of businesses utilized social media for promotional and advertising purposes.
• 63% of marketers firmly believe that social media is an important aspect of their business.
• 96 billion people or 65% of the earth’s population are active on social media.
• Countries like North America have more women users (55%) compared to South Asia (25%) where gender equality isn’t widely practiced.
• It’s safe to say that 48% of marketers have had great success in their ROI using social media.
• 63% of marketers firmly believe that social media is an important aspect of their business.
• Countries like North America have more women users (55%) compared to South Asia (25%) where gender equality isn’t widely practiced.
• 10 Content Marketing Statistics for Personal Trainers – My Personal Trainer Website: 38% of B2C Brands Don’t Have a Content Strategy When you’re a personal trainer, you are your own brand.
• While many of them may well be using content, there’s a good chance that they don’t have a strategy as 38% of B2C brands reportedly don’t.
• In fact, bloggers who update older posts are 74% more likely to get stronger results from their content marketing.
• In fact, 74% of B2C marketers find that outgoing emails are still the most successful distribution channel for their content.
• That’s almost 25% more effective than sharing on social platforms which reportedly generates a success rate of around 50%.
• Studies show that we remember around 65% of visual content in comparison to 10% of what we read.
• In fact, by 2021 video is expected to account for 82% of all consumer Internet traffic by 2021.
• Visual Content Marketing Statistics 2023 | 99firms: Visual Content Marketing Statistics (Editor’s Choice)Around 84% of all marketing communication in 2020 included visual content.
• (SAG IPL)Viewers remember 95% of a message watched on video compared to a textual one.
• (Axon Garside)56% of marketers used visuals in 100% of their published articles.
• (IMPACT+)In 2021, 23% of marketers spent 21-30% of their budget on visual content.
• (Venngage)Roughly 36% of marketers generate visuals primarily for blog posts.
• (Venngage)80% of marketers use visuals in their social media campaigns.
• (MarketingDigiBook)Tweets with images get 150% more retweets, unlike those without.
• 6% of marketers confirmed that the pandemic had affected their visual content marketing strategy.
• Many marketers fail to recognize the importance of this fact, as only 20% of people remember what they hear and 30% what they see.
• Still, the importance of visual content remains unprecedented, with 85% of Facebook videos being watched with the sound off.
• Around 84% of all marketing communication in 2020 included visual content.
• In line with the latest video marketing statistics, by the end of 2022, 82% of online traffic would come from video content.
• These stats hold firm ground, considering that landing pages that feature videos generate 800% more conversions.
• 30% of marketers were involved in creating their visual content in 2020, which signaled good news for many companies that needed to start using this tool.
• 96% of online shoppers first watch the video content to determine if they want to buy a product or a service.
• Research confirmed that people are 144% more likely to purchase a product or a service after watching a video about it.
• Alternatively, users exposed to a sales message in a text form retain only 10% of it.
• Roughly 93% of companies obtained a new customer after sharing a video on social media.
• In addition, the majority reported that it resulted in new customers, with 94% confirming that paid video ads had positive ROI.
• The word ‘video’ in an email subject line increases the open rates by 6%.
• Other than open rates, click rates increase by 65% when using video in the subject line of emails going to customers.
• Moreover, a video thumbnail improves subscriber engagement by nearly 41% when included in an email.
• 68% of consumers believe that the pandemic affected the amount of video content they watch.
• 96% of these consumers say it affected them by increasing their video consumption.
• At the same time, visual content marketing stats show that 91% of marketers understand the importance of video for brands, especially after the 2020/2021 pandemic.
• Aside from the number of marketers using visuals constantly, 88% confirmed they included them in 50% of their published articles.
• Out of all visuals, marketers use stock photography most frequently, or 40%.
• After stock photography, original graphics have the next biggest share (37%).
• Charts and data visualization come third with 12%, followed by videos and presentations (7%).
• However, looking at engagement rates, stock photography fell to 12%, original graphics skyrocketed to 40%, and videos rose to 23%, visual marketing statistics show.
• 50% of surveyed marketers said they spent less than five hours a week producing visual content in 2020.
• Moreover, 22% of marketers claimed they spent five to 10 hours generating visuals.
• Finally, 29% spent between 10 and 20 hours per week designing and creating visual marketing content.
• 41% of content marketers use online solutions to create visual content.
• 4% of marketers measure their shifted visual marketing plans between 5 and 7 on a scale of 1 to 10.
• Yet, some chose higher numbers — 32% rated the changes eight or higher, while only 9.
• 5% of marketers believe these are their most important tools for media campaigns.
• Around 40% of video marketers use webinars as a visual content marketing tool.
• So 37% of marketers plan to use webinars for video marketing in the near future.
• In fact, 83% of those that have already used it consider themselves successful applying it.
• 23% of marketers projected that their spending for visual content would increase to 21-30% of their total budget in 2021.
• While the largest number believed they would rise to 21-30%, 21% expected their visual content marketing budget to be in the 11-20% range.
• Visual marketing statistics show that 16% want to automate team collaboration, while 15% hope for more automation when applying branding on visuals.
• About 63% of marketers thought that more than 60% of companies would rely on visuals in 2021/22.
• 5% stated that between 30% and 60% of organizations would use visuals in 2021 and 2022.
• Unlike them, 14% of marketers said that 30% of businesses would use visual content.
• 85% of online users consume content on multiple devices simultaneously.
• Despite this fact, Twitter users watch 90% of the network’s video content on mobile.
• Not only do 80% of marketers and social media marketing agencies use visuals in their posts, but 60% use video alone.
• 55% of content marketers choose Facebook as the most important social media platform.
• At the same time, they get 89% more favorite button clicks and 150% more retweets.
• Based on visual marketing statistics, images take up 80% of the content types used by social media marketers.
• Worldwide, YouTube is the leading source of video content, at 83%, even though YouTube stats show it’s blocked in nine countries.
• Visual content marketing stats suggest that 65% of senior execs will visit a website featured in the video they have watched on this platform.
• 70% of surveyed users said they prefer Facebook Stories compared to other platforms.
• Social media marketing statistics show that only 17% chose Instagram, while 13% picked Snapchat.
• According to Instagram marketing statistics, 90% of Instagram users have a business account, and most businesses use Stories to present their brand and spark interest in their products through engaging visual content.
• In fact, 58% of the people surveyed said they became genuinely interested in the brand’s products or services after seeing them in Stories.
• Moreover, 50% said they even went to the company’s website to purchase a product or a service, visual content marketing stats indicate.
• Lens has been online for several years now, but visual searches are 140% up year over year since its establishment.
• For 89% of B2B marketers, social media is a favorite tool for content distribution.
• Moreover, 96% of B2B content marketers turn to it for content marketing, both visual and textual.
• 83% of organizations made quick modifications to their content marketing due to the pandemic.
• Approximately 70% of marketers claim that the pandemic impacted a great deal of their visual content marketing, prompting them to change.
• While 83% of organizations have made some changes already, 86% expect these changes to stay active for the time being.
• 6% of marketers confirmed that the pandemic caused some changes in their visual content marketing strategy.
• The number one change that 70% of B2B marketers made during COVID-19 was modifying messaging and targeting strategy.
• This is the number one adaptation (70%) made in many B2B content strategies.
• Other than that, adjusting the editorial calendar was next (64%), followed by a change in the distribution of content and promotion (53%).
• Website change was next (40%) and allocating more resources for social media and online communities (40%).
• Finally, many re-examined the complete customer journey (31%), while others increased the time spent with customers (30%), digital marketing statistics confirm.
• 54% of organizations believe their content marketing campaign was successful to a certain extent.
• So it’s only natural to use visual content to get messages across, especially if we know that 90% of information transmitted to the brain is visual.
• Based on the recent graphic design statistics, in 2018, marketers claimed visuals comprised about 64% of their content.
• With the pandemic’s start in 2020, most content marketers (48%) said that 91-100% of their content consisted of visuals, while 23% said they incorporated 70-90% of them.
• Further, about 8% claimed visuals comprised 61-70% of their content, and finally, 4% added visual content into 11-20% of their marketing materials.
• Interesting Facts and Stats on National & Global Digital Marketing Industry: In 2024, mobile is projected to generate 77% of total ad spending in the Digital Advertising market.
• According to economics times, 96% of Indian marketers have high confidence in the ability of digital marketing to drive competitive advantage.
• 8% CAGR while the Rest of the European market (as defined in the study) will reach US$288.
• As the businesses went digitalThe e-commerce’s share of global retail trade raised from 14% in 2019 to about 17% in 2020.
• 6% between August 2019 and August 2020African e-commerce platform Jumia reported a 50% jump in transactions during the first six months of 2020.
• 50 Marketing Stats and Trends To Inform Your 2021 Digital Strategy | HackerNoon: approximately 15% of online shopping experiences begin with a search engine.
• 63% of web pages The a page earns, the more organic traffic Google passes on.
• Between 70-80% Similarly, that 70% of Google search clicks are organic and 30% go to Google Ads.
• 1000% more traffic Websites using advanced schemas saw an increase of search impressions, organic traffic and clicks by 30-50%.
• 27% 72% Generally, of smart phone users have tried voice search at least ones in the last 12 months.
• of that, 55% of teenagers use voice search on a daily basis compared to of those aged 55-64.
• 60% 9% The more social media shares a page has, the greater the chance it search queries.
• 12% of search queries Google now devotes up to of the first page of search results on mobile toward its own internal properties.
• 33% of clicks Images were returned for of Google search queries, and growing.
• 79% The number of likes, comments, views and shares a video gets, the higher the likelihood the video will rank in a search.
• 157% boost Video content is now more likely to drive a conversion than content alone.
• approximately 15% of online shopping experiences begin with a search engine.
• 63% of web pages The a page earns, the more organic traffic Google passes on.
• Between 70-80% Similarly, that 70% of Google search clicks are organic and 30% go to Google Ads.
• 1000% more traffic Websites using advanced schemas saw an increase of search impressions, organic traffic and clicks by 30-50%.
• 27% 72% Generally, of smart phone users have tried voice search at least ones in the last 12 months.
• of that, 55% of teenagers use voice search on a daily basis compared to of those aged 55-64.
• 60% 9% The more social media shares a page has, the greater the chance it search queries.
• 14% So be warned:Ignoring Google’s search supremacy and changing trends will leave your web presence in the dust.
• 12% of search queries Google now devotes up to of the first page of search results on mobile toward its own internal properties.
• 33% of clicks Images were returned for of Google search queries, and growing.
• 55% As if Google owning YouTube wasn’t enough, YouTube holds the position of second largest search engine in the world.
• 79% The number of likes, comments, views and shares a video gets, the higher the likelihood the video will rank in a search.
• 157% boost Video content is now more likely to drive a conversion than content alone.
• 53% of businesses say video has reduced the number of support calls they’ve received.
• Digital Marketing Statistics:Numbers in 2023 | SerpWatch: How about the fact that segmented email marketing campaigns, which most marketers still don’t seem to have woken up to, can get you a 700% or more increase in ROI?
• Google is responsible for 96% of all smartphone search traffic and 94% of the total organic traffic.
• Companies using Twitter for their customer service see a 19% increase in customer satisfaction.
• One of our more unexpected digital marketing trends, Pinterest drives 25% of all retail website referral traffic.
• Close to 50% of online users search for product videos before they make a purchase.
• 60% of people would rather buy a product recommended by a YouTuber than one recommended by a movie or TV star.
• Nearly 50% of US marketers are estimated to have increased spending on email marketing, 25% significantly so—taking the overall spending on email marketing in the US to $3.
• When it comes to online marketing trends, marketers have witnessed an increase of 760% in email revenue from segmented campaigns.
• Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates about 3 times as many leads.
• 25% of B2B marketers in the US spent between 61% and 80% of their total marketing budget on digital marketing.
• This 72% increase is driven by advances in technology and consumer preferences.
• In 2017, all digital advertising subsectors recorded healthy growth trends of close to or more than 15%.
• SEO Trends Google is responsible for 96% of all smartphone search traffic and 94% of the total organic traffic.
• In the case of mobile search traffic, Yahoo clocks in with only 2% and Bing scores 1%.
• For organic traffic as well, Google remains the best bet by far, with Yahoo accounting for about 3%.
• However, as much as 30% of the paid traffic comes from alternative search engines.
• With as many as 80% of your potential audience ignoring your link in the search results, you might not be getting your money’s worth, creating distrust of your brand in the process.
• Compared to social media, search engines drive 300% more traffic to content sites.
• Another important point that should encourage you to invest in strong SEO is the fact that 93% of all website visits start with a search engine.
• After they’ve scrolled past the ads, 60% of those searching for something online using a search engine will click on one of the top three results.
• In fact, 75% of people never even scroll past the first page of search engines.
• 50% of all searches are longer than four words, and they can commonly be shortened.
• If you haven’t realized the importance of local SEO, this is as stark as it can get:80% of the consumers online are trying to find information on local stores, events, and locations.
• Local search stats show that 50% of consumers who conduct a local search visit the store they found within a day.
• The SEO statistics for 2021 show that 18% of local searches lead to a purchase on the same day of the search.
• The number of non-local searches that lead to a purchase within a 24-hour period is 7%, showing the advantage of optimizing your page for local searches.
• 88% of consumers trust online reviews as much as personal recommendations.
• This applies to both online and physical stores, as 88% of shoppers trust online reviews as much as they trust recommendations from family and friends.
• 53% of users will leave a page if it takes more than 3 seconds to load.
• In addition, Google says that pages taking 10 seconds to load have 123% higher bounce rates compared to those that take less than 5 seconds to load.
• Facebook’s advertising revenue in 2017 increased by nearly 50% over the previous year.
• Related trends in digital marketing include the fact that the average revenue per user has grown significantly in recent years, and that mobile advertising revenue accounts for more than 75% of the social network’s total advertising revenue.
• In fact, around 67% of marketers still consider it the most important social media platform to attract customers.
• Nearly half of all marketers increased their Facebook ad activities in the last year, and 67% plan on increasing their use of Facebook ads over the next 12 months.
• 52% of marketers have noted a decline in their organic Facebook reach in the last year.
• Along with this, 23% of marketers surveyed were unsure of how their reach has changed.
• Facebook ads targeted by custom audiences have a 14% lower cost-per-click and a 64% lower cost-per-conversion, on average, than category or interest-based targeting alone.
• For those who continue to rely on Facebook, a noteworthy stat is that Facebook ads with custom audience targeting have been found to have as high as 387% greater conversion rates than those that use only demographic targeting.
• Its 2018 third-quarter figures were nearly a 30% jump from the corresponding figures for 2017’s third quarter.
• 8% of US companies with more than 100 employees use Twitter for marketing.
• 54% of users report having taken an action after seeing a brand mentioned on Twitter.
• Companies that take care of customer service on Twitter see a 19% increase in customer satisfaction.
• Twitter ad engagement in 2018’s second quarter was 81% higher than the year before.
• LinkedIn has a return rate of about 50%, which is lower than the typical rate of 80% found at the other major social networks.
• It’s little wonder that more than 90% of B2B marketers find LinkedIn more worthwhile than other networks.
• LinkedIn is 277% more effective at lead generation than Facebook or Twitter.
• 67% of Pinners say they’ve discovered a new brand from business content on Pinterest.
• 72% of users say Pinterest inspires them to shop when they aren’t actually looking for anything.
• 84% of small and medium-sized businesses say WhatsApp helps them communicate with customers.
• 84% of those selling goods and services on a small and medium scale find the direct communication they achieve through the app to be an essential part of their success.
• 11% of marketers have used Snapchat video, and only 27% found it to be an effective strategy.
• Close to 50% of online users search for product videos before they make a purchase.
• According to data, 81% of those seeking to advertise their business have recognized the advantages video marketing offers.
• Of the businesses that still haven’t adapted to the new marketing trends, 65% plan on doing so in the near future.
• Nearly 60% of all video views on the internet originate from mobile users.
• 35% of mobile users in the US watch videos on YouTube more than once a day.
• For the second year in a row, mobile video browsing stats are projected to beat desktop use by a margin of over 10%.
• The number of advertisers running video ads on YouTube is up more than 40% year over year.
• For YouTube’s top 100 advertisers, the latest marketing trends show their average spend increasing by 60% year on year.
• 60% of people would rather buy a product recommended by a YouTuber than one recommended by a movie or TV star.
• Email reaches more than 80% of the world’s adult population, giving any brand a much wider reach than other channels—email marketing doesn’t drive all of the latest marketing trends, but it has always been a powerful marketing tool.
• This 23% steady growth rate—especially for a channel that has a deep penetration to begin with—is very impressive.
• Nearly 50% of US marketers plan to increase spending on email marketing, 25% significantly so.
• 39% of marketers never personalize their emails, and 21% never use segmentation.
• More than 70% of US businesses using email marketing send out emails either daily or weekly.
• The second most common error—made by as many as 70% of businesses—is sending out too high a frequency of emails.
• Segmented emails have conversion rates 208% higher than batch-and-blast.
• Even more importantly, the email marketing conversion rate—the actual monetary value derived from your interaction with customers—can be as high as 208% when you use targeting instead of sending the same emails to everyone.
• Marketers have witnessed an increase of 760% in email revenue from segmented campaigns.
• 72% of consumers prefer their marketing communication to be via email over other channels.
• 24% of B2C marketers say that paid search has the biggest impact on revenue across all digital tactics.
• 6% of people click on Google ads when they’re searching an item to buy online.
• Not anymore—the statistics show that most savvy internet users resort to ad blocking, with the figure having reached as high as 30% by 2018.
• Pop-ups are the most disliked form of digital advertising, with a 73% disapproval rating.
• In addition, mobile ads come as a very close second with a disapproval rating of 70%, followed by video ads that play before content loads at 57%.
• In fact, 83% agree that it’s just the obnoxious ads they want to block, and 57% say that search engine ads are actually valuable and useful.
• Lead Generation Trends 61% of marketers say generating traffic and leads is their top challenge.
• In fact, the second point in this ranking—proving the ROI of their marketing activities—is considered the top challenge by only 39% of marketers, with other points being the main focus for even fewer respondents to the survey.
• Only 18% of marketers say outbound practices provide the highest quality leads for sales.
• 69% of marketers consider converting leads to customers their top marketing priority.
• The most commonly used marketing automation feature is email marketing at 89% of marketers.
• Other commonly used features include lead nurturing (84%), cross-channel campaign management (82%), and integrations with other software (CRM, mobile, social media, etc.
• In addition, companies that automate lead management see a 10% or higher bump in revenue in six to nine months’ time.
• Content Marketing Trends Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates about 3 times as many leads.
• According to LinkedIn, the top 3 content marketing tactics are blogging (53%), social media (64%), and case studies (64%).
• B2B marketers (67%) are more likely to use blogs in their social media content than B2C (56%).
• 57% of B2B buyers make their purchase decision before ever speaking to a salesperson.
• 8 Statistics That Prove Content Marketing Is the Best Brand Marketing: 60% of Marketers Create at Least One Piece of Content Daily (Stat from Emarketer) Consistency is key, no matter what that looks like for you.
• Content Marketing Costs 62% Less Than Traditional Marketing (Stat from DemandMetric) The quality of work does not always correspond to the cash on hand.
• 68% of B2B and B2C Marketers Use Blogging in Their Social Media Marketing (Stat from SocialMediaExaminer) This type of original content ranked above video and podcasting, which gives hope to those of us who do not excel at creating exciting infographics and Canva images.
• Across 600+ Marketers, 82% of Companies Have a Specific Process in Place to Repurpose Content (Stat from Curata) Repurposing content is one fantastic way to get a ton of mileage out of just a small amount of content.
• 65% of Companies Say That Generating Traffic and Leads Is Their Top Marketing Challenge (Stat from Hubspot) This is the main challenge in content marketing that some have solved, but the majority of others haven’t.
• Reading Content on Mobile Outranks Time Spent on Desktop 51% to 42% (Stat from SmartInsights) Mobile digital content reading outranks time spent on desktop computers 51% to 42%.
• The Influencer Marketing Statistics You Need to Know [Infographic] | Social Media Today: Some 87% of shoppers admit that they’ve been prompted to make a purchase by an influencer, and almost the same amount of marketers believe it’s an effective marketing solution (84%).
• Twitter Provides New Stats and Advice on Video Marketing | Social Media Today: longer Tweet copy has a 13% higher brand and message recall and overall view time.
• 10 Influencer Marketing Stats for 2021 [Infographic] | Social Media Today: Today, 89% of marketers say they believe influencer marketing to be effective.
• 30 Essential Content Marketing Statistics for 2022: 70% of the B2B content marketers say their brand’s content marketing efforts have been somewhat/much more successful than last year.
• Edit and Download Interestingly, 96% of the most successful content marketers say that content marketing has helped them build credibility and trust with their audience.
• 90% or nearly all of the most successful top players get these results by prioritizing their audience’s informational needs over sales-y messages.
• Buyers Trust Content As Well A whopping 95% of the B2B service and product buyers admit that they view content as a trustworthy marker when evaluating a business.
• Edit and Download On top of that, 71% in the B2B industry also admitted to reviewing an organization’s blog during their buyer’s journey.
• 61% of consumers have also bought something that’s recommended by blogs that they read (Woo-hoo!
• The latest reports say content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing programs.
• To reap these results, 78% of organizations have a team of 1-3 content specialists according to SEMrush.
• Of these activities, 84% of marketers are most likely to outsource content creation.
• Edit and Download Bloggers in the industry also work with editors with 30% of them following along with a formal editing process.
• Bloggers who have a process for editing are 50% more likely to see strong results.
• Edit and Download On top of these, B2B marketers also note that content marketing has helped them succeed in building loyal relationships with existing clients (63%), generating revenue/sales (53%) and building subscribed audiences (45%).
• Edit and Download On top of this, marketers create 29% of their content for conversion purposes directed towards their mid-funnel audiences.
• Similarly, 21% of their content for late-stage buyers with the purchase intent.
• Here’s proof:More than half of the most successful marketers – 69% to be specific – tell stories via their content.
• Edit and Download Over half – 55% – of the respondents in Content Marketing Institute’s survey indicate they use interactive content.
• Edit and Download Video Content 64% of marketers have increased their use of this format that includes webinars, live streaming, videos and more.
• Of the written content formats, the top 3 content types are:social media content, blog posts and email newsletters at 95%, 89% and 81%, respectively.
• Audio Content 38% of marketers are investing more in creating this content format including podcasts and audiobooks.
• Edit and Download On top of that, 86% of folks expect to see more videos from brands in the future.
• Edit and Download No wonder, 92% of the marketers who use video consider it an essential part of their strategy.
• Edit and Download As for the video ROI (return on investment) — that has been phenomenal:81% of marketers say video has increased the average time visitors spend on page.
• 83% video marketers admit that video has helped with lead generation too.
• 95% report that video has helped them increase user understanding of their service/product (raises her hand as someone who has understood several services using video tutorials).
• In the B2B sphere, marketers use the following paid channels:72% use promoted posts/social media advertising 61% use search engine marketing/pay per click 46% employ banner ads 32% leverage partner emails promoting content Customize this infographic template and make it your own!
• Edit and Download As for organic content distribution, almost all (95%) of B2B marketers use LinkedIn for sharing their content.
• Closely following LinkedIn for content distribution is Twitter (86%), followed by Facebook (83%), YouTube (53%), and Instagram (46%).
• 80+ Essential Social Media Marketing Statistics for 2022: Here are some of the most interesting stats we discovered:77% of social media marketers say social media marketing has been somewhat to very effective for their company this year.
• What’s more, 37% of marketers who said social media marketing was somewhat to very ineffective cited COVID-19, likely due to the rapid change in strategy.
• 82% of marketers say they repurpose content across social media channels.
• Short-form videos is the top social media format used by 54% of social media marketers, followed by live streaming, live audio chatrooms, and user-generated content.
• 80% of marketers say funny content is the most effective on social media.
• 84% of marketers target Millennials as part of their social media strategy.
• The biggest challenge marketers face on social media is creating engaging content, reported by 27% of respondents.
• 67% of marketers say they work with micro-influencers with 10K-100K followers or subscribers.
• Conversely, only 29% say they work with mega influencers with more than 1 million followers.
• 25% of respondents said they believe funny content is most effective with Gen Z.
• Image Source Channel-Specific Social Media Statistics Facebook Statistics In a 2021 HubSpot Blog poll, 79% of marketers report buying paid advertising on Facebook.
• (HootSuite) Facebook is a popular source of news with 31% of Americans regularly getting their news from the platform.
• (Pew Research) According to the same poll, more than 50% of marketers plan on increasing their investments in Facebook, YouTube, and TikTok in 2022.
• (HubSpot) Facebook ads are used by 70% of marketers, and there were 10 million active advertisers on the platform in Q3 2021.
• (Statista) In a HubSpot Blog poll, 79% of marketers plan to continue investing in Twitter Spaces in 2022.
• (HubSpot) Link clicks account for 92% of all user interaction with tweets.
• (Twitter) 99% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll say they plan to continue to invest the same amount or increase their investment in Twitter.
• (HubSpot) 93% of Twitter community members are open to brands getting involved in conversation, such as providing help and support.
• Instagram Statistics In a 2021 HubSpot Blog poll, 58% of marketers plan to leverage Instagram Reels in 2022.
• (Statista) 20% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll report generating the biggest ROI when working with influencers on Instagram, only behind Facebook.
• (HubSpot) 98% of marketers say Instagram is the most influential platform for influencer marketing, which is 44% higher than Facebook.
• (Sprout Social) 61% of social media marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll say they plan to increase their investment in 2022.
• (Instagram) In a 2021 HubSpot Blog poll, 73% of marketers prefer Instagram for influencer marketing.
• (eMarketer) As of January 2022, 59% of LinkedIn users were between 25 and 34 years old.
• (LinkedIn) 87% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog survey said LinkedIn offered average or high ROI.
• (HubSpot) 82% of B2B markers report finding the greatest success on LinkedIn.
• (LinkedIn Marketing Solutions) Over 46% of all social media traffic to company websites comes from LinkedIn.
• (LinkedIn) 40% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog survey say they plan to increase their investment in the platform in 2022.
• 5% of marketers use YouTube for influencer marketing, according to a 2021 eMarketer report.
• (eMarketer) 50% of social media marketers surveyed by the HubSpot Blog say they plan to increase their investment in YouTube in 2022.
• In fact, 20% of respondents say they plan to invest in this platform the most.
• (Statista) In a 2021 HubSpot Blog poll, 44% of marketers plan to leverage YouTube for the first time in 2022.
• (YouTube) YouTube accounts for more than 25% of total worldwide mobile traffic.
• (HootSuite) TikTok Statistics 70% of TikTok users agree they feel a deeper connection to people they interact with on TikTok compared to other social networks.
• (TikTok) In a 2021 HubSpot Blog poll, 61% of marketers plan to increase their investment in TikTok marketing in 2022.
• (HootSuite) 61% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll say they plan to increase their investment in TikTok in 2022.
• (HubSpot) 12% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll say they work with influencers the most on TikTok.
• (Statista) 50% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll plan to increase their investment in Reddit.
• (Reddit) 23% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll plan to leverage Reddit for the first time in 2022.
• (Statista) Only 2% of social media marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog plan to invest in Reddit the most in 2022.
• (HubSpot) 49% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll buy paid ads on Reddit.
• (HubSpot) Reddit is an unlikely place for influencer marketing but 38% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll say they work with influencers on the platform.
• Whether you’re considering hiring an external social media consulting service or creating a role in-house, take a look at these trends that demonstrate the importance of social media consulting:Answering a complaint on social media can increase customer advocacy by 25%.
• (Convince & Convert) 79% of consumers expect brands to respond within a day of reaching out over social media, but average brand response rates across all industries is lower than 25%.
• (Sprout Social) 79% of people say that user-generated content on social media significantly impacts their purchasing decisions.
• The Rising Importance of Influencer Marketing – Statistics and Trends [Infographic] | Social Media Today: And with social algorithms putting more emphasis on user sharing, 48% of marketers in the US who’ve utilized influencers in their outreach are planning to further increase their budget for influencer-focused campaigns this year.
• 10 Content Marketing Statistics for 2020 – Convince & Convert: Pew Internet Research found that about 37% of Americans use their mobile devices to go online and the overall number of people owning a smartphone went from 35% in 2011 to 81% in 2019.
• In a look at over 1,000 blogs, researchers discovered that around 63% of the traffic to automotive dealerships is via desktop.
• The numbers reach as high as 80% and above for online education and marketing topics.
• 10% How-Tos The report also looked at the different types of articles posted on blogs and found that most blogs benefited from a mix of different topics.
• 36% of Articles With Both H2 and H3 Headings Got More Traffic and Shares The study also uncovered that the use of both H2 and H3 headings resulted in higher performances.
• About 36% of articles with both headings had more traffic, shares and backlinks than similar articles without.
• 36% of articles With both H2 and H3 headings get more traffic and shares #contentmarketing Click To Tweet 2020 Is About Ranking Higher Than Position #1 Search engines such as Google now use position zero to highlight quick snippets of content.
• The Word ‘Strategy’ Appeared in 29% of Tweets About Content Marketing For years, top marketers have turned to well-organized plans in order to gain the most traction possible.
• The keyword phrase “content marketing strategy” was the most popular keyword in the category of content marketing and appeared in 29% of tweets.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week – Econsultancy: Complaints to ICO have increased 113% post-GDPR A new study by GDPRPLAN.
• From its survey, it found that 46% of the internet population in the US say they have decreased time spent on social networks, while 41% of people say the same in the UK.
• Interestingly, younger people are the most keen to decrease their daily time on social media, with 58% of 16 to 24 year olds citing this desire, versus 43% of 35 to 44 year olds.
• 5%), the high street actually performed quite robustly, seeing a decline in footfall of just 1% between 12pm and 2pm.
• Interestingly, London’s West End appeared to be the exception, with the area seeing a ‘Boxing Day bounce’ of 15% increased footfall.
• 3 million Tweets, 18 million likes, and 60% of all interactions taking the form of retweets.
• 15,000 Tweets relating to Love Island mentioned Missguided, while 56% of all brand mentions also happened across Love Island-related posts on Instagram, forums, and blogs.
• Despite this, penetration in the US is said to be higher at 26% of internet users, compared to 10% in China.
• 4% of internet users have also used a smart speaker, a figure higher than both France and Germany where adoption is at 14% and 17.
• 6 Eye-Opening B2B Content Marketing Statistics for 2021: ” — Nick Nelson @NickNelsonMN Click To Tweet #2:88% of marketers say collecting first-party data is a priority in 2021.
• Another finding in Radix’s research:“B2B marketers who can’t talk to customers are 27% less likely to be happy with their content’s business results.
• Digital Marketing Stats to Inform Your Strategy in 2021 | AWeber: 1% of small businesses and entrepreneurs said that email marketing is the best digital marketing channel at driving sales [AWeber].
• 6% said email marketing is an important or very important part of their business strategy [AWeber].
• 76% of email subscribers purchase from an email marketing message [Disruptive Advertising].
• 1% of survey respondents said email marketing is the best digital marketing channel at retaining customers [AWeber].
• Content Marketing Statistics Even though content marketing costs 62% less than outbound marketing, it generates more than 3x as many leads [Demand Metric].
• In fact, 51% of businesses said their top challenge is creating content that generates quality leads [SEMRush].
• 60% of small businesses who prioritize content marketing use lead magnets and lead generation tactics [AWeber].
• 70% of consumers feel closer to a company because of content marketing [Demand Metric].
• Nearly 90% of small businesses said social media is important or very important to their business [AWeber].
• 2% of survey respondents ranking social media above other channels [AWeber].
• 57% of consumers follow brands to learn about new products or services while 47% follow to stay up to date with company news [Sprout Social].
• Landing Page Statistics 37% of the best landing pages include testimonials [Nifty Marketing].
• Long landing pages can lead to 220% more leads [Marketing Experiments].
• Web Push Notification Statistics Push notifications have the potential to bring businesses an ROI for up to 2,200% and increase daily traffic by up to 25% [NotifyVisitors].
• Web push notifications receive a click-through rate of 4-6%, even when subscriber count is above 25,000 [DigitalMarketer].
• Web push notifications are a newer marketing channel for small businesses and entrepreneurs, with over 60% of survey respondents claiming novice proficiency [AWeber].
• 61 digital marketing stats for 2022 | ActiveCampaign: 86% of marketers increased brand awareness by using one or more digital marketing channels.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2020) 79% of marketers educated their audience via digital marketing.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2020) 75% of marketers increased their company’s credibility and trust with digital marketing tactics.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2020) Top content marketing goals 75% of agency marketers said that email marketing has excellent or good ROI.
• (Statista, 2019) 74% of marketers said that SEO has excellent or good ROI.
• (Statista, 2019) 73% of marketers said that content marketing has excellent or good ROI.
• (Statista, 2019) 61% of marketers said that paid search has excellent or good ROI.
• (Statista, 2019) 56% of marketers said that social media marketing has excellent or good ROI.
• 59% of B2C marketers increased their content marketing budgets in 2020 compared to 2019.
• (Statista, 2020) 83% of B2C content marketers use blog posts or short articles in their strategy.
• (Statista, 2020) 74% of B2C marketers said they used email newsletters for content marketing.
• (Statista, 2020) 38% of B2B company blogs publish content to educate their audience.
• (Backlinko, 2021) 86% of B2B content marketers believe their audience sees them as trusted sources in their niche.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2020) 85% of B2B content marketers use email marketing software to assist with content marketing.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2020) 88% of the most successful content marketers prioritize audience information over sales messages, compared to 50% of the least successful content marketers.
• (Wyzowl, 2020) 87% of video marketers used YouTube last year, making it the most widely used video marketing platform for the seventh year in a row.
• (Wyzowl, 2020) 96% of consumers have watched a video about a product or service.
• (Wyzowl, 2020) 84% of consumers purchased a product because they watched a marketing video.
• (Wyzowl, 2020) 78% of video marketers say video has directly helped increase sales (Wyzowl, 2020) Video marketing is a powerful tool for your digital marketing strategy, helping you reach new segments of your target audience.
• (Statista, 2021) Global search engine market share B2B blogs with educational content get 52% more organic traffic than B2B blogs with company-focused content.
• 4% of all Google search results have no SERP features, like People Also Ask questions, an image carousel, or a knowledge panel.
• Roughly 80% of online consumers have made a purchase from social media ads.
• (Statista, 2019) 73% of social media marketers set a goal of acquiring new customers.
• (Hootsuite, 2021) 64% of social media marketers intend to increase brand awareness.
• (Hootsuite, 2021) 45% of social media marketers are looking to drive conversions.
• (Hootsuite, 2021) Top social media marketing goals Facebook is the most popular social media platform, used by 94% of B2B and B2C marketers.
• (Statista, 2021) 76% of marketers use Instagram (Statista, 2021) 67% of marketers worldwide say they’ll increase Instagram use in the future (Statista, 2021) 95% of B2B marketers used LinkedIn in 2020, making it the top B2B social media channel.
• 85% of B2B companies use email marketing software to distribute and manage their content.
• (Optinmonster, 2020) 48% of B2B digital marketing professionals said email marketing was highly effective in driving conversions.
• 4% of marketers said marketing automation was the single most effective digital marketing technique — more effective than social media, CRO, and SEO.
• (Statista, 2020) 48% of marketers use marketing automation to create personalized customer experiences.
• (House of Marketing, 2019) 67% of marketers use email marketing solutions to execute personalization in their campaigns (Statista, 2020) Despite shrinking overall marketing budgets, 26.
• 6% of CMOs say they’ll increase their budget for marketing technology such as automation tools.
• 50% of B2B marketers say email is the most effective channel for lead generation, followed closely by search engine optimization.
• (Statista, 2019) 83% of B2B content marketers say they’ve successfully used content marketing to nurture leads and subscribers.
• 60% of B2B marketers say they waste time and resources addressing lead generation challenges like creating engaging content and gathering accurate data.
• (Wpromote, 2021) 49% of marketers believe their lead nurturing programs need improvement.
• (Demand Gen Report, 2020) 35% of marketers reach out to their leads weekly, with 22% contacting them every three days.
• Ecommerce sales are expected to make up 15% of all retail sales in 2021.
• (Statista, 2020) 52% of European ecommerce retailers say influencer marketing offers the best ROI for their business, but they expect that to shift to social media advertising by 2030.
• (Statista, 2020) 75% of ecommerce stores are working or plan to work with social media influencers in 2020 and beyond.
• (Statista, 2020) 76% of ecommerce companies plan to expand or improve their personalization technology.
• (Statista, 2020) 72% of ecommerce marketers use Facebook for digital marketing.
• (Kantar, 2021) 41% of consumers say the product detail page (PDP) was the most important touchpoint during their customer journey.
• (App Annie, 2021) Mobile device use Mobile commerce (m-commerce) grew by more than 30% worldwide throughout 2020.
• (App Annie, 2021) Use of business communication apps grew 275% in 2020, a habit that may build a bridge between B2B and B2C consumer habits.
• (App Annie, 2021) 77% of mobile internet users found targeted mobile ads annoying rather than helpful.
• B2B Content Marketing Statistics:2020 Benchmarks | Marketing Infographic: Fully 90% of top-performing B2B content marketers put the audience’s informational needs first (as opposed to focusing on salesy copy), according to the most recent B2B content marketing benchmark study from MarketingProfs and Content Marketing Institute.
• The top 3 organic (free) content distribution channels B2B marketers use are social media (91%), their organization’s website/blog (89%), and email (87%).
• 52 Visual Content Marketing Statistics You Should Know in 2023: (HubSpot) 50% of marketers leverage video in their marketing strategy, followed closely by images at 47%.
• (HubSpot) Long-form videos above 30 minutes, like webinars and live events, saw over 11,000% growth over the past decade, making it the fastest-growing video segment.
• (HubSpot) 71% of B2B marketers say content marketing has become more important to their organization in the last year.
• (Content Marketing Institute) In 2021, over 50% of marketers used visuals in over 91% of their content.
• (Venngage) According to a survey by Venngage, original graphics are the most used type of visual content by marketers at 36%, followed by stock photos at nearly 34%.
• (Venngage) 30% of marketers primarily create visual content for blogs, followed by social channels such as Facebook and LinkedIn.
• (World Health Organization) Over 50% of marketers agree that visual content is essential to their marketing strategy.
• (Venngage) Video Marketing Statistics 75% of adults in the US watch short-form video content on a mobile device.
• (eMarketer) 59% of Gen Z viewers use short-form video apps to discover things that they then watch longer versions of.
• (HubSpot) Social media videos are the most common type of video marketers create at 71%, followed closely by explainer videos at 70%.
• (HubSpot) 96% of consumers have watched an explainer video to learn more about a product.
• (HubSpot) When it comes to B2B, 79% of people say they’ve been convinced to purchase an app or piece of software because of a video.
• (HubSpot) YouTube is the most widely used video platform by marketers at 90% (Facebook is second, at 86%).
• (HubSpot) 33% of marketers leverage short-form video content in their marketing strategy.
• (HubSpot) Emerging Visual Marketing Trends 90% of marketers using short-form video will increase or maintain their investment next year, and 21% of marketers plan to leverage short-form video for the first time in 2023.
• (HubSpot) 56% of marketers plan to increase their investment in TikTok in 2023.
• (HubSpot) 24% of marketers are planning to invest more in video than any other format in 2023.
• Additionally, 29% plan to stop marketing in the Metaverse and in audio chat rooms.
• (Similarweb) 40% of marketers plan to prioritize mobile-friendly website design in 2023.
• (HubSpot) 56% of consumers who are interested in the metaverse want to watch TV and movies there.
• (Venngage) When it comes to content creation, 30% of marketers share infographics.
• (HubSpot) One study found that people following directions with text and illustrations do 323% better than people following directions without illustrations.
• (Springer) Source:NeoMam Social Media Stats for Visual Content Marketers Facebook is the most popular social media platform, used by 64% of marketers.
• (HubSpot) 70% of Instagram users don’t mind seeing ads when watching videos on Instagram.
• (Instagram Business) 26% of marketers plan to use TikTok for the first time in 2023, and 16% of marketers plan to invest more in TikTok than any other social media app.
• (HubSpot) In 2023, 31% of marketers use YouTube Shorts and Instagram Reels.
• (HubSpot) Of the Instagram Story formats people prefer most, 35% say they engage with short narrative-styled Stories with photos, videos, and text most often.
• (HubSpot) YouTube is the most popular social media platform among teenagers, with 95% of American teenagers ages 13 to 17 using it.
• Instagram users was between the ages of 18 and 29, making up 71% percent of Instagram’s user base in the U.
• (Pew Research) In a poll of over 350 consumers, 56% said they “sometimes” watch Instagram Stories with the sound on, while 29% said they “always” do this.
• (Statista) For videos up to 5 minutes long, viewers will watch about 50% of the content.
• 8 billion in 2022 (an increase of 9% from the previous year), highlighting the platform’s expanding influence.
• (Pinterest) Users who saw immersive, actionable ads on Pinterest were 59% more likely to recall that brand.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: Interest in social shopping rises 38% in 12 months New research from Bazaarvoice has revealed that there has been a 38% year-on-year increase in consumers who value the ability to discover new brands and purchase directly through Facebook and Instagram.
• Bazaarvoice’s annual Shopper Experience Index also surveyed more than 500 brands and retailers, revealing that 91% agree that visual content makes for a more engaging shopping experience.
• 86% agreed this visual content enhances discoverability, while 73% agreed that it increases conversions.
• 7% of marketers were optimistic about the financial prospects of their businesses in the first quarter, compared with -0.
• Less than 10% of marketers say they will concentrate on digital PR in 2019, despite brand awareness appearing as a KPI A new survey by Zazzle has revealed that less than 10% of marketers will be making digital PR a priority this year.
• This is despite the fact that 76% of respondents state brand awareness is a key performance indicator for them.
• Further to this, 25% of content marketers say they will be ceasing to participate in offline PR activity, as it has been perceived as an ineffective channel for them over recent years.
• Despite a lot of talk over the past few years about the troubles of Facebook among younger age groups – with Gen Z preferring alternative platforms such as YouTube, Instagram and Snapchat – membership rates on Facebook have stayed remarkably consistent since Q4 2015, increasing from 84% to 86%.
• 68% of marketers state that they use email to contact their customers, while 73% of consumers state that email is their preferred contact option.
• However, just 30% of marketers state that they use post to contact customers, whereas post is consumers’ second-most preferred marketing channel.
• 41% of consumers selected it amongst their favourite ways for brands to contact them.
• It would appear that marketers place too much value on social media, with 61% stating that they use it to contact consumers.
• By contrast, just 22% of consumers selected it as a preferred marketing channel, perhaps proving the need for marketers to consider more traditional methods.
• In the US, just 16% of Gen Z said they would share news stories via social media, compared to 25% of millennials.
• Similarly in the UK, 16% of Gen Z said they are likely to share news on social compared to 23% of millennials.
• In the US, 66% of Gen Z say they use the news application that comes with their mobile device, compared to 53% of Gen X.
• And for 38% of Gen Z, built-in phone news apps are the source of news they use the most, versus 27% of Gen X.
• 2020 B2B Content Marketing Statistics:Charts and Data: 12% of people reading the content then — possibly while starting their lunch breaks.
• Executives and Leaders in Most Job Categories Took 8% Longer to Open Requested Content Than Others The consumption gap represents the time between someone requesting the content from a company and their opening it.
• Outside of people in contracting and consulting roles, most people in executive and leadership positions took 8% longer than individuals in other categories to start looking at their B2B content after asking for it.
• Executives and leaders in take 8% longer to open requested content than others.
• 1% of the Time Statistics gathered for reasons not related to this report show that people are more likely to access the internet from their mobile phones than from desktop computers.
• The report did say, though, that the percentage of people on mobile phones grew by 10% between 2018 and 2019.
• Consumption of B2B content by device 27% of the Active Audience for B2B Content Came From Organizations With Fewer Than 25 Employees NetLine defines its active audience as people who requested B2B content.
• The data showed that 27% of the people who actively consumed B2B content worked at organizations with 1-24 employees.
• 62% of the 27%, segment making them the largest individual group in that percentage.
• Network Security Experts Are 87% More Likely to Enjoy DIY Projects Outside the Office Than Other Professionals The report also discusses affinity categories.
• One of the related B2B content statistics was that network security professionals are 87% more likely to engage in do-it-yourself projects outside the office than other professionals.
• B2B buyer affinities E-Books, White Papers and Guides Comprise Roughly 56% of Inventory in the Market If you’re wondering what kind of content to create as part of your B2B marketing 2020 plans, e-books, white papers and guides are good options to go with first.
• Statistics show that approximately 56% of all the inventory in the market is one of these kinds.
• More Than 30% of Demand for B2B Content Comes From the Information Technology Sector More than 30% of the overall content demand comes from audiences in that sector.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: TV claims the largest share, accounting for 29% of ad spend, while paid search ranks second with 17%.
• For example,  33% are willing to share their partner’s first and last name, down from 41% last year.
• Similarly, 54% are now willing to share their email address compared to 61% in 2018.
• 18% of young people have deleted social media apps as a result of negative impact Young people are taking practical measures against the negative impact of social media.
• In a survey of 1,200 8-19 year olds in the UK, 18% of respondents said they have removed certain social apps from their devices as a result of negativity.
• Meanwhile, 17% said they have limited their screen time, and 13% have cut down their social media usage.
• Interestingly, 24% of teens said they now have more than one Instagram account.
• 49% of teen girls in the survey said that social media makes them feel less lonely, while 59% of teens said social media helps them to avoid missing out.
• Only 10% of UK brands have an NPS score of 40 or more A new study by Bain and Company, reported on by Marketing Week, has revealed that just 10% of brands in the UK have a net promoter score (NPS) of 40 or more.
• In a survey of 477 UK marketers, 87% said they recognise this fact, which is particularly important given that long-term thinking is sorely needed.
• Despite the pre-purchase and purchase stages of a customer’s journey being well catered for, just 35% of marketers think their brands give enough attention to the post-purchase phase.
• 39% of marketers say customer experience budgets are due to rise more than 10%, but 37% say they are frozen or falling.
• 46% of marketers say the marketing team needs to change a great deal or quite a lot, while 59% say the same thing about the wider business.
• The survey – commissioned by Adobe and YouGov – found that 44% of respondents believe it’s important for retailers to be transparent about where their products are sourced.
• What’s more, 34% are more receptive to retailers who minimise their use of packaging, and just under a third are more receptive to retailers who donate towards environmental causes.
• 31% of respondents said an ecommerce website should be easy to use and navigate, 32% said the website or in-app experience should be great, and 39% said that the website should work well on smartphones.
• The best digital marketing stats of the week: In the UK the smartphone overtook the computer in 2017 and the trend continues, up from 15% saying they preferred their phone in 2013 to 49% in 2019.
• Mobile notifications a source of news for a fifth of UK digital news consumption Another stat that rams home just how much mobile usage has proliferated – those receiving mobile notifications of news in the UK rose from 3% in 2014 to 20% in 2019.
• Though Facebook is the most popular network for news, the chart below shows the net difference in time spent with Facebook was -15%.
• Notably almost half (46%) of under 35s in the UK said they spent more time with Instagram (net difference was +32%).
• Growth is seen in the Nordic region but elsewhere the figures are fairly steady (16% in the US, 9% in the UK).
• The report notes subscription fatigue is setting in, with 37% of under 45s saying they would choose online video if they could only have one online subscription, 15% choosing music, and only 7% choosing news.
• 55% of kids are regularly creating video content Beano Studios’ ‘Beano for Brands’ kid consultancy surveyed 2,000 UK parents and children and found that 86% of kids under 10 are using new technology to design, build and make things.
• Over half of those surveyed (55%) regularly create video content and 36% enjoy computer coding.
• Away from tech, the nostalgic amongst you will be relieved to learn that nearly three quarters of Gen Alpha (72%) are still climbing trees.
• Here’s a snapshot of the accompanying infographic:Only 17% of mainstream companies have the knowledge and skills to support marketing ops This week saw Econsultancy publish the 2019 Marketing Operations Maturity Benchmark report, in partnership with Sojourn Solutions.
• Only 17% of mainstream companies fully agreed with the statement that “Our Marketing Operations team has the knowledge and skills required to support all MOP-related functions”.
• 65% of publishers say posting content to Snapchat was profitable A survey by Digiday of 124 publisher executives revealed Snapchat was second only to Google AMP in the list comprising largely of social networks.
• However, more respondents (14%) rated Facebook as ‘extremely significant’ than did Snapchat (7%).
• Healthcare Content Marketing Stats | Study: Two-thirds of healthcare marketing executives say their content has become more educational because of COVID-19, and 45% say it has become more focused on driving to high-value services.
• Some 59% of healthcare marketing executives say COVID-19 has not affected their content marketing budget, 21% say it has led to a decrease, and 9% say it has led to an increase.
• Two-thirds of healthcare marketing executives say their organization is somewhat effective at content marketing, 26% say their organization is very effective, and 7% say their organization is not effective at all.
• Some 70% of healthcare marketing executives say their organization has a content marketing strategy in place.
• However, only 28% of executives say their content marketing strategy is documented.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: 5% of advertisers reported downward adjustments to their marketing budgets for July to September.
• From a survey of 214 B2B marketing and sales decision-makers, it was determined that 94% of companies are struggling to generate insights from marketing-created content and experiences.
• As a result of this, 21% of sales teams are less likely than marketers to say that marketing is the key driver of business growth.
• What’s more, 21% of sales employees are less likely to say that the marketing organisation generates predictable and measurable buyer acquisition, and 14% are less likely to believe that marketing leadership plays a central role in steering the direction of the business.
• The study also found that departments which have implemented interactive content (that provides buyer insights) found that it improved lead generation processes (48%), led to higher conversion rates (42%) and raised the profile of marketing within the business (48%).
• Asos’ saw sales growth of just 13% in the year to the end of August – half the 26% growth seen in 2018.
• Despite this, however, investors seem confident in Asos’ comeback – its share price has risen more than 16% since the earnings announcement.
• We ask the experts SEO budgets drop an average of 5% Zazzle Media’s ‘State of SEO Survey 2019’ has revealed that less is being spent on SEO in 2019, despite its high level of importance and effectiveness.
• Zazzle’s survey was filled out by 70% in-house marketers, and 30% from other agencies, including Disney, the RAC, and Oxfam.
• The research found that there has been a 5% drop in SEO budget since 2018, with the average budget now at 22%.
• The main reason for this appears to be resource and budget shortage, with 60% of marketers stating this as the main reason they don’t spend more.
• In 2018, 30% of marketers said they didn’t know how to effectively measure and understand the results from their SEO activity.
• 48% of internet users have posted an online review in the past month With 76% of internet users buying products online each month, a new report by GlobalWebIndex has delved into the factors that influence consumers to promote brands online.
• Interestingly, the report states that, globally, 48% of internet users have posted a review of a product or service in the past month.
• This figure has consistently increased over the past two years, rising from 42% in Q2 2017.
• The report also suggests that there are more people posting reviews than using them to inform their purchasing decisions, as just 36% use consumer reviews for product research.
• When it comes to the reasons for brand advocacy, 48% of global internet users say that high-quality products motivate them to promote a brand online, making this the most important incentive among the 11 brand advocacy motivations tracked in the study.
• How to encourage online reviews (and reasons why you should) Continuous-scroll feeds generate 20% more attentiveness With attention spans dropping from 12 seconds in 2000 to just eight seconds in 2018, a new study by Nielsen has aimed to pinpoint when and how consumers are the most engaged.
• Neilsen found participants displayed an 8% lower cognitive load at the end of an article, compared to any other point during the article reading experience.
• Further to this, the study found that participants are 20% more attentive when presented with a continuous scroll feed compared to articles without content recommendations at the bottom.
• What’s more, participants generated a 17% higher emotional response to the feed than to any kind of finite end of article experience.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: Out of those surveyed, 61% of consumers stated that they have switched brands at least once in the last year.
• ‘Automotive’ and ‘Supermarkets’ saw the highest percentage of customers say they are willing to switch brands due to new opportunities, with 70% and 68% of customers stating this.
• Card payments accounted for 80% of UK payments in 2018 The British Retail Consortium has revealed that card payments accounted for 80% of all payments in the UK in 2018, with debit cards remaining the most popular method of payment (accounting for almost three-in-five transactions).
• 3% in 2018, while the value of those cash transactions fell from almost 28% to 20% over the same period.
• The reason for this mistrust could be because 35% of people find that the information they search for online is ‘often’ inaccurate.
• Interestingly, only 36% of marketers ‘strongly agree’ that customers feel confident and trust in the brand information that they are getting from search engines.
• Fifty percent of B2B decision-makers say they lack funding from senior management to execute digital transformation programs, while 57% of B2Bs agree they have a culture resistant to change and adoption of digital technologies.
• The good news is that 89% of B2B decision-makers expect their budgets for digital projects to increase in 2020.
• What’s more, businesses are on track to provide more personalised experiences, with 21% of respondents believing that delivering this through digital channels is a significant opportunity for their company.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: 27% of UK retailers do not communicate with shoppers during the delivery period A new study by ParcelLab has delved into the shipping and delivery processes of the top 100 online retailers in the UK (based on the analysis of orders from 100 online shops).
• Interestingly, the gender imbalance is even noticeable amongst more “female-friendly” apps like Bumble (where female users have to send the first message), whose user base is over 80% male.
• 38% of small businesses in the US skip social media A survey from Visual Objects of 529 small business owners and managers in the US has revealed that a surprising number of small businesses do not use social media as a marketing tool.
• In the survey, 22% of respondents said they do not currently use social media for their business, while a further 16% said they don’t and are unlikely to in future.
• 29% of those surveyed use social media to share images or infographics, compared to just 16% who use video.
• Within paid social, Facebook accounts for 73% of all traffic, 89% of all orders, and 86% of the total order value.
• In organic social, Facebook represents 53% of traffic, 59% of orders, and 56% of the total order value.
• Meanwhile, Instagram generates 41% of all organic social traffic, 41% of all organic orders, and 43% of the total organic social order value.
• On the paid social side, Instagram generates 16% of all traffic, 10% of all orders and 14% of the total order value.
• In the survey, 64% of respondents cited misuse of data as the number one driver of distrust, followed by 26% of people that said automation and not creating enough jobs.
• Beyond the misuse of personal data, 36% of people in the UK cite tech companies not paying enough tax, and 28% cite creating excessive wealth as drivers of distrust.
• In India, China, and Brazil, more than 80% of people believe that the pace of technology change is too fast today.
• Across the 24 countries in the study, 57% of people also believe this to be the case.
• Peter Austin of Fresh Relevance (martech) 9 April 2019 “Re:UK retailers do not communicate with shoppers during the delivery period … just 11% communicate with their customers directly during the shipping period.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: In a survey of 2,004 consumers ranging from 18 to 71 years old, McGuffin found that 72% of respondents would pay for YouTube (if there was no free alternative), with this group willing to pay an average subscription fee of $4.
• It was also found that women would pay 20% more than men for Google Maps, Facebook and Pinterest.
• Meanwhile, millennials would pay 78% more for Instagram and 42% more for Google Maps than baby boomers.
• For Gen Z, Mobile isn’t just the primary device to watch social content, it is also the primary device for watching Netflix, with 40% using mobile as a primary device for the online streaming platform.
• This is compared to just 22% of millennials who watch Netflix this way.
• Why social proof works so well when engaging Gen Z US wearables market reaches $2 billion in Q2 2019 The North American wearables market reached $2 billion in Q2 2019, according to new data from Canalys, with shipments up 38% at 7.
• 7% of the market share, however, it managed to generate significant annual growth of 121%.
• As a result of this, 26% of respondents report that they find it difficult to forecast accurately, and 22% admit that they struggle to calculate the value of SEO activity.
• Meanwhile, 37% of respondents cited a lack of investment in specialist tools as the main barrier preventing them from making accurate forecasts.
• Twenty-five percent also report that they currently do not feel like they receive enough training on how to make accurate forecasts, and 17% admitted to having received no forecasting training at all in their career.
• 6% (compared to +22% in 2018), contributing to a low overall growth for home and garden of +5.
• 9% In more retail news, Kantar revealed this week that Lidl’s market share has hit a record high of 5.
• The same applies to Facebook Live, which is far and away the platform’s leader in interactions but is utilised in only 4% of posts.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: From a survey of 1,2001 eight to 19 year olds in the UK, it found that 54% of those aged 16-19 have either deliberately bought from or stopped using a brand because of its ethics.
• What’s more, 63% of young people aged 16 and over are more likely to buy from a brand if it supports a cause or charity important to them.
• 69% of teens believe that brands overstate how much they support good causes, while 69% also think they exaggerate how much they do to look after the environment.
• The study also found that 34% of users who uninstall an app are willing to re-download it again further down the line.
• As well as the 76% of people who were exposed to ads but claimed they didn’t see them, some consumers actually over-reported ad exposure.
• 19% of people who definitely weren’t exposed to test ads claimed that they had seen them.
• It found that Halloween conversion rates beat out standard emails by 11%, while conversion rates for Black Friday emails were 13% higher than business-as-usual (despite clicks and CTO being lower).
• Similarly, while open rates for Cyber Monday emails in 2017 were almost 2% behind those of BAU emails, these emails were almost twice as effective in converting clickers to purchases.
• 89 content marketing statistics to improve results in 2022. – Podium: ) In 2020 during a survey among marketers in North America, 43% stated they had already documented a strategy using content to market their brand.
• ) In 2019, 77% of companies stated they already had a strategy involving content in place.
• ) In 2020, 87% of companies stated brand awareness was a goal their brand managed to achieve due to content marketing.
• ) In 2020, the leading goals achieved by companies were building credibility/trust (81%), educating their audience (79%), generating leads (75%), and building loyalty with existing customers (68%).
• ) In 2020, 20% of marketing professionals agreed that customers read their content, and 44% moderately agreed with this statement.
• ) B2B marketers used these strategies that increased in popularity:writing a blog (52%), creating social content (40%), and sending email newsletters to help generate leads (40%).
• ) In 2019, 94% of marketers said they used social media as a part of their marketing efforts, and 80% said they also used a blog post or a short article in their campaigns.
• ) Over 38% of Internet users between 18-29 stated they had read a blog post in the last four weeks, making this a relevant tactic to increase leads.
• ) In 2019, almost 50% of respondents said their customers estimated spending is below $10,000, making content marketing fairly inexpensive compared to other forms of advertising.
• ) In North America, 30%-40% of B2B and B2C marketers planned to increase their marketing budget reserved for content in 2020.
• ) In 2019, 59% of B2C marketers stated that they were increasing their content marketing spending in 2020.
• ) In 2020, 46% of respondents said they were planning on increasing their B2B content marketing spending.
• ) In 2019, 25% of survey respondents said their content strategy was handled by a centralized group.
• The results were that 60% of respondents said their audience most valued case studies, and 34% said the same thing about infographics and photos.
• in 2019, 55% of survey respondents considered articles and blog posts as the most valuable content for moving their prospects through their sales funnel.
• ) In 2019, 43% of respondents also said reviews and customer testimonials helped prospects move through their company’s sales funnel.
• ) 72% of businesses indicated that they were spending less on physical events due to the pandemic.
• ) Due to the Covid-19 pandemic, 67% of marketers say they were using virtual events as a part of their content marketing strategies.
• ) 68% of industry professionals stated they decided to replace their live events with webinars due to the pandemic.
• ) In 2020, over 87% of survey respondents said they had increased reliance on their social media posts since the beginning of the pandemic, and 65% mentioned video content as well.
• ) Due to Covid-19, 43% of survey respondents said they had already introduced revisions to their previously planned budgets or projected revenue.
• ) Since the pandemic, 44% of marketers said their content marketing budget might decrease in the future.
• ) There was an average 24% decrease in the media and marketing budget due to Covid-19.
• ) In 2020, due to the Covid-19 pandemic, 19% of responding marketers reported that they focused on increasing engagement with their target audience.
• ) In 2020, over 43% of respondents stated that they had adapted the tone of their content to the state of the world due to the pandemic and 19% stated they increased engagement with their audience.
• ) Roughly 24% of marketers plan to increase their spending on content marketing in B2B and B2C.
• ) In 2020 during a survey among marketers in North America, 43% stated they had already documented a strategy using content to market their brand.
• ) In 2019, 77% of companies stated they already had a strategy involving content in place.
• ) In 2020, 87% of companies stated brand awareness was a goal their brand managed to achieve due to content marketing.
• ) In 2020, the leading goals achieved by companies were building credibility/trust (81%), educating their audience (79%), generating leads (75%), and building loyalty with existing customers (68%).
• ) In 2020, 20% of marketing professionals agreed that customers read their content, and 44% moderately agreed with this statement.
• ) B2B marketers used these strategies that increased in popularity:writing a blog (52%), creating social content (40%), and sending email newsletters to help generate leads (40%).
• ) In 2019, 94% of marketers said they used social media as a part of their marketing efforts, and 80% said they also used a blog post or a short article in their campaigns.
• ) Over 38% of Internet users between 18-29 stated they had read a blog post in the last four weeks, making this a relevant tactic to increase leads.
• ) In 2019, almost 50% of respondents said their customers estimated spending is below $10,000, making content marketing fairly inexpensive compared to other forms of advertising.
• ) In North America, 30%-40% of B2B and B2C marketers planned to increase their marketing budget reserved for content in 2020.
• ) In 2019, 59% of B2C marketers stated that they were increasing their content marketing spending in 2020.
• ) In 2020, 46% of respondents said they were planning on increasing their B2B content marketing spending.
• ) In 2019, 25% of survey respondents said their content strategy was handled by a centralized group.
• The results were that 60% of respondents said their audience most valued case studies, and 34% said the same thing about infographics and photos.
• in 2019, 55% of survey respondents considered articles and blog posts as the most valuable content for moving their prospects through their sales funnel.
• ) In 2019, 43% of respondents also said reviews and customer testimonials helped prospects move through their company’s sales funnel.
• ) 72% of businesses indicated that they were spending less on physical events due to the pandemic.
• ) Due to the Covid-19 pandemic, 67% of marketers say they were using virtual events as a part of their content marketing strategies.
• ) 68% of industry professionals stated they decided to replace their live events with webinars due to the pandemic.
• ) In 2020, over 87% of survey respondents said they had increased reliance on their social media posts since the beginning of the pandemic, and 65% mentioned video content as well.
• ) Due to Covid-19, 43% of survey respondents said they had already introduced revisions to their previously planned budgets or projected revenue.
• ) Since the pandemic, 44% of marketers said their content marketing budget might decrease in the future.
• ) There was an average 24% decrease in the media and marketing budget due to Covid-19.
• ) In 2020, due to the Covid-19 pandemic, 19% of responding marketers reported that they focused on increasing engagement with their target audience.
• ) In 2020, over 43% of respondents stated that they had adapted the tone of their content to the state of the world due to the pandemic and 19% stated they increased engagement with their audience.
• ) Roughly 24% of marketers plan to increase their spending on content marketing in B2B and B2C.
• The best digital marketing stats of the week: Retailers cut YouTube ad spend by 20% year on year Retailers have cut YouTube ad spend by 20% year on year, according to new analysis by MediaRadar (when comparing January to May of 2018 to January to May of 2019).
• It found that, out of the 200 retailers advertising on YouTube, only 13% spent more this year.
• Deep diving into both these categories, MediaRadar observed that the tech industry remained flat in terms of share of YouTube ad revenue year-over-year (26% in both 2018 and 2019, respectively).
• In comparison, media and entertainment increased advertising on the platform, accounting for 3% more of YouTube’s ad revenue in 2019 than 2018.
• Learn more Getting to Grips with Digital Advertising – Best Practice Guide 62% of consumers place higher trust in companies whose AI interactions are perceived as ethical The ethical use of AI is now key to winning consumer trust, according to a new study from Capgemini.
• The global study – surveying 1,580 executives and 4,400 global consumers – found that 62% of consumers would place higher trust in a company whose AI interactions they perceived as ethical.
• Sixty one percent of consumers said they would share positive experiences with friends and family, 59% said that they would have higher loyalty to the company, and 55% said that they would purchase more products and provide high ratings and positive feedback on social media.
• 47% of respondents believe they have experienced at least two types of uses of AI that resulted in ethical issues in the last two to three years, while 74% said they want more transparency when a service is powered by AI.
• 53% of executives now consider that it is important to ensure that AI systems are ethical and transparent.
• Retailers saw a heightened level of customer acquisition in November and December, with nearly 25% of first-time purchases occurring in these two months alone.
• 6%) of all triggered email types, followed closely by price decrease (0.
• Across verticals and spender types, high-spenders were found to have the highest open rates (up to 50%), click rates (up to 17%), and conversion rates (up to 94%).
• Out of the brands analysed in the study, just 6% grew market share over one year, and only six in 10 managed to sustained that gain over three years.
• Less than one in 10 of the 6% of brands that grew market share over a year then went on to improve on their initial gain.
• Furthermore, brands that adopt a growth strategy relevant to their market position grow 45% faster than those that only grow by penetration.
• Forty-seven percent of businesses identified Gen Z as the most difficult, followed by 23% who said ’Baby Boomers’, and 16% who cited ‘Generation X’.
• When asked how they plan to market to this generation, 22% of respondents said they will ‘commit to a social cause’, 20% said ‘increase use of influencers’, and 15% said ’be more transparent’.
• Why social proof works so well when engaging Gen Z 66% of UK brands view digital audio as an important part of media strategy The value of digital audio advertising is being recognised by both brands and agencies in the UK, according to a new report by DAX.
• In a survey of 215 brand and media agency respondents, 86% of agencies and 66% of advertisers said they now see digital audio as an important part of most media strategies.
• Eighty-five percent of survey respondents said they consider digital audio to be effective at reaching consumers ‘on the go’, while 81% agree the channel enables advertisers to be ‘contextually relevant’ with brand communications.
• As a result of this, on average, more than 40% of respondents’ advertising campaigns throughout the past 12 months has included digital audio – up from 33% in a previous study.
• 53% said it did so, above 50% who said social media, and 39% who said digital video advertising.
• 8 B2C Content Marketing Statistics and Trends for 2021: More than 80% of B2C content marketers saw budgets stay the same or increase in the second half of 2020.
• As with budgets, we saw that on the B2C side, the majority of content marketing teams stayed the same size, and more than a quarter (27%) increased in size over the last year.
• 49% of B2C organizations outsource at least some content marketing activities.
• In the previous point, I note that while most organizations have kept their teams the same size, 40% have made some changes.
• Of the activities organizations outsource, 75% outsource content creation.
• A majority of organizations changed their targeting/messaging strategy and/or editorial calendar, yet only 34% reexamined their customer journeys.
• According to the report, “Virtual events/webinars/online courses increased to 39% from 27% […] Livestreaming content increased to 35% from 13%.
• According to the report, organic social media use is similar to last year’s report, with two exceptions:“Instagram increased to 81% from 74%.
• Yet, the report says, “72% of B2C marketers used paid channels to distribute content in the last 12 months, compared with 85% the previous year.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: 43% of marketing roles at risk from automation New data from ONS has revealed the risk of automation to a range of occupations in the UK, with around 1.
• According to the figures, 43% of marketing roles are at a risk from automation, while more senior marketing directors at just 28%.
• Meanwhile, recent figures from IDM have identified AI & machine learning skills as the most important area organisations must address, with 87% of marketers stating that these skills are already vital to their organisation’s success.
• However, this expertise has the largest skills gap present in the data and marketing industry, with a 25% difference between perceived importance for marketers’ current roles and for future career progression.
• Marketer’s Guide to AI and Machine Learning 59% of consumers prefer email over other forms of brand communication A new infographic from the DMA shows that the majority of consumers still prefer brands to contact them via email – despite the popularity of other channels such as social media.
• 57% of consumers highlighted their preference for the channel when it comes to ‘pre-purchase’ messages, as did 57% for ‘post-purchase’, and 48% for ‘customer service’ communication.
• For the second-most preferred option, 15% of consumers said online ads for ’pre-purchase’ communication.
• For ‘post-purchase’ and ‘customer service’, 27% and 25% said their second preference was to have these via text messages.
• The infographic also states that 24% of consumers cite Amazon as the brand that sends them the ‘best’ emails.
• However, 49% of consumers couldn’t or wouldn’t name a brand that they think is doing email well.
• In a survey of 162 marketing professionals, 61% of respondents agreed that identifying the right influencers to reach their goals is a pressing issue.
• In terms of picking the right influencers, content quality was ranked as the number one factor when doing so, with 81% of respondents suggesting that this is a key differentiator.
• Interestingly, 78% also cited having the right target audience, with engagement rates in third at 73%.
• 60% of consumers are more likely to buy again from a brand that communicates with them directly after a sale A Narvar survey of 2,000 consumers has revealed that 60% of consumers want brands and retailers to directly communicate with them after a sale.
• Affluent consumers make up 16% of the global online population A new report by GlobalWebIndex delves into affluent consumers and their technology and social media habits.
• The report reveals that, globally, affluent consumers make up 16% of the online population.
• Interestingly, while affluent consumers are 52% more likely to be high or heavy users of physical press (where luxury marketing spend is traditionally focused), it comes at the bottom of media consumption segmentation.
• Social media comes first, with 59% of affluent consumers being high or heavy users of it.
• Retail Data:100 Stats About Retail, eCommerce & Digital Marketing | nChannel Blog: [1] 93% of retailers that seek a POS want inventory management capabilities built in.
• [11] 60% of adult Americans are happy to know they won’t have to shop in a crowded mall or store.
• [11] 71% of shoppers believe they will get a better deal online than in stores.
• [13] Generation X spends $561 on average online, 15% more online than Generation Y who spends $489.
• [14] Despite having ultra-low incomes, Generation Z spends the highest percentage (9%) of their income online.
• [16] 40% of men and 33% of women aged 18-34 say they would ideally “buy everything online.
• [1] 65% of retailers have a shopping cart abandonment rate that is higher than 50% [3] 66% of online consumers abandon their cart because of problems with the payment process.
• [8] 23% of shoppers will abandon their shopping cart if they are forced to register an account.
• [12] 54% of shoppers will purchase products left in shopping carts, if those products are offered at a lower price.
• [12] 28% of shoppers will abandon their shopping cart if presented with unexpected shipping costs.
• [20] 29% of sellers aren’t satisfied with their channel management software.
• [20] Customer Experience Statistics By 2016, 89% of companies plan to compete on the basis of customer experience.
• [1] 63% of consumers feel a coupon is the most valuable form of mobile marketing.
• [7] 89% of consumers began doing business with a competitor following a poor customer experience.
• [17] 65% of consumers have cut ties with a brand over a single poor customer service experience.
• [17] 63% of online consumers said they were more likely to return to a website that offers live chat.
• [17] 40% of global consumers said they prefer self-service over human contact for their future interactions with companies.
• [17] 64% of people think that customer experience is more important than price in their choice of a brand.
• [18] Customer Loyalty Statistics The probability of selling to a new customer is between 5 and 20%.
• The probability of selling to an existing customer is between 60 and 70%.
• [19] 62% of consumers feel that the brands that they’re most loyal to have not done enough to reward them.
• [19] If you resolve a complaint in your customer’s favor, he or she will do business with you again 70% of the time.
• [1] 94% of total retail sales are still generated in brick & mortar stores.
• [1] 72% of young shoppers research online before purchasing in a store.
• [1] 55% of online shoppers would prefer to buy from a merchant with a physical store presence over an online-only retailer.
• [1] 84% believe that retailers should be doing more to integrate their online and offline channels.
• [1] Only 8% of companies said they currently provide a ‘very integrated’ customer experience.
• [17] Mobile Commerce Statistics 57% will not recommend a retailer with a poorly designed mobile site.
• consumers (72%) now own smartphones and 93 million (38%) now own tablets.
• [6] 53% of consumers are willing to share their current location to receive more relevant advertising.
• [7] 57% of consumers are more likely to engage with location-based advertising.
• [8] 43% of consumers will visit a competitor’s site next after a negative mobile shopping experience.
• [14] 94% of smartphone users look for local information on their device.
• [4] 40% of 18- to 34-year-olds are likely to use social networks for gift ideas.
• [7] 78% of small businesses attract new customers and engage current ones using social media.
• [8] 41% of independent retailers rate social media as a “very effective” marketing tactic.
• [8] 71% of consumers who experience positive social media care are likely to recommend that brand to others.
• [22] Social commerce is predicted to be 5% of online retail revenue in 2015.
• [22] 33% of consumers have reacted to a promotion on a brand’s social media page.
• [8] 55% of shoppers say that online reviews influence their buying decision.
• [13] 73% of consumers prefer to do business with brands that personalize shopping experiences.
• [15] Statistics About Digital Marketing & SEO 54% would consider ending their relationship with a retailer if they are not given tailor-made, relevant content and offers.
• [3] 42% of independent retailers rate email marketing as a “very effective” marketing tactic.
• [8] Small retailers’ average marketing budget is 4-5% of gross revenue.
• [13] 91% of eCommerce retailers saw a lift in their SEO rank thanks to social referrals.
• [15] Statistics About Shipping, Fulfillment & Returns 64% of retail shoppers think delivery speed is important when purchasing online.
• [9] 44% of shoppers are more likely to purchase online if they can pick up in the store.
• [11] 62% of shoppers are more likely to purchase online if they can return the item in the store.
• [11] 83% of shoppers would shop online more, knowing they could have free shipping.
• [11] 27% would purchase an item that costs more than $1,000 if offered free returns.
• [8] Next to the register merchandise is only 1% of total retail space, but can account for 7% of revenue [8] Consumers spend 12-18% more when using a credit card versus cash.
• [16] 87% of global consumers factor in Corporate Social Responsibility into their purchase decisions.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: Complaints to ICO have increased 113% post-GDPR A new study by GDPRPLAN.
• From its survey, it found that 46% of the internet population in the US say they have decreased time spent on social networks, while 41% of people say the same in the UK.
• Interestingly, younger people are the most keen to decrease their daily time on social media, with 58% of 16 to 24 year olds citing this desire, versus 43% of 35 to 44 year olds.
• 5%), the high street actually performed quite robustly, seeing a decline in footfall of just 1% between 12pm and 2pm.
• Interestingly, London’s West End appeared to be the exception, with the area seeing a ‘Boxing Day bounce’ of 15% increased footfall.
• 3 million Tweets, 18 million likes, and 60% of all interactions taking the form of retweets.
• 15,000 Tweets relating to Love Island mentioned Missguided, while 56% of all brand mentions also happened across Love Island-related posts on Instagram, forums, and blogs.
• Despite this, penetration in the US is said to be higher at 26% of internet users, compared to 10% in China.
• 4% of internet users have also used a smart speaker, a figure higher than both France and Germany where adoption is at 14% and 17.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: 83% of senior marketers feel ‘data blind’ A new report by Domo has found that 83% of senior marketers feel ‘data blind’ due to the sheer volume of analytics they have to deal with as part of their day-to-day role.
• In a survey of 681 marketers from around the world, 83% of respondents said they are struggling to adapt to the volume of data, while 80% of this group feel the industry as a whole focuses on too many performance metrics.
• Almost half of respondents said the number of data channels and sources has made it more difficult to plan for the long-term, and 26% said a focus on short-term analytics, rather than long-term results, is one of the biggest challenges in the sector.
• However, 30% believe it’s the CTO and the IT department that should shoulder the responsibility for data insights, while 20% argue that they should be the CEO’s remit.
• Currently, the IAB defines viewability as 50% of pixels visible on-screen for two consecutive seconds.
• When 1,000 UK consumer respondents were shown two ads for just two consecutive seconds, with just 50% of pixels visible on-screen, 75% did not remember what brand the ad was related to.
• In a further survey, Outbrain also found that 50% of consumer respondents knowingly engage with advertising, and out of those 50%, one in two consumers take action after a brand interaction.
• In a survey of 190 UK digital advertising executives, 25% were unsure of how the IAB defines a viewable ad, with 19% believing that more than 50% of the pixels had to appear on-screen for more than three consecutive seconds.
• In a survey of 15,188 global consumers who shop online at least once a month, just 26% of consumers under 25 say Amazon is best at having the brands they want, compared to 35% of all consumers.
• 53% of people aged 16 to 24 prefer to shop with a brand or retailer that has a physical store – well above the survey average of 48%.
• In a survey of 2,000 adults in the US, 87% of respondents said they have reached out to a company and only had the option to communicate through automated communications, such as a chatbot.
• Of this 87%, 52% said they feel frustrated and 18% feel angry at not being able to chat to a human.
• While 49% of consumers would trust AI-generated advice for retail item information, only 20% would trust AI-generated advice for healthcare information and just 19% would trust AI-generated advice for financial services.
• Meanwhile, 38% of consumers say they’d trust AI-generated advice for hospitality, such as checking in for a flight, or comparing flight and hotel options or restaurant recommendations.
• Gen Z and Millennials more likely to shop in-store than online this year According to a recent study by Oracle NetSuite, Wakefield Research, and The Retail Doctor, retailers are failing to tailor the in-store shopping experience, with 44% making no progress in this area whatsoever.
• Despite the stereotype of being “digital natives”, 43% of Gen Z and Millennials said they are most likely to do more in-store shopping than online this year.
• Gen Z and Millennials also had the most positive view of the current retail environment, with 57% feeling like it was more inviting.
• Finally, despite 98% of retail executives believing that engaging customers on social media is important for building stronger relationships, just 12% of consumers think their engagement with brands on social media has a significant impact on the way they think or feel about a brand.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: Meanwhile, 70% agree that they are worried about data privacy and tracking when it comes to their activities and interactions online.
• One statistic from RSA Security, cited in the report, showed that only 17% of global consumers believed that personalised advertisements were ethical.
• Baby Boomers and prior generations seem to be the most concerned about both data privacy/tracking (77%) and commercial data use (72%) and this generally declines throughout following generations.
• A smaller 60% of both Gen Z and Millennials are concerned about the commercial use of data, while Gen Z are marginally more concerned than their Millennial peers about data privacy and tracking (67% vs.
• 12 stats that show the importance of personalisation 42% of US B2B companies are ‘early’ in their brand purpose journey Forty two percent of US-based B2B companies claim that they are ‘early’ in their brand purpose journey, according to new research from consultancy Carol Cone On Purpose.
• A huge 93% of respondents said that they are still on the brand purpose journey and have not yet completed it.
• The majority (82%) believe organisations with strong brand purpose experience ‘greater success than those without’, while others say it would ‘support recruiting’ (75%) and that it would help ‘motivate sales teams’ (73%).
• 5% 3 month on 3 month, whereas household goods stores and food stores saw smaller declines of -0.
• Online sales accounted for 19% of all retailing as of January, which was slightly down from 19.
• 3% in non-food stores is thought to have contributed to this slight upturn in volume.
• 41% of the UK workforce use WhatsApp for professional purposes New insight from Guild suggests that as many as 41% of the UK workforce use WhatsApp for professional purposes.
• The study, which surveyed over 1200 employees from around the country, claims that this figure is even higher for those aged under 45 years old (53%).
• They’re even more likely to use the platform for work purposes if they live in the Greater London area (58%).
• More than 2000 UK-based users took part in the survey, 62% of whom have more than 150 connections through the platform.
• Among the findings, respondents claimed that LinkedIn was becoming ‘too cluttered’ (38%), and ‘full of spam’ (28%) to be functional for effective networking.
• Interestingly, 59% believe that LinkedIn is mainly for ‘recruitment, hiring or finding a job’, and the majority admit that they have met fewer than 50% of their connections.
• Indeed, despite its mission to ‘connect the world’s professionals and allow them to be successful’, just under 9% of over 55s (who are more likely to hold senior positions) feel that ‘LinkedIn is for networking with your most valuable professional connections’.
• Labour voters were slightly more likely to use social media as a source of news than Conservative voters (67% vs.
• 57%), whereas more Conservative voters preferred to watch news on their TVs than Labour voters (59% vs.
• Intriguingly, only 14% of those surveyed said that they had seen an online political ad, despite the large social media advertising budgets put aside by political parties.
• In contrast, 63% had read a print leaflet, but only 9% were visited at home by a representative leading up to polling day.
• The most positively mentioned website of those studied was MySingleFriend (83%), followed by EHarmony (53%) and Doing Something (52%).
• Meanwhile, Bumble was rated highest for positive experiences but received significantly lower favourable mentions than the MySingleFriend website (just 56%).
• Feeld and Grindr were ranked second and third amongst apps with 49% and 46% respectively.
• There’s always an exception to the rule and this time it’s veteran matchmaker Match, which has both website and app platforms – its website actually received fewer positive mentions than its app did (34% vs.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: 21% of online shoppers have made a direct purchase from a social media ad A new report by Episerver – based on a survey of more than 4,500 shoppers in eight countries – has highlighted consumer attitudes to digital commerce.
• The survey found that the number of consumers researching items with voice-assisted devices such as Amazon Echo and Google Home has increased 83% year-on-year.
• Despite this, it appears there is still a disconnect between browsing and buying, with just 17% of respondents saying they make voice purchases at least once a month or more frequently.
• 43% of consumers cite a lack of security features as the number one reason they won’t make more purchases via voice-enabled devices, while 35% say it is down to a lack of product images.
• Elsewhere, the report highlights how social media plays a key role in people’s path towards purchase, as 63% of respondents have clicked on a social media ad, with 33% of those going on to make a direct purchase as a result.
• The survey found that internet users are largely sceptical of social media, with only 8% believing that three-quarters or more of the information they get from social media is true.
• Influencers were found to generate even less trust than the medium, with just 4% of internet users believing information that comes from influencers is mostly truthful.
• Interestingly, governments are seen as more trustworthy, with 12% of global internet users saying that information shared by governments is mostly truthful.
• 88% of brands are using AI, yet 55% are disappointed with the results A new study by Forrester has delved into how marketers feel about the role of artificial intelligence in the industry.
• The study found that adoption of AI-powered marketing has shot up from 43% in 2016 to 88% today, reflecting AI’s increasing advances in martech, as well as marketers’ need for better decisions, greater productivity, and faster execution.
• However, of those that have adopted an AI-driven marketing solution, 74% of respondents reported using AI in an “assistive” fashion.
• Only 26% of marketers reported using autonomous AI, which can act on its own insights and work collaboratively with marketers (without adding manual work).
• An overview of AI copywriting Forrester found that respondents’ responses to questions about their martech stack complexity revealed errors common of other manual technologies:47% blamed their complicated martech stacks for their customer engagement tactics not being as relevant as they should be.
• Another 37% said it’s the reason customer engagement is not delivered in the optimal channel.
• Marketers allocate more budget to email as ROI increases The latest research from the DMA has revealed that, on average, email now receives 17% of the total resources allocated to marketing budgets, with this figure increasing from 11% in 2017.
• The DMA also states that 74% of marketers report seeing an increase in email open rates in the past 12 months, while 75% also report an increase in click through rates.
• 41% of marketers say they saw a reduction in opt-out rates, and 55% saw a reduction in spam complaints.
• Finally, the percentage of marketers agreeing that they have a good or advanced expertise in email marketing has risen from 30% to 40% since the DMA’s previous survey back in 2017.
• US digital ad revenues surpassed $100bn in 2018 According to the IAB Internet Advertising Revenue report, US digital advertising revenues surpassed $100bn in 2018, increasing 22% from the previous year to hit a landmark $107.
• Meanwhile, digital video saw an increase of 37%, and digital video on mobile devices rose 64% to reach $10.
• Also on the rise is ad revenue from digital audio, increasing 23% to reach $2.
• 100+ Digital Marketing Statistics to Help You Compete in 2024: (HubSpot) 46% of businesses plan to increase their inbound marketing content creation spending in 2023.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 3% of marketers publish content at least weekly.
• (GrowthBar) 83% of marketers say it’s better to focus on quality rather than quantity of content, even if it means posting less often.
• (Hubspot) Blog posts with videos get 157% more search traffic than those that don’t.
• (First Page Sage) 90% of searches are done on Google (search, image search, shopping, etc.
• (Barlliance) Monday’s average open rate is 22%, the highest of the week.
• (Campaign Monitor) Sending one relevant email newsletter per week will show a 33% higher open rate than if you sent two or more emails.
• 66% of markets generate leads from social media after spending only six hours per week on social media marketing.
• 5% of CMOs say they’ll increase their budget for marketing technology such as marketing automation tools.
• (Gartner) 53% of marketers say webinars are the top-of-the-funnel format that generates the most high-quality leads.
• (Demand Gen Report) Only 33% of marketers use live chat as a conversion tool.
• 93% of brands say they got new customers due to the videos posted on their social media accounts.
• (Hubspot) 66% of people said they’d prefer to watch a short video to learn about a product or service, while 18% would instead read a text-based article, website, or post.
• (Elite Content Marketer) 84% of people that watch explainer videos decided to purchase after watching the video.
• (Hubspot) 87% of businesses are already using video as a digital marketing outlet.
• (Boast) 83% of markets say that video has helped lengthen the amount of time visitors spend on their website.
• (Moovly) 83% of consumers will share video with their friends if it provides content they enjoy (Hubspot) 52% of marketers say videos ranging from one to three minutes long have been most successful for their content marketing (Content Marketing Institute) 6.
• 51% of people who listen to 5 or more hours of podcasts per week say they pay more attention to ads on podcasts than ads on other media.
• (Edison Research) 38% of podcast listeners have bought something that was mentioned on a podcast.
• (Buzzsprout) 45% of podcast listeners have a household income over $250,000.
• (Forbes) Podcast advertising makes up 3% of overall ad spend as opposed to 20% on video, 16% on social media, 14% on display, and 13% on search.
• (Media Post) 56% of podcast listeners say they would recommend a product or service to others after hearing an advertisement on a podcast.
• (AdResultsMedia) 64% of podcast listeners say they welcome and appreciate advertising on podcasts and are grateful to the brands that support their favorite shows.
• Social Media Marketing Statistics When it comes to social media marketing, keep the following social media statistics in mind:84% of consumers expect brands to create their own content rather than farming it out to consumers.
• (Smallbizgenius) 71% of Gen Z-ers prefer to discover new products on social media.
• (Hubspot) 71% of consumers who’ve had a positive experience with a brand on a social media platform are likely to recommend that brand to friends and family.
• (LYFE Marketing) 44% of users shop for products on Instagram weekly (and 28% of those shopping activities are pre-planned.
• (Instagram) Shoppers on Pinterest have 85% larger shopping carts than buyers on other platforms (and spend twice as much monthly).
• 52% of consumers value increased sustainability efforts from brands, an effect of the pandemic’s forced changes in buying habits.
• (NetQuid) 41% of brands use influencer marketing to increase brand awareness.
• (DBS Interactive) In the USA, 51% of internet users shop with the help of voice assistance features.
• (Wootsuit) 58% of consumers took advantage of voice search to find local business information.
• (Siteimprove) 28% of people contact the business after doing a voice search.
• 61% of B2B marketer stated that SEO and organic traffic generate more leads than any other marketing initiative (including Google ads!
• (Hubspot) 86% of people ignore paid banner ads, only clicking on organic search results.
• (User Guiding) 53% of all trackable website traffic comes from organic search.
• (BrightEdge) The average organic click-through rate (CTR) the first Google desktop search result gets is 32%.
• (Ahrefs) 51% of shoppers surveyed use Google to research the purchases they plan to make online.
• (Oberlo) Physical stores are expected to account for 72% of retail sales by 2024, a drop from 87% in 2022, indicating that the future of retail was, and continues to be, digital.
• 76% of people will stop doing business with a company after only two poor customer experiences.
• (Venture Beat) 83% of consumers factor in customer service quality when deciding what to buy.
• (Khoros) 40% of users who have a negative experience on a brand’s mobile marketing website will go to its competitor.
• (Outer Box Design) 79% of shoppers expressed interest in auto-replenishment services and subscription models for their frequent purchases at the beginning of 2022.
• (Wicked Reports) 61% of consumers are willing to pay more to have their products delivered on the same day:but only 51% of retailers offer same-day delivery.
• ” By 2025, it is expected that 10% of all sales will be fulfilled this way.
• (Invesp) 87% of customers spend less or entirely abandon brands that lack effective customer service.
• (The Future of Commerce) 92% of consumers claim to be willing to buy again from channels that offer easy returns, whereas 79% expect free shipping on returns.
• Sales Statistics To buy or not to buy… is something you never want your customers to wonder… 33% of sales reps say they average 2-4 interactions with prospects in the sales process.
• (HubSpot) 86% of consumers will use at least 2 different channels (and 70% will use at least 3) when making a single purchase.
• (Zippia) 32% of sales professionals offer prospects freemium options, and about 90% of them say it’s moderately to highly effective at turning prospects into paying customers.
• (Zippia) Almost 90% of sales professionals try to upsell their customers, and nearly half of companies report up to 30% of their revenue comes from upselling.
• (HubSpot) More than 25% of sales professionals believe personalization was the most significant change in sales in 2022.
• Social Proof Statistics My cousin told me that her boyfriend’s sister said… 72% of people feel that social proof is more credible than when a brand talks about its products.
• (Tint) 60% of millennials are more likely to take advice from YouTube influencer marketing than traditional media personalities.
• (Review42) 28% of people say word-of-mouth is the most important factor in strengthening or eroding brand affinity.
• 4%, with downloadable white paper offerings being the most likely CTA type to convert (1.
• (First Page Sage) Although mobile is becoming the preferred method of search, mobile marketing has the lowest conversion rating at 2%, compared to 3% for both desktops and tablets (Meet Anshi) 81% of sales don’t happen until after receiving 7 or more communications from businesses.
• (Lead Pages) There’s an 86% improvement in conversion rates when video content is used on landing pages.
• (Wish Pond) Companies with 10-15 landing pages get 55% more leads than companies with fewer than 10.
• (HubSpot) Landing pages have a 160% higher conversion rate than other sign-up forms.
• Landing pages have an average of 23% conversion, followed by the interactive content Wheel of Fortune (10%), pop-ups (3%), and sign-up boxes (2%).
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: A survey of 950 Europe-based brand representatives revealed that 65% of brands in France, Germany, Italy, Spain, and the UK currently buy ads programmatically.
• Interestingly, 86% of these programmatically-active brands have now either fully or partially moved the function in-house.
• The extent to which brands have embraced programmatic in-house capabilities does vary, however, with 35% of brands in Germany and 32% in Spain fully moving programmatic in-house, compared with 48% of brands in the UK.
• Omni-channel shoppers spend more (and more often) than single-channel shoppers A new report by Adyen suggests that shoppers who regularly buy from a retailer both online as well as in-store spend 15% more per purchase than those who shop via just a single channel.
• Globally, the impact of omni-channel is even higher, with the study stating that those who shop across multiple channels spend 30% more per purchase.
• Meanwhile, four out of every five single channel purchases globally are made in-store, with 20% completed online.
• According to this data, UK ‘daytime’ TV audiences are almost twice as likely to engage with adverts as ‘peak time’ audiences are – 44% of web traffic that can be linked back to TV advertising comes from ad slots during the ‘daytime’ period, with only 24% coming from ‘peak time’ advertising.
• Monday is the most effective mid-week day for TV advertisers, while Wednesday is the least effective day of the week for TV advertising, with 50% less directly linkable online searches arising on the back of TV ads that air during this day than on Sundays.
• 60% of people selectively disable their ad-blockers on certain websites A report by GlobalWebIndex recently stated that 47% of people worldwide block ads.
• In a survey of 500 ad blockers, Visual Objects found that 60% of respondents have “whitelisted” or paused their ad blocker on a website.
• Out of the users who have whitelisted websites, 28% say they chose to disable the ad blocker because it prevented a page from loading.
• Meanwhile, 56% of ad blocker users say they have disabled the tool on social media platforms more than any other website, because social media ads are the least disruptive to their experience.
• Finally, 66% of people who use ad blockers say they customise their ad preferences on ad-supported websites.
• But despite the weather being a very different story this year – UK retail sales saw a slow growth of 5% year-on-year, meaning that monthly growth has fallen below the 12 month average of 10.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: This was an issue for 60% of respondents in 2018, but it is down to 49% in 2019.
• In terms of the top trends set to impact UX in the next five years, artificial intelligence came out top with respondents, cited by 80% overall.
• This is again in contrast to 2018, where AI was neck-and-neck with voice interfaces (which this year was cited by 68% of respondents as the most impactful trend).
• Asking which factors consumers consider as most important when they make decisions about what they spend their money, the majority of respondents (33%) cited the opinions of friends and family.
• Influencers were cited by just 4%, making it the least impactful factor in the survey.
• Just 21% of US respondents said Facebook was the most indispensable app in Q3 2019, declining from 29% in 2017.
• That being said, only 28% of respondents said they have a fully unified marketing strategy, largely because there are still gaps in the primary channels that marketers rely on.
• 81% of marketers are very confident or confident in data from in-store interactions, and 73% are confident in data from phone calls.
• However, while 56% have access to phone call data today, only 8% say it is the top source of data they use to inform personalisation.
• Marketers do plan to invest more time, resources, and monetary budget on offline data sources though, with 58% planning to invest more in in-store interactions, and 47% planning to spend more toward campaigns that drive phone calls.
• 44% of respondents said they prefer that brands send them communication informed by their past behaviour.
• However, 32% also said they rarely or never receive relevant communications from travel or hospitality brands that they’ve used before.
• 32% of respondents said travel and hospitality brands are emailing them too frequently, compared to 5% who said they don’t get enough emails.
• Another 41% say they see too many display ads, compared to 7% who don’t see enough.
• Finally, when asked about the kind of content they’d like to see more of, 52% of respondents said ‘information specifically about reservations or past travel,’ 43% said partner offers, and 40% said customer reviews or testimonials.
• Overall, video is now the primary ad format for leading Twitter advertisers, as they invested over 75% of their ad spend on videos post ads in 2019.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: 60% of digital marketing professionals plan to increase their Amazon digital ad spend in the next year Marin’s latest ‘State of Digital Advertising’ report has delved into how advertisers are spending their budgets in 2019.
• The study – based on a survey of 460 digital marketers – found that paid search remains the dominant digital ad channel, commanding 39% of total budget.
• This was followed by paid social, which claimed 18% of budget, and display which claimed 16%.
• Marin also found that brands are now spending almost as much of their paid social budget on Instagram (21%) as they are on Facebook (27).
• However, 67% of respondents said that Instagram spend tends to come from incremental budget rather than transferring from Facebook.
• Finally, the report suggests that advertisers are seeing increased potential in Amazon from an advertising perspective, with 60% of respondents planning to increase their Amazon spend over the next year.
• 55% of respondents said they started using Amazon because they see it as a significant growth opportunity, while one in four are looking to increase purchases at the lower end of the funnel.
• 2% of all live-streamed video hours during Q2 2019 Twitch is the number one platform for live video, according to new figures from StreamElements.
• Currently, 59% of marketers say they are already utilising the capabilities of programmatic audio to some extent, however, spend is low.
• 79% invest less than 10% of total ad spend on audio, and 41% allocate no budget to programmatic audio at all.
• Meanwhile, 63% of marketers cited achieving targeting efficiencies as a key driver for investing in programmatic audio, while 44% cited taking advantage of data insights.
• In a survey of 3,000 US consumers, IAB found that 48% of respondents shop from DTC brands, and that 84% of these shoppers are under the age of 54.
• The study also found that direct brand consumers are 83% more likely to go to a pop-up or physical store location pre-purchase, and are nearly 2.
• 71% of these consumers also say they usually share online about the brands they buy from, with 31% sharing brand-created content online.
• Ads are perceived 74% more favourably in high quality environments Finally, new research from Integral Ad Science (IAS) has found evidence to suggest that an ad’s environment has a dramatic impact on how people react to the ad.
• Overall, IAS found that ads viewed in high-quality mobile web environments were perceived 74% more favourably than the same advertisements seen in low-quality environments.
• In addition to ads being perceived more favourably, the study also found that high quality content can generate up to a 20% higher engagement rate and up to a 30% greater memorability among consumers than in low-quality environments.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: revenue increases by 48% in Q2 2019 Snap Inc, the parent company of Snapchat, has announced positive results for Q2 2019.
• In its earnings call, Snap said that it had boosted its user base by 8% to reach 203 million in Q2 this year, which beats its previous estimate of 192 million.
• Meanwhile, revenue increased 48% from the year before to reach $388 million in Q2.
• For example, audiences watching content on Discover every day has grown over 35% year-over-year, while the total daily time spent by users watching Discover increased by more than 60% year-over-year.
• The brand that has taken the biggest hit in the past year is New Look, dropping by 33% in search volume.
• It found that 34% of companies running native ads in Q1 of 2018 also did so in Q1 of 2019.
• 74% of native advertisers placed native ads programmatically in Q1 of 2019.
• 46% of marketers ‘struggle to deliver on consumer expectations’ A new report by Isobar has revealed that marketers are struggling to keep up with the demands of consumers.
• In a survey of 1,000 CMOs and senior-level marketers, 46% of CMOs said they ‘struggle to deliver on customer expectations today’ – but it is ‘the pace of customer expectations’ that is really holding back 57% of businesses.
• Meanwhile, marketers are seemingly playing a bigger role in business transformation, with 80% due to expand their responsibilities to include ‘product and services’.
• While 62% of CMOs say that ‘creative ideas’ are an agency’s most valuable asset, 46% of marketers say that they are average, below average, or weak at delivering ‘creativity and big ideas’ that build the brand and create an emotional connection.
• 2019 predicted to be “landmark year” for UK cinema advertising revenue There has been a 12% increase year-on-year in UK cinema ad spend during the first half of 2019, according to Digital Cinema Media (DCM).
• Consideration of Netflix on the rise, despite share price fall Netflix’s share price took a 10% hit earlier this month, after paid-subscription growth failed to meet investor expectations.
• According to data, 16% of the UK population already have a paid subscription account with Netflix, while 8% share an account with someone else, and another 1% have a free trial account.
• B2B Content Marketing Measurement Tips for 2021 (Statistics & Research): Measuring return-on-investment (ROI) of content marketing is critical to optimizing a strategy, but nearly half (46%) of B2B marketing professionals consider determining ROI to be a top challenge when it comes to measuring content marketing performance.
• 44% of B2B marketers also face a lack of budget and resources necessary to effectively measure strategic success.
• 66% of B2B marketers find it difficult to measure the performance of a content marketing strategy.
• Two-thirds (66%) of B2B marketers find it difficult to measure the performance of a content marketing strategy compared to one-third (34%) who find it to be either moderately or extremely easy.
• 57% describe this difficulty as moderate, while another quarter (25%) of those surveyed report that gauging the effectiveness of content marketing is moderately easy.
• 57% of B2B marketers find it moderately difficult to measure content marketing performance.
• 37% of B2B marketers are using 3-5 tools for measuring content marketing performance.
• One in five (21%) of B2B marketers report using six or more tools to measure content marketing performance.
• Another 37% of those surveyed say they use between three and five tools, and 29% are measuring performance with two tools or less.
• Over half (53%) of those surveyed put analytics tools at the top of the list.
• Customer Relationship Management (CRM) systems and marketing automation technologies are also critical to overall success according to 38% and 34% of B2B marketers, respectively.
• Conversion rate is the most important content marketing measurement metric, according to 50% of B2B marketers.
• About half of B2B marketers agree that conversion rate (50%) and website traffic (46%) are among the most important metrics to consider when measuring the overall performance of a content marketing strategy.
• Engagement on social media channels is also ranked high on the list of important metrics for 39% of those surveyed.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: Parenting blogs and forums are influential sources of information for 58% of Chinese mums and 43% of US mums.
• Microsoft recruiting the highest percentage of AI-related roles Over the last three years, demand for employees with skills relating to artificial intelligence has increased by 119%, while AI related-jobs have nearly doubled.
• It found that Microsoft has the highest number, with 1,964 AI job openings (which is 36% of total jobs on offer).
• In second place is Nvidia with 837 AI job openings (33% of total jobs).
• In the fashion sector, Debenhams came out on top with a share of voice (SoV) of 12%.
• Second to this was Next, with a SoV of 10%, followed by Boohoo with a SoV of 6%.
• In the Electricals category, Currys dominated last quarter with a share of voice of 9%, followed by Argos and amazon.
• Interestingly, Argos won for the Homeware category, generating a SoV of 9%.
• 55% of retailers said they dedicate at least one to 10 hours per week to monitoring market pricing, with 24% of retailers saying they commit 11 to 25 hours to the practice on a weekly basis.
• Despite this, just 17% feel that this has helped them achieve their goals.
• Despite this, 13% of retailers still insist they don’t spend enough time price-checking competitors.
• January 4th 2019 10:00 Article AI/Machine learningHow Wowcher used AI copywriting to reduce Facebook ad CPL by 31% Deals brand Wowcher succeeded in gaining a 31% reduction in cost per lead (CPL) after it piloted Phrasee’s AI copywriting tool for social ads.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: 53% of marketers plan to increase AI spend in the next three years Marketers are seeing positive results from investment in AI, according to a new global study by Quantcast and Forbes Insights.
• In a survey of more than 500 marketers, 52% of respondents said that they have seen an increase in sales, and 51% said they have seen an increase in customer retention since introducing AI capabilities.
• 53% of marketers plan to make a 25 to 49% increase on AI spend in the next three years, while 17% promise a boost of between 50 to 74%.
• 80% said AI technology will enable them to focus more time on strategy and less on day-to-day tasks, 58% said it will help them to refine the online customer experience, and 55% said it will help them generate personalised messaging.
• 17% of 11 to 16 year olds in Britain want to be a social media influencer when they grow up, while 14% want to become a YouTuber.
• These two professions outrank vets and teachers, which were cited by 13% and 9% of children respectively.
• Interestingly, 45% of parents say they don’t understand what being social media influencer consists of, and 58% say they are unaware that you can make money in that profession.
• Similarly, 856,000 sales were tracked through influencer marketing, which was a 37% increase on the previous year.
• On Monday 21st January – the so-called most depressing day of the year – the number of searches (compared to an average Monday) rose by 26% in 2017 and 32% in 2018.
• 80% of marketers believe they will have ‘complete ownership’ of CX by 2020 Episerver’s latest report – based on data from 100 UK marketers – has revealed that 80% of marketers plan to take complete control of their companies CX by 2020.
• While 62% of marketers are already working with IT to improve experiences, 45% of businesses have given the marketing team total ownership over the customer experience.
• Instead, 35% of brands have assigned a specific CX manager or customer experience team.
• 23% of marketers believe that their brands are still not delivering adequate customer experiences on mobile sites, while 27% believe they are not even delivering a high-quality experience through their mobiles apps.
• A Guide to Customer Experience Management YouTube increases revenue 11% YoY A new report by MediaRadar has revealed that YouTube finished 2018 with a 51% advertisers renewal rate, meaning the business increased its revenue 11% year on year.
• 5% of YouTube’s 2018 revenue, including Geico (making up 6%), Samsung (5.
• Media and entertainment companies advertised the most on YouTube, accounting for more than 30% of YouTube’s 2018 revenue.
• Interestingly, however, the automotive industry dramatically reduced budget, spending nearly 60% less on YouTube ads in 2018 than the year before.
• 85% of these consumers also agreed the ads were interesting, 76% agreed the ads were relevant, and 66% agreed the ads were informative.
• Finally, the study concluded that an average of 59% of ad impressions were wasted with standard video retargeting.
• Amazon is the brand with the biggest overall improvement in organic search performance, with a 21% increase in search visibility.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: Just 8% of global consumers have a better understanding of how companies use their data since GDPR’s introduction Ogury has released the findings of a survey of 287,571 consumers, examining attitudes towards mobile marketing, advertising and data use.
• With GDPR reaching its one year anniversary on May 25th, the survey found that only 8% of consumers globally feel they have a better understanding of how companies use their data since GDPR’s introduction.
• Similarly, 52% of consumers globally still don’t understand how their data is used after reading consent forms and privacy policies.
• In terms of where consumers convert, 17% of consumers say Facebook is their most likely point of sale, 12% still rely on the brand’s own website, and 14% prefer cashback and discount code sites.
• 44% of UK consumers cite Facebook as a platform that has raised their awareness of DTC brands, while 31% say YouTube, and 28% say Instagram.
• Meanwhile, the average notification opt-in rate remains at 67% of global app users.
• The study found that retailers successfully answered just 38% of routine questions sent to them on Twitter – down from 50% in 2017.
• On Facebook, retailers answered 50% of Facebook messages – up from 28% in 2017.
• In contrast to this, retailers answered 68% of emails successfully – down from 73% in 2017.
• The best channel for customer service was the web, which provided 83% of answers (that customers found out themselves).
• The study also found that the impact of this type of poor service can be huge, as 59% of consumers ranked giving satisfactory and consistent answers as a top three factor in creating trustworthiness.
• 89% of consumers surveyed said they either will stop buying from brands that they don’t trust, or will spend less.
• Four key trends in social media customer service 53% of internet users have watched a video on Facebook in the past month A new infographic by GlobalWebIndex highlights some key trends in social media usage among varying demographics.
• It shows that Facebook reaps the rewards of placing video at the core of its platform, with 53% of users (spread equally among demographics) watching a video on Facebook in the past month.
• This falls to 43% on Instagram, 32% on Twitter, and just 14% on Snapchat.
• Engagement with live video is also the highest on Facebook, with 25% of users engaging with live video in the past month.
• Elsewhere, GlobalWebIndex reinforces the opportunities afforded by influencer marketing, as it found that 56% of users always like to seek an expert opinion before purchasing something.
• 14% also say they discover new brands via celebrity or influencer endorsement, and 16% have clicked on a sponsored post on a social network in the past month.
• 96% of US mobile users have seen an ad that references their location A new report from The Manifest – based on a survey of 727 US adults – has revealed that 96% of the people surveyed has seen an ad that references their location.
• The good news for advertisers is also that the majority of users feel happy with this, as 66% say they are comfortable with apps that use their location from previous visits because it saves them valuable time and effort.
• Only 7% of people are uncomfortable when a mobile app fills in their location based on past searches.
• The research also found that 38% of survey respondents have accidentally shared their location via a social app without realising it.
• However, 46% kept an app after accidentally sharing their location on it, and 40% of people decided to continue sharing their location with the app.
• Lastly, 79% say they have included a geotag when posting on social media, showing that the majority of people are unconcerned with location-data security.
• 83% of shoppers abandon online purchase due to overwhelming choice A new study by iAdvize – based on the responses of 2,000 UK consumers – has uncovered some of the reasons why high intent shoppers end up abandoning their online purchases.
• It found that 83% of shoppers who abandoned a purchase did so because they felt there was too much choice online, and felt overwhelmed by the amount of options available.
• When abandoning a basket online, 58% of shoppers felt there wasn’t enough product information available to help them decide on their purchase, and a further 55% said that fears around making the right decision was also a cause of cart abandonment.
• Lastly, 52% of the consumers surveyed said better advice and product information would make them spend more with a retailer, while a further 56% said it would spend more frequently with a brand.
• […] May 13th 2019 10:07 Article SocialSeven creative examples of social content in football Most football clubs have a social media presence and the channel accounts for anything between 5-20% of the total value generated for sponsors by top European clubs.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: When asked what they thought happened to the voice commands they gave to their smart speaker, 37% either gave an incorrect answer or said that they didn’t know.
• Seven percent said they think the commands are stored on the smart speaker itself, while a further 12% think the data isn’t recorded in the first place.
• Lastly, 57% believe that they could not be identified using their voice recordings, and only 22% believe that the information would be enough to enable someone to track them down.
• 57% of marketers cite Instagram Stories as an effective part of strategy Buffer’s ‘State of Social 2019’ report has revealed that the growing number of brands using Instagram Stories are seeing success from the platform.
• In its survey of 1,800 marketers, Buffer found that 57% of brands believe that Stories have been “somewhat effective” or “very effective” as a part of their social media strategy.
• 62% of respondents told Buffer that they have yet to invest in stories ads, but 61% said they plan to in 2019.
• Seventy one percent of respondents say they do not use messaging apps for their marketing, and 50% are not planning on using messaging apps in 2019.
• Social Media Advertising Best Practice Guide 53% of consumers will pay more to buy from a retailer they’re loyal to Yes Marketing’s latest report has highlighted the benefits of driving loyalty in consumers.
• In terms of what generates loyalty, 41% of respondents ranked product quality/value of products as the top reason they’re loyal to a retailer, while 35% ranked price as the highest.
• Interestingly, only 3% of respondents ranked free or delivery as the top driver of loyalty, while 40% of consumers ranked it as the top factor they consider before making a purchase with a new retailer.
• Out of those in the study, it found that The New York Times and Wall Street Journal spent the most on paid social, with The New York Times focusing 50% of ads on Facebook and Wall Street Journal running 54% of ads on Twitter.
• Insider, an online news media company, has been focusing on YouTube more than any other digital native media outlet in the study, with 13% of their paid media impressions coming from the video platform.
• Like-for-like sales decreased by 3% compared to the same period in 2018, when they registered a 2.
• 7% in the three months to May, while non-food retail sales decreased by 1.
• 74% of consumers want fashion brands to reduce packaging Nosto recently commissioned an online study of 2,000 consumers in the US and UK to understand perspectives around sustainability.
• It found that 50% of consumers who desire sustainable fashion would be more likely to buy clothes from companies they know are committed to sustainability, while 28% of them would stop buying clothes from a company if they find out it is not committed to the cause.
• Additionally, 57% try to keep clothes longer because it’s better for the environment — though survey results revealed a larger gap between men and women in this category (52% vs.
• 75% say they want brands to reduce the amount of packaging they use, while 74% say provide fair pay and good working conditions.
• 73% say they want them to use renewable and recyclable materials, and 71% want them to make clothes that are designed to last longer.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: 35% of consumers think that brands who speak out are ‘jumping on the bandwagon’ New research by Sprout Social, based on a survey of 1,505 US consumers, suggests that consumers are becoming increasingly sceptical about brands taking a stand.
• Today, 39% of consumers feel brands are not credible when taking a stand – up 18% from 2017.
• The survey also found that 53% of consumers believe brands take a stand for public relations and marketing purposes, while 35% of consumers perceive brands speaking out as jumping on the bandwagon.
• Five brand campaigns that took a stand on social issues 68% of UK consumers hold brands accountable for poor ad placements A new study by IAS has highlighted the dangers of putting ads next to poor-quality content.
• In a survey, 55% of UK consumers stated that they feel less favourable about brands after seeing ads in sub-standard settings, and 70% would stop using those brands all together.
• Meanwhile, a further 68% of consumers hold brands accountable for poor placements and this figure only increases globally:reaching 72% in France, and 86% in Indonesia.
• IAS’s study also found that 91% of UK consumers say seeing ads beside high-quality content is important, while 65% of consumers are more likely to engage with ads when surrounded by high-quality content.
• Overall, 77% of all internet users say that battery life is the top most desired feature, while 65% say storage.
• Despite the finding that 37% of consumers in the UK and US say they will switch to 5G as soon as it becomes available, the report suggests that other innovative features aren’t yet competitive purchase drivers.
• Only 14% of proximity adverts use high-quality signals Only 14% of proximity adverts use GPS data, despite it being more accurate and more reliable than IP data.
• During the study, the data signals that Location Sciences detected were made up of 63% of randomly generated GPS signals (a random set generated by a computer in any given area).
• Meanwhile, 35% were made up of device teleportation (where the same device ID is spotted in two different places at nearly the same time), and 10% hard clustering (which are distributed far too evenly over the area, rather than being clustered around major cities).
• When it comes to inspiring product research, 23% of survey respondents cited social media ads as the number one most effective form of advertising – out of 11 different common advertising and promotional mediums offered.
• Lastly, the study found that email is the most effective method for inspiring repeat purchases from a brand, cited by 28% of respondents.
• 97% of programmatic traders say the growing numbers of channels and ad formats make their jobs harder In 2019 alone, advertisers will spend close to $60 billion on programmatic.
• 4% of traders also saying they wish they had a truly cross-channel, trustworthy platform through which they could successfully run all of their cross-channel campaigns.
• 98% of traders said they consider first-party data to be the better alternative.
• 4% of the traders surveyed said that they’re very confident in their ability to avoid fraud.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: It appears that half of UK high street brands and retailers are still reliant on physical receipts for every purchase, with just 50% offering alternatives to paper receipts.
• In terms of the travel booking funnel, almost 46% of users view a travel product (meaning they have searched and viewed a hotel room or flight), after which 17.
• 5% of shoppers add an item to their shopping carts on fashion ecommerce sites, and 3.
• Global sports sponsorship to reach £35bn in 2019 New research from Two Circles has found that business spending on sports sponsorship is set to grow by 4% to reach £35bn globally in 2019.
• Financial services already leads the way when it come to sports sponsorship, accounting for 19% of deals.
• This is followed by automotive, airlines, gambling, and alcohol, accounting for 14%, 13%, 12%, and 9% respectively.
• Two Circles also predicts that spend on sponsorship will increase by 6% on average year-on-year from 2020, hitting £48bn by 2024.
• From the analysis of 250 of the UK’s leading brands across a range of sectors, it found that 17% have neglected to add clear social sharing options for their customers’ purchases – a 4% decline year-on-year.
• Usage of Instagram Stories has grown 21% since March 2018 A new report by Socialbakers delves into how brands are taking advantage of influencer marketing (and related social media platforms).
• Key takeaways from the report include:Instagram Stories remains an invaluable source of engagement for brands, with the format usage growing by 21% since March 2018.
• Fast forward to 2019 Q1, however, and images made up 71%, videos 10%, and carousel posts 18% of all influencer content.
• Lastly, transparency within influencer marketing is on the increase, with the number of influencers using the #ad hashtag on Instagram increasing by an impressive 133% in 2018.
• Video ad spend has grown across all verticals since 2018, with media & entertainment brands leading the way with a 75% increase year-on-year.
• This is followed by fashion and apparel brands, which increased spend by 45%.
• More than a fifth (22%) of this digital video spend will go to social media, with 18% going to online TV shows.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: From this and other research (along with industry insiders’ insights), Cheq estimates a 15% composite rate of total ad spend lost to influencer fraud.
• Ecommerce ad spend rises and CPCs fall Marin’s Q2 2019 Digital Advertising Benchmark Report has highlighted the continued growth of ecommerce advertising, as it reveals there has been a 40% increase in ad spend in Q2.
• Elsewhere, the report states that paid search click volume increased 13% year-over-year, with Healthcare rising 30%, Technology by 25%, and Retail up 24%.
• Elsewhere, YouTube improved its customer satisfaction score by 4% to reach 78, Wikipedia saw a 4% decline to 74, and Instagram remained steady at 72.
• There was also a 10x rise in fraudulent in-app purchase events between Q1 and Q2 2019, with more than one in four apps exceeding a rate of 20%.
• Furthermore, 80% of fraudulent installs on Android are the result of bots.
• On iOS, 85% of bad installs are due to click flooding, where networks send large numbers of fraudulent click reports in the hopes of delivering the last-click prior to installs.
• How Effective is Content Marketing, As Shown Through Stats: Original Content is GoldAccording to Demand Metric, content marketing costs 62% less than outbound marketing and generates three times as many leads.
• Content Saves MoneyDemandMetric has estimated that it costs 62% less to launch and maintain a content marketing campaign than any other form of marketing.
• The Future Is In VideoA report by Cisco has predicted that up to 80% of traffic is going to be driven by videos in the next year and a half.
• Silence Is GoldenDigiday came out with a surprising statistic:85% of all Facebook videos viewed per day are done without the sound on.
• Mobile Content Viewability Is NecessarySmartInsights has estimated that 51% of all content is viewed via a mobile device, with desktop viewing decreasing to 42%.
• Digital Marketing Statistics and Trends [2022]: SEO Stats 2022 81% of shoppers do their research first online before they purchase.
• (Internet Live Stats) 70% of search users never scroll past the search engine’s second page.
• com) Web pages that take 5 seconds to load have an increased bounce rate to 38%.
• But before you delve into podcast advertising, take this advice from Ahref’s UX Writer, Rebekah Bek:The number of podcast listeners around the world is estimated at around 424 million people (Insider Intelligence) 94% of podcast listeners are multitasking a.
• (BBC) 40% of podcast listeners choose to discover new podcast channels via their listening app’s directory.
• (The Podcast Host) 45% of podcast listeners have an annual income of $250,000.
• (Edison Research) 69% of podcast listeners say podcast ads helped them become aware of brands, products, and services.
• (DataReportal) 73% of users feel a stronger connection to brands on TikTok than they do on other social media platforms.
• (Hootsuite) 70% of customers go to Instagram to make their next purchase.
• (ReelnReel) Instagram Reels content receives 22% higher engagement than typical Instagram videos.
• (Website Builder) More than half (53%) of US shoppers prefer to use their mobile device to research deals and offers before buying than speak with an associate in-store about promotions.
• (Digital Examiner) TikTok motivated 67% of its users to purchase even when they weren’t looking to do so.
• (TikTok Newsroom) 62% of marketers believe that TikTok content creators are the best communicators with their customers.
• (TikTok Newsroom) Instagram is important to 68% of marketers for influencer marketing initiatives, down from 80% last year.
• (Influencer Marketing Hub) 37% of consumers are more likely to purchase from a mobile-optimized site.
• If you want to invest your time and energy in video marketing, here are some of its important statistics:96% of users watch explainer videos to learn more about a product or service.
• (Forbes) About 70% of millennials often watch company videos when shopping online.
• (Adobo Magazine) Short-form video marketing will be more prevalent than ever before, with more than 70% of marketers utilizing it.
• (ReelnReel) Marketers that utilize video generate revenue 49% quicker than those who do not.
• 42% prefer live-action videos, 33% prefer animated videos, and 15% prefer screen recorded videos.
• 7% of search users can’t tell the difference between paid and organic search results.
• (Web FX) Google, Facebook, and Amazon hold a 64% share of total ad spending.
• (eMarketer) 33% of search users click on paid ads because they directly answer their search query.
• (Clutch) Over 90% of mobile search users will likely click on the first two or three search results.
• (Backlinko) The top three ads at the top of the first search engine results page get all the clicks at 40%.
• 92% of consumers around the world trust the reviews and recommendations from friends and family over advertising.
• (Nielsen) 86% of companies use UGC in their marketing strategy to make them trustworthy.
• 78% of millennials say they prefer customer photos over professional photos shared by a brand.
• (Social Media Week) 57% of marketers say their biggest concern when it comes to UGC use is copyright issues.
• (Social Media Week) 60% of consumers would love brands to tell them what type of UGC to use and create.
• (State of User-Generated Content) 77% of shoppers are more likely to buy from brands that provide a personalized shopping experience.
• (State of User-Generated Content) 64% of users have used a hashtag or tagged a brand on their social media.
• Emails that contain user-generated content increase click-through rates up to 73%.
• (Salesforce) 48% of customers discover new products through user-generated content on social media feeds.
• (Taggbox) 78% of Millennials find a photo and video user-generated content extremely helpful when it comes to their purchasing decisions.
• (Statista) 35% of customers will do more shopping online if they can virtually try on a product.
• 35% of respondents have bought a product or service promoted by virtual influencers.
• (The Wise Marketer) Almost 30% of US crypto owners had bought something online with their digital assets last March 2022.
• (Statista) 67% of millennials (ages 24-35) like cryptocurrency so much that they prefer it over gold as an investment vehicle.
• (Statista) 43% of respondents to a Statista survey in Brazil have bought products because of celebrity or influencer endorsement.
• (Statista) As of July 2021, 75% of internet users in the United Arab Emirates follow one or more social media influencers.
• This is closely followed by Indonesia and India at 73% and 71% respectively.
• (EarthWeb) With 49% of sponsored Instagram posts coming from the United States in 2017, it is the world’s leading country for Instagram influencer marketing.
• 71% of TikTok influencers coming from the United States in July 2020, the United States again leads in TikTok influencer marketing.
• (Statista) Mobile devices drive more than 50% of affiliate-referred traffic.
• (SaaS Scout) A survey in 2016 by Rakuten found that 80% of advertisers and 84% of publishers had an affiliate program.
• 61% of Amazon Associates website’s views came from the United States, with India trailing behind at 6.
• (Similarweb) The average affiliate link conversion is anywhere from 1% to 10%.
• A report done by McKinsey showed that 60 – 70% of consumers are shopping the omnichannel way, with Instagram and Facebook acting as the virtual window shopping platform.
• 100 Social Media Marketing Statistics You Should Know in 2022: With over 53% of the world’s population on social media, it’s critical that your business has an effective social media strategy that helps you reach your intended audience.
• 8% of global internet users used social media to search for brand information in 2020.
• 54% of Gen Z and 49% of Millenials say social media is their preferred channel for ad influence.
• Answering a complaint on social media can increase customer advocacy by 25%.
• 79% of consumers expect brands to respond within a day of reaching out over social media, but average brand response rates across all industries are lower than 25%.
• 79% of people say that user-generated content on social media significantly impacts their purchasing decisions.
• While 71% of teens claimed to use the platform in 2015, the number has now dropped to 67%.
• 67% of Gen Z and 57% of Millennials use the platform, in comparison to only 38% of Gen X.
• 2% of B2B decision-makers use Instagram to discover and research new products.
• 98% of marketers say Instagram is the most influential influencer marketing platform, which is 44% higher than Facebook.
• 83% of people use Instagram to discover new products and services and 87% said they took specific action, like making a purchase, after seeing product information.
• Mobile-shot Stories ads outperform studio-shot ads a whopping 63% of the time.
• Stories Ads that draw attention to the CTA button drive more results 89% of the time.
• Socially responsible ads on twitter perform 12% better than standard ads.
• 93% of Twitter community members are open to brands getting involved in conversation, such as providing help and support.
• 85% of American small businesses find Twitter indispensable for customer service.
• 55% of decision-makers use LinkedIn content to choose companies and organizations to work with.
• For 94% of B2B marketers, LinkedIn is the first channel they use when they want to distribute content to various social media sites.
• Using LinkedIn’s Sales Navigator leads to a +7% higher win rate when closing deals.
• Video consumption is one of the most popular ways to consume content, with 85% of U.
• In 2019, 29% of marketers found that pre-roll skippable YouTube video ads were considered the most effective advertising form on Youtube.
• Display ads are the most effective YouTube ad marketing strategy for 10% of marketers.
• In 2020, Reddit had 52 million daily active users, up by 44% compared to recent years.
• 44% of Reddit’s monthly active users access the site via mobile app or mobile browser.
• Of all technology enthusiasts online, 40% are active on Reddit, whereas 38% of all Redditors are passionate about technology (Reddit) 86.
• 82% of Gen-Z people say they trust Reddit when it comes to learning more about products.
• 87% of people on Pinterest have bought a product because of Pinterest, while 93% use Pinterest to plan a future purchase.
• Social Media Marketing has been proven to drive more conversions than traditional advertising for 75% of B2C businesses.
• On average, News Feed impressions on Facebook had a 35% higher CTR compared with the right column in 2013.
• B2C companies that blog receive 67% more leads per month than those that don’t blog.
• 81% of B2B marketers use LinkedIn as a marketing tool, making it the most popular social media site for this group.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: 7% decrease year-on-year, down from six hours and forty-nine minutes in January 2018.
• The Commission did however investigate 27 cases involving a breach of the DMA Code, 83% of which related to data, privacy and quality (up from 69% last year).
• 46% of UK consumers say Netflix is now their first choice to watch a film for the first time A new study by GlobalWebIndex highlights how audiences have evolved in recent years, with 46% of UK consumers now citing Netflix as now their first choice when looking to watch a film for the first time.
• Coco, which won Best Animated Feature at last year’s Oscars generated international viewership of 38% thanks to its appearance on Netflix – 10% more viewers than The Shape of Water, which won Best Picture of the Year.
• Email spam decreased by 5% in 2018 New research from Return Path, which is based on the analysis of 6.
• 9 billon commercial emails, has revealed that overall spam placement decreased by 5% (reversing the upward trend of the past two years).
• For example, read rate increased slightly from 22% to 24%, while spam complaints more than doubled from 0.
• Amongst the industries with the lowest spam rates were banking & finance, with a rate of 4%.
• In contrast, the education/nonprofit/government sector scored highly, with a spam rate of 19%.
• Email Best Practice Guide 10% of companies regard themselves as ‘very advanced’ at CX Econsultancy’s Digital Trends report, published in association with Adobe, has found that the companies delivering first-class, personalised customer experiences are outperforming their competition.
• Despite this, however, only 10% of companies surveyed regard themselves as very advanced at CX, and the same percentage describe themselves as ‘digital-first’.
• Digital-first companies are 64% more likely than their peers to have exceeded their top 2018 business goal.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: Meanwhile, 28% of marketers say they are most bothered by the challenge of personalising customer experiences without violating consumer privacy, highlighting the importance of customer data transparency and control for brands.
• Companies are also receptive to data protection laws such as GDPR, with 89% agreeing regulation has had a positive impact on their business.
• European businesses, however, are more greatly impacted than other regions – 24% of European companies say data protection laws such as GDPR have had a negative impact on their business – three times higher than in any other region surveyed.
• In the UK, 81% of consumers report that they have now made a purchase by following a link shared by an influencer, and 26% are spending more than £500 on items recommended by influencers.
• Globally, 43% of consumers said they trust influencers to give them an honest view of the product or service being discussed, and appreciate the transparency given about the brand relationship.
• Meanwhile, 86% of companies generating high ROI reported that personalisation makes up 21% or more of their marketing budget.
• 74% of businesses that exceeded their revenue goals in 2018 have a dedicated budget for personalisation, and 77% have a documented personalisation strategy.
• Finally, companies with the highest ROI are 50% more likely to focus on customer loyalty than companies with low ROI.
• Just 36% of retailers utilised marketplaces such as Amazon and eBay as part of their sales activity in 2018 – a drop from 39% in 2017.
• This is despite the fact that 45% of consumers are more likely to go first to Amazon when looking for an item than anywhere else.
• The study also found that just 28% of the UK’s top 250 retailers are taking full advantage of the benefits offered by Google Shopping – a 3% drop since last year.
• APAC consumers becoming increasingly concerned about data privacy The majority of Asia Pacific consumers love technology, with 80% of respondents to a survey saying that they believe it improves their lives.
• 69% said they were ‘concerned’, while 38% said they were ‘somewhat concerned’ and 29% said they were ‘very concerned’.
• As a result of this, 56% of respondents said they are actively taking steps to restrict the amount of data they allow businesses to collect, such as installing ad blockers and deliberately not sharing photos online.
• Nearly 50% of consumers also said that data-privacy concerns is one of the main obstacles to buying smart home devices and home appliances connected to the internet (second to price).
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: Read Econsultancy’s Social Media Best Practice Guide 68% of consumers would not buy from a brand that uses negative emotions in marketing A new study by Phrasee – involving a survey of 4,000 consumers and 400 marketers across the UK and US – has revealed the damaging effect of unethical marketing.
• Of the consumers surveyed, 68% of respondents said they would not buy from a brand that used negative emotions in their marketing.
• In contrast to this, 69% said they would buy more from a brand that used positive marketing.
• Fifty percent of UK consumers highlighted anger as an emotion they felt from negative marketing, while 39% said inadequacy, and 38% said depression/sadness.
• From the professionals surveyed, 53% claimed ‘you can never have too much data’ on customers.
• Twenty-eight percent of respondents said they don’t turn the in-page data they collect into meaningful insights, while 32% don’t convert their on-site search and navigational data into insight.
• Only 46% of respondents said they believe they have a strong understanding of their customers’ behaviours across their digital channels.
• When it comes to the type of data they’d like to collect, 47% said they would like data to learn more about customers’ visit intent, and 34% said to learn about in-page behaviour.
• So much so that 61% of global commerce companies describe their business model as being under “significant” or “extreme” pressure to adapt to changing conditions.
• This is even more critical for some, with 34% saying that “market pressures are such that our model has to change or we may go out of business in the next 36 months.
• ” The report states that changes in customer behaviour are a primary cause of market disruption, but two-thirds of global respondents say that they do not have enough customer data to fully understand the customer journey, ranging from a low of 55% in Germany to over 75% in Japan.
• In a survey, 29% of UK consumers said that they find product photos from other customers useful when making online purchase decisions.
• The tactic also seems to particularly resonate with younger consumers, with 40% of Generation Z and 41% of millennials finding photos from other customers valuable when making a purchase decision.
• Fresh Relevance also states that adoption varies by retail sector, with 0% of jewellery and accessories brands adopting UGC within marketing strategies, 10% of footwear brands, and 20% of fashion retailers incorporating this type of content.
• Beauty and electronics were found to be the best performing sectors for using UGC, with 30% of brands making use of customer photos.
• According to Econsultancy research, 60% of brand marketers believe that proving marketing effectiveness is more important now than it was two years ago.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: 68% of marketers don’t understand what AI is (and think it’s an overused buzzword) A survey conducted by Vitreous World and Phrasee has found that 68% of global marketers feel they don’t understand what AI is and think it’s simply an overused buzzword.
• Additionally, a worrying 67% of those surveyed say they don’t know how to implement AI to effectively deliver results.
• As a result, 70% of the 1000 respondents admitted that they don’t use AI, and an extra 8% didn’t know if they do or don’t.
• Even if they were actively looking to employ AI in their organisations, 67% believe they are unable to assess and compare the various related technologies available to them.
• 65% of ecommerce traffic originates from mobile, but only accounts for 53% of sales New data from SaleCycle suggests that 65% of ecommerce traffic in 2019 originated from mobile, but only accounted for just over half of overall sales (53%).
• Fashion ecommerce saw the largest amount of mobile traffic at 75%, as well as the largest percentage of sales (67%) out of all industries analysed.
• In contrast, the results revealed that travel customers were 64% more likely to make a purchase on a desktop than they were on a smartphone, with mobile making up just 53% of total traffic last year, and accounting for even fewer sales (29%).
• In its Q1 2020 financial statement released on 28th January, the combined revenue of these products such as the Apple Watch, AirPods, HomePod and Beats (among others) increased by around 37% year on year from $7.
• Facebook’s Q4 advertising revenue grows by 25% year-on-year Social giant Facebook released its fourth quarter and full year results earlier this week, presenting a 25% year-on-year growth in its advertising revenue for Q4 2019 – an increase from $16.
• Alongside its Daily Active Users and Monthly Active Users rising by an average of 9% and 8% respectively year-on-year in December, this demonstrates the company’s continued growth, despite of the many scandals and controversies it has faced in recent times.
• However, Facebook’s shares dropped by about 7% following the announcement, as year-on-year growth – while it remains strong – has shown signs of slowing (ad revenue for Q4 2018 was up 30% on the same period in 2017).
• 25% of British 18-24 year-olds are more likely to observe branded DOOH ads if they incorporate live content Consumers aged 18-24 are 25% more likely to observe branded DOOH ads when they include live content, a new study from Ocean Outdoor indicates.
• The research showed that 16% of those in the same age range believe that live content displayed via DOOH is more likely to be trustworthy and genuine than content from other sources (such as online and traditional media).
• Certainly, it appears that young people are responding to DOOH in a positive way, with nearly half (49%) of them stating that they would be interested in seeing more real-time content on outdoor screens.
• Friends topped the survey as the most trusted source of brand recommendation (28%), with partners ranking close second (23%).
• Furthermore, respondents were 41% likely to be put off a brand if a friend of member of their family dissuaded them from purchasing from there.
• Meanwhile, consumers appear to be becoming more distrustful of online reviews – just 11% of whom cited them as trustworthy in 2019 compared to 17% in 2017.
• Even fewer trust celebrity endorsements (2%) and, perhaps unsurprisingly, those from politicians (1%).
• But Amazon holds almost 40% of the European market and more credit card details than any other company on earth which makes their data and shopper-led approach more personalised and tailored than the rest.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: The frequency of video in Google search results rises to a high of 74% Research from Searchmetrics has revealed that websites with a heavy focus on video content were some of the biggest winners in organic search performance on Google in 2018.
• YouTube was the biggest winner, enjoying a 79% increase in search performance during the year.
• Since, search results that included at least one video integration climbed from 22% at the start of the year to a high of 74% in September.
• 6% year-on-year in December 2018, as the industry experienced a particularly challenging second half of the year.
• The first half of 2018 began defiantly, with online retail recording 16% YoY growth.
• According to the index, online spending in December decreased 15% month-on-month from November – up from 11% MoM last year.
• In November and December 2018, searches for ‘palm oil’ saw a 406% increase on the three months previously, likely due to awareness raised from Iceland’s holiday TV advert (that never was).
• Searches for ‘single use plastic’ also rose 70% year-on-year, and searches for ‘ethical fashion’ increased 10% YoY, revealing an increase in awareness and interest from the public.
• Birmingham won thanks to the availability of over 437 digital jobs, 33% industry growth YoY, and average salaries of over £43,000.
• In a survey of over 400 marketers and 2000 consumers, just 22% of marketers say they believe consumers have become more loyal in the past two years.
• However, 38% of consumers say they are more loyal now than two years ago.
• Even worse, 58% of GenZ consumers consider themselves loyal to brands yet only 11% of marketers believe they are.
• 46% of consumers show their loyalty thorough recommending products or services to family and friends, while 40% show it through continued purchases.
• Interestingly, 21% of GenZ advocate heavily by posting about the brand on social media compared to 19% of the wider population.
• Elsewhere, 48% of music streamers are said to watch videos on social media, while 54% of music streamers also use smart home entertainment products.
• Lastly, 60% of Spotify users say they regularly attend gigs, and 33% of Spotify users also share their account with others.
• – 19% answered 5/10 Do you feel your agency understands your personal motivations?
• – 24% answered 5/10 How confident do you feel that your agency understands innovation?
• – 16% answered 5/10 How well do you feel your agency embraces diversity?
• – 14% answered 6/10 Econsultancy’s Top 100 Digital Agencies report By Nikki Gilliland January 25th 2019 14:03 Article Search Marketing Stats Talent and recruitment Video Share Twitter Facebook LinkedIn Email Comments Comment 0 // async slot call googletag.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: The survey revealed that 74% of Facebook users say they did not know that a list of their traits and interests existed (in the ‘Ad Preferences’ section) until they were shown as part of this study.
• And once aware of how their interests are classified, 51% said they were not comfortable with such a list.
• Facebook users ages 18 and older was conducted in September 2018 and also revealed that half of Facebook users (51%) are assigned a political “affinity” by the site.
• Of this 51%, nearly three quarters (73%) say the platform’s categorization of their politics is very or somewhat accurate, while 27% say it describes them not very or not at all accurately.
• Wowcher used AI copywriting to reduce Facebook ad cost per lead by 31% This week saw an excellent marketing AI case study on the Econsultancy blog.
• Working with Tomorrow TTH and AI platform Phrasee, Wowcher optimised its Facebook ad copy to reduce cost per lead (CPL) by 31%.
• 8%) would be happy with an annual pay of £25,500 Hours:The majority (66.
• 7%) would prefer to work flexi-time, choosing their eight hours between 06:00 and 18:00.
• 2% WPP M&A activity slows According to research from Results International, in 2018 the advertising group WPP saw its merger and acquisition activity fall 50% on 2017 as CEO Mark Read restructures.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: Conversely, our US counterparts are far more trusting shoppers, with 70% believing they are getting the best deals.
• Special offers (82%), and pop-up shops (60%), ranked first and second for increasing customers’ in-store interest, with tech experiences (e.
• From Q1 2017 to Q1 2018, the volume of sponsored posts jumped 59%, this increased by another 23% from Q1 2018 to Q1 2019.
• CreatorIQ also found that seasonality plays a big part, with holiday months bringing double the volume of sponsored posts compared to after the new year (December to January sees a -101% drop).
• ” According to the survey 86% of internet users in the UK send and receive emails and, on average, Brits send 10 unnecessary, short and unactionable emails each week – translating into more than 450 million unnecessary emails each week, and 64 million every day.
• The report shows 94% of marketers believe more focused education on data regulations and how to apply them is a “must” for the next generation of marketers.
• Three-quarters of marketers believe that having this kind of knowledge would not only give new entrants a greater advantage in their career, but a more focused education structure would also ‘improve the industry’s image’ (57%) and ‘the performance of marketing programmes’ (49%).
• In 2018, 73% of marketers considered themselves to have a good level of understanding of the law changes, following GDPR, compared to only 38% of marketers in 2019.
• GDPR:A year on 55% of all digital media was traded programmatically in Australia in 2019 More than half of all digital media, in Australia, was traded programmatically this year, with Zenith analysis predicting growth to continue into 2020.
• The analysis also found, globally, 69% of digital media will be programmatic next year (up from 65% in 2019).
• According to research by Global Web Index, 45% of beauty consumers look to reviews for online research purposes before buying a product.
• 35+ Telling Digital Marketing Statistics [2024’s Update]: Fascinating Digital Marketing Statistics:86% of business professionals prefer using email for business communication purposes.
• 72% of people prefer watching a video to learn about a product or service rather than reading a text.
• 61% of marketers agree that improving SEO and growing organic presence is their top inbound marketing priority.
• 47% of email recipients will open your email based solely on the subject line.
• Global Ad Falls in 2020, Due to the Covid-19 Pandemic (Source:Adweek) Uncertainty and a rise in Covid-19 cases pushed ad spend levels 10% below the pre-pandemic levels by July, according to new digital marketing statistics.
• The forecast by Magna, also says that digital advertising statistics show future growth of 2% year-over-year with digital video expected to grow 10% and social by 7%.
• 4% growth in the digital ad spend market is positive, it will be the lowest recorded by digital marketing stats.
• 2020’s Decline is Modest in Comparison to the 2009 Global Financial Crisis (Source:GroupM) When GDP declined by 1% in 2009’s financial crisis, global advertising fell by an estimated 11.
• 2% In the mid-year digital marketing statistics by GroupM, it is estimated that global advertising will decline by 9.
• 90% Of People Haven’t Made Their Mind About a Brand Before Starting a Search.
• (Source:Omnicore) 86% of people look up the location of a business in Google Maps.
• According to marketing data, only 7% of traffic to your website comes from sources outside search engines.
• 47% Of Buyers Looked at 3-5 Pieces of Content Before Contacting a Sales Representative.
• 83% of US shoppers’ purchases are influenced by friend’s social media posts 6-13 words in the title attract the highest amount of traffic.
• 32% of marketers even choose it as the most important form of content for their businesses.
• Podcasts are on the rise with 32% of Americans being podcast listeners.
• 17% of marketing specialists plan to add podcasts to their content in the next year.
• 90% of brands rely on social media to increase their brand recognition.
• 86% of consumers prefer a business to be authentic and honest on social media.
• (Source:BlueCorona) 91% of smartphone owners made a purchase after seeing a relevant ad.
• More than 60% of buyers said that mobiles played a big role in a recent purchase.
• In addition, marketing statistics show people spend 70% more time on mobile websites that load for 5 seconds or less.
• Hubspot Is the Preferred Marketing Automation Software by 26% Of the Customers.
• (Source:RenderForest) 70% of marketing professionals are optimizing their video content for search engines.
• You can increase conversions by 80% by including video on your home page.
• Simply using the word ‘video’ in an email subject line boosts the open rates by 19%.
• 54% Of Marketing Influencers Cite Increasing Email Engagement Rate as a Top Priority.
• 47% of email recipients will open your email based solely on the subject line.
• A whopping 91% of customers want to hear from companies they do business with via email.
• 78% of consumers have canceled their email subscriptions because a brand was sending them too many emails.
• 72% Of Organizations That Calculate ROI Say Their Marketing Strategy Is Effective.
• (Source:Hubspot) Strategic landing pages are used by 68% of B2B businesses to acquire leads.
• According to 61% of marketers, their top challenges are generating traffic and leads.
• 53% of content marketers use interactive content in lead generation efforts.
• In 2018, 70% of marketers say their demand gen budgets will increase and 34% say their spending will grow by more than 20%.
• Marketing statistics indicate 80% of sales are made by only 20% of sales reps!
• Online Advertising Is Expected to Reach $329 Billion by 2021, Accounting for 49% Of All Global Ad Spend.
• 53% of users say they are more likely to look at a native than a banner ad.
• (Source:World Economic Forum) In the last ten years, global GDP has grown by 3-6% every year.
• For example, Tencent’s digital marketing industry statistics in China, for the first quarter, showed an increase of 32% year-on-year.
• That’s a figure higher than the pre-coronavirus online advertising statistics projecting 8% ad growth in the U.
• (Source:Dialogtech) By 2020, 50% of all searches will be voice searches.
• 52% of people who search by voice are interested in receiving info about deals, sales, and promotions from brands.
• 51% use search by voice to find information about a product they’re interested in.
• 32% of marketing organizations are using smart speakers like Alexa and Siri.
• Statistics should be clear enough for marketers:optimize voice search for your website – 50% of people will soon be using it and most of them are interested in doing business.
• (Source:Salesforce) 62% of customers now expect companies to anticipate their needs.
• Latest from Deyan Candy Crush Saga Alternatives 15+ Fascinating Statistics About Millennial Spending Habits 30 Mind Blowing Prison Statistics Top Gamification Statistics of 2024:Next Level Gaming Related Posts Which US Banks Offer 5% Savings Accounts?
• 16 Video Marketing Stats to Blow Your Social Media Mind [Infographic] | Social Media Today: Not only are more brands using video, recent data shows that 43% of people actually want to see more video content from brands.
• 23 social media stats to level up your marketing now: (Statista) 94 percent of B2C marketers use Facebook, and 94% of B2B marketers use LinkedIn.
• User promo code onward25 during checkout to save 25% on your Inman Select Membership.
• Video Marketing Statistics l Digital Marketing Philippines: Even small businesses with limited resources are also leveraging this strategy, with only 24% reporting that they relied on external agencies for business video production!
• Video Will Represent 82% of All Internet Traffic By 2021In the 2016-2021 Visual Networking Index:Forecast and Methodology by Cisco, it was revealed that by 2021, 82% of all consumer IP traffic would be video, up from 73% in 2016.
• 5 hours of video per day, while 15% of people watch 3 hours of video on an average day.
• 85% of People Like To See More Video from BrandsIf you think that people are only interested in watching cat videos and meme compilations on YouTube, then you’ll want to think again.
• In fact, 85% of consumers actually want more branded video content well.
• Wyzowl says 79% of consumers prefer watching the video over reading to learn more about a product, and 95% of people have watched an explainer video to learn more about a product or service.
• Meanwhile, if you own a brick and mortar store, you may want to produce more videos about your items as 50% of web users look for video before visiting a store, says Google.
• 81% of Businesses Use Video As a Marketing ToolThe video marketing research from Wyzowl also revealed that 8 of 10 businesses use video in their marketing campaigns – up from just 63% in 2017.
• If you are part of the minority that is still unconvinced with the potential of video marketing, you might soon be the only one left not using this strategy, as 65% of those who don’t currently use video say they plan to start to do so in 2018.
• The 2017 B2B and B2C research from Content Marketing Institute also say the same:30% of B2B marketers and 34% of B2C marketers say video will be key to content marketing success.
• Video Marketers Get 66% More Qualified Leads Per YearMore and more businesses also use video marketing to improve their lead generation campaigns – and it seems that their efforts strategy really pay off.
• According to Aberdeen research, digital marketers using video in their campaigns get 66% more qualified leads per year and achieve 54% increase in brand awareness.
• This creates a sense of trust which is why 57% of consumers say that videos gave them more confidence to purchase online.
• If you need further convincing on how video marketing can benefit your business, here are more statistics from Wyzowl research that you should ponder:97% of marketers say the video has helped increase user understanding of their product or service.
• 80% of marketers say the video has increased dwell time on their website.
• 81% of people have been convinced to buy a product or service by watching a brand’s video.
• 69% of people have been convinced to buy a piece of software or application by watching a video.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: Elsewhere, the report reveals that 37% of consumers trust influencers to clearly signpost paid partnerships.
• Shockingly, 62% of influencers say they have been pressured by brands to contravene guidelines at least once.
• Eighty-eight percent of marketers and 87% of influencers in the UK and US agree that their markets’ regulatory guidelines are clear, but in Germany, this falls to just 52% of marketers and 11% of influencers being confident about ad disclosure guidelines.
• Overall, there is a strong feeling that these guidelines need further development, with 46% of marketers in all three markets agreeing with this.
• Finally, Socialbakers has revealed that more than 60% of all ad spend is still allocated to the Facebook News Feed – despite marketers increasing their overall spend on Instagram.
• More than half of all ad spend is still allocated to this channel, with only 20% on Instagram Feed and 10% across Stories, Suggested Video, and In-stream Video placements.
• For example, the use of wi-fi within a campaign elicited a 52% higher impact of memory encoding.
• Recommendations based on previous purchases and searches is the most commonly seen form of personalisation, cited by 58% of respondents.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: Without further ado… Only 4% of people in the UK trust influencers A new survey by YouGov and Grey London has revealed the growing distrust that consumers feel towards social media and influencers.
• The survey found that 41% of regular social media users in the UK say they have seen inaccurate content over the last month, while 17% of mainstream social media users say they’ve seen completely false content.
• In terms of honesty from people they follow on social media, 25% of regular users say that the profiles of their family give a ‘very honest’ portrayal.
• Meanwhile, 48% of users believe that profiles of celebrities are either ‘not at all’ or ‘somewhat dishonest’, and only 22% believe that they are completely honest.
• Interestingly, dishonest portrayals from friends and family are less likely to bother mainstream users compared to celebrities (35% vs 46%).
• In comparison, 54% of users are bothered when an influencer portrays themselves dishonestly.
• Only 4% of UK social media users in the survey said they trust influencers.
• So, while contact centres are predicted to reduce their quality assurance staff by 40% due to automation, other technologies will be introduced to help customer service reps find critical information and enhance the customer experience.
• Twitch, Wish, and Snapchat the top apps among Gen Z With 98% of Generation Z reported to now own a smartphone, a new report from App Annie explores how brands can best reach them on mobile devices.
• However, they break up that time among 150 user sessions monthly – 55% more sessions than older generations.
• The average conversion rate for all returning customers is 2%, however, retained customers from the previous holiday season converted at 4.
• Retained Bing customers convert at 8%, which is four times the typical returning customer.
• Additionally, customers who came to a brand’s website first via Facebook and were engaged enough to come back the following holiday season are nearly 70% more likely to purchase than the first year.
• 45% of European & APAC shoppers are looking to make a holiday purchase from the UK New research from Rakuten marketing has revealed that UK brands are soaring in popularity among international shoppers.
• The study – which surveyed 5,000 global consumers – found that 45% of European and APAC shoppers are looking to make a holiday purchase from the UK, making British brands most popular among those looking to purchase internationally.
• Meanwhile in the UK, 15% of consumers will make purchases for over 11 people, compared to just 3% of Germans who will buy this many presents.
• 72% of Brits are looking to buy gifts for at least three recipients or more this Christmas.
• Over 57% of UK consumers will look to Boots, with 37% and 30% choosing British department stores Debenhams and John Lewis respectively.
• 61% of consumers have switched at least one brand in the last year New research findings from the DMA challenge the belief that consumers typically switch brands due to a bad experience with an existing one.
• Out of the 61% of customers surveyed who stated that they switched at least one brand in the last 12 months – 58% said they did so ‘to get a cheaper price’ for the product or service in question.
• However, 57% also stated ‘better value’, and 31% said ‘brands that better meet personal needs’ as the reason.
• In terms of the products and services that consumers have switched the most, 26% (the majority) said shampoo, while 26% have switched energy provider, and 18% have switched supermarkets.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: The Career and Salary Survey was conducted across respondents with various levels of seniority, most of whom originate from the UK (83%).
• It’s not all good news for FMCG, however, as further insight showed there to be a 29% gender pay gap in this sector.
• While this is not the worst result of the set – ‘charity/not-for-profit’ claimed that title with an abysmal 47% gap – it is certainly not the best, requiring much improvement if it wants to compete with the leading sectors on this issue.
• The study attributes this to a lack of data literacy skills (the ability to read, analyse and work with data), with just 17% of respondents claiming that they are confident in their skills in this area.
• Companies also appear to be ineffective at providing the correct data tools for their employees’ skill levels, aggravating the situation and causing the majority (67%) to become ‘overwhelmed’ and ‘unhappy’ when working with data they are supplied with.
• Indeed, results of the survey suggest that just 16% of organisations take worker’s data literacy competency into consideration when providing data processing software.
• APAC retailers drive customer engagement by 19% with AI New research from Microsoft Asia and IDC Asia/Pacific reveals that APAC retailers that have adopted AI have seen improvements of between 16-19% in customer engagement, profit margins and business intelligence.
• The same study expects to see an even higher increase of between 37-44% across these same areas by 2021.
• According to Microsoft, 71% of retail decision-makers consider AI to be very important when it comes to how competitive their organisations are, despite just 33% having implemented AI as part of their marketing strategies.
• 9% in 2020 A report released this week by Dentsu Aegis Network has predicted a 3.
• 9% this year as it continues to adopt a more digitally-focused economy, fortified by its large population consuming digital products and technologies in domestic settings.
• 53% of publishers say that podcasting initiatives will be important to them this year Podcasting initiatives are becoming ever more important to publishers, according to a recent report from Reuter’s Institute.
• In a study, 53% of participants from both traditional and digital-born publishing companies said that daily news podcasts and chat interview podcasts were important audio initiatives for their organisations in 2020.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: 42% of UK adults consider online video services to be their main way of watching TV and film Ofcom’s ‘Media Nations 2019’ report has revealed how the UK’s media consumption habits are changing.
• Today, 42% of UK adults say that online video services are their main way of watching television and film.
• Forty-five percent of top-performing organisations say they invest significantly in digital skills, compared to just 23% of mainstream organisations.
• The report also states that top performers are 43% more likely than mainstream companies to say that training is their primary method of adding new skills.
• 88% of US consumers have bought something in-store in the past month The results of a new DMI survey suggests that the death of brick-and-mortar retail is a myth.
• When asking 1,500 US consumers to state all the ways they have purchased something in the past 30 days, 88% of their responses cited in-store purchases, compared to 59% online, and 38% on retailers’ mobile apps.
• What’s more, 44% of respondents purchased either mostly in the store or all in-store, while 27% of respondents shopped mostly online or all online.
• Forty six percent of respondents said in-store was their favourite purchase method, while 19% said Amazon’s website and 15% retailers’ websites.
• In a survey of 1,150 executives from 15 countries, just 11% of organisations said they are highly satisfied with their teams spearheading digital transformation.
• Digital Transformation Monthly report This is despite the fact that three-quarters of organisations have digital transformation programmes already in place, with 49% of these being led by IT.
• However, just 12% of organisations are highly satisfied that planning is flowing effectively through to execution, and only 29% of respondents say there are enough collaborative efforts between departments in place.
• Despite this, leaders in the survey who identified themselves as monitoring digital ROI said they were now 70% more efficient in driving positive returns versus those beginning their digital transformation.
• 74% of card issuers expect SCA to contribute a negative impact on payments UX Strong Customer Authentication (SCA) is coming into effect on 14th September, meaning that consumers will need to enter additional security authentications for online transactions over €30.
• When asking card issuers to report on their state of SCA readiness, 17% said they are ready today out of the 75% who expect to be so by the 14th September 2019.
• However, EPA’s research found that 58% of issuers agree or strongly agree that too much friction is being imposed on the payments experience with new regulations like the SCA.
• Overall, 74% of issuers expect SCA to contribute a negative impact on the user experience.
• 7 Important Influencer Marketing Stats You Need to Know | Social Media Today: 94% of Marketers Believe that Transparency and Authenticity are Critical to Influencer Marketing Success It’s interesting that an overwhelming majority of marketers think that transparency and authenticity are important to a business relationship meant to generate sales.
• Also mentioned in similar studies is that 81% of all influencers are considered “mico-influencers” who have smaller, focused audiences of anywhere between 15,000 to 100,000 followers.
• Celebrity influencers with millions of followers only make-up 1% of all influencers, and definitely command a hefty price tag.
• 42% of Marketers are Concerned about Fake Followers and Bots I’m surprised that this stat isn’t much larger, as this should be one of the biggest concerns for any marketer looking to invest in influencer marketing.
• 84% of marketers Think Thank the Measurement of ROI Will be Critical to the Future Success of Influencer Marketing] The biggest flaw with influencer marketing is being able to track results.
• 90% of Marketers Say that Engagement is the Most Common Metric to Measure Influencer Marketing Engagement is great, but revenue is better.
• Content Marketing Strategy:Five Essential Elements Based on 24 Stats: According to the Twitter for Business blog, 91% percent of B2B marketers are doing content marketing.
• 53% of respondents have small or one-person content teams serving their entire organizations.
• ” Image credit:People Creations Consequently, just 36% say their organizations are “very committed” to content marketing, and the majority (53%) of content marketers rate their content marketing as only “moderately successful.
• Yet nearly half (48%) of companies spend less than $15,000 on content marketing annually.
• 47% of buyers check 3-5 pieces of content before connecting with salespeople.
• 44% of the fastest-growing B2B companies offer downloadable content, like ebooks or whitepapers.
• Leaders are almost twice as likely (92% vs 55%) as others to rely on content to reinforce that clients have made the right decision to purchase their products or services.
• 58% of agency employees think their clients know nothing about content marketing.
• Yet—89% of B2B marketers claim they are now implementing a content marketing strategy.
• 58% of marketers say “original written content” is their most important type of content, over visuals and videos.
• Yet—just 28% of freelance content creators have a master’s degree or above, and only 24% have more than 10 years of freelance experience.
• Companies see a 55% increase in leads when increasing their number of landing pages from 10 to 15.
• Long landing pages can generate up to 220% more leads than landing pages with above-the-fold CTAs – but can also backfire.
• The average number of form fields on a B2B landing page is 11 — but reducing the number of form fields from 11 to four can produce a 120% increase in conversions.
• Only 16% of landing pages don’t have navigation bars — but removing the navigation menu can double the conversion rate.
• So does audio content (at least for reaching young professionals):nearly half (44%) of cast listeners are aged 18-34.
• More than 90% of marketers say they use visual content in at least 50% of all articles they publish.
• 45% of marketers say that infographics and other original graphics produce the highest engagement.
• 61% of marketers call visual content “absolutely necessary” to their marketing strategy.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: In December 2018, smartphones accounted for over 70% of mobile device sales for the first time (the other 30% was spent through tablets).
• 87% of marketers have a dedicated budget for testing new technology The DMA’s Future Trends report has revealed that 87% of marketers have a dedicated budget for testing new technology.
• On average, 36% of company budgets are allocated to trialling new technology, with just 13% of organisations not having the funds in place to test the latest innovations.
• The research also revealed that the size and resource available to a business seems to have a direct impact on budget allocated, with just 18% of small firms able to invest compared to 38% of medium-sized organisations and 37% of larger companies.
• 36% said this would be with humans, while 37% said this would be investment in chatbots.
• 54% says they already use and will continue to use chatbots, and this figure will likely increase over time.
• 4% of all UK shoppers make a purchase from Amazon at least once a month.
• 9% in 2018, with rapid growth forecast over the next five years, and the retailer set to account for 8% of spend by 2023.
• 71% of Brits believe that tech companies record data via phones and laptops without consent In a YouGov survey of 1776 UK consumers, 71% of respondents said they believe that tech companies record our data without consent via phones and laptops.
• As a result, four in 10 cover up their webcam, 18% do so on occasion, and 21% say they always do.
• When asked whether they think tech companies record us without consent, 71% of respondents said they think they do, and 56% said they think it’s a problem.
• Interestingly, 25% of people who do not think this is the case still cover up their webcam just in case.
• In terms of other precautions, 64% of respondents say they adjust privacy settings on their devices to make sure they’re not giving away data they don’t want to, 38% always deny permissions for data collection on apps, and 5% always browse the internet in incognito mode (39% do so on occasion).
• More than 67% of the ads tested in the study were already seen and cognitively recognised at 0.
• UK consumers spend 27% less on orders placed via mobile and 32% less on desktop orders compared to the global average.
• Finally, Austria, Germany, and Switzerland have the lowest cart abandonment rates on both mobile and desktop, which is 73% and 66% (compared with corresponding global averages of 80% and 74%).
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: 62% of people have a positive attitude towards VR, versus 76% in 2017 Following on from a 2017 survey, ReportLinker has conducted new research to find out whether attitudes towards virtual reality have changed.
• 56% of survey respondents have heard about the technology but are not able to explain it to a friend, which is a 10% increase since 2017.
• However, despite the increase in awareness, 62% of people have a positive attitude towards the technology, compared to 76% in October 2017 and 83% in January 2017.
• When it comes to VR’s leading brands, just 28% of respondents can name an industry leader without any hints or clues – 17% less than in 2017.
• Only 37% also show familiarity when brand names are suggested – 23% less than in 2017.
• 55% of all Facebook posts are links Quintly has just published its ‘Facebook 2018’ study, based on the analysis of 94,000 pages and over 105 million posts on Facebook.
• Findings show that link posts have the biggest share of all post types, making up 55% of the 105 million analysed.
• Interestingly, despite their popularity, link posts generate 72% fewer interactions than video posts.
• Video generates 65% more interactions than images, while images generate 105% more interactions that status updates.
• Lastly, the study found a 13% higher interaction rate on weekends compared to weekdays.
• From the analysis of 250 UK retailers, Visualsoft found a 19% year-on-year increase in the number of brands accepting international currency.
• 81% of the biggest retailers are offering customers the option to pay in non-sterling alternatives – an increase on the 62% of retailers that offered international payments in 2017.
• The majority of these are Euros and USD, with 1% of retailers offering Yen.
• The research also found that Amazon Pay is already being used by 10% of top retailers, while a further one in 10 of retailers analysed offer finance products from lenders such as Klarna – up from almost nothing in 2017.
• This is compared to 12% who would trust online reviews, 2% who would trust a referral from a celebrity, and 3% who would trust a blogger or YouTuber.
• Fifty one percent of respondents cited great customer service as a reason to refer a brand, while 49% said being trustworthy, and 42% said offering good discounts.
• In a survey of more than 5,000 consumers across markets, 52% of respondents say that once they’re loyal to a brand, they’re loyal for life.
• However, 76% of respondents also admit they typically switch to a competitor if they have just one bad experience with a brand they like.
• 66% of consumers say brands don’t do a good job of using their personal preferences to predict their needs, which is in contrast to marketers’ claims that they’re improving personalisation.
• Seventy eight percent of consumers say they are more likely to be loyal if the brand demonstrates an understanding of them as the customer, yet 64% feel that brands who should know them well don’t know them well at all.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: In a survey, 91% of respondents said that they regularly experience situations where employees fail to apply a flexible way of communicating and common sense as a result of not being able to think ‘in the moment’.
• The survey also found that 46% of people have reported experiencing impatient customer service, 45% said they have experienced unhelpfulness, and 38% have experienced poor communication.
• As a result, customers are quick to make judgements about organisations, with 88% admitting that they make negative assumptions about the entire organisation due to inappropriate staff behaviour.
• 15 examples of artificial intelligence in marketing Snap’s ad revenue rises 50% year on year Snap has announced positive earnings results for Q3 2019, with revenue increasing 50% year-on-year to $446 million in Q3 2019.
• Alongside this, it has seen success with its Discover platform, as total daily time spent watching Discover increased by 40% year-over-year.
• This stems from the finding that consumer engagement increased by an average of 12% between 7am and 9am on the Sunday morning after the clocks went back in 2018, compared to the average traffic for the same time period the day before.
• Consumer engagement with these three verticals increased by 80%, 62%, and 27% respectively throughout the Sunday morning after the clocks went back last year.
• Generally, most brands stand to benefit from the end of daylight savings with the overall increase across all verticals averaging 25% compared to the week before.
• As a result of this increased morning activity, there was also a reduction in online activity at night, with engagement rates dropping by 20% between 10pm and 11pm, and by 30% between 11pm and midnight the Sunday night after the clocks went in 2018.
• The report states that ecommerce ad spending increased 54% year-on-year, while targeted promotions in July garnered almost as much ad spending as November of last year on a same-advertiser basis.
• Spending on social was also up, increasing 32% year-on-year and 4% quarter-over-quarter.
• Paid search spending increased 7% year-on-year and 2% quarter-over-quarter.
• Learn more Fast Track Paid Social training course with Econsultancy Other interesting findings include the fact that over the last six months, Pinterest spending per month has increased nearly 30%.
• Mobile ads continued to dominate, too, accounting for 88% of social spending and 54% of search spending in Q3.
• 33% of consumers would prefer no marketing at all rather than irrelevant emails In a survey of 4,003 consumers across the US and UK, Ometria found that customers are feeling overwhelmed by their email inboxes as a result of retailers sending too many marketing messages.
• Across the survey, 74% of respondents expressed annoyance at being emailed too often by retailers, with 70% admitting to regularly feeling overwhelmed when they open their inbox, and 15% saying they feel this way on a daily basis.
• The survey also revealed that 84% of respondents said they want to receive personalised offers and rewards for being a loyal customer.
• As a result of irrelevant email marketing, 33% of respondents said they would prefer no marketing at all, compared to just 17% who said they would prefer a lot of generic marketing that doesn’t use personal data.
• 58% of customers say they are loyal to three or fewer retailers, while 82% are loyal to five or fewer.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: 72% of global consumers demand better standards to tackle fake reviews A study from Bazaarvoice claims that 72% of consumers from the US, UK, France, Germany and Australia believe that stricter procedures should be put in place to tackle fake reviews posted on retail websites.
• The most popular rule that respondents said they’d like enforced is that only verified customers should be permitted to post reviews (43%).
• Requiring shoppers to try and test products before launch, as well as daily assessment of the reviews posted to a brands’ website, came in second and third place with 38% and 34% approval respectively.
• Participants from the UK believe that a fine of 12% of total revenue would be the most fitting penalty for brands who breach these standards, but this may not be as severe when compared to the sales lost through lack of trust if reviews are thought to be fake or otherwise manipulated.
• Indeed, further results showed that 48% of UK consumers would not buy a product online if they suspected foul play, and 43% said that their trust in the brand would be lost.
• As a result, a significant 78% claimed that they would stop purchasing from a brand after they were deemed untrustworthy.
• Ratings and Reviews Best Practice Guide 42% of UK adults are getting coronavirus information from social media platforms Recent data published by Brandwatch suggests that as many as 42% of the British public continue to obtain coronavirus information from social media platforms.
• The findings, collated from the responses of more than 2000 UK adults, showed that while the majority (69%) use news outlets, there remains a worryingly large proportion that rely on social platforms for updates on the virus.
• In contrast, just 16% said that healthcare professionals were one of their sources for updates and advice, ranking as the least used information resource of all categories measured in the survey.
• Interestingly, this view is shared evenly amongst those of differing political allegiance in the US, with 69% of Democrats, 72% of independents and 75% of Republicans all in agreement.
• Just 7% were happy to disclose any available online information about themselves, including very specified data.
• Troublingly, the largest proportion of respondents – 36% – claim that objectification has remained the same as it was in 2015.
• Furthermore, of those who believe the situation has improved over this time period, a tiny 7% said that women were ‘much less’ objectified, while 29% said ‘a little less’.
• 18 smart women in SEO to follow on Twitter 36% of Gen X find new brands through TV advertising 36% of Gen X are exposed to new brands through TV advertising, according to data from GlobalWebIndex.
• As a result, their exposure to traditional TV advertising is heightened compared to that of the generations that come after them, but second to that of baby boomers (42% of which find new brands through TV).
• While Gen X are slowly adopting a more digital approach when it comes to watching TV, only a quarter of them watch via online streaming services on mobile devices, instead preferring to watch on TV sets they grew accustomed to in their youth (34%).
• 2% year-on-year rise in app downloads during Cyber Week A report from Poq Commerce states that retailers saw a 42.
• Consumers were also 16% quicker than usual to add an item to their shopping basket during Cyber Week, proving a higher intent to purchase than any other week during the year.
• 3% increase in shopping app downloads (YoY) over the whole of Q4 2019, which covers a range of shopping events including Cyber Week, Christmas shopping and Boxing Day sales, all of which contribute to a higher sales volume and spend over this period.
• It is predicted that shopping apps will make up 25% of all online traffic for retailers that have one by the end of 2020.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: UK desktop display viewability reaches over 70% for the first time The H1 2019 Media Quality Report from Integral Ad Science has revealed that desktop display viewability exceeded 70% for the first time during H1 2019.
• Overall, global viewability averages surpassed 60% across all formats and environments in H1 2019.
• 4% risk, whilst Japan see the highest with fraudulent impressions at 2.
• 65% of spend on location-based advertising is wasted due to poor targeting Nearly two-thirds of location-based advertising spend is still being wasted because of poor quality data and mis-targeted location impressions, according to Location Sciences.
• Elsewhere, the research discovered that an average of 29% of impressions currently miss the target specified by the client, while 36% of impressions assessed are not of the quality needed to deliver to the specific targeting area required for location campaigns.
• Around 87% of this group used a mobile app or site to do so, 9% used a desktop only, and just 4% used a combination of desktop and mobile apps or sites.
• Finally, the report states that male users dominate the online dating landscape in the UK, making up 70% of desktop users and 61% of mobile users.
• In fact, it is older users who make up the majority on desktop:58% of desktop online dating site users are aged over 45, while on mobile, this age group still makes up 39% of the total.
• This resulted in Tesco’s Awareness scores increasing by 7%, rising from 20% to 27%.
• 40% of consumers say brands inform their food and drink buying decisions In a survey of 2,000 British consumers, KPMG found that 62% of respondents say they care more about the health qualities of the food and drink they buy than they did five years ago.
• Meanwhile, brands are now the most influential factor on consumer perceptions relating to how healthy food and drink is, with 40% of respondents crediting brands for informing their buying decisions.
• The survey also found that just 22% of respondents base their food and drink decisions on government advice or their friends and family.
• What’s more, despite a focus on technology and social media, only 13% say they use an app-based nutritionist, and only 4% credit nutrition information to a social media influencer.
• This is also despite the fact that – though Lego’s half-year revenue rose by 4% in the first half of 2019 – net profit dropped 12% during the period.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: Number of CX executives predicted to grow by at least 25% in 2020 Forrester has predicted that that one in four CX pros will lose their jobs in 2020, after dozens of high-profile CMO positions were eliminated last year.
• At the same time, however, Forrester has also predicted that the number of CX executives will grow by at least 25%.
• 3% in the UK compared to 2018 It was good news for physical retailers in the UK this Black Friday, as Springboard data revealed that 2019 saw a rise in footfall of 3.
• When questioned as to why this might be, 34% of leaders pointed to a lack of customer alignment, while 29% cited poor logistics, and 29% said insufficient investment.
• Interestingly, 51% of digital commerce leaders admitted they believe their organisation hasn’t invested enough in ecommerce, while a further 28% said digital projects move forward too quickly and lack real strategy.
• Despite these challenges, the study also revealed a sense of optimism, as 79% of digital commerce leaders said they feel ready to take advantage of the opportunities digital commerce has to offer in the next year.
• Digital commerce leaders feel the three biggest areas of opportunity online commerce offers their business will be to provide a better chance of growth within their industry (20%), a better ability to compete (20%) and alignment with customer demands (16%).
• US spend for social product ads increased 43% YoY this ‘Cyber 5’ Kenshoo has revealed that US retailers relied heavily on social advertising this sale season, as they attempted to reach shoppers early (and target those who weren’t even thinking about a brand as a purchase option yet).
• During this year’s ‘Cyber 5’ (the five days from Thanksgiving to Cyber Monday), year-on-year spending increased 20% for search shopping campaigns, and 13% for ecommerce channel ads.
• However, social product ads experienced the biggest lift with an increase of 43% year-on-year.
• Elsewhere, Kenshoo found that search shopping campaign investment increased 177% during Cyber 5 compared to the pre-Thanksgiving November period.
• Most of this stemmed from a 169% increase in cost per click (CPC), as advertisers were willing to bid higher to reach customers with greater purchase intent.
• Finally, in comparison to an average day in pre-Thanksgiving November, the average daily spend across Cyber 5 for ecommerce channel ads increased 133%, with the average cost per click increasing by 23%.
• 42% of creative professionals feel their sector lags behind in the adoption of new technologies Half of small businesses in the creative industry say that technology helps them compete with larger organisations, according to new research by Vodafone.
• The research, which involved a survey of 500 small businesses in the UK’s creative industry, found that 40% of companies produce their best ideas and work ‘on-the-go’.
• What’s more, 38% work digitally rather than in person, suggesting that it is a sector that heavily relies on technology to drive productivity.
• However, whilst 73% of respondents believe technology brings positive change, 42% of also said they feel the sector lags behind others in adoption and usage of new technologies.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: Consumers would not care if 77% of brands disappeared The majority of big brands are irrelevant in consumers’ minds, says new research from Havas Media.
• The agency’s ‘Meaningful Brands’ study – which is based on 1,800 brands and 350,000 global respondents – has revealed that consumers would not care if 77% of brands disappeared.
• The study found that 90% of consumers expect brands to provide content, and yet 58% of content from leading brands is not meaningful to them.
• Interestingly, however, 76% of consumers do expect brands to contribute to their quality of life and wellbeing.
• 18% of the websites with the most improved search performance within the ten regions are ecommerce sites.
• When asked whether brands’ position on environmental, social, or political causes was becoming more important to their purchasing decisions, 42% of UK respondents agreed that it was becoming more, or much more, important.
• On the other hand, 36% of US consumers and just 18% of Australian consumers said the same.
• Interestingly, UK brands feel even more urgency than consumers, with 59% reporting that this is becoming more or much more important.
• In a survey of 2,000 Brits, 71% of 18 to 24 year olds said that they feel young people are misunderstood.
• The study also found that 65% of 18 to 24 year olds worry about their mental health, compared to 46% of those aged 25 and over.
• 64% of consumers say they would leave an ‘unsecure’ website instantly New research published by Real Business suggests that the majority of consumers would be put off for good if a website appeared unsecure.
• In a survey of 1,324 consumers, 47% of respondents knew roughly what the warning meant.
• 46% said they wouldn’t enter their name, password or bank details into a website that was “not secure”, with 64% of those saying they would leave the website instantly.
• 14% also feared that their device had been exposed to a virus, while 12% thought it was a fake version of a real website.
• When using John Lewis as an example, 21% of participants said they were disappointed with the brand for being unsecure, however, a surprising 23% chose not to believe it, and became suspicious of the research.
• In a survey of 500 key business decision-makers, 22% of respondents said they often need to travel to purchase goods in-store.
• In terms of the reasons why, 81% stated that it is because they are unable to clearly see what products look like online.
• Meanwhile, 55% said it is because they prefer in-store customer service and the ability to speak to a member of staff for advice.
• 55% of respondents also expressed a strong desire for B2B ecommerce retailers to invest in the same technologies as B2C companies.
• 29% expressed a desire for AR to help visualise products, and 26% said they would like tools such as chatbots.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: UK footfall drops 4% during post-Christmas sales The Christmas sales failed to ignite interest from UK shoppers this year, as footfall to the UK’s high streets dropped 4% during 26th December to 1st January in comparison to the same time in 2018.
• 1% on December 30th, however this was likely down to the fact that it was a Monday (rather than a Sunday in 2018), which allowed for longer trading hours.
• Four digital experts on the future of high street retail 84% of customers consider a company’s ethics before making a purchase More than eight in ten consumers consider business ethics and values before they make a purchase, new research from TollFreeForwarding.
• In a survey of 2,000 US consumers – which questioned respondents on how businesses can secure their loyalty as the new decade begins – environmental responsibility (45%), supporting worker’s rights (44%), and ending animal testing (44%) were cited as the three most important ethical issues.
• A staggering 84% of consumers said they consider a company’s ethics and values before making a purchase, with 48% also saying they consider it to be of equal importance to the price of their products.
• 38% consider advertising via email to be untrustworthy, while 35% say the same about ahead of social media.
• Traditional platforms such as TV (27%), radio (24%), and physical newspaper (22%) secured the most trust.
• According to a survey of gaming video content viewers, 29% of the respondents under age 25 said they watched continuously for one to two hours, and 14% watched three to four hours at a time.
• Mobile gaming generated 60% of global video games revenue in 2019 New statistics released by GoldenCasinoNews state that the global video games market generated $83 billion income in 2019, and is predicted to reach $95.
• Mobile gaming accounted for 60% (or $49 billion) of the $83 billion generated last year, while online gaming was the second largest market with $16.
• Mobile Marketing Best Practice Guide 52% of consumers have abandoned an online purchase out of fear of a difficult return process A new survey by Splitit has highlighted how a poor returns policy can affect web conversion as well as a retailer’s bottom line.
• The survey (of 500 US consumers) found that 60% of respondents have returned an online purchase, with 38% having returned up to 10% of all online purchases they have made.
• Twelve percent of respondents said they have returned a purchase within the past month, 11% within the last six months, and 18% within the last year.
• What’s more, 48% of respondents said they have purchased multiple variations of an item with the intention of returning one or more items.
• Finally, the survey found that 52% of consumers have abandoned an online purchase out of fear of a difficult return process, with this number increasing to 67% for respondents aged 25 to 34.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: Breaking down rates into retail categories, SaleCycle notes that online grocery sites have the lowest cart abandonment rate at 72%.
• Ecommerce Best Practice Guide Instagram videos receive 49% higher interactions that images and carousels For its Instagram Study 2019, Quintly has analysed the performance of 34,121 Instagram Business Profiles and 5.
• 2% of Instagram posts are made up of single images, followed by video posts with a share of 18%, and carousel posts with just 14%.
• Interestingly, however, video posts receive up to 49% higher interactions than the other two formats combined.
• Meanwhile, despite being listed down at number 50, Deliveroo was named in the top five fastest risers, after increasing its value 54% to reach £1.
• Interestingly, Kantar states that the rate of growth for UK brands continues to fall behind those in the BrandZ Global Top 100 – which are worth 7% more than they were in 2018.
• What’s more, the total value of the BrandZ UK Top 75 declined 3% over the last year.
• 45% of luxury consumers switch between online and offline during their buying journey New research from Attraqt, involving a survey of 3,000 UK, France and UAE luxury shoppers, has highlighted the importance of multichannel for luxury retail brands.
• It found that 45% of all luxury shoppers switch between online and offline channels during their path to purchase, with this percentage rising to 47% for Gen Z and Millennial shoppers.
• Next, more than a fifth of respondents said that they can’t access the intricate product detail and imagery they need to feel comfortable enough to buy, while 16% said irrelevant search results in the onsite search bar is a big frustration.
• txt on the buy-side is low, with only 6% of advertisers and 26% of agencies buying more than 81% of verified ads.
• txt adoption is much higher among publishers, however, with 56% of them selling more than 81% of their inventory with an ads.
• Finally, the report reveals a number of barriers to programmatic investment, with 34% of advertisers citing brand safety as a barrier – a 10% increase from 2018.
• Despite hiring people with the right skillset decreasing as a barrier for advertisers, it remains a significant problem elsewhere, with 43% of agencies, 48% of publishers and 45% of ad tech vendors citing hiring people with the right skill set as a barrier to investment.
• Leanplum states that day one retention for finance users is 73% higher than other categories.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: Currently, just 24% of British businesses sell via social platforms, while the global average is 35%.
• 64% of UK consumers show concern over the security of mobile commerce, compared to 58% in the US, and just 28% in Japan.
• 94% of global shoppers could be encouraged to choose a slower and cheaper delivery option Today’s online shoppers want upfront transparency on fees, control over the delivery process, and a clearly-stated returns policy.
• In fact, 94% of global consumers could be encouraged to choose a slower and cheaper delivery option if they were offered it.
• This is why 35% will choose click and collect in order to obtain free shipping, 35% will add further items to their cart, and 35% will choose the slowest delivery option.
• Why luxury brands need digital transformation 85% of grocery retailers lack capabilities to monetise data A study by Forrester Consulting has revealed that 85% of grocery retailers globally lack the capabilities needed to monetise their data and drive customer experience.
• As it stands, just 15% of global grocery retailers are classified as ‘leaders’, differentiated by data-led customer strategies for growth and improved supplier relationships.
• Meanwhile, 96% of global grocery retailers experience challenges trying to use data to develop customer strategies (in order to drive growth).
• In the UK, the main concern – cited by 40% of respondents – is the lack of data management tools or technology.
• Just over half of UK respondents use mobile app data and only 42% use customer data to make decisions about customers.
• Despite these apparent barriers, 82% of UK grocery retailers view growing revenues as their top priority in 2020, and 78% plan to do so by improving their use of data insights to develop customer strategies.
• 75% of UK consumers are happy to share personal data A new report by Valitor, based on a survey of 2,000 UK consumers, has revealed that brands are largely failing when it comes to personalisation – despite the fact that three-quarters of consumers are happy for their data to be shared.
• Meanwhile 48% think when it comes to relationship ‘building’, all they generally see are spam emails post-sale.
• In fact, 75% of consumers are comfortable with the concept of a brand holding personal information about them in order to improve services.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: IKEA sees 495% social lift from TV ads airing during Game of Thrones Research by 4C Insights has revealed that IKEA tops the list of brands who saw the greatest social lift from ads airing during ‘Game of Thrones’ in the UK.
• IKEA saw a 495% TV social lift during this season of ‘Game of Thrones’.
• O2 follows in close second, with just one ad airing in the breaks between this season’s episodes achieving a social lift of 335% for the brand.
• BT came in third, with a whopping eight ads generating a social lift of 242%.
• Similarly, 80% of results on pages one and two of Google had a ‘time to first byte’ (a measurement to indicate the responsiveness of a site) below 0.
• For example, 86% of page one results and 85% of page two results now use next generation image formats such as WebP, JPEG2000 and JPEG XR, which load faster and use up less of users’ mobile data.
• The study, conducted among 2,000 UK consumers, identified that just 20% of customer journeys now start with the restaurant’s own website.
• Instead, half begin with a search engine, 12% begin on map apps such as Google and Apple Maps, a further 7% start on review sites such as Yelp and Foursquare.
• Interestingly, 5% begin on delivery sites such as Deliveroo and Uber Eats.
• The study also found that 81% of consumers attribute terms like ‘takes reservations’, ‘has outdoor seating’, ‘drive-thru’ or ‘gluten-free options’ in their search query.
• Speed is also an important factor, with 12% of people expecting to find this information just one hour before they visit or pick-up an order from a restaurant.
• Nearly half of UK consumers think the ad industry needs to change A new report by Conversant, which involves a survey of consumers across seven different countries, found that 48% of UK consumers dislike seeing the same ads multiple times.
• As a result of this, 48% of Brits believe the advertising industry needs to change.
• Consumers in the US and Germany experience a similar level of repetitive ads, with the desire for the industry to move away from this activity also between 47 and 49% respectively.
• However, only 38% of consumers in France dislike this advertising technique, with only 40% believing change is needed.
• The research also revealed that 29% of UK consumers judge brands poorly when they produce bad advertising.
• While consumers are open to adverts, 44% would prefer to see fewer ads, with those that they do see to be more relevant and useful to the individual.
• This desire was also reflected in the US and Germany, but again less so in France, where only 15% of French consumers would be put off a brand by its poor advertising.
• Amazon’s brand value increases 91% since 2018 BrandZ’s Top 75 Most Valuable Global Retail Brands report has revealed the world’s most valuable retail brands are worth $339 billion more this year than the last.
• The world’s number one brand, Amazon, has seen a 91% increase from 2018 – now with an estimated brand value of $315,505m.
• Chinese e-commerce giant Alibaba, the world’s largest online and mobile commerce business, has seen its brand value increase by 48% to $131.
• May 7th 2019 14:13 Article Digital AdvertisingHow Google Chrome’s cross-site cookie & fingerprinting changes will affect marketers By most estimates, Google Chrome is the world’s most popular web browser with market share above 60%.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: 77% of global consumers find targeted mobile messages ‘annoying’ A recent study by Ogury suggests that current marketing methods are putting off consumers.
• According to a survey of 287,571 mobile users across the UK, US, France, Germany, Italy, and Spain, 52% of consumers globally agree that intrusive or irrelevant marketing messages give them a poor opinion of the app or website that hosts them.
• Within that dominant portion, 13% say marketing messages are indeed ‘useful’, but still consider them to be annoying.
• When asked about consumers’ preferred marketing method, the survey found no dominant preference towards email or mobile ads, with both channels receiving exactly 41% of the total vote.
• Just 18% stated that they preferred receiving marketing messages this way.
• In the UK, specifically, 10 million Instagram accounts were exposed as fake, while 52% of accounts were found to have bought followers, comments, or used bots.
• 60% of respondents in a survey of 400 influencers admitted to partaking in this type of activity, and one in five said they intend to continue doing so.
• 5 billion, seeing a growth of 10% year-on-year, and leading iOS in downloads by 185%.
• On iOS, app downloads represented 70% of downloads, while on Google Play they represented 60%.
• Remanufacturing products appears to be largely geared towards increasing the product lifecycle, as 75% of European retailers are investing in higher quality materials for this reason.
• Elsewhere, however, 88% of British respondents state their business has looked into recyclable packaging, but only 36% currently report they have successfully made the change.
• Additionally, 55% of British businesses cite meeting consumer demands around environmentalism as a top challenge.
• 49% of French businesses say the same, where remanufacturing expenditure rises to nearly €3.
• 6m in Germany, where 46% of businesses list the quality of products as their greatest challenge.
• According to the survey, 47% of Germans want more experiential advertising, compared to just 16% of the UK and USA, and just 11% of French consumers.
• Consumers in Germany are also the least tolerant of ads as a means of providing free content, with just 30% admitting that they understand this trend, compared to 41% of the UK.
• Despite these objections to advertising, both British and US consumers still have significant faith in ads, with 80% of both saying that more traditional forms of advertising still offer value.
• However, many consumers demanded change across the industry, with 48% of the UK believing that the advertising industry needs to change, as well as 40% of French consumers.
• This number rises to 51% for those aged 18 to 21, and 56% for people aged 26 to 35.
• 33% of consumers report having browsed for furniture online in the past year, while 34% say the same for cars.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: Finally, use of the hashtag #ad by Instagram influencers spiked by 60% by the end of Q3.
• The report also states that 76% of influencers admit to working other jobs, with just 24% working solely as an influencer.
• However, 57% plan to be influencers for ‘the rest of their working life’, while 43% view ‘influencing’ as a temporary career choice.
• It was cited by 28% of CX leaders, and 32% of mainstream organisations surveyed.
• 80% of B2C brands believe direct-to-consumer companies are impacting their market A new report by the CMO Club has delved into the impact direct-to-consumer companies have made on the consumer market.
• Based on a survey of CMO Club members, including 74 responses from CMOs or heads of marketing at non-DTC brands, the report concludes that 80% of B2Cs surveyed either somewhat (49%) or strongly agree (31%) that DTC is impacting their market.
• The reason for this stems from DTC’s performance-based digital marketing, specifically, digital media buying (43%), social (41%) and delivering curated experiences (31%).
• As a result of DTCs’ focus on measurable demand generation, 53% of B2Cs surveyed are now more focused on ensuring their marketing dollars tie directly back to ROI.
• com/oem6g6FPfr — Tesco (@Tesco) September 9, 2019 48% of UK consumers are willing to give data to restaurants in exchange for personalisation With changing consumer habits and the rise of delivery services, personalisation has become a critical factor in the UK’s restaurant scene.
• In a survey of 2,017 adults, 48% of respondents aged between 18 and 55 said they would be willing to hand over their data to restaurants, in exchange for a personalised menu tailored to their specific needs, likes, and dietary requirements.
• 25% of respondents said they want the option to pay their bill via a mobile app, 20% said they would like cardless payment options, and 14% said they want to be able to give feedback to the restaurant on a tablet at the table.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: 84% of marketers see GDPR as a positive development A year on from GDPR (read our briefing – GDPR:A year on), SaleCycle has released the results of a survey on marketers’ attitudes to compliance.
• SaleCycle found that 84% of survey respondents see GDPR as a positive development, and just 16% see it as a negative.
• Out of those negative respondents, 67% see GDPR as an annoyance that may deter subscribers.
• Meanwhile, 76% of marketers said they had changed the way they ask for consent from site visitors as a result of GDPR.
• In terms of practical steps, 21% of marketers say they have implemented checkboxes for consent, 26% have introduced stricter opt-in processes, and 32% have focused on gaining explicit consent for marketing.
• In addition, 29% have implemented tools to help them manage marketing permissions.
• 55% of companies describe approach to CLTV as ‘basic’ or ‘non-existent’ According to Econsultany’s Customer Lifetime Value report, published in partnership with Red Eye, a growing number of companies are prioritising CLTV.
• From the survey of 610 respondents (both in-house and client-side), 76% of client-side respondents reported that driving customer lifetime value is a high or medium priority for their organisation.
• Despite this, however, the majority are still at the beginning of the journey, with only 1% saying their approach to CLTV is mature, and 44% saying it is developing.
• The research also highlights a widespread recognition that customer retention strategies are a good investment, with 91% of companies reporting that investment in growing CLTV is more profitable than investment in customer acquisition.
• Customer Lifetime Value Report Ads are ‘unacceptable’ to 72% of subscription video service users In a new survey of more that 2,000 consumers, Differentology has revealed that 72% of UK subscription video service (SVOD) subscribers do not find any form of advertising on these platforms acceptable.
• If Netflix were to begin showing ads, 23% of Netflix subscribers said they would upgrade to an ad-free premium model to avoid it.
• According to the research, there is still “plenty of room for growth” in the SVOD market, with 37% of current subscribers stating that they are likely to take up another service in the next six months.
• That being said, the survey also highlighted low levels of churn for subscription services, with 66% of subscribers saying they have never cancelled their subscriptions before, and 32% saying they wait less than three months to re-subscribe to the same platform.
• 35% of the total time spent online in the UK is on sites owned by Google or Facebook There’s been more news from Ofcom this week, with the release of the Online Nation 2019 report, which collates the attitudes to and experiences of internet usage in the UK.
• Further to this, the report states that 35% of the total time spent online in the UK is on sites owned by Google or Facebook.
• Interestingly, 74% of consumers say they feel confident about managing their personal data online and the majority of people are happy for companies to collect their information under certain conditions.
• However, only 17% of adult internet users say they don’t mind if organisations use information about them to decide the content they are shown, and only 18% don’t mind information being used to determine the adverts they are shown.
• The results show that the majority remain wary of it, with only 17% of survey respondents saying they have used a social buy button before.
• 85% of respondents are sceptical of brands who offer social commerce, believing they could be fake, while 10% of respondents say they have had a bad experience with social commerce, causing them to doubt the service overall.
• 50 Stats You Need to Know About Content Marketing: 79% of marketers report their organizations are shifting to branded content.
• 72% of marketers think branded content is more effective than advertising in a magazine, 69% say it is superior to direct mail and PR.
• 86% of B2C marketers use content marketing and 91% of B2B marketers use content marketing.
• 64% of B2B content marketers say their biggest challenge is producing enough content.
• 37% of marketers say blogs are the most valuable content type for marketing.
• 99% of people who share via social networks are sharing via multiple platforms.
• People spend more than 50% of their time online with content and an additional 30% of their time on social channels where content can be shared.
• 70% of consumers prefer getting to know a company via articles over ads.
• 90% of consumers find custom content useful and 78% believe that organizations providing custom content are interested in building good relationships with them.
• 68% of consumers spend time reading content from a brand they are interested in.
• 60% of consumers feel more positive about a company after reading custom content on its site.
• People want to be in control of the content they receive:86% of people skip TV commercials.
• 91% of email users have unsubscribed from a company email they previously opted into.
• 40% of people will respond better to visual information than plain text.
• 1% of people say a website’s design is the number one criterion for discerning the credibility of the company.
• Just one month after the introduction of Facebook timeline for brands, photos and videos saw a 65% increase in engagement.
• In a Custom Content Council study, 62% of respondents reported using video in their content marketing.
• 75% of smartphone users watch videos on their phones, 26% of whom use video at least once a day.
• Content creation ranked as the single most effective SEO tactic by 53%.
• 4% of B2B businesses say SEO has the biggest impact on lead generation goals.
• Conversion rates are 105% higher for consumers who interact with ratings and product reviews.
• 54% of marketers say they will increase their content marketing spending in the next 12 months.
• 55% of B2C marketers plan to increase their investment in branded content.
• 15 Content Marketing Statistics Every Marketer Needs to Consider: But believe me, nothing beats having substantial evidence that will give you a 100% guarantee that you’re on the right path.
• 93% of B2B Marketers Use Content Marketing (Source:Content Marketing Institute) The majority of B2B marketers now prefer content marketing to formal traditional advertising.
• 78% of CMO’s See Custom Content as the Future of Marketing (Source:Demand Metric) The web is continuously changing, and audiences are changing along with it.
• The Best B2B Marketers Spend 39% on Content Marketing (Source:Top Rank Blog) The first question I always ask my prospects when I meet them one-on-one is, “Where are you presently spending your marketing budget?
• 48% of Small Businesses Have a Strong Content Strategy (Source:CMI) This statistic contrasts with the 41% of larger organizations who have a well-documented content strategy.
• 73% of Companies Have Someone to Manage Content Strategy (Source:CMI) Time is the most precious asset of entrepreneurs.
• 69% of Marketers Say Content Is Superior to PR and Direct Mail (Source:Custom Content Council) Direct response marketers know the power of a well-written direct mail campaign.
• Almost 60% of Marketers Reuse Content 2 to 5 Times (Source:Look Book HQ) Marketers repurpose content in order to generate “snackable” content based on assets.
• And 45% of companies with marketing automation consistently repurpose content for efficiency.
• 64% of B2B Marketers Outsource Writing to Professionals (Source:Top Rank Blog) As a B2B marketer, one of the few habits you should acquire is content outsourcing.
• 50% of Marketers Want Their Content to Get Real Attention (Source:Contently) It’s never enough to create content and hope that people will like, read, and share it.
• 72% of B2C Marketers Are Producing Large Amounts of Content (Source:CMI) B2C marketers are producing much more content than they were a year ago.
• The fact that 72% of marketers are producing more content now than they did the previous year is good news.
• 73% of Marketers Produce Content to Achieve Brand Awareness (Source:Contently) Content marketing (when done well) can significantly improve a company’s brand awareness.
• 87% of Content Marketers Use Social Media Most Often (Source:CMI) Social media networks, such as Pinterest, Twitter, Facebook, Periscope and LinkedIn, have changed the way marketers communicate with consumers.
• 81% of Marketers Plan to Use More Original Written Content (Source:Social Media Examiner) In case you didn’t know, Google penalizes duplicate content because users dislike it.
• Use of Video Content Increased by 8% to 58% in 2014 (Source:Demandgen) Infographic usage increased by 9% to 52%.
• Use of Video Content Increased by 8% to 58% in 2014 Content Marketing Statistics Help Your Strategy Content Marketing Statistics Help Your Strategy Content marketing remains one of the best ways to promote a brand, irrespective of the industry.
• 35 PPC Stats for Boosting Your Digital Marketing in 2023: PPC visitors are 50% more likely to make a purchase than organic visitors.
• This is proven by the fact that 83% of marketers utilized social media in 2020, an increase from 60% in 2019.
• The pay-per-click statistics further show that the number of marketers using search engine marketing increased from 51% to 65% between 2019–2020.
• 2% year-over-year could have happened in 2020 amid the ongoing fallout from the pandemic.
• Paid ads are a much quicker way to reach an audience, and the PPC advertising stats favoring this statement shows these ads increasing brand awareness by 80%.
• (Source:Search Engine Land) Even though more than half of the users who run into a text ad avoid clicking it, 49% still do.
• The most attractive ads are related to shopping—PPC statistics point out that 31% of people click on these.
• The likelihood of PPC visitors making a purchase is 50% greater than it is with organic visitors.
• The conversion rates are 50% higher with PPC leads, as we can see from the PPC trends.
• when internet users are specifically looking for a product or service to buy—65% of all clicks go to the paid ads, as per pay-per-click ads statistics.
• With estimates showing that 47% of all internet users block ads, a large chunk of the market is out of reach for marketers.
• Additionally, YouTube stats reveal that 80% of consumers watch videos on this platform to help them with their purchase decision.
• 9% of the social network’s total revenue in that year, which shows just how heavily it relied on paid advertisements.
• Not many advertising mediums can brag about having a 200% ROI, except for email marketing, with an ROI of $38 per dollar spent.
• Google AdWords statistics show that 90% of internet users see Google ads.
• However, with their ads reaching 90% of internet users, Google Ads shouldn’t be a source of concern or doubt.
• Even though Google reports low click-through rates, 63% of people say they trust Google to display ads that are relevant to them—and they say they’d click them.
• (Source:Statista) It’s unsurprising that the retail and consumer goods industry spent 11% more on advertising in 2020, as the market includes online stores.
• (Source:Statista / Media Radar) B2B PPC stats show that the B2B industry also spent the most on advertising in 2020 at 8% more, next to the retail sector.
• (Source:Statista) Given the impact of Covid-19 on the travel industry, it was expected that they would reduce their paid ad spending to nearly 50% compared to previous years when the industry was thriving.
• A gross margin ranging between 50–100% of the invested funds can be considered a good ROI for Google Ads.
• Digital skills, subscriptions, local marketing:5 interesting stats to start your week: The top three fastest rising jobs were also related to social media, with social media coordinator up by 19%, community manager up 18.
• Over a third (37%) of consumers subscribed to next-day delivery services such as Amazon Prime, with data showing a year-on-year increase of 9%.
• Categories on the rise includes toiletries and personal hygiene products (15%), clothes (15%), beauty and cleaning products (14%) and alcohol (13%).
• Additionally, paid streaming services increased by 6%, while paid music streaming increased by 29% and subscriptions to online/print newspaper by 17%.
• Online shopping hit a record share of 14% during the period, driven by an increase in consumers aged over 45 shopping online.
• Kantar’s head of retail and consumer insight, Fraser McKevitt, says:“Retired households have boosted their online spend by a staggering 229% compared with January 2020.
• Older people are clearly getting more comfortable and proficient at ordering online and they now make up 28% of the 6.
• 6 million households buying vegan food ranges, representing a 10% year-on-year increase.
• Vegan-specific products grew 23% in the last four weeks compared to the same period last year.
• Meanwhile, dry January grew demand for non-alcoholic beer by 12%, however, alcohol saw an uplift of 29% over the same period to £234m.
• With news of the progress on the vaccinations programme, 19% of consumers surveyed expect to be better off in the year ahead (+2% versus last month), which is the highest level since July 2020.
• Just under a third (31%) expect to be worse off financially in the year ahead (-1% versus last month).
• Source:IGD CMOs increase focus on local marketing CMOs are turning their attention to local marketing with 95% of executives seeing the brand advantages of acting at a local level.
• More than half (54%) of CMOs believe local communication is more important since the pandemic started, while 28% believe national communication have become less important.
• Over half (52%) of executives think communication at local level is more important for raising awareness of new products and services, with almost the same rate (54%) saying it benefits brand awareness.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: The research, carried out by Rakuten Marketing, found that interest in purchasing internationally is highest among the 18-34 age group, with 67% of shoppers in that age group worldwide interested in buying internationally.
• Region-wise, shoppers from Asia-Pacific countries showed the most interest in international purchases (65%), while 99% of consumers from Singapore reported already having purchased goods from another country.
• Three-fifths of Singaporean consumers (61%) also say they intend to make more international purchases online next year, compared with only two-fifths (43%) of UK consumers.
• The research notes that aligning marketing with the individual consumer need is all the more important considering that 63% of respondents said they only consider one or two brands when purchasing something online.
• ai, the Q2 2019 figures represent a halving of the company’s market share and a 20% decrease in sales – compared to a sales increase of at least 37% by every other vendor in the ranking.
• Baidu’s share price has seen a 40% decline so far this year, and a new competitor has arisen in the form of Toutiao Search, a search engine launched by Chinese tech startup Bytedance.
• It found that 44% of online shoppers did not complete an order because it wouldn’t arrive fast enough, while 30% of online shoppers have ordered items for same-day delivery.
• 55% of the top 1000 retailers, as ranked by Internet Retailer, offer next-day delivery, while 47% of Top 1000 retail chains offer Buy Online, Pick Up In-Store, or BOPIS.
• As reported by Warc, 55% of respondents to the survey – which interviewed 150 senior marketers from travel, retail and consumer goods brands across 11 APAC markets – reported using location data for relevance and attribution, while 67% reported using it for out-of-home (OOH) buys and 63% for TV ads.
• The research also found that investment in paid location data-based advertising has increased:31% of marketers spent between US $10,000 and US $50,000 on location-based advertising, while 21% spent between $50,000 and $100,000 – and 11% claimed to spend more than $100,000.
• Fashion retailers are seeing returns rates upwards of 25% online compared to the 8% in store.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: 87% of people have taken action after seeing product information on Instagram New research from Instagram has revealed what kind of content users are interacting with on the social media platform.
• From a survey of 21,000 regular users aged 13 to 64, it found that 87% of respondents have taken action after seeing product information on Instagram.
• Other stats include 29% of respondents saying they want content that brings communities together around the topics and the interests they love.
• Finally, 53% of people also said that they’ll follow a brand for the content alone, as long as it resonates with them – even if they’re not a fan of the brand.
• 56% of British consumers object to being targeted with ads UK consumers are not as open to advertising as some brands might like to assume, according to new research from Kantar Media.
• In the UK, 56% of respondents object to being targeted by ads based on their previous browsing behaviour.
• 55% of UK consumers also report being completely apathetic towards advertising content, increasing from 53% in 2018.
• It seems that most of this apathy stems from poor advertising practice, with 73% of UK consumers stating that they see the same ads over and over again.
• Out of the 52% of people who now use TV or video subscription services, 36% say that the the main reason for this is to avoid being targeted with advertising content.
• 57% of consumers have switched providers in at least one market sector in the past year A new study by Ello Media has revealed that people are increasingly of the view that it no longer pays to be loyal to brands across all market sectors.
• In its survey of 1,000 UK consumers, 47% of respondents stated that it doesn’t pay to be loyal, with 34% saying they would be more loyal to brands if they got true value for their loyalty.
• 57% of respondents say they have switched providers in at least one market sector (out of banking, insurance, utility, supermarket, fashion retail, in-house telecom, mobile network operator and media provider) in the last 12 months.
• Awareness of CLV increases to 43%, but skills gap remains barrier to adoption Criteo has revealed that – despite growing awareness of Customer Lifetime Value (CLV) – there are multiple factors holding back organisations from using it as an actionable business metric.
• The study (of 100 senior and C-suite marketers) found that there has been a marked increase in awareness of CLV in the past 12 months, rising from 34% in 2018 to 43% in 2019.
• 30% of marketers say they are challenged by tracking customers cross-device, and 23% say they are often unable to collect data due to users not being signed in.
• Furthermore, 66% of respondents say their organisation could monitor CLV better, with specific business challenges identified including unsophisticated strategy.
• Lastly, 40% of respondents say their organisation lacks in-house skills to monitor CLV (up from 26% in 2018).
• Interestingly, however, Mintel also reports that 52% of Chinese consumers prefer to buy coffee at convenience stores, compared to just 44% who prefer to purchase it from a traditional coffee house chain.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: The first-stage data found that displaying an ad at a relevant time of day or day of the week caused an average 12% increase in brain response from consumers.
• Meanwhile, location-based ads (such as those relating to the current weather) saw an average 18% increase.
• Brands that combined both of these contexts together in one ad saw the biggest and most effective uplift of 32%.
• When considering viewers’ recall abilities, the study revealed a 17% average improvement in spontaneous ad awareness and a longer overall amount of time spent observing an ad (+6%).
• Consequently, the use of such dynamic DOOH ads resulted in a 16% growth in sales compared to a control study featuring no OOH.
• By comparison, a modest 9% sales growth occurred when consumers were exposed to a traditional non-dynamic creative campaign vs.
• In the UK, 90% of consumers said that they look at reviews before deciding to purchase a product, proving the extent of the influence they have on the overall customer journey to conversion.
• As a result, 62% of UK respondents said that they would prefer to buy from a company that has made a small mistake and responded quickly to it than one that seems to never have made a mistake at all.
• Ratings and Reviews Best Practice Guide Mobile/digital wallets predicted to make up 52% of global ecommerce payments by 2023 New research conducted by FIS Global predicts that mobile/digital wallets will make up 52% of online payments by 2023.
• Meanwhile, the global ecommerce market is also expected to see an increase of 53% during the same time period, valuing it at a whopping $5.
• Twenty-two percent of transactions in physical retail stores were completed using a mobile/digital wallet in 2019, an uplift from 16% in 2018.
• Consequently, the data from this study indicates that it will be the fastest-growing payment preference over the next five years, rising at a 28% compound annual rate.
• 5%, was knocked off the top spot as it declined to 24% according to the most recent 2020 data.
• 7% of respondents predict that improved customer retention will be on the horizon for brands that focus on the highest priorities determined, instigating increased customer loyalty.
• 3% engagement rate from its sponsored posts, while Sambazon and Clearblue ranked second and third at 8.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: 61% of Gen Z consumers in the US plan to gift a resale product this Christmas ’Tis the season for shopping second-hand, according to new research by Deloitte.
• In a survey of 1,200 US consumers, it was found that 27% of Christmas shoppers plan to gift resale items this year (but mostly to close friends and family).
• This figure rises to 43% of millennials and 61% of Gen Z consumers who plan to recycle or upcycle a gift this year.
• When it comes to the reasons why, 50% of consumers say saving money, 24% say being able to afford a luxury or premium brand, and 13% say the opportunity to be more sustainably-focused.
• However, 30% said they would be somewhat to very disappointed to receive a resale gift.
• uk rose 62% in the three days following 25th December last year, and remained consistently high for the final days of 2018.
• uk for ‘Xbox’ jumped 71% overnight and rose a further 31% on Boxing Day.
• Similarly, searches for ‘iPhone’ and ‘Mulberry Handbag’ surged 70% and 85% respectively on 25th December and rose a further 22% and 33% the following day.
• The survey found that 35% of UK consumers choose products that have a positive impact on their health and wellbeing, while 21% go for products with eco-friendly packaging.
• 19% cite ethical sourcing as a key factor in choosing one product over another.
• Perhaps unsurprisingly, 52% cite recommendations from family and friends as the most significant influence.
• Only 5% (across all age groups) identify celebrity or influencer endorsement as a factor.
• However, this figure is significantly higher amongst Millennial and Gen Z consumers, with 11% stating that they would be encouraged to try a new product on the basis of influencer endorsement.
• 78% of global consumers wouldn’t pay for ad-free versions of preferred content A new study by MiQ has revealed that the majority of people would prefer free or ad-supported content rather than ad-free content via a subscription service.
• In a survey of 5,630 consumers across eight countries, 78% of consumers globally said they don’t like ads, however, they still wouldn’t pay for ad-free versions of most of their preferred content.
• What’s more, 51% think advertising in the content they watch or read is a necessary trade-off to get free or cheaper content.
• Finally, the survey found that 34% of respondents also expect to spend more on or subscribe to more subscription services in the next five years.
• Instagram influencer activity rose 48% in 2019 Klear’s ‘2019 State of Influencer Marketing’ report has revealed that there has been a 48% increase in Instagram influencer activity in 2019 – a 9% increase from 2018 growth figures.
• Elsewhere, the report suggests that women typically dominate influencer marketing, making up 84% of the industry.
• In contrast, Instagram’s overall global user base is 52% female and 48% male.
• Millennials also dominate the field, with 54% of all influencer content being created by those between the age of 25 and 34.
• Instagram’s global user base is 34% 25 to 34, which is the largest demographic, but not as dominant as the influencer space.
• The seven signs your company isn’t ready for influencer marketing iOS apps deliver up to 10% higher daily retention than Android users Retention rate is a key metric for mobile marketing, as engaged users are more likely to generate revenue by making in-app purchases or interacting with ads.
• While organic rates slightly improved, non-organic rates dropped by as much as 8%.
• In terms of device, the report also states that iOS users deliver up to 10% higher daily retention than Android users, and 35% more on Week eight.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: 45% of over-65s prefer to delay making a purchase via email marketing until they are on a desktop computer Insight from the DMA’s latest report, Consumer Email Tracker 2020, indicates that 45% of over-65s prefer to delay making a purchase via email marketing until they are on a desktop computer.
• When it comes to taking action via email marketing, 45-54 year-olds are most comfortable clicking through straight to a brand’s website to make a purchase (36%) compared to switching to a desktop computer (18%) or a tablet (2%).
• In contrast, those who fall in the 65+ category would much rather wait until they have a desktop computer on hand (45%) than make a direct purchase through the brand’s website via a CTA (15%).
• When surveyed, 48% of over-65s said that they were no more confident in the use of their personal information and 39% said they were ‘often’ left wondering how a brand obtained their email address.
• Eight effective examples of email sign up forms App downloads jump 40% in China during the first two weeks of February Chinese weekly app downloads saw a 40% jump during the first two weeks of February compared to average downloads for the entirety of 2019, according to the Financial Times.
• Respondents cited ‘budget constraints’ as their biggest barrier to delivering effective CX, as only 49% stated that more budget was being allocated for this purpose, while 42% said that it was staying the same.
• So, despite 62% claiming that they take CX seriously, there appears to be some disconnect between attitudes and goals, mostly caused by the lack of resources, funding and outdated legacy systems, among other challenges.
• Forty-eight percent of respondents said that they expect AI to be the most impactful emerging technology for the improvement of overall customer experience, followed by virtual assistants (29%) and omnichannel engagement solutions (26%).
• Average sales volume for Thursdays were measured at around 15%, with consumers purchasing over three million times more than on a Saturday, which ranked lowest at around 12.
• Moreover, 9pm was the most popular time of day to shop, accounting for a little over 6% of total sales volume.
• Interestingly, APAC and South America saw the largest ecommerce sales growth during 2019 – 25% and 21.
• 3% respectively, but more established markets like Europe and North America slowed somewhat.
• Mexico came out on top as the region with the highest ecommerce growth at 35%, with India (31.
• 9%) and the Philippines (31%) following in second and third place, contributing significantly to the overall results within their respective continents.
• 35% of SMBs do not boost their online videos A global study of small business marketing trends from Promo claims that 35% of small and medium-sized businesses (SMBs) do not boost their online videos, instead relying on organic reach.
• However, those that do are most likely to spend up to $500 per month (41% of respondents), and 12% spend between $500 and $2000.
• Facebook ranks as the top-used channel, with 83% of SMBs stating that they use it to publish videos and 54% stating that it is the most high-performing channel for their content strategies.
• Instead, Instagram came in second place, despite its popularity and quantity of visual content, with 63%, followed by brand websites (55%) and YouTube (52%).
• As for frequency, 30% percent of SMBs stated that they posted one piece of video content per week on their marketing channels and a further 26% post one on a monthly basis.
• Perhaps most surprisingly, only 2% of companies said that they used short-form video app TikTok, and even fewer used Snapchat (1%).
• An average 36% of consumers across all age ranges stated that they currently use the internet to research health issues.
• Zeroing in, 55-64 year-olds have used the internet for this purpose the most (42%), while fewer individuals from younger age groups have done so (for example, 31% of 16-24 year-olds).
• Among the findings, respondents said that they would find it helpful to book doctors appointments online (51%), access their past health information (50%), and be able to speak to a doctor using online phone or video call (50%), among others.
• A tiny 6% do not think any technologies would help them to manage their health and wellbeing more effectively.
• While conducting video call appointments is now an option available to individuals in some regions, 55% of those surveyed stated that they had not yet tried it out, but were keen to do so in the future.
• One of the most appealing benefits of doing so was, unsurprisingly, that it was more convenient than an appointment as a physical location (63%), as well as that it ‘frees up their time’ (55%) and offers ‘better appointment flexibility’ (52%).
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: 91% of decision-makers have moved digital marketing in-house A new report by Bannerflow has revealed how a large percentage of European companies are bringing their digital advertising operations in-house, creating a shift from the agency-focused attitudes of the past.
• In a survey of 200 senior decision-makers, Bannerflow found that 91% of respondents have moved at least part of their digital marketing in-house in the past few years.
• 37% of those surveyed also stated they they believe ‘in-housing’ is the future.
• 87% of decision-makers also said they were concerned about the level of transparency offered by media agencies, citing this as another reason to bring it in-house.
• 56% of respondents cited that a lack of existing talent and skills is a big barrier to building a competent team, while 46% cited a lack of resources.
• Half of brands are missing out on the benefits of loyalty programmes DMA’s latest report has revealed that brands are missing out on the benefits of customer loyalty, as 49% of marketers surveyed say they do not offer such schemes.
• This is despite the fact 70% of marketers believe that customers enjoy and value the rewards offered in loyalty programmes – 69% of consumers also agree with this assessment.
• Interestingly, 53% of marketers believe that discounting tactics are the most effective benefit of loyalty programmes, followed by 41% who believe it to be free delivery.
• 30% of consumers say they engage with retailers that share funny or interesting social posts, while 35% will engage with a retailer’s post if they personally agree with the message or sentiment.
• Meanwhile, 29% of social media users tend to engage with a retailer on social media to share positive feedback versus 20% who do it for negative feedback.
• 8% in January The BRC-Hitwise Digital Retail Insight report has revealed that online retail sales in the UK increased in the new year following a particularly gloomy Christmas period.
• In December 2018, online retail visits hit a 10-year low, declining by 6%.
• Medium-sized businesses are also ahead of the competition in their use of advanced audio-visual technologies (such as voice-activated speakers), which are offered by an average of 27% of medium-sized business, compared to 16% of smaller and 22% of larger employers.
• Data management is also an issue, as 74% of medium-sized business employees say they have taken risks with company data in the past year.
• Half of the respondents surveyed said they plan to increase their budgets allocated to Amazon this year, with the average increasing it by 25%.
• While 34% say they plan to shift ad spend from Facebook and Instagram, 41% say they will add new incremental budget to support their ad spend on Amazon.
• 40% of respondents said they are worried about Amazon having too much of their data, while 31% view Amazon’s retail business as a competitor.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: ‘ found that 43% of mid-market e-retailers – classified as companies who ship 3,000 or more packages monthly – say they typically deliver a standard B2C order within two days.
• Of these, 13% of e-retailers reported delivering an item one day after the order was placed, while 30% took two days from order to delivery.
• Fifteen percent of respondents rated fulfillment an eight out of 10 for importance, and only 18% of respondents rated the importance of fulfillment a seven or below.
• It found that of companies who outperform in customer experience, mapping customer behaviour across all touchpoints is a key differentiator:88% report that it has had a positive impact on their ability to deliver personalised CX.
• Snapchat users buy 20% more gifts than the average non-Snapchatter It might seem a little early for a holiday marketing guide, but social app Snapchat is clearly keen to get in before the rush by putting out its Snapchat 2019 Holiday Marketing Guide in August.
• According to Snapchat’s internal data, Snapchatters buy 20% more gifts than the average non-Snapchatter, and are 60% more likely to make impulse purchases.
• Unsurprisingly, they are also a mobile-oriented demographic, and are 20% more likely to make purchases on mobile.
• Another statistic that will appeal to marketers is the news that Snapchatters are 64% more likely to start holiday shopping on Black Friday.
• Parent company Snap’s star is currently in the ascendancy with its share price up almost 200% since January, and a shift has been reported in Snapchat’s approach to advertising, with more emphasis being placed on its Generation Z audience and other unique selling points.
• Kantar’s research found that total sales of physical entertainment products fell by 19% YOY in the second quarter of 2019, from £263.
• In the video market, sales – primarily of DVDs – plummeted by 28%, from £111.
• Sales of CDs also fell by 11% over the quarter, from £80 million to £71 million, a drop that was exacerbated by a lack of “big name” music releases as well as the closure of HMV stores.
• It found that the percentage of Americans willing to share their home address has fallen by 10 percentage points compared with last year’s survey, from 41% to 31%.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: Overall, the day generated a record $38 billion in gross merchandise volume, which is also a 26% increase year-over-year.
• Among the key findings, Saturday delivered the most effective response rate at 66% above average, followed closely by Sunday at 56% above average.
• Meanwhile, early morning was the strongest performing part of the day, with a response rate of 380% above average and a cost-per-response of 37% below average.
• The study also found that 10 and 20 second spot lengths drove the most response with audiences, and were also the most efficient, with CPR rates of 35% and 30% below average respectively.
• Finally, the top performing programme genre was Foreign Language, with a response rate of 377% above average.
• 40% of consumers want nostalgic content The ‘Connecting the Dots‘ report by GlobalWebIndex has revealed that nostalgia is playing an increasing role in content, alongside personalisation and consumer choice.
• In a survey, almost 40% of UK and US consumers said they would pay more for a content streaming service if it had exclusive and older content next year.
• 10 examples of great Disney marketing campaigns 72% of marketers concerned about difficulties in data exchange following Brexit Research from the DMA has found that almost half of respondents to its ‘Data Privacy’ report indicated positive impressions about the impact GDPR has had on their business.
• The DMA found that 78% of marketers wish the UK to retain access to the ‘Digital single market’ after Brexit, down from 89% in September 2018’s study.
• Moreover, 72% of marketers seem to be concerned about the financial impact of any difficulties in exchanging data between the UK and the EU Post-Brexit.
• Finally, almost 60% of marketers feel that the best data protection policy for the UK in the future will be stricter than the current GDPR.
• 40% of consumers admit that they have at least 50 unread emails in their inbox — nearly 1 in 10 admit to over 1,000 – but only 4% say they have 50 or more unread mobile messages.
• For example, 70% of banking customers say they would find a mobile alert about possible fraudulent activity related to their accounts “very useful,” but only 35% currently receive these.
• Similarly, consumers find getting a message about changes in travel reservations useful, but just 40% of those surveyed receive these messages.
• Among the biggest findings is that 39% of respondents don’t plan to shop during this year’s Black Friday sales.
• This is compared to 53% in 2018 and 63% in 2017, which does show that the event is gaining some traction in the UK.
• Elsewhere, 30% of 25 to 34 year olds say they buy from brands on Black Friday based on their discount.
• 23% of consumers who shop during Black Friday do so only with brands they feel loyal to (up from 12% in 2018 and 11% in 2017).
• Gen Z are particularly focused on this, accounting for 33% of 18 to 24 year olds.
• This is also compared to 20% across all other age groups, which highlights a shift from older generations’ focus on shopping at the brands who offer the biggest savings.
• The Ultimate List of Social Media Marketing Statistics in 2022 (Updated): 18-24-year olds account for 23% of users, 35-44-year olds make up 19% of users, and 12#% of users are 45-54.
• (Facebook) 74% of people who earn more than $75,000/year use Facebook.
• (Pew Research Center) 74% of people with one or more college degrees use Facebook.
• (Small Fit Business) That same OkDork test shows that ads convert to email subscribers at 20%.
• Adding stories to feed campaigns by using placement optimization can result in a 21% increase in brand lift.
• (Facebook) An experiment by AdEspresso showed that mobile ad placements outperform desktop ads by 45%.
• (AdEspresso) Facebook video statistics Video gets 59% more engagement than other post types.
• (BuzzSumo) 65% of people in the US say they came across videos on Facebook spontaneously.
• (Facebook) 35% of users say they watch videos on Facebook multiple times per day.
• (Facebook) 65% of people surveyed say they watch videos on Facebook every day.
• (Facebook) 90% of people say they watch videos on Facebook to discover new points of interest.
• 94% of people surveyed in the US who watch a publisher video on Facebook report sharing it.
• (Facebook) Facebook engagement statistics 73% of users use Facebook daily.
• (eMarketer) The main reason people use Facebook is to keep in touch with friends and family (88%).
• 23% use the platform to get news and 17% use it to follow brands and companies.
• (Pew Research Center) 67% of 18-25-year-old US adults, 47% of 30-49 year-olds, 23% of 50-64 year-olds, and 8% of 65+ year-olds use Instagram.
• (Pew Research Center) 42% of people who make $75,000/year use Instagram.
• (Pew Research Center) 43% of people with at least one college degree use Instagram.
• (Pew Research Center) 67% of 18-24 year-olds use Instagram multiple times per day.
• (Instagram) Less than 15 seconds (36%) 15-30 seconds (32%) 30-60 seconds (24%) Relate to them (31%) Suited for the Instagram feed (31%) Suited for Instagram Stories (29%) Instagram video statistics 500 million people watch Instagram Stories daily.
• (Instagram) The platform has seen an 80% increase in the time users spend watching video on the platform.
• (Instagram) 19% of users watch Instagram Stories from the beginning to the end.
• (Mention) Including faces in a post gets 38% more likes than those without.
• (Statista) 32% of users use the platform every day (versus 49% who say they use it less often).
• (Pew Research Center) 25% of YouTube users say they use the site daily.
• (Pew Research Center) 78% of men in the US use YouTube, while 68% of women use the platform.
• (Pew Research Center) YouTube ad statistics Customers of specific brands were 15% more pleasantly surprised when they saw more relevant ads based on better signals.
• (Think With Google) People who hadn’t considered a brand as a top choice were 21% more curious after having seen more relevant ads.
• (Think With Google) Fostering emotional connection by understanding underlying needs was 16% more important to brand love and trust.
• (Think With Google) 29% of marketers say that pre-roll (skippable) video ads are the most effective ads on YouTube.
• (Pew Research Center) 81% of YouTube users say they at least occasionally watch the videos that the algorithm recommends to them.
• (Pew Research Center) YouTube confirms a number that’s close:70% of the time people spend watching YouTube is based on the YouTube algorithm’s recommendations.
• (Pew Research Center) 51% say they’re using YouTube to figure out how things are done, 28% say they’re just passing time on YouTube, 19% say they use YouTube to decide whether to buy a product or not, and 19% use it to understand things that are happening in the world.
• (Think With Google) A Google survey showed that 60% of YouTube users who had watched YouTube videos in the past 24 hours had watched something that related to their interests.
• (Think With Google) In 2018, 70% of millennial YouTube users watched YouTube to learn how to do something new or learn more about something they’re interested in.
• (Think With Google) 81% of parents find content on YouTube for their children.
• (Pew Research Center) Women are nearly three times as likely as men to use Pinterest (42% vs.
• (Pew Research Center) 41% of people who make $75,000/year use Pinterest, compared with 27% of those who make $30,000-$74,999 and 18% of those who make less than $30,000.
• (Pew Research Center) 38% of those with at least one college degree use the platform.
• (Pew Research Center) 30% of people who live in cities and 30% of people in the suburbs are Pinterest users.
• (Pinterest) Promoted pins that align with life moments and holidays get 22% more sales.
• (Pinterest) 11pm is the most active time for pinning (6% of pinning happens then).
• (RJ Metrics) Searches on Pinterest Lens (Pinterest’s visual search tool) increased by 170% between 2017-2018.
• 28% of people aged 18-29, 24% of people aged 50-64, and 11% of people aged 65+ use the platform.
• (Pew Research Center) 49% of people who make at least $75,000 are on LinkedIn.
• (Pew Research Center) 51% of people with at least one college degree are on the platform.
• (LinkedIn) LinkedIn ad statistics Cost-per-lead is 28% lower compared to Google Adwords.
• (Statista) Content shared on this social media platform was up nearly 50% year-over-year in June 2020.
• (Pew Research Center) 38% of those who are 18-29 years old use Twitter in the US.
• 26% of 30-49 year-olds, 17% of 50-64 year-olds, and 7% of 65+ year-olds use the platform.
• (Pew Research Center) 31% of those who make more than $75,000/year use Twitter.
• (Pew Research Center) 32% of people with at least one college degree use Twitter.
• (Pew Research Center) 26% of people in cities, 22% of people in suburbs, and 13% of people in rural areas use Twitter.
• (Pew Research Center) Twitter ad statistics Twitter ad engagement increased by 23% in 2019.
• (Twitter) Twitter ads with video are 50% cheaper in cost-per-engagement.
• (Twitter) Twitter users spend 24% more time with ads from creators (influencers with a broad reach and artists) as opposed to directly from brands.
• (Twitter) People spend 26% more time viewing ads on Twitter than on other leading social media platforms.
• (Twitter) It is the leading platform for discovery with 79% saying they like to discover what’s new.
• (Pew Research Center) 22% of people who earn more than $75,000/year use Snapchat.
• ) (Pew Research Center) As users on Snapchat are younger than on most other social media platforms, only 20% of those with at least one college degree use Snapchat.
• (Pew Research Center) 29% of people in cities use Snapchat and 20% of people in both suburban and rural areas use it.
• (Pew Research Center) There are almost 2x more men than women on the platform in the US (15% of US men use it versus only 8% of US women).
• (Pew Research Center) 22% of people aged 18-29, 14% of people aged 30-49, 6% of people aged 50-64, and 1% of people aged 65+ use Reddit.
• (Pew Research Center) 15% of people who make at least $75,000/year use the platform (the lowest rate out of all other social media platforms that Pew researched).
• (Pew Research Center) 15% of those with at least one college degree use the platform.
• Facebook products 57% of brands believe stories across Facebook’s products (Facebook, Instagram, and WhatsApp) are “somewhat effective” or “very effective.
• ” (Buffer) 38% of people surveyed have talked to someone about a product or service after seeing it in stories.
• (Facebook) 31% of people surveyed have gone to a shop to buy a product or service after seeing it in stories.
• (Facebook) Instagram One in three or 39% of Instagram users says they are more interested in a brand or product after having seen it in Instagram Stories.
• (Instagram) According to a Facebook survey, 79% of users say they search for more information after having seen a product or service on Instagram.
• (Facebook) The same survey shows that 65% visit the brand’s website or app after seeing a product or service.
• (Facebook) 46% made a purchase after seeing an Instagram post about a product or a service.
• (Facebook) 54% of people say that they made a purchase either in the moment or after seeing a product or service on Instagram.
• (Facebook) A Facebook survey shows that 83% say they discover new products or services on Instagram.
• (Instagram) 81% of Instagram users research products or services on the platform.
• (Facebook) That same survey showed that 80% decide whether to buy a service or product.
• (Facebook) 42% say Instagram content can help them discover products or services.
• (Facebook) 44% say Instagram content can help them find new information about a product or service.
• (Facebook) 41% say that brand content on Instagram helps them research a product or service.
• (Think With Google) 80% of people who said they watched a YouTube video about a product they were planning to buy did it at the beginning of their shopping process.
• (Think With Google) 19% of YouTube users use it to decide whether to buy a product or not.
• (Pew Research Center) Over 90% of people around the world say they discover brands and products on YouTube.
• (Think With Google) 70% of shoppers say they are open to learning about products from brands on YouTube.
• (Think With Google) 40% of global shoppers say they have purchased products they discovered on YouTube.
• (Think With Google) Pinterest 90% of weekly pinners make purchase decisions on Pinterest.
• (Pinterest) 77% of weekly pinners say they discover new brands on Pinterest.
• (Pinterest) 83% of pinners have made a purchase based on brand content.
• (Pinterest) 48% of pinners see shopping and finding new products as a priority (compared with 4-14% on other platforms) (eMarketer) Pins that show a product or service in action get 67% more sales.
• (Magna/IPG Media Lab/Twitter) 53% of people on Twitter are more likely to be the first to buy a new product.
• 18-24-year olds account for 23% of users, 35-44-year olds make up 19% of users, and 12#% of users are 45-54.
• (Small Fit Business)That same OkDork test shows that ads convert to email subscribers at 20%.
• (Facebook)An experiment by AdEspresso showed that mobile ad placements outperform desktop ads by 45%.
• (eMarketer)The main reason people use Facebook is to keep in touch with friends and family (88%).
• 23% use the platform to get news and 17% use it to follow brands and companies.
• (Pew Research Center)67% of 18-25-year-old US adults, 47% of 30-49 year-olds, 23% of 50-64 year-olds, and 8% of 65+ year-olds use Instagram.
• (Instagram)The platform has seen an 80% increase in the time users spend watching video on the platform.
• (Mention)Including faces in a post gets 38% more likes than those without.
• (Statista)32% of users use the platform every day (versus 49% who say they use it less often).
• (Pew Research Center)78% of men in the US use YouTube, while 68% of women use the platform.
• (Think With Google)People who hadn’t considered a brand as a top choice were 21% more curious after having seen more relevant ads.
• (Think With Google)Fostering emotional connection by understanding underlying needs was 16% more important to brand love and trust.
• (Pew Research Center)YouTube confirms a number that’s close:70% of the time people spend watching YouTube is based on the YouTube algorithm’s recommendations.
• (Pew Research Center)51% say they’re using YouTube to figure out how things are done, 28% say they’re just passing time on YouTube, 19% say they use YouTube to decide whether to buy a product or not, and 19% use it to understand things that are happening in the world.
• (Think With Google)A Google survey showed that 60% of YouTube users who had watched YouTube videos in the past 24 hours had watched something that related to their interests.
• (Think With Google)In 2018, 70% of millennial YouTube users watched YouTube to learn how to do something new or learn more about something they’re interested in.
• (Pew Research Center)Women are nearly three times as likely as men to use Pinterest (42% vs.
• (Pew Research Center)41% of people who make $75,000/year use Pinterest, compared with 27% of those who make $30,000-$74,999 and 18% of those who make less than $30,000.
• (Pew Research Center)30% of people who live in cities and 30% of people in the suburbs are Pinterest users.
• (Pinterest)11pm is the most active time for pinning (6% of pinning happens then).
• (RJ Metrics)Searches on Pinterest Lens (Pinterest’s visual search tool) increased by 170% between 2017-2018.
• 28% of people aged 18-29, 24% of people aged 50-64, and 11% of people aged 65+ use the platform.
• (Statista)Content shared on this social media platform was up nearly 50% year-over-year in June 2020.
• 26% of 30-49 year-olds, 17% of 50-64 year-olds, and 7% of 65+ year-olds use the platform.
• (Pew Research Center)26% of people in cities, 22% of people in suburbs, and 13% of people in rural areas use Twitter.
• (Twitter)Twitter ads with video are 50% cheaper in cost-per-engagement.
• (Twitter)Twitter users spend 24% more time with ads from creators (influencers with a broad reach and artists) as opposed to directly from brands.
• (Twitter)People spend 26% more time viewing ads on Twitter than on other leading social media platforms.
• (Twitter)It is the leading platform for discovery with 79% saying they like to discover what’s new.
• ) (Pew Research Center)As users on Snapchat are younger than on most other social media platforms, only 20% of those with at least one college degree use Snapchat.
• (Pew Research Center)29% of people in cities use Snapchat and 20% of people in both suburban and rural areas use it.
• (Pew Research Center)There are almost 2x more men than women on the platform in the US (15% of US men use it versus only 8% of US women).
• (Pew Research Center)22% of people aged 18-29, 14% of people aged 30-49, 6% of people aged 50-64, and 1% of people aged 65+ use Reddit.
• (Instagram)According to a Facebook survey, 79% of users say they search for more information after having seen a product or service on Instagram.
• (Facebook)The same survey shows that 65% visit the brand’s website or app after seeing a product or service.
• (Facebook)That same survey showed that 80% decide whether to buy a service or product.
• (Pew Research Center)Over 90% of people around the world say they discover brands and products on YouTube.
• 13 Digital Marketing Statistics you need to know (2022): Blogging is a vital part of content marketing for 48% of companies While it’s true that adopting a multimedia approach to content marketing is a good call, that doesn’t mean blogging isn’t still important.
• 60% of people who finalize purchases read a blog post about the product first Need more proof that blogging is still well worth your time?
• Adding video content to your emails can boost CTR by up to 300% Digital age consumers absolutely love video content, and with good reason.
• The first five organic results on a Google SERP attract 67% of the clicks A high-ranking paid Google ad may get you to the very top of relevant search engine results pages (SERPs), but it’s important not to become over-reliant on them.
• You can improve landing page conversion rates by 86% when you add video Naturally, using proven SEO and content marketing tactics to get leads to your landing pages is only part of the equation.
• Original graphics perform best for 40% of marketers Speaking of the power of visuals, there’s one very effective way to get even better results with yours — create your own original graphics, as with infographics.
• Receiving a response to a tweet makes 77% of Twitter users like a brand more Most marketers already understand active social media presences are the key to capturing the hearts and attention of today’s consumers.
• 9 Stats About Small Business Digital Marketing: Before exploring the findings, however, it is important to note the range in size and revenue of the agencies represented in the survey:Size Of the respondents, 43% had between two and five employees while 16% were entirely run by one person.
• Only 9% of the agencies that participated in the survey employed more than 50 people.
• Nearly half (48%) reported a revenue of $250,000 or less last year and 23% of the surveyed businesses earned between $250,001 and $500,000.
• When asked to predict how their clients’ budgets will change, 63% of respondents replied that they expected online marketing expenditure to increase.
• 7% predicted that SEO will be the most sought after service once again, beating out web development and PPC for the second consecutive year.
• 8% Outsourcing SEO is one of the most common services that’s likely to be outsourced to a third party firm.
• In 2016, 68% of agencies outsourced SEO and this was 1% higher than the numbers from 2015.
• While over 50% outsourced web development in 2015, only 24% of agencies did that last year.
• ” A full 50% of survey participants replied that 100% of their clients met the outlined criteria.
• Almost all (98%) of the respondents said that they value the importance of having a mobile-friendly website.
• The 2%, on the other hand, which do not inform their clients of the said pieces of information do not provide SEO services at all.
• 11 Incredible Real Estate Social Media Marketing Statistics: 3% of the respondents were estimated to be middle income earners as they made between $50,000 and $100,000.
• 5% of the respondents earned less than $30,000 whereas the remaining 12.
• More than 50% of those making $100,000 and more used more than $2,500 on technology.
• 6% of those earning between $50,000 and $100,000 said they spent around $2,500 on technological aspects of real estate work.
• A quarter of those categorized as high income earners and 18% of middle income earners make use of Apple Mac computers showing how much they invest in technology as a means to be even more profitable.
• 39% of those making between $30,000 and $50,000 were less active online and only updated their blogs or websites once each month.
• Up to 82% of high income earners and 67% of middle income earners were likely to have accounts on YouTube.
• 74% and 84% of middle and high income earners respectively reported being active in the social networking site.
• 101 Mind-Blowing Digital Marketing Statistics – 2023 – SEO Tribunal: Digital Marketing Stats (Editors Choice) Google is responsible for 96% of all smartphone search traffic and 94% total organic traffic.
• Google is responsible for 96% of all smartphone search traffic and 94% total organic traffic.
• 84% of people will abandon a purchase if they’re dealing with an unsecure website.
• WordPress accounts for 27% of all websites around the world, but only about 40% of WordPress sites are up to date.
• Link building is the most difficult SEO tactic to perform, according to 65% of marketers.
• 7% for traditional outbound methods such as cold-calling or direct mail.
• In fact, 70–80% of search engine users completely ignore paid ads and focus only on organic results.
• (Digital Strategy Consulting) Digital marketing statistics show that only 61% of the global professionals believe their marketing efforts are truly effective.
• Also, organic search tops social, which accounts for 5% of the total traffic.
• 81% of marketers found that increased traffic occurred with as little as six hours per week invested in social media marketing.
• 71% of consumers who’ve had a good social media service experience with a brand are likely to recommend it to others.
• 21%, which is 58 times higher than on Facebook and 120 times higher than on Twitter.
• Snapchat saw a whopping 234% year-on-year increase in ad spend in Q1, 2018.
• According to even more digital marketing stats, 2018, 40% of users would prefer to spend more money on companies and businesses who are engaging on social media.
• More digital marketing statistics show that 69% of digital media time is spent on mobile.
• 46% of adults prefer to use their mobile devices to search for items before purchasing them over their desktops or laptops.
• 81% of smartphone users research products or services on their devices.
• 71% of readers say they were turned off by content that seems like a sales pitch.
• More content marketing statistics show that 40% of respondents want emails from brands to be less promotional and more informative.
• In fact, per these digital marketing stats, only 35% of digital ads received any views, and of those, 9% were viewed for more than a second, and only 4% got more than 2 seconds of engagement.
• B2B digital marketing statistics demonstrate that 95% of B2B buyers consider whether content is trustworthy when evaluating a company and its offerings.
• According to B2B digital marketing statistics, 88% of marketers claim content as an evident part of marketing a business.
• In the last six months, email opened by mobile devices increased by 80% worldwide.
• On the other hand, having a mobile-responsive email design can result in a 30% higher click-through rate.
• Digital marketing ROI statistics show that email has an average of 122%, over 4x higher than other marketing formats, including social media, direct mail, and paid search.
• 86% of professionals prefer to use email when communicating for business purposes.
• 89% of marketers said that email was their primary channel for lead generation.
• (Juvlon) As stats about digital marketing prove, email is one of the most proven forms of digital marketing and the primary channel for lead generation, and this has been confirmed by 89% of email marketers.
• 78% of consumers unsubscribe from emails because brands were sending too many emails.
• In fact, digital marketing statistics have shown that mobile will account for 20–75% of email opens, depending on your target audience, email type, and product.
• Marketers have witnessed an increase of 760% in email revenue from segmented campaigns.
• Sending fewer emails that are more relevant to your subscribers increases revenue by 760% (yes, that’s right, 760%!
• 51% of marketers consider email list segmentation to be the most effective personalization tactic for effective email marketing.
• 2% of customers open an email due to the discount it offers, and 62% of customers open it due to the personalized subject line.
• 68% of email recipients report email as spam based solely on the subject line.
• Stats about digital marketing reveal that blogs with images receive 94% more views than blogs that are text only.
• Recent digital marketing data reveals that 80% of blogs will send out email newsletters as a way to reinforce their content.
• 29% of the top marketers will make a plan on how to reuse their content.
• The top 5% of videos will hold 77% of a viewer’s attention for the duration.
• (Omnicore) Your can also increase the engagement rates by 28% if you invest in professionally written content alongside video product demos or similar information.
• 81% of internet users agree that blog posts are trusted sources of information or advice.
• The number of inbound links for a company can increase by up to 97% if they have a blog.
• 65% of business decision makers visit a marketer’s website after viewing a branded video.
• (Tubular Insights) These numbers are up from 67% in 2016’s digital marketing statistics.
• (My SMN) Only 37% of viewers watch an average video all the way to the end.
• After watching a video, 64% of users are more likely to buy a product online.
• Make sure to keep it informal and chatty—75% of customers didn’t buy a certain product simply because they found the voiceover annoying.
• 51% of Americans prefer to shop online, and ecommerce is growing 23% year-over-year.
• Google Ads (formerly Google AdWords) results receive 65% of the clicks that started with buying keywords, while organic results only receive 35%.
• Think about it:if you focus solely on traditional SEO, that 41% might never even see your content.
• PPC visitors are 50% more likely to purchase something than organic visitors.
• 65% of B2B companies have acquired a customer through LinkedIn paid ads.
• Display advertising has proven to increase traffic to websites by 300%.
• (The DMA) In addition, according to the projected digital marketing industry growth, by 2020 digital’s share of total advertising will near 50%.
• (Another Brilliant Idea) Indeed, progressive web apps will have replaced 50% of general-purpose, consumer-facing mobile apps, providing amazing functionality and beautiful design.
• Voice and image-based searches are going to make up at least 50% of all searches by 2020.
• Additionally, there’s Instagram, which now makes up to 20% of its parent’s mobile revenue.
• 5% of all US digital display ads will be bought via automated channels in 2018.
• (Adweek) Additionally, digital marketing stats have shown that tweets with images receive 18% more clicks and 89% more favorites.
• Digital media is expected to generate 44%, or roughly $237 billion, of all ad money spent globally in 2018.
• The digital media ad spend is expected to generate 50%, or $291 billion, by 2020.
• 10 Digital marketing statistics that made me say WOW – Schaefer Marketing Solutions:We Help Businesses {grow}: 7% of the clicks, whereas ranking in position #1 on desktop gets you 19.
• Your Mega-Awesome Content Marketing Statistics List: They own 76% of the total search engine market share, according to Net Market Share data.
• The average conversion rate for organic traffic-to-leads across industries is 16%.
• conversion rate for organic traffic-to-leads is 16%, and ranking first in Google gets 33% traffic + 30.
• 65% of the top-performing content marketers in 2018-2019 have a documented content strategy.
• 89% of marketers now say their content marketing goals are linked to broader business goals.
• Particularly, 45% to 89% is a huge uptick in people who are not only implementing but also understanding the basic strategy to make content work.
• 65% of the best content marketers have a documented content strategy, and 89% of marketers now link content marketing goals to broader business goals.
• The content marketing area with the biggest spending increase from 2018 to 2019 was content creation (56%).
• 77% of content marketers say they use educational content to nurture their audience.
• 75% of content marketers report better overall ROI when they use visuals in their content.
• Before doing any further shopping, 50% of internet users searched for videos on products or services that captured their interest.
• 48% of marketers plan to add a YouTube channel to their content marketing strategy next year.
• 76% of B2B buyers said infographics are the most valuable content type for the early stages of the buying process.
• 56% more spend on content this 2019, 77% of content marketers use content to educate audience, and 75% of content marketers report better ROI in using visuals.
• 79% of marketers say content marketing has been at least somewhat effective for their brand.
• They own 76% of the total search engine market share, according to Net Market Share data.
• The average conversion rate for organic traffic-to-leads across industries is 16%.
• Google’s #1 organic position brings in 33% of the search traffic for any given SERP.
• conversion rate for organic traffic-to-leads is 16%, and ranking first in Google gets 33% traffic + 30.
• 65% of the top-performing content marketers in 2018-2019 have a documented content strategy.
• (Content Marketing Institute) Only 14% of the least successful content marketers have a documented strategy, in comparison.
• We can’t ignore the correlation between winners (65% with a documented strategy) and losers (the 86% without one).
• 89% of marketers now say their content marketing goals are linked to broader business goals.
• Particularly, 45% to 89% is a huge uptick in people who are not only implementing but also understanding the basic strategy to make content work.
• 65% of the best content marketers have a documented content strategy, and 89% of marketers now link content marketing goals to broader business goals.
• The content marketing area with the biggest spending increase from 2018 to 2019 was content creation (56%).
• 77% of content marketers say they use educational content to nurture their audience.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 77% of marketers use educational content because it works.
• 75% of content marketers report better overall ROI when they use visuals in their content.
• Before doing any further shopping, 50% of internet users searched for videos on products or services that captured their interest.
• 48% of marketers plan to add a YouTube channel to their content marketing strategy next year.
• Another good insight:From the CMI report, 64% said they increased their use of audio/visual content over the past year.
• 76% of B2B buyers said infographics are the most valuable content type for the early stages of the buying process.
• (Demand Gen) A whopping 71% of B2B buyers read some type of content during the buying process.
• 56% more spend on content this 2019, 77% of content marketers use content to educate audience, and 75% of content marketers report better ROI in using visuals.
• 79% of marketers say content marketing has been at least somewhat effective for their brand.
• (I’d bet the 19% who said their content marketing is “extremely effective” have their strategy down pat.
• 24 Key Digital Marketing Stats: Conversion rates on mobile devices are up 64% compared to conversions on a desktop.
• Most adults (74%) prefer to receive marketing messages in their email inbox.
• Email marketing messages are so effective that 66% of online consumers buy something.
• People who buy something from an email spend 138% more than those who don’t receive emails.
• Sponsored ads receive 65% of the clicks in commercial queries, compared to 35% of organic results.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week – Econsultancy: From a survey of 1,2001 eight to 19 year olds in the UK, it found that 54% of those aged 16-19 have either deliberately bought from or stopped using a brand because of its ethics.
• What’s more, 63% of young people aged 16 and over are more likely to buy from a brand if it supports a cause or charity important to them.
• 69% of teens believe that brands overstate how much they support good causes, while 69% also think they exaggerate how much they do to look after the environment.
• The study also found that 34% of users who uninstall an app are willing to re-download it again further down the line.
• As well as the 76% of people who were exposed to ads but claimed they didn’t see them, some consumers actually over-reported ad exposure.
• 19% of people who definitely weren’t exposed to test ads claimed that they had seen them.
• It found that Halloween conversion rates beat out standard emails by 11%, while conversion rates for Black Friday emails were 13% higher than business-as-usual (despite clicks and CTO being lower).
• Similarly, while open rates for Cyber Monday emails in 2017 were almost 2% behind those of BAU emails, these emails were almost twice as effective in converting clickers to purchases.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: Google ad spend for desktop rises by 12% year-on-year Google search ad spend for desktop rose by 12% year-on-year in 2019, according to data from Merkle’s latest Digital Marketing Report.
• Meanwhile, Google’s mobile ad spend growth was, predictably, significantly higher at 33% year-on-year, reflecting the continuing dominance of online mobile use.
• Interestingly, ad spend for tablet devices experienced a sharp decline in growth from -8% in Q3 2019 to -35% in Q4 2019 alone.
• A very similar decline of -39% was seen in organic search visits (across all search engines) from tablets during the same period.
• Overall Google ad spend (US) on paid search ads across all devices improved by 16%, and clicks saw growth of 11% year-on-year.
• In addition, the company saw CPC grow by a modest 4%, despite a slight decline in the last quarter.
• The report also reveals that in-housing can be particularly beneficial when organising and implementing creativity, with 45% of in-house marketers applying specific KPIs to creative tasks.
• An additional 48% are actively trialling different methodologies for creative measurement within their teams now that they have the advantage of being in-housed.
• Those surveyed agreed that ‘lack of time’ (22%), ‘lack of skills/talent’ (19%) and ‘pressure to deliver results’ (17%) were the most pressing pitfalls that need to be urgently tackled in order to improve creative ROI.
• Spotify podcast consumption surges by nearly 200% year-on-year This week, Spotify released its financials for Q4 2019, casting a spotlight on the upsurge in podcast consumption via the streaming platform.
• According to the statement, 16% of Spotify’s monthly active users engage with podcasts, combined with an almost 200% year-on-year rise in hours consumed of this particular type of content.
• Indeed, 54% of consumers have terminated a purchase because a product was too difficult to find or decide upon on a website, according to Zoovu.
• It’s hardly surprising, therefore, that 71% of respondents – a pool of consumers from the US, UK and Germany – also said that they had switched to a competitor brand because it was easier to find the right product for their needs.
• Out of these three demographics, German customers were the most likely to do this, with 59% of them admitting they had, in the past, switched to a website with a better shopping experience.
• Interestingly, 54% of those surveyed stated that the availability of a digital assistant while browsing would make them ‘very or extremely more confident’ when making purchasing decisions via a website.
• Furthermore, when put up against product filtering tools, the majority of customers (64%) said they prefer the experience of digital assistants such as chat bots or online customer service agents.
• Ecommerce Best Practice Guide India’s online food industry expected to grow from $4bn to $8bn by 2022 New research from Boston Consulting Group has predicted that India’s online food industry will reach $8bn by 2022 – a growth rate of 25% from its most recent valuation of $4bn.
• Additionally, the particularly low price of data in the region (~20 cents/GB) and a general upturn in the population’s disposable income, which has risen consistently by around 10% each year since 2017, may be further contributing factors.
• Consumers in this demographic cited their top three frustrations as ‘irrelevant offers’ (30%), ‘numerous ways to research and book a holiday’ (29%), and ‘retargeted ads for holidays I already booked’ (22%), demonstrating the prevalence of disjointed customer journeys in the travel sector.
• As a result, 41% of respondents claimed that they would be more loyal to a travel company that understands their needs – a significant opportunity for holiday brands that effectively tackle the top customer frustrations outlined above.
• January 2020 15:27 Article EcommerceWhy ‘buy now, pay later’ services are booming in ecommerce According to a recent PYMNTS study, 86% of US consumers are interested in new commerce experiences that can save them money and offer flexibility or convenience.
• Ivan Burmistrov 10 February 2020 “Interestingly, 54% of those surveyed stated that the availability of a digital assistant while browsing would make them ‘very or extremely more confident’ when making purchasing decisions via a website.
• Furthermore, when put up against product filtering tools, the majority of customers (64%) said they prefer the experience of digital assistants such as chat bots or online customer service agents.
• The true statistics is that only 1% of website visits result in a chat.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: TikTok’s Q4 2019 revenue estimated to rise above $50m Third-party data from Apptopia has revealed that TikTok’s in-app revenue rose 310% to more than $50 million in Q4 2019 compared to the year before.
• Interestingly, SensorTower, which is a competitor to Apptopia, has since told TechCrunch that it estimates TikTok’s in-app spending to have actually reached $87m in the final quarter of 2019, with a year-on-year growth of 521%.
• Challenger banks hold less than 14% market share of UK banking app users Ogury has released the findings of a study into usage of mobile banking apps in the UK.
• The research – which involved the analysis of 688,000 British mobile users between July and September 2019 – found that challenger banks only hold a 14% market share of mobile banking users.
• This means that legacy banks make up the UK’s top five banking apps in terms of audience size, with Barclays at number one with 25% market share (followed by Lloyds, Natwest, Halifax, and Santander respectively).
• However, the study also found that – despite currently only having a 6% market share of the mobile banking sector – Monzo is predicted to catch up to its rivals in the coming months.
• This is because, over the studied time period, 15% of all downloads (within this vertical) were for Monzo’s app.
• On average, each app was found to have a 56% exclusive audience, suggesting that the majority of mobile users only use one banking app.
• For many traditional banks, however, almost half of users had at least one other banking app (44% for Santander, 43% for Halifax and 42% for HSBC).
• At least 80% of Monzo, Starling, Revolut, and N26’s users had two or more banking apps.
• In a global survey, 36% of consumers say they use the internet to research health issues and healthcare products.
• Interestingly, this jumps to 42% for users aged 55 to 64, presumably where a focus on health becomes even more crucial.
• 13% of consumers say they’ve already tried this and would recommend it to others.
• However, 51% of consumers are concerned about privacy and security issues, while close to half of consumers worry doctors might become too dependent on AI and have concerns with its accuracy.
• 39% of consumers don’t feel comfortable with this, and a further 26% are unsure how they feel.
• Overall, footfall rose almost 48% on the first day Primark opened in these locations compared to the same day the previous year.
• 3% uplift in the same month compared to the previous year, and a 7% rise even six months after a Primark opened compared to the same month the previous year.
• A quarter of British organisations are failing to provide training to marketing and sales staff Finally, a survey by Showpad has revealed that 25% of UK organisations are failing to carry out any kind of training or coaching for sales and marketing staff.
• The study states that “only 16% of companies offer the continuous and ongoing training and coaching necessary for sales teams to keep up with the increasingly sophisticated products, services and AI-driven solutions across their industry”.
• Interestingly, the study highlights a disconnect in how organisations are empowering their sales staff with content, training and coaching, as 51% of organisations admit that training and coaching is important or crucial but that many companies fail to train effectively.
• In fact, 65% of companies admit to using training methods such as lectures, presentations, or demos – even though these methods are proven to be less effective.
• Only 16% of sales staff are using highly effective methods, such as teaching others what you learn, which reportedly results in a 90% information retention rate.
• 74 digital marketing statistics you must know for 2021 planning: 47% say they’ve increased focus on emotional and human-centric content.
• More than half of marketers say they’re increasing the prevalence of social (55%) and thought leadership (53%) in their content marketing strategies.
• Also high on this list were direct customer outreach (48%) and corporate social responsibility (46%).
• B2B digital content engagement increased significantly after the COVID-19 lockdown:There were 17% more visitors, 40% more unique asset views, and 15% more time spent reading and viewing content.
• Globally, total internet video traffic (business and consumer, combined) will be 80% of all Internet traffic in 2021, up from 67% in 2016.
• Globally, internet video traffic will grow four-fold from 2016 to 2021, a compound annual growth rate of 31%.
• 83% of video marketers that have used YouTube said it had been successful for them.
• Overall, 83% of consumers worldwide prefer YouTube to watch video content.
• The number of sellers conducting more than half of their sales activities virtually increased by 163% from pre-pandemic to now, (Rain Sales Training) 16.
• Only 26% of buyers believe sellers are skilled at leading a thorough needs discovery virtually.
• The web and video conferencing category for business technology saw a 500% increase in buyer activity since the COVID outbreak began.
• 67% of companies increased their spending strategy for video conferencing too.
• 74% of brands surveyed are posting less on their company social accounts at present (Influencer Marketing Hub) 24.
• 34% of marketers have shifted social time from Instagram to Twitter (Influencer Marketing Hub) 25.
• Instagram has seen a 14% drop in engagement by followers (Influencer Marketing Hub) 26.
• 87% of sales and marketing leaders say collaboration between sales and marketing enables critical business growth.
• 90% of sales and marketing professionals point to a number of disconnects across strategy, process, content, and culture.
• However, 54% say it generally feels like sales, service, and marketing don’t share information.
• 78% of customers say this year’s crises should catalyze business improvement.
• 88% of customers expect companies to accelerate digital initiatives due to this year’s events.
• The average enterprise uses about 900 different applications, but only 28% are connected.
• eMarketer estimates that digital ad spending worldwide will rise 2% in 2021 to $389.
• More than 45% of businesses today have implemented bots as part of their marketing efforts.
• 64% of consumers and 80% of business buyers said they expect companies to respond to and interact with them in real-time.
• 53% of people are more likely to shop with businesses that they can message.
• In April 2020, 50% of respondents said they plan to invest more in email marketing.
• 78% of marketers have seen an increase in email engagement over the last 12 months.
• Emails with personalized subject lines are 26% more likely to be opened.
• 72% of consumers and 89% of business buyers say they expect companies to understand their unique needs and expectations, while 66% of consumers say they’re likely to switch brands if they feel treated like a number, not an individual.
• According to Salesforce, 58% of consumers say that a personalized experience is important to them when making a purchase.
• 61% of millennials are happy to share personal data if it leads to a more personalized in-store or online shopping experience, while 58% will share personal data to power product recommendations that match their needs.
• 50% of people won’t purchase from a brand that has a poorly designed mobile site.
• In the US, 43% of internet users polled by GlobalWebIndex in May 2020 said their laptop time had increased, and 24% reported spending more time on a desktop.
• The next-highest responses were switching in-person events to virtual events (34%) and being forced to shift marketing priorities (31%).
• Similarly, 34% of marketers named budget cuts their biggest concern over the next three months, followed by switching to virtual events (16%) and lack of engagement from their target audience (13%).
• 72% of marketers cite budget reductions as a top reason for pulling back digital marketing investments.
• 68% expect COVID-19 To Result in Reduced Ad Spend Into 2021 (Influencer Marketing Hub) Virtual events 70.
• When asked how COVID-19 has affected customer event strategies, 40% of marketers said they’re planning to move events online, if they haven’t already.
• 47% say they’ve increased focus on emotional and human-centric content.
• (Cisco) Globally, internet video traffic will grow four-fold from 2016 to 2021, a compound annual growth rate of 31%.
• (Wyzowl) The number of sellers conducting more than half of their sales activities virtually increased by 163% from pre-pandemic to now, (Rain Sales Training) Only 26% of buyers believe sellers are skilled at leading a thorough needs discovery virtually.
• (Rain Sales Training) The web and video conferencing category for business technology saw a 500% increase in buyer activity since the COVID outbreak began.
• (TrustRadius) 67% of companies increased their spending strategy for video conferencing too.
• (eMarketer) 14% of shoppers are making purchases through social media.
• (Deloitte) 74% of brands surveyed are posting less on their company social accounts at present (Influencer Marketing Hub) 90% of sales and marketing professionals point to a number of disconnects across strategy, process, content, and culture.
• 47% say they’ve increased focus on emotional and human-centric content.
• More than half of marketers say they’re increasing the prevalence of social (55%) and thought leadership (53%) in their content marketing strategies.
• Also high on this list were direct customer outreach (48%) and corporate social responsibility (46%).
• There has been an 85% increase in mobile searches starting with “can I,” a 65% increase in mobile searches for “do I need,” and a 65% increase in mobile searches for “should I.
• B2B digital content engagement increased significantly after the COVID-19 lockdown:There were 17% more visitors, 40% more unique asset views, and 15% more time spent reading and viewing content.
• Globally, total internet video traffic (business and consumer, combined) will be 80% of all Internet traffic in 2021, up from 67% in 2016.
• Globally, internet video traffic will grow four-fold from 2016 to 2021, a compound annual growth rate of 31%.
• People watch an average of 16 hours of online video per week – a 52% increase in the last 2 years.
• 83% of video marketers that have used YouTube said it had been successful for them.
• Overall, 83% of consumers worldwide prefer YouTube to watch video content.
• The number of sellers conducting more than half of their sales activities virtually increased by 163% from pre-pandemic to now, (Rain Sales Training) 16.
• Only 26% of buyers believe sellers are skilled at leading a thorough needs discovery virtually.
• The web and video conferencing category for business technology saw a 500% increase in buyer activity since the COVID outbreak began.
• 67% of companies increased their spending strategy for video conferencing too.
• 74% of brands surveyed are posting less on their company social accounts at present (Influencer Marketing Hub) 24.
• 34% of marketers have shifted social time from Instagram to Twitter (Influencer Marketing Hub) 25.
• Instagram has seen a 14% drop in engagement by followers (Influencer Marketing Hub) 26.
• 87% of sales and marketing leaders say collaboration between sales and marketing enables critical business growth.
• 90% of sales and marketing professionals point to a number of disconnects across strategy, process, content, and culture.
• However, 54% say it generally feels like sales, service, and marketing don’t share information.
• 78% of customers say this year’s crises should catalyze business improvement.
• 88% of customers expect companies to accelerate digital initiatives due to this year’s events.
• The average enterprise uses about 900 different applications, but only 28% are connected.
• eMarketer estimates that digital ad spending worldwide will rise 2% in 2021 to $389.
• More than 45% of businesses today have implemented bots as part of their marketing efforts.
• 64% of consumers and 80% of business buyers said they expect companies to respond to and interact with them in real-time.
• 53% of people are more likely to shop with businesses that they can message.
• In April 2020, 50% of respondents said they plan to invest more in email marketing.
• 78% of marketers have seen an increase in email engagement over the last 12 months.
• Emails with personalized subject lines are 26% more likely to be opened.
• 72% of consumers and 89% of business buyers say they expect companies to understand their unique needs and expectations, while 66% of consumers say they’re likely to switch brands if they feel treated like a number, not an individual.
• According to Salesforce, 58% of consumers say that a personalized experience is important to them when making a purchase.
• 61% of millennials are happy to share personal data if it leads to a more personalized in-store or online shopping experience, while 58% will share personal data to power product recommendations that match their needs.
• 8%) (Influencer Marketing Hub) 🎓 IMPACT+ course:Self-selection and the touchless website buying experience Website UX strategy 59.
• 50% of people won’t purchase from a brand that has a poorly designed mobile site.
• In the US, 43% of internet users polled by GlobalWebIndex in May 2020 said their laptop time had increased, and 24% reported spending more time on a desktop.
• Due to COVID, 42% of respondents cited budget cuts as a “significant challenge,” more than any other answer (74% said cuts were presenting a challenge at some level).
• The next-highest responses were switching in-person events to virtual events (34%) and being forced to shift marketing priorities (31%).
• Similarly, 34% of marketers named budget cuts their biggest concern over the next three months, followed by switching to virtual events (16%) and lack of engagement from their target audience (13%).
• 72% of marketers cite budget reductions as a top reason for pulling back digital marketing investments.
• 68% expect COVID-19 To Result in Reduced Ad Spend Into 2021 (Influencer Marketing Hub) Virtual events 70.
• When asked how COVID-19 has affected customer event strategies, 40% of marketers said they’re planning to move events online, if they haven’t already.
• Here’s where we are seeing the biggest increases:Webinars (67%) Organic social (56%) Online video (44%) (LinkedIn) 🔎 Related resources:How long does it really take to plan and run a virtual event?
• PPC Stats and Marketing Trends for 2020 [Infographic] – Serpwatch.io: 72% of marketers are spending more on social ads, whereas 60% are spending more on mobile ads.
• 40% of the clicks made on Google’s search results are focused on the top three ads on the first page.
• PPC stats reveal that people are 52% more likely to click on an ad if it is on the top page of Google’s results page.
• Businesses can increase their brand awareness by up to 80% using search ads.
• When browsing online, 90% of consumers have the tendency to trust companies with good reviews.
• The highest conversion rate is from the dating industry with over 9%, while the lowest is from the advocacy industry at 1.
• According to data from 2018, 72% of marketers are spending more on social ads and 60% are spending more on mobile ads.
• Companies Are Allocating More Budget On PPC 40% of brands want to increase their budget for PPC advertising.
• Not only that, roughly 36% of mobile searches are local and performed using Google, while 74.
• At the same time, 40% of clicks made on Google’s SERP are distributed to the top three ads.
• People are also 52% more likely to click on a paid advertisement at the top of Google’s search results.
• The good news is that the trends search volume has gained 39%, meaning people usually search for related keywords of a company’s services or products.
• Google Ads And Brand Awareness Search ads can reportedly increase brand awareness by at least 80%.
• Infact, 82% of smartphone users use their device to find details on businesses within their local area.
• Of all the searches, at least 30% of searches on a specific location result in a purchase from that establishment.
• Even when they are inside the store, advertising statistics 2016 suggest that more than 40% use their smartphones to do more research.
• Consumers Spend More Money After An Online Interaction People who get information off of a business’ products and services online are more likely to spend 10% more in that store, compared to those who didn’t have an online experience with it first.
• In total, 76% of people visit the place on the same day they searched for it on a search engine.
• 70% of mobile searches are also likely to call a business through a link from the results.
• According to PPC statistics, 90% of consumers say they trust online reviews.
• Ideally, they must be at the top of the page as more than 95% of clicks go to the top four search results.
• That being said, they need to do cross-device attribution as it can increase conversions by 16%.
• 80% of respondents in a survey believe that this will be the case in digital marketing.
• Marketing budgets, digital spend, data skills:5 killer stats to start your week: 5% of marketers questioned revised their marketing budget down in the third quarter.
• 1%) reported no change in budget, reflecting a ‘wait-and-see’ approach adopted by many in the face of uncertainty about Brexit and its impact on business.
• 1% of firms reporting growth boosted by new online tools, data and a push towards social media.
• The analysis shows that video display and search were the biggest drivers of growth between January and June 2019 – up 27% and 13% respectively.
• Non-video remains the largest display format, up 8% year on year to £1.
• Classified spend was down 1% to £720m, while ‘other’ spend was flat at £41m.
• That would give Amazon a 13% share of the search market, still well behind Google’s 73% share and $40bn in revenue.
• However, by 2021, Amazon’s share is expected to increase to 16%, while Google’s share will drop to 70%.
• Overall, the US search ad market will increase by 18% year on year in 2019.
• 7% in the four weeks to the 5 October and marking the slowest September growth in two years.
• Ad spend by the supermarkets fell 1% in the first eight months of the year, although Aldi, the top spender, increased its investment by 9% to £25.
• Lack of data skills holding brands back More than a quarter (27%) of UK business leaders believe a lack of data skills is impacting their ability to deliver the best customer experience.
• The survey of 750 business leaders found that 22% feel CX is held back by the lack of a data-centric culture, while 24% identified the lack of a unified tech platform as the biggest obstacle.
• The figures come despite the fact that gaining real-time customer intelligence is business leaders’ top strategic priority, cited by 46% of those questioned.
• 15 Key Statistics Designed to Guide Successful B2B Content Marketing Programs | KoMarketing: Content Marketing Budgeting Statistics What’s Working in Content Marketing 2021 From the DemandGen Report report:Organizations have moved away from relying on event marketing, with only 19% indicating increased budget prioritization.
• Instead, marketers are shifting their budgets toward ABM (61%), content marketing (60%), sales enablement (48%), and personalization (43%).
• 2021 B2B Marketing Mix Report From the Sagefrog Report:The top three areas of marketing spend this year have been website development (51%), digital marketing (44%), and content marketing (33%).
• 3% of CMOs total marketing budget when asked:“How is your total marketing expense budget for the current fiscal year being allocated to or spent on each of the following marketing programs and operational areas?
• Content Amplification Report 2021 From the Converge Report:Content marketers surveyed typically don’t have a budget for content amplification (68%).
• 44% of respondents cited content marketing as a channel they plan to increase budget for, with 47% saying this channel is most effective at driving revenue.
• With 47% of B2B marketers surveyed saying content marketing is most effective at driving revenue, the positive effect of this can be seen in the 44% of marketers who plan to increase their content marketing budget in the next year.
• With only 12% of marketers surveyed saying their sales teams are using content to move sales conversations along very well.
• State of Marketing Report 2021 From the HubSpot Report:About 65% of marketers report that video is their primary form of media used within their content marketing strategy in 2021.
• The top answer (44%) was delivering personalized content to their audience.
• Making Content Marketing Convert From the CMO Council Report:Only 12% of marketers believe they have high-performance content marketing engines that are strategically programmed to target the right audiences with relevant and persuasive content.
• ” and 39% of marketers cited content marketing, surpassed only by social media.
• 2021 B2B Content Marketing Benchmarks, Budgets, and Trends From the Content Marketing Institute Report:Most respondents (81%) said their organization used metrics to track content performance in the last twelve months.
• Top 10 Video Content Marketing Statistics in 2023: Research by Wyzol shows that 86% of marketing organizations use video content to increase their lead-generation results and sales objectives.
• According to Forbes, Users Remember 95% of What They See In Video Content People are more likely to remember visually conveyed information.
• 60% of People Prefer Online Video Content Over TV shows TV is slowly losing its place as the dominant form of advertising.
• Only 37% of The Video Content Online Fully Retains Their Viewers There are probably millions or billions of video content online, but not all deliver the expected visual experience and value.
• Most Customers (69%) would Rather Watch A Video Than Read Textual Guides Compared to reading, people remember information better when it is presented visually.
• Adding Videos to Your Landing Page Will Skyrocket Your Conversion Rate By at Least 80% Have you ever heard of the saying, “more conversions equal more sales”?
• 58% of Respondents to a Survey Said Videos Were Essential to Their Growth and Learning Given how much people enjoy watching videos, it should come as no coincidence that video marketing is very effective, from simple advertising to product demonstrations.
• 79% of Respondents Said They Downloaded a Piece of Software or an App as a Result of Watching Promotional Video Content Undoubtedly, you would have seen a promotional video on platforms like Youtube and Facebook.
• Content Marketing Statistics | Martech Zone: I had a free trial at the hands of media and I was given less than 10% chances of continuing on my entrepreneurial journey.
• Edgemesh helps eCommerce companies across multiple industries and platforms deliver 20-50% faster page loads to users around the globe.
• A 20-year leading agency ranked within the Top 1% globally Website Liza Nebel Liza is the President, COO, and Co-Founder of BlueOcean, an AI brand strategy platform that helps companies outmaneuver the competition.
• 30 Content Marketing Statistics That Will Get You Typing: A simple update can increase organic traffic as much as 402% month over month.
• The top three content marketing tactics are blogging (65%), social media (64%), and case studies (64%).
• 36% of B2B marketing say blogging is the most important type of content, whereas only 22% of B2B marketers find it’s most important.
• The top three paid advertising methods used by B2B marketers to promote content are Search Engine Marketing (66%), print or offline promotion (57%), and traditional banner ads (55%).
• While traditional banner ads and offline are popular, they are only effective 27% and 24% of the time.
• 81% of marketers found that increased traffic occurred with as little as 6 hours per week invested in social media marketing.
• Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional channels and generates 3x as many leads.
• 74% of companies indicate that content marketing is increasing the quality and quantity of leads.
• 67% of a typical B2B buyer journey is now done online, and 90% say online content has a moderate to major effect on their buying decision.
• 65% of B2B marketers find it difficult to define what content is effective.
• Interactive content generates 2X more conversions (Kapost) 88% of marketers say interactive content makes them stand out from competitors.
• 93% say interactive content is very effective at educating buyers as opposed to 70% for static content.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 51% of B2B Marketers will increase spending on content marketing in the coming 12 months.
• (Content Marketing Institute/Marketing Profs) The most effective B2B marketers spend 42% of their budget on content.
• 28% of marketers have reduced their traditional advertising budgets to fund more digital marketing.
• 60% of the most effective B2B marketers have a documented content strategy.
• 73% of organizations have someone in place to oversee their content strategy.
• The most common content marketing delivery system is social media, use by 87% of marketers.
• 64 Content Marketing Statistics Demonstrating the Power of Content: According to one study, only 10% of marketers aren’t using content marketing today.
• Indeed, around 26% of US adults are almost always online, while another 77% use the web daily.
• 82% of marketers say they’re actively investing in content marketing, while only 10% say they’re not leveraging content marketing, and another 8% say they’re not sure if their company uses this strategy or not.
• 97% of SEMrush survey respondents said content was a tactic that formed a crucial part of their overall marketing strategy in 2021.
• The company also saw a significant 22% increase in people searching for “what is content marketing” during 2021.
• Content marketing isn’t just for B2C customers, around 91% of B2B marketers also say that content marketing is a crucial way to reach their customers.
• 46% of businesses said they wanted to boost their content creation in 2022, highlighting a growing demand for content as a crucial part of the advertising strategy.
• Only 42% of companies consider themselves to be “effective” at content marketing in the B2B world.
• 60% of marketers in the digital world create at least one piece of content each day according to eMarketer.
• 51% of the businesses investing in content marketing publish every day, according to “The Manifest”.
• 7% of marketers say that consistently creating high-quality content is one of the most significant struggles they deal with on a regular basis.
• Unfortunately, while SEMrush’s study into the state of content marketing in 2021 found that 97% of respondents were using content, only 57% had a documented content marketing strategy.
• Even fewer people (19%) said their content marketing strategy was advanced.
• The CMI found around 63% of companies don’t have a content marketing strategy, suggesting a significant number of brands aren’t planning their content efforts effectively.
• 66% of marketers say they want to learn how to build a better content marketing strategy, while around 64% say they want to make their content strategy more scalable.
• Of those using a content marketing strategy to help accelerate the return on investment for their content, 63% say they’re specifically working on building loyalty among existing clients.
• With so few companies investing in a strong content marketing strategy, it’s probably no surprise that around 60% of people in a Zazzle Media study said they find it difficult to produce content consistently.
• A further 65% said they struggle to produce engaging content, indicating they’re not happy with the content produced.
• 55% of successful content marketing strategies produced in 2021 focused on making the quality of content better, while around 46% of those surveyed said they made SEO a priority.
• 41% of respondents said they used their strategy in 2021 to focus on creating more video and visual content.
• SEMRush found that around 78% of the companies who invested in content marketing during 2021 felt their strategy was successful.
• 60% of content marketers agree that content marketing generates leads and demand.
• A further 70% say that content marketing helps them to educate their audience more effectively, while 60% believe content helps build loyalty with existing customers and clients.
• 78% of CMOs say they believe content marketing is the future of all promotional strategies.
• 94% of senior marketers thought their content marketing results were significant in 2021, according to Oracle.
• 70% of people prefer to get their information from blogs compared to traditional advertisements, and most find blog content to be more authentic than other branded content.
• How-to articles are one of the most popular forms of blog content (77%), followed by trends and news (49%), as well as guides and eBooks (47%).
• Around 53% of marketers say they consider blogging to be their most critical marketing concern.
• Alongside social media posts (94%), blog posts and short articles (80%) were among the most common types of content used in 2019.
• Unfortunately, only around 41% of bloggers create their content based on original research.
• However, according to Orbit Media, bloggers producing articles longer than 3000 words (36%) saw the strongest results.
• Additionally, 38% of bloggers who spent more than 6+ hours on their posts also said the experienced strong results.
• 47% of bloggers will usually include two or three images in their posts, while around 3% include 10 or more images – highlighting an increased focus on visuals.
• Around 69% of marketers are actively investing in SEO, and of those using search engine optimization, many say the top three metrics they consider are keyword ranking, organic traffic, and time spent on the page.
• 68% of online experiences begin with a search engine, and this number is only increasing as the world becomes more digitized.
• Google found around 71% of B2B researchers start their research with a generic search rather than using branded search.
• Furthermore, 53% of B2C shoppers say they always do their own research online before making a purchase.
• 7% of pages will rank in the top 10 search results within a year of publication.
• Around 51% of all content consumption on the web today starts with an organic search on a site like Google.
• However, only 12% of marketers currently use voice search tactics in their strategies.
• 95% of people will only look at the first page of the Google search results.
• 4% of people who listen to podcasts spend over 7 hours a week listening.
• Around 94% of podcast listeners say they interact with brands on social media.
• Around 45% of global internet users between the ages of 25 and 34 say they listen to podcasts today.
• In the US, around 1 in 5 Americans listen to audio books, and 40% listen to podcasts.
• In fact, around 15% of Americans say they listen to podcasts at least once a week.
• 80% of podcast listeners remain engaged with the content all the way through, listening to either most, or all of each episode.
• Edison Research also found 52% of men listen to podcasts, while around 48% of women listen regularly.
• The State of Inbound report found 17% of marketers now plan on incorporating podcast or similar audio content into their content marketing strategy.
• 48% of the podcast listening consumers do is at home, while 26% is done while driving.
• Video is one of the most popular forms of visual content marketing, with 86% of businesses using video as a marketing tool.
• Around 70% of viewers purchase products from a brand after seeing that item on YouTube, but the quality of the video content counts.
• 79% of people say they’ve purchased a piece of software or downloaded an app after watching a video.
• What’s more, 96% of people have watched an explainer video when learning about a service or product.
• 91% of marketers say the challenges of the pandemic have made video a lot more important for brands.
• Around 85% of people also said they wanted to see more video content from brands in 2021.
• Millennials are the generation who consumes the most video, with 75% of consumers aged between 18 and 34 watching videos once per day.
• Of all the channels used to watch video, YouTube is the leading source, attracting 75% of viewers compared to Facebook’s 64%.
• 8% of companies say original graphics like infographics and illustrations helped them achieve their marketing goals in 2020.
• 7% of companies said videos and presentations helped them reach their goals.
• Short-form video is increasing in value, with 89% of global marketers now saying they plan to spend the same or more on short videos going forward.
• HubSpot also found 29% of marketers are planning to use short videos for the first time in 2022.
• 6% of marketers said they pivoted more of their content strategy towards visuals in the pandemic.
• 7% of companies say their biggest struggle when producing visual content is knowing how to produce it consistently, while 22.
• 38% of marketers say they’re only planning on using infographics for the first time in 2022.
• Around 87% of companies consider webinars to be an effective tool for lead generation, and around 49% of companies plan on investing in more webinars going forward.
• Studies also show 2-5% of webinar attendees make purchases, while up to 40% become leads.
• 93% of marketers consider interactive content as being an effective tool for reaching customers in the modern world of content marketing.
• Around 88% of companies say they will be making between 10 and 30% of their content interactive going forward.
• 61% of content marketers believe that by the end of 2022, they’ll be spending more of their budget creating content for in-person events, to help recreate connections with their audience on a face-to-face basis.
• Around 42% of marketers surveyed by HubSpot said they plan on increasing their budget in both augmented reality and virtual reality in the years ahead.
• 33% of customers who say they don’t yet use automation or artificial intelligence to support their content marketing efforts are planning on doing so by the end of 2022.
• 50+ Top email stats to help you improve your email marketing – Lilach Bullock:Your Guide To Digital Marketing, Tools and Growth: 35% click-through rate, while America has a 19% average open rate and a 2.
• 98% click-through rate (GetResponse) The average email open rate worldwide is 22.
• 43% (GetResponse) Germany and the Netherlands have the highest average email open rates, 40.
• 34%, respectively (GetResponse) The fewer newsletters you send, the higher the average open rate:for one newsletter per week, the average open rate is 33.
• 87% and continuously drops the more newsletters are sent (GetResponse) In terms of types of marketing emails, triggered emails have the highest open rates at 44.
• 48% (GetResponse) Desktop email clients’ open share is continuously declining, now currently at 18%, and webmail accounts for 39% of opens (Statista) What should you learn from these email stats?
• Interesting stats and facts about spam emails About 45% of Internet users report that they avoid opening emails from unknown email addresses (Statista) As of March 2020, spam messages accounted for 53.
• Almost 23% of the average email list degrades in just one year (The ZeroBounce Email List Decay Report).
• The spam placement rate of commercial emails has actually declined in past years:from 14% in 2017 to 9% in 2018 (Statista) What should you learn from these stats?
• The good news is that spam is going down – and about 7% of marketing emails are considered spam by email spam filters.
• But if you want to make sure you’re not in that 7%, you need to work on your email subject lines and content to ensure that emails are going to inboxes rather than the spam folder.
• 2% (Epsilon Email Communications) – check out the stats for the rest of the different types of business emails below:80% of business and marketing professionals say that email marketing increases their customer retention rates (Emarsys) Automated emails average 70.
• 4% (Campaign Monitor) Click-through rates are their lowest on Saturdays and Wednesdays, but most days they tend to stick around 2.
• 6% per one study (Campaign Monitor) Some of the best words to use in your email subject lines to increase your open and click-through rates are:“newsletter” at 31.
• 31 Sensational Social Media Marketing and PR Stats and Facts: As noted below, the money is following that belief:social media now accounts for about 11% of all digital marketing outlays, and spending on social media marketing will total nearly $10 billion this year.
• And when they report a problem or issue, they expect to hear back quickly:53% of consumers on Twitter expect a response within the hour.
• 88% of marketers believe social media marketing is important, and 75% of consumers say they use social media in the buying process.
• Twitter is the place to engage with companies:While just 20 of the of Fortune 500 companies actually engage with their customers on Facebook, 83% have a presence on Twitter—as do 76% of the NASDAQ 100, 100% of Dow Jones companies, and 92% of the S&P 500.
• Though only 32% of Fortune 500 CEOs have a presence on any major social network, the majority of those (25% of the total) are on LinkedIn.
• For example, while just 2% of all consumers prefer social media over other channels for customer service, 27% of Gen Y-ers favor it.
• But 76% of journalists say they feel pressure to think about their story’s potential for sharing on social media platforms—so make sure that’s part of the pitch.
• On average, social media accounts for 11% of digital marketing spending.
• More than 70% of users expect to hear back from the brand they’re interacting with on Twitter, and 53% want a response within the hour.
• 49% of people say they share online content they like with friends, family or co-workers at least weekly.
• 86% of marketers believe that social media is important for their business.
• Although 88% of marketers believe social media marketing is important, nearly half (48%) only “somewhat agree” that analyzing social media engagement can help improve the bottom line, and 15% don’t think analyzing social engagement matters at all.
• 28% of those aged 18-34 say they are “very” or “fairly” likely to make a purchase based on a friend’s social media post, while just 33% say they are “not at all likely” to do so.
• 75% of customers say they use social media as part of the buying process.
• 56% of marketers do not use any form of paid promotions on social media.
• Although 67% of consumers have already used a company’s social media channel for customer service, just 2% say they prefer it over other options.
• On the other hand, the 34-and-under crowd dominate on Tumblr (just over 50%) and Instagram (60%).
• The top three measures used by PR pros to show social media success increased website traffic (64%), increased engagement (61%) and increased followers (59%).
• 88% of PR professionals say their businesses or clients regularly engage on Facebook—more than any other social media platform.
• 76% of journalists say they feel pressure to think about their story’s potential for sharing on social media platforms.
• 64% say they prefer that follow-up on “pitches” be done via email rather than phone.
• When using video, 74% of journalists prefer content created by their own organizations.
• Just 32% of Fortune 500 CEOs have a presence on any of the major social networks (Twitter, Facebook, LinkedIn, Google+, and Instagram).
• On a company level, 83% of the Fortune 500 had a Twitter presence in 2014, up from 77% the year before.
• Only 76% of Nasdaq 100 companies maintain a corporate Twitter account which compares with 100% of the Dow Jones and 92% of the S&P 100.
• 75% of SMBs use social media to promote their businesses–more than any other media category.
• Social media is not only number one in terms of utilization by SMBs, it is also number one in share of SMB media spending (21% of total media budgets).
• Content Marketing Stats To Bring To Your Next C-Suite Meeting: Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates three times as many leads.
• 82% of marketers are using content marketing in 2021, up 70% from the year prior.
• 79% of content marketers use content marketing to generate high-quality leads.
• 24% of B2B marketers have shifted their paid advertising spend to content marketing in the past year.
• 82% of consumers feel more positive about a company after reading custom content.
• 60% of top performers in content marketing have a documented strategy, while 79% of the least successful companies in content marketing don’t.
• 41% of buyers view three to five pieces of content before engaging with a sales rep.
• 87% of B2B buyers say online content has a major or moderate impact on vendor selection.
• 48% of B2B C-suite executives report that thought leadership content directly led them to give a company their business.
• 81% of consumers research a product or service online before purchasing.
• More than 85% of internet users prefer to click on organic search results instead of ads.
• Content marketing strategies generate over 400% more leads per $1,000 within 36 months compared to paid search campaigns.
• Video traffic represents more than 60% of all downstream internet traffic.
• 78% of marketers who used video in their content strategies say it directly helped increase sales.
• 84% of consumers have been convinced to buy a product or service after watching a brand’s video.
• Content marketing revenue growth is projected to increase more than 16% by 2027.
• 62% of marketing agencies have seen an increased demand for content marketing services.
• 52% of marketers indicate a strong commitment to content marketing, showing a 26% increase from 2018.
• 70% of marketers believe that their content marketing efforts are more successful now than the year prior.
• 6 Visual Content Marketing #Stats (& How To Take Advantage Of Them): 55% Of Viewers Consume Video Content ThoroughlyIt shouldn’t be surprising that videos are the best when it comes to engagement.
• According to statistics, 55% of viewers will consume video content thoroughly – the highest among popular content types such as news articles (49%), online classes (37%), and blog posts (29%).
• 85% Of Facebook Videos Are Played Without SoundAnother thing to remember if you’re planning to use videos in social media – 85% of videos on Facebook are watched without sound.
• A 360° Video Gets 29% More Views Than The Same Video With A Traditional FormatVirtual reality or VR is often seen by marketers as the next step in visual marketing.
• According to a case study conducted by Magnifyre, 360° videos get 29% more views than regular videos, even if they basically show the same content.
• 261%)Facebook’s recent exploits with VR may have boosted its user interaction rate from 0.
• 216%, but it’s still lagging behind Instagram when it comes to brand interaction rate.
• 10 MIND-BLOWING Digital Marketing Statistics | SEO & Web Stats: To help you better understand how important link building is, here are 10 significant statistics:Nearly 75% of SEO is off-page.
• Research has found that 36% of businesses hire outside professionals or freelancers to perform link building efforts.
• About 42% of SEO strategists spend equal time on building internal and external links.
• The number of clients who spend $1,000 or less on link building alone is 35%.
• Nearly 69% of marketers believe that buying links positively impacts search rankings.
• About 41% of industry executives believe the cost of link building will increase in the future.
• In five years, 92% of marketers believe that links will still be ranking criteria in Google algorithms.
• In a study, 13% of search experts say link building is the most valuable SEO tactic.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: The brand dominates the search industry in China, with recent results revealing it has nearly 190m daily active users (an increase of 25% year-on-year) across its various search platforms on mobile and desktop.
• Having experienced record lows in share price last year, it has since appreciated by 50% in two months, whilst its ad revenue dropped by 9% year-on-year.
• Mainstream companies were more likely to miss or narrowly miss their business objectives than CX leaders were, however, the majority (78%) of mainstream companies were still able to meet or exceed their goals.
• Just 28% of marketers identify data quality as a top priority According to Nielsen’s 2019-2020 Annual Marketing Report, just 28% of global marketers identify data quality as a top priority.
• In a global survey of marketing campaign priorities, it ranked 4th – behind audience targeting (53%), ad creative (37%) and audience reach (31%).
• In 2018, its worth was measured at $130bn, with further data from the report revealing gaming is currently experiencing a compound annual growth rate of 13% – and is showing no signs of slowing through the 2020s.
• 90% of consumers hold brands responsible for taking care of the environment As climate change becomes an increasingly important and prevalent global topic, more consumers are expecting brands to step up to the plate.
• Wunderman Thompson’s Future 100 2020 report claims that 90% of consumers now hold brands responsible for ‘taking care of the planet and its people’.
• Only 20% of martech decision-makers believe their organisation is effective at winning new customers A recent report from Bluecore and Forrester suggests that only 20% of US and European retail martech decision-makers believe their organisation is effective at winning new customers.
• Furthermore, half of those surveyed disclosed that they spend less than 30% pursuing their most pressing marketing objectives.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week: US social influencers under the age of 24 are paid at least 44% more per post than those aged 25+ Data from IZEA’s report ‘The State of Influencer Equality’ evidences that US social influencers under the age of 24 are paid at least 44% more per post (on any social platform) than those aged 25+.
• Strangely, although a huge 87% of total sponsorship transactions were contracted with female influencers between 2015-2019, they got paid 45% less than their male counterparts during the same period.
• Per Instagram post, for example, there was a 56% gap in cost per post, with male influencers, on average, earning $2,365 compared to female influencers earning $1519.
• With the case for diversity ever prominent in marketing, there’s been positive change for people of colour and minority ethnics – non-whites have obtained an additional 12% share of the social sponsorship market in the last 5 years.
• Only 8% of UK consumers paid for online editorial content in 2019 According to a recent report from AudienceProject, only 8% of UK consumers paid for online editorial content in 2019 (down from 12% in 2017), with 2% of these individuals considering stopping in the near future.
• A notably higher 38% of Norwegian respondents said they had parted with their cash in 2019 for premium editorial insight and a further 5% have considered to start doing so.
• 6% of women have made a payment, while in Norway this rises to 42% of men vs.
• The data collected shows that UK readers are more likely to pay for international news (68%), even when weighed against the US (54%), whereas Norway much prefers to pay for local news (70%) over international news (42%).
• 22% of arts & culture organisations say digital technologies are having a major impact on their revenue and profitability Nesta’s Digital Culture 2019 report reveals that digital technologies are having a major impact on the revenue and profitability of 22% of arts and culture organisations.
• Fewer than half (48%) currently sell tickets on an online platform, something that is – more than ever – generally expected of such organisations, while just 41% are using technology to enable the collection of donations online.
• Worryingly, these figures have experienced very little growth since 2013 – a mere 6% and 3% rise respectively.
• As few as 7% use dynamic pricing systems and an even smaller 4% say they control the resale of tickets to avoid touting.
• Forty nine percent of respondents said that it is important in overall business models (up from 34% in 2013), but less important than in marketing, for which 88% said that it is essential or important.
• It also claimed that footfall in its remaining open stores has fallen by as much as 80% since the beginning of the epidemic, resulting in reduced hours of operation.
• However, just 17% of respondents thought that companies are taking appropriate action.
• Despite the majority of consumers (60%) claiming that they want to make better choices when it comes to their impact on the planet, they find it difficult to do so when purchasing products.
• Not only do half of them not believe what various brands claim about their environmental efforts, but 44% say they simply don’t have the time to find out how environmentally friendly a product actually is.
• Digital Marketing Stats That Every Medical Practice Should Know: The 2017 Smart Insights Managing Digital Marketing Research Report shows that 49% of businesses do not have a clearly defined digital marketing strategy.
• Since 75% of people who find local, helpful information in search results are more likely to visit the physical business, it’s one of the most effective strategies medical practices can use to attract patients in their area.
• Furthermore, 18% of local searches done on mobile devices lead to a sale within one day.
• 61% of marketers surveyed in HubSpot’s State of Inbound 2017 say that growing SEO/organic presence is a high priority for them.
• However, reports show that SEO is being replaced by other initiatives and that organic search has fallen by 3%.
• In fact, 64% of consumers report that watching a video on social media influenced them to make a purchase.
• Mobile Engagement Continues to Rise With 77% of Americans now owning a smartphone, reaching patients on their mobile devices is key to making an impact.
• 29 Stats to Make the Case for Content Marketing ROI in 2022: Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates three times as many leads.
• 82% of marketers are using content marketing in 2021, up 70% from the year prior.
• 79% of content marketers use content marketing to generate high-quality leads.
• 24% of B2B marketers have shifted their paid advertising spend to content marketing in the past year.
• 82% of consumers feel more positive about a company after reading custom content.
• 60% of top performers in content marketing have a documented strategy, while 79% of the least successful companies in content marketing don’t.
• 41% of buyers view three to five pieces of content before engaging with a sales rep.
• 87% of B2B buyers say online content has a major or moderate impact on vendor selection.
• 48% of B2B C-suite executives report that thought leadership content directly led them to give a company their business.
• 81% of consumers research a product or service online before purchasing.
• More than 85% of internet users prefer to click on organic search results instead of ads.
• Content marketing strategies generate over 400% more leads per $1,000 within 36 months compared to paid search campaigns.
• Video traffic represents more than 60% of all downstream internet traffic.
• 78% of marketers who used video in their content strategies say it directly helped increase sales.
• 84% of consumers have been convinced to buy a product or service after watching a brand’s video.
• Content marketing revenue growth is projected to increase more than 16% by 2027.
• 62% of marketing agencies have seen an increased demand for content marketing services.
• 52% of marketers indicate a strong commitment to content marketing, showing a 26% increase from 2018.
• 70% of marketers believe that their content marketing efforts are more successful now than the year prior.
• Trending Digital Marketing Statistics for 2021 | NotifyVisitors: As per a survey during the pandemic, around 42% of respondents saw budget cuts as the most challenging factor.
• Spendings on Search Ads :The budgets on search ads are predicted to grow by 15% by 2024.
• They successfully retained more than 55 percent of the customers and acquired more than 45% of customers.
• Marketers have seen more than a 10% of improvement in their brand value by using Twitter.
• 41% of Twitter users expressed an intent to make a purchase based on a post from Twitter influencers.
• Hence, more than 20% of marketers are planning to increase the use of first-party data.
• 7 Insightful Email Marketing Stats to Guide Your Digital Strategy: That’s an impressive 4,200% ROI, making email marketing one of the most cost-effective digital marketing channels available.
• In fact, according to Litmus, mobile opens accounted for 44% of all email opens in 2020.
• According to a report by EmailMonday, 51% of companies are currently using marketing automation, and 58% of B2B companies plan to adopt it.
• According to the DMA, email campaigns with segmented lists can achieve up to a 760% increase in revenue.
• According to ReturnPath, 20% of all emails sent never make it to the inbox.
• Why Content Marketing? 10 Key Statistics & How to Win at It (Infographic): This powerful form of marketing fuels 99% of our own lead and revenue generation, so we know well what content marketing can do for a brand.
• Produce visual content Content with images earns 70% more views than content without images.
• Share your content on social In May of 2015, smartphone social media use jumped 51% in users between the ages of 25-34.
• Develop a content marketing program 79% of the most successful content marketers have a clear idea of what effective content marketing looks like and how to achieve it.
• Social Media Marketing Statistics in Singapore | Novatise Media: 50% of all Facebook users use Facebook messenger on their phones 25 to 34-year-olds are the largest demographic on Facebook from Singapore Around 2.
• Digital Marketing Statistics (2024):What You Need To Know – Drip Digital: 80% of marketers reported an increase in email engagement over the past year.
• 81% of SMBs rely primarily on email marketing for customer acquisition.
• 85% of B2B organizations use email marketing software to assist with content marketing.
• 49% of consumers say they prefer to receive promotional emails from their favorite brands on a weekly basis.
• 30% of marketers use audience segmentation strategies to boost email engagement, (HubSpot)16.
• 59% of marketers say email marketing is their number one source of ROI.
• 98% of sales reps with 5000+ LinkedIn connections meet or surpass quota.
• The other top 2 types of content used are blog articles (89%) and email newsletters (81%).
• 91% of B2B marketers use social media as a free content distribution channel.
• 54% of social browsers use social media platforms to research products.
• 70% of social marketers say their top goal for social media is to boost brand awareness.
• 98% of active user accounts worldwide use Facebook via any kind of mobile phone.
• 76% of video marketers plan to include Facebook in their 2020 video marketing strategy.
• 85% of them say it’s been a success which makes Facebook more effective as a video marketing channel than YouTube.
• A staggering 95% of B2B marketers say they use LinkedIn for organic content marketing.
• LinkedIn is the most successful channel for video marketers (87%) in 2019.
• 66% of video marketers say they plan to include LinkedIn in their 2020 video marketing strategy.
• Linkedin posts with images result in a 98% higher comment rate than text-only posts.
• LinkedIn is 277% more effective for lead generation than other social platforms like Facebook and Twitter.
• 62% of Instagram users say they became more interested in a brand or product after seeing it in Stories.
• 75% of Instagram users say they made a purchase after seeing it on the app.
• 28% of video marketers plan to include IGTV in their 2020 video marketing strategy.
• 54% of marketers feel they’re not maximizing their use of Instagram to achieve their goals.
• People spend 26% more time viewing ads on the platform than other social channels.
• Tweets with images receive 89% more likes, 150% more retweets, and 18% more click-throughs than their counterparts.
• 38% of video marketers plan to include Twitter in their 2020 video marketing strategy.
• 31% of people are more likely to recall what they saw on Twitter versus general online browsing.
• Companies using Twitter for customer service experienced a 19% increase in customer satisfaction.
• Only 3% of tweets about customer service issues tagged the company’s user handle.
• There’s a 43% decrease in customer advocacy when companies fail to respond to tweets.
• Twitter Ads during live events are 11% more effective at stimulating mental engagement than TV ads.
• 81% of Twitter users say the platform impacts their purchasing decisions more than TV.
• 15% of video marketers plan to include TikTok in their 2020 video marketing strategy.
• 98% of marketers surveyed across 39 countries are investing in content marketing.
• 86% of B2B marketers say they have achieved brand awareness by using content marketing successfully in the last 12 months.
• 51% of marketers said the most important metric for measuring content engagement was the number of sales generated.
• Nearly 50% of B2B marketers expect their content marketing budget to increase in 2020.
• More than 50% of all B2B buyers view at least 8 pieces of content during their buyer’s journey.
• 82% say they viewed at least 5 pieces of content from the brand before purchasing.
• 18% of marketers use WordPress as their website content management system.
• 49% of buyers surveyed say they use Google to discover or find a new item or product.
• 55% of marketers say articles and blog posts were the most valuable content type for moving prospects through the sales funnel.
• 41% of B2B content marketers have a documented content marketing strategy.
• 35% of B2B marketers say they have 2 to 5 internal team members who are dedicated to content marketing.
• 54% of companies say creating content that generates quality leads is their biggest challenge with content marketing.
• The prevailing content formats are blog posts (86%), case studies (42%), and success stories (36%).
• Marketing (81%), Social Media (50%), and Strategy (42%) are the top three skills required in the content marketing industry.
• There’s an 88% growth year over year in time spent watching videos on a smartphone.
• 58% of smartphone users prefer companies whose mobile sites or apps remember who they are and their past behavior.
• 60% of smartphone users have contacted a business directly using search results.
• 75% of smartphone users expect to get immediate information while using their smartphone.
• 69% of consumers look up customer reviews on a product or service on their phones.
• 79% of smartphone users say they’ve made a purchase online using their mobile devices.
• 66% of digital buyers check promotional offers or discounts offered to them using a retailer’s mobile app while in-store.
• 62% of consumers would like to confirm a service appointment via messages.
• 85% of mobile advertisers believe they’re offering a positive experience.
• 8% of internet users were blocking advertising on their connected devices.
• B2B Content Marketing Statistics | Martech Zone: In the last 12 months, 86% of B2B marketers report creating brand awareness, 79% have educated their audiences, and 75% have built credibility/trust.
• Further, 44% of these top performers operate as a centralized content marketing group that works across the organization.
• 32% of B2B marketers lack a full-time person dedicated to content marketing.
• Content creation is the most outsourced content marketing activity, with 84% of respondents likely to outsource it.
• When it comes to links, 93% of B2B content ends up attracting zero external links.
• A survey of tech B2B buyers found 53% of respondents found videos as the most useful.
• When it comes to content marketing strategy, 88% of the most successful B2B marketers prioritize the informational needs of their audience over their organization’s sales/promotional message.
• 46% of top-performing B2B content marketers leverage influencer/media relations (vs.
• Marketing Charts found that 69% of B2B organizations will focus on measurement and analytics in 2020.
• Of the 80% B2B marketers using metrics to measure content performance, 59% are doing an excellent or outstanding job at demonstrating ROI.
• While over 40% of B2B organizations are likely to invest MORE time and money on content marketing in 2020, their top priority isn’t quantity.
• 48% of B2B content marketers will focus on the quality of their audience and conversions.
• 36% of surveyed marketers report an yearly budget of less than $100,000.
• Further, 44% of these top performers operate as a centralized content marketing group that works across the organization.
• Content creation is the most outsourced content marketing activity, with 84% of respondents likely to outsource it.
• When it comes to links, 93% of B2B content ends up attracting zero external links.
• Of the 80% B2B marketers using metrics to measure content performance, 59% are doing an excellent or outstanding job at demonstrating ROI.
• 48% of B2B content marketers will focus on the quality of their audience and conversions.
• 36% of surveyed marketers report an yearly budget of less than $100,000.
• I had a free trial at the hands of media and I was given less than 10% chances of continuing on my entrepreneurial journey.
• Edgemesh helps eCommerce companies across multiple industries and platforms deliver 20-50% faster page loads to users around the globe.
• A 20-year leading agency ranked within the Top 1% globally Website Liza Nebel Liza is the President, COO, and Co-Founder of BlueOcean, an AI brand strategy platform that helps companies outmaneuver the competition.
• 14 Jaw-Dropping Mobile Marketing Stats [Infographic] | Social Media Today: For example, did you know that 44% of Americans say they couldn’t make it a day without their mobile device?
• 30 Digital Marketing Statistics For 2022 | Ecommerce Fastlane: Engaging email subscribers remains the most difficult challenge for 45% email marketers.
• Recent statistics indicate that 75% of Gmail users access their emails via mobile devices.
• Blog posts are the top B2C marketing content format, with 83% of companies using it within the last 12 months.
• Quality content is the most important design element that contributes to creating an effective customer experience, say 58% of marketers.
• The use of video for marketing needs has increased by 23% over the last three years.
• 94% of video marketers claim video has helped to increase user awareness.
• Video marketers say video has directly helped to boost their sales by 78%.
• 83% of marketers reported feeling confident in their social media efforts.
• 71 billion in revenues in 2021, accounting for 30% of all internet ad revenues.
• 64% of people said they now prefer to message rather than call a business.
• 59% of marketeers agree that customer service via social media channels has increased in value for their businesses.
• Mobile share of organic Google visits to business websites increased to 61%.
• Smartphones combined for 61% of organic Google visits in the first quarter of 2021, which represents a 2% increase from Q1 2021.
• 73% of all e-commerce sales this year coming from mobile Shopping through smartphones and tablets will expand further.
• Here’s why it matters:Pinners (85% of which use mobile devices to access the platform) are open to finding new products and ideas.
• 82% of marketers reported major investments to improve their SEO strategy.
• It was reported that 93% of online experiences begin with a search engine.
• Next year, businesses should keep up with optimizing their website for local search results considering that 75% of consumers search for local stores and locations.
• In 2021, 70% of businesses altered their SEO content strategy to generate better results.
• SEO stats predict that altering strategy and content can be effective in increasing organic traffic by 111%.
• Digital commerce, personalisation, ad spend:5 killer marketing stats: 8% next year, slower than the global average and meaning its market share will decline.
• Internet-related advertising is forecast to grow by 11% in 2020 and account for 52% of global spend.
• Source:GroupM Most marketers to abandon personalisation efforts By 2025, 80% of marketers who have invested in personalisation will abandon their efforts due to a lack of ROI, the challenges of customer data management, or both.
• More than a quarter (27%) of marketers believe data is the main obstacle to personalisation because of weaknesses associated with data collection, protection and integration.
• Source:Gartner Shoppers aiming to reduce their environmental impact this Christmas Almost three-quarters (71%) of shoppers plan to take specific action to reduce their environmental impact over the Christmas shopping season.
• More than half (55%) plan to buy more loose fruit and vegetables, while 34% want to avoid buying products that have a lot of excess packaging.
• Additionally, 32% intend to buy more locally produced items, while 31% will seek out products with easily recyclable packaging.
• Source:IGD 54% of digital commerce projects deemed unsuccessful More than half (54%) of digital commerce projects are deemed unsuccessful.
• The main reason for this is a lack of customer alignment (34%), poor logistics (29%) and insufficient investment (29%).
• Some 51% of digital commerce leaders don’t believe their organisation invests enough in commerce, while 28% say digital projects move too quickly and lack strategy.
• Despite this, 79% of digital commerce leaders say they feel ready to take advantage of opportunities in the space.
• These include a better chance of growth in their industry (20%), better ability to compete (20%) and alignment with customer demands (16%).
• Source:Wunderman Thompson Commerce The accuracy of political ads Some 87% of UK adults believe it should be a legal requirement for factual claims in political adverts to be accurate.
• Just 5% think it should not be, while 7% don’t know, according to a YouGov survey of 1,600 consumers.
• This number is highest among people who vote for the Liberal Democrats in 2017, at 97%, followed by Labour voters on 92% and Conservative voters on 86%.
• Nine in 10 (90%) of those who voted for remain in the 2016 EU referendum also think political ads should be accurate, compared to 87% of those who voted leave.
• Content Marketing Statistics 2023 Trends and Facts: Effective and leading factors of Content Marketing As of 2023, search engine optimization (SEO) is performed by 46% of respondents.
• For enhancing content marketing, 40% are creating more visuals with improved video content.
• Analyzing their competitors is another effective factor that will influence the success of their strategy said 41% of respondents.
• Another leading factor for the success is improving the value and quality of content effectively, agreed by 44%.
• The market value of content has been boosted by updating existing content said to 42% of respondents.
• Business processes that use content marketing, have proved that there’s 30% growth in the businesses (Mailchimp).
• Prospective buyers resulted in 47% checking the content on the company’s website before going forward with the company’s sale (Mailchimp).
• 72% of digital markets informed that business-to-business transaction has also increased upon adopting content marketing (Mailchimp).
• Content Marketing Statistics by Budgets As of 2023, the monthly content marketing budget spending is above $20,000 said by 6% of content marketers.
• Other budget spending statistics by content marketers are followed by $10,000-$20,000 (10%), $5,000-$10,000 (17%), $3,000-$5,000 (20%), and $1,000-$3,000 (19%).
• As seen above, content marketing revenue was barely reaching up to 50%.
• During the pandemic year, the percentage directly crossed 50% increasing the importance in all kinds of companies.
• Revenue is expected to increase more by the year 2026 crossing the number 100% Content Marketing Trends Companies today are adopting content marketing included in digital marketing.
• As of 2023, around 54% of businesses are going to enhance their budgets on content marketing.
• More than $2,000 was spent per piece of content by 54% of businesses which is termed a very successful strategy.
• 74% of businesses’ monthly spending is currently less than $15,000 which resulted in lower performances.
• Only 33% of Content reports results are successful when businesses dedicate efforts towards content design by 10%-50%.
• AI content generation tools are termed as a successful content strategy used by 19% of the business.
• On the other hand in 2023, AI content generation tools are not used by 24% of businesses.
• Using voice search tactics is also a part of the strategy said by 12% of marketers currently.
• Whereas, 36% of content marketers have incorporated several interactive as a part of content strategy.
• The AI content generation tools are 24% more likely in B2B businesses as compared to B2C businesses.
• As of 2023, there was no outsourcing of content creation by 29% of businesses.
• Augmented reality (AR) and Virtual reality (VR) will see a rise in the budget by companies worldwide by 42% Organic search contributes 51% to content marketing 7% of content marketers are facing difficulties while continuously creating visual content.
• Around the world, only 12% of content marketers are using voice search which is included in their strategy 39% of companies are introducing infographics into their businesses for the first time ever.
• Only 22% of the companies today support backlinks whereas 76% of content marketers are focusing on organic search as a base to measure content success.
• 59% of Content marketers use video as a way to communicate through social media.
• Today 94% of companies have moved to social media to increase their brand awareness resulting in sales.
• com) Following are the known B2B content marketing statistics As of 2023, content marketing is used by 91% of B2B marketers.
• In the same year, 69% of businesses have planned to increase budgets for content marketing.
• For building effective relationships with customers 82% of B2B marketers used content marketing.
• Around 72% of B2B buyers preferred doing business with those companies that enable valuable content.
• Different content formats used by B2B content marketers are followed by blog posts (66%), infographics (55%), e-books (48%), white papers (46%), podcasts (39%), emails (93%), social media (92%), events (56%), webinars (55%), and videos (44%).
• 1% from last year B2C Content Marketing Statistics Contrary to B2B marketing, in B2C content marketing business is typically in contact directly with the customer.
• com) As of 2023, in B2C content marketing around 82% of marketers are investing actively across the world.
• On the other hand, by 2023 the annual growth rate of the B2B industry is going to reach 16%.
• In the same year, almost 49% of B2C companies have increased their outsourcing content marketing.
• On the other hand, outsourcing of content creation by 75% of organizations.
• Content has gained utmost importance reaching 60% of the companies worldwide.
• 100 Real Estate Digital Marketing Stats That Critically Impact Your Business: Source 67% more leads will be generated by companies with an active blog this year.
• Source After 21-54 blogs, businesses see a traffic increase to their blogs by up to 30%.
• Source 90% of consumers find custom content useful, 78% believe that companies behind content are interested in building good relationships.
• Source 61% of consumers say they feel better about a company that delivers custom content and are also more likely to buy from that company.
• Source Content creation is ranked as the single most effective SEO technique by 53% of businesses.
• Source Source 47% of people go online to learn to improve themselves and nearly one-third 31% to find self-help experts or books.
• Source 82% of marketers who blog daily acquired a customer using their blog, as opposed to 57% of marketers who blog monthly.
• 48% of marketers curate noteworthy content from third-party sources weekly (this post is an example).
• Source Customer testimonials have the highest effectiveness rating for content marketing at 89%.
• Source 34% of Fortune 500 companies now maintain active blogs – the largest share since 2008.
• 45% have reached out to a blogger to inquire about a product when considering a purchase, and 84% buy products based on the content they find on blogs.
• Source 62% of B2B technology companies use a blog to market their products.
• Source Landing pages with multiple offers get 266% fewer leads than single offer page.
• Source Companies see a 55% increase in leads when increasing their number of landing pages from 10 to 15.
• Source More than 90% of visitors who read your headline also read your CTA copy.
• Source Only 52% of companies and agencies that use landing pages also test them to find ways to improve conversions.
• Source Of B2B companies that use landing pages, 62% have six or fewer total landing pages.
• Source It has been recently researched that when a video is present on the landing page, it has a 41% higher click through rate than plain text.
• Source 45% of landing pages don’t clearly reiterate the call-to-action from their emails.
• Source White paper and eBook downloads are the top producers of B2B leads, cited by 59% of marketers.
• Other top calls to action included contact forms (39%), webinars (37%), and free trials.
• Source A 1 second delay in your site speed can result in a 7% reduction in conversions.
• Source 44% of clicks for B2B companies are directed to a home page, not a landing page.
• Source 48% of marketers build a new landing page for each marketing campaign.
• Source 42% of offer-related graphics on landing pages are not clickable.
• Source 68% of B2B businesses use landing pages to garner a new sales lead for future conversion.
• Source Companies that excel at lead nurturing generate 50% more sales ready leads at 33% lower cost.
• Source Roughly 75% of businesses have problem finding suitable expertise for optimizing their landing page copy.
• Source Long landing pages can generate up to 220% more leads than above the fold call-to-action.
• Source 92% of SEO practitioners say content creation is an effective SEO tactic, and 76% regularly invest in content creation.
• Source Source Search is the top traffic driver to content-oriented websites, producing on average nearly four times the traffic of social media (41% from search, 11% from social).
• Source 81% of B2B purchase cycles start with web search, and 90% of buyers say when they are ready to buy, “they’ll find you.
• ” Source Search is the #1 driver of traffic to content sites, beating social media by more than 300%.
• Source 75% of users never scroll past the first page of search results.
• Source When using organic SEO techniques and a PPC campaign together, you can expect to receive 25% more clicks and 27% more profits versus using just one or the other.
• Source Organic search drives 51% of all visitors to business-to-business and business-to-consumer Web sites, whereas paid-search drives 10% and social 5%.
• Source Source Local searches lead 50% of mobile visitors to visit stores within one day.
• Source 96% of marketers use Search Engine Marketing to provide informational and educational content.
• Source 53% of marketers rank content creation as the single most effective SEO tactic.
• Source Over 58% of marketers who have been using social media for one year or longer have improved search engine rankings.
• Source More than half (53%) of marketers rank content creation as the single most effective SEO tactic.
• Source 57% of B2B marketers say SEO has the biggest impact on lead generation.
• Source 33% of clicks from organic search results go to the top listing on Google.
• Source Websites with 51 to 100 pages generate 48% more traffic than websites with 1 to 50 pages.
• Source Video searches garner 41% higher click-through rate as compared to plain, static text content.
• Source For Google, a study from Slingshot SEO shows 18% of organic clicks go to the #1 position, 10% of organic clicks go to the #2 position, and 7% of organic clicks go to the #3 position.
• 2022 content marketing statistics:64 new stats for a killer end-of-year strategy: Unfortunately, today, a whopping 72% of marketers report their content marketing efforts range from unsuccessful to only moderately successful.
• 77% of B2B marketers report that their content strategy is different now than it was pre-pandemic.
• 70% reported changing their targeting/messaging strategy, 64% adjusted their editorial calendar, and 53% changed their content distribution/promotion strategy.
• In 2021, only 2% reported decreasing the size of their content marketing team for pandemic-related reasons.
• 43% of marketers say video was made necessary by new challenges, including the pandemic.
• Only 50% of marketers expect the pandemic to affect their video marketing in 2022.
• Over 90% of B2B marketers believe the pandemic will have a long-term impact on their content marketing efforts.
• Only 40% of B2B organizations reported having a documented content marketing strategy.
• About 66% of marketers expected to increase their content marketing budget in 2022.
• In 2020, the top five content marketing areas people planned on investing in during 2021 were:content creation (70%), website enhancements (66%), events (digital, in-person, hybrid) (48%), organic content distribution (46%), and social media management/community building (39%).
• In 2020, 75% of content marketers reported that organic search (aka SEO) was the most effective content marketing tactic they implemented during the year.
• That was followed by updating and repurposing existing content, a strategy used by 61% of respondents.
• About 50% of all B2B marketers said they outsource content marketing activities, and 65% said their biggest challenge is finding partners with adequate subject matter expertise.
• 59% of companies reported having 1-5 employees dedicated to content marketing.
• The top five areas of investment for 2022:video (69%), events (digital, in-person, hybrid) (61%), owned-media assets (57%), paid media (55%), social media management /community building (39%).
• The five most common content marketing goals in 2021:creating brand awareness (80%), building credibility/trust (75%), educating audiences (70%), building loyalty with existing customers/clients (60%), and generating demand/leads (60%).
• In the past 12 months, most B2B marketers reported content marketing being most effective in creating brand awareness (80%), building credibility/trust (75%), and educating audiences (70%).
• Of marketers surveyed, 83% measure the success of their content based on website engagement (69%), conversions (67%), website traffic (65%), email engagement (64%), or social media analytics (51%).
• The top five B2B organic (non-paid) social media platforms that produced the best results in the last 12 months:LinkedIn (77%), Facebook (37%), Instagram (27%), YouTube (21%), and Twitter (17%).
• More than half (58%) of B2B content marketers said virtual events/webinars/online courses produced the best results for their content marketing in the last 12 months.
• Long articles/posts stood out as an area where those who are most successful reported better results than respondents overall (43% vs.
• On average, content marketers reported that 69% of the content they create is for the top of the funnel.
• Only 43% of the content they create is for the middle of the funnel, 20% for the bottom, and 18% for retention.
• The most popular unpaid content distribution channels that content marketers used in 2021 were:media/public relations (52%), speaking/presenting at events (52%), guest posts/articles in third-party publications (43%), collaborative social spaces (33%), and guest spots (32%).
• 76% of B2B marketers reported increasing (45%) or maintaining (31%) their paid content distribution investment in the past 12 months.
• Social media remains the most popular with 77% of content marketers using paid distribution on various platforms as part of their content strategy.
• LinkedIn is the social media platform most frequently used for B2B content distribution (75%), followed by Facebook (69%) and Instagram (30%).
• Articles with seven or fewer words in their H1 average 36% more organic traffic than those with 14 or more words.
• Posts with more than seven images get 116% more organic traffic than articles containing just text.
• (State of Video Marketing 2021 by Wyzowl) This number was consistent in 2021 but has grown from 85% in 2020, 81% in 2018, 63% in 2017, and 61% in 2016.
• 93% of content marketers believe that video converts the same or better than other forms of content.
• In fact, articles with more than three videos generated 55% more backlinks than those with none.
• 82% of marketers reported that video has become more important than ever as a medium.
• (State of Video 2022 by Vidyard) In sales and customer conversations (59%) and YouTube (54%) followed in the second and third spots.
• 51% of B2B marketers reported webinars/webcasts/web series delivering the best results for them in the past 12 months.
• A whopping 92% of marketers who use video say that it’s an important part of their content marketing strategy.
• 49% of video marketers say video has reduced the number of support calls they’ve received – up 6% from last year.
• 94% say video has helped increase user understanding of their product or service.
• 81% of video marketers say video has directly helped increase sales, and 87% of video marketers say video gives them a good return on their investment.
• An overwhelming 92% of video marketers feel the level of noise and competition has increased in the last year.
• 88% of people say they’ve been convinced to buy or download a piece of software or app by watching a video.
• That number jumps to 96% when asked if a video convinced them to buy a product or service.
• About 91% of marketers say their webinars have been a success, making it the most effective video marketing channel, according to State of Video Marketing 2021 by Wyzowl.
• YouTube remains the most widely used video platform for content marketers, with 88% of video marketers planning to use it in 2022.
• The number of marketers using TikTok as a marketing tool has increased 13% from last year to 33%.
• About 74% of B2B consumers are only willing to spend 10 minutes or less watching video content, while 44% won’t spend more than 5 minutes.
• 55% of respondents said they relied even more on content to research and inform purchase decisions than they did in 2021.
• A majority of B2B buyers (62%) said they engage with 3-7 pieces of content before connecting with a salesperson, and 11% said they typically consume more than seven pieces of content.
• When asked how they’d most like to learn about a product or service, 73% of respondents said they’d prefer to watch a short video than read a blog post, view an infographic, or watch a webinar, among other things.
• 39% of B2B buyers reported that B2B vendors could improve their content by curbing sales messages.
• 37% of B2B buyers reported that B2B vendors could improve their effectiveness by creating shorter content.
• Long reads of 3000+ words get 138% more traffic than those with fewer than 500.
• (The State of Content Marketing 2022 by SEMrush) 78% of articles with fewer than 500 words haven’t been shared, period.
• 41% of B2B buyers reported putting more emphasis on the trustworthiness of the source of content.
• About 43% of people said they find research/survey reports to be most valuable when researching B2B purchases.
• 52% of B2B buyers report that they would like to see content organized by topic according to issue/pain point, 51% by topics, 46% by industry/vertical, and 42% by business role.
• In the early stages of their buyer’s journeys, 81% of B2B buyers report enjoying listicles, 72% infographics, 66% blogs, and 62% videos.
• In the mid-stage of their buying journey, 50% want to see assessments, 49% research and reports, and 46% case studies.
• Case studies (35%), third-party reports (31%), and assessments (18%) are preferred in the late stages.
• Unfortunately, today, a whopping 72% of marketers report their content marketing efforts range from unsuccessful to only moderately successful.
• 77% of B2B marketers report that their content strategy is different now than it was pre-pandemic.
• 70% reported changing their targeting/messaging strategy, 64% adjusted their editorial calendar, and 53% changed their content distribution/promotion strategy.
• In 2021, only 2% reported decreasing the size of their content marketing team for pandemic-related reasons.
• 43% of marketers say video was made necessary by new challenges, including the pandemic.
• Only 50% of marketers expect the pandemic to affect their video marketing in 2022.
• Over 90% of B2B marketers believe the pandemic will have a long-term impact on their content marketing efforts.
• 52% of B2B content marketers surveyed reported that “adapting to changes brought forth by the pandemic” contributed to their success in the last 12 months.
• However, searches for the phrase “content marketing strategy” fell by 33% from the previous year.
• Only 40% of B2B organizations reported having a documented content marketing strategy.
• About 66% of marketers expected to increase their content marketing budget in 2022.
• In 2020, the top five content marketing areas people planned on investing in during 2021 were:content creation (70%), website enhancements (66%), events (digital, in-person, hybrid) (48%), organic content distribution (46%), and social media management/community building (39%).
• In 2020, 75% of content marketers reported that organic search (aka SEO) was the most effective content marketing tactic they implemented during the year.
• That was followed by updating and repurposing existing content, a strategy used by 61% of respondents.
• About 50% of all B2B marketers said they outsource content marketing activities, and 65% said their biggest challenge is finding partners with adequate subject matter expertise.
• 59% of companies reported having 1-5 employees dedicated to content marketing.
• The top five areas of investment for 2022:video (69%), events (digital, in-person, hybrid) (61%), owned-media assets (57%), paid media (55%), social media management /community building (39%).
• The five most common content marketing goals in 2021:creating brand awareness (80%), building credibility/trust (75%), educating audiences (70%), building loyalty with existing customers/clients (60%), and generating demand/leads (60%).
• In the past 12 months, most B2B marketers reported content marketing being most effective in creating brand awareness (80%), building credibility/trust (75%), and educating audiences (70%).
• Of marketers surveyed, 83% measure the success of their content based on website engagement (69%), conversions (67%), website traffic (65%), email engagement (64%), or social media analytics (51%).
• The top five B2B organic (non-paid) social media platforms that produced the best results in the last 12 months:LinkedIn (77%), Facebook (37%), Instagram (27%), YouTube (21%), and Twitter (17%).
• More than half (58%) of B2B content marketers said virtual events/webinars/online courses produced the best results for their content marketing in the last 12 months.
• Long articles/posts stood out as an area where those who are most successful reported better results than respondents overall (43% vs.
• On average, content marketers reported that 69% of the content they create is for the top of the funnel.
• Only 43% of the content they create is for the middle of the funnel, 20% for the bottom, and 18% for retention.
• The most popular unpaid content distribution channels that content marketers used in 2021 were:media/public relations (52%), speaking/presenting at events (52%), guest posts/articles in third-party publications (43%), collaborative social spaces (33%), and guest spots (32%).
• 76% of B2B marketers reported increasing (45%) or maintaining (31%) their paid content distribution investment in the past 12 months.
• Social media remains the most popular with 77% of content marketers using paid distribution on various platforms as part of their content strategy.
• LinkedIn is the social media platform most frequently used for B2B content distribution (75%), followed by Facebook (69%) and Instagram (30%).
• Articles with seven or fewer words in their H1 average 36% more organic traffic than those with 14 or more words.
• Posts with more than seven images get 116% more organic traffic than articles containing just text.
• (State of Video Marketing 2021 by Wyzowl) This number was consistent in 2021 but has grown from 85% in 2020, 81% in 2018, 63% in 2017, and 61% in 2016.
• 93% of content marketers believe that video converts the same or better than other forms of content.
• In fact, articles with more than three videos generated 55% more backlinks than those with none.
• 82% of marketers reported that video has become more important than ever as a medium.
• (State of Video 2022 by Vidyard) In sales and customer conversations (59%) and YouTube (54%) followed in the second and third spots.
• 51% of B2B marketers reported webinars/webcasts/web series delivering the best results for them in the past 12 months.
• A whopping 92% of marketers who use video say that it’s an important part of their content marketing strategy.
• 49% of video marketers say video has reduced the number of support calls they’ve received — up 6% from last year.
• 94% say video has helped increase user understanding of their product or service.
• 81% of video marketers say video has directly helped increase sales, and 87% of video marketers say video gives them a good return on their investment.
• An overwhelming 92% of video marketers feel the level of noise and competition has increased in the last year.
• 88% of people say they’ve been convinced to buy or download a piece of software or app by watching a video.
• That number jumps to 96% when asked if a video convinced them to buy a product or service.
• About 91% of marketers say their webinars have been a success, making it the most effective video marketing channel, according to State of Video Marketing 2021 by Wyzowl.
• YouTube remains the most widely used video platform for content marketers, with 88% of video marketers planning to use it in 2022.
• The number of marketers using TikTok as a marketing tool has increased 13% from last year to 33%.
• About 74% of B2B consumers are only willing to spend 10 minutes or less watching video content, while 44% won’t spend more than 5 minutes.
• 55% of respondents said they relied even more on content to research and inform purchase decisions than they did in 2021.
• A majority of B2B buyers (62%) said they engage with 3-7 pieces of content before connecting with a salesperson, and 11% said they typically consume more than seven pieces of content.
• When asked how they’d most like to learn about a product or service, 73% of respondents said they’d prefer to watch a short video than read a blog post, view an infographic, or watch a webinar, among other things.
• 51% of B2B buyers reported that “using data and research to support claims” made content more memorable and more likely to trigger a sales call for them.
• 39% of B2B buyers reported that B2B vendors could improve their content by curbing sales messages.
• 37% of B2B buyers reported that B2B vendors could improve their effectiveness by creating shorter content.
• Long reads of 3000+ words get 138% more traffic than those with fewer than 500.
• (The State of Content Marketing 2022 by SEMrush) 78% of articles with fewer than 500 words haven’t been shared, period.
• 41% of B2B buyers reported putting more emphasis on the trustworthiness of the source of content.
• About 43% of people said they find research/survey reports to be most valuable when researching B2B purchases.
• 52% of B2B buyers report that they would like to see content organized by topic according to issue/pain point, 51% by topics, 46% by industry/vertical, and 42% by business role.
• In the early stages of their buyer’s journeys, 81% of B2B buyers report enjoying listicles, 72% infographics, 66% blogs, and 62% videos.
• In the mid-stage of their buying journey, 50% want to see assessments, 49% research and reports, and 46% case studies.
• Case studies (35%), third-party reports (31%), and assessments (18%) are preferred in the late stages.
• In 2021, Here Are the Social Media Marketing Statistics You Should Know — Steemit: • Tweets with only one or two hashtags generate 21% more interaction than those with three or more (Buddy Media, 2012).
• Instagram • People under the age of 35 accounts for 71% of Instagram’s viewership (Statista, 2019).
• LinkedIn • B2B marketers on LinkedIn utilize the network for organic social media marketing in 96% of cases (Content Marketing Institute, 2021).
• Women account for more than 60% of Pinterest users as of 2021, however, the number of male users is rapidly increasing.
• Other reasons individuals use YouTube include watching the news (37%), follow their favorite companies (18%), remain in contact with family and friends (8%), and improve their professional job (7%).
• • In 2020, videos aimed for novices experienced a 50% increase in views (Google, 2020).
• With over 70% of YouTube viewers accessing the site via mobile devices, you can’t afford to alienate your audience by not optimizing your content.
• • 81% of users select videos depending on what is recommended to them in the sidebar (Pew Research, 2019).
• TikTok •In the United States, 62% of TikTok users are between the ages of 10 and 29.
• According to social media marketing statistics for 2021, 75% of consumers do not believe advertising to be true.
• According to social media marketing statistics for 2021, 75% of consumers do not believe advertising to be true.
• 70 Content Marketing Statistics to Boost Your Content Strategy: 48% of companies that have a content marketing strategy leverage blogging and 10% say it generates the biggest ROI.
• 2% of businesses rely heavily on visual content as part of their marketing strategy.
• 57% of the businesses that use content marketing have a documented content marketing strategy.
• Over 60% of marketers measure the success of their content marketing strategy through sales.
• More than 56% of marketers who invest in influencer marketing work with micro-influencers.
• Marketers report that their SEO content marketing efforts involve optimizing for mobile (64%) and link building (64%).
• 56% of content marketers who use infographics say that it is their most effective content marketing type.
• 30% of marketers say that their investment in hybrid events is expected to increase, and 40% of marketers plan to increase their investment in virtual events, webinars, and conferences in general in the coming years.
• 75% of large B2B businesses (over 1,000 employees) outsource their content marketing activities, with content creation being the most outsourced content marketing activity among B2B marketers.
• 52% of B2C content marketers said finding resources with adequate topic expertise was one of the biggest challenges they faced.
• B2C marketers who use at least two content types reported that blog posts, email newsletters (tied at 26%), and pre-produced videos (13%) produced the best overall content marketing results for their organization in the last 12 months.
• Only 22% of B2C marketers leverage long-form content (more than 3,000 words).
• 82% of B2C marketers leverage social media platforms, followed by their company blog (79%), and email (76%).
• B2C marketers who use at least two organic social media platforms reported that Facebook (59%) and Instagram (21%) produced the best overall content marketing results for their organization in the last 12 months.
• Of the B2C marketers who use paid advertising on social media, the two platforms they use most often are Facebook (94%) and Instagram (58%).
• 77% of B2C marketers report their organization uses metrics to measure content performance.
• B2C marketers who reported high levels of content marketing success said the top two factors contributing to that success were the value their content provides (77%) and website changes (59%).
• How-to articles are the most popular blog content format (77%), followed by news articles (49%), and guides and eBooks (47%).
• 43% of readers admitted to skimming blog posts rather than consuming it thoroughly.
• 48% of companies that have a content marketing strategy leverage blogging.
• Companies that blog have 434% more indexed pages than those that don’t.
• 61% of users want to learn something from the videos they see on social media.
• When it comes to online advertisements, only 37% of users prefer video-based ads.
• Image-based ads are still most popular ad format (47%) and only 16% prefer text-based ads.
• 81% of adults report using YouTube, which is the highest usage amongst all social networks.
• 42% mostly use live action video, 33% primarily use animated videos, and 15% mainly use screen recorded videos.
• 32% use a mix – creating some videos in-house while outsourcing others.
• 48% of podcast listening is at home, while 26% listen to podcasts while driving.
• 80% of listeners listen to all or most of every podcast episode they start.
• 72% of listeners who have listened to a podcast for four or more years have purchased a sponsored ad.
• 53% of content marketers who leverage podcasts say it’s the most effective format they use, despite low ROI.
• 50% of visitors are more likely to click a result if the brand appears multiple times in search engine results.
• The majority of marketers (75%) find that SEO and an optimized website help them achieve their marketing goals.
• Strategic keyword research is the most popular company tactic for SEO (71%), followed by Local SEO (50%), and mobile optimization (48%).
• 53% of website traffic comes from organic search, while paid search drives only 27%.
• Updating and relaunching your old posts with fresh information and visuals can increase search traffic by as much as 146%.
• 57% of consumers claim that they won’t recommend a business that has a poorly designed mobile website.
• 53% of visits are abandoned if a mobile site takes longer than three seconds to load.
• 56% of brands found that using an emoji in the email subject line results in a higher open rate.
• Marketers have found a 760% increase in revenue from segmenting email campaigns.
• Real Estate Market Stats for Instagram Story and Post Realtor Canva Template Set Social Media Marketing – Etsy: Etsy’s 100% renewable electricity commitment includes the electricity used by the data centres that host Etsy.
• These Six Jaw-Dropping Stats About Zombies Will Transform Your B2B Content Marketing Program: According to a new EduCause survey, the average reading comprehension of a Level I zombie is only about third grade, and it drops by about 10% every month for Level II zombies.
• Plus, Curata reports that only 29% of marketers are currently repurposing content — which means this is great low-hanging fruit if you want to beat back your competitors.
• Top Digital Marketing Data [Q2 2022 Stats]: Interest was so high that from 2022 to 2023, topics on learning about AI increased by 550%, according to an analysis we conducted of over 15,500 news articles and blogs.
• 5%Sample:4,420 respondentsSource:Hootsuite Social Media Consumer 2024 Survey AI is inevitable on social, and scaling back on its use now would be like reverting from computers to typewriters.
• The majority (60%) of organizations have a presence there, but only a third of them feel strongly that it benefits their business—which might explain the 7% drop in brand use.
• views, 49% followers, 43% clicks/traffic, 21% leads, 14% sales/revenue, 4% time spent on site/app, 3% sentiment, 3% share of voice, 2% pipeline, 2% survey-based brand awareness.
• Interest was so high that from 2022 to 2023, topics on learning about AI increased by 550%, according to an analysis we conducted of over 15,500 news articles and blogs.
• The majority (60%) of organizations have a presence there, but only a third of them feel strongly that it benefits their business-which might explain the 7% drop in brand use.
• views, 49% followers, 43% clicks/traffic, 21% leads, 14% sales/revenue, 4% time spent on site/app, 3% sentiment, 3% share of voice, 2% pipeline, 2% survey-based brand awareness.
• Eye-Opening Digital Marketing Stats and Facts for Marketers: These are some interesting and eye-opening insights that help businesses to understand the power of digital marketing: More than 81% of Millennials check their Twitter account at least once a day.
• Snapchat reaches 41% of individuals aged between 18-34 years in US only.
• Nearly 22% of the whole world’s population use Facebook and 76% of those users check their Facebook daily.
• The State of Content Marketing:21 Stats Showing Why You Need It: 70% of Marketers Are Actively Investing in Content Marketing The majority of marketers recognize the value of content marketing.
• According to the Content Marketing Institute, 70% of B2B marketers are actively investing in content marketing, and this number is expected to grow.
• Content Marketing Costs 62% Less Than Outbound Marketing Content marketing is not only effective but also cost-efficient.
• Research by DemandMetric found that content marketing costs 62% less than traditional outbound marketing methods while generating more leads.
• 47% of Buyers View 3-5 Pieces of Content Before Engaging with a Sales Rep Modern consumers are information-hungry.
• Content Marketing Increases Website Traffic by 55% Producing high-quality content consistently can significantly boost your website’s traffic.
• According to a study by TechClient, content marketing can increase website traffic by a staggering 55%.
• B2B Marketers Who Blog Generate 67% More Leads Blogging is a core element of content marketing, and it pays off.
• B2B marketers who maintain an active blog generate 67% more leads than those who don’t, as reported by InsideView.
• 78% of CMOs Believe Custom Content Is the Future of Marketing The future of marketing is personalized, and CMOs are well aware of this fact.
• A whopping 78% of Chief Marketing Officers believe that custom content is the future of marketing, according to a study by DemandMetric.
• 70% of Consumers Prefer Learning About a Company Through Content Consumers have grown weary of traditional advertising.
• A report by the Content Marketing Institute reveals that 70% of consumers would rather learn about a company through content than through advertisements.
• 61% of Consumers Are More Likely to Buy from Companies That Provide Custom Content Personalization is key to winning over today’s consumers.
• In a study by Salesforce, 61% of consumers stated that they are more likely to buy from companies that offer personalized content.
• 72% of Marketers Say Content Marketing Increases Engagement Marketers have seen firsthand how content marketing boosts engagement.
• In a survey by the Content Marketing Institute, 72% of marketers reported that content marketing increases engagement with their target audience.
• 78% of Internet Users Conduct Product Research Online The internet has become the go-to resource for product research.
• According to the Pew Research Center, a staggering 78% of internet users conduct product research online.
• 91% of B2B Marketers Use Content Marketing The prevalence of content marketing in the B2B sector is noteworthy.
• The Content Marketing Institute reports that 91% of B2B marketers use content marketing to reach their target audience.
• Content Marketing Costs 31% Less Than Paid Search Advertising Content marketing not only generates more leads but also costs less than paid search advertising.
• A study by Kapost and Eloqua found that content marketing costs 31% less while producing three times as many leads as paid search advertising.
• 68% of Consumers Feel More Positive About a Brand After Consuming Content from It Content has the power to shape consumer perceptions.
• A study by Collective Bias found that 68% of consumers feel more positive about a brand after consuming content from it.
• 64% of B2B Marketers Outsource Content Creation Many businesses recognize the importance of content marketing but lack the resources to create content in-house.
• That’s why 64% of B2B marketers outsource their content creation, as reported by TopRank Marketing.
• Digital Marketing Trends & Internet Stats | WP Tech Support: It is estimated that 43% of cyber attacks are targeted at small businesses.
• With a market share of 63%, WordPress is the best content management system today.
• Out of all the searches made on Google, 61% of searches are made from a mobile device.
• 50+ Social Media Statistics That Will Take Your Marketing Campaign to the Next Level | Databox Blog: According to the research, more than 30% of companies typically use three tools.
• 4% of the companies we surveyed use at least one social media plugin for their WordPress website.
• Social Media Dashboards Should Be Reviewed at Least Weekly 77% of our respondents review their social media dashboards on either a weekly or daily basis.
• At the same time, 75% of the marketers we surveyed are tracking between 3-5 primary metrics.
• When it comes to social media, more than 50% of the respondents we surveyed believe that getting these exact insights is the most important reason for measuring share of voice.
• Large Minority of Social Media Managers Schedule Content One Month in Advance Nearly 50% of the social media managers we surveyed prefer to schedule content at least a month in advance.
• According to our research, over 40% of brands see successful sales from social channels.
• Everyone Agrees that B2B Brands Can Succeed on Instagram When we asked if it’s possible for B2B brands to succeed on Instagram, 100% said yes.
• 4% of people say they are more likely to interact with a brand on Instagram rather than on other social media channels.
• 5% of users have bought a product or service based on an ad on Instagram.
• Users Follow At Least 6 Brand Accounts 85% of users we surveyed said they follow at least 6 brand accounts on Instagram.
• The Average Facebook Video Watch Time is 21-50% Most marketers have an average watch time of 21-50% on their Facebook videos.
• Large Minority of Companies Post New Videos Weekly 41% of marketers we talked to say they post new videos to their YouTube channel every week.
• Most Views Come from Visitors that Found It via YouTube Search Almost half of our respondents say that 51-80% of their video views come from visitors who found their videos through a YouTube search.
• Yet, over 40% of respondents said text with video outperforms all other kinds of posts on LinkedIn.
• Average LinkedIn CPC is $2-3 while CPM is over $10 for Large Minority of Companies For about 24% of surveyed companies, LinkedIn CPC is between $2-3, while the typical CPM is over $10.
• LinkedIn is Regularly Used for Sales Outreach When we asked marketers how often they use LinkedIn for sales outreach, less than 10% said that they used it infrequently (others use it regularly).
• LinkedIn Remarketing Helps to Increase Click Rate and CTR 60% of the folks we surveyed said remarketing using LinkedIn pixel has helped them increase their click rate.
• LinkedIn Video Ads Convert Better than Other Channels According to our survey, 52% of the companies we talked to said their video ads convert better than other channels.
• Brand Engagement on LinkedIn Has Increased Over the Past Year 93% of marketers reported that engagement with their brand on LinkedIn has increased in the last year.
• Only 7% said it stayed the same, and not one person reported that engagement on LinkedIn had decreased.
• 3% – launch new Twitter ads on a monthly and weekly basis, respectively.
• Companies Aren’t Very Satisfied with Twitter Ads Performance Of those who have experience with Twitter ads, around 30% are very satisfied with the ad platform.
• At the same time, almost 40% of them have said that they aren’t very satisfied.
• Content marketing 2021 statistics:Semrush shows content is truly King: Content marketing by numbers with the Semrush Content marketing 2021 statisticsAmong the 1,500 respondents interviewed by Semrush, a vast majority consider that they have a content marketing strategy, 11% of which feel very satisfied and 76% of respondents with teams of less than 3 people.
• 61% measure the ROI of content marketing (I’d say we should take this number with a pinch of salt though, but fair enough…) Interestingly, 89% of respondents rely on organic search via search engines (as an aside, let me remind you that Semrush is a company dedicated to SEO).
• Semrush’s content marketing 2021 statistics on the importance of content marketingThe three hard skills required for content marketing are social media (50%), SEO (44%) and strategy (42%).
• About 20% of those budgets are between €10,000 and €25,000, which again is compatible with what I found out.
• And everything else is in much smaller proportions, but still 3% of the results, which, for me, is far from negligible.
• 17% are CEOs and 16% marketing managers, 8% SEO managers, and CMOs are in smaller proportions.
• Many small businesses are making up this sample (73% with less than 40 employees).
• 61% measure the ROI of content marketing (I’d say we should take this number with a pinch of salt though, but fair enough.
• ) Interestingly, 89% of respondents rely on organic search via search engines (as an aside, let me remind you that Semrush is a company dedicated to SEO).
• The three hard skills required for content marketing are social media (50%), SEO (44%) and strategy (42%).
• And everything else is in much smaller proportions, but still 3% of the results, which, for me, is far from negligible.
• Many small businesses are making up this sample (73% with less than 40 employees).
• Digital Marketing Statistics you need to know in 2020: Of those surveyed, up to 80% said that they only click on organic results.
• More interestingly, 72% of the people who search for products or services online will visit a local store within 24 hours.
• 73 Visual Content Marketing Statistics Every Marketer Needs to Know: Color in Visual Marketing 1) Information can be located 70% faster if it’s in color.
• (Nielsen Norman) – 5) 65% more people remember a piece information if a visual is paired with.
• (Brain Rules) 6) 30% of our brains are engaged in the task of processing visual information.
• (Discover) 7) 67% of consumers consider clear, detailed images to be very important.
• (DMP) Marketers about Visual Content 9) 41% of content marketeres and bloggers are using 2-3 images in a typical blog post.
• (Bannersnack) 10) 39% of marketers think that it should be a bigger budget allocated to create compelling visual assets.
• (CMO Council) 11) 35% senior marketers don’t have a process in place to manage all visual assets across entire organization.
• (CMO Council) Visual Marketing Statistics 12) Articles with visuals get 94% more views than those without.
• (Jeff Bullas) 13) Using a video on a landing page increase conversions by 86%.
• (EyeView) 14) 55% content marketers plan to prioritize creating visual content.
• (CMI) 15) 60% of consumers are more likely to consider a business whose images appear in local search results.
• (Marketing Tech Blog) 16) 14% increase in pageviews are seen when press releases contain an image.
• (MDG) Video Statistics 17) Mobile video will account for 75% of mobile traffic in 2020.
• (ReelSeo) 18) 59% content marketers say that videos are the most effective tactics for B2C organization.
• 9% of marketing worldwide name video as the type of content with the best ROI.
• (DMP) 22) 26% of smartphone users watch online video at least once per day.
• (Facebook) 24) The number of videos posted per person increased by users increased by 75% in 2015.
• (VentureBeat) Infographic Statistics 27) 63% content marketers say that infographics are the most effective tactics for B2C organization.
• (Massplanner) 29) 60% of marketers predict the use of infographics will increase in 2016 compared to 2015.
• 5% of marketers said that original graphics, such as infographics and illustrations, performed better than other forms of visual content (Venngage) Social Media Visual Marketing 33) 74% marketers use visual assets in their social media marketing, up from 71%in 2015.
• (Social Media Examiner) 34) 42% B2C marketers place more importance on visual content than B2B marketers.
• (Social Media Examiner) 35) Almost 66% of updates on social media are visual content.
• (QuickSprout) 36) 71% of marketers plan on increasing visual content in 2016.
• (QuickSprout) Visual in Social Media Advertising 39) Heineken Light get 54% of audience (35 million people) in just 3 days using video ads on Facebook.
• (LinkedIn) 42) Philadelpia saw an 8pt lift in message association, an 8pt lift in purchase intent and 41% sales uplift with their Instagram Ads.
• (Bannersnack) 43) Airbnb achieved an engagement rate of over 4% for one of their Promoted Tweets.
• (B2B Marketing Mentor) Facebook Visual Marketing 45) 93% of the most engaging posts on Facebook are photo posts.
• (Social Media Examiner) 46) Videos have also achieved 135% more organic reach on Facebook.
• (Business Insider) Twitter Visual Marketing 50) Tweets with images received 150% more retweets than tweets without images.
• (Kissmetrics) 51) Tweets using TwitPic Links are 64% more likely to get ReTweeted.
• (Dan Zarrella) 52) Tweets with images receive 18% more clicks and 89% more favorites.
• (SproutSocial) 56) There are now over 500,000 advertisers on Instagram, of which 75% are outside of the US.
• (Sprout Social) Snapchat Visual Statistics 59) Snapchat has 100 million daily users, 65% of whom upload photos using the app.
• (Venturebeat) 60) Snapchat reaches 41% of all 18 to 34 year-olds in the United States.
• (Snapchat) Slideshare Visual Statistics 62) 41% of B2B marketers in North America use Slideshare to distribute content.
• (eMarketer) 68) Visuals without faces get 23% more repins than ones with faces.
• Social Media Marketing Statistics You Can’t Miss! | Martech Zone: Social Media Demographic Statistics 75% of male internet users are on Facebook as well as 83% of female internet users32% of teenagers consider Instagram to be the most important social networkFemale internet users are more likely to use Instagram than men, at 38% vs.
• Instagram receives the silver medal with 32% of users Pinterest coming in a close third with 31%, and LinkedIn and Twitter at 29% and 24% respectively.
• Social Media Demographic Statistics75% of male internet users are on Facebook as well as 83% of female internet users32% of teenagers consider Instagram to be the most important social networkFemale internet users are more likely to use Instagram than men, at 38% vs.
• I had a free trial at the hands of media and I was given less than 10% chances of continuing on my entrepreneurial journey.
• Edgemesh helps eCommerce companies across multiple industries and platforms deliver 20-50% faster page loads to users around the globe.
• A 20-year leading agency ranked within the Top 1% globally Website Liza Nebel Liza is the President, COO, and Co-Founder of BlueOcean, an AI brand strategy platform that helps companies outmaneuver the competition.
• 25 Important content marketing statistics that you should know: ( Marketing Profs ) 80% of business decision-makers prefer to get information from articles rather than advertisements ( B2Bprblog ) The top three content marketing tactics are blogging (65%), social media (64%), and case studies (64%).
• ( Snap app ) 76% of B2B marketers prioritize delivering content quality over quantity ( Content Marketing Institute ) Marketers who prioritize blogging are 13 times more likely to see positive ROI ( HubSpot ) Businesses with blogs get 126% higher lead growth than those without.
• ( Content Marketing Institute ) Websites with blogs have 97% more inbound links than those without ( Quicksprout ) 61% of U.
• ( Custom Content Council ) 53% of content marketers use interactive content as part of the overall mix of content marketing tactics to influence the buyer’s journey.
• ( CMI ) 93% of marketers agreed that interactive content is effective in educating its buyers.
• Gartner predicts, by 2026, 25% of people will spend an hour a day in the Metaverse.
• A recent study found that 91% of B2B marketers use content to find new leads.
• According to a recent study, incorporating personalization in emails can boost open rates by nearly 26% and conversion rates by 10%.
• Blog posts with visuals engage readers 90% more than blog posts without visuals.
• In the 2nd and 3rd quartile, we can interpret that 50% of the transactions have 2 to 6 products, only 25% of transactions have over 6 products purchased.
• Almost 94% of all businesses now use some form of social media to promote their brand and engage with customers.
• Digital Marketing Statistics:What the Numbers Tell Us: Mobile Marketing Will Remain a Grey Area Take a look at this stat from 2017 suggests that 85% of digital marketing agencies and businesses using mobile marketing think that it is a positive experience for their target audience.
• As per some statistics, 82% of the consumer internet traffic by 2021 would be occupied by videos.
• It is said that 53% of content marketers have started using interactive content because of how well it influences the target market.
• As per these stats, social media marketing takes the lion’s share and 58% of digital marketing is social media marketing, SEO is only 1%, mobile marketing is only 7% and email is only 13%.
• Actually:In 2018 only, the marketing emails’ open by mobile device rate has reached an ever high of 80%.
• 35+ Digital Marketing Statistics To Support Your Strategy (2022): 83% of marketers claimed that they would increasingly rely on video as a strategy, if it weren’t for barriers such as budget, time, and resources.
• (HubSpot) Video has been said to directly increase sales by 80% of video marketers.
• (Wyzowl) Video has been attributed to aiding in generating leads by 83% of video marketers.
• (Wyzowl) Positive ROI was reportedly a result of utilizing video with 88% of video marketers.
• Despite similar open rates, when compared to an email with text and image, an email containing video has a 42% higher click-through-rate.
• (Sendspark) Video personalization can lead to a 500% increase in email engagement for businesses.
• (Statista 2020) Emails that contain subject lines with personalization produce 50% higher open rates.
• (Yes Lifecycle Marketing, 2019) Using videos embedded in email, marketers can outperform the industry average by 640%.
• (Sendspark) Through using video email marketing, businesses can see a 190% increase in revenue.
• (YouTube) 45% of people who use Twitter want celebrities to post more videos.
• (Socialbakers) After viewing a branded video on a social media platform, around 64% of consumers will buy something.
• (Tubular Insights) Around 60% of Instagram stories are viewed with sound, while 85% of videos on Facebook are viewed without sound.
• (Instagram) As a result of a social media video, around 93% of brands reportedly got a new customer.
• 59% of senior executives claim that if both options are available, they prefer watching a video on a topic over reading it in text.
• (Forbes) People only retain about 10% of a message when reading it in text, but retain about 95% of a message when viewing it in a video.
• (G2 Crowd) If a favored creator posted a video, around 50% of 18-34 years old viewers would drop everything to watch.
• (Wistia) After 30 seconds, about 33% of people will stop watching a video.
• (Ad Age) Custom thumbnails are the common denominator in 90% of the best-performing videos on Youtube.
• (Insivia) You can improve your conversion rate up to 80% by adding a video to your landing page.
• 13 stats for Content Marketing that you cannot miss for 2020: 2 — Content influences more than 60% of the consumers, says a report by Dragon Search Marketing.
• 4–69% of the successful B2B marketers have a documented content marketing strategy , says the Content Marketing Institute’s report of 2020.
• B2B Content Marketing Stats, Trends and Budgets: Yes – 43% No – 44% Unsure -13% The Buyer Persona 50% – have 2-3 buyer personas 23% – have 4-5 buyer personas Most of them prefer 2-3 buyer personas to execute content marketing.
• These Digital Marketing Statistics Will Blow Your Mind: 7% of the millions and billions of pages will appear in the top 10 search results within a year of being published!
• Digital Marketing Growth Rate The following are the key figures for the overall growth rate of digital marketing:A 9% compound annual growth rate for digital marketing is anticipated from 2020 to 2026.
• Just this past year, 63% of firms boosted their budgets for digital marketing.
• The overall growth rate of business digital marketing budget spending between 2020 and 2021 was 14%.
• According to surveys, 82% of marketers are actively investing in content marketing, 10% admit not using it, and 8% are unsure if their company uses content marketing!
• Source:HubSpot B2B Content Marketing Stats B2B marketer holds the following opinion on content creation and content marketing:Just 7% of B2B marketers don’t intend to create a content marketing strategy, according to one study.
• A staggering 95% of B2C marketers have a fully designed content marketing plan, and only 5% of them do not intend to develop a content marketing strategy!
• When it comes to nonpaid social media platforms report that:63% of B2C marketers who use Facebook produce the best overall content marketing results 53% of them put their bet on LinkedIn And around 39% claim Instagram to produce the best results!
• It is increasingly seen as a crucial digital advertising tactic, with 93% of marketers reporting using it in campaigns.
• A verified email list generates 35% higher open rate compare to an non-verified list and keeping your sender reputation safe.
• Here is a quick rundown of the social media user growth trends:Social Media Marketing Ads Here are some top social media marketing statistics:Annual social media advertising spending will exceed $134 billion in 2022, a growth of more than 17% year on year.
• Social media recently surpassed paid search as an advertising medium, growing 25% year on year and surpassing $137 billion!
• Retargeting ads are the most popular among marketers, with 77% of B2B and B2C marketers using them as part of their Facebook and Instagram advertising campaigns.
• 10 Essential Twitter Marketing Stats for Social Media Managers in 2022 | Vista Social: The second-largest age group demographic on the platform was represented by users aged between 35 and 49 years old, with a share of almost 21%.
• Users under 24 years old were nearly 24% worldwide, while users aged 50 or above accounted for roughly 17%.
• People spend 26% more time viewing ads on Twitter than on other leading platforms (Twitter).
• Moreover, as per Twitter, people spend 26% more time viewing ads on Twitter than on other leading platforms.
• 80% of Twitter users access the platform on their mobile devices (Statista).
• 67% of B2B businesses use Twitter as a digital marketing tool (Statista).
• 93% of Twitter community members are eager to deal with brands providing help and support (Twitter).
• According to the survey, as of October 2021, almost 30% of Twitter audiences were female, and 70.
• 21 Stats for Developing a Digital Marketing Strategy in 2021: When regrouping to figure out your next move(s) in your marketing efforts, here are some stats to consider:21 Stats for Your 2021 Digital Marketing Strategy 67% of B2B buyers prefer to research online alone and not talk to a seller at all.
• (Forrester) 88% percent of B2B marketers say their homepages talk primarily about their companies, products, and services.
• (HubSpot) 97% of B2B marketers used LinkedIn as part of their content marketing efforts.
• 80% of consumers are more likely to do business with a company offering personalized experiences.
• 89% of those surveyed by Dun & Bradstreet said data quality drives the right B2B sales and marketing campaigns.
• Nearly 35% of all product searches start on Google, while approximately 46% begin on Amazon.
• 60% of large companies use paid ads in addition to content marketing in their marketing strategies.
• 49 Content Marketing Statistics for 2023 | 99firms: Content Marketing Stats (Editor’s Choice)82% of marketers actively invest in content marketing.
• 79% of companies aim to generate more quality leads through content marketing.
• The coronavirus impacted the video marketing plans of 40% of marketers.
• The fact that 82% of marketers are actively investing in content creation speaks volumes about content marketing effectiveness.
• 93% of content marketing specialists that offer a full scope of content marketing services and 89% of marketers that offer specialized content marketing-related services are creating articles or blog posts for their clients.
• Stats on content marketing indicate that social media content is the second most sought-after with 90% and 89% of respective agencies creating it.
• 62% of marketing agencies are seeing increased demand for content marketing services.
• Nearly half of the digital marketing agencies have been offering content marketing services for more than 7 years and in recent times, they have seen a 62% increase in demand.
• Over 70% of content marketers reported their company’s content marketing efforts resulted in more/much more success.
• When comparing the results from their content marketing efforts in 2020 and 2019, 71% of marketers believe they have seen more or much more success.
• The latest content marketing statistics show that another 21% saw the same level of success and only 8% reported less success or much less success.
• 28% of marketers have reduced their digital advertising budgets to spend more on content creation.
• 28% might not seem like a huge number but considering how important digital advertising has been in the past two decades, we’d argue that this is a pretty seismic shift.
• 78% of chief marketing officers see content marketing as the future of the industry.
• Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing while generating 3 times as many leads, content marketing stats show.
• As lead nurturing stats show, by aligning the content with the prospect’s buyer journey stage, you can also increase the CRO by 72%.
• Helpful brand content makes 70% of consumers claim they feel closer to the brand.
• Two-thirds of consumers feel closer to the brand after reading a helpful piece of branded content and 82% claim branded content helps them form a more favorable opinion.
• After reading educational content, consumers are 131% more likely to make a purchase.
• 70% of consumers prefer to find out about a product from an article rather than an advertisement.
• Just under 80% of companies aim to generate more quality leads through content marketing.
• The majority (79%) of companies are looking to attract more quality leads through content marketing and 75% are looking to attract more traffic.
• For 57%, the main goal is to improve brand reputation, 47% want to improve customer engagement and loyalty.
• Stats on content marketing highlight that for 51% of organizations, updating old content is the most efficient tactic.
• For 75% of organizations search engine optimization is the most efficient content marketing tactic.
• For another 61%, updating and repurposing content is most likely to generate success.
• Publishing more educational content (45%), creating more visual content (41%), and optimizing customer journey (41%) are also cited as the most effective content marketing tactics.
• According to content marketing investment stats, 37% of companies are spending up to $10,000 in their content marketing efforts, 19% put in $10,000-$25,000 and 16% invest $25,000-$100,000.
• This trend is set to increase with 68% of respondents expecting to increase their content marketing budget in 2021.
• Over 35% of content marketers are creating content for three audience segments.
• Just over 10% of marketers are creating content for only one audience segment.
• As stats on content marketing show, 51% of those implementing content strategy rate its performance as good, 11% say it’s excellent, and 30% see it as average.
• In terms of maturity and complexity of content marketing strategy, nearly half of marketers consider it promising and 20% rate it as advanced.
• Another 22% of marketers think their strategy is young and only 6% view it as mature.
• 83% of organizations made quick changes to their content marketing strategy as a response to the pandemic.
• The CMI content marketing research shows that 80% of them believe that their changes were effective.
• 86% think that some of the changes will continue to be effective in the future too.
• 86% of marketers list “brand awareness” among their B2B content marketing goals.
• Successful B2B marketers spend an average of 39% of their budget on content marketing.
• That chunk is already approaching the 50% mark and, with how things are going, could very well reach it in the next couple of years.
• 94% of B2B content marketers changed their strategy as a result of the coronavirus pandemic.
• The latest B2B marketing statistics pinpoint 94% of content marketers who have modified their digital content marketing strategy as a result of the COVID-19 pandemic.
• 70% changed their targeting and messaging strategy, 64% modified their editorial calendars, and 53% tweaked their strategy for content distribution and promotion.
• According to a content marketing study from CMI, 42% have a documented strategy which is an improvement of 33% from last year.
• Nearly 30% of B2C marketers describe their content strategy as mature, 28% as adolescent, and 24% as young.
• 23% have a centralized team that works with multiple departments throughout the company, whereas 20% have both a centralized team and individual teams in place.
• Larger companies with 100+ employees are more likely (56%) to outsource.
• The most common outsourced activity is content creation (75%), followed by content distribution (40%) and measurement (27%).
• Email newsletter comes second at 74%, followed by videos (62%) and infographics or other visuals (55%).
• Content marketing insights from the 2021 CMI report indicate that, after the coronavirus outbreak, in-person events notably decreased from 50% to 37% whereas live streaming content climbed from 13% to 35%.
• Content marketing stats show 59% of B2B marketers consider blogs the most valuable channel.
• Blog posts are the type of content that marketers are producing the most followed by email (66%), case study (47%), infographic (45%), and eBook/white paper (37%).
• As per the latest content marketing statistics, organic search (89%) is the top channel for content distribution, closely followed by social media (87%) and email marketing (72%).
• Companies with blogs produce 67% more leads per month than those without.
• Marketers who blog also get on average 434% indexed pages which can boost the lead and sales conversion rates.
• Websites with blogs attract 97% more inbound links which improves the domain authority, boosting the site’s rank on the SERPs.
• Almost 30% of content marketers that participated in a Hubspot study cited Facebook as the channel they create content for.
• It’s certainly not just for kids and teenagers, either—69% of adults (i.
• The fact that it has an extremely active user base, with 74% of Facebook users visiting daily, makes it a necessary tool for all content marketers, statistics on content marketing show.
• Social media marketing statistics further show that 94% of consumers plan to buy something from a brand they follow on Twitter, whereas almost 70% have already bought something after being inspired by a tweet.
• Content marketers using video achieve a 66% higher average website conversion rate than those who don’t.
• 57% of marketers believe video is the hardest form of content to produce.
• 73% of marketers are creating explainer videos, as per the latest video content marketing stats.
• Social media videos are the second most common type (67%), followed by presentation videos (51%), sales videos (41%), and video advertisements (41%).
• The coronavirus impacted the video marketing plans of 40% of marketers.
• 60% of marketers also expect that their video content marketing budgets will change throughout 2021.
• Approximately 70% of them think their budget will increase with the other 30% saying their budget will likely decrease.
• 91% of marketers believe branded video has become more important than ever.
• According to visual content marketing stats, 93% of them believe video is an important marketing tool, up from 78% in 2015.
• 47% of these started creating video content because the coronavirus pandemic posed new challenges and 44% because creating video has become more affordable.
• 69% of people prefer learning about products/services by watching a short video.
• Nearly 70% of people prefer watching a short video to find out about a product or service compared to 18% who would rather read a text article and 4% who would view an infographic.
• It costs 62% less than traditional marketing methods and produces 3x more leads per $1 spent.
• The latest content marketing statistics show that 91% of B2B and 74% of B2C organizations are using content marketing.
• 84% of B2B businesses have a documented strategy in place compared to 42% of B2C organizations.
• 111 Social Media Marketing Statistics:You Need to Know in 2023: Social Media Marketing Statistics 2023 Social Media – The Broader Picture 1- Since 2012, social media platforms have recorded an annual growth rate of around 12%.
• 3- More than 93% of regular users of the internet use popular social media platform every month.
• 7- Considering a sleep time of 7 to 8 hours daily, the latest figures suggest that people spend approximately 15% of their time on social media networks.
• 14- Users mainly leverage social media to stay in touch with family and friends, with more than 47% of users listing this as a top use of social media.
• 17- Short-form videos have been rated as the most effective type of content for social media by 54% of marketers.
• Advertising On Social Media 18- The advertising revenue for 2023 has been estimated at $833 billion, 5% higher than in 2022.
• 19- Social media ads comprised 35% to $189 Billion in 2021 of the spending on digital advertising.
• 20- 52% of US adult social media users say their decision to interact with ads or sponsored content depends on whether the platform safeguards their data and privacy.
• A survey revealed that targeted ads leveraging user data helped discover 50% products and services of their interest.
• 24- Recent data suggests that the platform experienced a 3% growth in web traffic from one year to another.
• 7% of visitors check their Facebook accounts through a desktop Activity.
• Recent data revealed that 32% of people aged 13 to 17 using the platform compared to 71% in 2015.
• Brands 38- 16% of users on the internet aged 16 to 24 use microblogging to research brands.
• 40- 58% of customers said they visited a brand website through a story ad, while 31% people visited a store to browse.
• 43- 66% of people using Facebook visit pages of local businesses at least once a week.
• 2 billion people, which translates to 20% of the world’s population over age 13.
• 49- 58% of the people using Instagram say they’ve clicked through to a brand website after coming across their stories.
• 50- According to a survey of active Instagram users, 91% reported watching videos on Instagram weekly.
• Demographics 53- Instagram is GenZ’s second-most favorite social networking platform, with 76% of youngsters utilizing the app to follow their interests and passion.
• 54- 51 % of users on Instagram are men, while women make up the rest (49%).
• 61- The majority of users on this platform (90%) are followers of a business.
• 62- According to data, the top 25% of most active brands on Instagram post Stories in a month.
• 63- Stories posted by brands and businesses has risen by 12% in just over a one year period.
• 64- 57% of Instagram users prefer watching quizzes and polls from brands.
• 69- 84% of users log into the platform for professional growth and advancement.
• 71- Out of the users who engage with this social network frequently, 40% access it every day.
• Demographics 73- LinkedIn has more than 194 million American users, more than 78% of LinkedIn users are based outside the US.
• 75- LinkedIn has nearly 60% of users aged between 25 and 34 years, while users older than 55 years make up merely 2.
• 76- Almost 25% of users on LinkedIn are senior-level influencers, so the platform lets you target a substantial fraction of users who have great earning potential.
• In fact, 75% of B2B content marketers prefer the platform over other social media.
• 78- Interestingly, B2B organizations generate 80% of their social media leads through LinkedIn.
• 80- The latest data from Statista reveals that 42% of worldwide LinkedIn users are women, whereas over 57% of the audience comprises male users.
• 84- As per the latest LinkedIn Statistics the current potential reach for LinkedIn paid marketing is 13%.
• 85- Brands have witnessed a 33% improvement in purchase intent as a result of the ad exposure on this platform.
• 95- 80% of parents in the US have said that their children (aged below 11) watch YouTube.
• Brands 96- 70% of YouTube users make a purchase from a brand after watching its videos.
• 98- Ads targeted on the basis of intent rather than demographics earn a 100% higher increase in buying intent.
• 5% of Twitter’s global audience was made up of users between the ages of 25 and 34.
• 103- 52% of Twitter users log into the platform daily, 96% monthly, and 84% weekly.
• 106- Organic social media platforms used by 82% of B2B content marketers in the last 12 months.
• Brands 110- 16% of users on the internet in the age group of 16 to 64 apply microblogs to research brands.
• 10 Social Media Stats That Should Influence Your Marketing Plan | Social Media Today: 1) In 9 months, Instagram grew by 50%, now with more active users than Twitter.
• 2) Snapchat is growing at a rate of 56% a year, at a valuation of $10 billion.
• 6) Organic Facebook reach drops to 2% for most pages, leading to an increase in Facebook’s revenue year on year, as a result of them forcing brands to spend more on Facebook Ads for greater visibility.
• 10) Finally, and to your surprise, Tumblr grew its user base by 120% in the last six months of 2014, compared to growth of just 2% across the road at Silicon Valley for Facebook.
• How to Overcome the Most Common B2B Content Marketing Challenge in 2016? [Stats]: Here are some of the jaw-dropping findings of the two reports:The 2015 report revealed that 35% of B2B marketers had a documented content marketing strategy.
• 38% of the surveyed B2B marketers in 2015 believed that they are implementing effective content marketing strategy versus only 30% in 2016The biggest irony of all is that the least effective B2B content marketers are the ones that plan to create more content in 2016!
• 29 Revealing Statistics About Content Marketing in Europe [SlideShare]: 1 37% of respondents felt that they had good capabilities with support from management.
• 2 20% of respondents said they have advanced content marketing adoption.
• 3 12% of respondents said they have an optimised content strategy.
• 4 Only 11% of our survey respondents said they make little use of content marketing.
• 5 97% of European marketers believe in the power of content marketing.
• 6 71% of businesses are creating more content in 2015 compared to 2014.
• 7 Over 25% of companies are increasing internal headcount for content marketing in 2015.
• 8 28% of companies are increasing investment in agency resources in 2015.
• 9 Over 66% of businesses see significant room for improvement, rating their content marketing as basic or inconsistent.
• 10 55% of respondents found quality to be a challenge with content marketing.
• 11 58% of respondents cite content frequency as a specific concern.
• 12 Measurement of ROI and content effectiveness is a challenge for 51% of businesses.
• 13 79% of marketers find that strategy and planning are most effective for distributing content.
• 14 67% of marketers have success with blog posts and articles.
• 15 45% of marketers rate e-newsletters or online magazines as effective forms of content marketing.
• 16 41% of marketers find infographics to be an effective content format.
• 17 62% of marketers rate Google organic traffic as a successful tactic for content distribution.
• 18 47% of marketers believe Twitter is the best social network for distributing content successfully.
• 19 46% of marketers rated Facebook as a successful channel for organic content distribution.
• 20 43% of marketers found LinkedIn to be a successful channel for organic content distribution.
• 21 Only 15% of marketers found that Google+ is an effective channel for distributing content.
• 25 49% of marketers are not using Google Remarketing.
• 26 Out of the people who are using paid content distribution, Google AdWords is used the most, with 53% having paid for their ads to show up in search results.
• 27 The most commonly used metric to measure content marketing effectiveness was website visits at 74%.
• 28 The second most commonly used metric to measure content marketing effectiveness was social sharing of content at 66%.
• 29 Only 39% of marketers claimed they were able to measure return on investment from their content marketing.
• Not Using Content Marketing? 5 Stats that Show You’re Becoming Irrelevant | OutboundEngine: In fact, 70% of consumers prefer to learn about a brand through content rather than ads.
• A Bain and Company study showed that a 5% increase in customer retention led to a 25-95% increase in profits.
• 5:Getting Your Loyal Client to Refer New Business According to a 2014 study, small businesses report 52% of their traction in the market comes from friend referrals—leaving advertising in the dust by 19 percentage points.
• 65 Game-Changing Email Marketing Statistics for 2023 – SEO Tribunal: Email Marketing Stats & Facts (Editors Choice) 89% of marketers have indicated that email was their best channel for lead generation.
• 73% of marketers say email is their number-one digital channel for a strong ROI.
• 89% of marketers have indicated that email was their best channel for lead generation.
• Per email, 320% more revenue is attributed to successful welcome emails than other promotional emails.
• By including video in an email, you can improve open rates by 19% and increase CTR by up to 50%.
• Statistics on email marketing show that, when communicating on behalf of their business, 86% of professionals prefer using email.
• 73% of marketers say email is their number-one digital channel for a strong ROI.
• For a multichannel marketing strategy, 86% of marketers consider email “important” or “very important.
• When measuring how effective their marketing campaign is, 41% of marketers have indicated that the quality of the audience members they’ve added is the most important.
• (My Emma) The 25% increase pales into insignificance compared to the potential ROI that can be achieved via communicating with your desired market this way.
• If more marketers were aware of the potential benefits, then there is no doubt that this email marketing ROI figure for 2019 would be substantially higher than just 25%.
• 58% of marketers say that a clear indicator of an email campaign’s success is increased sales or new leads.
• The top 3 KPIs measured by email marketers are CTRs (70%), conversion rates (60%), and open rates (56%).
• 54% of email marketing influencers say their top goal is to improve their email marketing engagement rate.
• 80% of professionals say that email marketing drives customer acquisition and retention.
• (Constant Contact) This is one of the greatest email marketing facts for 2019 due to the fact that this number is more than 30% higher than anticipated.
• 51% of marketers say segmenting email lists is one of their most effective personalization tactics.
• When an email offers a discount, only 2% of the business’s customers will open it, but when it has a personalized subject line, 62% of customers open it.
• 50% of marketers claim that individualizing campaign messages is one of their most effective personalization tactics.
• When clothing retailer JustFab personalized their email marketing messaging, their revenue increased by 103%.
• Personalized email messages improve the CTR of a call to action by an average of 14%, and they improve conversions by 10%.
• 74% of marketers say that targeted personalization improves customer engagement.
• Click through rates are 47% higher in B2B email campaigns than they are in B2C email campaigns.
• For 68% of B2B marketers, email has been found to be their most effective digital channel.
• For B2B marketers, specifically, 82% said leads and sales are their most important measure of success.
• 78% of consumers have unsubscribed from emails because a brand was sending too many emails.
• 69% of email recipients will report an email as spam based on its subject line.
• For checking email, 40% of consumers say they primarily use their mobile phone.
• In 2017, 29% of customers changed their personal email address or created a new one.
• 93% of US customers check their email at least once daily, and most access it multiple times a day.
• 38% of consumers would like their subscription emails to be sent even more frequently.
• Email usage statistics:72% of customers prefer email as their source of business communication.
• When it comes to receiving permission-based promotional messages, 77% of consumers prefer email over social media.
• If they’re looking for a deal from a company they know, 44% of customers will check their email, whereas only 4% will check Facebook.
• 66% of customers say they’ve purchased something because of a marketing message they received by email.
• When there is a reference to their birthday in the subject, 7% of consumers are likely to engage in marketing communications.
• 8% of consumers have indicated they’d engage with a retailer more if the company’s marketing materials addressed them by name.
• Almost 50% of consumers confirm they are likely to engage more with retailers that send offers which will be relevant and interesting to them.
• 50% of millennials marked a brand’s email as spam when they couldn’t easily figure out how to unsubscribe from it.
• 66% of millennials unsubscribed from a brand’s promotional emails because there were either too many or they found the emails irrelevant.
• Only 25% of millennials claim they won’t mark a brand’s emails as “not spam.
• 22 B2B Content Marketing Statistics to Reach the Next Level: This fact is indicated in a study conducted by Ring Lead, in which 85% of respondents stated that generating new business opportunities is their primary goal in strategy.
• In the B2B Content Marketing study, conducted in 2017, 72% of the professionals interviewed stated that the production of quality materials was the main factor in their success over the last few years.
• This idea is reinforced by B2B Content Marketing 2020, which indicated that 69% of the companies considered most successful in the B2B scenario had a documented strategy.
• According to a study by the Content Marketing Institute, 79% of B2B professionals believe that email is the most efficient channel for generating demand for the solutions offered.
• These pages, which offer some valuable content in exchange for visitors providing data, are used by 68% of B2B businesses to acquire leads, as indicated by Marketo.
• Among the worst performers, only 26% adopt specific content for each stage of the journey.
• According to HubSpot, 51% of B2B marketers focus on visual elements to optimize the consumer experience.
• According to Forbes, 84% of companies that use this resource consider it very useful.
• Approximately 62% of businesses that already work with a content marketing strategy have a partner for the production and dissemination of the materials.
• In this study, conducted by Ion in partnership with Demand Metric, 96% of marketing professionals believe that an interactive marketing strategy has the power to influence the buyer’s decision-making process.
• In Ion’s study with Demand Metrics, 63% of the professionals interviewed stated that interactivity is at least somewhat effective in stimulating users to share the material.
• 90% of the respondents said they believe in the effectiveness of interactive content to achieve this kind of goal.
• 88% of marketers will increase the production of interactive content this year.
• According to Go Gulf, this kind of strategy has attracted so much attention from marketers that 88% of them promise to insert interactivity in 10-30% of their content produced in the year 2020.
• According to the Demand Metric survey with Ion, 68% of the participants interviewed stated that they have been observing revenue growth in their companies.
• 6% of marketers who work with interactive marketing consider that assessments are the formats that present the best results, followed closely by interactive white papers, mentioned by 22% of participants.
• Another 40% point to the middle stage as the most important phase for content use, while 14% consider it to be the late stage.
• A study by Animoto, for example, revealed that 75% of millennials consume videos on social networks every day.
• In addition, this content format is perceived as reliable by 40% of users who fit this age group.
• It is not surprising to note in a study conducted by Invisia, that the consumption of video content shows an annual growth of approximately 100%.
• Attentive to the market, 89% of marketers already make use of video in their content strategies.
• Consider these content marketing metrics:according to a recent SEMrush survey of content marketers in 40 countries, “73% of companies that spend from 10% to 70% of their total marketing budget on content marketing were very successful.
• Given that more than 90% of consumers choose an article from the first page of search results, high-quality content is essential to meet your content marketing goals.
• According to a study by Statista, “45% of global internet users aged 25-34 listen to podcasts”.
• The study also found that 40% of Americans listened to podcasts and that 15% of them listened to a podcast weekly.
• Nearly half of the listeners enjoy their podcasts at home, with another 22% listening in their cars.
• The use of interactive content is growing The vast majority of content marketing professionals (93%) see interactive content as effective, according to a study by Go Gulf.
• In addition, 88% of marketers will make 10-30% of their content interactive this year.
• Today, 59% of companies reported having between one and five employees whose jobs are dedicated solely to content marketing, according to the “B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report.
• ” Only 32% of B2B marketers said they didn’t have even one dedicated content marketing employee.
• According to the B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report, “more than half (58%) of B2B content marketers said virtual events/webinars/online courses produced the best results for their content marketing in the last 12 months.
• According to a study by Vfairs, “92% of companies are continuing to host virtual events even after physical events have resumed.
• ” Nearly half of the companies surveyed (48%) planned to host more virtual events in 2022 than they did in 2021.
• For example, a 2022 report by SEMrush found that titles with seven or fewer words “average 36% more organic traffic than those with 14 or more words”.
• In addition, the same report found that “posts with more than seven images get 116% more organic traffic than articles containing just text”.
• 37 Must-Know Digital Marketing Stats and Trends for 2023: Push notifications are on the rise, with 85% of online stores using them last year.
• 80% of consumers say they are more likely to do business with a company if it offers personalized experiences.
• There’s been a 93% increase in blog promotion to drive traffic to their site including paid ads.
• 63% of customers are more likely to return to a website that has live chat.
• 36% of affiliate marketers earn around $20,000 a year while only 3% are earning over $150,000 a year.
• Food bloggers make 42% of their income from ads and 10% from affiliate marketing.
• Only 10% of the best email marketers can achieve a newsletter sign-up rate that matches the performance of web push.
• Omnichannel marketing generates 90% higher customer retention and engagement rates than single-channel marketing.
• 70% of enterprises will be experimenting with immersive technologies, and 25% will have deployed to production by 2022Total pageviews on mobile are increasing year-over-year by almost 50% worldwide.
• 90% of shoppers reported that UGC such as reviews influenced their decision to purchase more than any other form of advertising.
• 78% of organizations either already have or are developing a customer data platform to help manage, analyze and leverage their data.
• 41% of company owners say that Big Data and Deep Learning expertise is their most desired skill to hire.
• 30% of businesses will incorporate artificial intelligence (AI) in their sales processes by the end of 2022.
• In 2021, at least 30% of all Internet searches were conducted without a screen.
• 77% of B2B marketers say building a strong brand is key to their company’s growth.
• 75% of people recognize a brand by its logo, 60% by its visual style, 45% by the brand’s signature color, and 25% by its unique voice.
• 93% of people say the first purchase usually decides if they will continue their relationship with a brand.
• 53% of businesses use ready-made templates for building a website or a landing page.
• 92% of all traffic on search engines is through Google, dwarfing its “closest” rivals, Yahoo and Bing.
• Mobile Phones Account For 46% of All Email Opens Mobile devices may surpass desktops for emailing soon.
• Additionally, 35% of business professionals check their email on a mobile device and 73% of millennials prefer communications from businesses to come via email.
• The iPhone is the most popular mobile device to read emails on—estimating 29% of all opens.
• Gmail is the second most popular platform to check email, sitting at 27%.
• Out of the ages 18 and younger, 40% will open an email first on mobile.
• However, between the ages of 19-34—28% of readers will open it on a phone first.
• With marketers, 35% send their customers three to five emails per week.
• 78% of marketers have seen an increase in email engagement in the past year and those who use segmented campaigns note as much as a 760% increase in revenue.
• While 80% of business professionals believe that email marketing increases customer retention as well.
• 81% of B2B marketers say that their most used form of content marketing is newsletters.
• According to Email Tool Tester, 16% of all emails never make it into the inbox.
• “47% of all people across demographics use a mobile application for checking their email.
• 9% still prefer desktop,” according to Campaign Monitor, “When it comes to mobile devices, a whopping 81% prefer to open emails on their smartphones while 21% open emails on their tablets.
• 9 Quality Content Marketing Statistics for 2022: So take a look:Now, in this case BigCommerce is actually saying 2% is more of a solid baseline to aim for.
• So 1-2% is a pretty reasonable benchmark for current, overall conversion rates, with 2% being a reasonable goal.
• Item 2:Overall conversion rates have increased over 32% since last year.
• Here’s a case in point of how differentiated conversion rates are by industry:Item 3:Arts and crafts store have an overall conversion rate of 4%, compared to the 1-2% for most other stores.
• The Manifest reports that in 2016, the number was just 36% of enterprises, so I’d imagine we’re into the territory of a “solid” majority by now.
• So with that in mind, let’s take a look at the number:Yep…an overwhelming 91% of B2B respondents said they used content marketing.
• I got this from Hubspot’s “State of Inbound 2018” report—it’s highly detailed and has tons of useful info about what businesses are doing and thinking:As you can see, improving search engine optimization (SEO) was the most popular marketing priority, while blog content came second at 55%.
• A note on how these numbers work out:it means blog content creation was A top priority for 55% of companies, not THE top priority.
• Check it out:YouTube took the top spot, with 45% of respondent businesses saying they planned on adding more YouTube content to their marketing in the next year.
• Here are the numbers:It’s not all hopeless:about 31% said they did generate sales, measurably.
• But again…nearly half, 49%, said they’ve been distributing their content through social media, but don’t have tangible results.
• Doing the math, at least 97% of businesses here said it’s at least somewhat effective.
• But the percentage of businesses who said content marketing is at least “very” effective is still super high, at 66%.
• 10 Live Streaming Stats | Digital Marketing Agency CT | Video SEO: On social media, video receives 1,200% more shares than both text and photo posts combined.
• 20 Content Marketing Statistics Every Business Owner Needs to Know in 2022: 2) Content marketing costs 64% less than traditional marketing avenues.
• 3) 95% of customers view a B2B business’ content as a marker of their trustworthiness.
• 7) 70% of consumers prefer to get information from blogs instead of traditional advertisements.
• 9) 57% of marketers say they have converted new customers because of their blog.
• 10) 55% of marketers say blogging is their top inbound marketing priority.
• 11) Only 43% of B2B agencies have a documented content marketing strategy in place.
• 12) 82% of digital marketers have already invested in content marketing.
• (Ahrefs)What This Means for Your Business:If you’re part of the 18% who haven’t, there’s no better time to get started than right now.
• 15) 68% of digital marketers believe content marketing generates demand and leads.
• 17) Listicles receive 80% more page views than other forms of blogging content.
• Mobile Content Marketing Stats, Strategy and Publishing: Market AnalysisIt is estimated that by 2016, nearly 80% of the US population will be connected with mobile phones while half of the population is estimated to have tablet accessibility at their fingertips.
• 86Mobile Marketing by TextOf those ages 18 to 29, 97% are text messaging.
• Digital Marketing Statistics to Keep an Eye On: 9% of organic searches on GoogleOver half of online purchases are made from a mobile device SEO Trends Did you know that 93% of all online interactions begin with someone searching for a product or service online?
• 8%)The number one search Google search result for a keyword gets an average click-through-rate (CTR) of 31.
• Social Media Marketing Statistics to Know for 2022: About 78% of its active users consider Instagram posts as the most effective content formats in the case of influencer marketing.
• Furthermore, in a poll of more than 1,000 marketers from all around the globe, in the year 2022, 44% of the marketers are planning to leverage YouTube for the first time.
• Below are some of the YouTube statistics over the period:As per 2019 stats, about 85% of US teens were active on this platform.
• Around 54% of people consider this platform an excellent place to begin and want marketers to put more video content.
• As per the 2020 stats, Reddit has an active user of about 52 million, forming 44% YoY.
• US’s Reddit users are male, but only 15% of the US adults are active users.
• Below are some of the few hashtag statistics over the period:Using hashtags on Twitter can increase engagement by 50% for brands and 100% for individuals.
• The sweet spot of the hashtag usage for a tweet ranges between 1 to 2, and this strategy increases engagement by 21%.
• In the case of Instagram, posts having at least one hashtag have an interaction rate of about 29%, but a post has more than 11 hashtags has the highest interaction rate with 79.
• Below are some of the few smartphone statistics over the period:About 62% of smartphone users make their purchases through their devices.
• About 47% of smartphone users from the US say they can’t live without their phones.
• About 78% of its active users consider Instagram posts as the most effective content formats in the case of influencer marketing.
• Furthermore, in a poll of more than 1,000 marketers from all around the globe, in the year 2022, 44% of the marketers are planning to leverage YouTube for the first time.
• Below are some of the YouTube statistics over the period:As per 2019 stats, about 85% of US teens were active on this platform.
• Around 54% of people consider this platform an excellent place to begin and want marketers to put more video content.
• As per the 2020 stats, Reddit has an active user of about 52 million, forming 44% YoY.
• US’s Reddit users are male, but only 15% of the US adults are active users.
• Below are some of the few hashtag statistics over the period:Using hashtags on Twitter can increase engagement by 50% for brands and 100% for individuals.
• The sweet spot of the hashtag usage for a tweet ranges between 1 to 2, and this strategy increases engagement by 21%.
• In the case of Instagram, posts having at least one hashtag have an interaction rate of about 29%, but a post has more than 11 hashtags has the highest interaction rate with 79.
• Below are some of the few smartphone statistics over the period:About 62% of smartphone users make their purchases through their devices.
• About 47% of smartphone users from the US say they can’t live without their phones.
• 100+ Important Digital Marketing Statistics this 2023 (with Infographic) | Optimind: However, one study confirms that only 38% of firms have digital transformation as a permanent fixture on their CEO’s agenda.
• Some CEOs embrace digital transformation, and yet only 36% of them share their vision with their employees.
• Mobile installs and sessions grew by 31% and 54%, respectively, from 2019 to 2020 and continues to grow in 2021Fintech and hyper-casual gaming grew exponentially during 2021 lockdownsRetention rates were consistent, with a 30-day average of 5.
• 68%E-commerce installs and sessions grew by 51% in 2020 and 17% by 2021The average session length grew from 23.
• 10 Stats That Prove the Importance of Content Marketing: 96% of marketing decision-makers say content marketing has been effective for their brand.
• 2:51% of marketers use organic traffic to measure content marketing success, the top metric used.
• By doing content marketing you can not just get organic traffic, but attract the right audience—those who are genuinely interested in what you have to offer and that’s why 51% of marketers use organic traffic for their content marketing goals.
• 3:88% of marketers have successfully reached their goals of creating brand awareness and building credibility and trust through content marketing.
• The fact that a whopping 88% of marketers have achieved these objectives through content marketing is a testament to its effectiveness.
• source:allblogthingsYes, it is like 70% of marketers are investing in content marketing regularly and numbers don’t lie, and the majority of marketers recognize the immense value of content marketing.
• 6:56% of marketers believe that personalized content promotes higher engagement rates.
• source:allblogthingsPersonalization is the secret sauce that takes your content marketing to the next level and that’s tested by 56% of marketers worldwide.
• 8:Content marketing costs 62% less than outbound marketing & generates 3x as many leads.
• 10:87% of shoppers rate product content extremely or very important when deciding to buy.
• 16 Mobile Marketing Statistics to Help Improve Your Digital Marketing: 60% of consumers across the globe use their mobile devices as their primary source of internet access.
• 70% of consumers delete emails almost immediately that don’t render well on mobile devices Make sure the messages you send aren’t deleted because they weren’t optimized for mobile users.
• 69% of consumers are more likely to buy from companies whose mobile site helps them find answers to their questions Consumers desire convenience more than anything else when shopping online with their mobile devices.
• 70% of users report disliking mobile ads As ad spend is increasing, user dissatisfaction is growing.
• Google drives 96% of mobile search traffic When it comes to mobile search vs.
• 48% of millennials view video solely on their mobile device If your audience is on the younger side, you should incorporate videos into your mobile marketing strategy.
• 68% of businesses have begun integrating mobile marketing into their marketing strategy There’s a reason all your competitors are jumping into mobile marketing.
• 48% of consumers turn to search engines for mobile searches Though nearly half of consumers turn to a mobile search, 33% go directly to the site they have in mind.
• 61% of users are unlikely to return to a website they had trouble accessing with mobile devices … and 40% go to a competitor’s website instead.
• 64% of Pinterest’s referred traffic comes from tablets or smartphones Facebook, Twitter, and Instagram often get all the love whenever anyone talks about social media marketing.
• Users spend 80% of their social media time on mobile devices Whether the platform is Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, Pinterest, or LinkedIn, social media has become a large part of owning a mobile device.
• Over 50% of smartphone users immediately reach for their smartphone the moment they wake up Most of us do this, but it can be an excellent opportunity for digital marketers.
• 57% of mobile users say they won’t recommend a business with a poorly designed mobile site First impressions are everything.
• 50% of mobile search is aimed at local businesses Local businesses have traditionally been the slowest when it comes to adopting new online trends.
• Most Important Social Media Marketing Statistics For 2023 –: Since 2012, the popularity of social media has increased at a CAGR of 12%.
• As much as 75% of the global population aged 13 and above are active social media users.
• In 2022, advertisers will shell out over $134 billion on social media, a 17% yearly rise from the previous year.
• We’re Very Sociable Approximately 31% of Facebook users regularly check the platform for regional news.
• We’re Very Sociable More than half (56%) of its advertising target demographic is males.
• According to data compiled by Hootsuite in October 2021, 61% of Facebook’s active users were under 35.
• (Omnicore) Almost 20% of all adults in the United States have purchased on Facebook.
• Statista states photos dominate the stream, while videos account for about 20% and carousel posts total just over 17%.
• (Instagram) Seeing an ad for a brand on Instagram piques the curiosity of 50% of the platform’s users.
• For this reason, approximately 90% of marketers consider Instagram the most crucial medium for influencer promotion.
• According to 70% of respondents, influencer marketing material primarily consists of Instagram Posts and Instagram Stories.
• (MediaKix) Instagram is used by over 80% of the population to learn more about a company, service, or product.
• (Statista) Almost half of Twitter users (47%) give higher ratings to firms that show interest in cultural issues.
• According to Statusbrew, about 40% of Twitter users are college graduates.
• Tribunal for the Host Country In 2021, 40% of all marketers said they found Twitter to be the most useful for achieving their company’s objectives.
• According to Hootsuite, 38% of businesses intend to increase their investment in Twitter in 2022, while 36% intend to keep it at the same level.
• 7% of LinkedIn members in the United States visited its app more than two to three times per month.
• (LinkedIn) LinkedIn sites with comprehensive info get 30% more weekly visits.
• (LinkedIn) Almost half of all marketers use the platform to share videos, with the clear majority (75%) seeing positive results.
• Targeting ads based on user intent (rather than demographics) results in a 100% increase in intent to purchase.
• The use of Pinterest among millennials has grown by 40% year over year.
• Within the United States, 45% of Pinterest users have annual incomes over $100,000.
• Given the emphasis on visual content on both platforms, it’s no surprise that 86% of Pinterest users are also active on Instagram.
• Most (97%) of popular Pinterest queries are generic (meaning users haven’t decided yet).
• 4% of all social media traffic in the United States originates from Pinterest.
• Just 26% of US residents who use Pinterest do so daily, while 68% do so every week, and 91% do so monthly.
• About 12% of the 16-64 demographic utilize online pinboards specifically for this purpose.
• (much more than Twitter or TikTok) Approximately 75% of the millennial and Gen Z populations use Snapchat.
• In a survey of individuals in the United States, 36% said they had a positive impression of the TikTik app.
• TikTok videos filmed in the vertical orientation receive 25% more views each upload.
• According to the data, 90 and 97% of all marketers consider social media an integral element of their overall strategy.
• Social Media Marketing Statistics Shape Successful Campaigns: Instagram Average engagement rate per post:typically between 1% and 3%, sometimes higher for smaller accounts or particular niches.
• TikTok A high-performing TikTok video could enjoy an engagement rate of 15% to 20%, though this can vastly vary.
• YouTube Engagement rates can be trickier to pinpoint due to the variety of content, but high-performing channels might see average view durations of 50-60%.
• While exact numbers can fluctuate, historically, LinkedIn has held a strong position in B2B marketing, with approximately 80% of B2B leads coming from the platform as per various reports until 2021.
• Historically, this method has seen a delightful conversion rate ranging from 1% to 5%, a little dependent on the industry and strategy used.
• Now, when it comes to social media marketing, the conversion rates have tended to be a bit varied, roughly averaging between 1% and 2%, with the platform (like Facebook or Instagram) and content style playing a big role.
• Digital Marketing Statistics You Should Track in 2022 – Prospero Blog: Segmented campaigns can increase revenue by up to 760% In contrast to other marketing channels, emails feel more like a one-on-one conversation between businesses and their audiences.
• A/B testing can increase ROI by up to 37% Getting your emails right on the first try is not that easy.
• 64% of marketers plan to invest more in short-form videos in 2022 Compared to other content types, like images, infographics, or plain text, videos seem to be favored by consumers and marketers.
•   In fact, Tweets with videos generate ten times more engagement, while video ads decrease the cost-per-engagement by 50%.
• 71% of consumers who have had a good social media service experience with a brand are likely to recommend it to others The advantage of social media is that it provides a two-way conversation between businesses and their audiences.
• 90% of marketers consider influencer marketing to be effective In fact, every $1 spent on influencer marketing will bring up to $18 in return.
• 4% of all web traffic    Given that mobile phones have become the device of choice for most users around the globe, Google aims to improve its search experience by putting small screens at the top of its lists.
• 41% of adults use voice search daily What’s more, 93% of consumers report they are satisfied with their voice assistant, so voice search will likely increase in popularity in the future.
• 28% of local mobile searches result in purchase within 24 hours If you’re running a brick-and-mortar business, getting on top of the local search results can be a game-changer for you, especially considering that 46% of all Google searches have local intent.
• Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing And here’s the kicker:It can generate around three times as many leads.
• 70% of consumers want to learn about products through content rather than traditional advertisements  Again, this is a matter of trust.
• 80% of your content should focus on providing value to your readers, whereas the rest can be promotional.
• 68% of B2B marketers used case studies  Besides blogging, publishing case studies is another effective way to earn your audience’s trust and increase conversions.
• Top Digital Marketing Stats To Know In 2022 – Best Digital Transformation Company in India | IMA Appweb: An AI chatbot has already been used by 60% of internet users to resolve issues across numerous apps and websites.
• Voice Search Optimization According to the study, voice search is commonly used by 55% of teenagers.
• For the second time, Google claims that its voice search has an accuracy rate of 95%.
• Most notably, it is predicted that voice search results would make up 50% of all online sales by 2022.
• 63% of individuals prefer messaging with chatbots when interacting with brands or enterprises.
• Instapage’s analysis indicates that Consumer annoyance with brands blaring generic advertising messages repeatedly is at 63%.
• 80% of customers claim that if a firm offers them tailored experiences, they are more likely to do business with it.
• The majority (59%) admit to having a standalone budget for content marketing, and 75% of them now intend to dedicate a budget to influencer marketing in 2021 Influencer marketing is considered an effective marketing strategy by 90% of study respondents.
• Geofenced mobile advertising has a doubled click-through rate (click-through-rate) 92% of smartphones can support geofencing.
• 53% of shoppers visited a retailer after receiving a location-based message.
• By 2023, the global geofencing market is projected to increase by over USD 2,387 million, or 27% of CARG.
• 12 Content Marketing Statistics (Based on Recent Studies) to Show Your Boss – Alphametic: 2) Almost 50% of internet users look for videos related to a product or service before visiting a store.
• Why waste the trip to the store if you’re not 100% sure of what it’s going to be?
• 4) 74% of companies indicate content marketing is increasing their marketing teams’ lead quality and quantity (Curata, 2014) I think we can all agree that one good lead is better than 10 bad leads.
• 6) Businesses that Blog Experience 126% Higher Lead Growth Than Non-Blogging Businesses (Hubspot, Updated 2018) No, blogging isn’t dead!
• 9) 45% of people watch more than an hour of Facebook or YouTube videos a week.
• 10) 68% of consumers feel more positive about a brand after consuming content from it.
• 110+ Interesting Digital Marketing Statistics to Know in 2023: (Source:PR Newswire) In the past year, 63% of businesses have raised their marketing budgets.
• (Source:CNBC) Generally, new local businesses allocate around 5-10% of their revenue to marketing.
• (Source:LocaliQ) Surprisingly, a staggering 45% of organizations currently operate without a clearly defined marketing strategy.
• (Source:The Business Research Company) A staggering 68% of online experiences originate from search engines, whether paid or organic.
• (Source:Backlinko) Sadly, 95% of keywords get 10 or fewer monthly searches.
• (Source:Ahrefs) More than 48% of people use voice assistants for general web searches.
• (Source:Demand Metric) Best of all, 82% of marketers actively use content marketing.
• (Source:HubSpot) A whopping 51% of businesses invest in content marketing.
• (Source:The Manifest) Over 48% of businesses use content marketing strategies by leveraging blogging.
• (Source:HubSpot) In the early buying journey, the most valuable content formats are case studies (79%), infographics (76%), webinars (66%), podcasts (64%), video (49%), and interactive content (36%).
• (Source:Rack CDN) 56% of marketers who leverage blogging find it effective, while 10% also say it generates the best ROI.
• (Source:HubSpot) Sadly, dedicated content marketing teams aren’t present in 35% of businesses.
• (Source:Startup Bonsai) 42% of businesses ensure that updating existing content boosts content marketing value.
• (Source:Semrush) Approximately 54% of companies are actively measuring the ROI of their content marketing efforts.
• (Source:Statista) According to a survey, 80% of marketers have shown satisfaction with their content marketing strategy.
• In reality, 73% of marketers find it successful, and 52% find it unsuccessful.
• (Source:Milkwhale) Blogging brings 55% more visitors to the business website.
• (Source:HubSpot) Twitter Spaces have gained popularity among marketers, with a notable 20% actively investing in this platform.
• (Source:HubSpot) 96% of B2B (Business-to-Business) content marketers utilize LinkedIn for organic social media marketing.
• 9% of US marketers working in large companies with over 100 employees are using social media for their business.
• (Source:Statista) Overall, 75% of people use social media for product research.
• (Source:OptinMonster) Impressively, 95% of marketers find email marketing efforts effective in meeting their business goals.
• (Source:HubSpot) A remarkable 62% of customers open emails due to a personalized subject line.
• (Source:Sales Manago) Segmentation of email marketing campaigns can yield a 760% revenue increase.
• (Source:Backlinko) In fact, 90% of marketers utilize emails to distribute their content.
• (Source:Statista) Generally, the highest email open rate is on Mondays (22%), and the highest click-through rates are on Tuesdays (2.
• (Source:WebFX) Undoubtedly, 80% of companies use Google Ads for PPC, the biggest provider of search advertising in the market.
• (Source:WebFX) A whopping 75% of people admit that paid ads are like superheroes to help them find what they need.
• (Source:WebFX) Surprisingly, an 80% increase in brand awareness can be attributed to digital ads.
• (Source:WordStream) Displaying ads has a captivating effect on consumers, increasing their likelihood of searching for brand-specific terms by 155%.
• 61% of mobile users contact a local business with a mobile-optimized website.
• (Source:BrightLocal) Mobile devices dominate the realm of paid search, accounting for 70% of all impressions.
• (Source:Truelist) Besides, 50% of people use mobile phones to check their emails.
• About 25% of companies invest in mobile optimization as a vital SEO tactic.
• (Source:HubSpot) 64% of SEO marketers believe mobile optimization is an effective investment.
• (Source:HubSpot) Beyond question, 80% of the top-ranking websites are mobile-friendly.
• (Source:Review42) 70% of searches from mobile phones have led to online actions.
• (Source:Review42) Failure to optimize your website for mobile devices results in a 61% loss of users.
• Unquestionably, 91% of marketers say that lead generation is their most crucial goal.
• (Source:Ruler Analytics) Moreover, about 53% of marketers spend around half of their budget on lead generation.
• (Source:Ruler Analytics) 84% of marketers use form submissions for lead generation.
• While 50% and 33% of marketers use phone calls and live chat as conversion tools, respectively.
• (Source:Ruler Analytics) 14% say referral channels like G2 and Capterra are ideal for lead generation.
• (Source:Ruler Analytics) Unfortunately, more than 79% of generated leads don’t convert into sales.
• (Source:Writers Block Live) Delightfully, 95% of marketers believe they know the channels that generate the most leads for their business.
• A notable 86% of marketing professionals employ video as a marketing tool.
• (Source:Oberlo) Using video marketing, marketers can achieve 49% faster revenue growth compared to those who don’t.
• (Source:WordStream) Further, a significant 86% of consumers want to witness video content from brands they hold dear.
• (Source:WordStream) For 59% of marketers, video is the most preferred media format.
• And as expected, YouTube stands out as the best choice for video marketing for 90% of marketers.
• (Source:HubSpot) In fact, 35% of marketers plan to use video marketing for the first time in 2023.
• (Source:HubSpot) Amazingly, adding a video can improve click-through rates in an email by 300%.
• (Source:Backlinko) 78% of B2B marketers say they will invest in video marketing in 2023.
• Here, 68% will invest in owned-media assets, while 69% also said to invest in areas like events (digital), in-person, and hybrid marketing.
• (Source:Statista) Using videos on landing pages has the potential to amplify conversions by an impressive 86%.
• (Source:WordStream) Product videos make people 144% more likely to purchase.
• A notable 31% of publishers regard affiliate marketing as one of their top 3 revenue sources.
• Also, 9% of publishers rely on affiliate marketing as their primary revenue source.
• (Source:Insider Intelligence) With a commendable market share of 43%, the Amazon Associate Program emerges as the dominant affiliate marketing platform.
• (Source:Kinsta) A staggering 99% of affiliate programs predominantly offer a CPA (Cost Per Action) model.
• 55% of respondents earned less than $10,000 from their affiliate marketing efforts.
• Also, one out of six affiliates achieved earnings up to $50,000, while nearly 4% attained revenues surpassing $150,000.
• A significant 49% of social media users rely on influencers for trustworthy product recommendations.
• (Source:Link Hawk) Surprisingly, 59% of brands and marketing agencies use influencers as affiliates.
• (Source:Influencer Marketing) An overwhelming 96% of B2B marketers find their influencer engagement programs to be successful.
• (Source:Neal Schaffer) 28% of affiliate marketers say that bloggers are the most preferred choice for influencers.
• Following that are review sites (19%), coupon sites (15%), newsletters (7%), etc.
• (Source:Mediafly) A majority of eCommerce companies, totaling over 74%, have a website personalization program.
• (Source:Yieldify) A noteworthy 63% of shopping is initiated online, regardless of whether the purchase happens in-store.
• (Source:Intergrowth) 53% of shoppers research before they make the best possible choice.
• (Source:Google) Globally, 56% of individuals harmoniously shop from both online and local offline experiences.
• 9% of respondents revealed they made a purchase 1-25% of the time after seeing a social media or online ad.
• Astonishingly, 43% of marketers found them to be catalysts for business growth.
• (Source:HubSpot) In a global survey among marketing decision-makers in 2023, a staggering 63% said they use automation in email marketing.
• Also, 50% and 40% of them use automation in social media marketing and paid advertising, respectively.
• (Source:HubSpot) Most of all, 76% of brands started using marketing automation just this past year.
• As per the survey in 10 countries, 38% of respondents find decision-making with customer insights to be a leading challenge in digital marketing.
• (Source:Statista) According to marketers, budget constraints are 47% of the most challenging hurdles for developing compelling content.
• (Source:Marketing Charts) More than 34% of a survey’s respondents highlight prospecting and lead qualification as the most daunting tasks for a salesperson.
• (Source:Hubspot) A considerable portion (43% of marketers) face difficulties determining if their content actually influences their audience.
• (Source:Marketing Charts) Sadly, 70% of brands fail to use personalized emails, although they generate six times higher transaction rates.
• 6% of internet users will access the web using their smartphones by 2025.
• (Source:Finances Online) Best of all, 38% of marketers anticipate spending 25% and 50% of their budget on Augmented Reality and Virtual Reality, respectively.
• 100+ Must-Know Digital Marketing Statistics for 2023: In 94% of searches, users pay more attention to organic results than paid ones 3.
• Websites at the top of Google search results get a 39% click rate on mobile and 34.
• Various studies have found that approximately 25% of search engine users go as far as the second page of results 7.
• When using inbound marketing, 61% of marketers say it’s important to boost the brand’s organic presence and SEO 8.
• Mobile devices currently account for 55% of all website traffic worldwide 9.
• The top organic search results typically have a 27% average click-through rate (CTR) 10.
• SEO brings in over 1,000% more traffic than social media Conversion Rate Optimization (CRO) Conversions are a top priority in digital marketing.
• 45% (Source:Meetanshi) Average Conversion Rate by Device:Device Conversion Rate Mobile 2% Tablet 3% Desktop 3% Average Conversion Rate by Marketing Channel:Channel Conversion Rate Thought Leadership SEO 2.
• 9% (Source:First Page Sage) The #1 result on Google SERPs has a click-through rate of 27.
• (SEOClarity) Only 17% of marketers A/B test landing pages to improve conversion rates.
• (Zero Limit Web) 33% of eCommerce visits are generated through organic search.
• (Statista) 49% of marketers say organic search has the best ROI for any marketing channel.
• (Statista) 30% of pages that appear on the first page of desktop search results do not appear on the top 10 results of mobile search.
• 6% of internet users will access the web solely via smartphones by 2025.
• (SparkToro) 65% of consumers begin their journey via mobile search and browsing.
• Here’s a breakdown:Voice search is the 2nd most popular channel for mobile search, with 20% of searches made every day.
• (Google) 58% of consumers use voice search to find local business information.
• (OptinMonster) Overseas retailers account for 57% of all online purchases.
• (Logistyx) 65% of online shoppers prefer to buy products with content written in their native tongue.
• 4% in 2024, making it a significant opportunity for businesses of all sizes.
• 6%, with total sales reaching more than $8 trillion for the first time ever.
• Content marketing is a widely adopted strategy, with 91% of B2B and 86% of B2C companies utilizing it.
• Nearly all marketers, 97% to be exact, recognize the value of content marketing and are actively investing in it.
• Around 46% of businesses plan to expand their content creation budget by this year.
• Content creation costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates 3x more leads.
• (Hook Agency) Content creation costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates 3x more leads.
• (Web Tribunal) 65% of content marketers say blogs are their most-used format.
• (Statista) Content Strategy 64% of the most successful B2B marketers have a documented content marketing strategy.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 81% of marketers view content as a core business strategy.
• (HubSpot) 51% of businesses investing in content marketing publish content daily.
• (The Manifest) Over 60% of marketers measure the success of their content marketing strategy through sales.
• (HubSpot) 55% of content marketing plans put emphasis on creating better content.
• Audio Content 81% of listeners have taken action after hearing audio ads during a podcast.
• (Demand Sage) 16% of marketers have invested in audio chat rooms such as Clubhouse and Twitter Spaces.
• (Infinite Dial) The most important considerations for hiring a voice actor for audio content are:Video Content 80% of people prefer video over written text.
• Here’s a breakdown of their preferences:85% of marketers say video is an effective way to get attention online.
• (Animoto) Over 90% of people discover new brands or products on YouTube.
• (Google) 49% of marketers say video has helped them reduce support calls.
• (Wyzowl) 64% of marketers find videos to be the most difficult content to create.
• (LinkedIn) 30% of a brand’s engagement on LinkedIn comes from its employees.
• (LinkedIn) 40% of B2B marketers say LinkedIn is the most effective channel for driving high-quality leads.
• (Pew Research) 53% of Twitter’s audience is more likely to be the first to purchase new products.
• (Washington Post) People are 53% more likely to buy from a business using Facebook live chat.
• (Statista) 58% of users get more interested in a brand after seeing it on an Instagram Story.
• (Social Insider) 63% of successful TikTok ads communicate their message right away.
• (Invideo) 50% of TikTok users have bought something after watching a TikTok live.
• (Snapchat) 55% of Gen Z have ad recall after watching 0 to 2 seconds of an ad.
• (Techjury) 32% of companies use PPC to sell products directly to consumers.
• 69% by 2027, and 75% of advertisers plan to boost their ad budget next year.
• Affiliate Marketing 15%–30% of all advertising sales are generated by affiliate programs.
• (Influencer Marketing Hub) 31% of publishers say that affiliate marketing is one of their top three sources of revenue.
• (eMarketer) Affiliate marketing is the most important customer acquisition channel for 20% of brand marketers.
• Influencer Marketing 72% of marketers say influencer marketing provides higher quality customers.
• (Influencer Marketing Hub) 61% of consumers trust recommendations from influencers.
• 97% of marketers consider Instagram to be the most important influencer marketing channel.
• (Shopify) 63% of people intend to use AI in running their influencer campaigns.
• (Grand View Research) Marketers who use 5 or more analytics tools are 39% more likely to see an improvement in overall marketing performance.
• 5 Shocking Statistics that Prove Your Company Needs Digital Marketing: Only 6% of Internet Users Go Beyond Page 1 of Google Search Results If you have ever done a Google search, you know full well that you rarely (if ever) click on page 2 of the search results.
• So, if you’re not ranking on the first page for the most popular and profitable search terms, you might as well not exist to a customer who’s never heard of you Blogging Increases Web Traffic By 55% for Brands In case you hadn’t heard, content marketing is the new everything.
• 72% Of All Internet Users Are Now Active On Social Media Stop for a second and try to make a list of everyone you know who doesn’t participate in any social media at all… you can probably count them on one hand.
• 47% of Americans Say Facebook Is Their #1 Influencer of Purchases Not only do an overwhelming majority of people use social media, but they actually use it to influence their purchasing decisions.
• Top 10 Statistics About Content Marketing: 86% of B2C marketers use content marketing and 91% of B2B marketers use content marketing (eMarketer) 2.
• Blogs give sites 434% more indexed pages and 97% more indexed links (Content+) 3.
• 90% of consumers find custom content useful and 78% believe that organizations providing custom content are interested in building good relationships with them (Custom Content Council) 4.
• 1% of people say a website’s design is the number one criterion for discerning the credibility of the company (Stanford Persuasive Technology Lab) 6.
• People spend more than 50% of their time online with content and an additional 30% of their time on social channels where content can be shared (AOL & Nielsen) 7.
• Conversion rates are 105% higher for consumers who interact with ratings and product reviews (Prestige Marketing) 8.
• 12 Video Marketing Statistics That Will Help Shape Your Digital…: 87% of marketers use video as a part of their marketing and content marketing strategies.
• Source:TwentyThreeBy 2022, video will account for 82% of all internet traffic.
• 59% of executives say that they would choose video over text to learn about a subject if both are available.
• Source:Wordstream A video on an eCommerce product page can increase the order value by up to 50%.
• Source:IMPACT 79% of people say a brand’s video has convinced them to buy a piece of software or app.
• Source:TwentyThree State of Online Video ReportOnly 18% of marketers use video to collect leads from their audience.
• 45% of marketers run 11+ webinars a year, with 19% running 50+ webinars in a single year.
• Source:TwentyThree 59% of marketers host their on-demand webinars on either YouTube, Vimeo, or Dropbox/Google Drive, eliminating valuable engagement and conversion data.
• Source:TwentyThree 68% of marketers either measure webinars manually or are currently not measuring the success of webinars.
• 87% of marketers use video as a part of their marketing and content marketing strategies.
• Source:TwentyThree By 2022, video will account for 82% of all internet traffic.
• 59% of executives say that they would choose video over text to learn about a subject if both are available.
• Source:Wordstream A video on an eCommerce product page can increase the order value by up to 50%.
• Source:IMPACT 79% of people say a brand’s video has convinced them to buy a piece of software or app.
• 30 Digital marketing statistics you shouldn’t miss: 85% of people would rather provide an e-mail for an e-book over a tweet Blog and Content Marketing Blog give sites more indexed pages and more indexed linksBlogs are 63% more likely to influence purchase decisions than magazines.
• Companies that use infographics grow in average of 12%Companies see 55% increase in leads from increasing pages from 10 to 15 Videos Using videos on landing pages can increase conversions by 86%Videos get 267% more links than normal posts.
• 58% of your audience will stop watching video within the first 90 seconds.
• 20% of people will read text while 80% of people will watch a video with the same exact content.
• A consumer who views a product video is up to 144% more likely to add the product to cart.
• Online Shopping 67% of consumers say that quality of a product image is important in selecting and purchasing a product.
• Content Marketing Stats:What You Can Learn from Top Marketers | PromotionWorld: As much as 90% of top-performing marketers in the world put the focus on the informational needs of their audience first rather than on their own financial needs.
• 23 Stats to Convince a CEO That You Need Content Marketing: B2B buyers respond positively to infographics, with 39% of the surveyed buyers sharing these images on their social networks.
• B2B buyers respond positively to infographics, with 39% of the surveyed buyers sharing these images on their social networks.
• 75+ Eye-Opening Digital Marketing Statistics to Know in 2024: Marketing teams that establish their strategy are 313% more likely to register success than those that don’t.
• 75% of marketers improved their company’s credibility and trust with digital marketing tactics.
• Blog content creation is a top priority for 55% of marketers (HubSpot, 2018) 5.
• Articles with pictures get 94% more views than their visual-lacking counterparts.
• 48% of businesses that have a content marketing strategy leverage blogging.
• Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and yields 3x leads.
• (HubSpot) 12) On average, adding videos on landing pages boosts conversions by 86%.
• (HubSpot, 2022) 14) Only 22% of companies are satisfied with their conversion rates (Business2Community, 2018) Visual Content Statistics 15) 74% of surveyed online marketers stated they employed visuals in their content more than 70% of the time.
• (HubSpot) 18) 28% of marketers invest up to 5 hours per week developing visual content.
• ( Medium, 2018) 20) 88% of marketers said they incorporated images in over 50% of the published articles.
• (Venngage, 2019) 21) When information is used with images, people retain 65% of the information, rather than 10% without.
• (Piktochart, 2018)Video 23) By 2023, 83% of the world’s internet traffic will be video.
• (StacksandStacks, 2018) 25) 86% of marketers utilize video as a content tool.
• (Oberlo, 2020) 26) Companies who use video content in their marketing strategy experience a 41% growth in traffic through web searches (Forbes, 2018) 27) 88% of marketers are happy with the ROI of their video marketing efforts on social media.
• (Animoto, 2018) 28) As of 2018, 35% of marketers utilize live video on social media.
• (SocialMediaExaminer, 2018) 29) 54% of customers want to see more videos from the brands they like and follow (HubSpot, 2018) Infographics Statistics 30) 65% of B2B marketers are designing infographics.
• (HubSpot, 2018) 32) 40% of marketers cite original graphics, like infographics, as their best-performing content.
• 5% of marketers say that infographics and amazing visuals are the most engaging content.
• ( Jeff Bullas, 2018) SEO Statistics 34) 74% of all search traffic globally comes from Google (NetMarketShare) 35) There are more than 98,000 searches per second on Google.
• ( Internet Live Stats) 36) Video content in emails can enhance click-through rates by up to 300%.
• (Omnicore) 37) On the first page of a Google search result, the first five organic results account for 67% of all clicks.
• (Backlinko) Lead Nurturing Statistics 39) 45% of businesses send one email per week with their leads.
• (OptinMonster) 41) 66% of people state that email nurturing was the most useful way to re engage leads.
• (Databox) Mobile Commerce Statistics 43) Almost all (95%) of people in the US possess a mobile phone.
• (eMarketer) 45) 51% of shoppers have finished an online purchase with a smartphone.
• (Pew Research Center) 46) 93% of Millennials have compared online deals utilizing a mobile device.
• (Statista) 47) Approximately 33% of online shoppers make a purchase on eCommerce websites every week using their mobile devices.
• (Statista) Social Media Statistics 48) More than 50% of the world is now active on social media.
• (Smart Insights, 2020) 49 75% of marketers state that their social media marketing efforts have improved traffic.
• (Global Web Index, 2020) 51) 97% of digital customers have used social media within the last month.
• (Zephoria, 2021) 53) 79% of internet users in the US have Facebook (beating out Instagram, at only 32%).
• ( eMarketer, 2021) 56) 85% of videos on Facebook are watched without sound.
• (WordStream, 2020) Twitter Statistics 57) Around 52% of all Twitter users are on the platform daily.
• (Omnicore, 2020) 58) 80% of active users use Twitter from their phones.
• (Brandwatch, 2020) 59) On average, brands that utilize Twitter for business experience a 7% improvement in brand preference.
• (Twitter, 2020) 60) 77% of Twitter users feel more optimistic about a brand after their Tweet has been replied to.
• (Omnicore, 2021) 66) Photos on Instagram portraying faces get 30% more likes than photos without faces.
• 2019) 69) 91% of marketing leaders document LinkedIn as the top place to find quality content.
• (Hootsuite, 2020) 71) LinkedIn drives more than 50% of all social traffic to B2B websites and blogs.
• ( Alexa, 2022) 74) YouTube is the favored source of video for 83% of consumers globally.
• ( HubSpot, 2019) 75) Over 70% of watch time on YouTube is from mobile devices.
• More than 50% of the world’s population uses social media nowadays, exceeding 4 billion during the pandemic.
• 80+ B2B Content Marketing Statistics | Nectafy: B2B Content Marketing Statistics About Company Adoption 32% of B2B organizations most successful at content marketing spend 50% of their total marketing budget on content marketing.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2022) 75% of successful B2B marketers expected their content marketing budget to increase over 2021.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2022) 58% of content marketers said their content marketing strategy is moderately or slightly different now vs.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2022) 92% of content marketers say their organization views content as a business asset.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2017) 91% of B2B marketers say they use content marketing in their overall strategy.
• (Demand Metric, 2011) 37% of B2B marketers have a documented content marketing strategy, while 38% have a strategy without formal documentation.
• 62% of B2B organizations that are successful at content marketing have a documented strategy.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2018) The top two limitations cited by B2B marketers who don’t plan to develop a content marketing strategy are 1) a small team (67%) and 2) a lack of time (44%).
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2018) 51% of B2B marketers think it has become increasingly difficult over the last year to capture their audience’s attention.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2022) 89% of B2B organizations that are most successful at content marketing say they are extremely/very committed to it.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2018) 39% of marketers say proving the ROI of marketing activities is a top inbound marketing challenge at their organization.
• (HubSpot, 2022) 27% of marketers say securing enough budget is a top challenge at their organization.
• (HubSpot, 2022) Only 18% of content marketers feel their organization has the right technology in place to manage their content marketing efforts.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2017) 54% of the most successful B2B marketers have two or more full-time employees dedicated to content marketing.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2022) 45% of content marketers say they have the right tools to manage content marketing efforts, but they aren’t using them to their potential.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2017) 66% of content marketers say they need more education on how to better use technology to manage content as a business asset.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2017) 64% of content marketers say they need more education on how to build a scalable content strategy.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2017) 24% of marketers plan to add messaging apps to their content strategy in the next year.
• (HubSpot, 2022) 92% of organizations most successful at B2B content marketing say their organization values creativity and craft in content creation and production.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2022) 70% of content marketers have style and brand guidelines in place.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2017) 58% of all B2B marketers said they have a small (or one-person) content marketing team serving the entire organization.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2022) 72% of B2B marketers always or frequently consider how content impacts the overall experience a person has with their organization.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2018) 60% of content marketers have a content team at their organization.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2017) 70% of B2B marketers always or frequently prioritize delivering quality over quantity.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2018) 67% of B2B marketers always or frequently focus on creating content for their audience vs.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2018) 61% of B2B marketers always or frequently differentiate content from the competition’s content.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2018) 60% of B2B marketers always or frequently prioritize providing the right content to the right person at the right time.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2018) 58% of B2B marketers say they always or frequently deliver content consistently on a defined, regularly scheduled basis.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2017) 53% of content marketers say they have a formal workflow process for planning, creating, and delivering content.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2017) 41% of B2B marketers say they always or frequently craft content based on specific points of the buyer’s journey.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2018) 70% of B2B organizations most successful at content marketing say the flow of content-creation projects is excellent or very good.
• (Curata, 2017) Companies that blog have 55% more visitors, 97% more inbound links, and 434% more indexed pages.
• (HubSpot, 2022) 53% of marketers say blog content creation is their top inbound marketing priority.
• (HubSpot, 2022) 87% of B2B marketers use social media to distribute content.
• (Demand Metric, 2011) Social platforms less commonly used for B2B content marketing include SlideShare (19%), Pinterest (12%), Medium (6%), and Snapchat (3%).
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2018) Half of all marketers say they outsource content marketing (49%).
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2021) 65% of B2B marketers said their top challenge in outsourcing content marketing was finding partners with adequate topical expertise.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2021) 66% of B2B marketers created or used video content in the past 12 months.
• (Grand View Research, 2022) 42% of marketers say proving the ROI of marketing activities is a top inbound marketing priority in the next 12 months.
• (HubSpot, 2022) 11% of marketers plan to add podcasting to their marketing efforts in the next 12 months.
• (HubSpot, 2022) 46% of marketers plan to add Facebook video to their content strategy in the next year.
• (HubSpot, 2022) 48% of marketers plan to add YouTube to their content strategy in the next year.
• (HubSpot, 2022) 8% of marketers plan to add Medium to their marketing efforts in the next 12 months.
• (HubSpot, 2022) The top three digital technologies B2B marketers use to manage content marketing efforts are analytics tools (83%), social media publishing/analytics (80%), and email marketing software (75%).
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2022) The top three types of content B2B marketers use for content marketing purposes are short articles less than 3,000 words (90%), videos (66%), and virtual events or webinars (64%).
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2018) The top six social media platforms B2B marketers use for their content marketing efforts are LinkedIn (97%), Twitter (87%), Facebook (86%), YouTube (60%), Instagram (30%), and Google+ (28%).
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2018) Video marketing has grown by over 25% from 2020 to 2021 as a key content marketing tactic.
• 75% of marketers reported SEO as the most efficient content marketing tactic put in place by their team during 2020.
• (Semrush, 2021) The next most successful content creation strategy was updating and repurposing existing content, implemented by 61%.
• (Semrush, 2021) 45% said research/survey reports are the most valuable content formats and sources when researching B2B purchases.
• 66% of B2B marketers with knowledge of their budgeting process—and 75% of the most successful marketing organizations—expected their content marketing spend to increase in 2022.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2021) B2B Content Marketing Statistics About Lead Generation 60% of customers consider inquiring and buying a product after reading any kind of content about it.
• (Demand Metric, 2011) Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates about three times as many leads.
• (Demand Metric, 2011) 72% say the development or adjustment of strategy is a contributing factor to the increase in their content marketing success.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2018) 61% of marketers say generating traffic and leads is a top inbound marketing challenge at their organization.
• (HubSpot, 2022) 20% of marketers say targeting content for an international audience is a top inbound marketing challenge at their organization.
• (HubSpot, 2022) 54% of marketers say growing traffic to the company website is a top inbound marketing priority in the next 12 months.
• (HubSpot, 2022) Buyers say they will share information in exchange for webinars (79%), white papers (76%), third-party/analyst reports (66%), e-books (63%), and case studies (57%).
• (Curata, 2017) Buyers are less willing to exchange information for podcasts and video (each 19%), and infographics (24%).
• (Curata, 2017) The top three goals B2B marketers have achieved using content marketing successfully over the past 12 months are creating brand awareness (80%), building credibility/trust with their audience (75%), and educating their audience (70%).
• (Statista, 2021) 59% of B2B marketers consider blogs to be the most valuable content.
• (Curata, 2017) The top seven types of email B2B organizations use as part of their content marketing efforts are event emails (63%), lead nurturing (51%), monthly newsletters (48%), automated confirmation emails (45%), drip campaigns (45%), promotional emails (42%), and ad hoc newsletters (31%).
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2018) 55% of B2B buyers around the world find video the most useful type of content.
• (Isoline, 2019) Videos and webinars are the most likely types of content to be shared (53% and 52%, respectively).
• (Isoline, 2019) 62% of respondents to the 2021 Content Preferences Survey say they depend more on content for researching and making B2B purchase decisions than they did in 2020.
• (DemandGenreport, 2021) 53% of surveyed buyers said they typically consume between three and five pieces of content before contacting a salesperson.
• (Isoline, 2019) 61% of respondents were more likely to share video content.
• (Isoline, 2019) 64% of B2B marketers included events, webinars, and online courses in their content marketing efforts.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2021) Virtual events were the top performer:58% said this produced the best results for their content marketing within the previous 12 months.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2021) 44% of people are using social media platforms more than before due to the pandemic.
• (Statista, 2020) LinkedIn is the organic social media platform used most by B2B marketers for content distribution (93%).
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2021) LinkedIn is also the platform where B2B buyers are most likely to share business-related content (71%).
• (DemandGenreport, 2021) Instagram saw a year-on-year increase of nearly 30% in B2B marketing usage.
• (Sagefrog Marketing Group, 2021) Nearly 15% of all emails never make it to the inbox.
• Infographic:8 Content Marketing Stats Businesses Should Know: This infographic you’re reading now is an example of content marketing, and it’s proven to be highly successful among marketers, particularly in B2C businesses, with 86% of them agreeing that content marketing is a key strategy.
• As organizations continue to recognize its value, it won’t come as too much of a surprise that the content marketing industry is growing at a rate of almost 15% per year.
• 56%  of businesses reported they want to increase their content creation spending.
• The biggest challenges for content marketing are reportedly a lack of data (27%) and a lack of strategy (28%).
• 76% of content marketers use organic traffic as a key metric to measuring content success.
• 94% of content marketers are using social media as a distribution channel for their content.
• 10 Statistics to Help Improve Your SaaS Company’s Content Marketing Strategy [Infographic]: Content marketing is no longer about how many articles you’re producing, but rather the quality and relevance of that content, and surprisingly, only 32% of B2B marketers say they have a documented content marketing strategy.
• Only 11% of SaaS Companies are Investing in Content Marketing Content marketing is a great strategy for educating your audience and improving your organic traffic.
• With only 11% of SaaS companies creating content, your company has the opportunity to easily leave your mark, rank in search engines, and become a thought leader in your industry.
• 24% of SaaS Companies Use Their Blog to Educate On a related note, did you know:On average, consumers engage with 11.
• 85% of customers regularly seek trusted content to inform their decision-making process.
• Educational blogs receive 14% more organic traffic than PR-focused blogs, so differentiate yourself by blogging about your audience’s pain points and answers their most asked questions.
• Top Performing Blog Posts are 12% Longer Than Average The days of creating short form content (500 word blog posts) are gone, and, frankly it’s about time.
• Buzzsumo found that long form content around 3,000 – 10,000 words is shared an average of 8,850 times and through the use of long form content, Crazy Egg saw their conversions increase by more than 30%.
• 18% of the World’s Biggest SaaS Companies Have Their Own Podcast Not all content has to be written, in fact,some audiences actually prefer other mediums.
• In the last couple of months, here at IMPACT, we’ve launched 4 different podcasts and, 11% of marketers plan to add podcasting to their marketing efforts in the next 12 months.
• Content marketing is no longer about how many articles you’re producing, but rather the quality and relevance of that content, and surprisingly, only 32% of B2B marketers say they have a documented content marketing strategy.
• Only 11% of SaaS Companies are Investing in Content Marketing Content marketing is a great strategy for educating your audience and improving your organic traffic.
• With only 11% of SaaS companies creating content, your company has the opportunity to easily leave your mark, rank in search engines, and become a thought leader in your industry.
• 24% of SaaS Companies Use Their Blog to Educate On a related note, did you know:On average, consumers engage with 11.
• 85% of customers regularly seek trusted content to inform their decision-making process.
• Educational blogs receive 14% more organic traffic than PR-focused blogs, so differentiate yourself by blogging about your audience’s pain points and answers their most asked questions.
• Top Performing Blog Posts are 12% Longer Than Average The days of creating short form content (500 word blog posts) are gone, and, frankly it’s about time.
• Buzzsumo found that long form content around 3,000 – 10,000 words is shared an average of 8,850 times and through the use of long form content, Crazy Egg saw their conversions increase by more than 30%.
• 18% of the World’s Biggest SaaS Companies Have Their Own Podcast Not all content has to be written, in fact,some audiences actually prefer other mediums.
• In the last couple of months, here at IMPACT, we’ve launched 4 different podcasts and, 11% of marketers plan to add podcasting to their marketing efforts in the next 12 months.
• B2B Content Marketing Research:2023 Trends, Statistics, and More: More in Online Marketing How to write for users and search enginesBest AI Tools Black Friday Deals 2023 – Up to 75% SavingsHow to Improve Your Sentences when Writing Comments Log in to comment or register here.
• The Numbers Game:A Deep Dive into Content Marketing Statistics: 82% of marketers are investing heavily in content marketing, 10% are not utilizing it, and 8% are unclear if their organization is using it.
• (Hubspot) 76% of marketers observed that in 2023 content marketing contributed to the generation of demand and leads, marking a 9% increase compared to the previous year.
• 63% of marketers noted that content marketing plays a crucial role in nurturing audiences, customers, and leads.
• Additionally, 50% acknowledged its effectiveness in fostering loyalty among existing clients and customers.
• (CMI) In 2023, video content constituted the majority of content creation at 50%, followed by images at 47%, and blogs at 33%.
• Amongst businesses utilizing AI content generation tools, 19% indicate that they have achieved significant success with their content strategy.
• The primary focus of 90% of content marketers in their content strategy revolves around leveraging websites and blogs.
• Approximately 41% of bloggers generate content centered on original research.
• Approximately 47% of bloggers commonly incorporate two or three images in their posts, with merely 3% indicating the inclusion of ten or more images.
• 82% of B2B marketers suggest that LinkedIn generates a higher number of leads compared to any other social media platform.
• LinkedIn contributes to over 46% of the social media traffic directed towards business websites.
• According to content marketers, the most impactful content types on social media are:Humor (80%) ,Interactive (77%) & Behind the scenes (68%) Approximately 71% of Internet users state that they rely on social media platforms to research brands and products.
• Video Content Marketing Statistics (2022 to 2023) Video marketing has become a prominent component of overall marketing strategies, with 93% of marketers incorporating it into their content marketing strategies.
• Video constituted 82% of global internet traffic in 2022 The average global video consumption is 100 minutes per day.
• YouTube has emerged as the foremost video-sharing platform for marketers, and a significant 90% of consumers watch videos on their mobile devices.
• A substantial 88% of video marketers expressed satisfaction with the return on investment (ROI) from their video marketing efforts.
• 78% of professionals attested that videos played a pivotal role in boosting sales.
• 60+ Content Marketing Statistics you Should know in 2024: Content marketing strategy statistics 1) Content marketing yields more than 3x as many leads as outbound marketing and costs 62% less (Demand Metric).
• 2) In North America, 72% of the most successful marketers calculate the ROI of their content marketing (eMarketer).
• 17)87% of B2B marketers like to prioritize their audience’s informational needs over the organization’s sales/promotional messages (CMI).
• 21) Only 28% of B2B marketers don’t utilize paid content distribution channels (CMI).
• 22) 78% of B2B marketers use keyword research for SEO while creating content (CMI).
• B2C content marketing statistics 23) 40% of B2C content marketers consider competitors once per year (or not at all).
• (Conductor) 24) Only 33% of B2C content marketers said that they always utilize data in their distribution strategies.
• (Conductor) 25) 62% of B2C marketers intend to use influencer marketing in 2022.
• 27) B2C marketers who use at least two organic social media platforms report that Facebook (59%) and Instagram (21%) produce the best overall content marketing results (CMI).
• 28) Only 28% of B2C marketers don’t use paid content distribution channels (CMI).
• 29) 73% of B2C marketers employ keyword research for SEO while creating content (CMI).
• 31) 70% of people get more information from blogs as compared to traditional advertisements (Demand Metric).
• How-to articles are the most dominant content formats (77%), followed by news and trends (49%) and guides and ebooks (47%) (Statista).
• (Quora Creative) 38) 17% of marketers plan to incorporate podcasts into their content marketing strategy.
• (HubSpot) Content Strategy Statistics 39) In 2020, 70% of marketers said to change their targeting/messaging strategy.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 40) 64% of marketers have adjusted their editorial calendar in the past year.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 41) 53% of marketers have altered their content distribution/promotion strategy before 2021.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 42) Almost 80% of B2B marketers say that they have a content marketing strategy, but only 43% have demonstrated their strategy.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 43) 79% of marketers said “producing more quality leads” as their top content priority in 2021.
• (Semrush) 44) Only 31% of B2B marketers said that their organization was quite successful with content marketing in the past 12 months.
• (IAB) 46) 89% of marketers stated that social media was the most widespread content distribution channel in 2020.
• (B2B Content Marketing) 47) In the past year, social media advertising and paid ad posts rose from 60% to 83%.
• (Statista) Content Marketing ROI Statistics 50) Only 4% of marketers calculate ROI over six months or longer.
• (LinkedIn) 51) The top priority for 44% of marketers is to measure the ROI of demand gen efforts reasonably.
• (Google) SEO Content Statistics 55) 42% of marketers state enhancing their SEO is a concern.
• (Semrush) 56) Search engine marketing and pay-per-click ads usage has increased from 51% to 65%.
• (HubSpot) 57) In 2020, 75% of marketers said SEO was the most effective content marketing tactic they executed during the year.
• That was followed by editing and repurposing existing content, which 61% of respondents employed.
• More than 50% of the world’s population uses social media nowadays, exceeding 4 billion during the pandemic.
• 100+ Shocking Social Media Marketing Statistics in 2022: (Source:Hootsuite)According to Hootsuite, 93% of regular internet users have social media accounts.
• As per the survey, 90% of teenagers ages 12 to 17 have used social media.
• 4% of the world’s whole population uses social media and spends 2 hours 27 minutes every day.
• Social media is the reason for 33% of all digital advertising expenses in 2022.
• 42% of all active internet users have access to Facebook on a monthly basis.
• 72% of all users don’t trust Facebook when it comes to protecting their data.
• Shocking fact:70% of female Facebook users are there in the US, while 60% of users are male.
• 70% of Facebook users completed college level and around 73% more than college level.
• Businesses from the US and Canada spend the most revenue, around 46%, on advertisements.
• YouTube is the world’s largest and leading video sharing platform, with over 95% of internet users using it.
• Above 70% of all YouTube users access this platform via mobile devices.
• (Source:CNBC, YouTube, Statista, Worldmetres) YouTube Social Stats 95% of the USA adult users are between 18 and 29.
• 83% of folks with an income between $30k to $50k are YouTube Users in the USA.
• YouTube shares 55% with the content creators and takes 45% for its own.
• 44% of women adults use Instagram in the USA, whereas only 36% of male adults.
• Each week, 44% of people use Instagram for shopping with the help of some features such as shopping tags.
• 9 million active TikTok users are from the United States only 6% of TikTok users spend more than 10 hours on this platform each week.
• Social Stats Due to the unwanted content promotion on TikTok, 21% of users are very unfavourable.
• Advertisement 35% of all marketers got TikTok influencers to promote their products and services successfully.
• Brands on TikTok As per the survey, more than 20% of industry professionals actively run marketing campaigns on TikTok.
• This platform is used by 30% of whole teens in the USA, meaning it is more popular than TikTok and Instagram.
• The stock value of Snapchat Increased by more than 350% from 2022 to 2021 but has since declined by 57%.
• Only 24% of users are teenagers and youth who belong to 18 to 24 years.
• Advertisement:Over 50% of marketers target LinkedIn for advertising to target B2B customers.
• Most of the B2B leads come from the LinkedIn platform, and the number percentage is 80%.
• Out of 100%, 66% of Twitter users are male, and 34% are female as per the survey in 2019 by Datareportal.
• 67% of all B2B marketers use Twitter as a digital marketing tool for increasing sales and branding.
• Social Stats:ad-free60% are women among all the users, and 40% are male on Pinterest.
• Social Stats 62% of all us users of Reddit are satisfied with the privacy protection of Reddit.
• According to Statista, 62% of Reddit users are male, whereas 38% are female.
• 54% of social media users research online, read any particular blog, or watch videos from social media platforms before purchasing any specific product.
• 06% (Source:Statista) Now, when it comes to 54% of buyers, most belong to Gen Z and Millennial Generation groups.
• As per the research, 75% of millennials and Gen Z follow social media platforms to purchase their interested products.
• 3 Ways Social Media Influence Consumer Behavior So to get profitable and potential customers, being a business owner, you must follow these 3 points:Branding:Not having a branded official page on social media means you will miss 50% of the opportunity to grow your business.
• As per the research, 80% of consumers follow influencers rather than directly believing brands, as they follow peer-to-peer recommendations rather than brand-to-peer.
• 4%) are using social media Here are some marketing strategies you can implement:Video content Marketing.
• 14 social media visual marketing stats you need to know!: These videos tend to be watched without sounds around 85% of the time, so the focus has to be on visuals.
• 10 Digital Marketing Strategy Statistics 2023 – The Brains: Here are some key 2022 PPC stats to keep in mind:Consumers are 63% more likely to click on a Google ad than an ad on any other platform or network (Clutch.
• 5 Benefits of Content Marketing for Insurance Agents [with Stats and Examples] | OutboundEngine: It’s a supported fact too:68% of consumers spend time reading content from a brand they are interested in.
• 78% of of consumers believe that organizations providing custom content want to build good relationships [TMG Custom Media].
• It helps too that 90% of consumers find custom content useful [TMG Custom Media].
• Content marketing can directly impact someone’s opinions of your company:61% of consumers say they feel better about a company that delivers custom content [Marketing Tech Blog].
• 87 Up-to-Date PPC Stats to Elevate Your Marketing Efforts in 2023: As such, it isn’t surprising that 92% of marketers regard videos to be vital for their marketing efforts.
• 65% of small businesses use Google ads as a part of their marketing campaigns.
• 59% of people said they researched a product on Google prior to purchasing it.
• Paid search accounted for 39% of advertisers’ budgets, as reported in 2019.
• 72% of companies haven’t checked the performance of their ad campaigns in a month.
• 70% of consumers lay importance on including a call option and some directions in ads.
• 71% of potential buyers prefer ads that are customized to their interests and shopping habits.
• 75% of internet users have said paid ads made it easier to search their requirements.
• PPC visitors are 50% more likely to make a purchase than organic visitors.
• 94% of users go straight to organic results instead of skipping search ads.
• The majority of brands are satisfied with the results of their PPC ad campaigns, with 84% saying they achieved good results.
• 94% of users go straight to organic results instead of skipping search ads.
• 29- PPC visitors are 50% more likely to make a purchase compared to organic visitors.
• The majority of brands are satisfied with the results of their PPC ad campaigns, with 84% saying they achieved good results.
• 2% of programmatic video ad spending in 2022 was allocated for mobile devices.
• Shopping PPC Ads 38- Approximately 60% of shopping related searches on Google are considered “upper-funnel,” where users seek inspiration to narrow their options from a general category to a specific product.
• 41% of shoppers were comfortable with retailers monitoring their purchases and shopping patterns to personalize purchase offers.
• Shopping ads on Google successfully generate 20% of clicks for retail paid search.
• 31% of people searching for a specific product online are likely to click on relevant shopping PPC ads.
• 46% of online search clicks are earned by the top three PPC ad positions.
• Over 90% of users on mobile are most likely to choose the first 2 or 3 search results.
• The display ad network brought forth by Google reaches 90% of global internet users.
• 60- Google fetches the largest share of organic mobile search traffic at 61%.
• 72- Shoppers on Pinterest have 85% larger baskets and spend twice as much per month compared to shoppers on other platforms 73.
• Sponsored ads on Instagram matched the interest of 37% of Instagram users most of the time.
• Video ads have helped 93% businesses fetch new customers, with short-form content projected to become a popular trend.
• Nearly 50% of PPC marketers worldwide set a monthly budget of less than $50,000.
• 90% of buyers check online reviews before they consider a particular business.
• 101 Content Marketing Stats To Fuel Your Strategy: Content Marketing Statistics 60% of marketers create at least 1 piece of new content each day.
• Content marketing generates more than 3x as many leads soutbound marketing and costs 62% less.
• 47% of B2B buyers consume 3 to5 pieces of content before engaging with a salesperson.
• On average, B2B marketers allocate 28% of their marketing budget to content marketing.
• 60% of B2C marketers are very to extremely committed to content marketing.
• Launching a content marketing campaign costs 62% less to launch and maintain than other forms of marketing.
• Video Marketing Statistics 87% of online marketers use video content.
• Live internet video is projected to account for 13% of total video traffic.
• 81% of internet and mobile audiences watched more live video in 2016 than 2015.
• After watching a video, 64% of users are more likely to buy a product online.
• 83% of marketers said theyd like to create more social video content in 2017.
• 80% of consumers believe demonstration videos are helpful for making purchases.
• 70% of consumers say they have shared a brand video on social media.
• Blogging Statistics 53% of marketers say blogging is their top content marketing priority.
• Featuring a blog as a key part of your website gives you a 434% better chance at being highly ranked by search engines.
• 36% of Fortune 500 companies use blogs for thought leadership,engagement, and product promotion.
• B2B companies that blog generate around 67% more sales than those who do not.
• 81% of US online consumers trust information and advice from blogs.
• Email Marketing Statistics 80% of retail professionals say email marketing is their greatest driver of customer retention.
• 44% of email recipients made at least 1 purchase last year based on a promotional email.
• Emails with personalized subject lines are 26% more likely to be opened.
• 63% of emails opened are considere read or viewed for longer than 10 seconds.
• 75% of male internet users and 83% of female internet users use Facebook.
• 42% of Facebook users will follow a brand for exclusive deals.
• 42% of marketers say Facebook is important or critical to their business.
• Over 50% of businesses on Instagram have produced an Instagram story.
• Pinterest Marketing Statistics 75% of Pinterest usage is done on a mobile device.
• 55% of US online shoppers cite Pinterest as their favorite social media platform.
• Pinterest is responsible for 5% of the world’s referral traffic.
• Nearly 75% of Pinterest users have purchased a product on or because of the platform.
• 49% of Pinterest users have purchased 5 or more products they have pinned.
• Snapchat Marketing Statistics Snapchat’s percentage of daily reach to the 18 34 demographic is 41%.
• 81% of college students using Snapchat do so most frequently during the late afternoon into the night.
• Snapchat is growing more popular with American teens than Facebook, with 19% claiming Snapchat is the more important platform.
• 80% of active Twitter users access the platform via mobile apps.
• 36% of online Americans aged between 18 and 29 are regular Twitter users.
• Twitter brand engagement is 17% higher on weekends, but only 19% of brands tweet on weekends.
• 82% of active users actively engage with brands using Twitter.
• Content Marketing Stat #101 100% of the people writing this blog post right now, think it is a good day to start your blog Management plan to jumpstart your content marketing strategy.
• 17 Actionable Digital Marketing Stats You Need To Know In 2020: In fact, 76% of people think marketing has changed more in the past two years than it did over the previous fifty, which sums up the pace of change right now.
• SEARCH ENGINE MARKETING About 60% of consumers now use voice search, so adjust your keyword strategy to include a more conversational style and long-tail keywords.
• EMAIL MARKETING Email marketing, on average, increases ROI by 4,300%:that’s according to Search Engine Journal—and that’s a potential game changer for your business.
• The open rate for segmented emails is 15% higher than non-segmented ones:whether you use buyer personas or simple demographic segments, sending targeted messages will boost open rates.
• Almost 75% of Millennials prefer email for promotional communications:make sure you communicate with this demographic through email exchanges.
• Almost 60% of consumers say they make buying decisions because of promotional emails:the notion that people don’t like to hear about products and services through email is mistaken.
• Small businesses with blogs have approximately 125% more lead generation than those without them:blogging can help small companies level the playing field with their larger counterparts.
• 10 Visual Content Marketing Statistics Your Business Should Know in 2021 – The Crowdfire blog: According to HubSpot, 70% of businesses invest in content marketing, which might include visual efforts.
• People remember 10% of the information they’re exposed to after three days.
• If there’s an image attached to the information, they’ll remember 65% of such information – again, after three days.
• 70% of YouTube users watch videos for “help with a problem” in their interest, hobby, or profession.
• 54% of customers are interested in seeing more video content from a brand or company that they support.
• Infographics have witnessed the greatest boost in usage among B2B marketers over the last four years, with 67% of respondents reporting an increase.
• According to Verizon Media, 69% of consumers watch online videos without the sound on.
• 50% of those aged between 18-34 said they would watch a new video from one of their favorite YouTube channels as soon as it comes out – even if they were doing something else.
• 50+ Content Marketing Statistics for 2020 That’ll Impact Your Strategy: Social media (95%), blog posts/short articles (89%) and email newsletter (81%) are the top three types of content B2B marketers used in 2018/2019.
• 29% of men and 23% of women are driven by emotion to comment on a video.
• (Source:Animoto) While this leaves a lot of people out, 29% and 23% are large numbers, so your videos should connect with your audience on an emotional level.
• While 40% of content marketers most frequently used stock photography in 2019, only 13% reported to reach their marketing goals with these visuals.
• 58% of bloggers reported that they collaborated with influencers on 10-50% of their posts in 2019.
• (Source:State of Inbound) Influencer marketing is on the rise, with nearly 60% of bloggers using this to their advantage in 2019.
• Almost two thirds of marketers – 60% – produce at least one new content asset every single day.
• 80% of executives and business owners prefer to receive information about a company through articles rather than advertisements.
• Compared to traditional marketing programs, content marketing costs 62% less and generates approximately three times the volume of leads.
• 17% of marketers plan to incorporate podcasts into their content marketing strategy.
• 64% of content marketers prioritize building relationships with influencers, like brand advocates and journalists.
• Follow the more than 60% of content marketers who have already prioritized this.
• The majority of companies (67%) use organic traffic to measure their content success.
• 87% of video marketers say that video has increased traffic to their website.
• 63% of content marketers use their content strategy to build loyalty with their existing clients.
• 47% of B2B marketers don’t measure ROI from their content marketing efforts.
• 40% of B2C content marketers only look at competitors once per year (or not at all).
• Only 33% of B2C content marketers reported always utilizing data in their distribution strategies.
• 75% of Americans age 12+ (approximately 212 million people) are now familiar with podcasting.
• 45% of consumers say that authoritative content makes a brand video feel authentic.
• Only 48% of B2B marketers frequently craft content based on the specific stages to the customer journey.
• Only 32% of bloggers reported utilizing analytics for every article when tracking blog performance.
• And that’s why well over 50% of marketers are interested in building a better, higher-performing content strategy.
• 26% of blogs include videos but 41% of bloggers report strong results from videos.
• Nearly 40% of marketers say content marketing is a very important part of their overall marketing strategy.
• Infographics, photos, charts and other image content have seen a 56% increase for B2B marketers in 2019 in comparison to the previous year.
• 39% of viewers would never watch a video from a brand again if they had a negative viewing experience on mobile.
• 47% of B2B customers view three to five posts before talking to a salesperson.
• Email campaigns (87%) and educational content (77%) are the top content marketing methods B2B marketers use to nurture their audience.
• 51% of companies say updating old content has proven the most efficient tactic implemented.
• More than 50% of companies are updating old content and succeeding as a result.
• 24% of marketers plan on increasing their investment in content marketing in 2020.
• Follow us:Twitter – Facebook Disclosure:Our content is 100% reader supported, which means if you click on some of our clicks, we might earn a small commission.
• Digital Marketing Statistics:What Drives SMBs to Invest More: 1 in 5 small businesses have not invested in digital marketing (50% do not even own a website).
• In fact, pages ranking #1 had an average of 168% more linking domains than those ranking #5.
• Financial Services Marketing Through ReviewsBryan Clayton, CEO of GreenPal, says he was surprised to discover that 84% of people trust an online review as much as a recommendation from a friend.
• “I had a feeling that that number was high,” he says, “But I had no idea it was as high as 84%!
• report, 64% of American adults made purchases from socially responsible companies in the past year.
• Moreover, 26% avoided making a purchase because a company was not socially responsible,” says B2B Content Marketer Shayla Price.
• But data shows that there’s a 100% jump in conversions when follow-up emails are sent after an hour.
• Local Digital Marketing for Financial ServicesPratik Shah also shares this statistic on local marketing:72% of consumers who did a local search visited a store within five miles.
• Social Media Ads & Marketing Facts n’ Stats – Syntactics, Inc.: 95% of adults aged 18-34 are more likely to follow a brand on their social media platforms (Dr.
• Constant Contact (a popular email marketing platform) reported that 49% of small businesses have found social media marketing effective for their business (Sophia from ThoughtReach) That’s not a bad number!
• 9 Content Marketing Statistics That Prove It Works: Content marketing costs 62% less & generates 3x as many leads than outbound marketing (Source:Demand Metric).
• 77% of Internet Users read blogs and small businesses with blogs get 126% more lead growth than businesses without (source:IMPACT).
• 47% of buyers viewed 3-5 pieces of content before engaging with a sales rep.
• Content Marketing Statistics For 2024 – InboundBlogging: 32% of the most successful marketers spend 50% or more of the total marketing budget on content marketing.
• (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) The top technologies B2B organizations use to assist with content marketing are analytics tools (83%), social media publishing/analytics (80%), email marketing software (75%) and content creation/calendaring/collaboration/ workflow tools (73%).
• (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) About 52% of B2B marketers also used media/public relations and speaking/presenting at events to distribute content in the last 12 months.
• (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) LinkedIn is the number one organic social media platform most used by B2B marketers (93%), followed by Facebook (80%).
• LinkedIn is also the most effective organic social media network for B2B companies, for 77% of marketers, followed by Facebook with 37%.
• (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) In the last 12 months, virtual events, webinars, and online courses produced the best results for B2B companies, according to 58% of marketers.
• Articles over 3,000 words get 138% more traffic than those with fewer than 500 words (The State of Content Marketing – 2022 Global Research by Semrush) Title headings including the word “Guide” attract three times more organic traffic than other types.
• (The State of Content Marketing – 2022 Global Research by Semrush) Articles with seven or fewer words in their H1 get 36% more average organic traffic than those with 14 or more words.
• (The State of Content Marketing – 2022 Global Research by Semrush) 47% of articles with an advanced headings structure (H2 + H3 + H4) belong to the highest-performing organic content group.
• (The State of Content Marketing – 2022 Global Research by Semrush) 39% of articles with no H2 are underperforming (The State of Content Marketing – 2022 Global Research by Semrush) Articles with one or two lists per 500 words recieve 68% more traffic than those without lists.
• 59% of marketers use video in their content marketing strategy, while 76% of them call it their most effective content format.
• Not to mention, one in four marketers who use video (or 27%) say it’s the content type that yields the biggest ROI.
• (HubSpot Blog Research, 2022) 87% of marketers report video content as being very helpful in increasing traffic.
• (Wyzowl – Video Survey, 2022) 86% of marketers say that video content is extremely efficient in lead generation.
• (Wyzowl – Video Survey, 2022) 81% of marketers report that video content directly impacts their sales’ increase.
• (Wyzowl – Video Survey, 2022) 93% of marketers say that video has helped them boost brand awareness.
• (Wyzowl – Video Survey, 2022) 88% of people say that they’ve been convinced to buy a product or service by watching a brand’s video, while 78% declare that they’ve been convinced to download a piece of software or app by watching a video.
• (Wyzowl – Video Survey, 2022) 88% of people want to see more videos from brands in 2022.
• (Wyzowl – Video Survey, 2022) 70% of marketers say that video converts better than any other form of content they use.
• (Vidyard – State of Video Report, 2022) Blog posts with videos get 83% more traffic than those without.
• (The State of Content Marketing – 2022 Global Research by Semrush) Articles with more than three videos generated 55% more backlinks than those with none.
• Blog posts with more than seven images generate 116% more organic traffic than those with none.
• (The State of Content Marketing – 2022 Global Research by Semrush) 45% of marketers who leverage content marketing currently invest in infographics.
• Out of those, 38% plan to increase their infographic investments within the next year.
• Therefore, as data has indicated, 17% of video marketers included interactive video in their 2022 video marketing strategy.
• 56% of marketers who leverage blogging say it’s effective, and 10% say it’s the content type that generates the biggest ROI.
• (HubSpot Blog Research, 2022) During 2022, 22% of marketers said they had become clearer on the ROI of video content, giving them the confidence to invest in it more seriously.
• (Wyzowl – Video Survey, 2022) 87% of marketers say video content has helped them generate good ROI.
• (Wyzowl – Video Survey, 2022) Nearly 50% of marketers reported that in 2022 video content ROI is expected to increase.
• 62% of the most successful B2B marketers have a documented content marketing strategy (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) 58% of marketers revealed that their content marketing strategy changed during the pandemic slightly or moderately.
• (B2B Content Marketing 2022 Report) 53% of online SEO marketers have a content strategy optimization for videos and images.
• (HubSpot Blog Research, 2022) One in four SEO marketers seem to leverage historical optimization in their strategy, out of which 29% of them claim it’s an effective SEO strategy.
• (HubSpot Blog Research, 2022) 92% of marketers point out video as being an important asset in their marketing strategy.
• (Wyzowl – Video Survey, 2022) 68% of video marketers plan to include LinkedIn in their 2022 video marketing strategy, while 33% also want to include TikTok.
• (Wyzowl – Video Survey, 2022) 46% of video marketers plan to include webinars in their 2022 video marketing strategy.
• (Wyzowl – Video Survey, 2022) 14% of video marketers plan to include VR in their 2022 video marketing strategy.
• 17% of marketers plan to incorporate podcasts into their content marketing strategy in 2022.
• 64% of marketers who conduct case studies found them effective, and 15% said they brought the biggest ROI of the content formats they tested.
• (HubSpot Blog Research, 2022) 47% of marketing professionals who leverage SEO say their companies use search insights reports in their strategy.
• (HubSpot Blog Research, 2022) While 48% of SEO marketers use backlinking and link building as a regular SEO tactic, 63% of them call it their brand’s most effective SEO strategy.
• (HubSpot Blog Research, 2022) Voice searches are a trend that only 12% of markets have paid attention to so far.
• However, in 2022, 41% of marketing professionals plan to increase their focus on this particular area.
• (HubSpot Blog Research, 2022) 46% of businesses reported wanting to increase their content creation spending in 2022.
• 76% of content marketers use organic traffic as a key metric for measuring content success.
• Top content marketing trends in 2022:influencer marketing (for 34% of businesses) followed by mobile web design and short-form video marketing.
• (HubSpot Blog Research, 2022) 57% of marketers that tried influencer marketing find it effective, while 1% call it the top ROI-generating trend they’ve tried out.
• (HubSpot Blog Research, 2022) 80% of marketing professionals plan to invest more budget into audio content and podcasts in 2022.
• (HubSpot Blog Research, 2022) The most promising investment areas in 2022 related to content marketing are expected to be video (69%) and events (61%).
• 94% of content marketers use social media as a distribution channel for their content.
• 83% of video marketers said YouTube had been an effective channel for them.
• (Wyzowl – Video Survey, 2022) Maintaining a consistent tone across all channels is a challenge for about 16% of marketers.
• (The State of Content Marketing – 2022 Global Research by Semrush) 45% of marketing specialists said their spending on paid channels had increased in the last 12 months.
• Personalized product recommendations and experiences on-site significantly impact sales, leading to an increase of 25% for companies leveraging this tactic.
• Retailers that have initiated basic personalization features have had a revenue increase of about 10%.
• Around 40% of customers refuse to purchase from a store entirely if the content is in another language.
• 73 Essential Digital Marketing Statistics, Trends & Data [2022]: Despite the fact that 77% of adult internet users report using Google 3 or more times a day to find things online (Moz survey, 2019), 90.
• 63% of web pages receive no organic traffic from Google (Ahrefs data analysis, 2020).
• Even though email users open just 57% of their personal emails and 80% of their work emails (Adobe survey, 2019), the open rate for triggered emails was 65.
• 74% of consumers use at least 1 advertising avoidance strategy, such as an ad blocker (Edelman survey, 2019), and 77% of consumers don’t trust ads on social media.
• 69% of global consumers used a digital assistant and 45% owned a smart speaker in 2018 or 2019.
• ” (Pew Research Center survey, 2019)And their buyer’s journey 68% of U.
• healthcare consumers use Facebook, 29% use Instagram, and 21% use Twitter to find or evaluate doctors.
• (Binary Fountain survey, 2019) 36% of global consumers have spent money through a social media ad.
• (Selligent survey, 2019)42% of global consumers say social media ads are somewhat annoying.
• Top performing content for B2B 31% of B2B marketers say that blog posts and short articles were the best types of content for building brand awareness.
• (MarketingProfs/Content Marketing Institute survey, 2020) 25% of B2B marketers say in-person events performed best at generating leads.
• 23% of B2B marketers said case studies provided the best lead conversion rates.
• 63% of web pages receive no organic traffic from Google and an additional 5.
• (Ahrefs data analysis, 2020) 84% of B2B marketers used paid distribution channels to promote their content in 2019.
• (MarketingProfs/Content Marketing Institute survey, 2020)Text isn’t the only kind of content 50% of shoppers say images help them decide what to buy and 53% say images have inspired them to make a purchase.
• (Think With Google survey, 2019) The amount of time consumers spend watching vehicle test drive videos on mobile grew by more than 70% between 2017 and 2019.
• (Think With Google data analysis, 2019) 87% of businesses used video as a marketing tool in 2019.
• (Wyzowl survey, 2020) The Trader Joe branded podcast is ranked among the top 1% of podcasts, and each episode averages 35,000 downloads within the first 30 days of its release.
• Searcher behavior and SEO 77% of adult internet users report using Google 3 or more times a day to find things online.
• 84% of searches are for long-tail (low volume) keywords that receive fewer than 1,000 searches per month.
• (Ahrefs data analysis, 2019) 75% of adult internet users say they stick to page one search results to find answers to their search queries.
• 7% of all click-throughs go to the link in position one of Google’s search results.
• (Ahrefs data analysis, 2020) 75% of digital marketers use content marketing to generate backlinks.
• consumers used online search engines to find local businesses daily and 70% searched local at least once a month in 2019.
• (BrightLocal survey and data analysis, 2019) 84% of local businesses with Google My Business listings are found via discovery (non-branded) searches.
• 34% of local businesses are surfaced in more than 1,000 discovery search results each month.
• (BrightLocal data analysis, 2019)Third-party directory Yelp appears in the top 5 results for 92% of local discovery queries (keyword + city).
• Email users open just 57% of their personal emails and 80% of their work emails.
• 9%, but those with subject lines of between 1 and 5 words beat this average.
• 65%, but the lowest click through rates were among salons and spas at 2.
• (Constant Contact data analysis, 2020) Transactional emails sent in 2018 had an approximately 20% higher engagement rate than non-transactional emails.
• B2B lead generation strategies 73% of B2B buyers say they typically consume between three and seven pieces of content before speaking with a salesperson.
• (Demand Gen Report survey, 2019) Case studies (47%) and webinars (39%) as the two types of content that most influenced B2B purchasers’ decisions.
• (Demand Gen Report survey, 2019) 56% of demand generation professionals say that email was their top tactic for driving leads into their pipeline.
• 65%, but the lowest click through rates were among salons and spas at 2.
• (Constant Contact data analysis, 2020) 60% of marketing professionals say that personalization is their primary strategy for generating high quality leads.
• 57% believe a focus on improving their content and engagement rates is the key to success.
• (Ascend2 survey, 2019)Costs and conversions For both B2B and B2C digital subscription services, customer acquisition costs rose by approximately 50% between 2014 and 2019.
• 64% of marketers planned to include social media in their lead generation strategy in 2019.
• (Social Media Today survey, 2019) 60% of web traffic referrals come from Google.
• 36% of all social media traffic to websites while Instagram drives less than 1%.
• (GrowthBadger data analysis, 2019) 82% of marketers said that Facebook was the best social media platform for lead generation.
• Approximately 61% of CMOs expected to increase their ad budgets in 2020.
• companies planned to increase digital marketing spend by 13% and decrease traditional advertising spend by 0.
• (Deloitte survey, 2020)Consumer sentiment toward paid ads 74% of consumers use at least 1 advertising avoidance strategy.
• Those strategies include ad blocking (48%), changed media habits (47%), methods to completely avoid ads (39%) and paying for ad-free services such as streaming (38%).
• (Edelman survey, 2019) 77% of consumers don’t trust ads on social media.
• 52% of consumers distrust shopping recommendations or ads delivered via digital platforms such as smartphones, wearable devices, and chat apps.
• 7% of consumers say autoplay video ads with sound are the most annoying type of ad.
• (eMarketer/Bizrate survey, 2019) 42% of consumers dislike stalker ads, those that surface based on their online search history.
• 3% of all websites which use a content management system (CMS) use WordPress.
• (W3Techs data analysis, 2020) 52% of marketers used attribution reporting to track the impact and ROI of their efforts in 2019.
• (Hubspot survey, 2019) 45% of marketers used bots on their website in 2019.
• (Hubspot survey, 2019) 31% of companies and agencies use an email service provider (ESP) for marketing.
• (Act-On survey, 2019) Sending emails was the most common reason for using marketing automation (86% of companies and 82% of agencies).
• CRM integration was the second most common purpose (57% of companies and 62% of agencies).
• (Act-On survey, 2019)How consumers are using technology 25% of consumers planned to use their smartphones for holiday shopping in 2019.
• (eMarketer/Comscore data analysis, 2019) 69% of global consumers used a digital assistant and 45% owned a smart speaker in 2018 or 2019.
• (Microsoft survey, 2019) 57% of people with a digital assistant prefer to use voice commands to make requests and queries.
• (Microsoft survey, 2019) 90% of the total time consumers spend using their mobile devices is spent using apps, including social media apps.
• (We are social aggregated surveys and data analysis, 2020) 65% of consumers between the ages of 18 and 37 want personalization technology to offer them personal recommendations, 61% want curated selections, and 60% want recommendations based on their existing wardrobe.
• Content Marketing Statistics – Best Digital Transformation Company in India | IMA Appweb: Read More Search Engine Optimization Statistics, Stats, Trends and Data Blogging As of 2019, a survey of bloggers found that 32% of respondents always checked the analytics of their blog posts.
• (HubSpot, 2020) 89% of content marketers used blog posts in their content creation strategy in 2020.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2020) 18% of marketers choose WordPress as their website content management system (CMS).
• (Deloitte, 2020) 83% of traffic to marketing blogs comes from desktops.
• (SEMrush, 2019) 51% of companies say updating old content has proven the most efficient tactic implemented.
• (SEMrush, 2019) The majority of companies (67%) use organic traffic to measure their content success.
• (SEMrush, 2019) 86% of companies produce blog content compared to other formats.
• (HubSpot, 2020) 87% of video marketers say that video has increased traffic to their website.
• (Wyzowl, 2020) 80% of video marketers claim that video has directly increased sales.
• (Wyzowl, 2020) Content Strategy 70% of marketers are actively investing in content marketing.
• (HubSpot, 2020) 78% of companies have a team of one-to-three content specialists.
• (HubSpot, 2020) 24% of marketers plan on increasing their investment in content marketing in 2020.
• (HubSpot, 2020) Nearly 40% of marketers say content marketing is a very important part of their overall marketing strategy.
• (SEMrush, 2019) 7% of companies say they have a content marketing strategy.
• (SEMrush, 2019) 94% of marketers use social media for content distribution.
• (Podcast Insights via iTunes, 2020) 75% of Americans age 12+ (approximately 212 million people) are now familiar with podcasting.
• 101 Content Marketing Statistics to Know (& Put to Use) – Live Your Message: 72% of marketers say they are creating significantly more content than they did one year ago.
• 81% of marketers plan to increase the amount of original written content they create.
• 60% of B2C content marketers say their businesses are devoted to using content marketing as a growth strategy.
• 72% of marketers can show that content marketing increased both their engagement rates and the number of leads the business gets.
• 78% of content marketers use press releases as part of their content strategy.
• B2B marketers spend as much as 39% of their marketing budget on content marketing.
• 86% of B2C content marketers believe content marketing strategies are key to “profitable customer action.
• 64% of marketers want to learn how to create a scalable content strategy.
• 86% of the most effective businesses have someone who oversees their content strategy.
• 48% of businesses with 10-99 employees have a documented strategy, compared to just 41% of larger organizations.
• As part of their content strategy, 64% of content marketers build relationships with influencers and journalists.
• Each day, 60% of content marketers create at least one new piece of content.
• 63% of content marketers use content marketing to build loyalty with current clients.
• When creating content, only 66% of B2B marketers think about their audience’s needs, choosing instead to prioritize the sales message.
• But 88% of successful content marketers consider the customer’s needs first.
• 74% of successful content marketers craft their content specifically to align with the stages of the buyer’s journey.
• 56% of businesses say they want to increase their content creation budget.
• That’s likely because 60% of marketers find it difficult to produce content consistently.
• And 55% of B2C marketers outsource other aspects of their content marketing.
• 49% of Google users say they use Google to discover or find new products and services.
• BrightEdge Research found that 53% of trackable website traffic comes from organic search results.
• 61% of content marketers cite changes to the search algorithms as the number one marketing concern.
• Comparison searches using the word “best” have increased by 80% according to Google research.
• 62% of businesses still haven’t optimized their content for voice search.
• 64% of content marketers use PPC (pay-per-click) or SEM (search engine marketing) to generate sales or revenue.
• 53% of mobile users will abandon their visit if the page takes more than 3 seconds to load.
• 57% of internet users wouldn’t recommend a business if the mobile site is poorly designed.
• 75% of smartphone owners use the search feature first when they need immediate information.
• And 82% of marketers see a positive ROI from using blogging as part of their inbound marketing strategy.
• In the B2B space, 76% of marketers blog as part of their content strategy.
• A DemandGen Report found that 71% of B2B buyers read blog posts as part of their buying journey.
• 40% of Americans listen to podcasts, with 15% listening at least once a week.
• 49% of listeners are listening at home, while 22% are listening in the car.
• 64% of B2B buyers found podcasts to be helpful in their buying process.
• 28% of marketers would like to learn more about using podcasting in their marketing strategy.
• 78% of marketers would rather give up social media marketing than email marketing.
• A personalized subject line entices 62% of customers to open emails from brands.
• 40% of consumers want to receive emails that are informative, not promotional.
• 86% of professionals want to use email when communicating for business purposes.
• 85% of businesses use video marketing as part of their content strategy.
• 94% of consumers watch videos to understand better how a product works and to get more information before they make a purchasing decision.
• Wyzowl found that 68% of consumers prefer to learn about new products through short videos.
• 87% of consumers want to see more video content from their favorite brands.
• Video content that is vertically oriented has a 90% higher completion rate versus videos filmed horizontally.
• Video content in emails can improve click-through rates by as much as 300%.
• 87% of content marketers use social media to share their content marketing.
• 73% of consumers are affected by a brand’s social media presence when they make a purchasing decision.
• 32% of consumers look for a brand’s social media channels before they ever visit the brand’s website.
• The use of infographics as part of content marketing has jumped over 800%.
• 7% of marketers say finding engaging visual content consistently is a struggle.
• 2-5% of webinar attendees will make a purchase and 20-40% will become leads for future business.
• 88% of marketers believe that interactive content helps differentiate their company from the competition.
• 79% of content marketers think interactive content makes their brand more memorable to consumers compared to traditional content.
• 61% of marketers say improving how they measure their marketing impact is a top priority.
• Just 33% of B2C content marketers say they use data as part of their content sharing strategies.
• A whopping 47% of B2B marketers don’t measure the ROI from their content marketing.
• 76% of content marketers measure content success by the amount of organic traffic that comes in.
• Social Media Marketing Stats 2022 | Learn with MyTasker: 9% of US marketers in companies with more than 100 employees were projected to use social media marketing in 2021, up from 86.
• Facebook Marketing Stats 2022 47% of marketers see Facebook as their most crucial social media platform.
• 55% of B2B marketers see Facebook as their number-one choice for social media marketing.
• 41% of marketers plan on increasing their organic activities on Facebook.
• At the same time, 13% of marketers plan on paying less attention to their Facebook organic marketing.
• 51% of businesses claim Facebook is their most important platform for ads.
• 72% of B2C marketers are more inclined toward using Facebook ads than B2B marketers (67%).
• Facebook Messenger is the most-used messaging app for marketing (over 75%).
• Right now, Instagram is the number-one platform marketers (71%) want to learn more about.
• Instagram is the second most-used platform by B2C marketers (85%), behind Facebook.
• 61% of marketers plan on increasing their Instagram organic marketing activities over the next 12 months.
• 59% of B2B marketers plan on increasing their organic marketing on Instagram, as compared to 66% of B2C marketers.
• 70% of businesses find Instagram to be the most effective social platform for running influencer marketing campaigns.
• Instagram is the second most-used ad platform for US marketers (54%), following Facebook.
• 27% of marketers claim Instagram contributes the most to their sales, behind Facebook.
• 24% of marketers select Instagram as the single most important social platform for their business – an increase from just 10% in 2018.
• Twitter Marketing Statistics 43% of marketers use Twitter now, down from 48% in 2021.
• 42% of B2C marketers and 49% of B2B marketers have incorporated Twitter into their social strategy.
• Only 2% of marketers see Twitter as the most important social platform for their business.
• The most popular Twitter hashtag among #contentmarketing tweets is “#digitalmarketing” (47%), followed by “#seo” (40%) and “#marketing” (37%).
• Only 28% of marketers plan on increasing their Twitter organic activities, as compared to the 32% who do not plan on using Twitter for their marketing at all.
• TikTok Stats Currently, 18% of marketers are using TikTok, up from only 9% in 2021.
• While 32% of marketers were interested in TikTok in 2021, 47% of marketers now want to learn more about the platform.
• 37% of marketers plan to increase their organic activity on TikTok, up from 21% in 2021.
• 40% of businesses plan to incorporate TikTok into their social media strategy for 2022.
• More than 50% of US marketers started using LinkedIn in 2021, based on projections.
• LinkedIn is the second most-used social platform by B2B marketers (81%), behind Facebook.
• 40% of B2B marketers select LinkedIn as their number-one choice for social media marketing.
• LinkedIn is the top organic (93%) as well as paid (75%) social media platform for B2B marketers.
• LinkedIn is the most important social media platform for 19% of marketers, a visible rise from 12% in 2018.
• 77% of B2B marketers claim LinkedIn has produced the best organic results for their businesses in the last 12 months.
• 54% of marketers plan on increasing their LinkedIn organic marketing over the next 12 months.
• LinkedIn is the top paid social media platform that has produced the best results for B2B marketers (79%) in the last 12 months.
• 7% of marketers have plans to increase their organic activity on Snapchat.
• YouTube Marketing Stats 67% of marketers plan on increasing their usage of YouTube video marketing.
• 57% of marketers plan on increasing their organic YouTube activities over the next 12 months, while 17% do not expect to use the platform at all.
• 43+ Social Media Marketing Statistics You Need To know in 2024: In 2022, almost 92% of marketers who work for companies with over 100 employees in the United States are predicted to start using social media for marketing.
• In addition, 67% of consumers anticipate brands and companies to have social media presence to deliver customer service.
• 9% of survey respondents said they purchased after seeing a social media advertisement.
• More than 50% of the world’s population uses social media nowadays, exceeding 4 billion during the pandemic.
• (Hootsuite)Consumers spend 15% of their time on social media platforms.
• The COVID-19 pandemic encouraged people to spend more time online, and stats indicate that an average user will devote 15% of their day to social media platforms.
• (We Are Social)The adoption rate for social media users accelerated by over 13% in 2021.
• (We Are Social)Over 40% of consumers use social media as a discovery engine.
• As many as 99% of social media consumers worldwide report regularly accessing social media platforms from their mobile phones.
• ( (Social Media Today, Wallaroo Media) The latest Pinterest stats show that 89% of Pinners are on the platform for purchase inspiration, while another 50% of US users frequently shop on Pinterest.
• The engagement levels are incredible, the highest of all social media and 22% higher than on Facebook.
• Marketing analysts also compared the audience size of the 50 largest brands on Facebook and Instagram, and the results show a 35% larger audience on the latter.
• (Statista) Social Media Marketing Statistics for Businesses Facebook is the top platform for marketers, with more than 90% using it.
• Instagram comes in second with 78% of marketers using it, and LinkedIn third with 61%.
• (Oberlo, Buffer, Social Media Today)Nearly 70% of social marketers prioritise brand awareness in their strategy.
• (Sprout Social)50% of customers follow brands on social media to learn about new products/services.
• (Social Media Today)Social media statistics for businesses show sharing irrelevant content follows with 51%, while 43% of consumers claim they’ve seen one too many ads.
• (Social Media Today)277% more leads are generated on LinkedIn than on Facebook and Twitter.
• 27% of B2B companies consider social media to be indispensable in their marketing campaigns.
• Social media marketing data indicates Facebook is used by 91%, LinkedIn by 79%, and 70% report using Twitter for marketing.
• (Revive)Over 80% of executives check social media before making a purchasing decision.
• Statistics reveal that 84% of executives use social media before making purchasing decisions.
• (Hootsuite)Social media marketing data indicates that a whopping 91% of marketing executives also consider LinkedIn to be the platform for relevant leads and content.
• (The Shelf)85% of businesses use third-party tools to handle their social media.
• (Social Media Today)Over 70% of consumers with a nice social media experience are likely to recommend the brand to others.
• (Oberlo)60% of marketing professionals recognise measuring ROI as one of their most significant social media marketing challenges.
• (eConsultancy, Lyfe Marketing)After following a brand on social media, 87% of customers report visiting its website or app.
• (Sprout Social)71% of people complaining to a brand on Twitter expect a reply within an hour.
• (Twitter Blog)Instagram shopping posts have increased brand traffic by as much as 2,600%.
• (Backlinko)According to social media marketing facts, just under 70% of brands use influencer marketing on Instagram.
• (Influencer Marketing Hub) Latest Trends in Social Media Marketing Effective Facebook ads should have a CTR above 1% and a CRM lower than $40 on average.
• Businesses worldwide respond to Instagram’s rising popularity, as 90% of top brands have an account.
• (Statista, Sprout Social, Statista)Just over 80% of baby boomers have a social media account.
• 82% of those who use the internet also have at least one account on social media.
• (PostBeyond)84% of millennials reported making a purchase based on UGC.
• (Marketing Charts, ClickZ)YouTube accounts for 67% of online video consumption for millennials.
• For millennials, video content from YouTube makes up 67% of all their online video consumption.
• In 2022, almost 92% of marketers who work for companies with over 100 employees in the United States are predicted to start using social media for marketing.
• Social media marketing is proven effective because, among online shoppers, 97% of them access social media at least once a month.
• In addition, 67% of consumers anticipate brands and companies to have social media presence to deliver customer service.
• 9% of survey respondents said they purchased after seeing a social media advertisement.
• Planning a new digital marketing strategy? Let’s take a look at what statistics suggest: That is also one reason why data indicate that in two years, 75% of the overall marketing budget will focus on digital marketing instead of traditional.
• According to statistics, about 49% of the American internet population seeks customer service support through their social accounts for the ease of accessibility.
• And 28% of the social media account holders in the US prefer to interact with brands online rather than visiting their brick-and-mortar address.
• Another thing is that interactive content is going to dominate the space as 75% of internet marketers emphasize on it compared to about 24% of them who don’t want to change their existing strategy.
• Besides, 69% of organizations are willing to increase their video spending, and 81% of marketers focusing on using written content more.
• The use of infographics is going to play a critical role in the overall look, feel, and substance of the content, and there cannot be any doubts about it as it witnessed nearly 800% rise the past year.
• About 28% of digital experts also show intent to use podcasting in their marketing strategies for brands and businesses.
• In this context, it is vital to note that nearly 95% of Americans have mobile phones and of them, 77% arguably have a smartphone.
• Additionally, if you are aware of this, studies claim that 61% of users will not use a mobile site again if they faced any difficulty with it and 40% of them would instead visit a competitor site.
• If you have never used it to its optimum potential or thinking of revamping your efforts in this area, then do make a note that with the correct approach, you can expect it to boost your ROI by 3,800% to 4400%.
• Also, post office hours or the time between 6 pm and 11 pm are considered to be the best period for this activity as it can witness around 24% open rate.
• That is also one reason why data indicate that in two years, 75% of the overall marketing budget will focus on digital marketing instead of traditional.
• According to statistics, about 49% of the American internet population seeks customer service support through their social accounts for the ease of accessibility.
• And 28% of the social media account holders in the US prefer to interact with brands online rather than visiting their brick-and-mortar address.
• Another thing is that interactive content is going to dominate the space as 75% of internet marketers emphasize on it compared to about 24% of them who don’t want to change their existing strategy.
• Besides, 69% of organizations are willing to increase their video spending, and 81% of marketers focusing on using written content more.
• The use of infographics is going to play a critical role in the overall look, feel, and substance of the content, and there cannot be any doubts about it as it witnessed nearly 800% rise the past year.
• About 28% of digital experts also show intent to use podcasting in their marketing strategies for brands and businesses.
• About 53% of email-marketing campaigns find their readership on mobile devices.
• Mobile users spend about 80% of their time on social networking channels.
• In this context, it is vital to note that nearly 95% of Americans have mobile phones and of them, 77% arguably have a smartphone.
• Additionally, if you are aware of this, studies claim that 61% of users will not use a mobile site again if they faced any difficulty with it and 40% of them would instead visit a competitor site.
• If you have never used it to its optimum potential or thinking of revamping your efforts in this area, then do make a note that with the correct approach, you can expect it to boost your ROI by 3,800% to 4400%.
• Also, post office hours or the time between 6 pm and 11 pm are considered to be the best period for this activity as it can witness around 24% open rate.
• SM Statistics You Should Think About – OpenMoves – Digital Marketing Agency NY: So, if you’re part of the 24% of small businesses that do not have a social media presence, you may wish to change that.
• According to Hootsuite, 52% of American consumers say they’ve seen a product they’re interested in on Facebook in the last three months.
• According to a survey by eMarketer in 2016, 44% of local businesses said they depend on social media to generate brand awareness and 41% depend on it to drive revenue.
• According to marketing calendar CoSchedule 49% of 18-29-year olds have purchased something they saw in a social media ad.
• Survey results from Social Media Examiner revealed that 90% of marketers said their social media marketing efforts increased exposure for their business and 75% say they’ve increased traffic.
• Additionally, more than 50% of marketers who have been implementing social media marketing tactics for two years have reported improved sales.
• 12 Days of Data 2021, Day 6:SEO Page Decay Statistics – Trust Insights Marketing Analytics Consulting: In 2020, we saw about 7% of pages listed in content exploration tools as bad.
• That pages lost 41% of their inbound links in 30 days is a stunning number.
• The Latest Email Marketing Statistics (2024) To Supercharge Your Emails – Drip Digital: 8% more emails are sent per day during the holiday season than the rest of the year.
• In the United States, more than 90% of people over the age of 15 use email.
• 68% of teens and 73% of millennials said they prefer to receive communication from a business through email.
• Apple iPhone (28%) and Gmail (26%) are two of the most popular email clients in 2019.
• 81% of small and medium businesses rely on email as their primary channel for customer acquisition.
• 19% of all email campaigns are opened in the first hour after sending it.
• 75% of Gmail users use their mobile devices to access their accounts according to Google.
• 38% of buyers said they bought a product they had first seen or read about in a marketing email on their mobile phone.
• From the same study, 60% of respondents check their work email on smartphones.
• 41% of marketers said that email is the most effective way to get an offer to a consumer on a mobile device while holiday shopping.
• 68% to 79% of consumers said they are more likely to delete an email that isn’t mobile optimized.
• From the same study, 25% to 29% of younger mobile users unsubscribe to email listings if it isn’t optimized for mobile.
• Welcome emails have over 80% average open rate, making it an effective marketing tool.
• Using a specific personal name instead of a company name or general email address increases open rates by as much as 35%.
• 56% of brands using emojis in their email subject line had a higher open rate.
• 53% of email marketing professionals struggle with low click-through rates.
• 73% of marketers said that click-through rate is the most important email marketing metric to measure the success of their email campaigns.
• Consumers who read emails on mobile and then read for a second time on a desktop have a 65% higher likelihood of clicking through.
• Marketers who send personalized emails increase click-through rates by as much as 139%.
• Newsletters with social sharing buttons have a 158% higher CTR than emails that don’t include social sharing.
• Shoppers spend 138% more when marketed through email as compared to people who do not receive email offers.
• 68% of millennials said promotional emails influence their purchase decisions.
• 60% of marketing respondents said combining digital and direct mail increased ROI.
• Brands that include an A/B test in their emails generate a 37% higher ROI, as compared to those who never A/B test their emails.
• 81% of B2B marketers say they use email newsletters for content marketing.
• 85% of B2B organizations use email marketing software to assist with content marketing.
• 79% of small businesses said email marketing is important to their business strategy.
• 87% of B2B marketers use email as their free content distribution channel.
• 81% of SMBs rely on email as their primary customer acquisition channel.
• 66% of marketers said improved email marketing engagement is their top priority.
• Remarketing emails produces 39% open rates and 11% click-through rates.
• 60% of consumers subscribe to a brand’s email list to receive promotional messages.
• 45% of people unsubscribe to email lists because brands reach out too often.
• 10 Crazy Content Marketing Strategy Statistics – Kaleidico: (Source:ClickZ) Images (22%) and video (15%) are the most popular types of brand content for consumers/buyers.
• On the other side of the spectrum are eBooks and white papers with only 3% each.
• (source:Content Marketing Institute) 73% of B2B marketers use video in their content marketing.
• (Source:Marketing Think) By 2018, 79% of Internet traffic will be video content.
• (source:DR4WARD) 46% of marketers say photography is essential when it comes to their current marketing and storytelling strategies.
• (Source:The Chief Marketing Officer (CMO) Council) Content that is supported by relevant images gets 94% more views than content that lacks appropriate images.
• 5 Digital Marketing Statistics Will Change Your View of Marketing Online: Though content marketing costs about 62% less than traditional marketing tactics, it still generates about 3 times as many leads.
• 90% of B2C businesses report that social media has become their most popular content marketing tactic.
• Let’s Talk About Stats, Baby:Why Marketing Is Worth the $$$ | Kicks Digital Marketing: 2% of Baby boomers As of January 2019, there were 500 million active Instagram stories daily 91% of all social media users accessed platforms via their mobile device The best part about social media marketing?
• 4 Content Marketing Statistics Every B2B Marketer Should Know | Embryo: 97% of marketers include content marketing strategies More than anything, this shows that the industry is basically entirely in agreement that content marketing is an essential strategy.
• Not Everyone Has Got the Message… Despite a majority of marketers including content marketing strategies, a surprising percentage of B2B organisations (32%) have no one employed on a full-time/dedicated content marketing team, with just an average of 4% with a dedicated team of over 11 people.
• Similarly, over half (58%) of B2B organisations have just one person running their entire content marketing strategy!
• 65% of marketers say case studies and success stories are the biggest value drivers Say you’re looking for a restaurant to eat at for the evening.
• 67% of marketers want more resources for content creation Every business wants an ace team of writers at the helm who can shift and shape their writing style to the task at hand, but relying on the pure skill of your writers won’t get you great content all the time.
• 44% of B2B buyers typically consume 3-5 pieces of content before engaging This further speaks to the long-term nature of content marketing and how its main focus is on building trust with an audience.
• This is further backed up by a not insignificant 70% of consumers who say that they prefer to learn about a product or service through content rather than traditional advertising.
• Digital Marketing Statistics And Trends To Know | TheWebAddicted: SEO statistics show that 99% of user experiences online begin with a search engine.
• In fact, 65% of users who are really intent on making a purchase go to paid ads.
• As of 2019, Google is leading the pack among search engines with over 79% of desktop search traffic.
• The effectiveness of SEO is on the rise according to 82% of industry experts and 42% say the significance of SEO will increase.
• Facebook gets families connected since 83% of parents are connected with their children.
• There are 68% of adult users on Facebook and 51% of them log in several times a day to check their account.
• Compared to other social media platforms Instagram has a more diverse population since 88% are outside the U.
• It is being predicted that by 2022 video will make up 82% of all consumer internet traffic.
• In fact, placing a video on a landing page can increase conversion by 80%.
• 88% of local business searches quickly call or visit the business within 24 hours.
• 9%, the number of mobile shoppers is rising and the numbers will shift in favor of mobile in the near future.
• This year, 58% of consumers have used voice search to find local business information within the last year.
• Users follow through with 27% visiting the website of a local business after conducting a voice search.
• Because of the increased use of voice search 22% of smart home speaker owners have made a purchase using their device.
• Visual Content Marketing:Insights from Asia [Statistics]: Here are some choice nuggets for you to chew on:93% of all human communication is non-verbal (source:Non Verbal Group).
• 90% of the information transmitted to the brain is visual (source:HubSpot).
• Up to 94% more views in posts with visuals (compared to those without).
• Online shoppers who view videos are 144% more likely to add to cart than other shoppers.
• 67% of e-commerce consumers say that the quality of a product image is very important in selecting and purchasing a product (source:MDG Advertising).
• As a mobile-only app, Instagram’s burgeoning growth is supported by the fact that over 60% of people are accessing social media networks via their mobiles and tablets.
• Inside the Minds of Your Prospects:37 Critical Digital Marketing Statistics for Consultants – Tsavo Neal: 81% of management consulting firms list attracting & developing new business as their #1 challenge.
• 52% of B2B buyers say the expect half of their purchases to be made online by 2018.
• Up to 70% of B2B websites don’t display clear calls to action on any of their home pages, such as specials, e-mail newsletters, how-to guides, demos, and interactive tools.
• 96% of B2B small business websites don’t offer guides, white papers, or similar reports on their home pages.
• White paper and eBook downloads are the top producers of B2B leads, cited by 59% of marketers.
• Other top calls to actions included contact forms (39%), webinars (37%), and free trials (35%).
• 90% of B2B websites don’t use either a form on their home pages or a notable call to action graphic to direct visitors to a form.
• B2B companies that blog generate 66% more leads per month than companies that don’t.
• 80% of B2B decision maker prefer to get information from articles rather than advertising.
• Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates about 3 times as many leads.
• 70% of B2B marketers said that website content was the content asset considered most effective in achieving their marketing goals.
• 6% close rate, while outbound leads (such as direct mail or print advertising) have a 1.
• 81% of B2B decision makers use online communities and blogs to help make purchasing decisions.
• 48% of users say that if they arrive on a business site that isn’t working well on mobile, they take it as an indication of the business simply not caring.
• 57% of users say they won’t recommend a business with a poorly designed mobile site.
• 74% of web users are more likely to return to a site if the site is designed responsively.
• 74% of users will abandon after waiting five seconds for a mobile site to load.
• Only 22% of marketers are satisfied with their websites’ conversion rate.
• 5%, Pop-ups:1 – 8%, Sliders and bars:1 – 5%, Welcome gates:10 – 25%, Featurebox:3 – 9%.
• Just 34% of B2B organizations say they touch base with lead nurturing on a monthly basis.
• Content Marketing Stats for 2021: 68% of businesses expect their content marketing budget to increase throughout 2023.
• This demonstrates just how seriously businesses are taking their content marketing efforts, with 8% of businesses spending up to $500 million in 2023.
• The State Of Content Marketing 2020 Global Report found that 75% of marketers believed SEO to be the most effective content marketing tactic.
• 96% of B2B content marketers said they used LinkedIn in the last 12 months.
• Of the B2B marketers that use paid social media, LinkedIn was again listed as most popular with over 80% using the platform.
• 47% of buyers will read between 3 and 5 pieces of content before speaking to a sales rep.
• 20 Content Marketing Statistics Every Marketer Needs to Know: #1 – 60% of marketers produce a piece of content every day (Source)Content marketing is all about consistency.
• #3 – Inbound marketing produces three times more leads and is 62% less expensive than outbound marketing (Source)Imagine being able to generate more clients AND save money.
• #6 – Blog posts are the most produced format by 55% of marketers (Source)You load up WordPress, start writing, and hit the publish button.
• #7 – 45% of content is produced ad-hoc (Source)Do you know what ad-hoc means?
• #8 – 34% of consumers make unplanned purchases from businesses that make personalized content (Source)Is this a surprise?
• #9 – Only 24% of businesses are using partnerships as a way to promote their content (Source)One of my favorite sayings is the following.
• #10 – Content syndication and promotional tools are used by only 27% of marketers (Source)Continuing off of the last point, are you one of the businesses that publish content and do nothing afterward?
• #11 – 93% of B2B companies are currently using content marketing (Source)It’s never cool to follow the crowd.
• 80% of respondents said that social media matters more than ever yet only 28% of CEOs invest in social.
• #13 – 52% of B2B marketers believe blogging is the most effective channel for content marketing (Source)According to Content Marketing Institute’s 2017 benchmark report, 52% of B2B marketers say blogging contributes to the most content marketing success.
• #14 – B2B organizations who blog on a consistent basis generate 67% more leads (Source)Blogging on a consistent basis increases trust with an audience, builds authority, and creates more touchpoints to convert them.
• Hence why B2B organizations generate 67% more leads by simply increasing their blogging frequency.
• #15 – 77% of B2B companies use email marketing newsletters as a regular part of their content marketing plan (Source)Email is decades old.
• That’s why 77% of B2B companies use email newsletters as a regular part of their content strategy.
• This means that 80% of newsletters should be informational and value-focused.
• #16 – 66% of B2B marketers use paid promotion channels to distribute content (Source)There’s one deadly mistake marketers make over and over.
• Paid channels are also extremely effective, which is why 66% of B2B marketers use them for content distribution.
• #17 – 93% of B2B content receives zero links from other websites (Source)Backlinks are necessary to rank highly on Google.
• #19 – 54% of consumers say that want more video content from brands they like (Source)Do you produce video content on a regular basis?
• #20 – 67% of marketers report that YouTube is one of their top channels to distribute video content (Source)Yes.
• 💪67% of marketers report YouTube as their top video distributional channel.
• Content Marketing:Let’s know its Fascinating Statistics | BuzzRush: Content strategy is followed by 38% of B2C brands and 37% of B2B brands 4.
• Stats of Content Marketing Trends 61% of marketers improved “their strength to measure and analyze marketing efforts”.
• For the content distribution 64% of content marketers use PPC or SEM 62% of companies having more than develop daily content.
• Infographics (37%) and Stock photography (40%) are the most frequently utilized visual content.
• According to the 35% of the marketers, the major struggle that they face is in creating engaging visual content frequently.
• Prescriptive content is used by 97% of content marketers, while 78% uses press release in the strategy.
• If we take a medium to a large-sized enterprises, the cost of content marketing may be up to 41% less per lead than paid search.
• Companies who pay to write blogs have more than 434% indexed pages than the companies who doesn’t believe in writing the blogs.
• 77% of users read blogs and this information is known to be a subtle way to increase your audience’s attention.
• Content strategy is followed by 38% of B2C brands and 37% of B2B brands The key to get successful in content marketing is to have a full-fledged strategy.
• Despite the fact that there is a strong relation between representing a strategy and sensing success, just 37% of B2B brands and 38% of B2C brands strategize.
• This is why about 48% of the marketers are taking YouTube video as a priority and not only this, 46% plan to focus on Facebook video.
• Videos are effective and the content marketing statistics show 72% of B2B marketers and 76% of B2C marketers are using the video marketing that is possibly generating 66% more leads per year.
• The Cost of Content Marketing Paid method is used by 71% of B2B marketers:Content marketing is comparatively inexpensive than traditional methods.
• Cost is 62% less than traditional marketing:A phrase like “building a trusting relationship” sounds nice.
• The Ultimate List of Content marketing statistics (2021) – Tej SolPro: Content Marketing Trends Content is considered to be an important business asset by almost 92% of marketers.
• When it comes to content, quality wins over quantity as 70% of people feel quality content is essential.
• While companies are always looking for cost-cutting, almost 52% of companies wish to increase their spending on content creation.
• One of the substantial challenges in content marketing is the lack of data (27%) and lack of strategy (28%).
• With an employee strength of 5000 people or more, 62% of companies produce daily content.
• PPC or SEM is used by almost 64% of B2B content marketers for content distribution.
• Many content marketers doubt their effectiveness as 38% of them rate their content marketing strategy as average.
• The most used visual contents are stock photography (40%) and infographics (37%).
• Social media is included as a distribution channel for content by a whopping 94% of content marketers.
• If brands are authentic, 91% of consumers are ready to reward them for it.
• List Of Content Marketing Statistics:Content Marketing Strategy Statistics Although content marketing is so popular, still only 42% of organizations think their content marketing efforts are sophisticated.
• 54% of companies consider generating quality leads to be one of the biggest difficulties with content marketing.
• Even at this point, only 41% of content marketers possess a well-documented content marketing strategy.
• Only 1 to 3 content specialists consists of a content team in almost 78% of the companies.
• Everyone acts as they care for customers, but only 42% of B2B content marketers spoke to customers regarding their content needs.
• B2C Content Marketing The top three types of content B2C marketers used in 2018 and 2019 are Social media (94%), blog posts/short articles (80%) and email newsletters (74%).
• From the year 2017 -2018, there has been a 69% increase in audio/visual content usage for B2C marketers.
• This is quite shocking, but 40% of B2C marketers check their competitors only once a year.
• Last year, 81% of companies decided on maintaining and increasing their content marketing investment in 2020.
• The marketers who did track it, 59% of them rated their ability to be as “excellent” or “very good.
• ” In 2020, 95% of video marketers plan to increase or maintain their spending on videos.
• Video Content Marketing Videos have helped almost 83% of people in lead generation process.
• In 2020, 59% of non-video marketers are expected to add and use Videos as their marketing tool.
• 80% of marketers say that videos have helped them in increasing their sales, while 87% of them say that it has increased traffic to their website.
• 79% of Video marketers use Facebook, but still, it has become effective and has also been a success among 85% of people.
• While 64% of B2B consumers are willing to spend 10 minutes or less watching video content.
• Only 63% of them are willing to watch 20-60 minutes videos if it’s a webinar.
• In 2019, 87% of LinkedIn video marketers considered it to be a successful channel.
• Stock photography/videography is used by 62% of marketers for their content.
• LinkedIn is being used by 95% of B2B marketers for organic content marketing.
• Talking about social media platforms, Twitter stands first at 86%, Facebook at 83%, YouTube at 53%, and Instagram at 46%.
• Emails are still a way of communicating for almost 87% of marketers, whereas 45% of them are still using storytelling.
• As few as 7% of B2B marketers make use of chatbots in their marketing, whereas 4% of them are using AI.
• When talking about incorporating interactive features into content, only 23% of marketers are doing the same.
• Video is still considered to be the hardest type of content to produce by 81% of marketers.
• Almost 20% of non-video marketers avoid using videos for marketing because they find it to be too expensive.
• 70% of marketers say that content with visuals performs much better than the ones without visuals.
• 20 B2B Content Marketing Statistics To Know in 2022: 71% of B2B marketers have said that content marketing has become more important to their organization in the last year.
• While only 40% of content marketers have a documented content strategy, 33% of content marketers have a strategy that is undocumented, and 20% plan to develop a strategy within the next 12 months.
• 85% of marketers report that content marketing provides a rewarding and purposeful career path.
• 70% of people would prefer to receive information about a company or learn something from a blog post rather than from a traditional advertisement.
• Blog posts rank as the most popular form of content at 65%, with webinars following at 52% and whitepapers and ebooks shortly behind at 50%.
• According to a study by Edelman and LinkedIn, 55% of decision-makers use thought leadership to find organizations they may hire, and 61% are willing to pay a premium for a company that delivers thought leadership.
• Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and leads to about three times as many leads.
• 80% of very successful content marketers spend more than 10% of their total marketing budgets on content.
• 71% of B2B marketers said they downloaded and consumed multiple assets to help with the decision-making process and an equal number said they shared such content with their team members.
• 53% of marketers are focused on repurposing content this year as a smart resource allocation strategy.
• If a recession were to occur this year, 24% of marketers expect to have to reduce their overall marketing budget, 20% expect to have to reframe their marketing goals, 20% believe they would have to reduce their scope of work, and 19% report they’d have to pivot their marketing strategy entirely.
• 73% of major organizations hire a third party to manage their content marketing strategy.
• The top 4 challenges marketers have reported are:1) Attracting quality leads (45%) 2) Finding the resources to create content faster (38%) 3) Generating enough traffic with content (35%) 4) Generating ROI and sales through content (34%) 18.
• 46% of marketers reported that one person (or group) in their organization is responsible for all types of content produced.
• Almost 90% of marketers believe repurposing their content is greater use of their time than creating content from scratch.
• Impact of Social Media Influencers:Influencer Marketing Stats 2021: Hence, it doesn’t come as a surprise that about 86% of marketers trust influencers.
• Instagram is the number one platform for influencers with 79% of brands using it to reach influencers and create campaigns.
• Facebook comes at the second spot at 46%, YouTube is third at 36%, Twitter has slipped in recent times but still controls about 24% of the market, and LinkedIn rests at the fifth spot at 12% according to a report from Business Insider.
• Sign Up Now #2 70% of Teens Prefer Influencers over Traditional Celebs Back in the day, teenagers looked at movie stars and pop sensations for advice but things are now changing, and about 4 in 10 millennials say that influencers understand them more than their friends.
• #3 About 49% of Buyers Depend on Recommendations from Influencers The 2021 statistics we’re seeing definitely highlight the importance of working with social media influencers.
• According to a report released by Twitter, about 49% of consumers look at reviews and 40% of them make a purchase based on it.
• #4 Influencers are More Popular among Women According to studies, about 86% of women on social media look for influencers before making a purchase.
• #5 Influencer Marketing Offers an ROI of 600% This is one of the most important statistics of 2021 as it highlights how beneficial influencer marketing can be and why so many businesses want to spend on influencers.
• According to a Marketing Week report, about 59% of businesses plan to increase influencer marketing budgets as businesses now earn over $6 for every $1 spent on influencer marketing.
• Moreover, the top 10% earn more than $20 on every dollar spent on working with influencers.
• About 22% of marketing experts agree that it’s the most effective method as well.
• The industry is said to be growing at a rate of 10% and is expected to hit the $10 billion mark this year according to the latest influencer marketing reports.
• #7 More than 50% of Beauty and Fashion Companies Now Use Influencer Marketing Influencer marketing is now common in almost all industries but it is more popular in certain industries.
• Including the beauty and fashion industry where 57% of big and small businesses are already working with influencers.
• Moreover, 21% more businesses intend to try influencer marketing in the next two years.
• Overall, about 67% of businesses engage in influencer marketing and have some form of relationship with influencers.
• About 71% of marketers have full faith in influencer marketing and they are on the lookout to form long-term relationships with influencers.
• YouTube comes in the second spot as it contributes to about 18% of purchasing decisions.
• Digital Marketing Statistics to Boost Your Brand – Orange Element: With people accessing 69% of their media on smartphones, it becomes apparent just how important it is to design content that’s well-suited to mobile platforms.
• 57% of users won’t recommend a business if they have a sub-par mobile site.
• ) Because of Facebook’s ever-changing algorithms, organic reach for branded pages is dishearteningly low at 2%, but things like user engagement can help bring this up—and here’s where your killer content comes in.
• For example, Facebook is the best platform for reaching older users, whereas 63% of 18–34 year olds are using Instagram and may be more effectively influenced there instead.
• 10 Content Marketing Statistics That’s Vital for Your Business in 2023 – WAZILE Inc.: In fact, content marketing costs up to 62% less than traditional marketing as it allows you to distribute content on online platforms such as social media, which is more pocket-friendly compared to spending on usual ways of advertising through print and broadcast media.
• 71% of Consumers Check a Blog Post in Their Buyer Journey You might be wondering:do people read blogs?
• The answer is yes — and surprisingly, they do pay attention to the point that it influences their purchase decisions because 71% of consumers check a blog post in their customer journey.
• 55% of Businesses Say That Improving the Quality of Content Was the Most Helpful in Making a Successful Content Marketing Strategy One of the most important things to consider with content marketing is the quality of content you produce.
• Hence why 55% of businesses say that improving their content has helped make a successful strategy.
• 41% Say That Attracting Quality Leads With Content is the Biggest Challenge in Content Marketing As much as improving your content can be helpful in your content marketing strategy, attracting quality leads using content also presents itself as the biggest challenge.
• With 41% of marketers claiming this, it’s crucial to come up with content that resonates with your target audience — something that will provide a long-term value and encourage them to know more about your brand, increasing their familiarity with your business and what it offers.
• 65% of Businesses With Successful Content Marketing Campaigns Run Content Audits There are several factors that contribute to a successful marketing campaign, and of course, there’s no one-size-fits-all approach to achieving worthwhile results in an instant.
• That’s why 65% of businesses today say that running content audits help make successful content marketing campaigns.
• 95% of Consumers Say That Content Enables Them to Trust a Business More Content is king and it is very powerful to the point that 95% of consumers trust a business more because of the content they produce.
• 91% of Marketers Use LinkedIn to Give Out Content If you’ve been taking your time in building your presence in social media to create relevance and awareness for your business, you may also want to go with LinkedIn.
• This is because 91% of marketers use LinkedIn to distribute professional content.
• 20 Brilliant B2B Marketing and Digital Business Stats and Facts: To succeed, B2B sales people need to focus on the three Rs—no, not reading, `riting and `rythmetic, but rather responsiveness (50% of sales go to the first salesperson to contact a prospect), relationships, and references.
• 55% of B2B buyers say they search for product/vendor information on social media.
• Yet while 95% of B2B marketers have created corporate social media accounts, half are still not active on social media on a regular basis.
• But 80% of B2B decision makers prefer to get information from articles rather than advertising, and 40% of millennials don’t trust ads—so strong organic tactics need to be part of the mix as well.
• Trade shows remain the top source for B2B lead generation, with 77% of marketers saying they generate a significant quantity of leads.
• 59% of CMOs still say print marketing is an effective channel—and 64% of buyers cite print among their trusted sources of information—while 51% still see value in direct mail.
• 80% of business decision makers prefer to get company information in a series of articles versus an advertisement.
• B2B customers now expect the same range of omnichannel buying options they enjoy as consumers – which is why almost half of B2B buyers (49%) prefer to use consumer websites to make work-related purchases.
• 52% of B2B buyers say they expect half of their purchases to be made online by 2018.
• 78% of B2B customers (and 83% of consumers) say fulfillment options – such as next-day delivery – are important or very important.
• Although 95% of B2B marketers have created corporate social media accounts, half still are not active on social media on a regular basis–and just 10% feel they are able to articulate the business value of social media efforts.
• Good old-fashioned trade shows remain the top source for B2B lead generation, with 77% of marketers saying they generate a significant quantity of leads, and 82% saying they generate high-quality leads.
• Just 34% of B2B organizations say they touch leads with lead nurturing on a monthly basis.
• 59% of CMOs still say print advertising is an effective marketing channel.
• 58% say the same for TV, 51% direct mail, and almost half radio and telemarketing.
• Marketers trying to appeal to this group need to understand that, but also that this group is highly educated (33% have a college degree) but struggling financially:many have student loan debt, 52% don’t have enough money to cover basic living costs, and 35% are either unemployed or work part-time.
• Though the heyday of print may be over, the two most trusted sources of information remain the online versions of traditional media outlets (68%) and print (64%).
• digital vs traditional marketing statistics: Recently, 50% of marketers said they believe digital marketing has a foothold over traditional due to the interaction digital marketing opens with customers.
• 124 Eye-Opening Digital Marketing Statistics (2023) – VeecoTech: 17 Crucial Website Statistics that Impact Your Business 75% of users admit to making judgments about a company’s credibility based on their website’s design.
• (Kinesis) 89% of consumers shop with a competitor after a poor user experience.
• (WebFX) 85% of B2B customers search the web before making a purchase decision.
• (Clarity Quest) 95% of a website user’s first impressions is design-related.
• (Kinesis) Website is the #2 channel used in marketing, behind social media (Hubspot) 72% of small businesses have a website.
• Photos/images (40%), colour (39%), and videos (21%) were the top visual elements consumers appreciate in website design.
• (Portent) Nearly 70% of consumers admit that page speed influences their likeliness to buy.
• (Unbounce) 64% of smartphone users expect a web page to load in four seconds or less (Website Builder Expert) Users spend 88% more time on pages with videos.
• 1% of web designers believe that a non-responsive design is a top reason why visitors leave a website.
• (Goodfirms) Image Source:GoodFirms 50% of consumers believe that website design is crucial to a business’s overall brand.
• (Top Design Firms) 42% of people will leave a website because of poor functionality.
• 20 Useful E-commerce Statistics You Need to Know E-commerce will make up 22% of global retail sales by 2023.
• (The Social Shepherd) More than 40% of e-commerce businesses agreed that SEO is the channel that delivers the best results for e-commerce websites.
• 56 Trillion in retail e-commerce sales were made from mobile users (Ecommerce Guide) 62% of consumers would prefer to use a customer service bot rather than waiting for human agents to answer their requests.
• (Tidio) 81% of customers trust the advice of their friends and family first.
• (Hubspot) 95% of consumers surveyed would buy from a brand again if they had a satisfactory return experience.
• (Martech) Online stores with a social media presence have up to 32% more sales on average.
• (Barilliance) 53% of people say free shipping is the top reason they shop online.
• (Oberlo) Ecommerce stores that have Facebook Messenger chatbot along with an abandoned cart chatbox boost revenue by between 7 and 25%.
• (Martech) Globally, credit cards are the preferred method of payment, being used in 53% of transactions, followed by digital payment systems (43%) and debit cards (38%).
• (Kinsta) 42% of customers want more testimonials from e-commerce sites.
• (Big Commerce) 69% of online shoppers want more reviews from e-commerce sites.
• (Big Commerce) 77% of people take the time to read product reviews before they make any purchases online (Business.
• com) Image Source:Wordstream Mobile shoppers who read product reviews on social media channels show conversion rates of up to 133% (Kinsta) Brands adopting voice search may grow e-commerce revenue by 30%.
• 20 Surprising but Important SEO Statistics Businesses that blog get 55% more traffic to their websites.
• (Hubspot) Nearly 60% of the pages ranking in the top 10 Google results are 3 or more years old.
• (Backlinko) More than 70% of SEO experts found that blogs are the most helpful SEO resources.
• Although long-tailed keywords have less search volume, they have a click-through rate of 3-5% higher than generic searches.
• More than 50% of smartphone users have discovered a new brand or product through mobile search.
• (Google) 30% of Google searches from a mobile device include a location.
• 20 Google Ads and Facebook Ads Statistics You Need to Know Brand awareness can be increased by up to 80% through Google paid ads.
• (Smallbizgenius) Google Ads have a 200% ROI (earning $2 for every $1 spent).
• (Think with Google) 68% of marketers stated that paid advertising is “very important” or “extremely important” to their overall marketing strategy.
• (Hubspot) 41% of clicks in Google searches go to the top three sponsored ads.
• (Investpcro) 52% of online shoppers who click on a PPC ad will follow up with a call to the business.
• (Smallbizgenius) Facebook Advertising Statistics 93% of marketers use Facebook advertising regularly.
• (Social Media Examiner) For Facebook ads, video content is the most popular content with almost 69% of marketers saying it performs the best.
• (Databox) 58% of surveyed Facebook users visited a brand’s website from a Story ad and 31% browsed a Facebook Shop.
• ) (Digiday) More than 90% of visitors who read your Facebook ads headline also read your call to action (CTA).
• ) (Snov) 59% of respondents say that marketing emails have influenced their purchases.
• (Salescycle) 70% of marketers said their highest-performing emails were sent from a person, not a brand.
• (Databox) Nearly 9 of every 10 marketers use email marketing to distribute their content (Content Marketing Institute) Emails with personalized subject lines generate 50% higher open rates.
• (Yes Marketing) On average, the open rate for email marketing is 18% (Tidio) 47% of email recipients will open your email based solely on the subject line.
• (Optinmonster) Over 60% of small businesses say their email marketing strategy is effective.
• (Tidio) Including the value your recipients get by opening the email into the subject lines increases open rates by up to 85%.
• (Databox) Most marketers (66%) created a responsive email template as one of their efforts to optimize for mobile devices.
• (Tidio) 48% of B2B marketers agree that email marketing is the most effective marketing channel in driving conversions.
• (Tidio) 93% of the email content is blog posts and short articles (Tidio) The three best days to send emails are Tuesday, Wednesday, and Thursday.
• (Hootsuite) 57% of people recently surveyed say they’d prefer seeing polls and quizzes from brands on Instagram compared to other platforms.
• (Instagram Business) 44% of people use Instagram weekly to shop using features like shopping tags and the Shop tag.
• (HootSuite) Image Source:Datareportal 66% of Facebook users visit a local business page at least once a week.
• (Facebook) People are 53% more likely to buy from a business using live chat (Facebook Business) Facebook is second to YouTube in live video with 42.
• 6% of user shares (Insider Intelligence) TikTok The majority of people use TikTok to find funny/entertaining content.
• (Hootsuite) 73% report that they feel a deeper connection to companies.
• (Hootsuite) 37% of TikTik users discover a product on the app and immediately want to buy it.
• (they call it an “infinity loop’) (TikTok) LinkedIn 40% of B2B marketers surveyed indicated LinkedIn as the most effective channel for driving high-quality leads.
• (LinkedIn Business) 77% of content marketers say LinkedIn produces the best organic results.
• 88% of video marketers are satisfied with the ROI of their video marketing efforts on social media (Animato) Video marketers get 66% more qualified leads per year.
• (Optinmonster) 73% of consumers prefer watching a video to reading about a product.
• (Wyzowl) 78% of people say they’ve been convinced to buy or download a piece of software or app by watching a video.
• (Wyzowl) 65% of Gen Z want more content that is relevant to them compared to popular content.
• Track The Social Media Stat Frenzy – Marketing Solved: Audience section you can see average monthly views daily impressions and daily views If you publish videos on Facebook “you’ll have access to in-depth video metrics, such as how often a video was viewed for three seconds, 30 seconds or 95% of the total video length.
• Digital Marketing vs Television:5 Stats That’ll REALLY Surprise You – Found: At a glance… 52% of marketers don’t believe you need to use television to reach the masses New Zealand’s digital ad-spend outdoes TV $1.
• 06bn to $566m 84% of Millennials don’t trust traditional advertising The cost of TV advertising will grow by 6.
• The Digital Trends Report found that 52% of marketers feel you don’t need to use television to reach a mass audience.
• In fact, recent surveys have shown:Subscription Video on Demand viewership in New Zealand will soon overtake regular television, having skyrocketed from 6% in 2014 to 37% in 2018 for services like Netflix, Amazon Prime, and Lightbox (Source).
• Close to 60% of viewers have time-shifted some of their programming and watched advert-free via online services such as Netflix, Neon, or by recording shows directly to their DVRs (Source).
• It doesn’t end there:Search continues to dominate with 62% of the total digital spend, recording revenue in 2018 of $659.
• With global TV advertising sales falling almost 4% in 2019 – the steepest drop since the global recession – the shift to digital is showing no signs of slowing down.
• 3 84% of Millennials don’t trust traditional advertising Source:Ascend2 Here’s a stat that might surprise you!
• A 2014 survey by The McCarthy Group found that 84% of millennials don’t trust traditional advertising.
• They’re far more likely to trust your online advert instead:29% of users said they trust search engine ads, while 33% trust online banner ads (Source).
• Blog posts, articles, and newsletters follow closely behind at 31% and 30% respectively (Source).
• Variety’s annual analysis of the American advertising market in 2016, for example, found that the cost of a 30 second Ad grew by 15%.
• Of these, Cadbury saw its online sector generate 20% of the sales and recorded an additional reach of 19%.
• Here’s the kicker – Cadbury only invested 7% of its budget into online advertising.
• Here’s a glimpse:Digital, inbound, and content marketing generates leads that cost 61% less than cold calling or direct mail (Source).
• Important Asia Pacific Digital Marketing Statistics to Lookout For – Digitalseed: Honesty and Transparency TTDigitals believes in 100% transparency in communication.
• MIT School of Distance Education’s website traffic has increased by 300% within a year of implementation.
• 5 B2B Content Marketing Stats to guide your 2021 strategy — Tiga: 67% of B2B content teams say top-of-funnel content is the type of content they create most Databox) There are clear benefits to creating ‘bottom of the funnel’ content.
• Research has shown that this is a popular stance when it comes to B2B content production as 67% of B2B content teams choose to create top-of-funnel content.
• Just 28% say that they create their content for people who are in the middle of the funnel, and only 5% create content on B2B buyers moments away from buying.
• Listicles get 218% more shares than “how to” tutorial-style posts (Backlinko) Listicles get twice as many shares compared to how-to tutorials.
• 52% of B2B buyers say they’re “definitely” more likely to buy from a brand once they’ve read their content (MarketingCharts) Content is an effective way to direct traffic to B2B sites, and will more than likely drive leads into your sales funnel.
• Best Social Media Marketing Strategy in 2022- Social Media Marketing Strategy and Statistics: Pro Tip:Use your insights to keep track of engagement and consistently seek to set a goal of increasing your engagement rate by at least 30%.
• One Harvard study found out that we make 95% of our purchasing decisions emotionally, which means we are buying not based on logic but on our feelings.
• Facebook Marketing Stats for 2021 – Digital Air Strike: Keep in mind about 85% of Facebook users watch videos with the sound off so captioning videos or adding words is key for Facebook marketing.
• 99% of Facebook users 16 to 64 years old are also logging into their YouTube, Instagram and Twitter accounts, among other social media platforms.
• 79% of Facebook users only access the site through their mobile devices, so keep this in mind when creating images, graphics, video, and copy for your Facebook marketing posts and ads.
• About 75% of online users with an income of more than $75,000 are on Facebook.
• These retargeting statistics tell why it is such a crucial digital marketing technique – ArabyAds Blog: 5%:According to research reports, retargeted ads can send 26 percent of shoppers back to the company’s website and reduce the cart abandonment rate by 6.
• 25+ Hot Digital Marketing Statistics You Must Know About In 2022: Influencer marketing statistics show that 38% of consumers check for influencer reviews when online shopping.
• 93% of social media users utilize Instagram for influencer marketing, the State of Influencer Marketing report suggests.
• Additionally, the interest in TikTok has risen by 325% for the same exact reason.
• In fact, 68% of marketers are intending to leverage the platform for influencer marketing in 2022.
• Almost 70% of digital marketers are investing in search engine optimization.
• Over 54% of all web traffic around the globe comes from mobile searches.
• Almost 68% of all clicks belong to the first 5 organic search result pages.
• On average, content marketing’s cost is 62% lower than traditional marketing’s cost.
• 62% of businesses prefer to outsource content marketing to other businesses.
• 70% of responders believe that articles are a more informative means of learning about the company than ads.
• More than 73% of responders suggest that social media has increased the overall effectiveness of their marketing campaigns.
• 94% of B2C digital marketers prefer Facebook as their main social media outlet, whereas, 94% of B2B marketers choose LinkedIn.
• 71% of responders who’ve had a positive and fruitful experience with the brand on social media are more likely to recommend it to their family and friends.
• 75% of businesses had a budget set aside for influencer marketing in 2021.
• Search engines are responsible for almost 70% of all online experiences.
• In 2020 72% of marketers were investing in content marketing, and in 2021 this number grew to 82%.
• 81% of B2B marketers consider email newsletters their all-time favorite form of content marketing.
• 54% of consumers use social media platforms to find out more information about a product.
• 63% of digital marketers strongly believe that social media platforms are crucial to their business.
• 12 Days of Data 2020, Day 10:SEO Link Decay Statistics – Trust Insights Marketing Analytics Consulting: 5% loss of referring domains (people stop linking to your page if it stops working) 86.
• 1% loss of social shares (people stop sharing pages that don’t work) 91.
• 25% of pages that were formerly working had gone bad in 2020, most of which were 404 errors, meaning the page simply ceased to exist.
• 5% of dead links lose their referring domains means that when it comes to demonstrating authority in a space, you don’t want to be linking to things that no longer work.
• 7 statistics that prove the importance of social media marketing in business – WIREDGORILLA: 55% of consumers learn about new brands on social Social media is a place for discovery and now, it’s nearly as common for consumers to learn about brands or companies on social as it is through TV or radio ads.
• Why it’s important When we look closer at the 55% of consumers who learn about new brands on social, Gen Z and Millennials are especially likely to use social for brand discovery.
• 43% of consumers increased their social media use to discover new products in the last year When the COVID-19 pandemic shut down the physical world and people hunkered down at home, nearly everything shifted to the digital space.
• Consumer use of social to discover or learn about new products or services increased 43%—a trend that’s expected to continue in the next three years.
• 78% of consumers are willing to buy from a company after having a positive experience with them on social Never underestimate the impact of a positive experience with your brand or company on social.
• 80% of business executives think it’s very important or essential to invest additional resources in social media marketing Social can make big brands feel welcoming and accessible.
• Fortunately, businesses now see social as a vehicle for business growth and 80% of executives think it’s absolutely essential to invest additional resources into social media marketing.
• Why it’s important It’s not just executives who think investing in social is critical—62% of consumers believe brands need a strong social presence to succeed in the long run.
• 91% of executives will increase social media marketing budgets in the next 3 years In past years, securing a budget and resources for social media marketing has been one of the biggest challenges marketers faced.
• Over half of the executives surveyed anticipate that their social marketing budgets will increase by over 50% by 2024.
• 72% of companies use social media data to inform business decisions According to 72% of executives surveyed, social data is already the top data source used to inform business decisions, even more so than market research.
• And going forward, 85% agree that social data will be a primary source of business intelligence.
• Finally, we’re seeing this shift, and according to the latest Sprout Social Index™, Edition XVII:Elevate, 90% of marketers agree that social data enables them to stay ahead of their competitors.
• 6 Interesting Digital Marketing Facts and Statistics For 2021 – KRUSH: SEO-related Facts About 93% of all successful online connections begin from an online search engine.
• Moreover, about 72% of digital marketers prefer using high-quality content as their powerful and efficient SEO tool.
• The opening rate of welcome emails sent to the audience is about 82%, a research done by GetResponse.
• What’s more, about 49% of all people open and read their emails using mobile devices.
• Moreover, 98% of all salespersons tend to reach their quotas just because of selling through social media platforms.
• Basing on research conducted by Yieldify in July 2020, 54% of the companies surveyed use AI features.
• They were efficient in performance, and digital marketing stats show that this number could rise to 89% by the end of 2021.
• Mobile Commerce Facts Basing on research done by the Pew Research Center, at least 96% of Americans own a mobile phone.
• Besides, 51% of the audiences use their mobile devices to research new products and brands on the market.
• And studies reveal that 88% of customers tend to avoid websites that have a negative experience.
• Yes, affiliate marketing can pay, but it’s important to note that nearly 57% of affiliate marketers make less than $10,000 a year, while 16.
• 20 Local SEO Stats of 2021 for Impactful Digital Marketing | InsideTechno: 46% of the search volume on Google are requests for a local service or business.
• Talking in terms of lead generation, statistics say that 76% of the people that perform local searches show up at the address mentioned in the search they selected.
• To further augment the statement above, the percentage conversion into sales from local Google searches is as high as 28%!
• It is time to start including “Near me” and “Where to buy” keywords in your SEO strategy, for the search volume containing these terms jumped by 200% between 2017 and ‘19!
• If you haven’t yet pinned your business location to Google Maps, you are missing out on the 42% of the local search traffic that clicks on businesses inside Google Maps Pack.
• Interestingly enough, 86% of the people search for the location of a business on Google Maps.
• With 40% of mobile device searches being with local keywords, it makes sense to design responsive websites friendly with all mobile devices.
• Adding to that fact is the stat that says that businesses with a responsive website get contacted by 61% of the searchers using mobile.
• These statistics say that 88% of local searches through mobile devices reach out to the businesses (either by call or visit) within 24 hours.
• 45% of mobile phone shoppers would purchase online but pick up from the store.
• In another statistic, it was found that 30% of the local search volume came from mobile devices.
• According to this statistic, higher than 40% of retail revenue came through organic traffic.
• In a surprising metric, Google doesn’t send traffic to 91% of the pages!
• Yelp, a platform where employees review businesses and their companies, shows up in local search results that contain a city name, and that too in the top 5 positions no less, 92% of the time.
• Korean outbound tourism statistics and most popular destinations – Punch Digital Marketing: 7 million Koreans, more than half of the population, traveled abroad (up 8% from the previous year).
• 8% of travelers use portal sites like Naver and Daum when they are looking for information about their trip.
• Especially flight bookings have been increased by 52% to Singapore, 38% to Taiwan, 33% to Macau, 22% to Hong Kong, 129% to Vladivostok in comparison of 2018 data while trips to Japan has been decreased down to 38%.
• 5 Local and Mobile Stats to Inform Your SEO Strategy – AnthonyGaenzle.Com | Influencer Marketing, SEO, and Personal Branding: 87% of Smartphone Users Perform a Search Query at Least Once Per Day That’s right:nearly 9 out of 10 smartphone users Google at least once a day.
• Furthermore, to better illustrate how the relationship relates to customer behavior, consider that 60% of adults in the US use mobile devices to search for information specifically on local products and services.
• 83% of the time, top results for keyword searches are mobile-friendly, and 81% of the time all of the top three results are mobile-friendly.
• Business Address / Location is the Key Piece of Information Recall the stat that 60% of American adults want to know specific information on local products and services?
• 50% of Mobile Search Users Visit the Stores they Found in One Day Local and mobile SEO effectively shapes customer behavior.
• Local searches lead 50% of mobile visitors, for instance, to visit the actual stores within one day.
• That’s online to offline conversion, all sparked by a mobile search, that 87% of all smartphone users do, most of whom want to know the business location.
• That’s 18% of people who perform local searches, which might seem like a small amount, but to observe close to 20% actually buying within a day of mobile local search is a significant indicator of the continued rise of the trend.
• Reviews Matter to 88% of Consumers as Much as Personal Recommendations As a form of validation, user-generated content such as reviews and ratings have received some flak over the years.
• So much so, apparently, that 88% of consumers would take an online review like a personal recommendation.
• The Ultimate List of Digital Marketing Growth Statistics: A survey estimated that between 2021 and 2022, social media users raised by around 10%.
• About 80% of B2-B businesses utilize Twitter for organic social media marketing and advertisements.
• 96% of B2B content marketers employ LinkedIn for organic social media marketing.
• More than 50% of marketers state keyword rankings and organic traffic are the greatest methods to measure their SEO strategies’ success.
• Exclusively 17% of marketers utilize landing page A/B tests to enhance conversion rates.
• 5% of mobile e-commerce website visits are transformed into investments, compared to 3.
• 63% of all shopping starts online, even if the investment occurs in a store.
• 70% of online marketers state that SEO is more useful than PPC for generating leads.
• You should be aware of PPC Stats 2021 | PPC Marketing Guide: The company’s survey revealed that on-page conversions account for 24% of leads while email marketing accounts for 18%.
• Users trust ads that speak to them, and in a survey of 506 respondents, 75% said they click on ads that make it easier for them to find the information they’re looking for.
• A survey of 506 respondents revealed that 75% clicked on ads that addressed their queries or were relevant to them.
• 49% percent of users prefer these when they’re presented with both shopping and video ads (31% and 16%).
• Twenty-nine percent of all people with an ad blocker use desktop and laptop computers, while 19% use their smartphone and 7% use tablets.
• The top three reasons people use ad blockers are they are shown too many ads (49%), being shown irrelevant/annoying ads (47%), and ads being too intrusive (44%).
• Given the same study, 38% of users admitted that they used an ad blocker because they did not like ads taking up too much screen space and also because bugs and viruses are prevalent in adverts.
• These polls show that 65% of survey data were received from Americans who are likely to always trust Google’s information without verifying it independently, with other tech giants not far behind.
• 70% of search traffic stems from phrases that are between 4 and 6 words long.
• About 60% of eCommerce queries come from users looking for information to learn about a broad category or product.
• Amazon Ads has a 618% higher conversion rate than other platforms, but this doesn’t mean the cost-per-click (CPC) is also higher.
• 83% of marketers that cover business to business (B2B) advertising ranked social media as their second-most successful strategy in driving leads, following search engine marketing.
• Social media has become the most influential factor for 37% of all online shoppers when deciding what to purchase.
• Mind-Blowing Digital Marketing ROI Statistics (2022) – Blue Digital Pixel #1 Digital marketing Agency: Did you know that the digital marketing industry is expected to grow at a CAGR of 53% between 2015 and 2022?
• The digital marketing industry is expected to grow at a CAGR of 53% between 2015 and 2022.
• In fact, the digital marketing industry has been growing at a CAGR of 53% between 2015 and 2022.
• How Digital Marketing & Ecommerce Changed During Lockdown:Statistics to Inform Your Strategy | Xanthos Blog: uk/businessindustryandtrade/retailindustry/timeseries/j4mc/drsi Retail sales increased 12% compared with the fall in April.
• 8% due to non-essential shops reopening on the 15th of June over all retail destinations.
• 59% of UK consumers shopped in more local stores since lockdown to support local business.
• 57% of consumers surveyed said they were more likely to buy from a brand that sells locally sourced products after lockdown than they would have before COVID.
• 61% of social media users under 35 used social media apps to look up news updates during April 2020, which is a 9% increase in social content consumption compared to January.
• In the 35-55 age bracket it rose 8% to 42% and 35% of over 55s which is a rise of 6%.
• This has meant that social app usage among this age group has growth by 200% this year, after a rise of 100% in 2019.
• What should you know About Social Media Marketing Statistics in 2021: With more than 45% of the world’s population on social media, it is everywhere!
• 2% Millennials have the highest number of social media users and have the broadest access to smartphones.
• Some noteworthy statistics include:89% of marketers use Facebook for brand marketing campaigns By the third quarter of 2019, over 2.
• Twitter Statistics With a 9% year-on-year rise in revenue in the third quarter of 2019at $824 million, marketers need to keep an eye on the latest social media stats on Twitter.
• Some of these stats include:Link clicks are your best bet of gaining views and sharing your content, and they account for 92% of all user interaction with tweets The average median engagement of every 0.
• 048% Twitter is the best platform to get your consumer reviews There are over 1.
• Users are 31% more likely to recall what they saw on Twitter in comparison with general online browsing 53% of users say they bought a product they first saw on the app Twitter ads are 11% more effective than TV ads during live events Wednesdays and Fridays at 9 am are the best times to post.
• The platform continues to be the most successful influencer marketing, as 89% of marketers say that it’s the most vital social media platform for influencer marketing.
• Video on Instagram performs much better than image posts with 49% higher interactions.
• 41% of marketers make use of Instagram video and 44% plan to use Instagram video by 2020 59% of Instagram users are under age 30, and 32% of teenagers consider the platform as the best social network.
• Thus this age demographics will be a suitable marketing platform for essay review services for websites such as Best Writers Online Female internet users make use of Instagram more than men, at 38% vs.
• The number of marketers sharing video content on LinkedIn is currently around 55% and is projected to rise to 65% in 2021.
• com Growtheme 50% Complete Want to get the hashtag strategy that brings me 11,000 impressions per post?
• Social Media Marketing Statistics You Should Know in 2020: 42% of social marketers already developed a strategy for Facebook Live.
• According to Social Media Examiner, 93% of social media advertisers use Facebook ads regularly.
• Approximately 25% of Facebook’s total ad revenue came from Instagram in 2019.
• By the end of 2020, the revenue shared by Instagram will rise to 30% globally.
• 78% say that Instagram posts are more effective in Influencer marketing, while 73% repeat the same for Instagram Stories.
• According to Hootsuite, 92% of Instagram users say that they made a purchase, followed a brand, or clicked on their website after seeing a product or service.
• For company websites, over 46% of social media traffic comes from LinkedIn.
• LinkedIn is 277% more effective than Facebook in generating leads, according to Sproutsocial.
• Twitter statistics:According to Neil Patel, clicking on tweet links contributes to 92% of all interactions.
• According to Hubspot, 53% of users said they bought a product they first saw on Twitter.
• According to Dreamgrow, 78% of people who complain about a brand through the platform expect a response within an hour.
• The men to women ratio is:55% to 45% Pinterest statistics:It is an inspirational platform.
• According to SproutSocial, the platform reaches 83% of women ages 25-54.
• 2021 Digital Marketing Trends:Predictions, Stats & More!: Secondly, marketers and SEO experts need to focus on displaying rich snippets, because 80% of Google Home results come from snippets Thirdly, the length of voice searches is longer than typical searches.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week – Onsavii: IKEA sees 495% social lift from TV ads airing during Game of Thrones Research by 4C Insights has revealed that IKEA tops the list of brands who saw the greatest social lift from ads airing during ‘Game of Thrones’ in the UK.
• IKEA saw a 495% TV social lift during this season of ‘Game of Thrones’.
• O2 follows in a close second, with just one ad airing in the breaks between this season’s episodes achieving a social lift of 335% for the brand.
• BT came in third, with a whopping eight ads generating a social lift of 242%.
• Similarly, 80% of results on pages one and two of Google had a ‘time to first byte’ (a measurement to indicate the responsiveness of a site) below 0.
• For example, 86% of page one results and 85% of page two results now use next-generation image formats such as WebP, JPEG2000 and JPEG XR, which load faster and use up less of users’ mobile data.
• The study, conducted among 2,000 UK consumers, identified that just 20% of customer journeys now start with the restaurant’s own website.
• Instead, half begin with a search engine, 12% begin on map apps such as Google and Apple Maps, a further 7% start on review sites such as Yelp and Foursquare.
• Interestingly, 5% begin on delivery sites such as Deliveroo and Uber Eats.
• The study also found that 81% of consumers attribute terms like ‘takes reservations’, ‘has outdoor seating’, ‘drive-thru’ or ‘gluten-free options’ in their search query.
• Speed is also an important factor, with 12% of people expecting to find this information just one hour before they visit or pick-up an order from a restaurant.
• Nearly half of UK consumers think the ad industry needs to change A new report by Conversant, which involves a survey of consumers across seven different countries, found that 48% of UK consumers dislike seeing the same ads multiple times.
• As a result of this, 48% of Brits believe the advertising industry needs to change.
• Consumers in the US and Germany experience a similar level of repetitive ads, with the desire for the industry to move away from this activity also between 47 and 49% respectively.
• However, only 38% of consumers in France dislike this advertising technique, with only 40% believing change is needed.
• The research also revealed that 29% of UK consumers judge brands poorly when they produce bad advertising.
• While consumers are open to adverts, 44% would prefer to see fewer ads, with those that they do see to be more relevant and useful to the individual.
• This desire was also reflected in the US and Germany, but again less so in France, where only 15% of French consumers would be put off a brand by its poor advertising.
• Amazon’s brand value increases by 91% since 2018 BrandZ’s report has revealed the world’s most valuable retail brands are worth $339 billion more this year than the last.
• The world’s number one brand, Amazon, has seen a 91% increase from 2018 – now with an estimated brand value of $315,505m.
• Chinese e-commerce giant Alibaba, the world’s largest online and mobile commerce business, has seen its brand value increase by 48% to $131.
• Digital Marketing Importance with Interesting Stats And Facts For Business: 71% of consumers say they are more likely to purchase from a company that has personalized content3.
• Hubspot research shows that 37% of people will unsubscribe from an email list if the content isn’t relevant to them4.
• 71% of consumers say they are more likely to purchase from a company that has personalized content3.
• Hubspot research shows that 37% of people will unsubscribe from an email list if the content isn’t relevant to them4.
• LinkedIn is 277% more efficient at generating leads thanConclusion Digital marketing has become one of the most important aspects of any business.
• In fact, 78% of small businesses say that digital marketing has helped them acquire new customers.
• (Source:Clutch) Here are some other interesting statistics and facts about digital marketing:– 92% of marketers worldwide say that digital marketing is very or extremely effective in achieving their goals.
• (Source:Social Media Examiner) – 60% of consumers say they have made a purchase as a result of seeing a brand on social media.
• (Source:Sprout Social) – 48% of consumers believe that the best way to contact a business is through social media marketing.
• Content marketing generates 3 times as many leads as outbound marketing but costs 62% less.
• HubSpot research shows that companies who blog receive 97% more links to their website through an effective backlinks strategy.
• And B2B marketers who use blogs generate 67% more leads than those who don’t.
• 71% of consumers say they are more likely to purchase from a company that has personalized content According to a study conducted by Accenture, 71% of consumers say they are more likely to purchase from a company that has personalized content.
• Hubspot research shows that 37% of people will unsubscribe from an email list if the content isn’t relevant to them Relevance plays a crucial role in email marketing.
• If your email content isn’t relevant to your audience, you run the risk of 37% of them unsubscribing from your list.
• LinkedIn is 277% more efficient at generating leads than When it comes to generating leads, LinkedIn is 277% more effective than Facebook and Twitter combined.
• 4 stats to enhance your 2021 social media marketing strategy –: Obviously, 2020 was a unique year due to the COVID-19 pandemic, Forbes reported that internet usage increased by 50-70%as people turned to the internet for news and entertainment.
• Poor customer service will impact your following According to Sprout Social, 49% of consumers said they’d unfollow brands due to poor customer service.
• Visual content for the win Sprout Social’s research concludes that 68% of consumers would prefer to engage with images and 50% would prefer to interact with video content.
• 65% of people are visual learners, so inform your audience about your brand with this type of content!
• 2020 Content Marketing Statistics You Shouldn’t Miss: AI Products Customer Service AI Chatbot AI-Powered Staffing Software Industrial IoT Software Headless E-Commerce Platform Redefining Customer Support With AI Chatbot Achieve 50% increase in agent productivity and 80% in CSAT.
• As per a recent report of HubSpot, 54% of consumers prefer to see video content of the brand they support.
• 92% of marketers reported that their company views content as a business asset, as per a research of content marketing institute.
• 78% of content marketers incorporate press release services into their content strategy as per a research by Cision.
• Changes to SEO (Search Engine Optimization) is the top concern with 61% weightage in content marketing organizations, further followed by social media algorithm changes with 45% weightage, as per a research by Content marketing Institute.
• Among all types of visual contents, stock photography and infographics are the most frequently used ones with probability of 40% and 37% respectively.
• Another report of Growcode stated that use of videos on landing pages will improve conversions by 86%.
• As per a survey of Blue Corona, 84% of customers don’t make any purchase if they are dealing with an unsecured website.
• Another revealing fact that came from HubSpot stated that 61% of marketers keep SEO improvisation as their top inbound marketing priority to grow their online presence.
• MarTech also stated that 70-80% search engine users focus only on organic results, which in turn, makes it crucial for companies to rank organically on search engine results.
• A revealing fact from Statista, has cleared that 52% of web traffic worldwide comes from mobile and therefore smartphone users and shoppers are the major decision makers for success of a website.
• As per Jody Nimetz, Google drives 96% of the mobile search traffic and with the recent algorithm changes in Google, companies are required to stress more on mobile first practices to gain consumer trust.
• Another fact from Google specifies that 53% of mobile users intend to switch to other website if it takes more than 2 seconds of loading time.
• As per a survey of content marketing institute, around 61% of B2B content marketers increased their social media usage in 2019, which will further grow in 2020 giving greater weightage to the social media segment.
• In the recent year, Email marketing has been a primary lead generation channel for 89% of marketers and set to grow further in the year 2020, as per Juvlon.
• Further, videos added to email content can increase click rates 300% according to reports by Martech Advisor.
• When it comes to email marketing, 62% of customers open emails because of a personalized subject line, whereas, 40% of consumers prefer that company mails should be more informative rather than being promotional one.
• HubSpot has revealed that 43% of B2B marketers say blogging is the most important content that they produce.
• 53% of marketers stress more on creating blog as their top inbound marketing priority, as per a study by state of Inbound.
• In the current market scenario, 63% of marketers are actively investing in search engine optimization and this figure is going to grow bigger in 2020.
• 5 cool digital marketing statistics | Infographic | Comms Axis :Comms Axis | Content, Marketing & Sales combined: Another is about the impact of emojis (that’s right:emojis) on email open rates – apparently the ‘faces with tears of joy’ emoji is the most successful with an open rate of 41%.
• Content marketing stats to bring to your MD | Recruitment Marketing: For example, if your goal was to increase website page views by 5% and your plan-of-action was to use paid social media campaigns and increase your blog content, how much of your current website traffic was a direct result of these variables?
• The latest digital marketing statistics: SEO:49% of users say they use Google to discover or find a new item or product.
• (Think with Google) About 64% of marketers actively invest time in search engine optimization (SEO).
• (HubSpot) Only 17% of marketers use landing page A/B tests to improve conversion rates.
• (HubSpot) Over a two year period, there was a 900%+ growth in mobile searches for “___ near me today/tonight.
• (Statista) The number of marketers who say Facebook is “critical” or “important” to their business has increased 83% in just 2 years.
• (WPForms) Email Roughly 80% of marketers have reported an increase in email engagement over the past 12 months.
• (OptinMonster) 50% of small and medium-sized businesses use their marketing automation software to send email drip campaigns.
• (Statista) Paid Media 33% of marketers use paid advertising to increase their brand awareness.
• (HubSpot) The Google Display Network reaches 90% of Internet users worldwide.
• (HubSpot) Digital Advertising Companies that blog get 55% more web traffic.
• (WPForms) 20% of people will read the text on a page, but 80% of people will watch a video.
• (MYSMN) 78% of marketers believe that custom content is where the industry is headed.
• Social Media Marketing Statistics Behavior: 50% of the total global population uses social media, which amounts to over 3.
• Facebook usage is declining in teens, with 51% of teens saying they use the platform (as compared to 71% in 2015).
• 27% of internet users say they find new products through paid social ads, proving that these can be used to boost your reach and connect with new audiences.
• 52% of online brand discovery happens in public social feeds, so optimizing your content for high-engagement, with relevant hashtags, and with boosted posts can make a huge difference.
• 43% of all internet users will get on social media when researching things to buy or browsing for new purchase ideas.
• Which leads us to our next statistic:On Pinterest, 75% of Pinners are “very interested” in discovering new products, which is 20% higher than the 55% of users on other social platforms who expressed the same thing.
• 13% of social media users say that a “buy” button (like CTAs on ads, or Shoppable posts on Instagram) would increase their likelihood to purchase on social.
• 80% of people who have watched a YouTube video during their buying journey watched said video early on.
• Still, there are plenty of tools you can use to create high-performing video and these statistics prove that you really need to be using video for your channels:90% of internet users watch video online at least once per month, and they often watch videos on social.
• 85% of video is watched on Facebook without sound, and this trend follows through on other social platforms.
• 60% of people asked in a recent study said they watched at least one video on Facebook, Twitter, Snapchat, or Instagram in the past month.
• Cost per leads on LinkedIn is 28% lower than on Google Ads, and it offers incredible targeting capabilities that are particularly useful for B2B businesses.
• Twitter users linger over ads 24% longer than users on other platforms, which may make it a great platform if you have an offer or ad you want users to spend time thinking about.
• 58% of users in the United States have said they grew more interested in brands after seeing it in Facebook Stories, making it an outstanding platform for discovery.
• Ad spending is approximately 23% higher on Instagram than Facebook, according to a study by Merkle, even though the two run through the same ad system.
• 83% of users have named YouTube as their favorite type of social media marketing.
• 92% of all Instagram users have said that they’ve made a purchase, clicked to the website, or followed a brand after discovering them on the platform.
• 47% of Twitter users prefer “culturally relevant” brands and “inclusive” and “transparent brands” compared to 39% of the US population.
• Strategy – 7 stats every finance marketing team should know – Finance – Content Marketing | The Dubs: 16% of businesses’ rankings altering on mobile devices by three places, and 29.
• 16% changing by 10 places, a responsive finance website is no longer a nice-to-have.
• SEO is more important than ever for financial marketing 51% of accounting, 81% of loans and mortgage, and 33% of banking consumers did not have one company in mind while searching.
• Gain a higher ROI through content marketing Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates more than 3x as many leads per dollar spent.
• Amp up content to generate leads 64% of calls to financial services providers come from organic searches and 36% come from paid searches.
• Set goals you can measure against More than 50% of banks don’t measure ROI for their marketing campaigns, meaning they have no understanding of whether they’re successfully hitting the mark with their target audience.
• Get discovered with backlinks Pages ranking in the top position have 168% more backlinks than pages ranking fifth, SEO must become a part of a finance brand’s marketing strategy.
• 6 Mind-Blowing Statistics About Promotional Email Marketing ⋆ Reno SEO Expert, Reno Web Design | Web Design, SEO, Marketing & Workshops: It’s set to grow year after year by more than 4%, which means in just a few years, we’re talking 320 billion emails.
• Nearly 90% of professionals claim to use it when they’re conducting business or communicating professionally.
• With nearly 90% of marketers using email to generate leads, it’s a great place for you to start.
• 4 Social Media Marketing Statistics You Need to Know | Online Sales Guide Tips: 78% of Facebook Ad Profits come from Mobile You can’t talk about social media without mentioning mobile marketing.
• You may be surprised to learn that over 52% of all internet traffic comes from smartphones.
• Despite over half of search traffic coming from phones and tablets, over 78% of all Facebook ad profits come from these same users.
• 59% of People Use Social Media for Shopping Inspiration Have you ever checked your Instagram account for shopping inspiration?
• Believe it or not, 59% of consumers use social media for ideas when they want to make a purchase.
• 98% of Users Will See Your Retargeting Ads on Facebook Business owners have to grapple with the fact that most people who add items to their shopping cart will not complete the order process.
• The main reason is that 98% of people will see your retargeting ads after leaving your website.
• Mobile App Download and Usage Statistics 2021 – AnthonyGaenzle.Com | Influencer Marketing, SEO, and Personal Branding: 88% of our mobile phone time is spent on apps, which is encouraging for mobile app developers who want to penetrate the market.
• 96 million apps available for download on the App Store More than 20% of Millennials open an app at least 50 times per day The Google Play Store has over 2.
• 87 million apps available 69% of all US digital media time is spent on mobile apps On average, smartphone users use 10 apps per day Mobile App Downloads Without downloads, mobile apps won’t succeed.
• It may surprise you that 98% of app revenue globally comes from free apps.
• 46% Mobile App Usage How people use mobile apps is crucial to understanding more about the length of time people spend on apps, how many apps they have installed, and more.
• This means over 60% of the apps downloaded on a persons’ smartphone aren’t used.
• The app download growth rate in India is 190% compared to the US which is 5%.
• Find more statistics at Statista In Q2 2020, app markets in India saw a 30% increase in hours spent per month in non-gaming apps, compared to Q4 2019.
• [Free Infographic] 10+ Must-Know Stats About Social Media and Healthcare – Baker Marketing Laboratory:Marketing for the Healthcare Industry: According to a report compiled by the Pew Research Center’s Internet & American Life Project, 72% of internet users say they looked online for health-related information of one kind or another within the past year.
• A survey published in January, 2017, by the Pew Research Center revealed that today around 74% or seven-in-ten Americans use social media to connect with one another and find or share information.
• adults who use at least one social media site has risen over the past decade to:85% among people aged 18-29 80% among people aged 30-49 64% among people aged 50-64 34% among people aged 65+ 3.
• A Pricewaterhouse Cooper survey showed that patients said the most trusted healthcare resources online are those posted by physicians and doctors (60%), followed by nurses (56%), and hospitals (55%).
• The same survey revealed that 42% of individuals viewing health information on social media look at health-related consumer reviews and referrals of specific treatments or physicians.
• The PwC Health Research Institute reported that 25% of consumers using social media have posted about their health experience, and 20% have joined a health forum or community.
• According to Pew Research Center, 53% of people who attempt to self-diagnose a medical condition through online information talked with a physician or medical clinician about what they found online.
• 41% of online diagnosers had their condition confirmed by a physician or medical clinician.
• Facebook is the most-widely used of the major social media platforms, with 68% of U.
• Smaller shares of Americans use sites such as Instagram (28%), LinkedIn (25%) and Twitter (21%).
• 20 Eye-opener Visual Content Marketing Statistics you should know in 2020: (Tandfonline)61% of people are more likely to buy from companies that deliver unique content.
• (Contently)13% of consumers would pay 31-50% more for your products or services if they were under the impression that your business is making a positive impact on the world.
• 2% of Baby Boomers use social media (US Social Media Users, by Generation, 2019, eMarketer) Importance using Branding Portrait images versus stock images?
• 46% of marketers say photography is critical to their current marketing and storytelling strategies.
• When people hear information, they’re likely to remember only 10% of that information three days later.
• However, if a relevant image is paired with that same information, people retained 65% of the information three days later.
• Create visual content is used primarily:62% using visuals as part of blog content or for landing pages on a website.
• Social media was a major use case for visual content with 49% using visuals for Facebook, 47% using them for Instagram, 42% using them for LinkedIn and 33% using them for Twitter.
• 32% of marketers say visual images are the most important form of content for their business, with blogging in second (27%).
• 86% of consumers prefer an authentic and honest brand personality on social networks.
• 80% of readers think authentic content is the main factor that will drive them to follow or engage with a brand 16.
• Presenting a brand consistently across all platforms can increase revenue by up to 23%.
• 81% of businesses use video as a marketing tool — up from 63% over the last year (HubSpot, 2019)19.
• 64% of consumers purchase a product after watching a branded video on social networks.
• 54% of consumers would like to see more video content from brands they support.
• Key eCommerce Trends and Statistics for 2021 – AnthonyGaenzle.Com | Influencer Marketing, SEO, and Personal Branding: (Statista) Around 95% of all purchases are expected to be via eCommerce by 2040.
• (Nasdaq) The number of new Shopify stores increased by 62% between March and April in 2020.
• (Facts & Factors) The eCommerce share of total global retail sales is projected to reach 22% in 2023.
• Over 90% of shoppers reported that their online shopping frequency increased due to the COVID-19 pandemic.
• (DealAid) Due to the pandemic, 13% of consumers said they were increasing their use of in-store pickup and drive-up options.
• (NPD) In April 2020, online grocery shopping was around 77% higher than before the pandemic.
• (Adobe) At the beginning of the pandemic, 30% of footwear sales were online, but the shutdown of physical stores increased online sales to almost two-thirds of footwear sales generated online in April.
• (NPD) Digital restaurant orders increased by 138% in May 2020 compared to the previous year.
• Online takeout orders skyrocketed and buy online, pick up in-store (BOPIS) orders grew 59% in August 2020, a 259% increase year-over-year.
• (Retail TouchPoints) 77% of consumers say they would shop more from a website where they are allowed to chat with an associate.
• (LivePerson) 68% of consumers say they trust a retailer more if associates are available via messaging chatbots to answer questions.
• (LivePerson) 84% of shoppers reported that they are unlikely to shop with a brand again after a poor delivery experience.
• Online stores that have a social media presence generate 32% more sales on average than those that don’t.
• (eMarketer) In Q1 2019, over 80% of social referrals to eCommerce sites came through Facebook.
• (eMarketer) In-app spending via Douyin (TikTok) grew 222% in Q1 of 2019.
• It’s estimated that 9% of all retail eCommerce will be generated via mobile commerce in 2021.
• (Statista) In 2019, 51% of mobile device owners said they had used a mobile retail app to buy something in the past month.
• 7 Interesting SEO Statistics that Everyone Should Know – AnthonyGaenzle.Com | Influencer Marketing, SEO, and Personal Branding: Starting with a search engine accounts for close to 70% of online experiences.
• Indeed, the statistics back this up in saying that approximately 70% of search queries contain four words or more.
• 6% of domains have reciprocal links, meaning that some of the sites they link to also link to them.
• In 2019, the activity of global search traffic was Google (75%), Bing (10%), Baidu (9%), Yahoo (2.
• 33 Stats About The Importance of Content Marketing: ~ AOL / Nielsen 60% of the buyer journey is complete before prospects reach out to vendors.
• ~ Statistic Brain The number of web searches on the term “Content Marketing” is up 400% since January 2011.
• ~ CMI / MarketingProfs Only 42% of content marketers believe they are effective with it.
• ~ CMI / MarketingProfs 70% of marketers think branded content is more effective than advertising direct mail and PR.
• ~ Custom Content Council Only 44% of B2B Marketers have a documented content strategy.
• ~ CMI / MarketingProfs 73% of B2B Marketers have someone in charge of content marketing.
• ~ CMI / MarketingProfs B2B Marketers spend 30% of the marketing budget on content marketing.
• ~ CMI / MarketingProfs Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates about 3 times as many leads.
• ~ SEOmoz 57% of digital marketers define Content Marketing as their #1 priority.
• ” ~ Social Media Today The three biggest challenges to creating content are lack of time (30%), inability to create enough content (11%), and inability to create engaging content (11%).
• ~ Robert Rose Another study found the three biggest challenges for content marketing to be limited budgets (27%), limited staff (25%), and generating new content (21%).
• ~ Heidi Cohen 36% of readers prefer headlines containing numbers (like this post).
• 21% of readers prefer headlines that literally talk to them by including the word “you.
• ~ Heidi Cohen 57% of B2B marketers use content curation as part of their content marketing strategies.
• But only 42% say they are able to measure positive results from content curation efforts.
• The Top Content Marketing Stats (and Why They Matter for Your Business) – The vWriter Blog: For developed economies, the growth in ad blocking is even higher… Ad blocking grew by 48% in the US, 82% in the UK in 2015.
• Click-through rates on emails sent to leads are 89% higher for businesses using content marketing.
• In other words, businesses using content marketing benefit from a 89% higher click-through rate.
• Businesses using #ContentMarketing benefit from a 89% higher click-through rate.
• 61% of consumers are more likely to make a purchase because of custom content.
• Businesses using #ContentMarketing enjoy a 480% increase in sale conversions.
• As a quick recap, here are the statistics:Leads are 89% more likely to click through from an email marketing campaign.
• A recent study concluded that consumers are 61% more likely to buy from a company using high quality, custom […] Recommended What if content marketing was plug’n’play easy?
• HubSpot:15 Brand-Spanking New Social Media Marketing Stats | Infographic A Day: (Source:Experian) 3) Social media produces close to double the marketing leads produced by telemarketing, direct mail, pay-per-click, or trade shows (Source:HubSpot) 4) Social media converts leads 13% better than the average lead.
• (Source:HubSpot) 5) 74% of marketers claim that Facebook is important to their strategies for lead generation.
• (Source:HubSpot) 7) 52% of marketers generated a customer via Facebook in 2013.
• (Source:HubSpot) 8) Brand posts on Facebook get 50% of their reach within 30 minutes of being posted.
• (Source:Socialbakers) 9) 85% brand fans on Facebook recommend brands to others.
• (Source:Syncapse) 10) 43% of marketers have found a customer via LinkedIn in 2013.
• (Source:HubSpot) 11) 36% of marketers have found a customer via Twitter in 2013.
• (Source:HubSpot) 12) 59% of Twitter users have visited B2B tech brand sites.
• (Source:Compete and Twitter) 13) 25% of consumers who complain about a product on Facebook or Twitter expect a response within 1 hour.
• (Source:American Express) 14) Almost 46% of online users rely on social media when making a decision to buy.
• 5 Social Media Marketing Statistics for Businesses: The percentage of companies using social media skyrocketed to an overall 91%.
• Social media users like to follow brands While a lot of customers follow brands’ social media for insight or funny posts, 57% of consumers want to learn more about the products or services that the business is providing.
• Marketers must provide the same amount of social media engagement that their followers do, as 49% of consumers say that they’ll unfollow brands that provide poor customer experience.
• Social media marketing statistics say that 45% of consumers trust suggestions on their feed to discover new accounts they might be interested in.
• 68% of customers want to engage with images while 50% want to engage with video content.
• 41% of marketers say that they lack the stamina to make a greater impact for their business online.
• Top 10 Killer Digital Marketing Stats 🔥 > One Day Agency:Advertising and Marketing Agency: Climbing from 29% to 54%, over half of British over 75’s can now be reached online through your digital marketing campaigns.
• 2) 81% of disabled adults are now online From 2019 to 2020, the number of disabled adults online increased by almost 1 million people.
• Nowadays, around 11 million (or 81% of) disabled adults are online, too!
• In 2020 alone, a whopping 72% of all marketing spending in the UK was focused on digital marketing campaigns.
• 5) The unstoppable automated emailMeanwhile, according to another study, automated cart abandonment emails also saw big success, with a conversion rate of more than 33%.
• According to the Demand Gen Report of 2021, 53% of marketers claim that email marketing has been the most effective channel for promoting early-stage lead generation.
• According to Wyzowl, 87% of businesses now use video as a tool in their overall digital marketing strategy.
• Last year’s Christmas e-commerce sales were higher than ever before, increasing by 46% compared with the previous year in the UK alone.
• How did it Happen? Some Interesting Digital Marketing Statistics and what we can Learn from Them – Synapse: Almost 80% of Internet Traffic Comes from Mobile Devices To be honest, those numbers aren’t something new – This is the way things go for at least 5 years.
• Cyber Attacks and Ad Frauds are 15% More Prominent Compared to 2019 Did you think that hackers are a thing of the past?
• When you grasp that nothing’s 100% safe, you change your alert level, and that alone can prevent the next digital disaster.
• 60% of Marketing Experts Have no Idea About Digital Marketing Basics The fact that the term “Digital Marketing” has “Marketing” in it doesn’t indicate that they’ll know what to do when the time to prove their knowledge and experience comes.
• Tiktok is Destined to Increase by 44% While Facebook only Estimates at 5% Isn’t Facebook the more prominent player?
• css({ ‘width’:’100%’, ‘background-color’:’#ffffff’, ‘text-align’:’center’, ‘font-size’:’16px’, ‘font-family’:’Open Sans’ }) jQuery(‘.
• 165 Strategy-Changing Digital Marketing Statistics for 2022 – eCOMMERCE: The compound annual growth rate of digital marketing from 2020-2026 is projected at 9%.
• 63% of businesses have increased their digital marketing budgets just this past year.
• Between 2020 and 2021, there was a 14% growth rate in digital marketing budget spending across businesses.
• 49% of businesses say that organic search brings them the best marketing ROI.
• Over 20% of businesses say that the number of leads generated is the primary factor they base the success of their marketing channels.
• 72% of overall marketing budgets get put towards digital marketing channels.
• According to the Bureau of Labor Statistics, marketing job demand is set to increase by 10% by 2026—above the average for all careers.
• People spend 50% more with businesses that regularly respond to reviews.
• Consumers are 155% more likely to look up your brand-specific terms after they’ve been exposed to display ads.
• Customers are 70% more likely to make a purchase from a retargeting ad.
• When someone conducts a search after initially seeing a related display ad, the likelihood of them converting is 59%.
• 27% of consumers conduct a search for a business after seeing their display ad.
• Digital advertising accounted for 4% of total advertising expenditures in 2021.
• 50% of advertising was online in 2020—offline advertising spend totaled to $196 billion while digital advertising reached $378 billion.
• Annual advertising spend on social media is at $134 billion in 2022, a 17% YoY increase.
• 15% of the average business’s website traffic comes from paid search, while paid social traffic only makes up 5% of overall website traffic.
• 4% of digital marketers are planning to increase their paid social spend in 2022.
• More online advertising statisticsFor search ads, here are some industry benchmarks to keep in mind:The average click-through rate across all industries for Google Ads is 18%.
• Less than 20% of marketers use landing page A/B tests to improve conversion rates.
• 61% of marketers say that generating traffic and leads is their number one challenge…so yes.
• 49% of businesses say that organic search brings them the best marketing ROI.
• In other words, 75% of people never scroll past the first page of the SERP.
• The top-ranking site in Google organic search results has an average CTR of 31%.
• If local SEO is a focus for your brand, you’re in luck as 28% of local searches result in a purchase within 24 hours.
• It’s no secret that content marketing is key for growing businesses—especially since brands that blog have 434% more indexed pages than those that don’t.
• TikTok is the fastest growing social media platform, with 40% of businesses planning to incorporate TikTok into their 2022 social media strategy.
• Less than 5% of businesses use Facebook video ads, so this is a major opportunity for brands looking to stand out.
• Over 80% of B2B businesses use Twitter for organic social media marketing and Twitter ads.
• The average swipe-up rate for Snapchat ads is 50% and the average cost per swipe is just $.
• 80% of B2B businesses use LinkedIn Advertising, and 96% of B2B content marketers use LinkedIn for organic social media marketing.
• 30% of the avage business’s engagement on LinkedIn comes from its employees.
• 72% of TikTok users find TikTok ads “inspiring,” and 70% of users said that TikTok ads were even enjoyable.
• 25% of people on TikTok have researched or purchased a product after seeing a TikTok about it.
• 95% of Pinterest users have the app to help them plan or make a purchase.
• In fact, 52% of Pinterest users have seen something on the app and made the purchase online later.
• 64% of consumers watching branded videos on social media made a purchase after.
• The average open rate across all industries is 80% and the average click-through rate is 2.
• This makes it the second most popular marketing channel, behind social media at 89%.
• 78% of marketers in 2020 said email is important to overall company success, compared to 71% in 2019.
• 80% of marketers say they’d rather give up social media than email marketing.
• 64% of small businesses already leveraging email marketing, so you won’t want to miss out on taking advantage of this low-cost way to promote your business.
• 33% of people will open an email simply because they think the subject line is catchy.
• 47% of email recipients decide to open an email based on the subject line alone.
• 38% of people will stop engaging with a website if the content or layout is unattractive.
• Websites that have a superior user experience generate a 400% higher conversion rate.
• More website statisticsNearly 60% of people said they wouldn’t recommend a business if it had a poorly designed mobile website.
• About 40% of people will stop interacting with a website if images take too long to load.
• 70% of small business websites are missing a call to action on their homepage.
• Nearly 90% of consumers will shop with a competitor after a poor website experience.
• 73% of businesses invest in web design to help their brand stand out from competitors.
• 85% of people will abandon a page if they realize it’s an unsecured website—even if they already have a purchase in process.
• 43% of small businesses that do have a website plan on improving their website performance this year.
• 60% of marketers either don’t know or don’t understand their Core Web Vitals.
• 49% of businesses report that they grow revenue faster when they’re using video content.
• 86% of consumers say they’d like to see more video content from brands they love.
• 73% of customers are willing to spend more with a brand that has complete transparency online.
• 76% of brands report having used marketing automation just this past year.
• Digital Marketing Statistics and trends in India Growth 2021: Conversion Rate Optimization (CRO) Only 17% of marketers use landing page A / B tests to improve conversion rates.
• Portent, 2019) In a survey conducted by Databox, 70% of respondents said that SEO is better than PPC for generating sales.
• (Databox, 2019) Landing pages, the least popular type of registration form, have the highest conversion rate (24%).
• On the other hand, pop-ups, the most popular sign-up form, have the second lowest conversion rate (4%).
• Organic search About 64% of marketers work long hours in search engine optimization (SEO).
• (HubSpot, 2020) 49% of users say they use Google to discover or find a new item or product.
• (Jumpshot via Sparktoro, 2019) As of June 2019, 94% of internet searches take place on a Google property.
• Mobile SEO Queries “Where to buy” and “next to me” have increased by over 200% in the last two years.
• (Think of Google, 2019) 60% of smartphone users directly contacted a company using search results, such as the “click to call” option.
• (Think of Google, 2019) Over a two-year period, there was a 250% + increase in the number of mobile searches for “store open next to me” (Think with Google, 2019) 46% of surveyed buyers confirm online inventory before going to a store.
• (Think with Google, 2019) 70% of surveyed buyers say the ability to shop in person / in a store is important when deciding from which brand or retailer to buy.
• (Think of Google, 2019) Voice Search 45% of American millennials use voice assistance when shopping online.
• (Statista, 2019) 52% of voice assistant users say they use voice technology several times a day or almost every day.
• (The Smart Audio Report, 2020) 24% of Americans over the age of 18 have a Smart Speaker or about 60 million people.
• (The Smart Audio Report, 2020) As of 2020, 62% of Americans say they have used some form of voice assistance technology.
• (Edison Research, 2020) 62% of those in the US over the age of 12 use voice assistants.
• (Edison Research, 2020) 18% of Americans over the age of 18 own a car with an integrated information and entertainment system.
• Content strategy 70% of marketers actively invest in content marketing.
• (HubSpot, 2020) 78% of companies have a team of one to three content specialists.
• (HubSpot, 2020) 24% of marketers plan to increase their investment in content marketing in 2020.
• (HubSpot, 2020) Almost 40% of marketers say that content marketing is a very important part of their overall marketing strategy.
• (SEMrush, 2019) 77% of companies say they have a content marketing strategy.
• (SEMrush, 2019) 94% of marketers use social media to distribute content.
• (SEMrush, 2019) Blogs Since 2019, a survey of bloggers found that 32% of respondents always checked the analysis of their blog posts.
• (HubSpot, 2020) 89% of content marketers used blog posts in their content creation strategy in 2020.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2020) 18% of marketers choose WordPress as a site content management system (CMS).
• (HubSpot, 2020) Marketing spending is expected to increase by 14% in 2021.
• (Deloitte, 2020) 83% of traffic to marketing blogs comes from desktops.
• (SEMrush, 2019) 51% of companies say that updating old content has proven the most effective tactic implemented.
• (SEMrush, 2019) Most companies (67%) use organic traffic to measure the success of their content.
• (SEMrush, 2019) 86% of companies produce blog content compared to other formats.
• Digital Marketing And Advertising Trends & Statistics in 2023: Year over year, the ad spending on Instagram stories found a 220% increase.
• Google is responsible for driving 94% of SEO traffic to business websites.
• 2% of all online traffic in 2018 was generated only through mobile, up from 2017, which is 50.
• 74% reported using Facebook for professional purposes, and 75% to 90% of Facebook advertising comes from images.
• Twitter is the marketing tool for 88% of business brands having above 100 employees, and tweets with video find retweets six times more than tweets with text or images.
• 60% of consumers find products or services on Instagram, and 2 am or 5 pm or the best time to upload an Instagram post.
• Year over year, the ad spending on Instagram stories found a 220% increase, and 75% of Instagram users visit the business website after watching the ad.
• 80% of Business to Business (B2B) leads come from LinkedIn, 7% from Facebook, and 13% from Twitter.
• LinkedIn is the #1 social media channel for B2B marketers to widespread 94% of the content, and B2B marketers reduced 94% of the cost per lead using LinkedIn lead generation forms.
• While comparing with other social media channels, Pinterest users spend 50% more on average, and 80% of millennial pinners stated that Pinterest helps them with what to buy.
• 144% of products or services buy by video, and 50% of internet users look for product videos before visiting the business store.
• 74% of conversion optimization strategies increased business sales, and A/B testing is the most effective conversion rate method.
• 50% of consumers stated that online live chat is the best way to reach business brands.
• 82% of B2B marketers bring the brand reputation through content marketing.
• 72% of consumers have a lower opinion of business brands that use pop-up ads.
• 59% of the brands rely on digital marketing staff who optimize their ad spend on Facebook and Instagram ads.
• According to the Survey, over 60% of the ads are viewed on mobile devices.
• In a survey from Life Marketing, 64% of consumers click on Google ads for product buying.
• eMarketer’s analyzed that Native video advertising is the most popular and fastest-growing segment, with a 35% growth rate recorded by 2019.
• 1 billion in ad revenue increased in Native video advertising and 61% of the growth rate projected in total digital ad spending in the U.
• Among all digital ads, 73% of consumers are unwilling to view pop-up ads.
• 91% of advertisers are willing to buy Data management platforms for digital advertising.
• Over 66% of the digital ad revenue goes to Google search engines, Facebook, Instagram, and YouTube.
• A 65% growth rate was noticed in digital advertising compared to last year.
• 52% of the video advertising spending growth rate noticed in B2C companies for over one year.
• Latest Trends & Market Data 2022 – Social Media Marketing Statistics – Empowering Entrepreneurs Business Professionals: Latest marketing data and statistics regarding Social Media Marketing 2024 Almost 90% of online marketers say their social media marketing efforts have increased exposure to their products and services for their business successfully, while 75% say they have increased traffic.
• (Source:Sales Benchmark 2024) 93% of brands claim that their social media marketing got them new customers from their posts on one of their social media channels.
• Board, 2024) 98% of sales reps are reaching their quotes through social selling.
• (Source:Sales Benchmark 2024) 80% of marketing professionals and online business owners incorporate social media in their marketing campaigns and promotions.
• (Source:Forrester 2024) 71% of luxury brands measure social media marketing campaign performance through web traffic.
• (Source:eMarketer 2024) 75% of consumers who have had a good social media service experience with a brand are likely to recommend it to others including friends and family.
• (Source:IDC Research 2024) 30% of millennials engage with a brand on social networks at least once a month.
• (Source:eMarketer 2024) 85% of company social media accounts are managed mostly by the owners of the company.
• (Source:Screwpile 2024) 82% of women consumers say that recommendations found on social media change the way they gather opinions and information.
• (Source:McKinsey 2024) 81% of consumers say that product reviews influence they way they shop online.
• (Source:HubSpot, 2024) 79% of video marketers use Facebook as video marketing channel.
• (Source:Wyzowl, 2024) 31% of B2B professionals say that social media selling allowed them to build deeper relationships with their clients.
• 37 Influencer Marketing Stats Marketers Need to Know – Eric Sachs SEO: 37% of marketers say blogs are the most effective platform for influencer marketer.
• 6% of those surveyed agree that ongoing ambassadorships are the most effective.
• 7% of influencers say most brands want to reach their audience with sponsored content, while only 52.
• While 88% of respondents say they require the influencers to disclose sponsored content, only 55% say they are familiar with current FTC guidelines.
• 6% of marketers surveyed say they find connecting with relevant influencers to be a major challenge.
• 8% say their biggest challenge comes in finding ways to engage their communities while satisfying executive expectations.
• 9% of those surveyed say the biggest challenge they face within their organization is there is still concern because it is a new/unproven channel.
• Nearly half (48%) of respondents say they’re planning on boosting their influencer marketing budget for 2017.
• 11% of respondents use a self-service software-as-a-service (SaaS) platform to automate influencer outreach, management, and reporting.
• 68% of communications professionals consider Twitter as the key channel as the key channel for influencer engagement campaigns.
• 39% of professionals say they use social media monitoring tools to find influencers.
• 77% of influencers say they’re more likely to buy products and services from their sponsors, becoming brand evangelists that way.
• 81% of respondents consider their influencer marketing campaigns successful based on engagement.
• 86% of women seek advice from their social networks before making a purchase.
• Regardless of industry vertical, customers your business gets through word of mouth have a 37% higher retention rate.
• 22% of businesses surveyed said influencer marketing was their fastest-growing customer acquisition channel – growing faster than organic search, paid search, and email marketing.
• Only 5% of businesses said affiliate marketing was their fastest customer acquisition channel, making it last on the list.
• 23% of professionals consider influencer engagement as a strategic move for SEO purposes.
• Influencer marketing, along with email marketing ranked for first place when it came to the most cost-effective customer acquisition channel, with 22% of businesses reporting those channels were the best for them.
• Just over half of marketers (51%) believe they get better customers through influencer marketing.
• 92% of consumers trust online word of mouth recommendations, but only 33% of them trust banner ads.
• 57% of companies in beauty and fashion use influencers in their marketing mix.
• 40% of people say they’ve purchased an item after seeing an influencer use it on YouTube, Vine, Twitter, or Instagram.
• 96% of people believe that the advertising industry does not act with integrity—69% of these people attribute their mistrust to the advertisers’ desire to sell more effectively.
• 73% of Millennials see it as their responsibility to guide friends, peers, and family toward smart purchase decisions.
• While many brands work directly with influencers, 70% of influencers say the most effective way to work with brands is through an influencer marketing platform.
• 7 Top Marketing Statistics to Guide Your Digital Marketing Plan in [2022]: Also, one of the most important statistic to consider according to FinancesOnline is 97% of people learn more about a local company online than anywhere else.
• Holiday marketing stats you need to be aware of — Jamias Creative | Social Media Marketing Agency: Being present and active on social media pays off since 73% of consumers say their buying decisions are influenced by brand presence on social media.
• Shane Shirley Media’s Marketing Blog:Top 10 SEO Statistics and Trends To Prepare For 2022: Key SEO Statistics and Trends From 2021 To Use To Prepare for More Traffic and Sales 2022In 2021 (to date), Google accounted for just over 70% of all global desktop search traffic.
• (Source:Zero Limit Web)57% of marketing executives say on-page content development was the most effective SEO tactic.
• (Source:Content Marketing Institute)70% of marketers see SEO as more effective than PPC.
• (Source:Databox)Google dominates mobile in the United States with over 94% of mobile search engine market share.
• (Source:Backlinko)As page load time goes from one second to 10 seconds, the probability of a mobile site visitor bouncing increases by 123%.
• (Source:Think With Google)30% of all online searches are related to location.
• In 2021 (to date), Google accounted for just over 70% of all global desktop search traffic.
• While many Google searches occur on mobile nowadays, to date in 2021 they accounted for 70% of desktop traffic.
• With 67% of clicks coming from not even the first page of results but the first five organic results (not the ads), it is extremely important that your business is ranking for the right keywords.
• 57% of marketing executives say on-page content development was the most effective SEO tactic.
• Google dominates mobile in the United States with over 94% of mobile search engine market share.
• With less than 1% of people searching on Google actually clicking through to the second page of results in 2021, it is becoming even more important to get your website on that first page for your keywords.
• As page load time goes from one second to 10 seconds, the probability of a mobile site visitor bouncing increases by 123%.
• With 40% of mobile searches being from people who are intentionally searching places near them, it is important to make sure your business shows up!
• Not only are a good chunk of mobile searches occurring related to location, but so are 30% of all online searches.
• Key Facebook marketing stats you need to know so far in 2020 — Jamias Creative | Social Media Marketing Agency: This is a big difference compared to 2015 when 71% of teens were actively using Facebook.
• Majority of Facebook users live outside of the US or CanadaSure, only 10% of Facebook users live in North America but North American users account for 48% of Facebook Ad revenue.
• Nearly 3/4 of Facebook users earn more than $75,000/yearDespite it being a professional network, did you know that only 49% of Facebook users make more than $75k each year?
• Only 6% of ad revenue comes from desktop-only users Yes, you read that correctly.
• 12 TikTok stats you need to know if you’re a marketer — Jamias Creative | Social Media Marketing Agency: com/static/5535be4ee4b04d662739b493/t/5faecd024aff1f2f851eb8e2/1605291430820/solen-feyissa-1S1w1c4_VyA-unsplash+%281%29.
• 20% of all TikTok revenue is from the USA:The amount of money passing through TikTok continues to grow every day.
• 90% of TikTok users use the app multiple times each day:Majority of all TikTok users are constantly looking to be entertained and/or learn something new.
• 1% engagement rate:More often than not, you will get likes and comments on your videos.
• 8% of American users are 18-24:While just over a quarter of all TikTok users are younger, the user base is gradually getting older.
• 37% of US TikTok users have a reported household income of $100k+:More than a third of all TikTok users are ready to make a purchase when they see something they like.
• 6 Shocking Social Media Marketing Statistics – STRIVE3: Here are some of the most important stats from the study:* 92% of social media marketers believe that social media is important for businesses.
• * 90% of businesses say that social media increased business exposure * 77% of businesses said social media increased site traffic * 64% of marketers use social media 6+ hr a week.
• Influencer Marketing Statistics 2022 – Influencer SEO: No store or street corner in the country gets 80% of the 5 billion people traveling through.
• 92% of Millennials trust social media influencers more than traditional celebrities.
• 61% of people trust recommendations from friends, family, and influencers on social platforms.
• 70% of people would rather learn about a company through blog posts than advertisements.
• That’s right, 90% of marketing firm influencer campaigns involve Instagram.
• 60% of consumers have been influenced by a blog or social media post when shopping in-store.
• Either before shopping or during shopping, 60% of consumers search social media and blogs for information about a product.
• Increasing brand awareness is the primary goal for 86% of marketers when executing an influencer marketing campaign.
• 96% of marketers consider credibility, transparency, and follower quality as the most important factors when choosing an influencer.
• Instagram stats you probably want to know — Jamias Creative | Social Media Marketing Agency: More than 60% of Instagram users log in daily:The only social network with more daily engagement than Instagram is Facebook.
• 69% of Instagram users are under 35 years of age:Millennials can easily be found on Instagram.
• 71% of all Americans between the ages of 18 to 24 use Instagram:With majority of college aged Americans on Instagram, you can expect a great deal of content posted by this demographic.
• Females make up 52% of Instagram users:Instagram tends to be a great way sell products that benefit females.
• The largest user demographic of Instagram are 25-34 year olds:32% of all Instagram users are in this age group.
• In fact, 75% of Instagram users take action after seeing a post featuring a product or service they’re interested in.
• 72% of Instagram users have purchased products they’ve seen on the app:Instagram users tend to have a higher income.
• Latest B2B Content Marketing Trends and Statistics | knowandask: From a report from Clutch, it was discovered that approximately 85% of big business content marketers believe paid promotion is more viable than organic methodologies in content distribution.
• 35 Digital Marketing Statistics That Will Convince You to Advertise Online | Strategnetic: 64% of consumers will click on a Google ad when they are looking to buy items online.
• 70% of advertisers plan to increase their budget for mobile social advertising.
• Over 51% of smartphone users have found new brands or products while searching from their mobile device.
• When you combine video with full-page ads, you can boost engagement by 22%.
• Only 7% of search engine users will ever make it to the third page of the search engine results.
• With less than 10% of search engine users making it to the third page of the search engine results, it’s pretty clear that if you’re not in the top few search results, you may not get the opportunity to reach and engage your audience.
• 80% of consumers will remember a video ad they viewed in the past 30 days.
• 37% of online shoppers report using social media for inspiration when they’re ready to make a purchase.
• Ecommerce sellers that use product videos can increase product purchases by 144%.
• 64% of online consumers have reported that watching a Facebook video has influenced them to make a purchase.
• Video ad completion rates have shown a steady increase over the past few years, reaching 70% just last year.
• In 2017, overall video ad completion rates reached a steady 70%, up from 47% in 2015.
• 72% of consumers want brands to share discounts and other promotions on social media.
• Nearly 60% of marketers think that influencer marketing will become increasingly more important to their marketing activities in the next 3 years.
• So much so that 57% of them predict they’ll integrate influencers into all of their marketing activities in the next few years.
• More than 70% of marketers will fail to use behavioral data for online ad targeting.
• For the average Internet user, social media takes up 33% of the time they spend online.
• Product Listing Ads (PLAs) on Google accounted for 52% of retail search ad clicks in 2017.
• 52% of online shoppers who click on a PPC ad will follow up with a call to the business.
• Marketers who invest more than 10% of their marketing budgets on measurement are 3x more likely to beat sales targets by 25%+.
• Why the Future of Marketing Is Video:40+ Statistics [Infographic] – Digital Marketing: For example, the percentage of companies using video in their marketing has increased from 63% in 2017 to 87% this year.
• 5 (more) essential statistics marketers NEED to know in 2022! 💡 > One Day Agency – Advertising & Marketing Agency | Digital | Creative | OOH | Media | Manchester, London and Philadelphia: However, as more of us return to a (new) normal, the number of marketers leveraging virtual events is expected to decrease by 17%, with in-person events becoming their preferred option once more.
• Going forward, we expect to see more brands take on a hybrid approach to events, and virtual events are expected to be the third biggest trend for marketers next year with 31% of marketers currently favouring them, and a further 9% expected to introduce them to their marketing plans for 2022.
• To reap the benefits of inbound marketing, around 23% of marketers will utilise inbound marketing for the first time in 2022, and roughly 80% of marketers already using inbound marketing strategies will maintain or increase their budget.
• While 2021 saw 79% of marketers invest in paid advertising, more than 50% of marketers plan to invest more in YouTube, Facebook and TikTok in 2022, with 58% planning to leverage Instagram Reels.
• According to recent studies, 45% of B2C marketers plan to increase their investment in this trend.
• According to a recent poll, HubSpot found that 44% of marketers plan to add YouTube to their marketing plan for the first time next year.
• Online reviews matter. Here are a few key stats you need to know. — Jamias Creative | Social Media Marketing Agency: 82% of shoppers seek out negative reviews:This stat isn’t really as discouraging as you think it might be as long as you’re doing a great job resolving issues with customers/clients.
• As in 91% of consumers between 18 to 34 years of age count on reviews:People care about what their peers have to say.
• Likelihood of a product selling increases by 270% when it gets five reviews:If you’re just getting started in earning reviews from customers, getting 40 reviews might seem daunting.
• The fact that you can increase your product sellability by nearly 300% should be enough motivation!
• 43 Digital Marketing Statistics for 2021, Tends & Data | SoftwareVital: As per a survey during the pandemic, around 42% of respondents saw budget cuts as the most challenging factor.
• Hence, more than 20% of marketers are planning to increase the use of first-party data.
• Internet Marketing Blog:How to Use STAT to Find SEO Opportunities at Scale [Video]: Social Media Optimization:60+ Tips & Tools for Every Platform With the growing momentum of people wanting to generally connect online, it’s no wonder that businesses spend about 15-25% .
• The Top 30 Content Marketing Statistics to Look for in 2023 – Project Consultants, LLC | PC Social: According to HubSpot, content marketing use is on the upswing, increasing by 25% during 2017 alone.
• In fact, according to Demand Metric, 46% of B2C brands and 51% of B2B brands need to do more with content marketing.
• Online consumer reviews are the second most trusted source of brand information and messaging, with 70% of global consumers surveyed online indicating they trust messages on this platform, an increase of 15% in four years.
• 46% of businesses plan to increase their content creation spending this year.
• In fact, according to HubSpot, 92 percent of companies use content marketing to generate leads, 87% use it to attract customers, and 83 percent use it to keep existing customers.
• According to a recent survey by HubSpot, 62% of marketers say they see increased demand for content creation services.
• In fact, according to a recent study by HubSpot, 64% of marketers say that content marketing drives customer acquisition and retention.
• A survey conducted by Verve found that 63% of respondents reported that their agency had seen an uptick in client inquiries about content marketing over the past year.
• 95% of buyers of B2B (business-to-business) goods and services believe content is an effective way to assess any company.
• About 90% of customers see the benefits of using high-quality, relevant, helpful, and engaging online marketing materials.
• In fact, according to Forrester Research, 93% of consumers trust recommendations from friends and family over paid advertising.
• 57% of businesses had a documentable strategy for their digital marketing efforts.
• 57% of respondents did not have a documented plan, while just 43% had one.
• More than half of those surveyed (51%) said they planned to increase their investment in content marketing in 2018.
• 55% of all online marketers use some form of social media for their business.
• According to a survey by HubSpot, for 42% of companies, the content specialists’ teams ranging from one to three members.
• According to one survey, 72% of marketers believe that creating quality, engaging, and valuable blog posts helps increase their brand’s visibility.
• Social media is used by 94% of digital marketers to share their own company’s brand messages.
• Videos came in third place, and videos received a response rate of 23% compared to just 7% for text posts.
• 53% of website traffic originates from search engines, says KISS metrics.
• According to a survey by HubSpot, 75% of marketing professionals claim that SEO is their most successful content strategy.
• According to Forrester Research, 75% of marketers say that SEO is their most effective content marketing strategy.
• According to research by HubSpot, 71% of B2B businesses are influenced in their buying decisions based on reading blogs.
• Take a closer look at the benefits of blogging for B2B companies, including the following stats:• 79% of B2B buyers use blogs to research products and vendors.
• • 71% of B2C consumers trust online reviews more than traditional advertising.
• • 69% of B2B professionals rely on blogs to learn about industry trends.
• • 68% of B2B companies want to build brand awareness among potential customers.
• • 67% of B2B executives plan to invest in blogging over the next 12 months.
• According to Edison Research, the number of Americans who regularly listen to podcasts increased by 7% from 2017 to 2018.
• This growth occurs across all age groups, with an 11% increase in the total podcast listening audience from 2017 to 2018.
• Among those aged 18–24, the percentage of listeners grew 15%, while it grew 8% among those aged 25–54.
• For example, the percentage of young adults aged 18–24 who regularly listen to podcasts jumped 13% from 2017 to 2018, compared to just 3% among older adults.
• On the other hand, the percentage of older adults who regularly listen to podcasts dropped by 5%.
• Also, 93% of respondents said they’d listen to most podcast episodes before deciding whether to continue listening.
• 7% of respondents said they would listen to only a part of an entire episode before deciding whether to continue listening.
• We found that 46% of respondents listened to a podcast at least once a week, while another 43% listened loftily.
• Of those who listened weekly, 73% listened to one or more episodes per week.
• As for how often people finish an episode, 53% of respondents said they spent an episode within 10 minutes, 26% said they finished within 30 minutes, and 21% said they completed it within 60 minutes.
• 82% of customers report a preference for brands with a content presence.
• According to a recent study by the University of California Berkeley Graduate School of Journalism, 82% of customers prefer companies with a strong content strategy over those without.
• PC Social can help your business gain followers and increase your social media engagement by 500%.
• The Most Important Social Media Marketing Statistics for 2023: Internet users are expected to spend more than 30% of their internet time on social media.
• Almost 60% of the world’s population uses social media, and the average daily usage is 2 hours and 27 minutes.
• A 2023 analysis of regional use of social media shows the wide variation of inactive social media penetration reaching 69% in Eastern Asia, 82% in North America, 79% in Southern America, and 85 and 84% in Northern and Western Europe respectively.
• This falls to 45% in Southern Asia, 16% in Western Africa, and 8% in Middle Africa.
• In a HubSpot Blog poll, in 2021, 79% of marketers report buying paid advertising on Facebook.
• Male users between the ages of 25 and 34 years make up the largest proportion (19%) of Facebook users.
• Nearly 90% of people have revealed that an influencer has motivated them to purchase Instagram.
• Nearly 90% of marketers feel that Instagram is the most important platform for influencer marketing.
• 83% of Instagram users use the platform to discover new products and services.
• 87% of people even took a specific action, like making a purchase, after seeing product information.
• Linkedin ad revenue exceeded $1 billion in 2021, which is a 37% growth from the previous year.
• About 51% of the users are college-educated and half of the users earn more than $75,000 annually.
• LinkedIn is more popular with men, who comprise 57% of its user base, as of January 2022.
• Millennials make up over 59% of LinkedIn’s user base, with 11 million of the 87 million millennials in decision-making positions.
• According to HubSpot, 79% of marketers will continue investing in Twitter Spaces in 2022 and beyond.
• Tweets with hashtags increase their engagement by 100% for the individual and 50% for brands.
• 93% of Twitter community members are open to brands getting involved in a conversation, such as providing help and support.
• “#DigitalMarketing” (47%) is the most popular marketing hashtag among #ContentMarketing Tweets, followed by “#SEO” (40%) and “#marketing” (37%).
• 33% of Twitter’s audience have some college, and 25% are in the high school or less cohort.
• 85% of Twitter’s audience earns more than $30,000 annually and 34% earn $75,000 or above annually.
• About 70% of Twitter users said they regularly watch, follow, or are interested in soccer.
• Approximately 50% of Pinterest’s total users are classified as “light” users, accessing the platform weekly or monthly versus daily, a cohort that is only 7.
• 31% of US adults claim to be Pinterest users, which puts the platform between Instagram (40%) and LinkedIn (28%).
• 38% of Pinterest users are between the ages of 50 and 64, representing the largest age demographic on the platform.
• Women make up 60% of Pinterest’s core audience, and male users make up 40%.
• 45% of social users in the US with a household income over $100K are active on Pinterest.
• Video Pins are playing an increasingly important role on Pinterest, they have increased 200% year over year.
• 9% compared to macro-influencers with up to 1 million followers who get a 13.
• In 2023, HubSpot’s Blog poll (of 1,000+ global marketers) showed that 53% of marketers leverage TikTok and plan to increase their investment in TikTok marketing in 2022.
• 16% of marketers claimed to use TikTok in their marketing in 2020 and in 2022 the number was 68%, a big growth in just 2years.
• HubSpot research shows that 44% of marketers plan to leverage YouTube for the first time in 2022.
• Social media Advertising StatisticsRetargeting ads are the most used among marketers, with 77% of marketers saying they use retargeting as part of their Facebook and Instagram advertising strategies.
• For 86% of Americans, transparency on social media is extremely important and they will take their business elsewhere if a brand refuses to show transparency.
• 29 billion unique mobile users, which means that more than 60% of the world’s population now has access to a mobile phone.
• For 43% of all internet users, social media is a major source of information on what to buy.
• Of all social media content types, video is considered the most transparent content type by 67% of consumers.
• In relation, 43% of consumers believe that live video is the most transparent form of content creation.
• Top Digital Marketing Statistics That Will Amaze You: The rate by which the receiver opens a welcome email is about 82% on average.
• The emails that relate to people’s hobbies have a rate of 27% when it comes to opening.
• In the points below are some trends in E-commerce statistics, According to a report from 2018, E-Commerce sales took over 12% of the retail sales on global grounds.
• The traffic percentage of 43% for E-Commerce is organic as a result of Google searches.
• 65% of the consumers see comparing prices of items in the local store on their mobile phones.
• Here are some of the points mentioning trends in SEO Statistics, Content creation has been claimed as the go-to SEO technique by 72% of marketers for efficiency.
• Here are a few trends in online shopping statistics, 68% of men found spending money online when compared to women spending online.
• Consumers with a percentage of 50% claim online live chat to be the best method of reaching any business.
• 79% of consumers have claimed free shipping to be their inspiration to shop online.
• Content Marketing Statistics You Should know: 90% of marketers using content marketing plan to continue investing the same amount in the channel in 2022.
• 66% of marketers expect their 2022 content marketing budget to increase more than their 2021 budget.
• Over 60% of marketers measure the success of their content marketing strategy through sales.
• 55% of successful content marketing strategies focused on improving the quality of content There are several ways to improve content quality—from hiring writers who can write high-quality content to editing existing posts before publishing them.
• 93% of content marketers believe that video converts the same or better than other forms of content We are living in an era where people have started relying more and more on visual media.
• Articles with videos get 83% more traffic than those without It has been proven that people are more likely to watch videos if they read along while watching them.
• In fact, articles with more than three videos generated 55% more backlinks than those with none.
• 82% of marketers reported that video has become more important than ever as a medium.
• 76% of B2B marketers blog, and 73% publish case studies Blogging is important, but the quality of your blog posts matters most.
• 3 Statistics On Why You Need Social Media For Your Small Busines — Haymaker Marketing// Facebook & Instagram Recommendations for Your Small Business: More than 40% of digital consumers use social networks to RESEARCH new brands or products.
• Must Know Some Stats of Social Media If You Are In Social Media Marketing: It is seen that businesses that post user-generated content have a more than 20% increase in their return visitors list.
• It is also found that the conversion rate for such content is more than 80%.
• Data doesn’t lie. Let these smartphone statistics drive your digital marketing decisions.: It’s no secret that smartphone penetration globally is predicted to reach 44% of the global population during 2020.
• The case study shows that Google will penalise non mobile-friendly sites via dropping their organic ranking, in this instance, costing websites 50% of their traffic as fewer people saw and clicked through to their websites.
• Revealing Digital Marketing Stats That Show the Power of Digital Marketing | Core Influencer: SEO Statistics 2018 Around 72% of marketers say that staying relevant is one of the biggest factors for better content.
• According to data almost 18% of local searches lead to make a sale within the time of a day.
• 90% of data searchers did not made their mind about buying a specific product or service before starting searching.
• 61% is a huge number to believe that effective marketing should be your top priority for next year if you have not focused on Search Engine Optimization this year.
• Invest in Social Media Marketing According to Jigsaw Recruitment, 81% of marketers assume that high traffic occurs when you invest at least 6 hours per week in social media marketing.
• Facebook Ads According to e-Consultancy, spending on Facebook ads increased by 62% this year.
• 14 Visual Content Marketing Statistics Every Marketer Should Know – Nebular Lab: Power of images:The average human being only remembers 10% of what they hear after three days.
• Our minds are poor at recalling what we hear, but when it comes to visuals, 65% can still recall images they’ve seen even after three days.
• People understand visual instructions 323% more than instructions that are in text format.
• Infographics:42% of marketers mention that infographics have a great influence on their audiences.
• You can gain an 87% improvement in engagement when relevant images accompany the posts that you put on social media.
• 74% of social media marketers make use of images to stimulate their audiences and drive more sales.
• Tweets that include images had 18% more clicks, 89% more, and 150% more retweets.
• Text:Posts that include images have 650% higher engagement than posts that only have text.
• It is estimated that by 2019 a whopping 85% of online communication will all be visual.
• Video content:Video content is on the rise with an expected 85% of internet traffic to be video content by the year 2019.
• Impact on B2B:51% of writers who write B2B content put visual content as their highest priority.
• SEO Search Engine Optimization web icon for the report, analytics, data, marketing, idea, stats. Vector Flat Icons 6571184 Vector Art at Vecteezy: Related Keywords View More Shutterstock logo Sponsored Vectors Click here to save 15% on all subscriptions and packs Free Download for Pro Subscribers!
• Content Marketing:The Key To Online Success [A Few Stats] – Helplama.com: Now, almost every marketer knows the significance of content marketing to grow digitally, 91% of B2B marketers reported that they use content marketing.
• Content Increases Visibility And Reach Blogs on company sites result in 55% more visitors.
• 37% of marketers say blogs are the most valuable content type of marketing.
• Word of mouth is the primary factor behind up to 50% of buying decisions.
• Blogs are 63% more likely to influence purchase decisions than magazines.
• Content Drives ROI And Sales Social media content boosts sales:61% of companies find customers via LinkedIn, 67% via Facebook, 53% via Twitter.
• 63% of companies said posting content on social media has increased marketing effectiveness.
• Consumers Prefer Content 70% of consumers prefer getting to know a company via articles rather than ads.
• 60% of consumers feel more positive about a company after reading custom content on its site.
• Affiliate Marketing Statistics 2022:Income Report, Social Media Usage | WBL: Pew Research reports that 81% of Americans use smartphones, but even more impressive is that one in five Americans exclusively use smartphones to browse the net.
• The budget for affiliate marketing in the US saw an increase of 44% between 2016 and 2020.
• Today, affiliate ad revenue accounts for around 15% of the total revenue mainstream media publishers generate.
• Affiliate marketing facts show this strategy is responsible for 16% of all online orders.
• As affiliate marketing puts more products in front of potential customers, it’s no surprise that 16% of all online orders come from affiliate marketing.
• Only paid and organic search are currently generating more online orders at 21% and 20%.
• Furthermore, 73% of retailers reported that they were satisfied with their affiliate programs’ sales.
• 32% of affiliate marketers rely on social media as their primary customer acquisition channel shows the importance of an excellent online presence.
• 36% of affiliates generate less than an annual median personal income from their typical affiliate commission rates.
• It’s important to note that the 50% refers to eBay’s pure profit, not the amount of the overall sales.
• Google Trends indicate the global interest in affiliate marketing increased by 200%.
• 1% affiliate marketing growth on a yearly basis, indicating growing trust marketers everywhere put into this strategy to grow their sales.
• By reaching this particular mark, affiliate marketing spend will have grown by over 34% since 2017, when advertisers reportedly spent $5.
• 5 billion was spent in 2012, it means that the overall growth during the last decade will be almost 70%.
• According to the affiliate marketing average income statistics for 2021, less than 50% of affiliates will make somewhere around $20,000.
• Conversion rates depend on the industry and usually hover around 1% on average.
• Affiliate marketing statistics show that the average conversion rate for Amazon affiliates is approximately 1%.
• Content Marketing Stats: 60% of marketers consider content marketing crucial to their overall strategy.
• According to SEMRush, the primary purposes of content marketing are to increase site traffic (71%) and generate high-quality leads (75%).
• In 2019, over half of the businesses (46%) spent less than $10,000 on content marketing.
• Most businesses (78%) employ anything from one to three professionals, the most common of which are writers, social media managers, and SEO content managers.
• According to Mantis research, Fewer than 40% of marketing departments have undertaken original research in the last 12 months, Is it beneficial to you?
• Brightedge’s research shows that 53% of all traffic comes from organic sources.
• After analyzing 912 million blog articles, researchers from Backlinko and BuzzSumo discovered that 94% of all blog posts have no external connections.
• Since 94% of firms polled by SEMRush use social media marketing, you may already be doing so.
• This is why just 54% of businesses think that their consumers get the best possible experiences for the whole of their interaction with the company.
• 3% more likely to do keyword research than those making less than $50,000 yearly.
• Some 38% of bloggers, for instance, claim to get “strong effects” from posts that took them 6 hours or more to write.
• 3% of all articles are shared on social media, but these “Power Posts” get 75% of all shares.
• There are 343% more email-collection strategies used by bloggers with incomes above $50,000 per year than those below $25,000.
• These high-income bloggers are likewise more likely to be promoters (70% are) and to do so more often (85% are) than bloggers with lower incomes (45% are).
• Almost nine in ten business-to-consumer marketers (86%) verify facts before publishing, and 60% put answering questions ahead of making a sale.
• B2B Content Marketing Statistics It may be a surprise to learn that 61% of all B2B purchases begin online, and 51% of clients use social media to do preliminary research.
• Specifically, a review of 500 SaaS providers found that the most popular 10% of SaaS blogs had an average of 104,000 organic search views each month.
• Moreover, 44% of these high-achieving companies have a unified content marketing team that serves the whole enterprise.
• The majority of content marketers (84%) want to outsource their content generation.
• Top-performing B2B content marketers are 46% more likely to use influencer/media connections (compared to the industry average of 34%) and 63% more likely to guest post in third-party publications (48% vs.
• Paid social media was utilized by 72% of those who used paid distribution.
• 80% of B2B marketers are utilizing analytics to track content’s success, and 59% are doing a great job or proving their investment’s worth.
• Over 40% of B2B companies anticipate increasing their spending on content marketing in 2020, but quality remains their top concern.
• 48% of B2B content marketers will prioritize the quality of their audience and conversions in 2018.
• 80% of consumers report switching between internet search and video while making a purchase.
• According to a study by Social Media Examiner, 62% of marketers plan to enhance their organic efforts on YouTube.
• 71% said they’d use YouTube more in the future, especially for their video marketing efforts.
• Be sure to incorporate subtitles before releasing the product, which might increase customer retention by 40%.
• In a typical visit to a website, a user will only read 20% of the words shown to them before moving on to the next.
• Venngage polled two hundred content marketers, and their responses indicated that images would continue to play a significant role in marketing plans for 66% of companies in 2020 and 2021.
• 25% of marketers plan to allocate 10-20% of their 2018 expenditures to developing visual content.
• 74% of marketers said they used graphics in more than 70 percent of their published content.
• ▷ Jm-trending :Search Social Marketing Blog | Tips and Tricks for SEO and SMM – traffic statistics – HypeStat: 4E-5% HypeRank:3,467,602 SEMrush Rank:3,854,653 *All traffic values are estimates only.
• 34 Revealing B2B Content Marketing Statistics To Know | Isoline: 55% of B2B buyers around the world find video the most useful type of content Responders consume an average of 4.
• 5 pieces of content before contacting a supplier Both video and webinar are the most likely type of content to be shared (53% and 52%, respectively) You can find the full report and some more interesting B2B content marketing statistics here.
• 65% of B2B marketers said their top challenge in outsourcing content marketing was finding partners with adequate topical expertise.
• 62% of respondents to the 2021 Content Preferences Survey say they depend more on content for researching and making B2B purchase decisions than in 2020.
• 53% of buyers we surveyed said they typically consume between 3-5 pieces of content before contacting a salesperson.
• Video B2B content marketing statistics 53% of our respondents said that video was the most useful form of content.
• 69% state video to be the top content marketing-related area of investment for 2022.
• 66% of B2B marketers created or used video content in the past 12 months.
• Video marketing content helps customers understand products, according to 94%.
• Video marketing has grown by over 25% from 2020 to 2021 as a key content marketing tactic – 81% of businesses have used video content in 2021.
• 75% of marketers reported SEO as the most efficient content marketing tactic put in place by their team during 2020.
• The next most successful content creation strategy was updating and repurposing existing content, implemented by 61%.
• Resource centre content An effective content marketing tactic, 45% said research/ survey reports are the most valuable content formats and sources when researching B2B purchases.
• 90% of B2B marketers included short articles/ posts in their content marketing efforts.
• Virtual events, webinars, online courses 64% of B2B marketers included events, webinars, and online courses in their content marketing efforts.
• Virtual events were the top performer:58% said this produced the best results for their content marketing within the previous 12 months.
• Top performers in the content distribution funnel At the early stages of the buying process, 57% of buyers report finding whitepapers most valuable, 54% E-books, 50% industry newsletters, and 49% webinars.
• In the mid-stages, 50% find assessments most valuable, 49% research/ survey reports, and 46% case studies.
• At the late stages, case studies (35%), third-party/ analyst reports (31%), and assessments (18%) are most valuable.
• B2B Social media statistics 44% of people are using social media platforms more than before due to the pandemic.
• LinkedIn is the organic social media platform used most by B2B marketers for content distribution (93%).
• LinkedIn is also the platform where B2B buyers are most likely to share business-related content (71%).
• Instagram saw a year-on-year increase of nearly 30% in B2B marketing usage.
• B2B Email marketing statistics Email marketing comes out on top:In 2020, 87% of B2B content marketers reported using email to distribute content organically.
• 66% of B2B marketers with knowledge of their budgeting process – and 75% of the most successful marketing organisations – expect their content marketing spend to increase in 2022.
• Are you ready to join 49% of marketers in outsourcing your content marketing efforts?
• Surprising Social Media Marketing Stats | Utah Web Design | Salt Lake City Web Development: Social media is popular among marketers About 93% of marketers say they integrate social media into their business’s marketing strategies.
• Don’t need content marketing? These 5 big stats will make you think again.: 88% of companies use content marketing Research by the Content Marketing Institute reveals that 88% of companies said they used content marketing in 2016 – with more intending to do so.
• 61% of online consumers made a purchase after reading a blog With well over half of consumers trusting blogs to inform their purchasing decisions, it’s easy to see why blogging has become one of the most popular forms of content marketing.
• Content marketing costs 62% less than outbound marketing Yet it generates three times as many leads.
• Digital Marketing Company, Digital Marketing Agency in Delhi, India Social Media Optimization:Digital Marketing Company Overview and Statistics | VGGroups: * Where 82% of online purchasers consider WORD OF MOUTH * 80% of Indian web clients say they plan to shop online sooner rather than later.
• Digital Marketing Statistics to Know in 2024: Therefore it is no surprise that 89% of responding digital marketers regard Facebook as their primary network for advertising their business.
• Finally, surpassing the 50% mark in 2020, it was clear that this trend will only rise in popularity.
• As of the first quarter of 2023, mobile devices have generated 58% of global website traffic.
• Among those five platforms are the following:Facebook, with 64% of popularity, Instagram, scoring a 58% of usage, YouTube is not much behind with 57%, Twitter, sitting at 43%, TikTok closely follows at 42%.
• Digital accounts for 56% of marketing spending According to a study by Gartner, more than half of the annual marketing spending is allocated toward digital online channels, as opposed to offline channels.
• In particular, this number is represented in 56%, with 44% directed at other types of advertising, respectively.
• Between the years 2021 and 2031, it is projected that the employment of marketing managers in the United States will increase by 10%.
• The statistic is compared to the overall number of expected employment for all other occupations in the US is around 5%.
• The influencer marketing trend is projected to see significant growth over the year, with 17% of respondent marketers planning to invest in it for the first time.
• Additionally, the report shows that 89% of marketers who invest in this type of marketing will maintain or increase their investment next year.
• Regardless, 39% of respondents shared that short-format videos yield the highest ROI for their business.
• In comparison, only 16% of marketers that were surveyed disclosed that long-format videos are their go-to type of video marketing.
• This is further supported by the fact that 33% of marketers leverage blogging in their digital marketing strategy.
• In this same study, you can also witness a case-in-point statistic that shows a whopping 56% of customers have purchased something after reading a blog post.
• In fact, the expenditure on addressable TV ads is forecasted to increase by over 12% in 2023, showing the fastest-growing potential among other types of traditional advertisement.
• The research provided by DemandMetric revealed that content marketing tends to cost 62% less than traditional ads.
• Surprisingly, the vast majority of respondents, that being 62%, shared that they receive the right amount of direct mail.
• To compare this email marketing statistic, the other 28% of respondents said that they receive direct mail too frequently.
• Lastly, only 10% of the surveyed consumers revealed they don’t receive direct mail frequently enough.
• Turns out, approximately 51% of respondents said that receiving direct mail from unknown businesses raises concerns about their online privacy.
• On a more positive note, the same study showed that around 55% of consumers prefer their direct mail to be personalized to them and provide relevant offerings.
• In particular, 65% of the respondents shared that their direct mail strategy has shown improvement over the last 12 months.
• At the same time, 32% of specialists reported that their strategy remains consistent, while only 3% said they saw a decline.
• While email usage remains the primary channel for marketing tactics, sitting at 93%, social media shortly follows at 92% for content distribution.
• Namely, sitting at 97%, which almost doubles the number reported ten years prior.
• A survey conducted in 2022 indicated that around 78% of marketing respondents forecasted investing their digital marketing budgets into video-format content.
• Among other types of digital advertising selected by marketers were digital events, which were preferred by 60% of respondents.
• Additionally, 69% of surveyed specialists said they would invest in owned-media assets.
• At number one are the vendors’ own websites, as reposted by 65% of buyers.
• Respectively, 48% of the surveyed buyers point out that third-party websites influence their decision the most.
• Closely followed by 39% of respondents that trust third-party articles published by independent writers the most.
• The study’s findings reported that over 85% of business executives believe that social data will become the primary source for companies.
• To go along with this statistic, it was also revealed that 91% of executives forecast the digital marketing budgets to more than double within the next three years.
• Therefore, it comes as no surprise that a study demonstrated that 71% of marketers say using strategic keywords was their number one strategy for SEO.
• Out of all questioned specialists in digital marketing, 41% stated that raising brand awareness was their number one priority when pursuing advertisement through content.
• Among other citations, 33% shared that building loyalty with existing customers is their main target.
• While 38% of respondent marketers decided that aiming to generate sales and revenue through marketing is their overall goal.
• To no one’s surprise, for roughly 26% of the responders, social media was considered their primary channel for marketing.
• To put this statistic into perspective, 21% of the responders named website marketing as their main network.
• While only 13% of surveyed specialists chose email as their number one channel.
• 41 is one of the top social media marketing statistics for 2022: TikTok is the fastest-growing social media site with an astounding 105% increase in user numbers in the US in the past two years.
• Facebook is the major reason behind a 25% of all online advertising spend (25 percentage) when compared with Google (28.
• Instagram is by far the most popular social media streaming service in terms of the amount of engagement (hint 81% engagement, in comparison to Facebook’s 8 per cent).
• TikTok is the fastest-growing social media platform with an incredible 105% growth in users in the US in the last two years.
• Facebook is the main reason for a 25% of the total digital advertising budget (25 percentage) in comparison to Google (28.
• Instagram has the highest popular social-media streaming service with regard to the amount of engagement (hint 81% engagement, as opposed to Facebook’s 8 percent).
• LinkedIn is among the most profitable and educated social media networks with 51% of users having college degrees, with the majority earning over $75,000 per year.
• As per LinkedIn itself, Elevated posts on the site yield 53% more engagement which is double that of the conversion rate of content that employees share.
• The majority of Twitter users utilize the platform on a daily basis (versus 84% of users who use it on a daily basis).
• Twitter’s US advertising revenues were $647 million in the third quarter of 2021 which represents an increase of fifty percent over the previous year (and an improvement of 98% from the previous quarter).
• 39 percent, 39% of Gen Z consumers say that their purchases are directly affected by the content that they discover on TikTok.
• In Q1 2021, marketers made 60% more investments in Facebook as well as Instagram ads than Q1 2020.
• Social media has recently surpassed the paid-search channel in terms of revenue, growing by 25% year-over-year , more than $137 billion (just just barely beating $135 billion paid search).
• According to LinkedIn the company itself Elevated sharing on the site result in an increase of 53% in engagement with a double increase in the click-through rate for content that employees share.
• 52 % of Twitter users use the platform on a regular basis (versus 84% of users who use the platform on a daily basis).
• Twitter’s US advertising revenues were $647 million in the third quarter of 2021, which represents an increase of 51 percent YoY (and an increase of 98% over the prior quarter).
• 39 percent 39% Gen Z consumers say that their purchases directly affect the content they see on TikTok.
• In Q1 2021, marketers invested 60% more in Facebook and Instagram ads than Q12020.
• Social media has recently eclipsed the paid-search channel in terms of revenue, growing by 25% year-over-year , more than $137 billion (just barely beating $135 billion spent on paid-search).
• Super interesting social media marketing stats in 2022 – Mezink Blog: 5% of total active Facebook users worldwide are female, and 19% are male between the ages of 25 and 34 years.
• 7% of total active Facebook users worldwide are female, and 10% are male between the ages of 35 and 44 years.
• Bath SEO Expert:6 Eye-Opening B2B Content Marketing Statistics for 2021: Another finding in Radix’s research:“B2B marketers who can’t talk to customers are 27% less likely to be happy with their content’s business results.
• Imagine this:You’re sitting in a marketing meeting and you hear the following:Our conversions are up 50% year-.
• Digital Marketing Growth Statistics 2022 – robinfinn: In March of this year, 38% of marketers announced plans to use infographics to boost their business.
• The number of internet users conducting research online increased by 83%.
• In North America, mobile advertising will contribute around 65% of the total market by this time.
• In Australia, mobile phone usage is expected to be up by 38% in 2020, and desktop traffic will increase by 9%.
• That is a significant jump from the 29% share of digital commerce in 2017.
• The world is also projected to see a reduction of almost 20% in revenue from traditional offline channels by 2021.
• This year, Facebook’s ad business is forecasted to increase by 9%, while Google’s will grow by 8.
• Interestingly, the two ad businesses will still account for around 65% of all global advertising revenue by 2022.
• Qdigitalstudio :Web Development & Digital Marketing, Denver, Colorado – Q Digital Studio – traffic statistics – HypeStat: 42% Social:0% Paid:0% Visitors by country CountryUsers% United States 55.
• Essential Social Media Marketing Statistics to know for 2021: Study reports have revealed that there is an increase of 13% in social media users in the last 2 years, between July 2019 to March 2021 to be precise.
• They found that as much as 84% of US young generation aged between 18 to 29 are social media users.
• Another interesting fact is that almost 56% of adults have multiple social media accounts.
• As per 73% of marketers, social media marketing is helping them to achieve somewhat to effective results.
• Almost 54% of social browsers use social media platforms to research the products they want to buy.
• One statistical report on this point reveals that the buying decision of almost 49% of people is influenced by the influencers on social media.
• If we want to check the smartphone statistics for social media usage, 91% of social media users are operating through their mobile devices and smartphones.
• The youtube statistics of Hubspot share the fact that 54% of people want their marketing team to put more videos and consider youtube as an excellent platform.
• Interesting Video Marketing Statistics For 2020 – What Is Social Media Today: By 2022, online videos will make up more than 82% of all consumer internet traffic.
• 78% of people watch online videos every week, and 55% view online videos every day.
• Viewers retain 95% of a message when they watch it in a video, compared to 10% when reading it in text.
• 72% of customers would rather learn about a product or service by way of video.
• Including a video on your landing page can boost your conversion rate by up to 80%.
• Nearly 50% of internet users look for videos related to a product or service before visiting a store.
• 97% of marketers say video has helped users gain a better understanding of their products and services.
• 50% of viewers aged 18-34 said they would stop what they were doing to watch a video from their favorite creator.
• 64% of consumers will make a purchase after watching branded videos on social platforms.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week – Daily digital fix: Meanwhile, 28% of marketers say they are most bothered by the challenge of personalising customer experiences without violating consumer privacy, highlighting the importance of customer data transparency and control for brands.
• Companies are also receptive to data protection laws such as GDPR, with 89% agreeing regulation has had a positive impact on their business.
• European businesses, however, are more greatly impacted than other regions – 24% of European companies say data protection laws such as GDPR have had a negative impact on their business – three times higher than in any other region surveyed.
• In the UK, 81% of consumers report that they have now made a purchase by following a link shared by an influencer, and 26% are spending more than £500 on items recommended by influencers.
• Globally, 43% of consumers said they trust influencers to give them an honest view of the product or service being discussed, and appreciate the transparency given about the brand relationship.
• Meanwhile, 86% of companies generating high ROI reported that personalisation makes up 21% or more of their marketing budget.
• 74% of businesses that exceeded their revenue goals in 2018 have a dedicated budget for personalisation, and 77% have a documented personalisation strategy.
• Finally, companies with the highest ROI are 50% more likely to focus on customer loyalty than companies with low ROI.
• Just 36% of retailers utilised marketplaces such as Amazon and eBay as part of their sales activity in 2018 – a drop from 39% in 2017.
• This is despite the fact that 45% of consumers are more likely to go first to Amazon when looking for an item than anywhere else.
• The study also found that just 28% of the UK’s top 250 retailers are taking full advantage of the benefits offered by Google Shopping – a 3% drop since last year.
• APAC consumers becoming increasingly concerned about data privacy The majority of Asia Pacific consumers love technology, with 80% of respondents to a survey saying that they believe it improves their lives.
• 69% said they were ‘concerned’, while 38% said they were ‘somewhat concerned’ and 29% said they were ‘very concerned’.
• As a result of this, 56% of respondents said they are actively taking steps to restrict the amount of data they allow businesses to collect, such as installing ad blockers and deliberately not sharing photos online.
• Nearly 50% of consumers also said that data-privacy concerns is one of the main obstacles to buying smart home devices and home appliances connected to the internet (second to price).
• 50 SEO and Google Marketing Statistics – Inbound Media: Organic search drives 300% more traffic to websites than social media61.
• 21% of searchers click on more than 1 search result (Moz)94% of clicks in the SERPs go to organic results (Search Engine Watch)The average time on site for a top 10 search result is 3 minutes and 10 seconds (Searchmetrics)39% of purchasers are influenced by a relevant search.
• Local SEO statistics:30% of all mobile searches are related to location.
• 46% of all searches on Google are for a local business or local service88% of potential customers look for online reviews before choosing local services.
• (Hubspot)76% of people who search on their smartphones for something nearby visit a business within a day.
• 54% of smartphone users search for business hours and 53% search for directions to a local store.
• Videos that bring in new subscribers tend to rank higher on YouTubePosts with videos earn more backlinks and see a 157% boost in search trafficThe number of comments, views, shares, and ‘likes’ had a strong correlation with higher YouTube rankings.
• (Statista)Mobile accounts for 58% of all Google searchesThere are more searches on mobile than on desktop.
• 51% of smartphone users have discovered a new company or product when conducting a search on their smartphones.
• 7% of the clicks, whereas ranking in position #1 on the desktop gets you 19.
• 3% of clicks on desktopVoice search statisticsThe typical voice search result is only 29 words in length.
• Roughly 75% of voice search results are from one of the top 3 desktop ranking pages for a given query40.
• 4% of voice search result pagesVoice search results typically load in 4.
• 6 seconds, which is 52% faster than the load time of the average pageApproximately 75% of voice search results rank in the top 3 for that query.
• 2% more backlinks than short articlesCompanies who engage in blogging receive 97% more backlinks to their siteOver 4.
• gizthebiz:A Roundup of Some Key Digital Marketing Statistics: The most important and surprising statistics we’ve come across being as follows:Influencers Are Not Trusted by 96% of PeopleSlowly but surely, we could be seeing the demise of the influencers as we’ve come to know them.
• According to the results of a recent study carried out by YouGov and Grey London, just 4% of Brits said that they trust the information and advice of influencers.
• 17% of social media users reported encountering inaccurate or misleading content online, while 48% said they don’t trust the accuracy or honesty of celebrities’ profiles.
• The report also suggested that quality assurance roles in customer contact centres could be cut by as much as 40%, replaced again by automated hardware and software.
• That’s according to Zenith’s latest ‘Advertising Expenditure Forecasts’ report, which predicts a further 20% social media spend this year to hit a whopping $84 billion.
• By contrast, total print ad spending is expected to decrease by 6% to $69 billion.
• Gen Z Loves Snapchat, Wish and TwitchUnsurprisingly, it’s now estimated that 98% of Gen Z now carries a smartphone.
• On average, Gen Z members clock up 150 combined user sessions with these apps each month – that’s around 55% more than their older counterparts.
• According to Mediacom, 18% of younger people have deleted one or more social media apps from the devices over the past year, while 13% said they have consciously reduced the amount of time they spend on social media apps.
• USA Content Marketing Platforms Market Statistics Analysis, Segments, Top Key Players – Tech Guest Posts Tech Guest Posts | SIIT | IT Training & Technical Certification Courses Online: 2024 IT SCHOLARSHIP Take Our Certification Programs at 90% Discounted Fee.
• 33 Digital Marketing Stats You Must Know in 2021 | Techifox: It is expected that 80-90% population will be online in the next 10-15 years.
• According to a study, 54% of internet users do not click banner ads, as they do not trust them.
• The retail industry contributes 9% of the revenue in Digital Advertising.
• As of the end of 2015, the top social media channels used by small businesses were Facebook (41%), LinkedIn (17%), Google+ (13%), and Twitter (12%) according to Ebiquity.
• 93% of small-medium organizations use social media as their main content marketing tactic.
• Content with relevant images gets 94% more views than content without relevant images.
• 71% of online marketers use visual assets in their social media marketing.
• Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates about 3 times as many leads.
• 45% of marketers say blogging is their most important content strategy.
• 82% of marketers who blog see positive ROI for their inbound marketing.
• Around 78% of queries are searched on Google only while Yahoo serves only around 6% search queries.
• Traditional Marketing VS Digital Marketing statistics: Another estimate shows that video traffic will dominate with around 82% by 2021.
• With more than 76% ROI these results are going to increase further and further.
• Most of the adults in a developed country like the US(60%) have their presence on Facebook regularly.
• Another estimate shows that video traffic will dominate with around 82% by 2021.
• With more than 76% ROI these results are going to increase further and further.
• Most of the adults in a developed country like the US(60%) have their presence on Facebook regularly.
• Search engines drive 93% traffic on the websites with Google dominantly taking 96% of the Smartphone to search traffic and 94% of the total organic making it effectively the sole leader for working with Digital Marketing technologies.
• Content with relevant images takes around 94% of the total views so make sure always complement your strategy with high-quality images.
• Another estimate shows that video traffic will dominate with around 82% by 2021.
• Blogs with videos are more likely to get better organic results in today’s modern age up to 157%.
• With more than 76% ROI these results are going to increase further and further.
• More than 75% of online users will research product reviews online before buying them from selling marketplace.
• Most of the adults in a developed country like the US(60%) have their presence on Facebook regularly.
• Mobile advertising has already reached 69% of the total amount spent on digital marketing.
• Especially B2B market LinkedIn has 94% acceptance from the business owners.
• Social Media is the most effective way for B2C marketing for more than 90% of marketers.
• Social Media Statistics for Your 2022 Marketing Strategy: Nevertheless, Facebook is still the most used social media platform for marketing with 93% of marketers worldwide using it for promotion, and with good reason.
• 96% engagement rate in 2021, but that’s not the only reason to consider marketing on there.
• TikTok is set to receive the largest increase in planned platform investment for brands at 84%, beating out YouTube and Instagram.
• Also, if your target audience includes the younger generation, you’ll be glad to know that 39% of Gen Z consumers are most likely to buy a product after learning about it from TikTok videos.
• As of January 2022, Twitter is at 435 million daily active users, half of which are monetizable, up 13% year-over-year.
• Twitter’s international ad revenue also continued to grow, reaching a total of $628 million, a 27% year-over-year increase.
• On top of that, 30% of shoppers have bigger baskets and spend twice as much per month as shoppers using other platforms according to Pinterest.
• 96% engagement rate in 2021, but that’s not the only reason to consider marketing on there.
• TikTok is set to receive the largest increase in planned platform investment for brands at 84%, beating out YouTube and Instagram.
• Also, if your target audience includes the younger generation, you’ll be glad to know that 39% of Gen Z consumers are most likely to buy a product after learning about it from TikTok videos.
• As of January 2022, Twitter is at 435 million daily active users, half of which are monetizable, up 13% year-over-year.
• Twitter’s international ad revenue also continued to grow, reaching a total of $628 million, a 27% year-over-year increase.
• On top of that, 30% of shoppers have bigger baskets and spend twice as much per month as shoppers using other platforms according to Pinterest.
• 5 Statistics Healthcare Marketers Should Know About Digital Marketing – Health Works Collective: To help medical marketers keep up with the latest in digital marketing, here are five statistics every professional needs to know:5% of Google searches are for health-related information:That is one in every twenty searches, which is a lot of patient-initiated medical searching.
• In fact, a Google study revealed that 77% of patients used search prior to booking an appointment.
• 62% of smartphone owners use their devices to look up information about a health condition:The web as we know it is evolving into a mobile entity.
• 41% of patients say social media does influence their selection of a healthcare provider:The medical community will have to be more social and open to engaging in conversations with the patient community.
• Inbound marketing can deliver 54% more leads into the marketing funnel:The traditional methods of outbound advertising are no longer effective in healthcare marketing.
• 100+ Statistics on Digital Marketing – WP Mamba: 2022 (HubSpot)In 2023, 46% of companies want to spend more on creating inbound marketing content.
• In 2022, the Content Marketing Institute Only 3% of marketers publish content on a regular basis.
• 2022 GrowthBarEven if it means posting less frequently, 83% of marketers believe it is better.
• 2022 (Hubspot)Compared to postings without videos, blog posts with videos receive 157% higher search traffic.
• (2021, Wyzowl)UGC Creator-based ads get 4x higher click-through rates and a 50% drop in cost-per-click than average.
• The amount of traffic to DuckDuckGo, a search engine that prioritizes anonymity, increased by 107% between October 2019 and October 2021.
• Over $100,000 is the average household income of 38% of Bing users in the US.
• 2022 (Barlliance)The week’s highest average open rate on Monday is 22%.
• (2022 Campaign Monitor)A weekly relevant email newsletter will have a 33% greater open rate than one that is delivered twice or more.
• 3% of people who sign up for email lists do so to obtain special offers.
• Statistics about Social Media Marketing You should keep the following social media statistics in mind when it comes to social media marketing:Customers want companies to produce their own content rather than handing it off to them, according to 84% of customers.
• 2022 (Hubspot)71% of customers who have had a good experience with a business on social media are inclined to tell their friends and family about it.
• 2022 (LYFE Marketing)Weekly purchases on Instagram account for 44% of users, 28% of which are scheduled purchases.
• Statistics show, 68% of the audience today prefers to watch short-form video content as it is not time-consuming.
• BloggingBlogging is still relevant for more than 50% of marketers, who rank it as one of their top content marketing techniques.
• Businesses with blogs often see a 55% increase in traffic to their primary websites.
• More than 57% of all companies with blogs have at least one consumer as a result of their blog.
• More than 68% of consumers say it’s simple to trust a company or website that has a blog.
• 53% of digital marketers think this is the greatest inbound marketing technique.
• Compounding blog posts may bring in 10% more money and 38% more visitors.
• Old posts are a great resource since they generate 75% of HubSpot’s views and 90% of its leads.
• 51% of individuals who listen to podcasts for five or more hours a week claim to be more attentive to podcast advertisements compared to those in other forms of media.
• (2022 Buzzsprout)Over $250,000 is the annual household income of 45% of podcast listeners.
• (2021 Forbes)Only 3% of total ad spending goes via podcast advertising, compared to 20% for video, 16% for social media, 14% for display, and 13% for search.
• (2021 Media Post)After hearing an advertisement on a podcast, 56% of listeners say they would promote the product or service to others.
• According to 64% of podcast listeners, they embrace and value podcast advertising and are appreciative of the companies that sponsor their favorite programs.
• According to research, mobile devices accounted for 70% of US-sponsored search impressions and clicks.
• 70% of smartphone owners use their devices to do more research before making an in-store purchase.
• 3 percent of all clicks and 76% of the money spent on retail search advertisements come from Google Shopping ads.
• Regional SEOIf they can view the inventory online, internet customers are 80% more likely to visit a physical store.
• 76% of mobile users who look for a store on Google Maps visit one nearby within a week, and 88 percent do so.
• Voice SearchVoice search is now something that 72% of individuals who own voice-activated speakers (like Alexa or Google Home) do often.
• By 2022, voice search is predicted to be used by at least 50% of customers, according to experts.
• Statistics on Customer ExperienceAfter just two bad customer encounters, 76% of individuals will cease doing business with a firm.
• 2022’s Venture BeatWhen choosing what to buy, 83% of buyers consider the quality of the customer service.
• (2022, Outer Box Design)Beginning in 2022, 79% of consumers said they were interested in subscription services and auto-replenishment programs for their regular purchases.
• In 2022, Wicked ReportsOnly 51% of shops provide same-day delivery, despite the fact that 61% of customers are ready to pay extra to have their purchases delivered that day.
• 10% of all sales are anticipated to be fulfilled in this fashion by 2025.
• )87% of customers reduce their spending or completely give up on businesses with poor customer service.
• (2022, The Future of Commerce)While 79% of consumers demand free delivery on returns, 92% of consumers say they would be likely to make another purchase from websites that make returns simple.
• 5 stats from CMI’s B2B Content Marketing report to inspire you in 2020: More than 8 in 10 B2B marketers use paid distribution channels for content marketing purposes 84% of B2B marketers surveyed said they have used paid distribution channels for content marketing purposes in the last 12 months.
• Half of B2B marketers outsource at least one content marketing activity, with content creation being the most likely 50% of those surveyed said they outsource at least one content marketing activity.
• Content distribution (31%) and content technology (22%) were the next most likely activities being outsourced by B2B marketers.
• 25% of B2B marketers said in-person events are the highest performing content type for converting leads The survey asked respondents which content types are the highest performing for their organisation for building brand awareness, securing leads, nurturing leads, and converting leads.
• 4 Mind-Blowing Statistics About Content Marketing for eCommerce: Well, here are four impressive statistics for you to consider:Businesses with blogs experience 126% more lead generation.
• 61% of Americans have made an online purchase based on blog recommendations.
• 1:Businesses With Blogs Experience 126% More Lead GenerationA recent study of 2,300 businesses found that businesses with blogs generate 126% more leads than those without.
• Content marketing is 62% cheaper than traditional, outbound marketing and generates more leads.
• Working With Industry Experts With 55% more visitors and 97% more leads up for grabs, working with industry experts is a sure method of getting the most out of blog articles.
• ” — Felicia, eCommerce business owner4:61% Of Americans Have Made an Online Purchase Based on Blog RecommendationsWith 61% of Americans using blog recommendations for purchasing decisions, the potential for content marketing has never been better.
• A poll by Ipsos breaks down the percentage of people who logon more than once a day by age:18-24 years old:67% 25-34 years old:60% 35-44 years old:49% 45-54 years old:43% 55+ years old:31% 11% of U.
• Between October 2019 and 2020, India saw a 20% growth in its ad audience size—a pace that could soon see the nation overtake the United St
• 61 digital marketing stats for 2022: 12 Abandoned Cart Email Examples You Can Use Right Now Nearly 70% of people abandon their shopping carts online.
• Digital Marketing Stats 2022 – Shiroyama 601: 88 percent of mobile users who search for a store on Google Maps visit a related store within a week – and 76% visit within a week.
• Leaders are 53% more likely to trust that machine learning assists marketing teams in evaluating data to understand consumer intent.
• COVID-19’s impact on social media marketing. The stats you need to know: have started using TikTok to follow influencers during the outbreak, rising to 17% in the UK.
• Source:Australia Post 2020 eCommerce Industry Report Stat:In Indonesia in May, 55% of consumers said they were shopping online more.
• Stat:96% of consumers who follow influencers say they’re engaging with creators more or to the same extent as before the outbreak.
• Stat:Of US and UK consumers who follow social media influencers, 72% are spending more time on social since the outbreak, according to a May 2020 GlobalWebIndex and Influencer survey.
• And 64% of respondents are likely to continue using social media to the same extent once pandemic-related restrictions are lifted.
• 167 Digital Marketing Stats You Need to Know in 2022 – OMG: (Backlinko) Google accounts for 94% of the total organic search traffic that arrives on your website.
• (Sparktoro) 61% of marketers say improving SEO and growing their organic presence is their top inbound marketing priority.
• (HubSpot) 72% of online marketers describe content marketing as their most effective SEO tactic.
• 3% of clicks (SEOClarity) (Image Source:SEOClarity) There are 6,586,013,574 searches made a day worldwide.
• (Junto) 70-80% of people ignore paid search results, choosing to only click on organic search results.
• (Junto) 75% of people never scroll past the first page of search engines.
• (Junto) 72% of people who conduct a local search will eventually visit a physical store as a result of that search.
• (Econsultancy) About 40% of the search results that reach Google’s first page are in https format.
• This is important because 82% of people will stop a purchase if they notice a website isn’t secure.
• (Image Source:HubSpot) Adding a blog to your website can increase its chances of ranking in search engines by 434%.
• (Search Engine People) Companies with blogs produce an average of 67% more leads monthly than companies that don’t blog.
• 70% of people would rather learn about a company through articles rather than advertisements.
• (Upland) Globally, 41% of marketers confirm inbound produces measurable ROI, and 82% of marketers who blog achieve a positive ROI through their inbound marketing efforts.
• (Neil Patel) 55% of B2B marketing professionals don’t understand what content marketing success actually entails.
• (Uhuru Network) Content marketing produces three times as many leads as traditional strategies while costing 62% less.
• (Content Marketing Institute) The average cost per leads drops 80% after five months of consistent inbound marketing.
• (Invespcro) Content from industry leaders and influencers receive more credence from B2B buyers in 87% of cases.
• (Content Preferences Report) 95% of potential purchasers will exchange personal information for a valuable whitepaper.
• (Aberdeen Group) 47% of people read between three and five pieces of content before arranging a conversation with a sales rep.
• (Demand Gen Report) 86% of organizations classed as “highly efficient” have somebody in charge of their content marketing strategy.
• (Zephoria) 61% of all visits from social media websites come from Facebook.
• (HubSpot) The number of marketers who say Facebook is critical to their business has increased 83% in just two years.
• (WPForms) 64% of all online shoppers claim that videos that they saw on social media platforms like Facebook influenced a purchasing decision.
• (HubSpot) 79% of video marketers use Facebook as a video marketing channel.
• (Wyzowl) In April 2020, over 98% of Facebook’s active user accounts worldwide accessed the social network via mobile phone.
• (Statista) LinkedIn digital marketing statistics LinkedIn has 675 million monthly users, a 14% increase since the end of 2018.
• (Hootsuite) Cost per lead on LinkedIn is 28% lower than Google AdWords.
• (Hootsuite) 66% of B2B marketers claim LinkedIn is the most valuable social media platform for their efforts.
• (LinkedIn) Pinterest digital marketing statistics 28% of all marketers worldwide use Pinterest to market (Statista).
• (Statista) 77% of pinners say they have discovered a new brand or product while browsing on Pinterest.
• (Pinterest) 82% of Pinterest users have bought products based on their brands’ content on Pinterest.
• (HubSpot) 28% of video marketers plan to include Instagram TV in their 2020 video marketing strategy.
• (Statista) (Image Source:Statista) 63% of Instagram users log in at least once per day.
• (HubSpot) Twitter generated 87% of its revenue through advertising services in 2019.
• (Statista) 38% of video marketers plan to include Twitter in their 2020 video marketing strategy.
• (HubSpot) Companies that take advantage of video marketing increase revenue 49% faster than those that don’t.
• (Infographic World) (Infographic Source:Infographic World) 70% of B2B marketers claim that video is the most effective form of content when it comes to conversions.
• (Infographic World) Online videos make up more than 80% of all consumer internet traffic.
• (Omnikick) Including video on landing pages can increase conversion rates by 80%.
• (Wyzowl) 92% of marketers who use video say that it’s an important part of their marketing strategy.
• (Wyzowl) 83% of video marketers say video has helped them generate leads.
• (Wyzowl) 87% of video marketers say video has increased traffic to their website, and 81% of marketers say video has increased the average time their visitors spend on page.
• (Kinsta) When compared to plain text, video is 50% more likely to achieve strong organic search rankings.
• (SEO Inc) Blogs that contain videos see an average of 157% more traffic than blogs that don’t contain videos.
• (Statista) (Image Source:Statista) YouTube remains the most widely used platform for video marketers, with 85% of video marketers having used it in 2019.
• (Wyzowl) 83% of video marketers that have used YouTube said it had been successful for them.
• (Statista) 49% of marketers consider email marketing an important lead generation tactic, while 47% consider it important for lead nurturing.
• (HubSpot) 35% of marketers send three to five emails per week to their customers.
• (HubSpot) Email campaigns achieve on average a 17% open rate and a 4% CTR.
• 5% of people who receive an email after abandoning a shopping cart will open the email.
• (Media Buzz) Segmented email campaigns achieve almost 15% higher open rates than non-segmented campaigns.
• (Backlinko) Segmented campaigns see as high as a 760% increase in revenue.
• (Campaign Monitor) Video-based emails achieve a 96% higher CTR than emails that don’t contain video.
• (HubSpot) The best marketing automation statistics 68% of businesses use automation in some way.
• (Liana Technologies) 98% of people believe that marketing automation will play a critical role in their future business success.
• (Autopilot) 91% of marketing automation users think it’s very important to their overall online marketing efforts.
• (HubSpot) Anticipated year-over-year growth for marketing automation platforms is 31%.
• (Salesforce) Nearly 70% of marketers report that the most important benefit of automation technology is the improved targeting of messages.
• (HubSpot) However, 61% of marketers rank lead generation as their number one challenge.
• (HubSpot) (Image Source:Funnel Overload) 53% of marketers spend at least half of their budget on lead generation.
• (HubSpot) Outsourcing lead generation generates 43% better results than in-house lead generation.
• (Fearless Competitor) 80% of marketers think marketing automation generates more leads and conversions.
• (APSIS) 49% of companies report that increasing customer acquisition is their primary objective.
• (HubSpot) Over 60% of marketers said that their customer acquisition cost has increased in the past three years.
• (SparkToro) 79% of marketers say PPC is hugely beneficial for their business.
• (PPC Protect) A shocking 60% of people can’t tell the difference between Google ads and organic search results.
• 6% of searchers click on Google Ads when they’re specifically looking to buy a product online.
• (Wordstream) On average, 41% of clicks go to the top 3 paid ads on the search results page.
• (Wordstream) Google’s display campaigns reach 90% of internet users across the globe.
• (Google) Display advertising has proven to increase traffic to websites by 300%.
• (Visually) Three-fourths of people (75%) say paid search ads make it easier to find the information they are searching for on a website or search engine.
• One-third of people (33%) click on a paid search ad because it directly answers their search query.
• (Search Engine Land) PPC visitors are 50% more likely to purchase something than organic visitors.
• (Unbounce) The best mobile marketing statistics Mobile devices now drive over 52% of web traffic and account for nearly two out of every three minutes online.
• (Blue Corona) The average person spends 70% of their digital media time on a mobile device.
• (Image Source:SEOClarity) Average CTR for mobile PPC ads drops by 45% between the first and second-placed ads.
• (Wordstream) When shopping online, 84% of people between the ages of 19 and 29 will use a mobile device.
• (PR Newswire) 57% of people will tell others to avoid a website that offers a poor mobile experience.
• (Sweor) Over 50% of those surveyed say they’ve discovered a new company while using Google to search on a mobile device.
• (Think with Google) About 30% of mobile searchers are looking specifically for a local business.
• (Search Engine Land) In 18% of cases, local searches on mobile devices lead to a sale being made the very same day.
• (Statista) (Image Source:Statista) Mobile sites that load up in less than five seconds engage users for 70% more time than those that take longer than 5 seconds.
• 10 Stats That Show Content Marketing Can Boost Your Business: If you’re skeptical about the benefits of content marketing or reluctant to commit money to something that you’re not 100% convinced will yield the results you want – get ready to change your mind!
• 10 content marketing statistics that demonstrate content marketing works for any business 70% of marketers are actively investing in content marketing.
• (Hubspot) 76% of marketers use organic traffic as a measure of content success (SEMrush) 61% of marketers believe that SEO is the key to online success.
• (Safari Digital) 94% of content marketers are using social media as a distribution channel for their content.
• (HubSpot) Email campaigns (87%) and educational content (77%) are the top content marketing methods B2B marketers use to nurture their audience.
• (Content Marketing Institute) Only 48% of B2B marketers frequently craft content based on the specific stages of the customer journey.
• (Content Marketing Institute) The top 3 content mediums for B2B marketers are social media content (95%), blog posts/short articles (89%), and email newsletters (81%).
• (B2B Content Marketing Report) 74% of people say they’ve been convinced to buy or download a piece of software or app by watching a video.
• That number jumps to 84% when asked if a video convinced them to buy a product or service.
• (Wyzowl State of Video Marketing 2020) Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates about 3 times as many leads.
• The fact that 70% of marketers are actively investing in a content marketing strategy is a testament to the fact that it works.
• The most successful businesses are investing as much as 40% of their marketing budgets in content, and are achieving 3x more leads by doing so.
• 76% of marketers said that organic traffic is the most important metric they use to measure the success of their content strategy.
• 7 Stats That Prove the Importance of Social Media Marketing: 55% of consumers learn about new brands on social Social media is a place for discovery and now, it’s nearly as common for consumers to learn about brands or companies on social as it is through TV or radio ads.
• Why it’s important When we look closer at the 55% of consumers who learn about new brands on social, Gen Z and Millennials are especially likely to use social for brand discovery.
• 43% of consumers increased their social media use to discover new products in the last year When the COVID-19 pandemic shut down the physical world and people hunkered down at home, nearly everything shifted to the digital space.
• Consumer use of social to discover or learn about new products or services increased 43%—a trend that’s expected to continue in the next three years.
• 78% of consumers are willing to buy from a company after having a positive experience with them on social Never underestimate the impact of a positive experience with your brand or company on social.
• 80% of business executives think it’s very important or essential to invest additional resources in social media marketing Social can make big brands feel welcoming and accessible.
• Fortunately, businesses now see social as a vehicle for business growth and 80% of executives think it’s absolutely essential to invest additional resources into social media marketing.
• Why it’s important It’s not just executives who think investing in social is critical—62% of consumers believe brands need a strong social presence to succeed in the long run.
• 91% of executives will increase social media marketing budgets in the next 3 years In past years, securing a budget and resources for social media marketing has been one of the biggest challenges marketers faced.
• Over half of the executives surveyed anticipate that their social marketing budgets will increase by over 50% by 2024.
• 72% of companies use social media data to inform business decisions According to 72% of executives surveyed, social data is already the top data source used to inform business decisions, even more so than market research.
• And going forward, 85% agree that social data will be a primary source of business intelligence.
• Finally, we’re seeing this shift, and according to the latest Sprout Social Index™, Edition XVII:Elevate, 90% of marketers agree that social data enables them to stay ahead of their competitors.
• How Many Email Blasts to Send | Marketing Stats Leading into 2020 — Custom Digital Solutions: This comes at a growth rate of 3% from 2019 (or 100 million new accounts each year if you hate math).
• Surely millennials can only be reached on social media…Contrary to popular belief, 73% of millennials prefer contact from businesses to come via email versus any other channel.
• ” Additionally, close to 50% of all emails are opened on a mobile device.
• 50 Content Marketing Statistics to Drive your Brand (2022) – Kontely: 1) Content marketing costs 62% less than other outbound marketing tactics but generates 3x as many leads.
• 2) 78% of CMOs say that custom content is the future of successful content marketing.
• 5) 72% of marketers believe that content marketing increases engagement (CMI).
• 9) 96% of the best content marketers say content marketing has helped them build trust and credibility with their audience (Content Marketing Institute).
• 10) 90% of these content marketers have succeeded by focusing on the audience’s need for information (Content Marketing Institute).
• 11) 94% of content marketers changed their strategy in response to the COVID-19 pandemic.
• 14) 68% of content marketers are determined to boost loyalty among current customers in 2022.
• 17) 47% of people surveyed in 2022 spend more than $10k on annual content marketing.
• 23) Approximately 80% internet users are loyal readers of some type of blog.
• 29) 51% of companies update old blog articles to boost traffic (SEMrush).
• 30) 71% of B2B consumers visit an organization’s blog at some point in the buyer’s journey.
• 31) 86% of companies produce more blog content than other content (SEMrush).
• 32) 95% of people only pay attention to the first page of search results.
• 36) 86% of video marketers say video has increased traffic to their website.
• 38) 94% of video marketers say video has helped boost user understanding of their product.
• 41) 96% of people will watch an explainer video to learn more about your product.
• 45) 45% of worldwide internet users aged 25-34 listen to podcasts regularly.
• 46) 39% of men and 36% of women in the US are monthly podcast listeners (Edison Research, 2020).
• 48) Marketers who use segmented email campaigns receive as much as a 760% increase in revenue.
• 50) 59% of webinar attendees register the week before the webinar, and 17% register on the day of the webinar.
• 25 Essential Social Media Marketing Statistics | Zegashop: Here are 25 must-know social media statistics for 2022 74% percent of Facebook users check their accounts every day!
• Tweets with images can receive approximately 160% more retweets than those without.
• 85% of small and medium-sized businesses offer customer service over Twitter.
• This includes B2B marketers who ranked social media advertising second in success (29%) behind paid search (33%) for producing content marketing results.
• 80% of weekly users have discovered a new brand or product on Pinterest.
• Year on year growth for DAUs has been 20% over five consecutive quarters.
• Top 5 Channels – Social Media Marketing for Manufacturing Companies (Stats & Benchmarks) | Web Worx Labs: While the demographic does skew slightly younger – the penetration of YouTube across all age groups in 2020 is at least 70% in the United States!
• Video Marketing Statistics:Top Trends for 2022 and Beyond – Digital Marketing: This year, 59% of marketers said that video marketing showed a positive ROI, and 58% plan to incorporate more videos into their marketing strategies in the future.
• Here’s how videos powered marketing campaigns in 2021:65% of marketers said they wanted to build awareness for their brand, and 64% said that video helped them achieve that.
• 55% of marketers said they wanted to increase engagement, and 60% said video helped them with this goal.
• 37% of marketers said they wanted to boost conversion, while 57% were able to get results.
• Our survey found that 68% of consumers watch videos on their phones — a 2% increase from last year.
• In fact, 59% of people spend a quarter or more of their time on social media watching videos.
• 5 Content Marketing Stats That Will Help You Reach Your Audience – Bloggerse: Contents Summary show Multiscreen Millennials C-Suite Connections YOU MAY ALSO LIKE 3) 19% of Gen-Xers and 31% of baby boomers say they by no means proportion content material online.
• AI Advances 4) 45% of purchasers could abandon content material that’s showing poorly on their contemporary device.
• Personalization Pays 5) 34% of clients are more likely to make an unplanned purchase if a logo personalizes content.
• Multiscreen Millennials1) 28% of millennials use 3 or greater devices on the equal time often, 130% increase yr over year.
• C-Suite ConnectionsYOU MAY ALSO LIKE3) 19% of Gen-Xers and 31% of baby boomers say they by no means proportion content material online.
• AI Advances4) 45% of purchasers could abandon content material that’s showing poorly on their contemporary device.
• Personalization Pays5) 34% of clients are more likely to make an unplanned purchase if a logo personalizes content.
• The State Of Interactive Content Marketing:Statistics And Trends: In fact, research shows that 93% of marketers agreed that interactive content is effective in educating buyers versus just 70% for static content.
• 25 Social Media Marketing Statistics for 2021 – Tech Stacy: When you are examining B2B marketing, social media marketing was used by around 83% of the marketers & came second (with 29%) behind search engine marketing (with 33%).
• Around 81% of the organizations make use of social media publishing or analytics tools.
• The content creation or collaboration or workflow tools improved to 58% in the year 2020.
• B2B organizations mainly prefer LinkedIn (around 86%) & B2C companies opt for Facebook (around 98%) for social media marketing.
• Around 17% of the customers may walk away from the brand that they love in case they have any bad experience.
• Around 77% of the people make use of Instagram to view photos, and 51% to watch videos, and 45% to share content, and 23% use it for networking, as well as 11% for shopping or finding for the products.
• Around 91% visit the brand’s website and app, and 89% buy from the same brand & 85% may recommend that brand to their friend or family.
• LinkedIn generates around 277% higher leads compared to Twitter and Facebook.
• The number of people opening their emails through their mobile phones is around 49%.
• The social media platform has reached 200 million monetizable active users daily in 2020, over 29% YoY.
• Tweets posted from noon & 10 pm garner huge engagement and 55% of more engagement gets received by the tweets and posts having GIFs.
• Around 47% of the Twitter users mainly prefer brands, which are engaged culturally.
• Around 75% of the Instagram users take immediate action – like visiting the website and making the purchase – after watching the ad.
• Around 93% of the Twitter members are more open to the brands that get involved in the conversation, like offering support and help.
• Young users (18 to 24 years) spend around 75% of the time on the video ads on Facebook than 65+ year visitors.
• 7 PPC Statistics Your Business Needs to Know – Digital Marketing and Website Design | BizTraffic – Drive, Capture, Convert: That means that 80% of businesses will have a leg up on your company’s digital marketing campaigns if you don’t take advantage of AdWords!
• 46% of people can’t tell the difference between organic search results and PPC.
• When almost half of the clicks are going to the first 3 results and 75% of the clicks are on the first page, you need to take every advantage that you can get!
• 50 PPC And AdWords Statistics Boost Your Digital Marketing in 2023: The organic results on Google obtain only 35% of clicks, whereas buying keywords drives 65% of clicks.
• PPC visitors purchase 50% more products or services than organic visitors.
• 75% is the average Google AdWords search network conversion rate for all industries.
• 70% of mobile searchers will directly call business brands through Google search.
• The top 3 paid advertising marketers on Google AdWords find 46% of total clicks.
• Compared with overall PPC channels, Google alone suppresses the entire Market by 37%.
• 79% of marketers stated that PPC is the only tool for acquiring conversions.
• 92% of social media advertisers prefer to launch their ads on Facebook.
• When the retailers include the cross-device data, it can improve conversions by 16%.
• 88% of the mobile searches for localized businesses result within 24 hours through calls and direct visits.
• Google Statistics stated that Google and Facebook account for over 60% of all ads.
• Over 62% of marketers plan to increase their budget to defeat competitors.
• 65% of the consumers click on the PPC ads while purchasing the products.
• More than half, 61% of the digital marketers, wanted a bigger budget to boost the campaigns’ efficiency.
• More than 70% of mobile advertisement conversions and calls are notified through Google AdWords.
• 66 Content Marketing Statistics for 2022: Furthermore, 70% of marketers believe that content marketing helps to educate the audience, and 60% believe that it helps to build loyalty with existing clients/customers (CMI).
• 73% of people admit to skimming blog posts, while 27% read them thoroughly (HubSpot).
• Targeting strategic keywords is the top SEO tactic for 71% of marketers (HubSpot).
• Every day, 51% of businesses that invest in content marketing publish content (The Manifest).
• Despite the fact that 32% of respondents are overwhelmed by the amount of content available, the majority (44%) say they typically consume three to five pieces of content before engaging with a vendor (DemandGen).
• Only 4% of B2B marketers do not intend to develop a content marketing strategy (CMI).
• Only 28% of B2B marketers use paid content distribution channels (CMI).
• Only 6% of B2C marketers do not intend to develop a content marketing strategy (CMI).
• According to B2C marketers who use at least two organic social media platforms, Facebook (59%) and Instagram (21%), produce the best overall content marketing results (CMI).
• Only 28% of B2C marketers avoid paid content distribution channels (CMI).
• While creating content, 73% of B2C marketers conduct keyword research for SEO (CMI).
• A search engine is the starting point for 68% of online experiences (Brightedge).
• 71% of B2B researchers begin their research with a generic search rather than a branded search (Google).
• 70% of people prefer blogs to traditional advertisements for information (Demand Metric).
• The most popular content formats are how-to articles (77%), followed by news and trends (49%), and guides and ebooks (47%).
• 70% of viewers purchased from a brand after seeing it on YouTube (Google).
• In order to learn more about a product or service, 96% of people have watched an explainer video (Wyzowl).
• Visuals are considered essential or very important by 64% of respondents.
• Only 19% of newsletters were read completely by study participants (Nielsen).
• 73% of people admit to skimming blog posts, while 27% read them thoroughly (HubSpot).
• Targeting strategic keywords is the top SEO tactic for 71% of marketers (HubSpot).
• Every day, 51% of businesses that invest in content marketing publish content (The Manifest).
• Despite the fact that 32% of respondents are overwhelmed by the amount of content available, the majority (44%) say they typically consume three to five pieces of content before engaging with a vendor (DemandGen).
• Only 4% of B2B marketers do not intend to develop a content marketing strategy (CMI).
• Only 28% of B2B marketers use paid content distribution channels (CMI).
• Only 6% of B2C marketers do not intend to develop a content marketing strategy (CMI).
• According to B2C marketers who use at least two organic social media platforms, Facebook (59%) and Instagram (21%), produce the best overall content marketing results (CMI).
• Only 28% of B2C marketers avoid paid content distribution channels (CMI).
• While creating content, 73% of B2C marketers conduct keyword research for SEO (CMI).
• A search engine is the starting point for 68% of online experiences (Brightedge).
• 71% of B2B researchers begin their research with a generic search rather than a branded search (Google).
• 70% of people prefer blogs to traditional advertisements for information (Demand Metric).
• The most popular content formats are how-to articles (77%), followed by news and trends (49%), and guides and ebooks (47%).
• In order to learn more about a product or service, 96% of people have watched an explainer video (Wyzowl).
• Visuals are considered essential or very important by 64% of respondents.
• Only 19% of newsletters were read completely by study participants (Nielsen).
• Sams Boston Fashion’s:26 Digital marketing statistics you shouldn’t miss: 85% of people would rather provide an e-mail for an e-book over a tweet Blog and Content Marketing Blog give sites more indexed pages and more indexed links Blogs are 63% more likely to influence purchase decisions than magazines.
• Companies that use infographics grow in average of 12% Companies see 55% increase in leads from increasing pages from 10 to 15 26 Digital marketing statistics you shouldn’t miss Posted by Unknown at 12:11 AM Email ThisBlogThis!
• Kohls Coupon Codes 30%- Shop With A Difference Kohls Coupon Codes 30%- Customers Wait For Such Of.
• Kohls Coupon Codes 30%- Influence The Customer To Buy Sams Boston – Sams boston Directory ELLE Gensler Tops Out World’s Second Tallest Tower in S.
• targetcouponcode20percent How to Build Self Confidence:12 Steps – wikiHow How effective Target coupon codes 20% off are Cool, colourful customers | The Border Mail Target coupon codes 20% – Home atrium studio turn heat exchanger into culture + s.
• October 2012 Kohls coupon code 30% Playful and Hallucinating House With a Sense of Ve.
• 139 Must-Know Content Marketing Statistics for 2023 – My Blog: Video tutorials — People watch an average of 19 hours of video online per week, and when it comes to learning about products and services, 69% revealed that video was their go-to.
• Social Media Marketing Misconceptions [stats]: 8% of all companies felt that they understood the motivations of their social consumers, nearly a quarter did not.
• 8% of businesses had even bothered to ask their social marketing customers what the greatest benefit is which they expect to receive from their interaction.
• 1% was customer service, followed by insight to help make decisions at 57.
• 5% was the ability to buy within social networks which is essentially the goal of any marketing effort.
• 2% Dont Relate It To Market ValueThe other leading answers to the primary goals question were consumer engagement at 75.
• 8% replied that their primary goals included making a positive impact on the market value or stock price of their companies which again demonstrates a staggering split from conventional wisdom.
• 2% of all companies involved in social consumerism strategies not considering this fundamental goal to any degree whatsoever it leads to the question of why theyre engaging in the process in the first place.
• 95% of all respondents replied Facebook which makes sense given that its not only the 800 pound gorilla in the market, but it has a million users for every pound.
• Next in the list was Twitter at 89% and it is this figure which starts to show the incongruous aspects between the online marketers beliefs vs.
• The businesses also claimed that Google+ was used by 42% of their social consumers which is yet another reality shift as the site is widely acknowledged to have approximately 40 million users.
• Top Digital Marketing Statistics From Singapore: 41% make purchases online Piquing the interest of a potential client is good, but it does not lead to a sale if the client has to call particular numbers or visit a store to make an order.
• Mobile phones are the most popular devices for browsing the internet A thumping 95% use regular mobile phones to access the internet while 91% access the internet using smartphones.
• People between the ages of 25 and 34 are most active representing 34% of Facebook users while 13 to 17-year-olds are least active representing 2% of the overall Facebook users.
• Additionally, 53% of Singaporeans use Facebook Messenger App as a means of communicating with their friends.
• 51% of Singaporeans use Instagram 15 to 24-year-olds represent the biggest Instagram users taking 87% while people above 50 years use Instagram the least taking 30%.
• 45% of users prefer YouTube to Television The fast internet speeds have seen video consumptions grow in leaps and bounds over the last few years.
• Singaporeans watch at least 2 hours of online videos per day Around 60% of internet users check out products on YouTube before making a purchase.
• ALSO READSocial Media Statistics in Singapore in 2022It is also important to note that more than 60% of Singaporeans watch YouTube on their mobile phones so optimizing ads for mobile is vital.
• WhatsApp leads the way with a 73% market penetration Communication via WhatsApp is essential to Singaporeans.
• 62% of people believe that technology offers more opportunities A majority of Singaporeans have embraced technology and feel it does more good than harm.
• 87% of Singaporeans want their data protected Singaporeans are not opposed to sharing their data with online businesses when making purchases.
• 59% prefer to complete tasks on the digital space This digital marketing statistic is related to the point that 41% make online purchases.
• 80+ Essential Social Media Marketing Statistics for 2022 – Your Marketing Guy: Here are some of the most interesting stats we discovered:77% of social media marketers say social media marketing has been somewhat to very effective for their company this year.
• What’s more, 37% of marketers who said social media marketing was somewhat to very ineffective cited COVID-19, likely due to the rapid change in strategy.
• 82% of marketers say they repurpose content across social media channels.
• Short-form videos is the top social media format used by 54% of social media marketers, followed by live streaming, live audio chatrooms, and user-generated content.
• 80% of marketers say funny content is the most effective on social media.
• 84% of marketers target Millennials as part of their social media strategy.
• The biggest challenge marketers face on social media is creating engaging content, reported by 27% of respondents.
• 67% of marketers say they work with micro influencers with 10K-100K followers or subscribers.
• Conversely, only 29% say they work with mega influencers with more than 1 million followers.
• 25% of respondents said they believe funny content is most effective with Gen Z.
• Image Source Channel-Specific Social Media Statistics Facebook Statistics In a 2021 HubSpot Blog poll, 79% of marketers report buying paid advertising on Facebook.
• (HootSuite) Facebook is a popular source of news with 31% of Americans regularly getting their news from the platform.
• (Pew Research) According to the same poll, more than 50% of marketers plan on increasing their investments in Facebook, YouTube, and TikTok in 2022.
• (HubSpot) Facebook ads are used by 70% of marketers, and there were 10 million active advertisers on the platform in Q3 2021.
• (Statista) In a HubSpot Blog poll, 79% of marketers plan to continue investing in Twitter Spaces in 2022.
• (HubSpot) Link clicks account for 92% of all user interaction with tweets.
• (Twitter) 99% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll say they plan to continue to invest the same amount or increase their investment in Twitter.
• (HubSpot) 93% of Twitter community members are open to brands getting involved in conversation, such as providing help and support.
• Instagram Statistics In a 2021 HubSpot Blog poll, 58% of marketers plan to leverage Instagram Reels in 2022.
• (Statista) 20% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll report generating the biggest ROI when working with influencers on Instagram, only behind Facebook.
• (HubSpot) 98% of marketers say Instagram is the most influential platform for influencer marketing, which is 44% higher than Facebook.
• (Sprout Social) 61% of social media marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll say they plan to increase their investment in 2022.
• (Instagram) In a 2021 HubSpot Blog poll, 73% of marketers prefer Instagram for influencer marketing.
• (eMarketer) As of January 2022, 59% of LinkedIn users were between 25 and 34 years old.
• (LinkedIn) 87% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog survey said LinkedIn offered average or high ROI.
• (HubSpot) 82% of B2B markers report finding the greatest success on LinkedIn.
• (LinkedIn Marketing Solutions) Over 46% of all social media traffic to company websites comes from LinkedIn.
• (LinkedIn) 40% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog survey say they plan to increase their investment in the platform in 2022.
• 5% of marketers use YouTube for influencer marketing, according to a 2021 eMarketer report.
• (eMarketer) 50% of social media marketers surveyed by the HubSpot Blog say they plan to increase their investment in YouTube in 2022.
• In fact, 20% of respondents say they plan to invest in this platform the most.
• (Statista) In a 2021 HubSpot Blog poll, 44% of marketers plan to leverage YouTube for the first time in 2022.
• (YouTube) YouTube accounts for more than 25% of total worldwide mobile traffic.
• (HootSuite) TikTok Statistics 70% of TikTok users agree they feel a deeper connection to people they interact with on TikTok compared to other social networks.
• (TikTok) In a 2021 HubSpot Blog poll, 61% of marketers plan to increase their investment in TikTok marketing in 2022.
• (HootSuite) 61% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll say they plan to increase their investment in TikTok in 2022.
• (HubSpot) 12% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll say they work with influencers the most on TikTok.
• (Statista) 50% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll plan to increase their investment in Reddit.
• (Reddit) 23% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll plan to leverage Reddit for the first time in 2022.
• (Statista) Only 2% of social media marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog plan to invest in Reddit the most in 2022.
• (HubSpot) 49% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll buy paid ads on Reddit.
• (HubSpot) Reddit is an unlikely place for influencer marketing but 38% of marketers surveyed in a HubSpot Blog poll say they work with influencers on the platform.
• Whether you’re considering hiring an external social media consulting service or creating a role in-house, take a look at these trends that demonstrate the importance of social media consulting:Answering a complaint on social media can increase customer advocacy by 25%.
• (Convince & Convert) 79% of consumers expect brands to respond within a day of reaching out over social media, but average brand response rates across all industries is lower than 25%.
• (Sprout Social) 79% of people say that user-generated content on social media significantly impacts their purchasing decisions.
• The Stats Don’t Lie:Authentic Content Marketing Is a Winner! — Cinebody: User-generated content got the nod from almost three-quarters (74%) of those asked.
• And 62% said they’re more likely to buy something if they can see customer videos and photos first.
• Yahoo and MSN had the market shares of 22% as well as 12% specifically.
• Top 9 Stats Analyzing the ROI of Social Media Marketing – Wishpond Blog: The author of the article mentions that the level of interaction between Twitter users increased by 69% in 2011 to 76% in 2012.
• Approximately 40% of American people hear about tweets through traditional mass media The research data indicates that more than four in ten Americans hear about or read tweets almost every day in media.
• Facebook is the dominant platform for brand following behavior 79% of users prefer using Facebook to connect with brands and products, while only 9% of users prefer using Twitter.
• Nevertheless, 34% of social media users do not ever post status updates for various reasons.
• The author of the article mentions that the level of interaction between Twitter users increased by 69% in 2011 to 76% in 2012.
• Approximately 40% of American people hear about tweets through traditional mass media The research data indicates that more than four in ten Americans hear about or read tweets almost every day in media.
• Facebook is the dominant platform for brand following behavior 79% of users prefer using Facebook to connect with brands and products, while only 9% of users prefer using Twitter.
• Nevertheless, 34% of social media users do not ever post status updates for various reasons.
• ” Shown in the diagram below, by the middle of 2012 the number of Americans who had “The Social Habit” increased by 22% (approximately 58 million people), while only being 18% in 2011.
• The author of the article mentions that the level of interaction between Twitter users increased by 69% in 2011 to 76% in 2012.
• Approximately 40% of American people hear about tweets through traditional mass media The research data indicates that more than four in ten Americans hear about or read tweets almost every day in media.
• Facebook is the dominant platform for brand following behavior 79% of users prefer using Facebook to connect with brands and products, while only 9% of users prefer using Twitter.
• Only 23% of social media users are registered users for “daily deals” services.
• Nevertheless, 34% of social media users do not ever post status updates for various reasons.
• 57% of users almost never have used a “Check-In” service to post a status update that provided location.
• 11 B2B Content Marketing Trends for 2024 [+ Statistics!] — Teranga Digital Marketing: Just think about this:In 2023, 90% of marketers had ramped up or maintained their investment in short-form videos.
• A mighty 71% of content marketers now view content marketing as a more critical part of their operations in 2023 compared to the year before!
• And plenty of marketers agree, with a staggering 85% of marketers seeing AI as having a positive impact on B2B marketing over the next 12 months.
• An astounding 91% of businesses now use video as a marketing tool, marking an all-time high.
• Moreover, 96% of marketers view video as an indispensable part of their marketing arsenal.
• The data speaks volumes:92% of video marketers vouch for the positive ROI video content delivers, which has steadily climbed since 2015.
• Dive deeper, and you’ll find that 96% of marketers agree videos have skyrocketed user understanding of their products or services.
• An impressive 90% of marketers affirm that video content has directly bolstered their lead-generation efforts.
• Over 80% of marketers concur that interactive content is superior to engaging users compared to static content.
• With 97% of B2B marketers using it for content distribution, LinkedIn has become the go-to platform for professional networking and business growth.
• Its ability to connect brands with industry professionals and decision-makers makes it an invaluable tool for lead generation, with 80% of B2B leads generated through social media are from LinkedIn.
• A staggering 86% of brands and retailers now think that their ads and content would perform better if they included more genuine user-generated content (UGC) in their strategy.
• An impressive 84% of C-level and VP-level buyers are influenced by social media when purchasing.
• Social media has become a crucial research tool for B2B buyers, with 55% using it to research opportunities and gather the social proof they need to make informed decisions.
• With 72% of B2B customers expecting a deep understanding of their needs, reflected through personalised experiences, conversational content becomes a strategic imperative.
• The fact that 90% of people think it is important to get an immediate response lends credence to this trend and shows how highly valued quick and personal interaction is in today’s world.
• And business leaders understand this well, with 75% considering personalisation fundamental to staying competitive in the digital space.
• McKinsey & Company’s insights reveal that 76% of consumers are more likely to consider brands offering personalised interactions, and a significant 78% are swayed to repurchase, underscoring the impactful role of personalisation in fostering brand loyalty and customer retention.
• Both webinars and in-person events are potent tools for lead generation, with 73% of webinar attendees turning into qualified leads.
• A compelling narrative significantly influences customer behaviour, with 55% more likely to consider a purchase and 15% making an immediate purchase if they love a brand’s story.
• Statistics show that 50% of consumers are more likely to recommend a product if the advertisements are diverse and genuinely representative.
• ▷ Seoseon :Digital Marketing in Scandinavia | SEOSEON – traffic statistics – HypeStat: 00% Referral:0% Search:0% Social:0% Paid:0% Backlinks Report ▼ Seoseon.
• Social Media Marketing Statistics – Improve Your Business: List of Social Media Marketing Statistics Mostly 70% of the US Population has a profile on at least one social media networking website.
• 75% of consumers who had a better experience with a brand on social media are likely to suggests the brand to their family and friends.
• 95% of users are accessing social media channels through mobile devices.
• Likewise, 80% of the total time spent on social media websites occurs on mobile platforms.
• 12 Crucial Digital Marketing Statistics for 2022 – Salespanel: 65% of B2B marketers use Facebook, and business decision-makers spend 74% more time on Facebook.
• 93% of Twitter community members are open to brands getting involved in conversations.
• Over 94% of LinkedIn users Trivia:While you generate leads on various social media platforms, it makes sense to track all your social channels and attribute campaigns and channels with revenue.
• Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and generates about three times as many leads.
• The B2B marketing teams with the highest success rates spend 40% of the marketing budget on content marketing.
• The most common content marketing delivery mechanism is social media, used by 89% of marketers.
• Over 70% of online marketers describe content creation as their most effective SEO tactic.
• 78% of marketers in 2020 said email is important to overall company success, compared to 71% in 2019.
• 60% of marketers say creating personalized email sequences is a top priority.
• Marketers who use segmented campaigns noted as much as a 760% increase in revenue.
• 59% of Millennials primarily use their smartphone to check email, while 67% of Generation Z scans their inbox on mobile.
• 53% of all consumers, including millennials and Gen Z, check the promotion tab at least once a day.
• 16 interesting social media marketing statistics that you should know | IT solution Provider – FLYONIT: In the year 2015, Facebook influenced around 52% of consumers’ online as well as offline purchases, which up from 36 per cent in 2014.
• Our Work Portfolio Web Development View all Branding View all Mobile Apps View all Brochure Design View all Avail 100% Discount Now!
• SMO Social Media Optimisation Services:Canada vs Australia Online Marketing Statistics & Trends 2011: 4 billion Online ads are rapidly closing on newspaper ad revenues with Internet spots representing 13% of the combined $13.
• The volume of data downloaded via mobile handsets over the three months ended 31 December 2010 was 4,029 Terabytes 12% of respondents used their mobile phone to buy things for their mobile phone at least once on a monthly basis, compared to 10% last year.
• 12% of respondents used their mobile phone to buy things for their mobile phone at least once on a monthly basis, compared to 10% last year.
• The best digital marketing stats we’ve seen this week – Droidi Fic: 53% of entrepreneurs plan to make a 25 to 49% increase in AI spend in the subsequent 3 years, even as 17% promise a lift of between 50 to seventy-four %.
• 17% of eleven to sixteen 12 months olds in Britain need to be a social media influencer once they grow up, whilst 14% need to emerge as a YouTuber.
• Interestingly, forty-five % of dad and mom say they don’t understand what a social media influencer consists of, and 58% say they’re unaware that you can make cash in that career.
• Similarly, 856,000 income has been tracked via influencer advertising and marketing, which turned into a 37% boom in the preceding year.
• On Monday 21st January – the so-known as a maximum miserable day of the year – the wide variety of searches (compared to a median Monday) rose by 26% in 2017 and 32% in 2018.
• 80% of entrepreneurs trust they may have ‘entire ownership’ of CX via 2020 Episerver’s today’s record – based on information from one hundred UK marketers – has revealed that 80% of marketers plan to take entire management of their businesses CX by 2020.
• While 62% of entrepreneurs are already running with IT to improve experiences, forty-five % of businesses have given the marketing group total possession over the purchaser revel in.
• Instead, 35% of brands have assigned a selected CX supervisor or client enjoy team.
• 23% of entrepreneurs consider that their brands are nonetheless now not turning inadequate consumer reviews on mobile sites, even as 27% accept as true with they’re no longer even handing over a fantastic enjoy through their mobiles apps.
• 5 Content Marketing Stats That Will Help You Reach Your Audience – Seo Search: 19% of Gen-Xers and 31% of baby boomers say they in no way percentage content material online.
• 5 Stats That’ll Change Your View Of Content Marketing Forever: According to a recent study conducted by Blackbaud, only 25% of nonprofits have a defined content marketing strategy, and only 26% of respondents would rate themselves as conducting an effective content marketing strategy.
• Email marketing ROI is around 4,300% Earlier this week we discussed the benefits of email marketing, and strategies for further increasing its effectiveness.
• According to a recent study conducted by the Direct Marketing Association, email marketing has a 4,300% ROI, which is comparable to direct traffic, CPC, and even organic search traffic.
• According to recent research conducted by Fiverr, video content is up to 4X more engaged, and 52% of consumers say watching product videos makes them confident in spending money online.
• 19% The bottom line is, if you’re looking to drive your social engagement stats, and have visual content worth sharing, bolstering your nonprofit’s YouTube presence might be the way to go.
• That being said, there are a few things you have to understand before jumping on the Pinterest bandwagon:50% of Pinterest page views happen 3.
• Pinterest does have the highest bounce rate of any social media network, sitting at 53%.
• 65% of Twitter users expect a response in under 2 hours If your nonprofit thinks it’s a great idea to engage every donor, volunteer, or constituents who tweets at your nonprofit on social media, consider this:65% of Twitter users expect some kind of response within 2 hours of tweeting @ someone.
• 40+ Content Marketing Statistics To Make You Marketing Guru: 82% of marketers are actively investing in content marketing, 10% are not utilising it, and 8% are unsure if their organisation uses it (HubSpot).
• A defined content marketing plan is used by 43% of B2B marketers, and 60% of the most effective B2B marketers use it (Content Marketing Institute).
• Content marketing produces demand/leads, according to 60% of marketers.
• Furthermore, 70% of marketers believe that content marketing aids in audience education, and 60% believe that it aids in the retention of existing clients/customers (CMI).
• 73% of people admit to skimming blog content, while only 27% read them completely (HubSpot).
• Targeting strategic keywords are the top SEO approach for 71% of businesses (HubSpot).
• Every day, 51% of companies who invest in content marketing publish content (The Manifest).
• A brief video is preferred by 69% of respondents when learning about a product or service.
• Content is viewed as a critical business strategy by 81% of marketers (CMI).
• Content marketing generates more than three times the number of leads as outbound marketing while costing 62% less (Demand Metric).
• In North America, 72% of the most effective businesses track the return on their content marketing efforts (eMarketer).
• Only 4% of B2B marketers say they have no plans to create a content marketing strategy (CMI).
• The audience’s informational demands are prioritised by 87% of B2B marketers over the organization’s sales/promotional communications (CMI).
• Only 28% of B2B marketers say they do not use paid content distribution channels (CMI).
• When developing content, 78% of B2B marketers do keyword research for SEO (CMI).
• Only 6% of B2C marketers say they have no plans to create a content marketing strategy (CMI).
• Facebook (59%) and Instagram (21%), according to B2C marketers who use at least two organic social media networks, offer the best overall content marketing results (CMI).
• Only 28% of B2C marketers do not make use of paid content distribution channels (CMI).
• When developing content, 73% of B2C marketers do keyword research for SEO (CMI).
• A search engine is the starting point for 68% of online experiences (Brightedge).
• Rather than using branded search, 71% of B2B researchers begin their inquiry with a generic search (Google).
• 53% of customers say they always conduct research before making a purchase to ensure they are making the best decision possible (Google).
• Despite the fact that 32% of respondents believe the volume of content accessible overwhelms them, the majority (44%) say they normally consume three to five pieces of content before engaging with a vendor (DemandGen).
• Infographic:17 Amazing Statistics on Social Media Marketing: Here are some highlights from this week’s infographic that could make you a believer:15% of all mobile Web time in the U.
• New Statistics Highlight the Power of Social Media Marketing | Social Media Today: 15% of total US mobile internet time is spent on social networking sites.
• Social lead conversion rates are 13% higher than the average lead conversion rate.
• 21% of marketers say that social media has become more important to their company over the past 6 months.
• 74% of all marketers say Facebook is important to their lead generation strategies.
• 52% of all marketers have found a customer through Facebook in 2013 so far.
• 85% of Facebook fans of brands recommend them to others, compared to 60% of average users.
• 59% of Twitter users have visited B2B tech brand sites, compared to only 40% of average internet users.
• 25% of consumers who complain about products on Facebook or Twitter expect a response within an hour.
• Women (48%) are more likely than men (43%) to regularly check out a brand’s social page.
• 23% of marketers are investing in blogging and social media this year-a 9% annual increase.
• Approximately 46% of online users rely on social media, when they make a buying decision.
• Digital Stats:The development & marketing budget for GTA5 is estimated at $265 million: Micromax has a 22% share of India’s smartphone market Microsoft bought Nokia’s mobile phone business for.
• 10 Content Marketing Statistics You Need to Know (and How to Use Them): Sixty-five percent of all content marketers find it difficult to produce content that engages with their audience, and 64% of all content marketers want to become better at the technique immediately.
• More than half of all millennials are willing to drop whatever they’re doing to watch a video created by their favorite YouTube channel, and experts estimate more than 80% of all web traffic will eventually be video.
• Video Marketing Stats for 2021 – Digital Brew: 32% of them said that they currently use video as a large part of their marketing strategy, and that number is only expected to grow as the world continues to favor all things digital.
• Over 80% of marketers expect their use of video marketing to increase over the next year, while only 19.
• Either way, 0% of marketers expect their video marketing efforts to decrease in 2021.
• Video marketing has proven to increase sales, as it can be an excellent way to showcase a product in action, which is probably why 73% of marketers say that video has helped increase their sales.
• Explaining your product or service becomes so much simpler when doing it through an animated explainer video, and 93% of marketers agree.
• Social media for B2B marketing:Statistics 2022 – Mezink Blog: Only 10%t of marketers found that they could effectively track their results on social media.
• New Research:9 B2B Content Marketing Statistics – 93x: 9 B2B Content Marketing Statistics Here are the 9 B2B content marketing statistics our FINITE member research uncovered:1) 35% of B2B marketers said producing enough content is their biggest challenge Content is the fuel in the engine of most B2B marketing, and keeping up is tough.
• Producing quality content is key, but also producing enough content is a challenge for 35% of B2B marketers we surveyed.
• 2) 26% of marketers find ‘Reaching the right Audience’ most challenging Producing good content is one thing – but getting in front of the right eyes is just as big a challenge for 26% of the B2B marketers in our survey.
• 3) 68% of B2B marketers are confident in their approach to content marketing It’s not all a challenge though – we found that 68% of the B2B marketers we surveyed were actually confident in their approach to content marketing overall.
• 4) 70% of marketers say SEO is important in their content marketing strategy Of course content plays its role across the length of the buyer journey – from video to webinars to whitepapers.
• But we can’t talk about content without also talking about SEO – 70% of the B2B marketers we surveyed said SEO is an important consideration within their content marketing strategy.
• 5) Only 8% of marketers said they are always able to attribute ROI to their content Attribution is difficult at the best of times in B2B marketing, but when it comes to content marketing this result makes that clear.
• Only 8% of our surveyed members are always able to attribute a form of ROI to their content.
• 6) 34% of marketers ‘sometimes’ use gated content To gate or not to gate?
• There’s no doubt a use case for gated content, but our research found 34% of marketers sometimes use gated content within their overall content marketing strategy.
• 7) 30% of marketers rarely or never get their colleagues outside of marketing to contribute content This is a big challenge for marketers in B2B tech companies.
• Our research showed 30% of marketers rarely or never get their colleagues outside of the marketing department to contribute to content marketing efforts.
• 8) 43% of B2B marketers only ‘sometimes’ have defined content marketing KPIs How do you measure the success of content marketing?
• But our survey of FINITE members found 43% of B2B marketers only sometimes actually have defined content KPIs in place.
• 9) 70% of marketers find keeping ‘quality and quantity’ high is challenging Balancing quality and quantity – the age old challenge that just keeps getting tricker for content marketers.
• Walking the line of churning stuff out but at the same time nailing quality is difficult, and a challenge 70% of the B2B tech marketers we surveyed said was a challenge.
• Facebook Statistic – Social Media Marketing: Page 5 500 million people log onto Facebook daily, which represents a 48% increase from 2010 to 2011.
• Page 18 42% of marketers report that Facebook is critical or important to their business.
• The exceptional virtual marketing stats we’ve seen this week – Seo Medo: According to a survey of 287,571 cellular users across the United Kingdom, US, France, Germany, Italy, and Spain, 52% of customers globally agree that intrusive or inappropriate advertising and marketing messages provide them a negative opinion app or internet site that hosts them.
• ’ Within that dominant element, 13% say advertising messages are certainly ‘beneficial’, however nonetheless, recall them to be disturbing.
• When asked approximately clients’ desired marketing technique, the survey found no dominant desire closer to e-mail or cellular advertisements, with both channels receiving precisely 41% of the whole vote.
• Just 18% said that they desired to receive advertising messages in this manner.
• In particular, in the United Kingdom, 10 million Instagram money owed had been exposed as fake, while 52% of debts had been observed to have sold fans, remarks, or used bots.
• 60% of respondents in a survey of 400 influencers admitted to participating in this sort of interest, and one in 5 stated they intend to continue doing so.
• 5 billion, seeing a g0% 12 months-on-yr growth and main iOS in downloads using 185%.
• Despite this, clients spent 80% greater on iOS in comparison to Android.
• However, Elsewhere, 88% of British respondents nation their business has regarded recyclable packaging, but the handiest 36% currently record they’ve correctly made the alternate.
• Additionally, 55% of British corporations cite assembly purchaser needs around environmentalism as a pinnacle task.
• 12 Most Intriguing Digital Marketing Stats of 2020 — Dynamic digital: This has been a big issue for online businesses, since only 8% of users return to finish shopping after they initially abandon their cart.
• 90% of searchers haven’t made their mind up about a brand before starting their search.
• (PowerTraffick)Consumers don’t necessarily hate all advertisements, as 83% of them wish that they could just filter those they don’t want to see instead of blocking them all.
• The average click-through rate on paid search ads using AdWords is about 2%.
• 100 B2B Content marketing Statistics in 2023: 70% of B2B marketers had plans to create more content in 2021 than in 2020.
• 94% of B2B marketers use LinkedIn as their number one social media platform for content distribution.
• 66% of B2B marketers report that their content marketing efforts are much more successful compared to a year ago.
• 74% of B2B buyers conduct more than half of their research online before making a purchase.
• 50% of B2B marketers outsource at least one content marketing activity.
• B2B marketers, on average, allocate 26% of their total marketing budget on content marketing.
• Content marketing costs 62% less than traditional marketing and it generates about 3 times as many leads.
• 72% of marketers say that content development and adjustment in the strategy is a contributing factor in the success of content marketing.
• 96% of B2B buyers want content with more input from industry thought leaders.
• 55% of B2B marketers say they are unclear on what content marketing success or effectiveness looks like.
• 83% of B2B companies use email newsletters as part of their content marketing program.
• 92% of B2B marketers view social media as the most popular content marketing tactic.
• 57% of B2B marketers say SEO has the biggest impact on lead generation.
• Content marketing strategy statistics B2B marketers who have blogs get 67% more leads than those who don’t.
• 89% of B2B marketers use content marketing, and blogging is one of the most effective forms.
• 20% of marketers say that targeting content for international audience is the top challenge in their organizations.
• Only 18% of content marketers say that sufficient budget is their top challenge.
• Businesses that blog get 55% more website visitors than businesses that don’t.
• 43% of B2B marketers say blogging is their most important type of content.
• 70% of people would rather learn about a company through articles rather than an advert.
• 69% of B2B marketers have a documented content strategy, and blogging plays a crucial role in that.
• 55% of marketers say blog content creation is their top B2B inbound marketing priority.
• 47% of buyers viewed 3-5 pieces of content before engaging with a sales rep.
• B2B marketers allocate 28% of their total marketing budget to content marketing.
• 90% of the most successful B2B content marketers prioritize the audience’s informational needs over their sales/promotional message.
• 52% of all online B2B buyers are millennials, indicating a shift in the type of content that needs to be produced.
• 70% of people would rather learn about a company through articles rather than an advert (Source)42.
• 94% of people share blog content because they think it might be helpful to others (Source)44.
• 60% of consumers feel more positive about a company after reading custom content on their blog (Source)46.
• 51% of the businesses that invest in content marketing publish content every day (Source)47.
• 73% of people admit to skimming blog posts, while 27% consume them thoroughly (Source)48.
• 11% prefer to read a text-based article, website, or post (7% decrease).
• 83% of marketers believe it’s more effective to create higher quality content less often (Source)50.
• 57% of B2B marketers stated that SEO generates more leads than any of their other marketing initiatives.
• 61% of marketers say improving SEO and growing their organic presence is their top inbound marketing priority.
• 70-80% of search engine users are only focusing on the organic results.
• 67% of all clicks go to the first five organic results in the search engine.
• 47% of consumers view 3-5 pieces of content created by a company before talking to a salesman from that company.
• Updating and republishing old blog posts with new content and images can increase organic traffic by as much as 106%.
• 72% of the most successful marketers in North America measure ROI of their content marketing strategy.
• 6% close rate, while outbound leads (such as direct mail or print advertising) have a 1.
• 87% of B2B marketers consider the audience’s informational needs as priority over promotional messages or organizational sales.
• 7% of pages rank in the top 10 search results within one year of publication.
• Marketers see SEO as becoming more effective, with 82% reporting effectiveness is on the rise.
• SEO is the largest driver of organic traffic (51%), with social media (5%) lagging far behind.
• 61% of B2B decision-makers start the decision-making process with an online search.
• 72% of consumers who did a local search visited a store within five miles.
• 18% of local smartphone searches led to a purchase within a day, compared to 7% of non-local searches (Source)72.
• 51% of all website traffic comes from organic search, 10% from paid search, 5% from social, and 34% from all other sources.
• SEO is the largest driver of traffic to content sites, beating social media by more than 300%.
• 40% of mobile website visitors will leave if the page takes more than 3 seconds to load (Source)80.
• 53% of all trackable website traffic comes from organic search (Source)81.
• 72% of respondents in a survey said that content creation is one of the most effective SEO tactics that they implement.
• 92% of content marketers consider content as their business asset (Source)87.
• 78% say higher quality and more efficient content creation result in content marketing success.
• 60% of B2B marketers measure success with web traffic, 51% use quality of sales leads, and 45% use social media sharing.
• 11% of marketers plan to incorporate podcast to their content marketing efforts (Source)90.
• The best organizations are 93% more likely to utilize data to personalize content and other communications.
• Organizations in the mature phase of content marketing spend around 40% of their total marketing budget on content marketing.
• Around 88% of organizations that are the most successful ones in B2b content marketing say that they value craft and creativity in content creation and generation.
• 60% of content marketers say that they have a content team at their organization.
• Buyers are most likely to share information in exchange for webinars, white papers (76%), case studies (57%) and eBooks (63%).
• However, according to 94% marketers, email is the most popular channel among to share content.
• Seo Marketing Line 5 Icon Pack Including tutorial. presentation. business. stat. mobile. Creative Icons Design 19660314 Vector Art at Vecteezy: Related Keywords View More Shutterstock logo Sponsored Vectors Click here to save 15% on all subscriptions and packs Free Download for Pro Subscribers!
• 45+ Pinterest Statistics to Boost Social Selling in 2022 – Digital Marketing Journals Hong Kong – Search Engine Optimisation News: New Features, Updates and Tests RoundupWritten by Sweta PanigrahiJanuary 25, 2022As per Pinterest stats, more than 75% of the users are from outside America.
• Females dominate the platform, making up more than 70% of the Pinterest users.
• Like other social media, 74% of all Pinterest users use the app aiding in 85% of Pinterest usage via mobiles.
• Pinterest users, in general, spend 29% more while shopping than non-users.
• 63% of millennials use the platform to search for products and services.
• Pinterest stats show that video views have increased by 200%, wrestling in heavy engagement.
• 55% of Pinterest users use the platform with the intent to shop and buy, generating direct sales for most marketers.
• 78% of Pinterest users say it’s useful to see brand content on the platform.
• 52% use their platform to develop their knowledge of great food and drinks.
• Pinterest trends increased to 56%, while the rest of the platforms rose to 38%.
• a free online school dedicated to local SEOWritten by Sweta PanigrahiJanuary 25, 2022If you are a lesser-known brand, Pinterest can help you kickstart as 97% of the Pinterest searches are unbranded.
• You can even consider promoting them as 61% of Pinterest users have made a purchase because of sponsored pins.
• 87% of people on Pinterest have bought a product because of Pinterest, while 93% use Pinterest to plan a future purchase.
• Pins that show a product or service in action are 67% more likely to drive sales.
• 85% of pinners put visuals first when shopping for apparel and furniture.
• The best part is 78% of Pinterest users have agreed that branding content, including ads, are very much relevant to their interest, and they would continue to look for them even in the future.
• 15 Surprising Stats About Applied Marketing Concepts Local Business SEO search engine optimization | Fotosdefrases: Also, about fifty % of space prospects say they believe to ascertain four-star views getting a bare minimum just ahead of they’ll devote their dollars in conjunction with you and eighty 5% now rely on online evaluations all around a personal suggestion.
• Content material Advertising and marketing Stats to Know 90% of entrepreneurs utilizing content material advertising and marketing plan to proceed investing the identical quantity within the channel in 2022.
• 66% of entrepreneurs count on their 2022 content material advertising and marketing funds to extend greater than their 2021 funds.
• Over 60% of entrepreneurs measure the success of their content material advertising and marketing technique by way of gross sales.
• As such, 89% of entrepreneurs plan to proceed investing the identical quantity within the channel or improve their investments in 2022.
• His want got here true — 69% of entrepreneurs reported investing in search engine optimization in 2021, a 5% improve from 2020.
• Nevertheless, content material entrepreneurs are transferring away from search engine optimization optimization usually, as 83% of entrepreneurs say that their principal space of focus is using strategic key phrases of their content material.
• Entrepreneurs additionally report that their search engine optimization content material advertising and marketing efforts will contain optimizing for cell (64%), and backlinking and hyperlink constructing (64%).
• Because of this, 51% of content material entrepreneurs who already leverage podcasts or different audio content material will make investments extra in 2022, and 43% plan to proceed investing the identical quantity.
• 53% of content material entrepreneurs who do leverage podcasts and different audio content material say it’s the best format they use, regardless of low ROI.
• 60% of podcast listeners looked for a product after listening to about it in a podcast.
• It’s additionally price noting that 44% of content material entrepreneurs are branching out into a brand new type of audio of their content material advertising and marketing methods in 2022 — audio chat rooms.
• Entrepreneurs are recognizing how a lot prospects care, and 82% are investing the identical or rising their funding in social accountability in 2022.
• 30% of Content material Advertising and marketing Institute survey respondents say that their funding in hybrid occasions is predicted to extend, and 40% of entrepreneurs plan to extend their funding in digital occasions, webinars, and conferences usually in 2022.
• Entrepreneurs sometimes use them to rapidly talk vital, stand-out data, and 45% of entrepreneurs who leverage content material advertising and marketing use it.
• The State of Content Marketing in 2021 [Stats & Trends to Watch] – Digital Marketing Agency: 6+M Revenue generated for our clients 100% Outstanding Customer Service 2011 In Business since 750+ Project completed $18.
• 6+M Revenue generated for our clients 100% Outstanding Customer Service Trusted by hundreds companies Popular Products Google My Business Management GMB Management Serv.
• £0 / month 233% Increase In Revenue, 1100% Increase in Organic Traffic and 76% Decrease In cost per click.
• – Time4Diamonds 12X Better Website & 138% Increase In Conversation Rate – 1BoxOffice 264% Increase In Organic Traffic and 31% Decrease In Cost Per Registration.
• – ADC College 21% Increase In Revenue, 370% Increase in Organic Traffic and 75% Less Time on Client Management With The CRM.
• – Watch Repair Piccadilly 129% Increase in leads and 84% Increase in Organic Traffic.
• We’ve seen significant increase in table bookings and our monthly telephone orders grow over 300% so far.
• Giovanni Caloia – Managing Director, ADC College 5 3 months after we started working with BR our revenue grew by 21% and our call inquiries grew by 95.
• Very few agencies actually deliver, Business Relauncher is one of those that deliver and are 100% the real deal.
• DIGITAL MARKETING PROBLEMS, SOLUTIONS, AND SOME STATISTICS: The average bounce rate is 40-60%, meaning that around half of your web visitors probably leave your site straight after entering.
• Since 50% of consumers visit a physical shop within a day of a local search, it’s essential that you stay on top of local search results.
• AdWhite reports that 90% of consumers read online reviews before visiting a business.
• The 2020 Omnichannel Statistics Report reveals that marketers using at least three channels for campaigns enjoyed 287% more sales than those only targeting a single channel.
• DemandMetric points out that content marketing is 62% less expensive than traditional marketing while generating three times as many leads.
• WordStream reveals that 51% of marketing professionals consider video as the type of content with the best ROI.
• According to SocialPilot, LinkedIn posts with images received 200% more engagement than posts only containing text.
• 6%, while leads acquired via outbound methods such as direct mail or print ads only have a 1.
• Digital Marketing:Statistics and Trends for 2021: ” — David Beebe, Founder & CEO, Storified Hospitality Group 56% of businesses reported that they plan to increase content creation spending (Content Marketing Institute) 90% of all marketers use content marketing to generate inbound leads.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 72% of marketers say content marketing increases leads and engagement.
• 92% of marketers and businesses report content as a valuable business asset.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 27% of businesses say that the biggest challenge faced by them when creating their own content is the lack of data.
• (HubSpot) 98% of senior marketers believe having a content strategy is important for their success, but only 55% have a documented strategy.
• (BuzzSumo) 72% of marketers target content based on audience personas or customer profiles.
• (Contently) 57% of marketers claim custom video is still the hardest type of content to produce.
• (Contently) 83% of marketers prefer article and video content formats the most, despite the hype for flashier content formats like podcasts and infographics.
• (Contently) 50% of brands believe that paid content distribution is critical to their success.
• (Contently) 63% of Companies are outperforming competitors with help from marketing automation.
• ” — Krystal Wu, Social Media Community Manager, HubSpot In 2021, around 82% of the New Zealand population were active social media users.
• Around 97% of the population in New Zealand were active mobile social media users in 2021.
• Social media in New Zealand is dominated by YouTube and Facebook, with 87% and 83% of the population claiming to use each platform respectively.
• WhatsApp users were around half of this figure, with 40% saying they used the messaging service.
• (Statista) In Q3 2020, Twitter reported an average of 187 million monetizable daily active users (mDAUs), up 29% globally year on year.
• 96% of B2B marketers use LinkedIn for organic content distribution and 83% for paid social, making it the top most-used platform in both content distribution types.
• (Statista, 2020) Marketers who use segmented campaigns note as much as a 760% increase in revenue.
• (Campaign Monitor, 2019) 31% of B2B marketers say email newsletters are the best way to nurture leads.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2020) 81% of B2B marketers say their most used form of content marketing is email newsletters.
• (Content Marketing Institute, 2020) Mobile opens accounted for 46% of all email opens.
• (Litmus, 2018) Apple iPhone is the most popular mobile client for reading emails with 29% of all opens occurring on this platform.
• Gmail is a close runner-up at 27% (Campaign Monitor, 2018) 35% of marketers send their customers 3-5 emails per week.
• 96% of global traffic comes from Google search, Google Images, and Google Maps.
• (Sparktoro) The top-ranking page gets the most search traffic only 49% of the time.
• (Moz) Search is the #1 driver of traffic to content sites, beating social media by more than 300% The #1 result in Google’s organic search results has an average CTR of 31.
• (Backlinko) Mobile By 2022, mobile advertising will account for over 50% of ad spending and overtake desktop advertising.
• (Statista) 75% of smartphone users expect to get immediate information while using their smartphone.
• 30+ Digital Marketing Stats Show The Reach of Smart Promotion: Jaw-Dropping Digital Marketing Statistics (Editor’s Choice):Content marketing is 62% cheaper than traditional marketing avenues.
• An astonishing 49% of organizations do not have a clear digital marketing strategy.
• 1% of the time, apps and websites suggest Facebook as a login opportunity.
• Twitter comes fourth with 15%, then LinkedIn with 12%, and lastly – Pinterest with 6.
• (Source:BigCommerce) With annual growth of over 10%, affiliate marketing is a low-risk, performance-based form of marketing that has the potential to reach everywhere.
• 4% in the next years (Source:Design Roast) With the influx of various social media platforms, many (including me, not gonna lie) thought email marketing would just… disappear.
• For several years now, mobile devices have generated more than 50% of the global internet traffic.
• (Source:BusinessofApps) According to digital marketing stats, that’s a 25% increase from last year.
• 46% of the performed Google searches are about seeking local information.
• Search outperforms by as much as 300% social media as a traffic source.
• According to 85% of retailers, search engine marketing (SEM) is the most effective customer acquisition tactic.
• SEM is rated as 15% more effective than direct mail and 8% more effective than traditional advertising.
• Hopefully, our digital marketing stats have cleared the fog for you, and you’re now in the other 51%.
• ▷ Rkalert :Rkalert.Com – Internet Marketing SEO SMO Tech News – traffic statistics – HypeStat: 0E-6% HypeRank:4,976,699 SEMrush Rank:34,373,596 *All traffic values are estimates only.
• 41% Social:0% Paid:0% Last update was 1291 days ago UPDATE NOW This can take up to 60 seconds.
• 101 Mind Blowing Digital Marketing Statistics in 2023: [Source:Statista] 92% of consumers use social media to research products and services.
• [Source:HubSpot] 80% of marketers have gained information by using video as a marketing instrument.
• [Source:HubSpot] 85% of marketers praise videotape as a useful way to gain attention.
• [Source:HubSpot] 74% of marketers stated that they used visuals in their content more than 70% of the moment.
• [Source:Venngage] Digital marketing channels account for 72% of the total marketing allocation.
• [Source:Demand Sage] Utilizing videos on landing pages can grow conversions by 85%.
• [Source:Unbounce] 45% of companies lack a well-designed digital marketing process.
• [Source:Smart Insights] 70% of businesses don’t track the ROI of their digital marketing efforts.
• [Source:HubSpot] 54% of consumers have unsubscribed from a company email they previously opted-in to.
• [Source:HubSpot] 91% of email users unsubscribed from a business email they previously opted for.
• [Source:Direct Marketing Association] Welcome emails have a moderate open rate of 81%.
• [Source:HubSpot] 74% of marketers say targeted personalization improves client engagement.
• [Source:Econsultancy] 68% of consumers are likely to purchase from a company that offers personalized affairs.
• [Source:Salesforce] 70% of consumers are willing to share their data with brands in exchange for personalized experiences.
• [Source:Salesforce] 80% of consumers say they are more likely to do business with a company that they follow on social media.
• [Source:Social Media Examiner] 71% of consumers trust recommendations from friends and family more than any other form of advertising.
• [Source:Nielsen] 90% of people who follow a brand on social media are more likely to buy from that brand.
• [Source:Social Media Examiner] 70% of B2B buyers use social media to research products and services.
• [Source:LinkedIn] 62% of marketers say that organic search has the best ROI.
• [Source:Demand Sage] 70% of people click on organic search results that appear on the first page.
• [Source:Search Engine Journal] 50% of consumers say they are more likely to buy from a brand that they trust.
• [Source:Nielsen] 67% of consumers say they are more likely to do business with a company that has a strong online presence.
• [Source:HubSpot] 72% of consumers say they are more likely to recommend a product or service to a friend if they have had a positive experience with the company’s website.
• [Source:HubSpot] 91% of businesses say that their website is important to their overall marketing strategy.
• [Source:HubSpot] 80% of consumers say they are more likely to buy from a company that has a mobile-friendly website.
• [Source:Statista] 65% of consumers say they have abandoned a website because it was not mobile-friendly.
• [Source:Statista] 70% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in website traffic from social media.
• [Source:HubSpot] 80% of businesses say that they use social media to generate leads.
• [Source:HubSpot] 92% of businesses say that they use social media to build relationships with customers.
• [Source:HubSpot] 71% of consumers say that they are more likely to do business with a company that they follow on social media.
• [Source:Social Media Examiner] 70% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in sales from social media.
• [Source:HubSpot] 63% of businesses say that they use paid social media advertising.
• [Source:WordStream] Read more:Top 10 Certifications and Highest-Paying Jobs in Digital Marketing 2023 72% of businesses say that they use paid search advertising.
• [Source:WordStream] 70% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in leads from paid search advertising.
• [Source:HubSpot] 60% of businesses say that they use display advertising.
• [Source:WordStream] 70% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in website traffic from display advertising.
• [Source:HubSpot] 57% of businesses say that they use retargeting advertising.
• [Source:WordStream] 70% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in conversions from retargeting advertising.
• [Source:HubSpot] 43% of businesses say that they use influencer marketing.
• [Source:Later] 70% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in brand awareness from influencer marketing.
• [Source:HubSpot] 60% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in website traffic from influencer marketing.
• [Source:HubSpot] 50% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in sales from influencer marketing.
• [Source:HubSpot] 45% of businesses say that they use content marketing.
• [Source:Content Marketing Institute] 70% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in leads from content marketing.
• [Source:HubSpot] 60% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in website traffic from content marketing.
• [Source:HubSpot] 50% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in sales from content marketing.
• [Source:HubSpot] 40% of businesses say that they use social media marketing automation.
• [Source:HubSpot] 70% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in leads from social media marketing automation.
• [Source:HubSpot] 60% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in website traffic from social media marketing automation.
• [Source:HubSpot] 50% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in sales from social media marketing automation.
• [Source:HubSpot] 53% of businesses say that they use email marketing automation.
• [Source:Direct Marketing Association] 70% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in opens and clicks from email marketing automation.
• [Source:HubSpot] 60% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in conversions from email marketing automation.
• [Source:HubSpot] 50% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in sales from email marketing automation.
• [Source:HubSpot] 40% of businesses say that they use paid advertising on social media.
• [Source:WordStream] 70% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in leads from paid advertising on social media.
• [Source:HubSpot] 60% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in website traffic from paid advertising on social media.
• [Source:HubSpot] 50% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in sales from paid advertising on social media.
• [Source:HubSpot] 35% of businesses say that they use programmatic advertising.
• [Source:WordStream] 70% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in leads from programmatic advertising.
• [Source:HubSpot] 60% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in website traffic from programmatic advertising.
• [Source:HubSpot] 50% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in sales from programmatic advertising.
• [Source:HubSpot] 30% of businesses say that they use affiliate marketing.
• [Source:ShareASale] 70% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in leads from affiliate marketing.
• [Source:HubSpot] 60% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in website traffic from affiliate marketing.
• [Source:HubSpot] 50% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in sales from affiliate marketing.
• [Source:HubSpot] 25% of businesses say that they use native advertising.
• [Source:ShareASale] 70% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in brand awareness from native advertising.
• [Source:HubSpot] 60% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in website traffic from native advertising.
• [Source:HubSpot] 50% of businesses say that they have seen an increase in sales from native advertising.
• 15 tweetable social media statistics to influence your marketing strategy: 72% of people who Tweet at your establishment want to tell you you’re doing a great job.
• Not only are sport enthusiasts 61% more likely to get all the latest sport news from Twitter, with 78% checking Twitter at least once a day, but they’re also open to a good targeted ad relevant to their interests, with 48% purchasing products because they saw it on Twitter.
• Brilliantly Simple:50 content marketing statistics to blow your mind: @axonnmedia 71% of people access social media via their mobile devices (Source:Adobe) http://adobe.
• ly/1c25m4B Recruiters reported a 49% increase in the quality of candidates when using social media to recruit 19.
• Keeping your posts below 250 characters can get you 60% more engagement.
• ly/1jUQw68 Customers referred by other customers have a higher retention rate 37% 33.
• ly/1l86Qzb 24% of UK smartphone users access news mainly through this device – up from 15% the previous year 39.
• 10 Social Media Statistics For Your Business — Marketing By Cody: adults use Facebook and 76% have visited the platform in the last month.
• 67% of Gen Z and 57% of Millennials use [Instagram], in comparison to only 38% of Gen X.
• 98% of marketers say Instagram is the most influential platform for influencer marketing, which is 44% higher than Facebook.
• 5 Social Media Stats that Prove the Benefits of Social Media Marketing: Max Kalehoff, SVP of marketing at SocialCode, says the threshold rate of engagement is around 2% to 5%, though it varies by industry.
• A continuing engagement rate of 1% to 4% is enough to justify further spending, he says.
• Younger users tend to have significantly larger networks than older users:27% of 18-29 year old Facebook users have more than 500 friends in their network, while 72% of users age 65+ have 100 friends or fewer.
• People are Actively Liking Content Posted by Their Friends 44% of Facebook users “like” content posted by their friends at least once a day, with 29% doing so several times per day.
• Adults are active on social media too 54% of adult internet users post original photos or videos online that they themselves have created in 2013.
• We call them creators and their number has grown from 46% of internet users in 2012.
• 47% of adult internet users take photos or videos that they have found online and repost them on sites designed for sharing images with many people.
• We call them curators and their number has grown from 41% of internet users last year.
• More people are clicking on Facebook Ads Facebook ad Click-Through-Rate is up 160% year-over-year and 20% quarter-over-quarter.
• Facebook ad clicks are up 70% year-over-year and 48% quarter-over-quarter.
• Statistics to Guide Your Marketing Strategy Using Social Media: 93% of marketers use social media for business The costs associated with a strong social media plan are considerably less than a traditional marketing campaign, as well as reaching a wide range of the market.
• 25% of consumers using social media expect complaint responses within 1 hour 88% of consumers are less likely to buy from companies that ignore complaints and questions that they post on social media platforms.
• 52% of shared content comes from Face book Remember each post is an opportunity.
• Even though 62% of company’s blog or plan to blog in 2013, only 9% of U.
• Six Content Marketing Statistics you (and your CEO) Need to Know – TopLine Comms: Some 87% of B2B buyers give more credence to industry influencer content – as well as peer reviews, third-party publications, and user-generated feedback.
• Additionally, 68% of buyers said they frequently give credence to peer reviews and user-generated feedback, and 60% give credence to content authored by a third-party publication or analyst.
• Case studies are the top content type for buyers, with 78% accessing this format when researching purchases in the last 12 months.
• Overall, 47% of B2B buyers consume three to five pieces of content before engaging with a salesperson.
• Some 76% of buyers will register and share information in exchange for white papers, 63% will offer it in exchange for eBooks, 79% will provide it in exchange for webinars, 57% will do the same for case studies, and 66% prize third-party/analyst reports.
• Gregory – Bruxelles,Bruxelles-Capitale :Diplomé de Imperial College à Londres donne cours en :Finance, Math, Economie, Comptabilité, Stats, Marketing Digital: voir plus Avis Toutes nos évaluations sont collectées par nos services et sont fiables à 100%.
• And it continues to expand:82% of marketers plan to increase their budgets for content marketing in 2014.
• The content marketing stats every business needs to know | Clear Editorial: 63% of B2B marketers are extremely or very committed to their content marketing and 70% of businesses are aiming to create more content this year than they did last year.
• Of these, 73% say that their content marketing strategy includes plans to operate content marketing as an ongoing business process rather than as a campaign.
• 70% of those with a content marketing strategy say it’s either more effective or much more effective than it was one year ago.
• A quarter of B2C businesses are extremely or very successful with their overall approach to content marketing, and 63% would describe themselves as more or much more successful with their content marketing than they were a year ago, with 70% describing it as more or much more effective.
• 40% of B2C marketers have a documented content marketing strategy, and 76% plan on making content marketing a staple part of their business plan rather than just a campaign.
• 69% of B2C marketers always or frequently focus on creating content for their audience rather than their brand.
• 71% always or frequently consider how their content effects the overall experience a person has with their organisation.
• ▷ Coronationim :Vancouver SEO Company | Coronation Internet Marketing Ltd. – traffic statistics – HypeStat: 7E-5% HypeRank:2,287,276 SEMrush Rank:1,916,277 *All traffic values are estimates only.
• The State of Social Media Marketing Key Trends, Strategies, and Statistics to Power Your Marketing: Articles published on Datafloq need to have a minimum AI score of 60% and we provide this graph to give more detailed information on how we rate this article.
• As of 2016, 78% of the United States population had a social networking profile.
• Companies Are Increasing Their Social Media Budgets According to the Advertiser Perceptions’ first Social Media Advertising Report, recently published by Media Post, 24% of major advertisers digital ad budgets now go toward social media.
• 47% of advertisers intend on increasing that figure over the next six months.
• While 38% are using social media in an attempt to generate sales with many marketers instead using it to boost brand recognition.
• 3% of respondents reported that they would be increasing their social marketing spend, putting social media as one of the top three channels in which marketers are increasing their focus.
• Google+ declined from 56% in 2015 to 49% this year, and Pinterest dropped from 45% to 40%.
• In a recent report by FORTUNE, 28% of teens stated Snapchat as their most important social network, barely overtaking Instagram at 27%.
• In another survey by Edison Research and Triton Digital, more 12-24-year-olds reported using Snapchat (72%) than Facebook (68%) or Instagram (67%).
• In research by Clutch, 23% of respondents stated video was their top-performing social content type, followed closely by images at 22%.
• Additionally, of those social media teams who plan to hire new roles over the next year, 70% plan to hire in content marketing or content development roles.
• Known as User or Consumer Generated Content (CGC), comScore found that brand engagement rose by 28% when consumers are exposed to both professional content and user-generated product videos.
• In another study by Expertcity, consumers ranked influencers among the top sources of information for when making purchase decisions, with friends and family leading at 81% and online reviews at 76%.
• The study indicated that 50% of retailers and 91% of brands plan to increase their usage of CGC over the next 12 months.
• The Biggest Challenge for Social Marketers is Measuring ROI In the 2016 State of Social Marketing report from Simply Measured, 61% of marketers stated that the biggest challenge was measuring ROI.
• To measure success, most of those surveyed (56%) use engagement metrics such as conversions, likes, shares, and so forth.
• 89% of marketers indicated that their social media efforts have generated more exposure for their businesses and 75% reported increased website traffic.
• 20 Content Marketing Statistics You Need to Know: Today, content marketers employ a mix of tactics to get their message across and keep their brand in front of target audiences, including:Podcasts Webinars Blogs Infographics Videos Whitepapers Case studies Around 55% of people purchased an item advertised on a podcast.
• 71% of company respondents stated they outsourced their content marketing in 2020, compared to 61% in 2021.
• (Content Marketing Institute) Among the top social media B2B professionals prefer are LinkedIn (86%), Facebook (79%), Twitter (60%), and this year Instagram (60%) and YouTube (56%).
• (Hubspot) 73% of marketing agencies say they’re successful at meeting their clients’ content goals.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 55% of B2B organizations successful at content marketing measure the ROI of their efforts (Content Marketing Institute) In content creation, only 88% of B2B successful marketers prioritize audience needs over sales messages.
• (Content Marketing Institute) 80% of corporate decision-makers prefer to receive company information from articles rather than advertisements, and 60% think that company content helps them make better product decisions.
• It was found that larger companies are 66% more likely to outsource than small businesses.
• More than 85% of global desktop search traffic was attributed to Google—that means more eyes on your content.
• Digital Marketing Stats of The Week | Based on Econsultancy Reports: Digital Marketing Stats Image Source:econsultency 80% of UK companies fear they could be dislodged within 5 years:A study by Squiz has highlighted the stresses of online organizations proprietors in the UK.
• It found that 49% of UK organizations fear well-settled competitor is prone to disturb them.
• Correspondingly, 36% referred to worried over a start-up besting them on new innovation.
• 95% of PR disasters begin on Twitter:As per another study by Visibrain, 95% of PR disaster start on Twitter.
• Through the span of the most recent year, 19% of PR disasters happened on Twitter, making it more persuasive than any other social platform like Facebook or YouTube.
• 100+ Digital Marketing Statistics to Help You Compete in 2023 step by step guide: 6 billion searches every day, with over 90% of all online experiences beginning with a search engine.
• 68% of all online experiences begin with a search engine, and the first five organic results on Google account for 67.
• 53% of website traffic comes from organic search, and 49% of businesses invest in SEO.
• 61% of marketers say improving SEO and growing their organic presence is their top inbound marketing priority.
• 45% of small businesses use PPC advertising to promote their products and services.
• 65% of B2B companies have acquired a customer through LinkedIn ads, and LinkedIn has an average CPC of $5.
• 57% of consumers say they’ve clicked on a Google ad in the past six months.
• Here are some content marketing statistics to keep in mind:70% of marketers say that creating relevant content is the most effective SEO tactic.
• 91% of B2B marketers use content marketing to reach customers, and 86% of B2C marketers consider it a key strategy.
• 74% of people say they use Facebook for professional purposes, and 62% of people say they use LinkedIn.
• 54% of people use social media to research products, and 71% of consumers who have had a positive experience with a brand on social media are likely to recommend it to their friends and family.